Syllabus - 3rd Semester - 31-01-2022

West Bengal State Council of Technical &
Vocational Education and Skill

Development
(Technical Education Division)
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Agricultural Engineering [AGR]
Part-II (3rd Semester)
Revised 2022
NEW PROPOSED CURRICULUM STRUCTURE FOR THE SEMESTER 3 of DIPLOMA IN ARRIGULTURAL ENGINNERING
Examination Pattern Full Marks for

Contact Internal assessment for External sessional Sessional Marks
period per the theoretical subject (for the theoretical
week subject)
Subject
THEORITICAL SUBJECT
Total Internal Marks
Mid semester exam
Marks allotment of
Question code
Subject Code
Packet code
QA/AA/SA
Full Marks
semester
Sessional
Lecture
Credits
TOTAL
Sl No
Subj
Obj
CA
EA
IA
THEORITICAL
1 Basic soil Science 3 -- 20 10 10 40 30 30 60 100 -- -- -- 100 3
2 Surveying & Leveling 3 -- 20 10 10 40 30 30 60 100 -- -- -- 100 3
3 Agricultural Process 3 -- 20 10 10 40 30 30 60 100 -- -- -- 100 3
Engineering
4 Thermodynamics & 3 -- 20 10 10 40 30 30 60 100 -- -- -- 100 3
Heat
Transfer Process
5 Environmental 3 -- 20 10 10 40 30 30 60 100 -- -- -- 100 3
Engineering
6 Hydraulics 3 -- 20 10 10 40 30 30 60 100 -- -- -- 100 3
SESSIONAL
7 Basic Soil Science Lab. 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 60 40 100 100 2
8 Field survey practice 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 60 40 100 100 2
9 Agricultural Process 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 60 40 100 100 2
Engineering Lab.
10 Practical of 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 60 40 100 100 2
Horticultural
Crops Lab.
TOTAL 18 12 120 60 60 240 180 180 360 600 240 160 400 1000 26
Student contact hour per week is 30 hour.
Theory and Practical classes will be of 1(one) hour duration.
List of abbreviation used: CT – class test; TA - Teacher's Assessment (Attendance & surprise quizzes = 10 marks; Assignment & group discussion = 10
marks.)Obj: objective Subj - Subjective Minimum passing marks for Theoretical and Sessional subjects will be 40%
All other rules and regulations for assessment of practical and term work will be carried out as per prevailing norms
NO QUESTION SHOULD START WITH “WHY” OR ASKS FOR “ GIVING OR CITING REASONS”
TW – Term work ( to be evaluated by a board of departmental teachers) PR- Practical (to be evaluated by external teachers)
1 BASIC SOIL SCIENCE
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: BASIC SOIL SCIENCE

Curse Code: Agr. E Course Duration: 6 semester Subject offered in semester: Third
Subject Code: Question Code: Marks: 100
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

Theory : 3 lecture per week CT- 20
Tutorial: Nil Attendance and Assignment -20
Practical: Nil End Semester Exam -60
Credit:- 3 Total Marks - 100
Aim:-
To develop basic knowledge and skills for measurement of basic soil properties their classification, soils structure, soil mass and
fundamental concepts and principles of soil behaviours.
Objective :-
The basic knowledge regarding properties of Soil with a view to grow the crops is an essential requirement of the Agricultural
Engineering profession. It also helps in designing the agricultural machineries used for land preparation. This course facilitate the
true knowledge for measurement of the various soil parameters, like soil pH, soil micro-organism, minerals, soil texture, structure
pore-spaces soil moisture and other physical and chemical properties
SL. NO. TOPIC Contact Maximum

period Marks
Unit 1 INTRODUCTION 6 5
Unit 2 SOIL FORMATION 12 11
Unit 3 SOIL PROFILE 4 12
Unit 4 PROPERTIES 10 10
Unit 5 SOIL WATER 3 8
Unit 6 SOIL AIR 3 9
Unit 7 SOIL TEMPERATURE 3 8
Unit 8 SOIL ORGANISM 4 7
TOTAL 48 70
Content: Theory (Basic Soil Science) 3 hrs/wk
1.0 INTRODUCTION: 04
1.1 History Of Agricultural Chemistry And Scope
1.2 Development And Discipline Of Soil Science
1.3 Composition Of Earth's Crust
1.4 Concept Of Lithosphere Troposphere, Stratosphere And Ionosphere
2.0 SOIL FORMATION: 12
2.1 Soil Forming Rocks And Minerals- Origin, Classification
AndComposition
2.2 Weathering Of Rocks And Minerals
2.3 Weathering Processes Geochemical And Pedochemical
2.4 Parent Material-Classification
2.5 Soil Forming Process
2.6 Factors Of Soil Formation
3.0 SOIL PROFILE: 04
3.1 Soil As A Natural Body And Medium For Plant Growth
4.0 PROPERTIES: 10
4.1 Physical - Soil Texture, Structure, Densities, Pore Spaces
4.2 Chemical Properties - Ph
5.0 SOIL WATER: 03
5.1 Composition And Classification
5.2 Soil Moisture Constants And Function
6.0 SOIL AIR: 02
6.1 Soil Air Composition And Function
7.0 SOIL TEMPERATURE: 03
7.1 Source And Function
8.0 SOIL ORGANISM: 04
8.1 Macro-Organism And Their Role In Soil Fertility.
Class Test & Revision 03
Text Books:
Sl NO Name of Book Writer’s Name Publisher’s Name

1 Measurement of E Saibaba Reddy & K. Rama Sastri New age International
engineering properties of soil publication
2 Introduction to Soil Science D. K. Das -------
2 SURVEYING AND LEVELLING
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: SURVEYING AND LEVELLING


Aim:-
The course content of Surveying has been designed to provide adequate information to develop competency in a learner to enable to
prepare maps by conducting chain & compass surveying and prepare land profile by leveling.
.
Objective :-
Surveying is an essential component of the day to day work of an Agricultural Engineering Technician. The job includes conducting
detailed surveying, plotting of survey data, preparation of survey maps etc. The course content of Surveying includes the basic
concept horizontal linear and angular measurements and conducting surveys involving horizontal linear and angular measurements
with stress on familiarization with various equipment used. It also includes vertical linear measurements to indicate the profile of
the land surface by leveling has also been covered in details.

period Marks
Unit 2 LINEAR MEASUREMENT 4 5
Unit 3 CHAINING 6 7
Unit 4 CHAIN SURVEYING 6 10
Unit 5 ANGULAR MEASUREMENT 6 10
Unit 6 CHAIN AND COMPASS SURVEYING 7 10
Unit 7 LEVELING 7 10
Unit 8 PLANE TABLE SURVEYING 6 10
Unit 9 C0MPUTATION OF AREA AND VOLUME 5 7
TOTAL 48 70
Content: Theory (Surveying And Levelling) 3 hrs/wk
1. INTRODUCTION:
1.1. Definition, Aims And Objectives Of Surveying
1.2. Classification Of Surveying
1.3. Principles Of Surveying
1.4. Precision And Accuracy Of Measurements
2.0 LINEAR MEASUREMENT:
2.1 Methods Of Measuring Distance, Their Merits And Demerits, Suitability
2.1 Instruments For Measuring Distance: Tape, Chain And Accessories, Their Merits And
Demerits, Suitability.
3.0 CHAINING:
3.1 Equipment And Accessories For Chaining-Description (Demonstration In Class/Lab), Use
And Purpose
3.2 Method Of Chaining, Ranging, Chaining On Slope
3.3 Field Problems - Setting Perpendicular With Chain & Tape, Chaining Across Different Types
Of Obstacles: Numerical Problems.
3.4 Errors And Mistakes In Linear Measurement - Classification, Sources Of Errors And
Remedies.
3.5 Correction To Measured Lengths Due To-Incorrect Length, Temperature Variation, Pull, Sag,
Numerical Problem Applying Corrections
3.6 Precautions During Chaining, Maintenance Of Equipment.
4.0 CHAIN SURVEYING:
4.1 Purpose Of Chain Surveying, Principles Of Chain Surveying-Well Conditioned And Ill
Conditioned Triangles. Accessories In Chain Surveying- Features And Use (Detailed Description
To Be Covered InPractical)
4.2 Field Books- Single Line & Double Line Entry, Field Book Recording (Detailed Description To
Be Covered In Practical)
4.3 Reconnaissance Survey - Method, Index Map, Reference Sketch
4.4 Selection Of Survey Stations, Base Line, Tie Lines, Check Lines
4.5 Offsets- Necessity, Perpendicular And Oblique Offsets, Setting Offset With Chain & Tape,
Instruments For Setting Offset - Cross Staff, Optical Square, Features, Use & Handling
(Demonstration In Field), Merits & Demerits, Suitability, Sources Of Error & Remedies, Limiting
Length Of Offsets.
4.6 Method Of Chain Surveying, Locating Objects, Recording Entry In Field Book.
4.7 Plotting - Selection Of Scale, Conventional Signs, Plotting On Drawing Sheet From Field
Book Data.
4.8 Errors In Chain Surveying - Causes & Remedies, Precautions During Chain Surveying.
5.0 ANGULAR MEASUREMENT:
5.1 Measurement Of Angles With Chain & Tape, With Compass
5.2 Compass – Types - Surveyors' Compass, Prismatic Compass, Features, Parts, (Detailed
Description To Be Covered In Practical), Merits & Demerits, Suitability Of Different Types,Testing
& Adjustment Of Compass
5.3 Designation Of Angles - Concept Of Meridians- Magnetic, True, Arbitrary Concept Of
Bearings-Whole Circle Bearing, Quadrantal Bearing, Reduced Bearing, Suitability Of
Application, Numerical Problems On Conversion Of Bearings.
5.4 Effect Of Earth's Magnetism - Dip Of Needle, Magnetic Declination, Variation In Declination,
Numerical Problems On Application Of Correction For Declination.
5.5 Errors In Angle Measurement With Compass - Sources & Remedies, Precaution During Use
Of Compass, Maintenance Of Compass.
6.0 CHAIN AND COMPASS SURVEYING:
6.1 Principles Of Traversing- Open & Closed Traverse, Advantages & Disadvantages Over Chain
Surveying.
6.2 Methods Of Traversing - Locating Objects, Field Book Entry.
6.3 Local Attraction - Causes, Detection, Errors, Corrections, Numerical Problems On
Application Of Correction Due To Local Attraction.
6.4 Plotting Of Traverse - Check Of Closing Error In Closed & Open Traverse, Bowditch's
Correction.
6.5 Errors In Chain & Compass Surveying-Sources & Remedies, Precautions During Chain &
Compass Surveying.
6.6 Computation Of Area From Plotted Survey Map-Planimeter, Features, Use Of Mensuration
Techniques-Average Ordinate Rule, Trapezoidal Rule, Simpson’s Rule.
7.0 LEVELING:
7.1 Purpose Of Levelling
7.2 Definition Of Terms Used In Levelling- Concepts Of Level Surface, Horizontal Surface,
Vertical Surface, Datum, R.L., B.M.
7.3 Description Of Essential Features And Uses Of Different Types Of Levelling Instruments
7.4 Concepts Of Line Of Collimation, Axis Of Bubble Tube, Axis Of Telescope, Vertical Axis
7.5 Levelling Staff- Types, Features And Use
7.6 Temporary Adjustments Of Level, Taking Reading With Level
7.7 Concept Of Bench Mark, BS, IS, FS, CP, HI
7.8 Principles Of Leveling - Simple Levelling, Differential Leveling
7.9 Field Data Entry - Level Book-Height Of Collimation Method And Rise & Fall Method,
Comparison, Numerical Problems On Reduction Of Levels Applying Both Methods,
Arithmetic Checks
7.10 Different Types Of Levelling, Uses And Methods - Fly Levelling, Check Levelling, Profile
Leveling - Longitudinal Sections And Cross-Sections
7.11 Plotting Of Profiles
7.12 Effects Of Curvature And Refraction, Numerical Problems On Application Of Correction
7.13 Reciprocal Levelling-Principles, Methods, Numerical Problems, Precise Leveling
7.14 Difficulties In Levelling, Errors In Levelling And Precautions
7.15 Sensitiveness Of Bubble Tube, Determination Of Sensitiveness
7.16 Permanent Adjustments Of Different Types Of Levels
7.17 Setting Grades And Stakes, Setting Out Grades Of Sewers And Related Problems
8.0 PLANE TABLE SURVEYING
8.1 Principle
8.2 Accessories of plane table
8.3 Orientation
8.4 Procedure of setting up plane table over a station
8.5 Methods of plane tabling
8.6 Errors and precautions
8.7 Procedure of plane table traversing
8.8 Advantages and disadvantages of plane tabling
9.0 C0MPUTATION OF AREA AND VOLUME:
9.1 Introduction
9.2 Computation of area from field notes
9.3 Problems on computing area from field notes
9.4 Computation of area from plotted plan
9.5 The mid ordinate rule
9.6 The average ordinate rule
9.7 The trapezoidal rule
9.8 Simpson’s rule
9.9 Formula for calculation of volume
9.10 Worked-out problems
Text Books:

1 Surveying & Levelling Vol.I T.P.Kanetkar & S.V.Kulkarni Griha Prakash, Pune
2 Surveying Vol.I B.C.Punmia Laxmi Publications, Delhi-6
3 A text book of surveying and R.agor; Khanna Khanna Publishers, Delhi-6

levelling
4 Surveying and Levelling Hussain and Nagraj S.Chand & Co, Delhi
5 Surveying & Levelling S.C.Rangawala Charotar Book Stall, Pune
6 Surveying & Levelling N.N. Basak Tata Mc. Graw Hill
7 Plane Surveying A. De S. Chand & Co.
3 PRINCIPLES OF PROCESS ENGINEERING
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: PRINCIPLES OF PROCESS ENGINEERING


Tutorial: Nil Attendance, Assignment & Quiz -20
Practical: Nil End Semester Exam - 60
Aim:-
The basic aim of this subject is to develop the knowledge on technologies involved in various processing operation and develop
skill in operation and maintenance of related machine.
Objective :-
Processing of Agricultural products is an important aspect of Agricultural Engineering. It includes the study of all the operation
involved in Primary and secondary processing till the process product reaches the consumer. The student should have knowledge
of this technology and operation and maintenance of machine involved in these processes.

period Marks
Unit 2 PRINCIPLES OF PROCESSING 17 10
Unit 3 PROCESSING EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY 10 10
Unit 4 PROCESS PLANT AND MANAGEMENT 7 10
Unit 5 MECHANICAL HANDLING OF AGRICULTURAL PRODUCT 2 10
Unit 6 SEED PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY 3 10
Unit 7 UTILIZATION OF AGRICULTURAL BY PRODUCT (FIBRE, PAPER 4 10
ETC.)
Unit 8 AGRO-INDUSTRIES 3 5
TOTAL 48 70
Content: Theory (Principles Of Process Engineering) 3 hrs/wk
1. Introduction:
Food Constituents, Micro-Organism In Deterioration And Preservation Of Food.
2. Principles Of Processing:
Modes Of Heat Transfer, One Dimensional Steady-State And Unsteady-State Heat Transfer In Simple
Geometries, Newton’s Law Of Cooling, Free And Forced Convection, Correlations, Heat Transfer
Coefficient, Introductory Radiation Heat Transfer.
Types Of Heat Exchanger, Log Mean Temperature Difference, Heat Exchanger Performance.
Introduction To Mass Transfer Process, Fick’s Law, Molecular Diffusion In Fluids And Solids, Convective
Mass Transfer Coefficients, Mass Transfer Correlations
3. Processing Equipment And Machinery:
Introduction To Processing Industries, Future Prospect With Reference To West Bengal.
Sources Of Fruits, Vegetables And Raw Material For Processing, Transportation Fruit Vegetables And Raw
Material And Finished Product; Marketing.
Equipment And Machineries For Processing Of:
Solid Foods Such As Cereals, Pulses, Cattle Feeds, Etc.
Liquid And Semi-Solid Food Materials
4. Process Plant And Management:
Location Of Plant, Working Condition And General Requirements-Sanitation, Waste Disposal, Ventilation,
Lighting, Humidity Temperature.
Lay Out Of Plant & Machinery.
Procurement Planning, Post Harvest Changes.
5. Mechanical Handling Of Agricultural Product:
6. Seed Processing Technology:
7. Utilization Of Agricultural By Product (Fibre, Paper Etc.):
8. Agro-Industries:
Aims And Objectives, Agro-Industries In India, Future Prospect With Particular Reference To West Bengal.
Role Of Agro-Industries Corporation In Mechanising Agriculture.
Text Books:

1 Transfer Process And Unit C.J.Geankoplis P.H.I. Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi-110001
Operation
2 Process Heat Transfer Donald & Kern Mcgraw Hill,
InternationalEdition,
Chemical Engg. Series
3 Fundamentals of Food Romeo T. Toledo ----

Process Engineering
4 Transport Processes & Unit C.J. Geankoplis ----
Operations
5 Unit Operations in Sahay & Singh ----
Agricultural Processing
6 PHE of Cereal, Pulses & Oil Amalendu Chakraborty ----
seeds
7 Agricultural Process S.M. Henderson & C. H. Perry AVI Publication
Engineering
4 Thermodynamics & Heat Transfer Process
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: THERMODYNAMICS & HEAT TRANSFER PROCESS

Aim:-
To have a clear understanding of the subject “Thermodynamics” and its importance for mechanical engineers. Students
should know and understand the physical significance of first law and second law of thermodynamics. They should also learn
about the thermodynamic properties of gases and steam which acts as the thermodynamic medium and how heat energy
contained in the medium is converted to mechanical energy by passing through cyclic thermodynamic processes. Students will
also learn the properties of steam, how steam is produced commercially in a boiler.
Objective :-
Amount of useful energy produced and spent is the most important factor by which a country’s technical advancement is
measured. Useful mechanical and electrical energy is produced from heat energy. It is of paramount importance to an
engineer to know the basic principles by which heat energy can be converted into mechanical energy, which in turn can be
converted into electrical energy. Thermodynamics is the field of applied science which deals with the energy possessed by
heated gases and vapours and the laws which govern the conversion of this energy into mechanical energy and vice versa. This
is the fundamental subject for understanding the process of producing vast amount of mechanical energy from heat energy
and therefore necessary to be learned by the engineering students. Understanding the working principles and features of the
various machines and plants in which either such heated gas / vapours are produced or conversion of heat to mechanical
energy takes place is of great importance.

period Marks
Unit 2 FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMODYNAMICS 6 10
Unit 3 PROPERTIES OF GASES 7 10
Unit 4 LAWS OF THERMODYNAMICS 3 9
Unit 5 THERMODYNAMIC PROCESSES OF PERFECT GASES 6 10
Unit 6 ENTROPY OF GASES 4 10
Unit 7 THERMODYNAMIC AIR CYCLES 6 10
Unit 8 PROPERTIES OF STEAM 6 5
Unit 9 STEAM BOILER 7 5
TOTAL 48 70
Content: Theory (Thermodynamics & Heat Transfer Process) 3 hrs/wk
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Importance of conversion of heat energy into mechanical energy and electrical

energy; definition of Thermodynamics; concept of heat engines.
Explain importance of study of Thermodynamics.
Give examples from every day life where heat energy is converted into mechanical
energy and vice-versa.
State the function of a heat engine.
2.0 FUNDAMENTALS OF THERMODYNAMICS:
Definition and understanding of terms: Energy, work, power, law of

conservation of energy, heat, units of heat, temperature, absolute
temperature, pressure, absolute and gauge pressure, specific heat.
Thermodynamic system, closed, open and isolated systems; system
boundary; properties of a thermodynamic system; concept of work and
heat energy transfer to and from a system.
State relationship between: work and power, Centigrade and Fahrenheit
scale of temperature, work and heat energy.
Distinguish between absolute pressure and gauge pressure.
Understand a thermodynamic system
Differentiate between a closed, open and isolated system.
3.0 PROPERTIES OF GASES
Gas as the working substance in a thermodynamic system; definition of gas
and perfect (or ideal) gas; laws of perfect gases—Boyle’s law, Charle’s law
and Gay- Lussac law with corresponding gas equations; characteristic
gas equation pv = mRT; problems
Define an ideal (or perfect) gas
State three laws of perfect gases
Write mathematical expression for the three gas laws
Deduce characteristic equation of gas from the gas laws.
Solve problems on gas laws
Explain why Cp>Cv
Prove Cp-Cv = R/J and Cp/Cv = 1 + R/JCv
Solve problems on specific heats of gas.
4.0 LAWS OF THERMODYNAMICS
Thermal equilibrium; statement of Zeroth law; first law of thermodynamics;
mechanical equivalent of heat; non flow energy equation (heat added = work
done + rise in internal energy); second law of thermodynamics-statements;
physical significance of second law, state clausius inequality.
Understand meaning of first and second law of thermodynamics.
Justify that second law does not contradict first law.
5.0 THERMODYNAMIC PROCESSES OF PERFECT GASES
Definition of thermodynamic (or non-flow) process; P - V diagram;
constant volume, constant pressure, isothermal, adiabatic, polytropic and
throttling processes.
Understand on meaning of thermodynamic process Draw p-v diagrams for
different thermodynamic processes.
Deduce formulae for work done by gas in (i) Constant pressure,
(ii) isothermal and adiabatic expansion.
Problems on thermodynamic processes.
Solve simple
6.0 ENTROPY OF GASES
Concept of entropy; relation between heat and entropy; T-S diagram; change of
entropy during different thermodynamic process (final expressions only,
deduction not required) and their representation on T-S diagram.
Write the mathematical expression for change of entropy
Draw T-S diagram of various thermodynamic processes
7.0
Definition of thermodynamic cycle; representation of a cycle in P-V diagram; work
done in the cycle; reversible and irreversible cycle; working of an ideal engine;
efficiency of a cycle; Carnot cycle in P-V and T-S diagram; expressions for work
done and efficiency; simple problems on air cycles.
Explain thermodynamic cycle. Represent a cycle in the p-v diagram and identify
the work done per cycle.
Draw a Carnot cycle in T-S diagram and work out their efficiency problems on air
cycles.
8.0 Difference between gas and vapour; saturation temperature and pressure;
sensible heat; latent heat; total heat; dryness fraction.
Wet steam; dry saturated steam; superheated steam; degree of superheat
Use of steam table; Mollier’s diagram; calculation of total heat; specific
volume and internal energy of steam; solve problems.
Use steam table and solve problems.
9.0 Function of steam boiler; fire tube & water tube boilers; working principleof
Cochran, Lancashire, Locomotive, Babcock and Wilcox, Stirling boilers
Constructional features and uses of important boiler parts like shell,grate, drum,
tubes, furnace, mountings, accessories.
Fuels; burning equipment; feed water treatment
Boiler performance; boiler efficiency
Understand the difference between fire tube and water tube boilers Explain
working principles of various types of boilers with help of sketchesState use and
importance of various parts and systems of a boiler.
Text Books:
Name of Book Writer’s Name Publisher’s Name

Sl NO
1 Heat Engineering V. P. Vasandani & D. S. Kumar Metropolitan Book Co (P) Ltd
2 A text book of Engineering R. S. Khurmi S. Chand & Co. Ltd

Thermodynamics
3 Thermal Engineering B. K. Sarker Tata McGraw Hill
4 Thermal Engineering P. L. Ballaney Khanna Publishers
5 Heat Power K.C.Pal Orient Longman
6 Engineering Thermodynamics M.Achuthan Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
7 Engineering Thermodynamics J.B.Jones and R.E.Dugan Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
5 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING


Aim:-
The course has been designed to enable the students of diploma programmes to acquire awareness with basic understanding of
concepts of environmental degradation and its protection.
Objective :-
The engineering activities taken up by the technical personnel are to a large extent responsible for the environmental
degradation. The engineers are also responsible for adopting the remedial measures for protection of environment. As such, an
engineering diploma holder should have adequate knowledge & awareness about the types of pollution caused by various
activities for adopting preventive and remedial measures. They should also be aware of the various environmental laws for
effective control of environmental pollution.

period Marks
Unit 1 GENERAL CONCEPTS 7 12
Unit 2 ELEMENTS OF ECOLOGY 5 10
Unit 3 ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 17 14
Unit 4 ENVIRONMENTAL SANITATION 4 10
Unit 5 RESOURCES CONSERVATION 5 11
Unit 6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT 10 13
TOTAL 48 70
Content: Theory (Environmental Engineering) 3 hrs/wk
GENERAL CONCEPTS
 Nature And Scope Of Environment Problems Definition; Interaction Of Systems;
EnvironmentalDisturbances; Public Awareness And Action.
 Pollution And Economic Growth; Population Growth; Impacts Of Industrialization And Urbanization
OnEnvironment; Future Consumption Of Energy And Availability Of Energy Sources; Impacts Of
Energy Development
ELEMENTS OF ECOLOGY
 Concepts Of Ecosystem-Biosphere And Its Components; Examples Of Ecosystems
 Energy Flow And Food Chain In Ecosystem
 Natural Resources Cycles (C, N, P Water Cycle)
ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION
 Water Pollution - Pollutants Types, Sources And Their Effects; Natural Recovery Process Of
WaterBodies; Minimum National Standards; Examples
 Air Pollution - Pollutants Type, Sources And Their Effects; Air Quality Standards; Examples
 Land Pollution - Types Of Pollutants, Their Sources And Effects; Examples
 Noise Pollution - Sources And Effects Minimum Standard; Examples
 Radioactive Pollution - Pollutants Types Sources And Their Effects; Minimum Standard, Examples
ENVIRONMENTAL SANITATION
 Epidemiology - Infections Diseases, Sources Vectors And Transmission Of Diseases, Sanitary
ProtectionMeasures
 Occupational Health Hazards
 Solid Wastes - Sources, Characteristics, Disposal Methods
RESOURCES CONSERVATION
 Conservation Of Land, Forest, Timber, Wild Life, Minerals
 Resource Recycling
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
 Concepts Of Environmental Impact Assessment
 Pollution Control Strategies
 Environmental Ethics
Text Books:

1 Environment and Pollution V.S. Bais & U.S. Gupta Northern Book Centre
2 Environment and Human L.N. Verma Himangshu publication

Habitation
3 Water supply, water disposal A.K. Chatterjee Khanna Publisher
and Environmental Pollution
Engineering
4 Lab manual in Env. Engg. P.D. Kulkarni Jaico publishing house
5 Hand book on Env. Science R.N. Trivedi Anmol publication
6 HYDRAULICS
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: HYDRAULICS


Aim:-
To aim of the subject Hydraulics is to develop basic concepts regarding behiviour of fluid, specially water, at rest and in motion.
Objective :-
The subject of Hydraulics deals with behaviour of fluid at rest and in motion. The Agricultural Engineering profession is much
concerned with subjects like water supply, Sanitary Engineering and Irrigation Engineering, which need a sound knowledge of
Hydraulics. Therefore, hydraulics is a very important basic subject for students of agricultural engineering.

period Marks
Unit 1 Hydrostatics 14 10
Unit 2 Kinematics of fluid flow 29 28
Unit 3 Pumps 5 32
TOTAL 48 70
Content: Theory (Environmental Engineering) 3 hrs/wk
Hydrostatics:
 Properties of fluids, density, specific gravity, surface tension, capillarity, viscosity
andtheir uses
 Pressure and its measurements: Definitions- intensity of pressure, atmospheric
pressure, gauge pressure, absolute pressure and vacuum pressure; Relation
between atmospheric pressure, absolute pressure and gauge pressure, pressure
head, pressuregauges
 Pressure exerted on an immersed surface; Definitions - total pressure, resultant
pressure, expression of equation for total pressure exerted on horizontal, vertical
andinclined immersed surface (No deduction); Center of pressure and its
expression.
 Floatation and buoyancy: Archimedes principle- buoyancy & center of buoyancy,
centerof pressure, metacenter, metacentric height, determination of metacentric
height by experimental method, equilibrium of floating bodies- stable, unstable &
neutral equilibrium
Kinematics of fluid flow
 Basic equations of fluid flow and their application (No deduction): rate of
discharge,equation of continuity of a liquid flow, total energy of a liquid in
motion- potential, kinetic & pressure, Bernoulli’s theorem and its limitations.
Practical applications of Bernoulli’s equation.
 Flow through Orifices: orifices, types of orifices, venacontracta, hydraulic
coefficientsand their relations, determination of hydraulic coefficients, discharge
formulae for different types of orifices and their application (No deduction)
 Flow through mouthpieces: mouthpieces, types of mouthpieces, discharge formulae
fordifferent types of mouthpieces and their application (No deduction)
 Flow over Notches: notch, types of notches, discharge formulae for different
types ofnotches and their application (No deduction)
 Flow over Weirs: weir and its difference with notches, types of weirs,
dischargeformulae for different types of weirs and their application (No
deduction)
 Types of Flow through pipes: uniform & non-uniform; laminar & turbulent;
steady &unsteady; Reynold’s number and its implication.
 Losses of head of a liquid flowing through pipes: due to friction (statement of
Darcy’s equation), sudden enlargement, sudden contraction, change of direction of
flow, loss atinlet & exit (No deduction, only statement of formulae and their
application), total energy lines and hydraulic gradient lines.
 Flow through Open Channels: types of channel sections-rectangular, trapezoidal &
circular, Discharge formulae- Chazy’s and Manning’s equation, best economical
section,phenomenon of hydraulic jump ( only description and no deduction)
Pumps
 Types of pumps
 Centrifugal pumps- basic principles, discharge, horse power of pump,
efficiency ofcentrifugal pump, simple numerical problems
 Reciprocating pumps: types, operation, discharge, calculation of
horse power,efficiency, simple numerical problems
Text Books:
1 Hydraulics Jagdish Lal Metro Publishing Books
Limited
2 Hydraulics, Fluid Mechanics S. Ramamrutham Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi
and Fluid Machines
3 Hydraulics R.S.Khurmi --
4 Hydraulics Priyany --
5 Hydraulics S.K.Lakhi --
6 Hydraulics Dr.P.N.Modi &S.M.Seth

7 Hydraulics and Hydraulic V. Thanikachalam Tata McGraw-hill Publishing
Machinery Company Limited
6 Basic Soil Science Lab.
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: Basic Soil Science Lab.
Curse Code: Agr. E Course Duration: 6 semester Subject offered in semester: third

Theory : Nil Continuous Evaluation– 60
Tutorial: Nil Final Evaluation etc- 40
Practical: 11 Total marks -100
Credit:- 2
Aim:-
Objective :-
Content: Practical (Basic Soil Science Lab.) 3 hrs/wk

1. Soil Sampling And Processing
2. Determination Of Soil Texture By Field Method
3. Mechanical Analysis For Determination Of Particle Size Distribution
4. Determination Of Field Capacity Of Soil In Fields
5. Determination Of Soil Moisture Content
6. Determination Of Organic Matter Content Of Soil
7. Determination Of Soil Ph
8. Determination Of Soluble Salts.
9. Determination Of Lime Requirement Of Soil
10. Determination Of Gypsum Requirement Of Soil
11. Determination Of Total Nitrogen In Soil
12. Determination Of Available Phosphorus In Soil.
13. Determination Of Available Potassium In The Soil.
14. Determination Of Calcium And Magnesium In Soil.
15. Determination Of Available Sulpher In Soil.
16. Determination Of Exchangeable And Soluble Sodium In Soil.
17. Determination Of Available Micronutrients In Soil.
7 Surveying & Levelling Lab.
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: SURVEYING & LEVELLING LAB.

Tutorial: Nil Final Evaluation etc– 40
Practical: 6 Total marks - 100
Credit:- 2
Aim:-
Objective :-
Content: Practical (Surveying & Levelling Lab.) 3 hrs/wk
LINEAR MEASUREMENTS:
Study Of The Essential Features Of Different Types Of Chains And Tapes, To Describe The
Chains & Tapes With Neat Sketches.
CHAINING:
Testing And Adjusting Of A Metric Chain
Measurement Of Distance Between Two Points (More Than 2 Chain Lengths Apart) With
Chain Including Direct Ranging
Setting Out Different Types Of Triangles, Given The Lengths Of Sides With Chain & Tape
Measurement Of Distance Between Two Points By Chaining Across A Sloping Ground Using-
Stepping Method & A Clinometer
Measurement Of Distance By Chaining Across Obstacles On The Chain Line- (1) A Pond (2) A
Building (3) A Stream / River (In The Event Of Non-Availability Of Stream /River, A Pond Or
Lake May Be Taken, Considering That Chaining Around The Same Is Not Possible
CHAIN SURVEYING:
Setting Perpendicular Offsets To Various Objects (At Least 3) From A Chain Line Using- (1)
Tape, (2) Cross-Staff, (3) Optical Square And Comparing The Accuracy Of The 3 Methods
Setting Oblique Offsets To Objects (At Least 3) From A Chain Line Using Tape
ANGULAR MEASUREMENT:
Study Of Features And Parts Of A Prismatic Compass And A Surveyor's Compass To Describe
The Compasses By Drawing Neat Sketches.
Testing And Adjustment Of Prismatic Compass And Surveyor's Compass
Measurement Of Bearings Of Lines (At Least 3 Lines) And Determination Of Included Angles
Using Prismatic Compass And Surveyor's Compass.
Setting Out Triangles (At Least 2) With Compass, Given The Length And Bearing Of One Side
And Included Angles.
CHAIN AND COMPASS SURVEYING:
Setting Out A Closed Traverse Of 5 Sides, Using Prismatic Compass, Given Bearing Of One
Line And Included Angles And Lengths Of Sides.
Conducting Chain & Compass Traverse Surveying In A Given Plot Of Area (2 Plots) And
Recording Data In The Field Book.
(5 To 6 Students/Group)
Preparation Of Survey Map By Plotting, Individually, The Field Book Data From Exercise 5.2
And Computation Of The Plotted Area.
(Plotting Should Be Done During Class Hours)
LEVELLING:
Study Of Essential Features And Parts Of Different Types Of Levels
Study Of Essential Features Of Different Types Of Levelling Staffs
Making Temporary Adjustments Of Levels
Determining Reduced Levels Of Five Given Points Taking Staff Readings With Levels
Determining The Difference Of Levels Between Two Points (3 Pairs Of Points/Group) By
Taking Staff Readings From A Single Set Up Of Level, Recording The Readings In Level Book
And Application Of Arithmetic Check
Conduct Fly Levelling (Compound) Between Two Distant Points With Respect To The R. L. Of
A Given B. M. And Reduction Of Levels By Both Height Of Collimation And Rise & Fall
Method And Applying Arithmetic Check. (At Least 3 Change Points Must Be Covered)
Finding R. L Of (1) Roof, (2) Chajja Or Canopy With Reference To The R. L. Of Given B. M. By
Taking Inverted Staff Reading
Conduct Profile Levelling Along The Given Alignment For A Road/ Canal For 150m Length,
Taking Leveling Staff At Every 15m And Cross Staff At 1m & 3m Apart On Both Sides At Every
30m Interval And Recording The Data In Level Book And Applying Arithmetical Check
Plotting The Profile Of The Alignment Surveyed In Exercise 6.8 And Drawing The Grade Of
Alignment Desired (To Be Drawn During The Class Hours)
Computation Of Volume Of Earthwork, Cutting And Filling, Required To Obtain The Desired
Grade From The Plotting In Exercise 6.9
Contour Mapping By Direct And Indirect Method
8 Agricultural Process Engineering Lab.
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: AGRICULTURAL PROCESS ENGINEERING LAB.
Credit:- 2
Aim:-
Objective :-
Content: Practical (Agricultural Process Engineering Lab.) 3 hrs/wk

1. Determination of thermo-physical properties of liquid and solid foods
2. Operation and Maintenance of shell and tube heat exchangers, plate heat exchanger, tubular heat exchanger,
continuous flow dryer, batch dryer, concurrent flow dryers, counter flow dryers, milling equipments.
3. Determination of germination, vigour index of seeds - study and experiments on moisture meters, threshers, shellers,
decorticators, graders, delinting machine, seed extractors.
9 Practical of Horticultural Crops Lab.
Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: PRACTICAL OF HORTICULTURAL CROPS LAB.

Credit:- 2
Content: Practical (Practical Of Horticultural Crops Lab.) 3 hrs/wk
1. Identification of seeds and plants of fruits, vegetables, flowers and spices.

2. Drawing of map in of India and West Bengal showing distribution of fruits, vegetables, flowers and spices.
3. Seed bed preparation for raising of fruit seedlings.
4. Sowing of seeds, planting of fruit saplings, lifting of plants and picking for sale.
5. Potting and repotting of plants.
6. Layout of fruit nursery.
7. Demonstration of management practices with respect of fruits.
8. Seedbed preparation for raising of vegetable seedlings.
9. Sowing of vegetable seed, saplings, lifting of plants and packing for sale. Potting and repotting of plants. Planning and
layout for kitchen garden.
10. Layout of vegetable nursery.
11. Demonstration of management practices with respect to vegetables.
12. Identification of tools and implements.
13. Sowing of seeds of ornamental plants.
14. Planting of sapling, lifting of plants and packing for sale.
15. Potting and repotting of flowering plants.
16. Layout of flower garden.
17. Demonstration of management of flower garden.
18. Planting of trees, shrubs, and climbers.
19. Identification of important spices.
20. Cultivation of annual spices. Method of planting of termeric and ginger. Tabular presentation of spices which will
include common name scientific name family use etc.
Curriculum and Syllabus for full time Diploma in Architecture
SECOND YEAR CURRICULUM STRUCTURE

(ARCHITECTURE)
SEMESTER -III
West Bengal State Council of Technical &Vocational Education and Skill

Development (Technical Education Division)
Curriculum for full time Diploma in Architecture
(With effect from 2022)
Second Year Curriculum Structure (3rd Semester Architecture,(w.e.f.2020)WBSCT&VE and SD

DETAIL CURRICULUM
SEMESTER-III
Sl Category of Code No Course Title L T P Total Credits Marks
No Course contact
hrs/week
THEORY SUBJECTS
1 Programme ARPC Strength of 3 0 0 3 2 100
Core Course 201 Material
2 Programme ARPC Materials and 2 0 0 2 2 100
Core Course 203 Methods of
Construction-I
3 Programme ARPC History of 2 0 0 2 2 100
Core Course 205 Architecture-I
4 Programme ARPC Building 2 0 0 2 2 100
Core Course 207 services
&Equipments-I
5 Programme ARPC Architectural 0 2 0 2 1 100
Core Course 209 Design -I
SESSIONAL SUBJECTS
Core Course 211 Drawing-III
Core Course 213 Design -I
8 Programme ARPC Working 0 1 4 5 3 100
Core Course 215 Drawing-I
9 Programme ARPC Computer Lab-I 0 1 4 5 2 100
Core Course 217
10 Internship-I SI 201 - - - - 1 100
Total 09 04 16 29 19 1000
L:-Lecturer T:-Tutorial P:-Practical
EVALUATION SCHEME:
A. For Theory Courses:

(i) The weightage of internal assessment is 40% and for End Semester Examination is 60%
(ii) The student has to obtain at least 40% marks individually both in internal assessment and end
semester examination to pass for the subject.

Examination Scheme: Theoretical subject (Full Marks=100)
Internal assessment End Semester Exam

Sl Type Marks Question Type Marks
No
1 Mid Semester Tests 10x2=20 (a) MCQ type questions carrying 1 mark, 1x30=30
( Two best out of three) Question to be set=15 and question to be
answered=10
(b) Fill-in the blanks type questions
carrying 1 mark. To be set=15 and to be
answered=10
(c) Short answer type questions carrying
1 mark. To be set 15 and to be
answered=6
2 Quizzes, viva-voce, 10 Subjective type Question carrying 2 2x6=12
Assignments marks. Question to be set=10 and
Question to be answered=6
3 Class Attendance* 10 Subjective type Question carrying 6 6x3=18
marks. Question to be set=9(3 each for 3
modules) and Question to be answered=3
Total 40 60
Note: While setting the question papers it has to be ensured that there will be a mix-up
of questions in the category route, application, understanding and analysis in equal proportion.
(b) For Sessional Courses:-

(i) The weight age of Internal assessment is 60% and for End Semester Exam is 40%.
(ii) The student has to obtain at least 40% marks individually both in internal assessment and end
semester exams to pass for each subject.
Marks Distribution: Full Marks =100

Sl No Type Marks Question Type Marks
Continuous Assignments on the day of
20
1 Evaluation 50 exam(by External Evaluator)
and class work submission
2 Class Attendance 10 Viva-voce (by External Evaluator) 20
Total 60 40
Allotment of attendance marks as follow:
Class Attendance (in %) Marks to be awarded for class attendance

80% and above 10.0
75% to below 80% 8.0
70% to below 75% 6.0
65% to below 70% 4.0
60% to below 65% 2.0
Note: The internal assessment is based on the student’s performance in mid semester tests (two best out of
three), quizzes, assignments, class performance, attendance, viva-voce in practical, lab record etc.

Mapping of Marks to Grades
Each course (Theory/Practical) is to be assigned 100 marks, irrespective of the number of credits, and the mapping of
marks to grades may be done as per the following table:
Range of marks Assigned Grade

90 to 100 AA/A+
80 to below 90 AB/A
70 to below 80 BB/B+
60 to below 70 BC/B
50 to below 60 CC/C+
45 to below 50 CD/C
40 to below 45 DD/D
<40 FF/F( Fail due to less marks)
- FR( fail due to shortage of attendance and therefore, to repeat the course)
THEORY SUBJECTS
Course Code : ARPC 201
Course Title : Strength of Material
Number of Classes : 3(L-3,T-0,P-0)
Number of Credit : 2
Prerequisites : 1)Elementary knowledge on engineering mechanics
2)Differential and integral calculus
Course offered in : Third Semester
Course Duration : 17 weeks
Course Category : PC
Full Marks : 100
Aim: -
1. To study and realize the effect of deformable body under various loading
conditions.
2. To study the concept of Moment of Inertia of various cross section.
3. To study the various mechanical properties and stress – strain diagram of
different materials.
4. To prepare the students for further understanding of other allied subjects
(e.g. TOS and Design of structure).
Course Objectives: - The students will be able to,

1. Define mechanical properties of materials and understand and analyze
stress-strain diagram of engineering materials
2. Determine normal stress, shear stress etc.
3. Calculate moment of inertia of different cross sections of various engineering
body.

Modular Division of Syllabus:
Unit Topic Lecture
Mechanical Properties of Materials, Simple stresses & 9
1
Strain
2 Shear force & Bending moment 12
3 Moment of inertia 9
4 Deflection of beam 5
5 Bending stress of beam 10
Total 45
CONTACT PERIODS:45 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT:6 TOTAL PERIODS:51
Semester Examination Scheme:-

Module OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS SUBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL TO TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL
SET ANSWER QUESTION MARKS BE ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS SET ANSWE PER MARKS
ED SET RED QUESTI
ON
1 3 1 1
2 14 Any ONE 1 x 30 = 3 3
Any six
thirty 30 TWO 2x6=12 Any SIX 6x3=18
3 14 3 2 three
4 10 2 2
5 4 1 1
DETAIL COURSE CONTENT

Unit Topic Contents Numberof
No. Classes
Unit 1 Mechanical Definition of Elasticity, plasticity, ductility, malleability, hardness, 9

Proper-ties fatigue, creep, brittleness. Types of loads,Types of stress – normal stress
of Materials, (tensile stress & compressive stress) & shear stress, Strain – longitudinal
Simple & lateral strain, Poisson ratio, Hooke’s law, Young’smodulus,
stresses & Modulus of rigidity, Stress- strain curves forductile material (MS) and
Strain brittle material (CI)- discussion on salient points on the stress –
strain diagram,working stress, Factor of safety.(simple problems on
normal stresses and longitudinal strain, no discussionon composite
section ).

Unit 2 Shear force& Definition of Shear force & bending moment, sign convention, Relation 12
Bending between shear force & bending moment, Shear force and bending
moment. moment diagrams for simply supported beam, overhanging beam and
cantilever subjected to point loads & uniformly distributed load, location
of point of contra flexure.
(Problems to be based on simply supported beam, overhanging beam &
cantilever beam)
Unit 3 Moment of Definition of area and mass moment of inertia, Paralleland perpendicular 9
inertia axes theorem (no derivation), Moment of inertia about centroidal axis
of solid sections – Square, rectangular, circular, semicircular, Tri-
angular section, Hollow sections – square, rectangularand circular
cross section only. Moment of Inertia ofangle section, channel, Tee, I
section about centroidal axis and any other axis parallel to centroidal
axis.
Unit 4 Deflection Concepts of deflection, Maximum deflection and slope of simple 5

of beam supported beam subjected to point load at mid spanand / or
uniformly distributed load on entire span and cantilever beam subjected
to point load at free end and / or uniformly distributed load on entire
length.(No deduction). Simple problem on maximum Deflection and
slope of beam.
Unit 5 Bending Definition of bending stress, Explanation of pure bending, Assumptions 10

stress of in simple bending, Deduction of M/I=6b/y=E/R, Moment of resistance &
beam section modulus, Numerical Problem.
Text Books
Name of Author Name of Book Name of Publisher
R.S.Khurmi Strength of Materials S. Chand & Co
S.S.Bhavikatti Strength of Materials V ikas publishing House Pvt.
Ltd. S
S. Ramamrutham & R. Narayanan Strength of Materials Dhanpat Rai & Publication
R.K. Rajput Strength of Materials S. Chand & Co
B.K.Sarkar Strength of Materials Tata McGraw Hill
R.K.Bansal Strength of Materials Laxmi Publication Pvt. Ltd.
M. Chakraborty Strength of Materials S.K. kataria

Reference Books
S.P. Timoshenko, D.H. Young Elements of Strength of West Press Pvt. Ltd.
materials
D. S. Prakash Rao Strength of Materials – Universities Press
A Practical Approach
Egor P Popov Engineering Mechanics Prentice Hall of India
of Solid
R. Subramanian Strength of Materials Oxford Press
Pranab Majumdar Learning Strength of Knowledge Kit publication
Materials
Course Title : Materials and Methods of Construction-I
Prerequisites : NIL
Full Marks : 100
Course Objective:-
On satisfactory completion of the course, the students will: —
(i) Understand the characteristics of good building stone & brick, and, the general
principles to be followed in stone & brick masonry construction;
(ii) Have idea regarding the common clay products like burnt clay hollow brick,
clay tiles, terracotta, porcelain, stoneware and earthenware glazing;
(iii) Have idea regarding the characteristics of good timber and understand the
properties & uses of common wood products like veneer, plywood, fibreboard,
particle board, block board, batten board and laminated board;
(iv) Understand the properties and use of common available varieties of iron & steel,
and, that of non- ferrous metals aluminum and brass, as building materials;
(v) Understand the properties, merits, demerits and use of different types of plastics
and commercially available forms of glass as building material; have knowledge
regarding different types of doors & windows, and, different building hardware
for fixing & fastening them.
Group Module Topic Lecture
STONE MASONRY 3
Group-A 1
2 CLAY PRODUCTS: BRICK MASONRY 5
3 WOOD & WOOD PRODUCTS 3
4 METALS – FERROUS & NON FERROUS METALS 4
5 PLASTICS 2
6 GLASS 3

Group-B 7 BUILDING 1
8 HARDWARE 4
9 DOORS & WINDOWS 5
Total 30
Semester Examination Scheme:-

ED SET RED QUESTI
ON
1,2,3 15 3 3
Any
1 x 30 = Any six 2x6=12 Any 6x3=18
4,5,6 15 thirty ONE 3 3
30 TWO three SIX
7,8,9 15 4 3
DETAIL COURSE CONTENTS
G R O U P- A M AT E R I AL S 20 PERIODS
1. STONE MASONRY 3
Classification of Rocks: Igneous, Sedimentary, Metamorphic (Definitions with examples)
Characteristics of good building stone
Technical terms associated with stone masonry
General principles to be followed in stone masonry
Types of stone masonry: (i) Rubble work, (ii) Ashlars (Concepts only)
2. CLAY PRODUCTS – BRICK MASONRY 5
Technical terms associated with brickwork — Sizes of bricks-Classification of bricks
General principles to be followed in brickwork
Bonds in brickwork: English, Flemish ,Rat-Trapped
Burnt-clay hollow brick (definitions and uses), Fly Ash Brick, Autoclaved Aerated
Concrete(AAC)Blocks
Clay tiles: Flat & curved pan tiles – Half-round country tiles – Mangalore tiles
(definitions and uses) Terracotta – Porcelain – Stoneware – Earthenware (definitions and
uses)
3. WOOD AND WOOD PRODUCTS 3
Classification of trees: Exogenous & Endogenous — Structure of timber
Characteristics of good timber — names of commonly used good quality timber
Defects in timber
Wood products: Veneer – Plywood – Laminated board – Block board – Batten
board – Composite boards – Fiberboard – Particleboard (definitions and uses).

4. METALS – 4
General characteristics of metals: Ductility – Elasticity – Malleability – Toughness –
Weld ability FERROUS METALS– IRON & STEEL Definitions & uses, average
chemical composition with specific reference to carbon content and properties of pig iron,
cast iron, wrought iron, mild steel (plain carbon steel), alloy steel (hard steel), HYSD or
high tensile steel
NON-FERROUS METALS – ALUMINIUM & BRASS Properties and different uses of
Aluminium& Brass
5. PLASTICS - 2
Properties, merits & demerits of plastics
Various types of plastics – PVC, Epoxy, Polyvinyl acetate, Polystyrene phenolic,
Polypropylene — their applications as building materials.
6. GLASS - 3
Definition of glass
Principal constituents of glass: silica, sodium or potassium carbonate (or sulphate),
lime, lead, manganese dioxide, pigments, cullet
Classification of glass based on composition: Soda lime glass – Potash lime glass –
Potash lead glass – Boro-silicate glass (properties & uses)
Classification of glass according to commercial forms: Sheet glass – Plate glass –
Obscured glass – Wired glass – Structural glass – Laminated glass – Glass wool –
Foam glass (properties & uses)
G R O U P- B C O N STR U CTIO N 10 PERIODS

7. BUILDING HARDWARE 1
Fixing and fastening for doors and windows: Nails – Screws – Hinges – Bolts – Rivets –
Handles
8. DOORS 4
Types of doors based on operation (concepts only): Swing door – Revolving door –
Sliding door – Sliding-folding door – Collapsible door – Rolling shutter door – Fire
door
Doors of timber (in detail): Panelled & glazed door – Flush door: solid & hollow-core
Doors of steel (in detail): Rolling shutter door, Collapsible door
9. WINDOWS 5
Types of windows based on operation (concepts only): Fixed window – Casement
window – Sliding window – Pivoted window – Louvered (or Venetian) window –
Bay window – Clerestory window – Corner window – Dormer window
Windows of timber (in detail): Panelled & glazed timber casement window
Windows of steel (in detail): Glazed fixed & casement steel window
Windows of aluminium (in detail): Sliding aluminium window
Windows of UPVC (in detail)

REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Building Construction Volume I, II, III & IV (Metric Ed.) / J. K. MCKay & W. B.
MCKay / Orient Longman
2. The Construction of Buildings Volume 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 / R. Barry / English Language
Book Society
3. A Text Book of Materials and Construction / TTTI
4. A Text Book of Building Construction / S. P. Aurora & S. P. Bindra
5. Building Construction / Sushil Kumar / Standards Publishers Distributors, Delhi
6. Building Materials / P.C. Varghese / PHI Learning Private Ltd., New Delhi
7. Building Material / Satish Agarwal / Dhanpat Rai & Co., New Delhi

Course Title : History of Architecture-I
Prerequisites : NIL
Full Marks : 100
Module Topic Lecture Marks

Architecture of the Ancient Egypt 8
1 4
2 Architecture of the ancient west Asia 2 4
3 Classical Architecture of Greece 4 8
4 Classical Architecture of Rome 4 8
5 Early Christian architecture 2 4
6 Byzantine Architecture 4 8
7 Romanesque Architecture 4 8
8 Gothic Architecture 4 8
9 Renaissance Architecture 2 4
TOTAL 30 60

Examination Scheme:-
TO TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL TO TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL TO BE TO BE MARKS TOTAL
BE ANSWER QUESTION MARKS BE ANSWERED QUESTION MARKS SET ANSWE PER MARKS
SET ED SET RED QUESTI
ON
ANYSIX, ANY
1,2 10 2 TAKING 2 FIVE,
Any
thirty ONE 1 x 30 = AT TAKIN
30 LEAST TWO 2x6=12 G AT THREE 6x3=18
ONE LEAST
3,4 15 3 FROM 2 ONE
EACH FROM
GROUP EACH
GROUP
5,6,7,8,9 20 5 5
Course Objectives:
To convey comprehensive knowledge to students about the Architecture of ancient west,
classical Europe and the evolution of church Architecture.
Course Content:
Unit 1: Architecture of the Ancient Egypt 4 Periods
Belief in after-life, powerful priesthood, abundant labour- Study of tomb architecture, monumental scale –
Study with sketch of Great Pyramid of Cheops, Gizeh showing entrance, subterranean chamber, queen’s
chamber, grand gallery, king’s chamber, air-shaft- Brief idea about the mastabas, rock-hewn tombs, pylons,
obelisks and sphinx.
Unit 2: Architecture of the ancient west Asia 2 Periods
Plentiful supply of soil in the alluvial plains of Tigris & Euphrates, knowledge of kiln-fire, scarcity of stone
& timber, availability of bitumen from natural springs - Architectural elements and construction materials –
Introduction of Arch –Arcuated architecture – Study of the Ziggurat of Urnammu at UR: core of mud brick
covered with a skin of convex burnt brickwork, weeper holes.
Unit 3: Classical Architecture of Greece 4 Periods
Abundance of high quality limestone & marble, scarcity of hardwood, restriction on building spanning;
expression of direct democracy; Mediterranean climate - Columnar and trabeated architecture, human scale,
and extrovert space - Orders: Doric, Ionic and Corinthian - Elements of urban architecture: Acropolis at
Athens with idea about agora, stoa, bouleutorion, theatre, odeion, stadium, hippodrome and gymnasia –
Study of the Parthenon, Athens with sketch with emphasis on facade treatment, proportion (Golden section,
optical correction), pronaos, naos & statue and opisthodomos or epinaos.

Unit 4: Classical Architecture of Rome 4 Periods
Introduction of fired brick, improved mortar, stucco & marble veneering; true arch, barrel & cross vaults,
cupola and coffer ceiling - Arcuated architecture, monumental scale, grandeur, introvert space - Orders
added: Tuscan and Composite or Roman - - Brief idea about the temples, forum, basilicas,
thermae&balneae, theatre, amphitheatre, circuses, triumphal arches & columns, aqueducts & bridges - Study
of the Pantheon, Rome with sketch with emphasis on section through its great dome.
Unit 5: Early Christian architecture 2 Periods
Acceptance of Christianity by Constantine, need for enclosed religious congregational space; lack of
resources & skilled craftsmen, adaptation of existing building elements - Features of Basilican Churches -
Study of the Basilica of St. Peter, Rome with sketch with emphasis to its Plan: single axis from entrance to
the apse through nave & aisle.
Unit 6: Byzantine Architecture 4 Periods
Orthodox Churches & Greek Cross - Spanning square plan with pendentives - Study of the Hagia Sophia,
Constantinople with sketch.
Unit 7: Romanesque Architecture 4 Periods
Consolidation of Papal hierarchy; desire to articulate, to stress or underline every structural division in order
to produce unified compositions - Stone vaulting into groined systems - Development of church plan as a
Latin cross with addition of transepts, extension of aisles carried round apsidal sanctuary to form
ambulatory, figurative & non-figurative sculptures designed and integrated with structure& construction -
Study of the Pisa Cathedral with Baptistery & Campanile with sketch
Unit 8: Gothic Architecture 4 Periods
Medieval age, supremacy of religion, desire to create lofty towered cathedrals, mystic interiors; knowledge
to cut & shape stone, entire structure conceived as framework of organised coherent system - Pointed arches,
flying buttresses, vaults, tracery, triforium – Study of the Notre Dame, Paris with sketch showing nave &
choir, pointed arch, flying buttress, nave arcade and triforium.
Unit 9: Renaissance Architecture 2 Periods
Reformation movement in Christianity, decline of temporal power of the Church - Revival of classical
learning - Use of stucco - Study of the Cathedral of St. Peter, Rome with sketch- BAROQUE: movement,
spatial invention, drama and freedom of detail - Study of Piazza of St. Peter, Rome with sketch
• Assignment – Sketch book consisting Great Pyramid of Cheops, Gizeh;Ziggurat of Urnammuat
UR;Parthenon,Athens;Columns of different orders;Pantheon,Rome;Basilica of St. Peter, Rome;Hagia
Sophia, Constantinople;Pisa Cathedral with Baptistery& Campanile; Notre Dame, paris;Cathedral of
St.Peter, Rome; Piazza of St.Peter, Rome.

Learning Outcomes:
On satisfactory completion of the course, the students will understand the contextual factors of,
(i) Architecture of ancient Egypt and West Asia;
(ii) Classical European architecture of Greece & Rome
(iii) Evolution of Church Architecture through the medieval European times to the Renaissance period
covering the change of features during the Early Christian, the Byzantine, the Romanesque and the Gothic
periods.
References:
1. A History of Architecture (Century Edition) / Sir Banister Fletcher / Butterworth Heinemann (Hb),
CBS Publishers & Distributors (Pb)
2. The Story of Architecture FROM ANTIQUITY TO THE PRESENT / Jan Gympel /
KÖNEMANN (Pb)
3. CRASH COURSE IN ARCHITECTURE / Eva Howarth / Caxton Editions
4. The Great Ages of World Architecture / G. H. Hiraskar / Dhanpat

Course Title : Building services &Equipments-I
Prerequisites : NIL
Full Marks : 100
COURSE OBJECTIVES:- On satisfactory completion of the course, the students should be in a position to
understand the basic principles of water supply system, sanitation & drainage system and materials, fittings
& appliances of the water supply and drainage systems.
Module Topic Lecture

WATER SUPPLY 9
1
2 SANITATION & DRAINAGE 16
3 M A T E R I A L S, F I T T I N G S & A P P L I A N C E S 5
Total 30
ED SET RED QUESTI
ON
1 10 3 3
Any
1 x 30 = Any six 2x6=12 Any 6x3=18
2 24 thirty ONE 4 3
30 TWO three SIX
3 11 3 3

M O D U L E - 1 WAT E R S U PPLY 9 PERIODS
1.1 WATER SUPPLY: SOURCES & REQUIREMENTS 3 Periods
GROUND WATER — SPRINGS: Gravity Springs, Artesian Springs – WELLS:
Open Wells, Artesian Wells, Tube Wells (Shallow / Deep) – INFILTRATION
WELLS & GALLERIES — SURFACE WATER (Brief description with
sketch)— WATER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS for — ‘residences’,
‘restaurants’, ‘cinemas & theatres’, ‘day schools’, ‘boarding schools’, ‘hostels’,
‘hospitals (including laundry)’, ‘offices’ [per capita per day consumption value
only as per NBC]-POTABLE WATER (Brief idea)
1.2 WATER TREATMENT 1Period
Screening – Plain Sedimentation – Coagulation & Sedimentation – Filtration
– Disinfection – Softening – Aeration [Definitions & Sequence only]
1.3 SYSTEM & PERIOD OF WATER SUPPLY 1 Period
DIRECT & INDIRECT SYSTEM — CONSTANT OR CONTINUOUS & INTERMITTENT
SUPPLY
1.4 DESIGN OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 2 Periods
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM — ESTIMATE
OF DEMAND LOAD: Occupant Load, Fire Protection — BASIC PRINCIPLES OF
WATER DISTRIBUTION WITHIN THE PREMISES — WATER MAIN -SERVICE
PIPE: Ferrule, Goose-neck, Stop-cock box, Water-meter box – Communication Pipe
– Consumer’s Pipe
1.5 STORAGE OF WATER & DOWNTAKE DISTRIBUTION PIPES 2 Periods
REQUIREMENT for storage — QUANTITY to be stored — MATERIALS used —
UNDERGROUND & OVERHEAD RESERVOIRS — DOWNTAKE TAPS (COLD
WATER DROPS)
M O D U LE - 2 SAN I TAT I O N & D RAI N AG E 16 PERIODS
2.1 SANITATION REQUIREMENTS 4 Periods
WASH BASINS (flat-back) — CLEANER’S SINK — DRINKING WATER FOUNTAIN —
WATER CLOSETS (WC):Squatting type (Indian style) & Sitting type (European style) —
URINAL – MALE: Bowl type (flat back or angle back), Slab type, Stall type – FEMALE:
Squatting plate type — FLUSHING CISTERNS — BATHS — SHOWERS — NUMBER OF
SANITATION REQUIREMENTS for ‘residences’, ‘office buildings’, ‘cinemas & theatres’,
‘hotels’, ‘restaurants’, ‘hostels’ — LAYOUT DRAWINGS: Students should be able to read
orthographic & isometric projections of toilets-kitchens-WCs etc (supplied by the teachers)
fitted with the above mentioned sanitations
2.2 HOUSE DRAINAGE PIPES 1 Period
SOIL PIPE (SP): Main Soil Pipe (MSP), Branch Soil Pipe (BSP) — WASTE PIPE (WP):
Main Waste Pipe (MWP), Branch Waste Pipe (BWP), Rain Water Pipe (RWP) — MAIN
SOIL WASTE PIPE (MSWP), BRANCH SOIL WASTE PIPE (BSWP) — VENTILATING
PIPE (VP): Main Ventilating Pipe (MVP), BranchVentilating Pipe (BVP), Drain Ventilating
Pipe (DVP), Anti Siphonage Pipe (ASP) — VENT PIPE — JUNCTION PIPE [Definitions
only]

2.3 PLUMBING SYSTEM 2 Periods
TWO-PIPE SYSTEM — ONE-PIPE SYSTEM — SINGLE STACK SYSTEM — PARTIALLY
VENTILATED SINGLE STACK SYSTEM — CHOICE OF PLUMBING SYSTEM
2.4 TRAPS 2 Periods
TRAP: Water seal, Essentials of a good trap, Causes of loss or breaking of water seal —
CLASSIFICATION OF TRAPS: Based on shape (P, Q, S); Based on use/ location (Floor
trap, Gully trap, Intercepting trap, Grease trap, Silt trap)
2.5 CHAMBERS 2 Periods
INVERT — COLLECTION CHAMBER — GULLY CHAMBER — INSPECTION
CHAMBER — MANHOLE — DROP MANHOLE — INCEPTOR MANHOLE OR
INTERCEPTOR MANHOLE — MANHOLE CHAMBER [Definitions & sketches only]
2.6 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM 2 Periods
SEWAGE: soil waste, waste water (sullage), storm water (rain water) — SOLID REFUSE
— CHANNEL — DRAIN — DRAINAGE — SEWER — SEWERAGE — AIMS OF
DESIGNING A DRAINAGE SYSTEM & REALIZATION OF THE SAME — SIZING OF
RAIN WATER PIPES
2.7 DISPOSAL OF SEWAGE FROM ISOLATED BUILDINGS 2 Periods
SEPTIC TANK: sludge & scum — DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS: Capacity (detention
period, sludge removal, consumption of water) – shape & dimensions; inlet & outlet; baffle
wall; cover & manholes; ventilation; lining — DISPOSAL OF SEPTIC TANK EFFLUENT:
CHLORINATION CHAMBER – SOAK PIT (LINED & UNLINED); DISPERSION
CHAMBER & TRENCH
2.8 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN SUBMISSION PLANS 1 Period
M O D U L E - 3 M A T E R I A L S, F I T T I N G S & A P P L I A N C E S 5 PERIODS
3.1 PIPE MATERIALS 1 Period
SUPPLY PIPES: Cast Iron, Steel, Reinforced concrete, Prestressed concrete, Galvanized
Mild Steel tubes, Copper, Brass, Wrought Iron, Asbestos Cement, Lead, Polythene,
Unplasticized PVC — DRAINAGE PIPES: Salt Glazed Stoneware, Cast Iron, Asbestos
Cement, Lead, Unplasticized PVC
3.2 JOINTING OF PIPES 1 Period
Names of different type of joints for different pipe materials with detail reference to
SPIGOT & SOCKET JOINTS, FLANGED JOINTS AND CEMENT MORTAR JOINTS —
LAGGING OF PIPES
3.3 VALVES, COCKS, TAPS, FIRE HYDRANTS & OTHER FITTINGS 3 Periods
VALVES: Air valves or air relief valves, Reflux valves or check valves or non-return valves
or flap valves or foot valves, Safety valves or pressure relief valves, Sluice valves or gate
valves or stop valves, Scour valves or wash-out valves or blow-off valves, Mixing valves —
STOP COCKS — TAPS: Bib taps, Self-closing taps — FIRE HYDRANTS — FITTINGS:
Bends or elbows, Tees, Crosses, Wyes, Reducers, Increasers, Flanges, Caps, Plugs, Back
Nuts [Definitions, sketches & applications]
ASSIGNMENT:
Prepare water supply and sanitary design project for a small building such as residence or
primary school showing water connection, underground water tank, wet riser, overhead tank,
down comer, toilet and kitchen fixtures, waste pipe, soil pipe, rainwater pipe, traps, inspection
chamber, septic tank and soak pit. Draw plan and sections.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. SP 7 (5): 2005 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA GROUP 5 – PART IX
PLUMBING SERVICES / Bureau of Indian Standards
2. A Text Book of Water Supply and Waste Engineering / TTTI
3. Text Book of WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY ENGINEERING / S.K. Hussain /
Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
4. Solid Waste Management / Sasikumar & Gopi Krishna / PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
5. Hand Book of Water Supply & Drainage Engineering / S. K. Sharma / Dhanpat Rai & Co., New
Delhi.

Course Title : Architectural Design -I
Prerequisites : Knowledge of Basic design
Full Marks 100
:
Note: A six-hour end semester examination of 60 marks is to be held during end of 3rd Semester on the
syllabus of “Architectural Design – I”.
The Municipal Building Rules and the National Building Code of India are allowed during the
examinations.
Course Objectives: - On successful completion of the course,

1) To understand basic terminologies related with architectural design.
2) To understand the architectural design process.
UNIT TOPIC Tutorial
1 INTRODUCTION 15
2 ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN PROCESS 15
Total 30
TO BE TO BE MARKS PER TOTAL TO BE SET TO BE ANSWERED MARKS PER TOTAL
SET ANSWER QUESTION MARKS QUESTION MARKS
ED
1 15
Any
2 15 twenty ONE 1 x 20 = 2 1 40 40
20

UNIT NUMBER OF
NO. TOPIC CONTENTS SHEETS &
SHEET SIZE
UNIT-1 INTRODACTION 1.1) Introduction to architectural design.
1.2) Introduction to the building elements, basic terminology ______
of a building like -
“BALCONY”, “CHAJJA”, “CHOWK OR
COURTYARD”, “CHOWK, INNER”, “CHOWK,
OUTER”, “COVERED AREA”, “GARAGE,
PRIVATE”, “GARAGE, PUBLIC”, “OPEN SPACE”,
“OPEN SPACE, FRONT”, “OPEN SPACE, REAR”,
“OPEN SPACE, SIDE”, “PARAPET”, “PARKING
SPACE”, PARTITION”, “PLINTH’, “PLINTH AREA”,
“STOREY”, “STOREY, TOPMOST”, “VERANDAH”,
“WATER-CLOSET”, “WINDOW” , ETC as per the
NBC.
1.3) Introduction to the building Standards, Codes &
Regulation (By- laws) like –
FAR,FAR CALCULATION, GROUND COVERGE,
CARPET AREA, BUILT UP AREA, SUPER BUILT UP
AREA, BUILDING HEIGHT, BUILDING SETBACKS,
ETC.
UNIT-2 ARCHITECTURAL 2.1) Architectural design of any one of the following topics – ONE / TWO
DESIGN PROCESS i) Small residence, (A1)
ii) Primary school,
iii) Canteen / Restaurant,
Or any other topic of equivalent weightage.
2.2) Standards, Codes & Regulation (By- laws) study of the
selected topic (KMC/ West Bengal by-laws).
2.3) Literature study, Site study, Case study, Area
programming and development of the design concept.
SESSIONAL SUBJECTS
Course Title : Architectural Drawing-III
Prerequisites : Knowledge of Architectural drawing-II
Full Marks : 100
Course Objectives: On satisfactory completion of the course, the students will be able to: —
Understand the basic principles of sciograhy. Draw sciography on the orthographic
projections of three dimensional objects like right regular solids, buildings etc.

Course Outcome: Students will develop basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use
these skills in the preparation, interpretation and understanding of architectural design
drawings. Students should develop an unambiguous and clear visualization with sound
pictorial intelligence to interpret architectural drawings.
THEORY COURSE CONTENT
Unit Topic Contents Contact Hours
No.
T P
Unit 1 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF 1.1 TERMINOLOGIES: Altitude – Azimuth – 2 0
SCIOGRAPHY Sun Path – Angle of Incidence of Solar Ray —
Methods of Sciography
Unit 2 ORTHOGRAPHIC 2.1 POINTS in different quadrants - LINES: 2 4

PROJECTIONS OF Parallel to both the planes – perpendicular to
POINTS AND one plane & parallel to the other – Inclined to
STRAIGHT LINES one or both the planes
WITH SCIOGRAPHY
Unit 3 ORTHOGRAPHIC 3.1 LAMINA: Triangular – Square – Rectangular 2 6

PROJECTIONS OF – Pentagonal – Hexagonal – Circular in
LAMINA WITH perpendicular & oblique positions
SCIOGRAPHY
Unit 4 ORTHOGRAPHIC 4.1 SOLIDS – Regular Polyhedra – Prisms – 5 30

PROJECTIONS OF Pyramids – Solids of Revolution: Cylinder &
RIGHT REGULAR Cone (in simple positions only)
SOLIDS WITH
SCIOGRAPHY
4.2 COMPOSITION OF SOLIDS - any two of
the above mentioned solids in such
COMBINATION THAT ONE CASTS
SHADOW ON THE OTHER, being
positioned concentrically and in isolation
Unit 5 ORTHOGRAPHIC 5.1 SITE PLAN with FRONT and SIDE 4 20

PROJECTIONS OF A ELEVATION of a Building with Sciography
BUILDING WITH (1:50); the plan & elevation of the building
SCIOGRAPHY may be supplied by the teacher concerned or
may be the one designed by the student in the
Subject Architectural Design Drawing(third
semester)
Total 15 60

PRACTICAL COURSE CONTENT
Unit Contents Sheet size No. of MARKS

No. Sheets
Unit 1 1.1 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF - - -
SCIOGRAPHY:TERMINOLOGY
Unit 2 2.1 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS OF POINTS A2 1 05

AND STRAIGHT LINES WITH SCIOGRAPHY
Unit 3 3.1 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS OF LAMINA A2 1 05

WITH SCIOGRAPHY
Unit 4 4.1 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS OF REGULAR A2 1 05

SOLIDS WITH SCIOGRAPHY
4.2 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS OF REGULAR A2 1 10

SOLIDS IN COMBINATION WITH SCIOGRAPHY
Unit 5 5.1 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS OF A A1 2 5+5+5

BUILDING WITH SCIOGRAPHY(Roof plan &
Elevations)
TOTAL - 6 40
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Geometrical Drawings for students/L.H. Morris
2. Manual of Rendering with Pen & Ink/Robert W. Gill/Thames & Hudson
3. Art of Perspective drawing/Simon Graco

Course Title : Architectural Design -I
Prerequisites : Knowledge of Basic design
Full Marks : 100

1) To understand architectural design of a small single or two-storey structure in sketch-wise phases.
2) To understand presentation of architectural design.

CONTACT PERIODS
UNIT TOPIC NO OF SHEETS
Tutorial Sessional
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN
1 0 45 5 or 6
DRAWINGS & PRESENTATION
Total 0 45

The drawings should be suitably rendered in pen and ink or colour or any other suitable medium manually on
opaque sheets in a suitable scale.
UNIT-1 ARCHITECTURAL 3.1) The design should be presented through a set of FIVE / SIX
DESIGN architectural drawings in a suitable scale :— (A1)
DRAWINGS & i) Site layout showing approach roads to the site,
PRESENTATION internal road approaching the designed space(s), open
parking spaces (if any), planting and landscaping.
[ONE (A1) sheet]
ii) Ground Floor Plan showing furniture layout, parking
spaces (if any). [ONE (A1) sheet]
iii) First Floor Plan showing furniture layout & Roof
Plan. [ONE (A1) sheet]
iv) Front Elevation, Rear Elevation, Side Elevations.
[ONE (A1) sheet]
v) Minimum two sectional elevations cutting at least the
toilet(s), stairs and any other service area (if any).
[ONE (A1) sheet]
vi) Block Model & 3D views.
3.2) Make a portfolio of the entire design project of the
selected topic.
Course Outcome: At the end of the course the students will be in a position to prepare a set of Architectural
presentation drawing of a Small residence, Primary school, Canteen / Restaurant, or any other topic of
equivalent weightage manually following building bye laws.

Course Title : Working Drawing-I
Prerequisites : Student should able to draw, read and interpret the
basic architectural design drawings(Plan, Elevation)
Full Marks : 100

The students will be in a position to prepare a set of working drawing of a simple double
storied load bearing structure drawn manually.
CONTACT PERIODS NO OF
UNIT TOPIC
Tutorial Sessional SHEETS
1 Introduction 2 0 0
2 Trench Plan 2 10 1
3 Ground Floor Plan 3 12 1
4 First Floor Plan 2 12 1
5 Roof Plan 1 6 1
6 Elevation 2 10 1
7 Sectional Elevation 3 10 1
Total 15 60 6

A set of working drawings in 1 : 50 scale drawn manually based on a simple double storied load
bearing structure. Relevant drawings are to be supplied by teacher.
Unit Topic Number of
No. Contents sheets &
sheet size
Unit 1 Introduction 1.1) Discuss the term ‘Working Drawings’ and its application.
1.2) Discuss the about load bearing structure and its ______
construction method and its application.
Unit 2 Trench Showing plot line, width of foundation trench, construction of ONE
Plan wall, proper dimensions. Footing detail of steps (A1 or A2)
(in 1 : 20 scale) from Ground Level to Plinth Level, staircase,
toe beam, load bearing brick wall, schedule of
windows – same as that of door with addition of sill height.
Unit 3 Ground Showing dimensions of all walls, door & windows, width of ONE
Floor Plan flight, tread, landing, number of treads, width of (A1 or A2)
stairwell (if any), inner & outer plaster line, overall dimension.
Unit 4 First Floor Same as above. ONE
Plan (A1 or A2)
Unit 5 Roof Plan Showing ghundi, ridgeline, slope line, position & size of Rain ONE
Water Pipe, thickness of parapet wall, roof (A1 or A2)
projection (if any), sectional plan of stair room with its roof
projection (if any).
Unit 6 Elevation TOPIC A: ONE ROAD SIDE ELEVATION ONE
TOPIC B: ONE LATERAL ELEVATION (A1 or A2)

Showing Ground Level, Plinth Level, First Floor level, Roof
level, Mumpty Room Roof level, Sill & Lintel
levels in one storey only, Height of parapet wall – specification
of all other non-structural elevational feature.
Unit 7 Sectional Two sectional elevations through staircase, kitchen, toilet & ONE
Elevation front window or veranda – showing Ground (A1 or A2)
Level, Plinth Level, First Floor level, Roof level, Entrance to
roof, Sills, Lintel, Floor slabs at all levels, Flat
Brick Soling, Damp Proof Course, Parapet wall.
Course Outcome: At the end of the course student will be able to

The students will be in a position to prepare a set of working drawing of a simple double
storied load bearing structure drawn manually.
References Books
J. K. MCKay & W. B. MCKay Building Construction Volume I, II, III Orient Longman
& IV (Metric Ed.) /
Sushil Kumar Building Construction Standards Publishers
Distributors, Delhi
Francis D. K. Ching Building Construction Wiley
Illustrated

Course Title : Computer Lab-I
Prerequisites : Knowledge of Basic on Auto Cad
Full Marks : 100
Course Objective : On successful completion of the course the students should be in a
position to solve two dimensional drafting and design problems.
CONTACT PERIODS
UNIT TOPIC ASSIGNMENTS
TUTORIAL SESSIONAL
1 INTRODUCTION 3 - -
2 REVISION OF DRAW & MODIFY COMMAND 2 18 4
3 MENU BARS & TOOL BARS (EXCEPT DRAW & 1 2 -
MODIFY)
4 TEXT COMMAND 1 4 1
5 EDIT TEXT COMMAND 1 2 -

6 DIMENSION COMMAND 1 4 1
7 EDIT DIMENSION COMMAND 1 2 -
8 INQUIRY COMMAND 1 2 1
9 PLOTING DRAWING 1 4
10 DRAW A TOTAL BUILDING DRAWING 3 22 1
TOTAL 15 60
CONTACT PERIODS :75 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT :10 TOTAL PERIODS :85
DETAILS COURSE CONTENT

UNIT TOPIC CONTENTS NO OF
SHEET
1 INTRODUCTION Discuss about AUTOCAD , Screen layout, Open -
drawing, Save drawing, Close & Quit drawing
2 REVISION OF DRAW Object selection methods, Line- describe various 4 (A4)
& MODIFY methods, Construction line, Ray, Multiline, Poly line,
COMMAND Rectangle, Polygon, Circle, Ellipse, Arc, Point, Helix,
Block, Hatch, Donut, Spline
.Erase, Copy, Move, Off set, Mirror, Rotate, Trim,
Extend, Break, Join, Chamfer, Fillet, Rotate, Scale,
Streatch, Array, Properties, Match properties.
3 MENU BARS & TOOL Cut, Copy, Paste, Redo, Undo -

BARS (EXCEPT DRAW Redraw, Regen, Regen all, Zoom, Pan
& MODIFY),
LAYER COMMAND
4 TEXT COMMAND Single line text, Multi line text, Difference between 1 (A4)
them
5 EDIT TEXT Edit text style, Height, Size, Colour Symbol etc.
COMMAND
6 DIMENSION Details of dimension menu bar 1 (A4)
COMMAND
7 EDIT DIMENSION Dimension line, Extension line, Arrow heads,
Dimension text, Dimension technics etc.
8 INQUIRY COMMAND Distance, Angle, ID point, Area, List, DB list, Drawing 1 (A4)
properties
9 PLOTING DRAWING Plot configuration, Paper size, Plotting area, Potrait &
land scape, Scale.
10 DRAW A TOTAL Each students is required to prepare a set of building 1 (A2/A1)
BUILDING DRAWING drawing , design by own or any other design approved
(PLANS, ELEVATIONS, by the teacher-in charge
SECTIONS)
COURSE OUTCOME:
At the end of the course students will be able to solve two dimensional drafting and design
problems by being able to use AutoCAD commands to make a drawing, create text,
dimension a drawing, hatch patterns and make & insert symbols. They will also be able to
plot drawings.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. AUTO CAD INSTANT REFERANCE BY George Omura &B.Robert Callori / BPB publications
2. Auto CAD 2004 for Architecture by Alan Jefferis, Michel Jones & Teresa Jefferies
3. Mastering Auto CAD by George Omuva
4. Engineering Drawing by N.D. Bhatt
Course Code : SI 201

Course Title : Internship-I
Number of Classes : NIL
Prerequisites : NIL
Course offered in : At the end of Second Semester
Course Category : SI
Full Marks : 100
Note:- Assessment of 100 marks will be done internally.
After the 2nd Semester for Internship-I, students are required to be involved in
Construction site visit or study tour to places related to the curriculum of Architecture.
After completion of Internship the student should prepare a comprehensive report to indicate
what he/ she has observed and learnt in the training period. The student may contact
Industrial Supervisor/ Faculty Mentor/ TPO for assigning topics and problems and should
prepare the final report on the assigned topics. The training report should be signed by the
Industrial Supervisor/ Internship Faculty Mentor, TPO and HOD.

Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Automobile Engineering [AE]
Revised 2022
Proposed Syllabus of Strength of Materials
Course Code AEPC 301

Course Title Strength of Materials
Number of Credits and L-T-P 3 [L – 2, T – 1, P - 0]
Course Category PC
Prerequisites Engineering Mechanics
Course Objectives:
After completing this course, the students will be able
 To apply the concept of Simple Stresses and Strains in solving related problems.
 To applythe concept of Strain Energy in solving related problems
 To understandthe concept of Shear Force and Bending Moment and apply the
concept in drawing SFDs and BMDs to related problems.
 To understand and applythe concept of Theory of Simple Bending and Deflection
of Beams.
 To understand the concept of Shear Stress in non-uniform bending.
 To understand and apply the concept of Torsion in Shafts and Springs.
 To understand and apply the concept of Principal stresses at a point in biaxial
stress case.
Course Contents:
Module Contact
Description of Topic
No. Hrs.
Simple Stresses and Strains:
 Types of forces – Gradual/static, impact, suddenly applied;

tensile, compressive etc.
 Stress (normal, shear, tensile, compressive etc), Strain
(both normal and shear) and their nature.
 Mechanical properties of common engineering materials –
1 Rigidity, elasticity, plasticity, stiffness, ductility, 10
malleability, hardness, toughness.
 Study of stress-strain diagram for M.S. and C.I. specimens;
Explanation of yielding, plasticity, ductility and toughness
from stress-strain diagram.
 Concept and significance of factor of safety and
working/allowable stress.
 Stress,strain and deflection values in bodies of uniform
section and of composite section under the influence of
normal forces.
 Thermal stresses in bodies of uniform section.
 Hoop stress and longitudinal stress in thin cylinder; concept
and derivation of formula.
Related simple numerical problems.
Strain Energy:
 Derivation of strain energy for the following cases: i)

Gradually applied load, ii) Suddenly applied load, iii)
Impact/shock load.
 Strain energy or resilience, proof resilience and modulus of
resilience.
Related simple numerical problems.
Shear Force & Bending Moment Diagrams:
 Types of beams with examples: a) Cantileverbeam, b)

Simply supported beam, c) Over hanging beam, d)
Continuous beam, e) Fixed beam.
 Types of Loads – Point and distributed; UDL and UVL
 Definition and explanation of shear force and bending
moment;Calculation of shear force and bending moment
2 and drawing the S.F and B.M. diagrams by the 8
analyticalmethod only for the following cases: a) Cantilever
with point loads, b) Cantilever with uniformly distributed
load, c) Simply supported beam with point loads, d) Simply
supported beam with UDL, e) Over hanging beam with
point loads, at the centre and at free ends, f) Over hanging
beam with UDL throughout, g) Combination of point and
UDL for the above;
Related numerical problems.
Theory of Simple Bending and Deflection of Beams:
 Explanation of terms: -Pure bending, Neutral layer, Neutral

Axis of both beam and cross-section, Section Modulus,
Moment of Resistance, Bending stress, Radius of curvature.
3  Assumptions in theory of simple bending. 8
 Bending Equation M/I = σ/Y = E/R with derivation. Stress
distribution diagram.
 Problems involving calculations of bending stress, modulus
of section and moment of resistance; Calculationof safe
loads and safe span and dimensions of cross- section.
 Beam sections of interest in automotive application: I-
section, Channel section, box section; Properties of these
sections that make those suitable for automotive
applications and areas of application.
 Shear stress in bending: - Rise of shear stress in non-
uniform bending. Shear stress equation τ ; No
derivation; Explanation of individual terms. Shear stress
variation in rectangular and circular cross section. (No
numerical problems from this topic)
 Definition and explanation of deflection as applied to
beams; Deflection formulae without proof for cantilever
and simply supported beamswith point load and UDL only
(Standard cases only)
Related numerical problems.
Torsion in Shafts and Springs:
 Definition and function of shaft.

 Calculation of polar M.I. for solid and hollow shafts.
 Assumptions in simple torsion.
 Derivation of the equation T/J=τ/R=Gϕ/L;
 Problems on design of shaft based on strength and rigidity;
 Use of propeller shaft, torsion bar inautomobiles.
4  Numerical Problems related to comparisonof strength and 8
weight of solid and hollow shafts;
 Classification of springs; Nomenclature of close coiled
helical spring.Use of helical springs in automobiles.
 Shear stress and deflection formula for closed coil helical
spring (without derivation).Stiffness of spring (No
composite spring).
 Numerical problems on close coiled helical spring to find
safe load, deflection, size of coil and number of coils.
Principal Stress:
 Stresses on an inclined plane.

 Complementary shear stress. Naming convention of shear
stress.
5  Ideal case of biaxial/plane stress; Values of normal and 8
shear stresses on an inclined plane in case of biaxial stress.
(No derivation – trigonometric expressions only)
 Concept of Principal planes,Principal stresses, Maximum
shear stress; their values and positions.
 Mohr’s circle of stress. Derivation of values of σ1, σ2 and
τmax from Mohr’s circle.
 Construction of Mohr’s circle in the following cases:
Uniaxial stress (a rod/bar in pure
tension/compression);pure shear (an element on a shaft in
pure torsion); equal tension and compression on two
perpendicular planes (no shear); mention equivalence of
the previous two scenarios; Discuss stress scenarios on
elements at various positions of a beam under non-uniform
bending – on neutral axis, on two extreme fibres,
somewhere in between neutral axis and extreme fibres.
 Numerical problems on Principal stress.
 Numerical problems on Mohr’s circle.
 Theories of Failure: - Principal stress theory, Principal
strain theory, Shear stress theory; Their applications and
limitations.
Total Number of Contact Hours 42
Weightage distribution in both objective, short and long answer type questions:
Group Name Module Number Weightage (%)

A 1 20
B 2&3 40
C 4&5 40
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
Compute stress and strain values and find the changes in axial dimension of
CO1
bodies of uniform section under the influence of normal forces.
CO2 Calculate thermal stresses, in bodies of uniform section.
Define resilience, proof – resilience and modulus of resilience and obtain
CO3 expressions for instantaneous stress developed in bodies subjected to
different loads.
Compute shear force and bending moment at any section of beam and draw
CO4 the S.F. & B.M diagrams and Calculate the safe load, safe span and dimensions
of cross section of beams subjected to UDL and Point loads.
Compare strength and weight of solid and hollow shaftsof the same length
CO5 and material subjected to torsionand compute the stress and deflection of the
closed coil helical spring.
Compute maximum/minimum normal and shear stresses in case of biaxial/
CO6
plane stresses.
Text Books:
1. Strength of Materials – S.S. Bhavikatti, Vikas Publishers

2. Strength of Materials – U.C. Jindal, Pearson
3. Strength of Materials – R.S. Khurmi, S.Chand Company Ltd. Delhi
4. A Text Book strength of Material– R.K. Bansal, Laxmi Publication New Delhi
5. Strength of Materials – D.S. Bedi, Khanna Book Publishing Co. (P) Ltd., Delhi,
2017
6. Strength of Materials – B.C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain & Arun Kumar Jain, Laxmi
Publications,New Delhi, 2013
Reference Books:
1. Strength of Materials (SI Edition) – R.C Hibbeler, Pearson

2. Strength of Materials – Stephen Timoshenko, CBS
3. Strength of Materials – R. Subramanian, Oxford
Proposed Syllabus of Heat Power Engineering

Course Title Heat Power Engineering
Course Category PC
Prerequisites Nil
Course Objectives:
 To know the applications of thermodynamic principles and processes.

 To recognize the working of various Steam Boilers, functions of various
accessories and mountings of boilers.
 To differentiate the different air standard cycle and calculate their efficiency
 To realize the working process of air compressor and a compression between
signal stage and multi stage air compressor and different types of air
compressor.
 To achieve some idea on refrigeration process and air conditioning process.
 To aware regarding different types of heat transfer process and their application
Module Contact
No. Hrs.
Basic of Engineering Thermodynamics
1.1. Thermodynamics, System, Surroundings, Universe,

1.2. Types of Systems- closed system, open system, isolated
system, flow system, non-flow system, and examples.
1.3. Properties of systems- Extensive and Intensive properties
with symbols and units. Thermodynamic state, Path,
Process, Quasi-static process, reversible, irreversible, cycle,
thermodynamic equilibrium, Point function and path
1 10
function.
1.4. Pressure- Units, standard atmospheric pressure, gauge
pressure, Absolute pressure. Temperature- units, Meaning
of N.T.P. and S.T.P.
1.5. Energy: —Types, Thermodynamic definition of Heat and
Work, Difference between heat and work, internal energy,
entropy, flow work and enthalpy.
1.6. Perfect gas and real gas, Equation of state, characteristic gas
constant, Mole of gas, Universal gas constant.
1.7. Specific heats of ideal gas, relation between specific heats
and Characteristic gas constant.
1.8. Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics
1.9. First law of Thermodynamics, Mechanical equivalent of
heat, General energy equations for non-flow process & flow
process, principle of conservation energy.
1.10. Second law of Thermodynamics- statement (Kelvin-Planck
& Claudius), C.O.P of refrigerator and heat pump. (Simple
numerical).
1.11. Various Thermodynamic processes: Isobaric, isochoric,
Isothermal, Adiabatic, Isentropic and Polytrophic with
representation on P-V & T-S diagram, formula for work
done, heat transfer, change in internal energy, enthalpy,
entropy etc. (Derivations) (Simple numerical)
Air Standard cycles
2.1. Introduction – assumptions – efficiency of the cycle,

Reversible cycle – Irreversible cycle.
2 7
2.2. Types of air Standard thermodynamic cycles – Carnot cycle
–Otto cycle – Diesel cycle – Dual combustion cycle,- Joule's
cycle -Open and close Brayton cycle– derivation – P-V & T-S
diagram, their efficiencies & simple problems.
Properties of steam andmain components of steam power
plant
3.1. Formation of steam, Basic terms associated with steam

formation: saturated liquid line, saturated vapour line,
liquid region, vapour region, wet region, superheat region,
critical point, saturated liquid, saturated vapour, saturation
temperature, sensible heat, latent heat, wet steam, dryness
fraction, wetness fraction, saturated steam, superheated
steam, degree of superheat
3 3.2. Steam Table & its use, Enthalpy- Entropy diagram of steam 6
(Mollier Chart) and its use. (Simple Numerical)
3.3. Determination of enthalpy, internal energy, internal latent
heat, entropy of wet, dry and superheated steam at a given
pressure and temperature using steam tables (Simple
Numerical)
3.4. Study of boiler-Water Tube & Fire Tube boiler, boiler
mounting and Accessories. [only name, location in boiler
and function]
3.5. Steam condenser, function, location in steam power Plant.
3.6. Steam Turbine: Classification of turbine, location in steam
power plant.
Air Compressors
4.1. Uses of compressed air;

4.2. Functions and Types of air compressors; Single stage
reciprocating air compressor - its construction and working
4 4
(with line diagram) using P-V diagram; (simple Numerical)
4.3. Multi stage compressors – Advantages over single stage
compressors, - inter cooler. (No numerical)
4.4. Rotary compressors: Centrifugal compressor, axial flow
compressor, screw compressor and vane type compressors.
Refrigeration & Air-conditioning
Refrigeration
5.1. Definition – Refrigeration, heat pump, heat engine, C.O.P,

EER (Energy Efficient Ratio),ISEER (Indian Sessional Energy
Efficient Ratio), BEE Star Rating,& unit of refrigeration
5.2. Refrigerant – properties required, common commercial
refrigerants, Environment friendly refrigerants.
5.3. Air Refrigeration system, Bell Coleman cycle (reversed Joule
cycle): components, working & applications;
5.4. Vapour Compression system: components, working &
applications (schematic layout, p-h diagram, function &
working of each component in the circuit)..(No Numerical)
5 Air conditioning 9
5.5. Definition and classification of Air conditioning

5.6. Basic concept of Psychrometry including the following:
5.7. Dry air – Moist Air, - Water Vapour, - Saturated air – dry
bulb temperature - wet bulb temperature – dew point
temperature -humidity - specific and relative humidity and
Degree of saturation. Psychrometer.
5.8. Psychometric chart and its uses – psychometric processes –
sensible heating and cooling – humidification –
dehumidification.(No Numerical)
5.9. Industrial Air-Conditioning; Window Air-Conditioner;
Summer Air-Conditioning system, Winter Air-Conditioning
system, Year-round Air-Conditioning system.
5.10. Car Air conditioning system. (only block diagram and
working)
Heat Transfer
6.1. Modes of heat transfer--- Conduction, Convection and

Radiation.
6.2. Conduction- Fourier’s law, thermal conductivity- its units.
Conduction through composite walls, Thermal resistance.
[Simple numerical].
6.3. Convective heat transfer – Newton’s law of cooling, Heat
6 6
Transfer Co-efficient – its units, Combined conduction and
convection, Heat exchanger, types & application, Overall
heat transfer co-efficient. [Simple numerical].
6.4. Heat transfer by Radiation [for introductory concept only]: -
- Thermal Radiation, Absorptivity, Transmissivity,
Reflectivity, Emissivity, black and grey bodies, Stefan-
Boltzman law. (No numerical)
6.5. Application of concept of heat transfer in automobiles.
Weightage distribution in both objective, short and long answer type questions::
Group Name Unit Number Weightage (%)

A 1&2 40
B 3, 4 & 5 45
C 6 15
Course Outcome:
Familiar with heat, work, thermodynamics law and different thermodynamics

CO1
process.
Calculate the work done, enthalpy, internal energy, entropy and thermal
CO2
efficiency of air stander cycle.
Distinguish between water tube and fire-tube boilers and explain the function all
CO3 the mountings and accessories of boiler and turbine and also know the uses of
steam tables.
Describe the constructional features of air compressor and working of different
CO4
air compressors.
Know about the refrigeration and air-conditioning process and different
CO5
psychometric properties.
CO6 Methodize the different heat transfer process and their application.
Text Books:
1. Thermal Engineering – R.S. Khurmi and J.K. Gupta, 18th Edition, S. Chand & Co,
NewDelhi.
2. A Course in Thermal Engineering – S. Domkundwar& C.P. Kothandaraman,
Dhanpat Rai& Publication, New Delhi
Reference Books:
1. Treatise on Heat Engineering in MKS and SI Units – V.P. Vasandani& D.S. Kumar,
Metropolitan Book Co. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.
2. Thermal Engineering – P.L. Ballaney, Khanna Publishers, 2002
3. Thermal Engineering – R. K. Rajput,8th Edition, Laxmi publications Pvt Ltd, New
Delhi.
4. Thermal Engineering - Mahesh M. Rathore, McGraw Hill India
Proposed Syllabus of Automotive Materials and Manufacturing Processes

Automotive Materials And
Course Title
Manufacturing Processes
Number of Credits and L-T-P 42 (L-3, T-0, P-0)
Course Category PC
Prerequisites Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To gain knowledge about different categories of engineering materials along

with their properties and application in automotive industries
2. To gain knowledge about different types of manufacturing processes along with
their characteristics and proper use in automotive industries
3. To gain knowledge about different manufacturing processes those enhance the
mechanical properties of the metallic materials required for automotive
industries
4. To gather basic knowledge about formation of different standard surfaces by
means of machine tools like lathe
CourseContents:
Module Contact
No. Hrs.
1. Engineering Materials
1.1. Introduction
1 1.2. Classification of engineering materials (2)
1.3. General properties, uses of different types of engineering
materials
2. Metals & Alloys
2.1. Ferrous & nonferrous metals & its alloys used for
automotive
2.2. Steels: carbon steel and alloy steels used in automobile
industries
2.3. Effects of alloying elements on steel like chromium, nickel,
2 (4)
silicon, molybdenum, tungsten, etc.
2.4. Application of various steel along with their composition
2.5. Aluminium & its alloys, such as wrought Aluminium, 2xxx
series (alloyed with Copper), 3xxx series (alloyed with
Manganege), 4xxx series (alloyed with Silicon) & 5xxx series
(alloyed with Magnesium): composition, properties and use
2.6. Copper & its alloys such as wrought copper, leaded copper,
leaded brass, leaded bronze: composition, properties and
use
3. Polymers, Ceramics & Composite Materials
3.1. Thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics: properties and
applications
3.2. Thermoplastics-Nylons and Polypropylene. Thermosetting
Plastics-Epoxy resins and Polyesters Rubber – Natural
andsynthetic: Properties & applications (no detail)
3 (4)
3.3. Properties and applications of different ceramic materials
like glass, in automotive industries
3.4. Composite materials: Metals MatrixComposite,
CeramicsMatrixComposite, Polymers MatrixComposite such
as Carbon Fibre Reinforced Plastic, Carbon Fibre Reinforced
Plastic, Natural Fibre Reinforced Plastic: Application area
4. Manufacturing processes
4.1. Definition and classification of manufacturing processes
4.2. Concepts of formative, subtractive and additive
4 (2)
manufacturing; their applications
4.3. Concepts of property improvement processes and joining
processes; their examples
5. Formative manufacturing processes
5.1. Different formative processes used for manufacturing
automobile parts: casting, forging, rolling, extrusion
5.2. Working principle and use of forging, rolling and extrusion.
5.3. Classification of forging processes with application area
5.4. Examples of different automobile components made of
forging, rolling, extrusion
5.5. Working principle and use of casting process
5 (12)
5.6. Concepts of moulding and moulding sand
5.7. Concepts of pattern and their allowances
5.8. Working principle, advantages and limitations of some
modern casting processes like centrifugal casting, die
casting and shell moulding
5.9. Concepts of some press works like blanking, piercing,
notching, lancing, spinning, trimming, shaving and
deburring.
6. Subtractive manufacturing processes
6.1. Chip and cutting tool
6 6.2. Mechanism of chip formation (4)
6.3. Type of chip
6.4. Type of cutting tool:
 single point and multi-point cutting tool
 carbide tools, ceramics tools and CBN tools
6.5. Speed, feed, depth of cut both
6.6. Surfaces produced by different machine tools such as Lathe,
drilling, milling, shaping machine
7. External cylindrical surfaces manufacturing
7.1. Lathe and its characterises
7.2. Specification of lathe
7.3. Important components of a Lathe and its function
7.4. Job holding devices, such as centre, chucks, dog, face plate,
etc.
7.5. Tool holding devices
7.6. Types of tool used in lathe like solid shank, insert type,
7. brazed tool, etc. (7)
7.7. Different operation performed by a lathe to produce
different external cylindrical surfaces like
 Turning,
 Taper turning
 Thread cutting
 Knurling
 Grooving and shouldering
7.8. Cantering and facing operation done by lathe
8. Properties improvement processes: Heat treatment
8.1. Heat treatment is a manufacturing process
8.2. Concept of phase and phase transformation
8.3. Iron-Iron Carbide (Fe-Fe3C) equilibrium diagram
8.4. Common heat treatment processes and their application
 Annealing
 Normalizing
8. (7)
 Hardening,
 Tempering
8.5. Principle and use of surface hardening processes like
 Carburizing,
 Nitriding,
 Cyaniding,
8.6. Induction and flame hardening

A 1, 2 & 3 40
B 4, 5 & 6 40
C 7&8 20
Course Outcomes:
Illustrate different fundamental categories of engineering materials along

CO1
with their properties and application in automotive industries
Explain fundamental classes of manufacturing processes such as
CO2 formative manufacturing processes along with different sub-categories
and their use in automotive industries
Explain fundamental classes of manufacturing processes such as
CO3 subtractive manufacturing processes and their use in automotive
industries
Explain working principles, characteristics and method of forming
CO4
different types of external cylindrical surfaces produced by a Lathe
Reference Books:
1. A Text Book of Material Science & Metallurgy – O.P. Khanna, Dhanpath Rai and
Sons, New Delhi. 2003.
2. Material Science & Engineering – R.K. Rajput, S.K. Kataria & Sons, New Delhi,
2004.
3. Material Science – R.S. Khurmi, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
4. Manufacturing technology – P N Rao, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications
5. Elements of workshop Technology (Volume I & II) – S. K. Hajra Chaudary, Bose &
Roy, Media Promoters and Publishers Limited.
5. Manufacturing Technology, Metal Cutting & Machine tools– P. N. Rao, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publications
6. Production Technology – R.B. Gupta, Satya Prakashan, New Delhi
Proposed Syllabus of Automotive Chassis

Course Title Automotive Chassis
Course Category PC
Prerequisites NIL
Course Objectives:
1. To learn about the constructional details of chassis.

2. To gain knowledge about various steering system, steering linkages and
steering gear boxes
3. To learn about the phenomenon of different components used in suspension
and brake systems.
4. To learn about the various aspects of wheels and tyres.
Course Contents:
Module Contact
No. Hrs.
Vehicle layout and Chassis frame
1.1 Definition of an automobile.

1.2 General Vehicle layout; types of layout.
1.3 Classification of Vehicle layout with respect to Drive,
Location of Engine, Arrangement of Engine (with Sketch)
1.4 Major assemblies – their locations and their functions.
1 1.5 Necessity of Frame and its functions 6
1.6 Type of frames, Conventional (Ladder and X – Member
type), Semi integral and Integral types, frames construction,
material, frame alignment. Frame sections- Channel, Box
and Tubular Sections
1.7 Classification and Specifications of Chassis.
1.8 Defects in frames
1.9 Different Chassis Parameters (definitions)
Front Axle and Steering
2 6
2.1 Front Axle: Types of front axle - Dead axle, live axle.
2.2 Type of stub axle arrangements- Elliot, reverse Elliot,
Lamoine, and reverse Lamoine.
2.3 Front wheel assembly.
2.4 Steering system.
2.5 Steering linkages. Steering geometry and its effects –Caster,
camber and king pin Inclination, toe in– toe out, correct
steering angle. Under steering and over steering, Turning
radius.
2.6 Working Principle, Construction and application of Steering
gear box – rack and pinion type, recirculating ball type,
worm and roller type.
2.7 Construction and application of Steering gear box – worm
and sector, screw and nut, worm and peg.
2.8 Adjustable steering system, Collapsible steering column,
construction & working Principle.
2.9 Ackerman and Davis Steering Principle and linkage.
2.10 Defects & Troubleshooting
Suspension Systems
3.1 Functions of suspension system. Sprung weight, unsprung

weight, common suspension terms
3.2 Front and rear axle suspension, rigid and independent
suspension, comparison.
3.3 Types of Rigid Axle suspension system - parallel leaf spring
type, leading arm and trailing arm type, trailing arm with
3 twist beam type, four link type 8
3.4 Types of Independent suspension system – McPherson
Strut, Wishbone type
3.5 Leaf spring and their types, Helper springs (variable rate
springs), coil spring torsion bar arrangement and shock
absorber.
3.6 Use of Anti roll bar, stabilizer bar.
3.7 Shock absorbers – Telescopic and Gas Filled
3.8 Suspension system trouble shooting
Brake System
4.1 Introduction, Principle of braking.

4.2 Function and necessity of brakes, Braking Effect- weight
transfer.
4 14
4.3 Classification of brakes and braking systems.
4.4 Construction and working of - Drum brake.
4.5 Concept of Leading Shoe & Trailing Shoe.
4.6 Friction materials used for brake shoes and pads.
Characteristics of friction material - brake fade, coefficient
of friction, dry friction and wet friction.
4.7 Disc brake, types, construction and working principle, use.
4.8 Solid and ventilated disc brakes.
4.9 Comparison between Drum Brake and Disc Brakes
4.10 Construction and working of - Mechanical braking
system.
4.11 Hydraulic Braking system, construction & working
principle.
4.12 Master cylinder, wheel cylinder construction &
working principle, bleeding of Brakes.
4.13 Properties of Brake Fluid and their specifications,
Brake Bleeding.
4.14 Exhaust brake, Parking brake, Adjustments of
Brakes, Brake Test.
4.15 Brake System Troubleshooting.
Wheels and Tyres
5.1 Wheels – Functions, Types of wheels, wired spoke wheel,

disc and alloy wheels
5.2 Tyre- Necessity of Tyre, construction, working and
comparison of a tubed tyre and tubeless tyre
5.3 Type of Rims.
5.4 Types of tyre- Radial, Cross Ply, Belted Bias Tyre.
5.5 Specification of tyre, Concept of Aspect Ratio
5.6 Types of Tread patterns
5 5.7 Effect of Inflation pressure on the life of tyre and tyre 8
rotation
5.8 Tyre materials, construction, Tubular tyres.
5.9 Airless tyres
5.10 Balancing of wheel tyre assembling (static and
dynamic).
 Tyre Rotation.
 Tyre Retreading.
 Tube Vulcanizing.
5.11 Factors affecting tyre performance and life.
5.12 Troubleshooting of Wheels and tyres

A 1&2 40
B 3&4 40
C 5 20
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Classify the chassis layout with reference to the power train location.
Explain the different designs consideration of front axles and steering
CO2
system for proper rolling of the tyre.
Explain the types of wheels and its constructional details which are used
CO3
in Automobile.
Explain the various Braking systems and in which circumstances each one
CO4
of them is used.
Text Books:
1. Automobile Engineering, Vol.1, Dr. Kripal Singh, Standard Publishers

2. Automotive Chassis, A. K. Babu, Scitech Publications
Reference Books:
1. Automobile Engineering, Prof. R.B. Gupta, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)
Ltd.
2. A Textbook of Automobile Engineering, R.K. Rajput, Laxmi Publications
3. Automobile Engineering, Sudhir Kumar Saxena, Laxmi Publications
4. Automobile Engineering, Kamaraju Ramakrishna, PHI Learning Private Limited
5. Automobile Engineering, K. K. Ramalingam, Scitech Publications
Proposed Syllabus of Automotive Engines

Course Title Automotive Engines
Course Category PC
Prerequisites Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To gain knowledge on basics of automotive SI and CI engines, their types,

construction, working principle and comparison.
2. To study the cooling and lubricating systems adopted in automobile engines.
3. To learn the properties of gasoline and diesel fuel and combustion process
involved in petrol and diesel engines.
4. To gain knowledge on the fuel feed systems of petrol and diesel engines.
5. To study the different parameters relating to engine performance and to learn
the pollution characteristics of SI and CI engine.
Course Contents:
Module Contact
No. Hrs.
Engine Fundamentals and Constructional Features
1.1 Engine terminology – bore, stroke, TDC, BDC, clearance

volume, swept volume, compression ratio, volumetric
efficiency.
1.2 Classification of engine, Concept and working of 4-stroke
petrol engine, 4-stroke diesel engine, 2-stroke petrol engine,
Comparison.
1 1.3 Engine working cycles – Theoretical and actual Otto & 7
Diesel cycle.
1.4 Constructional features of engine components – (use,
location, application, material)
 Cylinder block and cylinder liners.
 Piston assembly
 Connecting rod
 Crank shaft
 Flywheel
 Camshaft
 Valve – Poppet valve, valve actuating mechanism, valve
timing diagram
 Manifolds – inlet and exhaust
 Mufflers
Engine Cooling and Lubrication System
2.1 Engine Cooling System – Purpose of cooling, types of cooling

system.
2.2 Air cooling system – components, uses, merits and demerits.
2.3 Water cooling system components – water jacket, cooling
pump, thermostat valve, cooling fan, radiator - working
2 principle. 8
2.4 Engine Lubrication System – Function, types of lubricating
system, properties of lubricating oil, rating of lubricating oil.
2.5 Layout and working of – Splash lubrication, petrol-oil
lubrication, wet sump lubrication, dry sump lubrication,
applications.
2.6 Causes of oil consumption and oil contamination, crank-case
ventilation.
Fuels - Properties & Combustion Theory
3.1 Hydrocarbon fuels – Calorific value of fuel (HCV & LCV),

Properties of SI and CI engine fuel, Octane Number, Cetane
Number, Fire Point, Flash Point, Cloud Point.
3.2 Combustion in SI engine – Stages of combustion, Ignition
lag, Flame propagation, Rate of pressure rise, Factors
affecting combustion in SI engine.
3.3 Abnormal combustion in SI engine – Pre-ignition,
Detonation, Surface ignition, their effects on performance of
engine, control of abnormal combustion.
3 8
3.4 Combustion in CI engine – Stages of combustion, Delay
period – its’ significance, factors affecting delay period,
importance of air motion in CI engine, Complete
Combustion – importance of excess air.
3.5 Abnormal combustion in CI engine – Knocking – its’ effects
and control, difference between abnormal combustion in SI
and CI engine.
3.6 Engine Troubleshooting - Probable causes and remedies of
different symptoms like black smoke, blue smoke, white
smoke, engine overheating, excessive fuel consumption,
excessive oil consumption, different noises etc.
Fuel Feed System in Petrol Engine
4.1 Layout of fuel feed system in petrol engine, Gravity feed

system.
4.2 Components of fuel feed system – Construction & Working
of fuel pump (Mechanical & Electrical), air cleaner (dry &
wet type), Simple Carburettor. Electronic Carburettor –
4 Principle and application. 6
4.3 Air-fuel ratio – Concept of rich and lean mixture,
Requirement of mixture strength at during different
operating conditions like starting, idling, cruising,
acceleration etc., Limitations of carburettor.
4.4 Petrol injection – Necessity, Advantages of petrol injection,
Disadvantages, Comparison with carburetted fuel supply
system.
Fuel Feed System in Diesel Engine
5.1 Layout of fuel feed system in diesel engines, Types of diesel

injection system – Layout of Unit injection, Distributor
system and Common Rail system.
5.2 Basic components – Fuel tank, Fuel lines, Fuel filters, Fuel
5 6
feed pump, Air Cleaner, Fuel injection pump, Fuel injectors.
5.3 Fuel Injection Pump – Construction & operation of Inline
and Distributor type pump, Phasing and calibration of FIP.
Overview of electronic Fuel Injector.
5.4 Governor – Purpose of governor, Types of governor,
Working of mechanical governor.
Engine Performance & Testing
6.1 Engine Performance parameters - Engine torque, Brake

power, Indicated power, Frictional power, Mean effective
pressure [on IP & BP], Fuel Consumption, Specific fuel
consumption.
6.2 Engine efficiency – Indicated thermal efficiency, Brake
thermal efficiency, Mechanical Efficiency, Efficiency ratio,
6 7
Air standard efficiency, Volumetric Efficiency [on mass &
volume].
6.3 Measurement of brake power – Dynamometer, Types of
dynamometer, Rope brake dynamometer.
6.4 Measurement of power of single cylinder and multi cylinder
engines with the help of Morse test.
6.5 Making a heat balance sheet.
6.6 Simple problems to calculate engine power, efficiency etc.
and preparation of heat balance sheet.

A 1&2 30
B 3&4 40
C 5&6 30
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able:
To understand the actual engine working principle of 2-stroke/4-stroke, SI

CO1
and CI engines and their comparisons.
To define and identify various components of SI and CI engines and their
CO2
sub‐systems - cooling, lubrication and fuel feed system.
To gain basic knowledge on SI and CI engine combustion and its related
CO3
parameters.
To apply their knowledge in analyzing the engine performance and
CO4
pollution characteristics.
Reference Books:
1. R. B. Gupta, Automobile Engineering, Satya Prakashan, New Delhi.

2. Dr. Kirpal Singh, Automobile Engineering (Vol. – 2), Standard Publishers
Distributors, New Delhi.
3. S. Srinivasan, Automotive Mechanics, Tata McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi.
4. M. L. Mathur and R.P.Sharma, Internal Combustion Engine, Dhanpath Rai
Publications (P) Ltd, New Delhi.
5. V. Ganesan, Internal Combustion Engines, Tata‐McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New
Delhi.
Proposed Syllabus of Heat Power Engineering Lab

Course Title Heat Power Engineering Laboratory
Course Category PC
Prerequisites Nil
Course Objectives:
 To familiar with theworking of boilers and identify the differentaccessories and

function of accessories.
 To know the process of dismantling and assembling of compressors and identify
the different component.
 To differentiate the different type of heat exchanger.
 To identify the different component of Refrigeration and Air conditioning Unit.
 To differentiate between Refrigeration unit and Air Conditioning Unit
At least 06 practical have to be done.
Remark
Sl Contact (whether
Topics for Practice
No. Hrs. mandatory
or not)
Study and compare various heat exchangers such as
radiators, evaporators, condensers, plate type heat
1 exchangers etc. by using either actual cut-section model or 6 Mandatory
with the help of presentations/charts/animated videos/
wooden or metallic models etc.
Conduct performance test on A/C test rig to determine At-list one
2 6
COP from Sl.
Conduct performance test on Refrigeration Test Rig to No 2 & Sl.
3 6
determine COP of the refrigerator No. 3
Thermal conductivity test of a solid metallic rod or thick At-list one
4 4
slab from Sl.
No 4 &
5 Calculation of STEFAN BOLTZMANN CONSTANT of sphere. 4
Sl.No. 5
Study of high-pressure boiler (With the help of
6 presentations/charts/animated videos/ wooden or 4 Optional
metallic models etc.)
Study of boiler mountings and accessories (With the help
7 of presentations/charts/animated videos/ wooden or 4 Optional
metallic models etc.)
Study of Refrigeration unit. (With the help of
metallic models/actuals cut section model etc.)
Study of Air Conditioning Unit. (With the help of
metallic models/ actuals cut section model etc.)
Dismantling and assembling of one reciprocating or one
10 4 Optional
rotary compressor.
Conduct performance test on single stage reciprocating
11 4 Optional
compressor
Demonstration of Leak detection of refrigeration unit. (by
using either actual model or with the help of
12 4 Optional
presentations/charts/animated videos/ wooden or
metallic models etc
Course Outcome:
CO1 Recognize the different component of compressor and boiler

CO2 Estimate the performance characteristics single stage air compressor
CO3 Find the thermal conductivity of metallic rod
CO4 Calculate the co efficient of performance of refrigerator and A/C
CO5 Characterize the different type of heat exchanger.
Reference Books:
1. Thermal Engineering – R.S. Khurmi and J.K. Gupta, 18th Edition, S. Chand & Co,
New Delhi.
2. A Course in Thermal Engineering – S. Domkundwar & C.P. Kothandaraman,
Dhanpat Rai& Publication, New Delhi
Proposed Syllabus of Automotive Materials and Manufacturing Processes Lab

Automotive Materials and
Course Title
Manufacturing Processes Laboratory
Number of Credits and L-T-P 2 [L - 0, T - 0, P - 2]
Course Category PC
Prerequisites Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To gather knowledge about establishment of safety in working condition.

2. To gain knowledge about basic engineering materials used in automotive
industries.
3. To know the different methods adopted in primary manufacturing processes like
rolling, extrusion, forging, casting.
4. To develop knowledge and skill for promoting different metal cutting processes
required in automotive industries made by lathe and drill along with press work.
5. To acquire knowledge about fundamental heat treatment processes adopted for
enhancing mechanical properties of automobile parts.
CourseContents:
Remark
Sl. Contact (whether
Topics for Practice
No. Hrs. mandatory
or not)
Develop one pattern for a given job considering all
1 aspects of pattern making forgroup of 4 to 6 student. Job 4 Mandatory
shall involve spit pattern with core, coreprint.
Prepare a sand mould for any one of the above patterns.
2 Demonstrate the use of hand tools in preparation of 5 Mandatory
moulding process.
Making of one job for group of 4 to 6 student involving
followingoperations on a lathe machine:
Facing, taper turning, step turning, threading, knurling
operations
3 10 Mandatory
And/ or
Making of one job for group of 4 to 6 student involving
followingoperations using a drilling machine:
Drilling, reaming, counter boring, counter sinking, Spot
facing operations.
Optional
(Any three
Prepare one wooden solid pattern per student as per
4 3 of optional
givendrawing.
are
compulsory)
With the help of presentations/charts/animated Optional
videos/wooden or metallic models etc. (wherever (Any three
5 available) study of different Rolling processes along 3 of optional
with their applications particularly in automotive field, are
advantages, limitations and probable defects. compulsory)
6 available) study of Different Extrusion processes along 3 of optional
7 available) study of Different Forging processes along 3 of optional
8 available) study of Different Press Work processes 3 of optional
along with their applications particularly in automotive are
field, advantages, limitations and probable defects. compulsory)
9 available) study of different Heat treatment processes 3 of optional
along with their typical applications in automotive are
industries, advantages and limitations. compulsory)
Course Outcomes:
Explain working principle, applications, advantages and limitations of

CO1
different primary production systems along with press working.
Construct single piece pattern by individual students starting from a given
CO2
drawing.
CO3 Develop pattern and sand mould projects in a group.
Demonstratedifferent fundamental machining operations on a lathe and/or
CO4
drill machine.
Explain working principle, applications, advantages and limitations of heat
CO5
treatment processes.
Reference Books:
1. S. K. Hajra Choudhury, A. K. Hajra Choudhury, Elements of Workshop

Technology. Vol. - I and II, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
2. P. N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology, Vol. –I, II & III, The McGraw Hill Co.
3. Gerling, All about Machine Tools, Wiley Eastern Limited.
4. B. S. Raghuwanshi, Workshop Technology, Vol- I, II & III, Dhanpat Rai& Co.
Proposed Syllabus of Automotive Chassis Lab

Course Title Automotive Chassis Laboratory
Course Category PC
Prerequisites Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To understand the various dimension and terms related to chassis.

2. To understand the working of steering system and steering gearbox.
3. To observe various parts of axles and understand their functions.
4. To perform various tests on wheel geometry and calculate the different
parameters.
5. To understand various parts of braking and suspension system of a vehicle.
Course Content:
Remarks
Sl. Contact (whether
Topics for Practice
No. Hrs. mandatory
or not)
Study of safety precautions to be followed and
1 2 Mandatory
knowledge of first aid in an automobile workshop.
Study, measurement and drawing of schematic
diagram of a car/ vehicle chassis.
Parameters to be measured
i. Wheel Base
ii. Front Track Mandatory
iii. Rear Track (at least six
2 iv. Ground Clearance 2 parameters
v. Overall Length to be
vi. Overall Height from Ground measured)
vii. Front Overhang
viii. Rear Overhang
ix. Angle of Approach
x. Angle of Departure
xi. Ramp break over angle
xii. Eyebrow height (Front and rear)
3 Study of steering system assembly. 2 Mandatory
Dismantling and assembling of steering gearbox.
4 a) Rack and Pinion 6 Mandatory

b) Recirculating Ball
c) Worm and Roller
Study of different types of front and rear axles.
i. Front Axle
a) Dead axle
b) Live axle
ii. Rear Axle
Mandatory
a) Semi floating rear axle
5 6 (any two
b) Full floating rear axle
stub axle)
c) Three quarter floating rear axle.
iii. Stub Axle
a) Elliot
b) Reverse Elliot
c) Lamoine
d) Reverse Lamoine
Study and measurement of different wheel geometry.
Parameters to be measured
6 2 Mandatory
i. Caster
ii. Camber
iii. King pin inclination
iv. Toe in– Toe out
Study and measurement of different parts of braking
system.
a) Disc Brake
b) Drum Brake
7 Parameters to be measured 4 Mandatory
i. Master cylinder push rod length

ii. Diameter of push rod
iii. Travel of push rod (stroke of master cylinder)
iv. Thickness of Pad for Disc
v. Rotor thickness
vi. Rotor swept area
vii. Type of caliper
viii. No of Piston (action and reaction type)
ix. Caliper pin diameter
x. Width of the shoe
xi. Diameter of the drum
xii. Shoe length
xiii. Drum to shoe clearance
xiv.Thickness of lining
xv. Wheel cylinder (No of Piston)
xvi.Type of shoe (L/T)
Study and measurement of different parts of front
suspension and rear suspension.
8 4 Mandatory
a) McPherson Strut
b) Wishbone arm
c) Leaf Spring
Course Outcomes:
CO1 Evaluate the different dimensions related to chassis.

CO2 Describe the steering system, sub-systems and its application.
CO3 Distinguish between different types of axles and their usage.
CO4 Demonstrate the different wheel geometries.
Explain the application of different braking and suspension systems of
CO5
automobile.
Reference Books:
1. Automobile Engineering, Prof. R.B. Gupta, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)
Ltd.
2. A Textbook of Automobile Engineering, R.K. Rajput, Laxmi Publications
Proposed Syllabus of Automotive Engine Lab

Course Title Automotive Engine Laboratory
Course Category PC
Prerequisites Nil
Course Objectives:
1. To know the use of different tools and special tools used for dismantling and
assembling automobile engines.
2. To gather knowledge about the basic operation of different types of engines used
in automobiles.
3. To identify the various components of the cooling and lubrication system and
know their locations and functions.
4. To gain knowledge on the fuel feed systems of petrol and diesel engines.
5. To perform engine performance tests to calculate engine power and efficiency.
Course Contents:
Remark
Contact (whether
Sl. No. Topics for Practice
Hrs. mandatory
or not)
Operate Cut Section model to know engine
nomenclature, understand basic engine operation,
identify, locate and compare various components of -
1 8 Mandatory
a) Four stroke Petrol Engine
b) Four stroke Diesel Engine
c) Two stroke petrol Engine
Conduct engine performance test in Engine Test Rig
2 for petrol/ diesel engines to find engine performance 6 Mandatory
parameters and prepare heat balance sheet.
Dismantle & Assemble an Engine and practice the
same. Identify and know the operations and functions
3 6 Mandatory
of different general & special tools used for
dismantling and assembling the engine.
With the help of cut section models / charts /
4 presentations / animated videos etc., study the 4 Optional
cooling system of an engine; identify and locate the
various components and draw its layout.
presentations / animated videos etc., study the
5 4 Optional
lubricating system of an engine; identify and locate
the various components and draw its layout.
presentations / animated videos etc., study the
6 various components of the fuel supply system of 4 Optional
petrol & diesel engines, compare their operation and
draw their layout.
Construct the Valve timing diagram of a four-stroke
7 4 Optional
engine.
Note: Students must perform six practical with Sl. No. 1, 2 and 3 as compulsory
and any two from the optional.
Course Outcomes:
Explain the operation of different engines used in automobiles, identify and

CO1
locate their components.
Describe the operation, location and function of the components of cooling
CO2
and lubricating system of automobiles.
Demonstrate the location and function of the components of the fuel supply
CO3
system.
Conduct engine performance test to find out the power, efficiency and other
CO4
performance parameters of an engine.
Reference Books:
1. R. B. Gupta, Automobile Engineering, Satya Prakashan, New Delhi.

2. Dr. Kirpal Singh, Automobile Engineering (Vol. – 2), Standard Publishers
Distributors, New Delhi.
West Bengal State Council of Technical Education
(A Statutory Body Under West Bengal Act XXI 1995)
WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA IN ENGINEERING COURSES
COURSE NAME: FULL TIME DIPLOMA IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
DURATION OF COURSE: 6 SEMESTERS

CURRICULAR STRUCTURE FOR PART-II (SEMESTER 3) OF THE
FULL-TIME DIPLOMA COURSES IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
BRANCH: CHEMICAL ENGINEERING Semester 3

Total
SL Code
Category Course Title Class Full Internal ESE
No No L P Credit
per marks Marks Marks
week
CHEPC Outlines of
Program
1 201 Chemical 3 - 3 3 100 40 60
core
Engineering
CHEEP
Program Momentum
2 C203 3 - 3 3 100 40 60
core Transfer
CHEEP Engineering
Program
3 C205 Thermodyn 3 - 3 3 100 40 60
core
amics
CHEPC
Program Mechanical
4 207 3 - 3 3 100 40 60
core Operations
CHEPC
Program Energy
5 209 3 - 3 3 100 40 60
core Engineering
CHEPC Chemical
Program
6 211 Technology 3 - 3 3 100 60 40
core
-I
CHEPC Momentum
Program
7 213 Transfer - 3 2 1 100 60 40
core
Lab
CHEPC Mechanical
Program
8 215 Operations - 3 2 1 100 60 40
core
Lab
SI201
9 Internship Internship-I - - 0 1 100 60 40
1 1
Total 26 21 900 440 460
4 2
STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 24 hours (Lecture-18 hours; Practical-6 hours)
Theory and Practical Period of 60 minutes each.
FULL MARKS-900 (Internal Marks-440, ESE Marks-460)
L-Lecture, P-Practical, ESE- End Semester Examination
Name of the Course: Diploma in Chemical Engineering
Category: Programme Core Semester: Third
Code no.: CHEPC 201 Theory: 100 Marks
Course Title: Outlines of Chemical Examination Scheme:
Engineering. (i) External Assessment: 60 Marks
(End Semester Examination)
Duration: 17 weeks
(ii) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
Total lecture class/week: 3 [Class Test: 20 Marks
Assignment/Viva voce/ Quizzes: 10 Marks
Credit: 3
Class attendance: 10 Marks]
Pass Criterion: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (pass marks) in both internal assessment
and end semester examination separately.
1. Course Outcomes: On completion of the course, students will be able to:
Sl No Course Outcomes
i) Define Chemical Engineering and its application, Unit process and Unit operation.
ii) Define some important basic chemical engineering terms like unit, dimension, dimensionless
group, mole, mole fraction,vapour pressure, partial pressure, average molecular weight and
density of mixture etc.
iii) Solve simple problems associated with theory and solve simple problems using different types
of graphs like Log-Log, Semi-Log, Triangular.
iv) State some fundamental laws of gas.
v) Explain material and energy balance

vi) Solve material and energy balance related simple problems.
2. Theory Components:
Unit Topics & Sub-topics Teaching
Hours
Unit I:  Definition & application of Chemical Engineering.
Introduction  Concept of fundamental units, notations, Derived units, Dimensions,
 Different Unit system and conversion of one from other unit and
related simple numerical problems. 7
 Names of some important dimensionless groups and their
significance related to Chemical Engineering.
 Dimensional Analysis: Rayleigh and Buckingham PI theorem with
simple examples.
 Concept of unit operations and unit processes with common
examples.
Unit II:  Concept of Basis of calculation.

Mole Concept and  Concept of Mole, mole fraction, weight fraction , weight
Use of Different percent, volume percent, atomic fraction.
Types of Graph  Associated simple numerical problems. 8
 Concept of log-log, semi-log and triangular graph
plotting with simple examples
Unit III:  Ideal gas law.

 Concept of Partial Pressure, Pure component volume.
Elementary Theories
and Laws  Dalton’ s law, Amagat’ s law.
6
 Average molecular weight
 Density of mixture.
 Simple numerical problems associated to these theories.
Unit IV:  Concept of Vapour pressure.
Concept of  Effect of Temperature on vapour pressure:Clausius Clapeyron
Vapour Pressure equation
 Simple numerical problems related to ClausiusClapeyron equation. 6
 State Antoine equation, Raoult’s law and Henry’s law (Only theory, no
numerical problem).
Unit V:  Concept of Material Balance processes involving without chemical

Material Balance reaction like Distillation, Evaporation, Drying, Crystallisation,
Mixing, and Simple numerical problems associated with these
concepts.
 Concept of Stoichiometric equation, Excess reactant, Limiting
reactant, Percent excess, Percent conversion with simple numerical
problems 10
 Concept of Material Balance processes with chemical reaction like
Combustion of coal, fuel gases and sulphur, and Simple numerical
problems related to above mentioned chemical reactions.
 Concept of Recyclingoperations,Bypassing and Purge streams
(Onlytheory, no numerical problems)
Unit VI:  Concept of Energy Balance: Definition of Heat capacity, Mean

Energy Balance molal heat capacity, Heat capacities of gaseous mixture, Hess’s law
of summation, Heat of formation, Heat of reaction, Heat of 8
combustion and Heat of mixing.
 Simple numerical problems related with above mentioned theories.
Sub Total: Total Lecture Classes 45

No. of classes required for conducting Internal Assessment examination 06
Grand Total: 51
3. Suggested Home Assignments/Students’ Activities: The concerned teacher may collect assignments
from the students on different units of Outlines of Chemical Engineering. He/ She may also conduct
Viva- Voce or Quizzes for the students based on the different units of Outlines of Chemical Engineering
4. Suggested scheme for question paper design for conducting internal assessment
examination:(Duration: 45 minutes)
Questions to be set as per Bloom’s Taxonomy
Distribution of Theory Marks
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Total
(Remember) (understand) (Apply& above)
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20
5.Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [Duration 3 hours]
Question Type Marks

Objective type questions carrying 1 mark
for 20 questions (QSs) out of 25 Qs 1 X 20 = 20
throughout the syllabus.
Questions carrying 2 marks for 5 Qs out of

8 Qs (at least 1 Q from each unit) 2 X5 =10
Q s carrying 6 marks for 5 Qs(Subjective

type) out of 8Qs (at least 1 Q from each 6 X 5 = 30
unit)
Total = 60
6. Rubrics for the Assessment of Students Activity: (20 marks)
Sl Performance Indicators
No.
1 Solving of numerical problems
2 Accomplishing assigned problem
3 Presentation Skill
4 In Time submission of Assignment report / micro-project task
5 Viva-voce or Quizzes
7. Suggested Learning Resources:

Sl. No. Title of Book Author Publication
1. Basic Principles and Himmelblau Prentice Hall of India, N.

Calculations in Chemical Delhi
Engineering
2. Chemical Engineers’ Perry McGraw-Hill
Handbook
3. Chemical Process Hougen, Watson &Ragatz Asia Publishing House,
Principles (part I) New Delhi
4. Chemical Engineering Kirkbride McGraw-Hill Book Co.

Fundamentals Ltd., New York
&Kogakusha Co. Ltd.,
Tokyo
5. Introduction to Chemical Ghosal, Sanyal, Dutta Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.
Engineering Co. Ltd., New Delhi
6. Stoichiometry Bhatt and Vohra Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.
Co. Ltd., New Delhi
7 Process Calculations V. Venkataramani, PHI Learning Private

N.Anantharaman, Limited, New Delhi.
K.M.MeeraSheriffa Begum
8 Solved Examples in G.K.Roy Khanna
Chemical Engineering
9 Objective type questions O.P.Gupta Khanna
10 Stoichiometry and Process K.V. Narayanan PHI Learning Private

Calculation B. Lakshmikutty Limited, New Delhi.
Code no.: CHEEPC203 Theory: 100 Marks
Course Title: Momentum Transfer Examination Scheme:
(iii) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration: 17 weeks
Total lecture class/week: 3 (iv) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
[Class Test: 20 Marks
Credit: 3
Assignment/viva voce: 10 Marks
1. Course Outcomes:
On completion of the course,

CO 1 The student will understand stress-strain relationship in fluids, classify their
behavior and also establish force balance in static systems. Further they would
develop dimensionless groups that help in scale-up and scale-down of fluid flow
systems.
CO 2 Students will be able to apply Bernoulli principle and compute pressure drop in
flow systems of different configurations
CO 3 Students will compute power requirement in fixed bed system and determine
minimum fluidization velocity in fluidized bed
CO 4 Students will be able to describe function of flow metering devices and apply
Bernoulli equation to determine the performance of flow-metering devices
CO 5 Students will be able to determine and analyze the performance aspects of fluid
machinery specifically for centrifugal pump and reciprocating pump
Hours
UnitI: Introduction - Nature of fluids - physical properties of fluids. 8

Properties of fluids and Types of fluids: Ideal – real – compressible – incompressible.
concept of pressure Fluid statics: Pressure - density - height relationships. Concept of
Atmospheric, Absolute, Guage and Negative pressure. Pressure
measurement using different types of Manometers:U-tube– Well
type–Inclined tube–InvertedU-tube.
UnitII: Kinematics of fluid flow; Velocity gradient and Shear stress- 4
Fluidflowphenomenon Newton’s law of viscosity – Dynamic and kinematicviscosity–
Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids - Reynolds number -
Laminarflow and turbulent flow.
UnitIII: Conceptof:Streamlineflow–Steadyflow–Unsteadyflow— 8
Basicequationsoffluidflow Equationofcontinuity—Bernoulli’s equation (derivation not
required) - Correction for fluid friction —
Momentumcorrectionfactor&kineticenergy correctionfactor -
Simpleproblems
UnitIV:
Laminar flow characteristics through pipes – shear
Flow of 8
stressdistribution,averagevelocity&maximumvelocity—
incompressiblefluidsincon
Fanning’s friction factor -Hagen-Poiseuille equation —
duits
Frictionallossesduetodifferentpipingcomponents – losses due to
sudden expansion&suddencontraction – entry and exit losses -
Simpleproblems
UnitV: Drag and drag co-efficient. Flow through beds of solids. Friction 5
Flow of fluids through factor for packed beds. Ergun’s Equation - Fluidisation -
solids Mechanism, types, general properties – applications
UnitVI: Different types of valves – Gate valves and globe valves – Plug 10
Valves and Pumps cocks and ball valves – Check valves. Pumps – developed head –
power requirement (simple problems) – suction lift and cavitation
- Classification of pumps - Centrifugal and positive displacement
pumps. Introduction to
Fans, Blowers and Compressors.
UnitVII: 6
Measuringdevices Flowmeasuringdeviceslike:Venturimeter–Orificemeter–
Pitottube–Rotameter–Notches&weirs - rectangular,
Vee&trapezoidal -Simpleproblems
Analysis of Piping Network
Grand Total: 51
3. Suggested Home Assignments/Students’ Activities: Will be decided by the respective Lecturer

4. Suggested scheme for question paper design for conducting internal assessment examination :(
Duration: 45 minutes)
Total
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20

Question Paper Type Marks
1. Objective type questions carrying 1 mark 1X20=20

for 20 questions out of 25 questions
2. Questions carrying 2 marks for 5 2X5=10

questions (Subjective type) out of 8
questions (at least one question from each
unit).

unit).
Sl No. Performance Indicators

1 Solving of numerical problems

1 Unit Operations of McCabe, McGraw-Hill Book
Chemical Engineering Smith & Co. Ltd.
Harriot
2 Fluid Mechanics and Dr. D. S. S.K. Kataria & Sons

Fluid Power Kumar
Engineering
3 Fluid Mechanics and Its Vijay Gupta, New Academic
Applications Santosh K. Science Ltd
Gupta
4 A Text Book of Fluid Dr. A. K. Laxmi Publications
Mechanics and Bansal Pvt. Ltd.
Hydraulic Machines
5 Introduction to Ghosal, Tata McGraw-Hill
Chemical Engineering Sanyal, Dutta
Course Title: Engineering Thermodynamics Examination Scheme:
(v) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration: 17 weeks(End Semester Examination)
Total lecture class/week: 3 (vi) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
Credit: 3
2. Course Outcomes:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to

CO 1 understand the conceptual laws of thermodynamics for application in
thermodynamic cycles.
CO 2 understand and analyze different thermodynamic cycles and calculate their
thermal efficiencies.
CO 3 understand the basics of boilers and perform simple calculations of boiler
efficiencies.
CO 4 understand the steam distribution and utilization systems to identify the energy
conservation opportunities.
CO 5 comprehend principles of steam turbines and calculation of turbine efficiencies;
understand the basics of vacuum pumps and instruments for measurement of
vacuum.
Hours
Unit1: Thermodynamic concept of system, surroundings and the 5

Basic Concepts universe-
Classification of thermodynamic systems:
Open system-Closed System-Isolated system
Thermodynamic state of a system and properties
Change of state of a system or thermodynamic process-
Classification of thermodynamic process:
Isothermal-Isobaric-Isochoric-Adiabatic
Isotropic.
Reversible and Irreversible Process-
State and Path function,exact differentials-
Extensive and intensive properties-
Thermal Equilibrium and Concept of Temperature-
Zerot’h Law of Thermodynamics and its significance
Unit2: Work and Energy- 7
First Law of Joules Experiment and Work Energy Relationship-
Thermodynamics and Statements of First Law of Thermodynamics-
Internal Energy Perpetual motion machine of the Ist kind-
Mathematical formulation of the IstLaw(IUPAC convention)-
Internal energy, Origin of Internal Energy
Firs law for cyclic process-
First law for open system or flow process, shaft work-
Enthalpy,Heat capacities and their relationship
Enthalpy and chemical reactions, heat of phase change, heat of
solution-Calculation of work for different processes of expansion
of gases-Simple Problems.
Unit3: Limitations of the First Law and Need of the second law- 7
The Second Law of Statements of the second law-
Thermodynamics Perpitual motion machine of the second kind
Concept of Entropy-
Spontaneous process and entropy-
Carnot’s cycle, heat engine and heat pumps-
Efficiency of Carnot’s engine-
Iso-entropic process,T-S diagram-
Carnot Principle-
Clausius inequality- Simple Problems
Unit4: Concept of Free Energy- 10
Free Energy Functions Helmholtz free energy-
Gibbs free energy-
Gibbs free energy and spontaneous process-
Gibbs free energy and chemical equilibrium-
Gibbs-Duhem Equation-
Gibbs Helmholtz Equation-
Clapeyron Equation-
Clausius-Clapeyron Equation-
Unit5: Rankine cycle- 10
Power Generation Cycles Diesel cycle-
Air standard Otto cycle-
Bryton cycle-Internal Combustion Engine-Steam Table-Simple
Problems
Unit 6: Third law of thermodynamics- 7
Third Law and Adiabatic demagnetization-
Refrigeration Cycles Absolute values of thermodynamic properties from the third law-
Reverse Carnot cycle-
COP-
Vapor compression refrigeration cycle-
Gas refrigeration cycle-
Absorption refrigeration system-
Liquification and solidification of gases-
Grand Total: 48
(Remember) (understand) ( Apply& Total
above)
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20


unit).

unit).

Exceeds expectation Meets expectation (3) Does not meet expectations
(5) (1)
1.
3.Problem Problems are Problems are Unable to translate problem

setup translated into proper translated into into proper mathematical
mathematical mathematical forms forms
formswhich are ready which are ready to be
to be solved with minor
solved. errors
4.Mathematical Combines Chooses, rather than Does not understand the
modeling mathematics and/or develops, a connection between a
scientific principles mathematical model mathematical model and/or
to formulate models and/or scientific scientific principles applied
of thermodynamics; principle that applies to thermodynamics
to thermodynamics
5.Engineering Executes calculation Minor errors in Calculations not performed
problem correctly by hand calculations by hand or performed totally
solving and/or using or using incorrectly by hand or does
math/engineering math/engineering not know how to use
software software math/engineering software

Introduction to Smith McGrow-Hill Book
1 Chemical engg &,Vanness Co.
thermodynamics
Engineering YVC Rao University Press
2
Thermodynamics
An Introduction to R.P. Rastogi, Vikas Publishing
3 Chemical R.R. Misra House Pvt Ltd
Thermodynamics
A Textbook of K.V.Narayanan Prentice Hall of India
4 Chemical Engineering
Thermodynamics
Code no.: CHEPC207 Theory: 100 Marks
Course Title:MECHANICAL Examination Scheme:
OPERATIONS (vii) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration: 17 weeks
(viii) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
Assignment/viva voce/ Quizzes: 10 Marks
Credit: 3
1. Course Outcomes: On completion of the course, students are expected to:

1. Describe the basic principles of particles preparation and their characterization.
2. Explain about different size reducing equipment and power requirements during size reduction.
3. Examine on solid fluid separation equipment.

4. Explain solid storage and their conveying in chemical process industries.
Unit Topics & Sub-topics Teachin
g Hours
Unit I: Crushing &grinding, Laws of crushing (Rittinger’s law, Kick’s law,
Size Reduction and Bond’s law), Close circuit and open circuit, Dry and wet grinding, free
Size Enlargement and choke grinding (simple problems) 14
Working principle of size reduction equipment: jaw crusher, Roll
crusher, Hammer mill, Ball mill (including critical speed). Basic idea on
Extrusion. Basic idea on Granulation, Flocculation.
Unit II: Mechanical Sampling, Screening (simple problems), Description on Elutriation, 10
Separation Froth Flotation,Jigging, Cyclone Separator, Bag Filter, Electrostatic
Operations and Precipitator, Electromagnetic Separator.
Separating Settling (including free settling and hindered settling) and
Equipment sedimentation. Stoke’s law and its assumptions. Calculation of terminal
settling velocity.
Unit III: Basic idea on filtration, Constant Rate and Constant Pressure 9
Filtration and Filtration (simple problems).
Washing Use of Filter aids.
Batch and Continuous Filtration equipment --- Plate and Frame filter
press, Rotary Drum Filter, Leaf filter (principle, description,
application).
Unit IV: Types of impellers used in stirred tank — Study of power 12
Fundamentals Of consumption of mixers — Dimensional analysis of power
Mixing and consumption — Construction and working of stirred tank mixer &
Handling of sigma mixer
Particulate Materials
Conveying methods, Storage methods, Feeders and elevators.

Grand Total: 51
from the students on different units of Mechanical Operations. He/ She may also conduct viva voce or
Quizzes for the students based on the different units of Mechanical Operations.
4. Suggested scheme for question paper design for conducting internal assessment examination:
(Duration: 45 minutes)
Total
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20

unit).
unit).
No.
1 Originality of completing the assigned task
3 In Time submission of Assignment report / micro-project
task
Sl. No. Title of Book Name of Publisher
Authors
1. Unit Operations of McCabe and McGraw Hill., New

Chemical Engineering J.C.Smith, York
2. Chemical Engineering, M. Coulson Butterworth-
Vol. II, and J.F. Heinemann
Richardson
3. Mechanical Operations- A.P. Kulkarni Everest Publishing
Unit Operations of and R.S. House
Chemical Engineering Hiremath
Code no.: Theory: 100 Marks
Course Title: ENERGY ENGINEERING Examination Scheme:
(ix) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration: 17 weeks
Total lecture class/week: 3 (x) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
Credit: 3
Assignment/viva voce/ Quizzes: 10 Marks
2. Course Outcomes: On completion of the course, students are expected to:

1. Describe the energy production from conventional fuels and renewable energy resources.
2. Compare the process of energy generation by conventional as well as renewable resources.
3. Explain the energy conservation through waste heat recovery.
4. Identify the challenges associated with the use of various energy sources.
5. Describe renewable energy technologies as a basis for further analysis and evaluation.
Unit Topics & Sub-topics Teachin
g Hours
Unit I: Origin, classification, composition, Proximate & Ultimate analysis, properties
Non- such as net and gross Calorific value, caking Index, Swelling Index etc.,
renewable Washing and Storage of Coal, Briquetting, High and Low Temperature 8
source of Carbonization.
energy
UnitII: Composition of Liquid Fuel, Distillation (ADU and VDU) products with their 10
Liquid Fuel boiling range & uses. Knocking properties, Anti-knock compound, Octane and
Petroleum Cetane Number. Properties of liquid fuel e.g Pour point, Flash point, Fire point,
Smoke point, Char value, Aniline point, Diesel index, Viscosity index, Calorific
value-brief idea.
Unit III: Manufacture of Water Gas, Carburetted Water gas, Producer gas, Coal Gas, 8
Gaseous Fuels Blast Furnace Gas. Gasification- Kopper-Totzek process, Lurgi Gasifier,
Winkler process.
Unit IV: Nuclear Fission and Fertile Fuel, Coolants, Nuclear fuel cycle, Nuclear 11
Nuclear reactions. Fuel conversion and Breeding, Atomic Power Plants. Renewable
Energy and sources of energy: Brief idea of different types of renewable energy like
Renewable Wind –Biomass (including Gobor gas plant)-Tidal-Ocean Thermal-
sources of Geothermal energy, Solar Energy (Direct and Scattered Radiation) including
energy Flat Plate Collector, Solar Pond.
Unit V: Classifications of Furnaces, Working principle of Metallurgical, Ceramic 8
Furnace and and Electric Furnaces. Waste heat Recovery systems, Economizer.
Kilns
Beehive Coke Oven, By-product Slot type Coke oven, Recovery of By-
products (Direct, Indirect and Semi direct processes).
Sub Total : Total Lecture Classes 45

Grand Total: 51
from the students on different units of Energy Engineering. He/ She may also conduct viva voce or
Quizzes for the students based on the different units of Energy Engineering.
Total
Class Test – 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test – 2 4 8 8 20


unit).

unit).
No.
3 In Time submission of Assignment report / micro-project
task
Sl. No. Title of Book Name of Publisher
Authors
1. Fuels and Combustion Samir Sarkar Orient Longman
2. Elements of Fuel Himus Leonard Hill Ltd

Technology
3. Elements of Fuels O.P.Gupta Khanna Publishers
Furnaces, and
Refractories
Code no.: CHEPC211 Theory: 100 Marks
Course Title: Chemical Technology - I Examination Scheme:
(xi) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration: 17 weeks
Total lecture class/week: 3 (xii) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
Credit: 3
Assignment/Viva voce/Quizzes: 10 Marks
1. Course Outcomes: On completion of the course, students will be able to:
Sl No Course Outcomes
i) Write raw materials, application and reactions involved in the production of a chemical
compound.
ii) Explain unit processes and unit operations involved in the production of a chemical
compound.
iii) Explain purification process of the chemical compound.
iv) Sketch the necessary flowchart for the production of chemical compound.
v) Develop knowledge about the equipment used for the production of chemical compound
from its raw materials.
Hours
Unit I:  Sources of water.
Water Treatment  Name of Impurities present in water.
 Concept of hardness of water 5
 Methods of water softening treatment: Lime – Soda Process,
Zeolitesoftening, Demineralization
 Concept of Coagulation and Flocculation.
 Definition of Aeration Process, Types of Aerators: Cascade, Cone,
Slat and Coke, Draft, Spray, Pressure, and Centrifugal aerators.
 Definition of Deaeration process, Types of deaerators: Tray and
Spray type
 Concept of Oxygen Scavenging.
 Concept of Boiler feed water treatment process.
Unit II:  Manufacturing of Sulfuric Acid: Raw materials, Reactions and 8
Acid Industries Description of Contact and DCDA process with flow sheet.
 Manufacturing of Hydrochloric Acid: Raw materials, Reactions and

Description of hydrochloric acid production from common salt and
synthetic hydrochloric acid production with flow sheet.
 Manufacturing of Nitric Acid: Raw materials, Reactions and

Description of ammonia oxidation process with flow sheet.
 Manufacturing of Phosphoric Acid: Raw materials, Reactions

and Description of Electric Furnace process & Wet process with
flow sheet.
Unit III:  Concept of fertilizer

Fertilizer Industry  Types of fertilizer.
Production of Nitrogenous Fertilizer: Production of Ammonia (by 8
Haber Process) with process flow sheet.
Urea (by Ammonium carbamate decomposition process) with process
flow sheet.
Ammonium nitrate (Prill and Flake), and Nitro lime with process
flow sheet.
 Production of Phosphatic Fertilizer: Production of Super phosphate &
Tripple Super Phosphate with flow sheet.
 Production of N-P-K fertilizer with flow sheet.
Unit IV:  Production of Soda Ash by Solvay process with flow sheet.
 Concept of Dual process of soda ash manufacturing. 5
Chlor – Alkali  Production of Sodium Hydroxide and Chlorine by Electrolytic
Industry Process with flowchart.
 Working principle of Diaphragm Cell, Membrane Cell, and Mercury
cell.
Unit V:  Definition of Pulp,

Paper & 
Pulp Classification of Pulping Process 5
Industry  Composition of Cooking liquor,
 Description of Kraft Pulping process with flow sheet
 Bleaching of Pulp
 Recovery of white liquor from black liquor
 Making of Paper from Pulp.
Unit VI:  Definition of Soap.
 Classification of Soap making Process. 4
Soap &Detergent  Description of Full Boiled Process and Continuous process of Soap
Industry manufacture with flow sheet.
 Definition of Detergent.
 Classification of Detergent.
 Manufacturing of one anionic Detergent like Dodecyl Benzene
Sulphonate
Unit VII:  Definition of cement
 Constituents of cement 2
Cement Industry  Classification of Cement (Portland& Other)
 Raw materials of Cement
 Manufacturing process of Port land Cement with flow sheet.
Unit VIII:  Manufacture of Industrial Gases:
 Carbon dioxide:Source, Raw materials, Reaction, Manufacturing
Industrial Gases of Carbon dioxide from coke with process flowsheet, Purification of
Carbon dioxide 6
 Hydrogen: Manufacture of Hydrogen by Electrolytic process and
Lane process or steam hydrogen process
 Nitrogen and Oxygen: Manufacturing of Nitrogen & Oxygen by
Linde's Process with flowsheet.
 Acetylene: Manufacture of Acetylene from Calcium carbide and
from natural gas by partial oxidation (Sachasse process).
Unit IX:  Definition of Glass

 Raw materials of Glass 2
Glass Industry  Description of manufacturing of glass.

Grand Total: 51
from the students on different units of Chemical Technology – I . He/ She may also conduct Viva-Voce
or Quizzes for the students based on the different units of Chemical Technology – I.
(Remember) (understand) ( Apply& Total
above)
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20
Question Type Marks

Objective type questions carrying 1 mark
for 20 questions (QSs) out of 25 Qs 1 X 20 = 20
Questions carrying 2 marks for 5 Qs out of

8 Qs ( at least 1 Q from each unit) 2 X 5 =10
Q s carrying 6 marks for 5 Qs
( Subjective type) out of 8Qs ( at least 1 Q 6 X 5 = 30
from each unit)
Total = 60
No.
1 Sketch Flow sheet for manufacture of a compound

Sl No Titleof theBook Author Publication
1. Chemical Process Shreve McGraw-Hill Book Co. Ltd.,

Industries New YorkandKogakusha Co.
Ltd., Tokyo.
2. A Text Book of Chemical Sukla and Pandey Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
Technology, Vol. 1 & 2 Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Outlines of Chemical Dryden Affiliated East-West Press

Technology Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
4. Introduction to Chemical Ghosal, Sanyal, Dutta Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Co.

Engineering Ltd., New Delhi
5 Text Book of Chemical G.N Pandey Vikash Publishing House pvt
Technology ,Vol I & II ltd
6 Chemical process Reger
Technology
7 Chemical process Roger
Technology
Course Title: Momentum Transfer Examination Scheme:
Laboratory (xiii) External Assessment: 40 Marks
Duration: 17 weeks
(xiv) Internal Assessment: 60 Marks
Credit: 3
1. Course Outcomes:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to

CO 1 Use manometers as pressure measuring devices
CO 2 Understand and analyse the laminar and turbulent flow
CO 3 Understand, apply and analyse the friction factor
CO 4 Use flow meters, pumps.
CO 5 Analyse simple piping networks
2. Suggested Assignments for Continuous Assessment: Following assignments are to be attempted on

A4 sheets or Laboratory Note Book:
Sl. No Name of Experiment

1 To study different kinds of joints, bends and valves and their application area
2 To study the characteristics of a centrifugal pump
3 To study the characteristics of positive displacement pump
4 To calibrate an orifice meter
5 To calibrate a rotameter
6 To calibrate a pitot tube
7 To study flow through a packed bed
8 To study flow through a fluidized bed
9 To analyze the flow of water through piping network
4. Suggested scheme for question paper design for conducting internal assessment
examination:(Duration: 30 minutes)
Distribution of Marks
Total
Internal Viva- 8 16 16 40
Voce

No.
1 Awareness about the significance of
particular test
2 Understanding working principle of
machine / set-up
3 Setting and operation of experimental set up
4 Observations and recording data
5 Interpretation of result and conclusion
6 Submission of report in time
7 Answer to sample questions

1 Fluid Mechanics and Its Vijay Gupta, New Academic
Applications Santosh K. Science Ltd
Gupta
2 Unit Operations of Mc Cabe, McGraw-Hill Book
Chemical Engineering Smith & Co. Ltd.,
Harriot
New York
3 Introduction to Ghosal, Tata McGraw-Hill
Chemical Engineering Sanyal, Dutta
4 Fluid Mechanics Douglas Pearson Education

India
Category: Programme Core Semester : Third
Code No. : Total Marks : 100
Course Title :MECHANICAL Examination Scheme:
OPERATION LABORATORY (i) Internal Assessment: 60 marks
[Continuous assessment of
Duration : 17 weeks (3 hours per week) class performance and in time
Total practical class /week : 3 submission of assignment :30 marks
Viva voce :20 marks
Credit : 1 Class attendance : 10 marks]
(ii) External Assessment: 40 Marks
[Assignment on the day of viva voce : 20
marks
Viva voce (before Board of Examiners) : 20
marks]
Pre requisite: Knowledge of basic concepts of science such as physics, chemistry.
1. Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Describe the fundamentals involved in the Mechanical operations.

2. Apply of the concept of Particulate properties and its measurements.
3. Explain and classify different size reducing equipment and power requirements during size
reduction.
4. Examine solid fluid separation equipment.
5. Explain solid storage and their conveying in chemical process industries.
2. Suggested Assignments for Continuous Assessment: Following assignments are to be attempted on A4

sheets or Laboratory Note Book:
Teaching
Sl.No. List of Practical Hours
(Approx.)
1 To determine crushing efficiency of a Roll Crusher and Jaw 6

Crusher.
2 To study the screen analysis and determine average particle 6
size of solid particles in a ROTAP type sieve shaker.
3 To study the grinding characteristics of a Ball mill and 6
determine its critical speed.
4 To study the filtration characteristics of a slurry in a filter press. 6
5 To study the solid-liquid separation characteristics in a 3
centrifuge.
6 To study the solid-liquid mixing characteristics in a sigma 3
mixer.
7 To determine the screening characteristics in a vibratory screen. 3
8 To study the filtration characteristics in a vacuum filtration 3
apparatus with Buckner funnel.
9 To demonstrate centrifugal pump and gear pump. 6
10 To study the solid-solid separation in a froth-floatation cell. 3
Sub Total: Practical Classes 45 hrs 40 marks
Preparation for ESE 06 hrs.
Grand total : 51 hrs.
3. Rubrics for the internal assessment of Laboratory practice [30 marks]:
No.
1 Awareness about the significance of
particular test
2 Understanding working principle of
machine / set-up
Reference Books:
Sl. No. Title of Book Name of Authors Publisher
1. Unit Operations of Chemical McCabe and McGraw Hill., New York

Engineering J.C.Smith,
2. Laboratory Experiments in Chemical G Chandrasekhar Penram International

and Allied Engineering Publishing (India) Pvt.
Ltd.
3. Mechanical Operations-Unit A.P. Kulkarni and R.S. Everest Publishing House
Operations of Chemical Engineering Hiremath
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Civil Engineering [CE]
Revised 2022
CURRICULAR STRUCTURE FOR PART – II FIRST SEMESTER (THIRD SEMESTER) OF
THE FULL-TIME DIPLOMA COURSE IN CIVIL ENGINEERING
SL. SUBJECT OF STUDY HOURS PER WEEK

NO SUBJECT CODE LECTURE TUTORIAL PRACTICAL CREDITS
THEORETICAL PAPERS
.
1 CEPC301 Construction Materials 2 0 0 2

2 CEPC302 Basic Surveying 3 0 0 3
3 CEPC303 Mechanics of Materials 3 0 0 3
4 CEPC304 Building Construction 2 0 0 2
5 CEPC305 Concrete Technology 2 0 0 2
Civil Engineering
6 CEPC306 1 0 0 1
Planning and Drawing
Transportation
7 CEPC307 2 0 0 2
Engineering
LABORATORY/SESSION
AL PAPERS
Civil Engineering
8 CEPC308S Planning and Drawing 0 0 4 2
Practices
CEPC309S : Civil Engineering Lab- I
(consisting of following four Modules
with 8 Practical Classes and 4 Credits)
Module-I: Construction
9 CEPC309S/I 0 0 2 1
Materials Lab
Module-II: Mechanics of
10 CEPC309S/II 0 0 2 1
Materials Lab
Module-III: Concrete
11 CEPC309S/III 0 0 2 1
Technology Lab
Module-IV:
12 CEPC309S/IV Transportation 0 0 2 1
Engineering Lab
INTERNSHIP
Internship-I after IInd
13 CEI310S 0 0 0 1
Sem
TOTAL 15 0 12 22
WBSCTVESD /DCE/syllabus2021/SEM3 Page 1

Name of the Diploma in Civil Course duration 6 semester
Course Engineering
Course Title Construction Materials Course Code CEPC301
Subject Third
offered in Number of Credits 2(L:2, T:0, P: 0)
Semester
Prerequisites NIL Course Category PC
Question
Marks distribution
distribution
Course Objectives: Following are the objectives of this course:

 To learn about various construction materials, and understand their relevant
characteristics.
 To be able to identify suitability of various materials for different construction
purposes.
 To know about natural, artificial, and processed materials available for various
purposes of construction activities.
Course Content:
Module Distribution of unit
Module A Unit 1 and 2
Module B Unit 3 and 4
Module C Unit 5
Unit – I: Overview of Construction Materials

 Scope of construction materials in Building Construction, Transportation
Engineering, environmental Engineering, Irrigation Engineering (applications only).
 Selection of materials for different civil engineering structures on the basis of
strength,durability, Eco friendly and economy.
 Broad classification of materials – Natural, Artificial, special, finishing and recycled
Unit – II: Natural Construction Materials

 Requirements of good building stone; general characteristics of stone; quarrying and
dressing methods and tools for stone.
 Structure of timber, general properties and uses of good timber, different methods of
seasoning for preservation of timber, defects in timber, use of bamboo in
construction.
 Asphalt, bitumen and tar used in construction, properties and uses.
 Properties of lime, its types and uses.
 Properties of sand and uses
 Classification of coarse aggregate according to size and its use
Unit- III: Artificial Construction Materials

 Constituents of brick earth, Conventional / Traditional bricks, Modular and
Standard bricks, Special bricks –fly ash bricks, Characteristics of good brick, Field
tests on Bricks, Classification of burnt clay bricks and their suitability,
Manufacturing process of burnt clay brick, fly ash bricks, Aerated concrete blocks.
 Flooring tiles – Types, uses
 Manufacturing process of Cement - dry and wet (only flow chart), types of cement
and its uses. Field tests on cement.
 Precast concrete blocks- hollow, solid, pavement blocks, and their use.
 Plywood, particle board, Veneers, laminated board and their uses.
 Types of glass: soda lime glass, lead glass and borosilicate glass and their uses
 Ferrous and non-ferrous metals and their uses.
Unit– IV: Special Construction Materials

 Types of material and suitability in construction works of following materials:
Waterproofing, Termite proofing; Thermal and sound insulating materials.
 Fibers – Types –Jute, Glass, Plastic Asbestos Fibers (only uses).
 Geopolymer cement: Geo-cement: properties, uses.
Unit– V: Processed Construction Materials

 Constituents and uses of POP (Plaster of Paris), POP finishing boards, sizes and
uses.
 Paints- whitewash, cement paint, Distemper, Oil Paints and Varnishes with their
uses. (Situations where used).
 Industrial waste materials- Fly ash, Blast furnace slag, Granite and marble
polishing waste and their uses.
 Agro waste materials - Rice husk, Bagasse, coir fibres and their uses.
 Special processed construction materials; Geosynthetic, Ferro Crete, Artificial
timber, Artificial sand and their uses.

References:
1. Ghose, D. N., Construction Materials, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. S.K. Sharma, Civil Engineering Construction Materials, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi
3. Varghese, P.C. , Building Materials, PHI learning, New Delhi.
4. Rangwala, S.C., Engineering Materials, Charator publisher, Ahemdabad.
5. Somayaji, Shan, Civil Engineering Materials, Pearson education, New Delhi.
6. Rajput, R.K, Engineering Materials, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi.
7. Sood H., Laboratory Manual on Testing of Engineering Materials, New Age Publishers,
New Delhi.
8. Sharma C. P., Engineering Materials, PHI Learning, New Delhi.
9. Duggal, S. K, Building Materials, New International, New Delhi.
10. Singh, Parveen, Civil Engineering Materials, S.K. Kataria & sons
11. Soni, S.K., Building Materials and Constructions, S.K. Kataria & sons
12. Singh, Gurucharan, Building Construction & Materials, Standard Book House, New
Delhi.
13. Gambhir, M.L, Jamwal Neha, Lab Manual Building & Construction Materials, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
14. Subramanian, N., Building Materials, Oxford University Press.
Course outcomes: After completing this course, student will be able to:
 Identify relevant construction materials.
 Identify relevant natural construction materials.
 Select relevant artificial construction materials.
 Select relevant special type of construction materials.
 Identify and use of processed construction materials.

Name of the Diploma in Civil Course duration 6 semester
Course Engineering
Course Title Basic Surveying Course Code CEPC302
Subject Third
offered in Number of Credits 3 (L:3, T: 0, P: 0)
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution
Objective:- Following are the objectives of this course:

 To understand types of surveying works required.
 To know methods to be used for different surveys.
 To know the types, use and operational details of various Surveying equipments.
Contents:

Module C Unit 5
Unit – I Overview and Classification of Survey

 Survey-Definition, Purpose and Use.
 Types of surveying- Primary and Secondary, Classification: Primary-Plane &
Geodetic, Secondary Classification-Based on Instrument, Based on Method, Based
on Purpose, Based on Nature of Field.
 Principles of Surveying.
 Scales: Engineer’s scale, Representative Fraction (RF), Plain, Diagonal, Vernier and
Chord Scale.

Unit– II Chain Surveying
 Instruments used in chain survey: Chain, Tapes, Arrow, Ranging rod, Line ranger,
Pegs, Offset rod, cross staff, Optical square, Plumb Bob.
 Methods of Chaining, obstacles in chaining.
 Principles of chain survey.
 Well and ill Conditioned Triangle.
 Errors in length: Instrumental error, personal error, error due to natural cause,
random error.
 Calculation of Chain and Tape Correction.
 Types of offsets: Perpendicular and Oblique.
 Chain survey Station, Base line, Check line, Tie line, Tie station.
 Ranging: Direct and Indirect Ranging.
 Conventional Signs, Recording of measurements in a field book.
 area calculation from field book entry
 Simple numerical problems.
Unit– III Compass Traverse Survey

 Compass Traversing- open and closed.
 Technical Terms: Meridians and Bearings of a Line-True, Magnetic, Arbitrary
 Whole Circle Bearing system and Reduced Bearing system and examples on
conversion of given bearing to another bearing (from one form to another), Fore
Bearing and Back Bearing, Calculation of internal and external angles from bearings
at a station and Vice-versa, Dip of Magnetic needle, Magnetic Declination and It’s
variation, Isogonic and Agonic line.
 Principles of Compass Traversing.
 Components of Prismatic Compass and their Functions, Difference between
Prismatic and Surveyor compass. Methods of using Prismatic Compass - Temporary
adjustments and observing bearings.
 Local attraction, different methods of correction of observed bearings - Correction at
station and correction to included angles including cases when all stations in a
traverse are affected with local attraction
 Methods of plotting a traverse and closing error, Graphical adjustment of closing
error.
 Errors in Compass Surveying-Instrumental, Personal and Natural.
Unit– IV Levelling and Contouring

 Levelling-Definition, Object and Uses.
 Basic terminologies: Level, Horizontal and vertical surfaces & Lines, Datum surface
or Line, Bench Marks- GTS, Permanent, Arbitrary and Temporary, Reduced Level,
Rise, Fall, Line of collimation, Axis of the Telescope, Axis of Bubble Tube, Station,

Back sight, Fore sight, Intermediate sight, Change point, Height of instruments,
Focussing and Parallax.
 Types of levels: Dumpy, Tilting, Auto level, Digital level, Components of Dumpy Level
and its fundamental axes, Temporary adjustments of Level.
 Types of Levelling Staff: Self-reading staff and Target staff.
 Curvature and Refraction correction.
 Reduction of level by Line of collimation or Height of Instrument and Rise and Fall
Method.
 Levelling Types: Simple, Differential, Fly, Profile, Cross sectional, Check and
Reciprocal Levelling.
 Entry in level book and arithmetical check and accuracy check of level work
 Errors in Levelling-Instrumental, Personal and Natural, Permissible limits of Error in
Levelling.
 Contour, contour intervals, horizontal equivalent. Contour gradient.
 Uses of contour maps, Characteristics of contours, Methods of Contouring: Direct
and indirect.
 Simple numerical problems
Unit – V Plane Table Surveying

 Principles of plane table survey.
 Accessories of plane table survey and their uses,
 Setting of plane table- Leveling, Centering, Orientation.
 Orientation of plane table - Back sighting and Magnetic needle method.
 Methods of Plane table survey- Radiation, Intersection, Traversing, and Resection
(No Two-Point and Three-Point Problem).
 Merits and demerits of plane table survey
 Errors in Plane table Surveying- Instrumental, Personal and Plotting.
 No numerical problems
Suggested learning resources :

1. Punmia, B.C, Jain, Ashok Kumar; Jain, Arun Kumar, Surveying I, Laxmi
Publications, New Delhi.
2. Basak, N. N., Surveying and Levelling, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi.
3. Kanetkar, T. P., Kulkarni, S. V., Surveying and Levelling volume I, Pune Vidyarthi
Gruh Prakashan.
4. Duggal, S. K., Survey I, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi.
5. Saikia, M D, Das. B.M., Das. M.M., Surveying, PHI Learning, New Delhi.
6. Subramanian, R., Fundamentals of Surveying and Levelling, Oxford
University Press. New Delhi.

7. Rao, P. Venugopala Akella, Vijayalakshmi, Textbook of Surveying, PHI Learning New
Delhi.
8. Bhavikatti, S. S., Surveying and Levelling, Volume 1, I. K. International, New Delhi.
9. Arora K R , Surveying Vol. I, Standard Book House.
10. C.L. Kochher, Surveying, Dhanpat Rai Publication, New Delhi.
11. Dr. N.R. Chandak and Prof. H.R. Kumavat, Surveying, SK Kataria & Sons, New
Delhi
12. Saurabh Kumar Soni, Surveying-I, SK Kataria & Sons, New Delhi
13. Agor, R., A Text Book of Surveying & Levelling, Khanna Publishers.
14. Chandra A.M., Plane Surveying, New Age International Publishers.
 Measure linear,angular, horizontal & vertical distances in field , adopting

precautions and standard data recording methods.
 Conduct traversing in the field using chain and compass.

 Use levelling instruments to determine reduced level for preparation of contour maps
 Prepare plans using Plane Table Surveys.
 Select the type of survey required for given situation.

Name of the Diploma in Civil
Course duration 6 semester
Course Engineering
Mechanics of Materials
Course Title Course Code CEPC303
Subject
offered in Third Number of Credits 3 (L:3, T: 0, P: 0)
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution

 To learn properties of structural sections and structural materials.
 To understand the concept of stress and strain.
 To calculate shear force, bending moment for different structural elements
and corresponding stresses.
 To understand different methods of finding axial forces in trusses.
Contents:

Module C Unit 5
Unit – I Moment of Inertia
 Moment of inertia (M.I.): Definition, M.I. of plane lamina, Radius of gyration, section
modulus, Parallel and Perpendicular axes theorems, M.I. of rectangle, square, circle,
semi-circle, quarter circle and triangle section
 M.I. of symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections: I-section, Channel section, T-

section, Angle section, Hollow sections and built up sections about centroidal axes
and any other reference axis.

 Polar Moment of Inertia of solid circular sections.

Unit– II Simple Stresses and Strains
 Definition of rigid, elastic and plastic bodies, deformation of elastic body under
various forces, Definition of stress, strain, elasticity, Hooke’s law, Elastic limit,
Modulus of elasticity.
 Types of Stresses- Tensile and Compressive stresses, Shear and Bending stresses.
 Standard stress strain curve for Mild steel and HYSD bar under tension: Yield
stress, Proof stress, Ultimate stress, Strain at various critical points, strain
hardening, Percentage elongation and Factor of safety.
 Deformation of body due to axial force, forces applied at intermediate sections,
maximum and minimum stress induced, Composite section under axial loading.
 Concept of temperature stresses and strain, Stress and strain developed due to
temperature variation in homogeneous simple bar (no composite section, without
yielding).
 Longitudinal and lateral strain, Modulus of Rigidity, Poisson’s ratio, Biaxial and tri-
axial stresses [concept only], volumetric strain, change in volume, Bulk modulus
(Introduction only).
 Relation between modulus of elasticity, modulus of rigidity and bulk modulus
Unit– III Shear Force and Bending Moment
 Types of supports, beams and loads.
 Concept and definition of shear force and bending moment, Relation between load,
shear force and bending moment.
 Shear force and bending moment diagram for cantilever, simply supported and over
hang on one or both side beams subjected to point loads, uniformly distributed
loads or combination of these two types of loading (for udl - over full span or partial
span), point of contra flexure.
Unit– IV Bending and Shear Stresses in beams

 Concept and theory of pure bending, assumptions, flexural equation, bending
stresses and their nature, concept of neutral plane and neutral axis, bending stress
distribution diagram for square, rectangular, circle, I-section, T- section.
 Concept of moment of resistance and simple numerical problems using flexural

equation
 Shear stress equation (without derivation), relation between maximum and averages
hear stress for rectangular and circular section, shear stress distribution diagram
for square, rectangular, circle, I-section, T- section. Simple numerical problems
based on shear equation.
Unit– V Simple Trusses
 Types of trusses (Simple, Fink, compound fink, French truss, Pratt truss, Howe
truss, North light truss, King post and Queen post truss)
 Calculate support reactions for trusses subjected to point loads at joints

 Calculate forces in members of truss using Method of joints and Method of sections.
Suggested learning resources:

1. Bedi D.S. , Strength of Materials, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi, Ed. 2018
2. Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Vol. I, CBS, New Delhi.
3. Khurmi, R.S., Strength of Materials, S Chand and Co. Ltd. New Delhi.
4. Ramamurtham, S, Strength of Materials, Dhanpat Rai and sons, New Delhi.
5. Punmia B C, Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications (p) Ltd. New Delhi.
6. Rattan S.S., Strength of Materials, McGraw Hill Education; New Delhi.
7. Bansal R K, Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications.
8. Subramaniam R, Strength of Materials, Oxford University Press.
9. Ramamrutham.S, Theory of structures, Dhanpatrai & Sons.
10. Khurmi, R. S. , Theory of Structures S. Chand and Co., New Delhi.
11. Bhavikatti, S S , Structural Analysis Vol-1, Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd. New
Delhi.
12. Bhattachariya, B., Engineering Mechanics, Oxford University Press.
13. Chakraborty, M., Strength of Materials, Kolkata.
14. Adarsh, Swaroop, Mechanics of Materials, New Age International Publishers.
 Articulate practical applications of moment of inertia of symmetrical and

unsymmetrical structural sections.
 Analyse structural behaviour of materials under various loading conditions.
 Interpret shear force and bending moment diagrams for various types of
beams and loading conditions.

 Determine the bending and shear stresses in beams under different loading
conditions.
 Evaluate axial forces in the members of simple truss.

Course Engineering
Course Title Building Construction Course Code CEPC304
Subject
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution
 To identify different components of building.

 To understand different types of foundation and their significance.
 To know different types of masonry and their construction.
 To highlight the importance of communications in building.
Course Content:

Module C Unit 5
Unit – I: Overview of Building Components

 Classification of Buildings as per National Building Code Group A to I, As per Types
of constructions- Load Bearing Structure, Framed Structure, Composite Structure.
 Building Components - Functions of Building Components, Substructure –
Foundation, Plinth.

 Superstructure – Walls, Partition wall, Cavity wall, Sill, Lintel, Stair, Doors and
Windows, Floor, Mezzanine floor, Roof, Columns, Beams, Parapet.
Unit – II: Construction of Substructure
 Job Layout: Site Clearance, Layout for Load Bearing Structure and Framed
Structure by Center Line and Face Line Method, Precautions.
 Earthwork: Excavation for Foundation, Timbering and Strutting, Earthwork for
embankment, Material for plinth Filling, Tools and plants used for earthwork.
 Foundation: Functions of foundation, Types of foundation – Shallow Foundation:
Stepped Footing, Wall Footing, Column Footing, Isolated and Combined Column
Footing, Raft Foundation, Grillage Foundation. Deep Foundation: Pile Foundation,
Well foundation and Caissons, Pumping Methods of Dewatering, Deep wells, Well
points, Cofferdams (Introduction only).
Unit- III: Construction of Superstructure
 Stone Masonry: Terms used in stone masonry- facing, backing, hearting, Through
stone, corner stone, cornice. Types of stone masonry: Rubble masonry, Ashlar
Masonry and their types. Joints in stone masonry and their purpose. Selection of
Stone Masonry, Precautions to be taken in Stone Masonry Construction.
 Brick masonry: Terms used in brick masonry- header, stretcher, closer, quoins,
course, face, back, hearting, bat, bonding, joints, lap, frog, level and plumb and
other related important terms, Bonds in brick masonry- header bond, stretcher
bond, English bond and Flemish bond. Requirements of good brick masonry.
Junctions in brick masonry and their purpose and procedure. Precautions to be
observed in Brick Masonry Construction. Comparison between stone and Brick
Masonry. Tools and plants required for construction of stone and brick masonry.
Hollow concrete block masonry and composite masonry.
 Scaffolding, Shoring and formwork: Purpose, Types of Scaffolding, Process of
Erection and Dismantling. Purpose and Types of Shoring, purpose and types of
Underpinning. Formwork: Definition of Formwork, Requirements of Formwork,
Materials used in Formwork, Types of Formwork, Removal of formwork as per BIS.
Unit– IV: Building Communication and Ventilation

• Horizontal Communication: Doors –Components of Doors, Full Panelled Doors,
Partly panelled and Glazed Doors, Flush Doors, Collapsible Doors, Rolling Shutters,
Revolving Doors, Fully glazed Doors. Sizes of Door recommended by BIS.
• Windows: Component of windows, Types of Windows - Full Panelled, Partly Panelled
and Glazed, wooden, Steel, Aluminum windows, Sliding Windows, Louvered Window,
Bay window, Corner window, clear-storey window, Gable and Dormer window, Skylight.
Size of Windows recommended by BIS. Ventilators. Fixtures and fastenings for doors
and windows- material used; Functions of Window Sill , Lintels, Shed / Chajja.
• Vertical Communication: Means of Vertical Communication- Stair Case, Ramps, Lift,
Elevators and Escalators. Terms used in staircase - steps, tread, riser, nosing, soffit,
waist slab, baluster, balustrade, scotia, hand rails, newel post, landing, headroom,
winder, stringer beam, going, rising. Types of staircase (On the basis of shape): Straight,
dog-legged, open well, Spiral, quarter turn, bifurcated, Three quarter turn and Half
turn, (On the basis of Material): Stone, Brick, R.C.C., wooden and Metal.

Unit– V: Building Finishes
 Floors and Roofs: Types of Floor Finishes and its suitability- Kota, Marble, Granite,
Ceramic Tiles, Vitrified, Chequered Tiles, Paver Blocks, Concrete Floors, wooden
Flooring, Skirting and Dado. Process of Laying and Construction, Finishing and
Polishing of Floors, Roofing Materials- RCC, Mangalore Tiles, AC Sheets, G.I. sheets,
Corrugated G.I. Sheets, Plastic and Fibre Sheets. Types of Roof: Flat roof, Pitched
Roof-King Post truss, queen Post Truss, terms used in roofs.
 Wall Finishes: Plastering – Necessity of Plastering, Procedure of Plastering, Single
Coat Plaster, Double Coat Plaster, Rough finish, Neeru Finishing and Plaster of Paris
(POP). Special Plasters- Stucco plaster, sponge finish, pebble finish. Plaster Board
and Wall Claddings. Precautions to be taken in plastering, defects in plastering.
Pointing – Necessity, Types of pointing and procedure of Pointing. Painting –
Necessity, Surface Preparation for painting, Methods of Application, Whitewashing
and colour washing, distempering.

1. S. P. Arora and Bindra., Building Construction, Dhanpat Rai Publication, Delhi.
2. Sushil Kumar., Building Construction, Standard Publication.
3. Rangawala, S. C., Building Construction, Charotar Publication, Anand.
4. Punmia B. C., and Jain A. K., Building Construction ,Firewall Media.
5. Sharma S. K., Building Construction, S. Chand and Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Janardan Zha , Building Construction, Khanna Publication.
7. Bhavikatti S. S., Building Construction, Vikas Publication House Pvt. Ltd., Delhi.
8. Mantri S., A to Z Building Construction, Satya Prakashan, New Delhi.
9. Neelam Sharma, Building Construction, S.K.Kataria and Sons
Delhi.
11. Gambhir, M.L. and JAMWAL, NEHA, Lab Manual Building & Construction Materials,
Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
 Identify components of building structures.

 Propose suitable type of foundation for building structures.
 Select suitable type of masonry for building structures.
 Propose relevant means of communications for different types of buildings.
 Select relevant material for finishing works.

Course Engineering
Course Title Concrete Technology Course Code CEPC305
Subject
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution
 To know properties of cement, aggregate and water used in concrete.

 To understand different characteristics and properties of concrete.
 To learn about role of admixtures in concrete.
Course Content:

Module C Unit 5
Unit – I Cement, Aggregates, Water and Admixture

 Physical properties of OPC and PPC: fineness, standard consistency, setting time,
soundness, compressive strength. Different grades of OPC and relevant BIS codes
 Testing of cement: Field test and Laboratory tests -fineness, standard consistency,
setting time, soundness, compressive strength. Storage of cement and effect of
storage on properties of cement.
 BIS Specifications and field applications of different types of cements: Rapid
hardening, Low heat, Portland pozzolana, Sulphate resisting, Blast furnace slag,
High Alumina and White cement.
 Aggregates: Requirements of good aggregate, Classification according to size and
shape.

 Fine aggregates: Properties, size, specific gravity, bulk density, water absorption and
bulking, fineness modulus and grading zone of sand, silt content and their
specification as per IS 383. Concept of crushed Sand.
 Coarse aggregates: Properties, size, shape, surface texture, water absorption,
soundness, specific gravity and bulk density, fineness modulus of coarse aggregate,
grading of coarse aggregates, crushing value, impact value and abrasion value of
coarse aggregates with specifications.
 Water: Quality of water, impurities in mixing water and permissible limits for solids
as per IS: 456.
 Admixtures in concrete: Purpose, properties and application for different types of
admixture such as accelerating admixtures, retarding admixtures, water reducing
admixtures, air entraining admixtures and super plasticizers.
Unit– II Concrete
 Concrete: Different grades of concrete, provisions of IS 456.

 Duff Abraham water cement (w/c) ratio law, significance of w/c ratio, selection of
w/c ratio for different grades, maximum w/c ratio for different grades of concrete for
different exposure conditions as per IS 456.
 Properties of fresh concrete: Workability: Factors affecting workability of concrete.
Determination of workability of concrete by slump cone, compaction factor, Vee-Bee
Consistometer. Value of workability requirement for different types of concrete
works. Segregation, bleeding and preventive measures.
 Properties of Hardened concrete: Strength, Durability, Impermeability.
Unit– III Concrete Mix Design and Testing of Concrete
 Concrete mix design: Objectives, ordinary concrete and controlled concrete, methods
of mix design, study of mix design as per IS 10262 (only procedural steps), factors
affecting concrete mix design
 Testing of concrete, determination of compressive strength of concrete cubes and
cylinder at different ages, interpretation and co-relation of test results.
 Non-destructive testing of concrete: Rebound hammer test, working principle of
rebound hammer and factor affecting the rebound index, Ultrasonic pulse velocity
test as per IS13311 (part 1 and 2), Importance of NDT tests.
Unit– IV Quality Control of Concrete

 Concreting Operations: Batching, Mixing, Transportation, Placing, Compaction,
Curing and Finishing of concrete.
 Forms for concreting: Different types of form works for different structural members,
requirement of good form work. Stripping time for removal of form works per IS 456.
 Waterproofing: Importance and need of waterproofing, methods of waterproofing and
materials used for waterproofing.
 Joints in concrete construction: Types of joints, methods for joining old and new
concrete, materials used for filling joints.

Unit– V Special Concrete and Extreme Weather concreting
 Special Concrete: Properties, advantages and limitation of following types of Special

concrete: Ready mix Concrete, Fiber Reinforced Concrete, High performance
Concrete Self-compacting concrete and light weight concrete.
 Cold weather concreting: effect of cold weather on concrete, precautions to be
taken while concreting in cold weather condition.
 Hot weather concreting: effect of hot weather on concrete, precautions to be
taken while concreting in hot weather condition.
1. Gambhir, M.L., Concrete Technology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., Delhi.
2. Shetty, M.S., Concrete Technology, S. Chand and Co. Pvt. Ltd., Ram Nagar, Delhi.
3. Santhakumar, A. R., Concrete Technology, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
4. Neville, A. M. and Brooks, J.J., Concrete Technology, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd.
5. Neville, A. M., Concrete Technology, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Sood, H., Kulkarni P. D., Mittal L. N., Laboratory Manual in Concrete Technology,
CBS Publishers, New Delhi.
7. IS 456 : 2000
8. IS 10262: 2009
9. SP 23: 1982
10. Kulkarni, P. D., Ghosh, R. K. & Phull V. R., New Age International Publishers.
11. Vazirani, V. N. & CHANDOLA, S.P., Concrete Technology, Khanna Publishers.
12. Laskar, Aminul Islam, Concrete Technology, Laxmi Publication Pvt. Ltd.
 Use of different types of ingredient in concrete: cement, aggregates, water, admixture

 Prepare concrete of desired compressive strength.
 Prepare concrete of required specification.
 Maintain quality of concrete under different conditions.
 Apply relevant admixtures for concreting.

Course Engineering
Civil Engineering Planning

Course Title Course Code CEPC306
and Drawing
Subject
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution
Course Objectives:
Following are the objectives of this course:
 To learn basic principles Civil Engineering drawing.
 To know graphical representation of various components of Civil Engineering
structure mainly building
 To draw complete plan and elevation of a building.
 To learn basics of Computer Aided Drawings.
Course Content:

Module C Unit 5
Unit – I Conventions and Symbols

 Conventions as per IS 962, symbols for different materials such as earthwork,
brickwork, stonework, concrete, woodwork and glass.
 Graphical symbols for doors and windows, Abbreviations, symbols for sanitary and
electrical installations.

 Types of lines-visible lines, centre line, hidden line, section line, dimension line,
extension line, pointers, arrow head or dots. Appropriate size of lettering and
numerals for titles, sub-titles, notes and dimensions.
 Types of scale- Monumental, Intimate, criteria for Proper Selection of scale for
various types of drawing.
 Sizes of various standard papers/sheets.
 Reading and interpreting readymade Architectural building drawing (To be procured
from Architect, Planning Consultants, Planning Engineer).
Unit– II Planning of Building

 Principles of planning for Residential and Public building- Aspect, Prospect,
Orientation, Grouping, Privacy, Elegance, Flexibility, Circulation, Furniture
requirements, Sanitation, Economy.
 Space requirement and norms for minimum dimension of different units in the
residential and public buildings as per IS 962.
 Rules and bye-laws of sanctioning authorities for construction work.
 Plot area, built up area, super built up area, plinth area, carpet area, floor area and
FAR (Floor Area Ratio).
 Line plans for residential building of minimum three rooms including water closet
(WC), bath, kitchen and staircase as per principles of planning.
 Line plans for public building, school building & primary health centre,
Unit– III Drawing of Load Bearing Structure

 Drawing of Single storey Load Bearing residential building (2 BHK) with staircase.
 Data drawing –plan, elevation, section, site plan, schedule of openings, construction
notes with specifications, area statement, Planning and design of staircase- Rise and
Tread for residential and public building.
 Working drawing – developed plan, elevation, sections passing through staircase,
and/or WC and bath.
 Foundation plan of Load bearing structure.
 Drawing with CAD - Draw commands, modify commands, layer commands.
 Area statement of building.
Unit – IV Culverts
 Introduction to culvert & its different components and types and specific use along
with demonstration of a model
 Half sectional plan and half sectional elevation and side view of a single span slab
culvert
 Half sectional elevation of a single span two hume-pipe culvert

Unit – V Steel connections & Steel Roof truss
 Plan elevation and side view of stanchion connected with base plate with gusset
plate in concrete foundation
 Connection of main beam with secondary beam in one side
 Connection of beam with column
 Unequal column splicing
 Equal beam splicing
 Column bracket
 Introduction to truss – wooden (king post and queen post), steel (with angles and
tubular truss) along with demonstration of model
 Details of a fink truss with welded/riveted joints and details of column connection
 drawing of a wooden king post and queen post truss of the building drawing in sheet

1. Shah. M.G. Kale, CM, Patki, S.Y., Building Drawing, Mcgraw Hill Publishing company
Ltd. New Delhi.
2. Malik and Mayo, Civil Engineering Drawing, Computech Publication Ltd New Asian
Publish- ers, New Delhi.
3. M. G. Shah and C. M. Kale, Principles of Perspective Drawing, Mcgraw Hill Publishing
company Ltd. New Delhi.
4. Swamy, Kumara; Rao, N, Kameshwara, A ., Building Planning and Drawing, Charotar
Publica- tion, Anand.
5. Bhavikatti, S. S., Building Construction, Vikas Publication House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Mantri, Sandip, A to Z Building Construction, Satya Prakashan, New Delhi.
7. Singh, Ajit, Working with Auto CAD 2000, Mcgraw Hill Publishing company Ltd. New
Delhi.
8. Sane, Y.S., Planning and design of Building, Allied Publishers, New Delhi.
9. Venugopal, K. & Prabhu, Raja V., Engineering Drawing & AUTO-CAD, New Age
International Publishers.
10. Jeyapoovan, T., Engineering Graphics using AUTO-CAD, Vikas Publication House Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi.
11. Jolhe, Engineering Drawing with an introduction to CAD, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
1. Interpret the symbols, signs and conventions from the given drawing.
2. Prepare line plans of residential and public buildings using principles of planning.
3. Prepare submission and working drawing for the given requirement of civil engineering
structure (CAD may be used in addition to conventional drawing).
Assignment to be produced in Sketch Book [ compulsory]

1 Draw various types of lines, graphical symbols for materials, doors and windows, symbols
for sanitary, water supply and electrical installations and write abbreviations as per IS 962.
2 Study of a working drawing on Two BHK accommodation obtained from professional

persons (Group activity) and make a report on this
3 a) Measure the units of existing building (Load Bearing / Frame structure/his or her own
dwelling unit: home or house or flat).
b) Draw line plan of measured existing building at serial no 3a to the suitable scale.
4 Draw line plan to suitable scale (Minimum 2BHK, flat roof, staircase, 2 nos WC and
Bathroom(one attached), venrandah) [ the same may be used in the drawing practical classes
also]
a) Residential single storied building (two plans)
b) Apartment ( two plans)
5 Draw line plans to suitable scale for any three Public Buildings from the following (School
Building, Primary Health Centre, Bank, Post Office, Hostel, Restaurant, Community Hall
and Library).
6 Draw three principal views of a channel section, I section, H section and angle section

Course Engineering
Course Title Transportation Engineering Course Code CEPC307
Subject
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution

 To identify the types of roads as per IRC recommendations.
 To understand the geometrical design features of different highways.
 To perform different tests on road materials.
 To identify the components of railway tracks
Course Content:

Module C Unit 5
Unit – I Overview of Highway Engineering

 Role of transportation in the development of nation, Scope and Importance of roads
in India and its’ Characteristics.
 Different modes of transportation – land way, waterway, airway. Merits and demerits
of roadway and railway;
 General classification of roads.
 Selection and factors affecting road alignment.

Unit– II Geometric Design of Highway
 Design speed, design vehicle, PCU, volume of traffic, terrain classification
 Camber: Definition, purpose, types as per IRC – recommendations.

 Kerbs, Road margin, road formation, right of way as per IRC – recommendations..
 Design speed and various factors affecting design speed as per IRC –
recommendations.
 Gradient: Definition, types as per IRC – Recommendations, grade compensation at
curve
 Sight distance: Definition, types IRC – recommendations, simple numerical.
 Curves: Necessity, types: Horizontal including transition curve, vertical curves [ no
design, no problems on curve design]
 Extra widening of roads: numerical examples.
 Super elevation: Definition, formula for calculating minimum and maximum Super
elevation and method of providing super-elevation.
 Standards cross-sections of national highway in plain, embankment and cutting.
Unit– III Construction of Road Pavements

 Types of road materials and their Tests – Test on aggregates-Flakiness and
Elongation Index tests, Angularity Number test, test on Bitumen- penetration,
Ductility, Flash and Fire point test and Softening point test.
 Pavement – Definition, Types, Structural Components of pavement and their
functions
 Construction of WBM road. Merits and demerits of WBM & WMM road.
 Construction of Flexible pavement / Bituminous Road, Types of Bitumen and its
properties, emulsion, Cutback, Tar, Terms used in Bituminous Road - prime coat,
tack coat, seal coat, premix carpet., penetration macadam, mastic asphalt, merits
and Demerits of Bituminous Road.
 Cement concrete road - methods of construction, Alternate and Continuous Bay
Method, joints in concrete pavement, filler and sealers, merits and demerits of
concrete roads.
Unit– IV Basics of Railway Engineering

• Classification of Indian Railways, zones of Indian Railways
• Permanent way: Ideal requirement, Components; Rail Gauge, types, factors affecting
selection of a gauge
• Rail, Rail Joints - requirements, types.
• Creep of rail: causes and prevention, wear in rail.
• Sleepers - functions and Requirement, types and sleeper density [ numerical
problems]
• Ballast - function and types, suitability.

• Rail fixtures and fastenings – fish plate, spikes, bolts, keys, bearing plates, chairs-
types of anchors and anti-creepers.
Unit– V Track geometrics, Construction and Maintenance

• Alignment- Factors governing rail alignment.
• Track Cross sections – standard cross section of single and double line in cutting and
embankment. Important terms - formation width, side drains, etc
 Railway Track Geometrics: Gradient, curves - types and factors affecting, grade
compensation, super elevation, limits of Super elevation on curves, cant deficiency,
negative cant, coning of wheel, tilting of rail.
 Branching of Tracks, Points and crossings, Turn out- types, components, functions
and inspection. Track junctions: crossovers, scissor cross over, diamond crossing,
track triangle.
 Station - Purpose, requirement of railway station, important technical terms, types

of railway station, factors affecting site selection for railway station.
 Station yard: Classification- Passenger, goods, locomotive and marshalling yards.

Function & drawbacks of marshalling yards.
 Track Maintenance- Necessity, Classification, Tools required for track maintenance

with their functions, Organisation of track maintenance, Duties of permanent way
inspector, gangmate and key man.

1. L.R. Kadiyali, Transportation Engineering, Khanna Book Publishing Co., Delhi (ISBN:
978-93- 82609-858) Edition 2018
2. Khanna S.K., Justo, C E G and Veeraragavan, A., Highway Engineering, Nem Chand and
Brothers, Roorkee.
3. Arora, N. L., Transportation Engineering, Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
4. Saxena S C and Arora S P, A Textbook of Railway Engineering, Dhanpat Rai Publication.
5. Birdi, Ahuja, Road, Railways, Bridge and Tunnel Engg , Standard Book House, New
Delhi.
6. Sharma, S.K., Principles, Practice and Design of Highway Engineering,, S. Chand
Publication, New Delhi.
7. Duggal, Ajay K. and Puri, V. P., Laboratory Manual in Highway Engineering, New Age
international (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi.
8. Subramanian, K.P., Highway, Railway, Airport and Harbour Engineering, Scitech
Publications, Hyderabad.
9. Chandola, S.P., A Text Book of Transportation Engineering, S. Chand Publication.
10. Vazirani, V. N. & Chandola, S.P., Transportation Engineering Vol.-I, Khanna Publishers.
11. Upadhyaya, A. K., Transportation Engineering, S. K. Kataria & Son, New Delhi.

 Identify the types of roads as per IRC recommendations.
 Implement the geometrical design features of different highways.

 knowledge on different tests on road materials.
 Preliminary knowledge on different type of highway construction
 Identify the components of railway tracks.
 Identify the defects in railway tracks.

Course Engineering
Civil Engineering Planning

Course Title Course Code CEPC308S
and Drawing Practices
Subject
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution
Course Objectives:
 To learn the basic principles of Civil Engineering Drawing.
 To make graphical representation of various components of Civil Engineering
structure.
 To draw complete plan and elevation of a building.
 To learn basics of Computer Aided Drawings.
List of Practicals/Drawings to be completed:

Drawing to be produced in Full Imperial Size Sheet (A1)
1 Draw submission drawing to the scale 1:100 of a single storey load bearing residential
building (2BHK) with flat Roof, staircase, 2 nos WC and Bathroom(min. one attached), one
Varandah showing
a)Developed plan, Front elevation, one side elevation
b) Section passing through Stair , W.C. and Bath
c) Foundation plan and schedule of openings.
d) Site plan (1:200), area statement, construction notes.
2 Draw working drawing for above mentioned drawing at serial number 1 showing:
a) excavation trench plan

b) Foundation plan to the scale 1:50
c) Detailed enlarged section of Lintel and Chajjas including standard reinforcement.
d) Detailed enlarged section of RCC staircase and landing slab including standard
reinforcement
e) Plan of Roof slab showing ridge line, drainage, position of rain water pipe, etc.
3 Culverts (problems to be supplied by the subject teacher(s)
a) Introduction to culvert & its different components and types and specific use along with
demonstration of a model
b)Half sectional plan and half sectional elevation and side view of a single span slab culvert
c)Half sectional elevation of a single span two hume-pipe culvert
4 Steel connections [bolted or welded] (problems to be supplied by the subject teacher(s)

a. Plan elevation and side view of stanchion connected with base plate with gusset plate in
concrete foundation
b. Connection of main beam with secondary beam in one side
c. Connection of beam with column
d. Unequal column splicing
e. Equal beam splicing
f. Column bracket
5 Steel Roof truss (problems to be supplied by the subject teacher(s)
Study of different trusses used in construction and draw a welded fink truss [ angle or
tubular] having standard dimension and minute detailing
NOTE: In addition to conventional approach to Civil Engineering Drawing, student

may also take the help of CAD in preparing their sessional works if he/she desires so.

1. Shah. M.G. Kale, CM, Patki, S.Y., Building Drawing, Mcgraw Hill Publishing
2. Malik and Mayo, Civil Engineering Drawing, Computech Publication Ltd
3. M. G. Shah and C. M. Kale, Principles of Perspective Drawing, Mcgraw Hill
4. Swamy, Kumara; Rao, N, Kameshwara, A ., Building Planning and
Drawing, Charotar Publica- tion, Anand.
5. Bhavikatti, S. S., Building Construction, Vikas Publication House Pvt. Ltd., Delhi.
6. Mantri, Sandip, A to Z Building Construction, Satya Prakashan, New Delhi.
7. Singh, Ajit, Working with Auto CAD 2000, Mcgraw Hill Publishing company Ltd.

8. Sane, Y.S., Planning and design of Building, Allied Publishers, New Delhi.
9. Venugopal, K. & Prabhu, RAJA V., Engineering Drawing & AUTO-CAD, New Age
International Publishers.
10. Jeyapoovan, T., Engineering Graphics using AUTO-CAD, Vikas Publication House
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
11. Jolhe, Engineering Drawing with an introduction to CAD, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi.
 Interpret the symbols, signs and conventions from the given drawing.
 Prepare line plans of residential and public buildings using principles of planning.
 Prepare working drawing for the given requirement of Civil engineering structure

Course Engineering
Civil Engineering
Laboratory I
Course Title Course Code CEPC309S/I
Module-I: Construction
Material Lab
Subject
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution

 To learn about various construction materials, and understand their relevant
characteristics.
 To be able to identify suitability of various materials for different construction
purposes.
 To know about natural, artificial, and processed materials available for various
purposes of construction activities.
List of practical to be performed:
1. Identify various sizes of available coarse aggregates from sample of 10 kg in

laboratory and prepare report (60, 40, 20, 10 mm)
2. Identify the available construction materials in the laboratory on the basis of their
sources.
3. Identify the grain distribution pattern in given sample of teak wood in the laboratory
and draw the various patterns. (along and perpendicular to the grains)
4. Prepare the lime putty by mixing lime (1 kg) with water in appropriate proportion
and prepare report on slaking of lime.
5. Identify various layers and types of soil in foundation pit by visiting a construction
sites and prepare report consisting photographs and samples.
6. Select first class, second class and third-class bricks from the stack of bricks and
prepare report on the basis of its properties.

7. Measure dimensions of 10 bricks and find average dimension and weight. Perform
field tests - dropping, striking and scratching by nail and correlate the results
obtained.
8. Identify different types of flooring tiles such as vitrified tiles, ceramic tiles, glazed
tiles, mosaic tiles, anti-skid tiles, chequered tiles, paving blocks and prepare report
about the specifications.
9. Apply the relevant termite chemical on given damaged sample of timber.

10. Identify the type of glasses from the given samples.
11. Apply two or more coats of selected paint on the prepared base of a given wall
surface for the area of 1m x 1m using suitable brush/rollers adopting safe practices.
12. Prepare the cement mortar of proportion 1:3 or 1:6 using sand and apply on 1 m X 1
m surface as plastering
13. Prepare mortar using cement and Fly ash or Granite/marble polishing waste in the
proportion 1:6 or 1:3 and apply on 1 m X 1 m surface as plastering

1. Ghose, D. N., Construction Materials, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. S.K. Sharma, Civil Engineering Construction Materials, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi
3. Varghese, P.C. , Building Materials, PHI learning, New Delhi.
4. Rangwala, S.C., Engineering Materials, Charator publisher, Ahemdabad.
5. Somayaji, Shan, Civil Engineering Materials, Pearson education, New Delhi.
6. Rajput, R.K, Engineering Materials, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi.
7. Sood H., Laboratory Manual on Testing of Engineering Materials, New Age Publishers,
New Delhi.
8. Sharma C. P., Engineering Materials, PHI Learning, New Delhi.
9. Duggal, S. K, Building Materials, New International, New Delhi.
10. Singh, Parveen, Civil Engineering Materials, S.K. Kataria & sons
11. Soni, S.K., Building Materials and Constructions, S.K. Kataria & sons
Delhi.
13. Gambhir, M.L. and Jamwal, NEHA, Lab Manual Building & Construction Materials,
Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
14. Subramanian, N., Building Materials, Oxford University Press.
1) Identify relevant construction materials.
2) Identify relevant natural construction materials.
3) Select relevant artificial construction materials.
4) Select relevant special type of construction materials.
5) Identify and use of processed construction materials.

Course Engineering
Civil Engineering
Laboratory I
Course Title Course Code CEPC309S/II
Module-II: Mechanics of
Materials Lab
Subject
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution

o To know the procedure for the conduct of tensile and compressive strength.
o To understand the concept of stress and strain through testing of different
materials.
o To calculate shear force, bending moment and their corresponding stresses.
List of Practicals to be performed:
 Study and understand the use and components of Universal Testing Machine (UTM).
 Perform Tension test on mild steel as per IS:432(1).
 Perform tension test on Tor steel as per IS:1608, IS:1139.
 Conduct compression test on sample test piece using Compression Testing Machine.
 Plot Shear force and Bending Moment diagrams for cantilever, simply supported
beams
 Plot Shear force and Bending Moment diagrams for overhanging beams for different
types of loads including moment loading.
1. Bedi D.S., Strength of Materials, Khanna Publishing House, New Delhi
(Edition 2018)
2. Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Vol. I, CBS, New Delhi.
3. Khurmi, R.S., Strength of Materials, S Chand and Co. Ltd. New Delhi.
4. Ramamurtham, S, Strength of Materials, Dhanpat Rai and sons, New Delhi.

5. Punmia B C, Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications (p) Ltd. New Delhi.
6. Rattan S.S., Strength of Materials, McGraw Hill Education; New Delhi.
7. Bansal R K, Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications.
8. Subramaniam R, Strength of Materials, Oxford University Press.
9. Ramamrutham.S, Theory of structures, Dhanpatrai & Sons.
10. Khurmi, R. S. , Theory of Structures S. Chand and Co., New Delhi.
11. Bhavikatti, S S , Structural Analysis Vol-1, Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd.
New Delh
12. Bhattachariya, B., Engineering Mechanics, Oxford University Press.
13. Chakraborty, M., Strength of Materials, Kolkata.
14. Adarsh, Swaroop, Mechanics of Materials, New Age International Publishers.
 Test different Civil engineering materials on Universal Testing Machine.
 Analyse structural behaviour of materials under various loading conditions.
 Interpret shear force and bending moment diagrams for various types of
beam sections and different loading conditions.

Course Engineering
Civil Engineering
Laboratory I
Course Title Course Code CEPC309S/III
Module-III: Concrete
Technology Lab
Subject
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution
 To know properties of cement, aggregate and water used in concrete.

 To understand different characteristics of concrete.
 To learn about role of admixtures in concrete.
List of Practical to be performed: (At least 12 experiments should be

performed)
1 Determine fineness of cement by Blaine’s air permeability apparatus Or by sieving.
2 Determine standard consistency of cement.
3 Determine initial and final setting times of cement.
4 Determine compressive strength of cement.
5 Determine silt content in sand.
6 Determine bulking of sand.
7 Determine bulk density of fine and coarse aggregates.
8 Determine water absorption of fine and coarse aggregates.
9 Determine surface moisture of fine and coarse aggregates.
10 Determine grading of fine aggregate and coarse aggregate by sieve analysis.

11 Determine workability of concrete by slump cone test.
12 Determine workability of concrete by compaction factor test.
13 To prepare concrete mix of a particular grade [nominal mix may be allowed] and
determine compressive strength of concrete for 7 and 28 days.
14 Demonstration of NDT equipment .

1. Gambhir, M.L., Concrete Technology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., Delhi.
2. Shetty, M.S., Concrete Technology, S. Chand and Co. Pvt. Ltd., Ram Nagar, Delhi.
3. Santhakumar, A. R., Concrete Technology, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
4. Neville, A. M. and Brooks, J.J., Concrete Technology, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd.
5. Neville, A. M., Concrete Technology, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Sood, H., Kulkarni P. D., Mittal L. N., Laboratory Manual in Concrete
Technology, CBS Publish- ers, New Delhi.
7. Kulkarni, P. D., Ghosh, R. K. & Phull, V. R., New Age International Publishers.
8. Vazirani, V. N. & CHANDOLA, S. P., Concrete Technology, Khanna Publishers.
9. Laskar, Aminul Islam, Concrete Technology, Laxmi Publication Pvt. Lltd.
10. IS 456 : 2000
11. IS 10262: 2009
12. SP 23: 1982
 determine the engineering properties of cement and its suitability in using in
different site condition.
 determine the engineering properties of coarse aggregate and fine aggregate
and their suitability in using in preparing design mix of concrete
 determine the engineering properties of fresh and hardened concrete
 perform non-destructive testings of concrete

Course Engineering
Civil Engineering
Laboratory I
Course Title Course Code CEPC309S/IV
Module-IV: Transportation
Engineering Lab
Subject
Semester
Question
Marks distribution
distribution

 To identify the types of roads as per IRC recommendations.
 To understand the geometrical design features of different highways.
 To perform different tests on road materials.
 To identify the components of railway tracks.
List of Practicals to be performed [ at least ten]:
Draw the sketches showing standard cross sections of Expressways, Freeways,

1
NH/SH, MDR/ODR
2 Flakiness and Elongation Index of aggregates.
3 Aggregate impact value test
4 Los Angeles Abrasion test
5 Aggregate crushing value test
6 Softening point test of bitumen.

7 Penetration test of bitumen.
8 Flash and Fire Point test of bitumen.
9 Ductility test of Bitumen.
Visit the constructed road for visual inspection to identify defects and suggest
10
remedial measures and Prepare the photographic report containing details
Visit the hill road constructed site to understand its components and prepare the
11
photographic report containing details
Visit the road of any one type (flexible or rigid) to know the drainage condition and
12
prepare a photographic report containing details.
Prepare the photographic report suggesting possible repairs and maintenance for a.
13
flexible pavement and b. rigid pavement
Visit to railway track for visual inspection of fixtures, fasteners and yards and prepare
14
a photographic report containing details.

1. L.R. Kadiyali, Transportation Engineering, Khanna Book Publishing Co., Delhi (ISBN:
978-93- 82609-858) Edition 2018
2. Khanna S.K., Justo, C E G and Veeraragavan, A., Highway Engineering, Nem Chand and
Brothers, Roorkee.
3. Arora, N. L., Transportation Engineering, Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
4. Saxena S C and Arora S P, A Textbook of Railway Engineering, Dhanpat Rai Publication.
5. Birdi, Ahuja, Road, Railways, Bridge and Tunnel Engg , Standard Book House, New
Delhi.
6. Sharma, S.K., Principles, Practice and Design of Highway Engineering,, S. Chand
Publication, New Delhi.
7. Duggal, Ajay K. and Puri, V. P., Laboratory Manual in Highway Engineering, New Age
international (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi.
8. Subramanian, K.P., Highway, Railway, Airport and Harbour Engineering, Scitech
Publications, Hyderabad.
9. Chandola, S.P., A Text Book of Transportation Engineering, S. Chand Publication.
10. Vazirani, V. N. & Chandola, S. P.,Transportation Engineering Vol.-I, Khanna Publishers.
11. Upadhyaya. K., Transportation Engineering, S. K. Kataria & Son, New Delhi.

 Identify the types of roads as per IRC recommendations.
 Implement the geometrical design features of different highways.
 Perform different tests on road materials.
 Identify the components of railway tracks.
 Identify the defects in railway tracks

Course Engineering
Internship-I after II nd
Course Title Course Code CEI310S
Sem
Subject
Semester
Prerequisites NIL Course Category I
Question
Marks distribution
distribution

 To understand industrial environment and Civil Engineering activities.
 To get exposure to field level works.
 To get brief idea on drawings.
 To be accustomed with online courses.
NOTE: Activity(s) from the following has to be performed and prepare a report
on the activity together with presentation before the subject teacher.
 Activities may be arranged by the West Bengal State Council of

Technical and Vocational Education & Skill Development.
 Board of Practical Studies, MSME or Department of Small Scale

Industries or other engineering department of State Government may be
involved. Initiative from the Department of Technical Education,
Training and Skill Development is highly solicited.
 Activities centering Private organization in the arena of civil

engineering construction/ planning and design/ supervision/marketing
etc may also be considered.
 It may be arranged in-campus or off-campus; online or offline mode or

blended mode.
 Activities may be conducted continuously for stipulated period of time

or may be arranged in a staggered fashion – in the later case Saturday
and Sunday may be utilized for the Internship Program and accordingly
class schedule will have be to arranged.

 Activities may be performed by a group of students or may be done by
individually under the guidance of subject teacher(s)
After the 2nd Semester students are required to be involved in Inter/ Intra Institutional
Activities viz: training and simulation program with different institute like workshop of ITI ,
other polytechnics, other technical institute, institutions; soft skill training organized by the
Training and Placement Cell of the respective institute; contribution at
innovation/entrepreneurship cell of the institute, participation in the workshop/competition
etc; learning at departmental laboratory/institutional workshop. It may also cover subjects
taught in 1st, 2nd and 3rd semester ( on any one or combination of the following subjects )
a. science and humanities b. engineering mechanics c. computer application d. engineering
graphics e. environmental science f. departmental subjects g. any other current topic on
latest trend in civil engineering.
Activity(s) may include -
 Training / Skill Development from any institute [private/govt/govt aided] or from any
individual expert on topics related to civil engineering field;
 Soft skill training organized by Training and Placement Cell of the respective
institutions;
 Review study and preparation of report based on traditional library or digital library
or internet ;
 Learning at Departmental Lab/ Institutional workshop;
 Working for consultancy job/project work within the institutes or outside the
institute;
 Any training on open online learning (like internshala, Moocs etc ) - NOT
Compulsory TO PRODUCE ANY CERTIFICATE from the training organisation or
trainer;
 Visit to construction site and prepare a report along with labeled photograph or
drawing ;
 An industrial visit to a testing laboratory of civil engineering materials and prepare a

report on visit
 Industrial visit to a manufacturing unit related to the civil engineering construction

or any other engineering materials;
 Participation in a socio-economic survey on any current topics or like and know the
methodology
 Conducting a market survey on determination/variation on rate of any civil

engineering materials and preparation a report on the same
If a subject teacher or any other teachers from civil engineering

department or any other department of respective polytechnic desires
to involve students to study/review/visit/etc etc on any subject or topic
not covered in the list produced above as per his/her convenience then
he/she should be given authority to proceed with the same.
After completion of each internship, the student should prepare a comprehensive report to
indicate what he/she has observed and learnt in the training period. The student may
contact Industrial supervisor/Faculty member/TPO for assigning topics and problems and
should prepare the final report on assigned topics. The training report should be signed by
the Industrial supervisor/Internship Faculty member, TPO and HOD.
The internship report will be evaluated on the basis of following criteria (as applicable):
Sl no Criteria for evaluation of Internship Report

1. Origianlity
2. Adequacy and purposeful writeup
3 Orgainizaton, format, drawing,sketches style language
4 Practical applications and relationship with basic theory
5 Concepts taught in the course outcomes
6 Attendance record, daily diary,quality of the internship report
Seminars must be arranged for the students based on his/her training report, before an
internal committee constituted by the concerned department of the institute. The evaluation
will be based on the following criteria:
Sl no Criteria for evaluation of Internship Report

1 Quality of content presented
2 Proper planning for presentation
3 Effectiveness of presentation
4 Depth of knowledge and skills
5 Viva voce
 Understand the overall brief knowledge of industrial activities.
 Relate the industrial activities with his/her different courses of Diploma in Civil
Engineering.

Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Computer Science and

Technology [CST], Computer Science and
Engineering [CSE],
Computer Software Technology [CSWT] &
Information Technology [IT]
Revised 2022
West Bengal State Council of Technical & Vocational Education and
Skill Development (Technical Education Division)
Detailed Syllabus for

3rd Semester
Computer Science and Technology, Computer Science and Engineering,
Computer Software Technology & Information Technology
Hours Total
Sl. Category Code No. Course Title per week contact Credits
No L T P hrs/ week
1. Program core CST201 Computer 2 0 0 2 2
course Programming
Scripting
2. Program core CST203 Languages 2 0 0 2 2
course (Python)
3. Program core CST205 Data Structures 2 0 0 2 2
course
4. Program core CST207 Computer 3 1 0 4 4
course System
Organization
5. Program core CST209 Algorithms 3 1 0 4 4
course
6. Summer SI201 Summer Intern- 2
Internship-I ship-1
(4 weeks) after
2nd Sem
7. Program core COPC211 Computer 0 0 4 4 2
course Programming
Lab
8. Program core CST213 Scripting 0 0 4 4 2
course Languages Lab
9. Program core CST215 Data Structures 0 0 2 2 1
course Lab
Total Credits 21
Course Title: Computer Programming in C
Course Code CST201

Number of Credits :2 2 (L: 2, T: 0, P: 0)
Prerequisites Ability to develop logic / flow of simple problem.
Course Category PC
Course code: CST Semester: THIRD
Duration: 15 weeks Maximum Marks: 100
Continuous Internal Assessment: 20 Marks
Theory: 3 hrs/week Attendance: 10 Marks
Viva/Presentation/Assignment/Quiz etc: 10 Marks
Total Contact Hours: 45 Hours End Semester Examination: 60 Marks
Aim of the Course
➢ To study the structure programming concept.
➢ To study Linear Data Structure.
➢ To study Looping and Branching.
➢ To study subscripted variables and user defined data types.
➢ To study user defined functions.
➢ To study pointers in depth.
Course Objectives
To enable student, develop structured solutions to problems and implementing them using computers. This
involves two parts:
• Formulating a solution for a given problem as a well-defined sequence of actions, and
• Expressing solution in a machine-readable form or a programming language.
For the second part, we will learn the common units of programming languages. The first part can only be
learned through the repeated practice of solving problems.
Course Content:
Contents (Theory) Hrs./Unit Module
UNIT 1: Basics of C 5 A
• History of C, Advantages of Structured Program, Files (source, header, object, binary

executable) used in C, Characteristics of C.
• C character set, Tokens, Constants, Variables, Keywords, Data types used in C.
• C operators (arithmetic, logical, assignment, relational, unary, binary, increment and
decrement, conditional, ternary, bit wise, special, comma, sizeof, postfix, prefix etc.), Operator
precedence, Associativity of operators, Type conversion, Typecasting.
• Formatted input, Formatted output.
UNIT 2: Decision Control and Looping Statements 5 A
• Decision making and branching statements, if statement (if, if-else, else-if ladder, nested if-
else), Switch case statement & applications.
• Conditional and unconditional ‘goto’ statement and drawbacks.
• Iterative/Loop statement, Entry controlled & exit controlled loop structure & differences,
Example like while, do- while, and for loop structure, Break and continue statement & their uses,
nested loop structure & applications.
UNIT 3: Subscripted Variables / Arrays 10 B
• Advantages of subscripted variables/ arrays & accessing array elements, Declaration and
initialization of one dimensional, two dimensional, multidimensional (idea only) and character
arrays & Strings, Accessing array elements.
• Declaration and initialization of string variables, String handling functions from standard library
(strlen(), strcpy(), strcat(), strcmp()), Applications like string operations to extract substring
from left, right, middle of a string, Replacement of string characters, concatenation of two strings
etc.
UNIT 4: User defined functions 10 C
• Definition of functions, advantages of functions in modular approach problem solving,

Prototype declaration, Scope and lifetime of variables & Storage Class (Auto, Extern, Static,
Register), defining functions, function signature, passing parameter types, Function call (call
by value, call by reference), Return values.
• Recursion and use of memory stack, Types of recursion. Recursion vs Iteration. Applications.
UNIT 5: Pointers in C 15 C
• Understanding pointers, difference between memory variables and pointer variables, Declaring
and accessing pointers, constant pointers and pointer to a constant, Null Pointers, Generic
Pointers, Pointers arithmetic and expressions.
• Passing arguments to function using pointers, Pointers and arrays, Passing an array to a
function, Array name and Pointer.
• Pointers and Strings, Array of pointers, Function pointers, Pointer to a pointer.
• Dynamic memory allocation using malloc(), calloc(), realloc(). Uses of free(). Pointer to a
structure.
Course outcomes
• Student should be able to computationally formulate basic problems and write code to execute
them.
• The focus of the course as mentioned above should be on example-based learning.
Reference Books
1. Programming in C, Author: Reema Thareja, OXFORD University Press

2. Computer Fundamentals and Programming In C, Author Anita Goel & Ajay Mittal, Pearson
3. Head first C, Author by Griffiths, SPD publication
4. C: Concepts & Programming, Author: Bhusry, Willy
5. Programming in C, Author: E. Balagurusamy, TMH
6. Mastering C, Author: Venugopal, TMH
7. C programming: Test your skills, Author: Kamthane Ashok, Pearson Education India
Course Title : Scripting Languages
Course Code CST203

Number of Credits :2 2(L: 2, T: 0, P: 0)
Prerequisites NIL
Course Category PC
Course code : CST Semester : THIRD
Duration : 15 weeks Maximum Marks : 100
Theory : - 2 hrs/week Continuous Internal Assessment :
20 Marks
Tutorial: - 0 Attendance-10 Marks

Viva/Presentation/Assignment /Quiz etc : - 10 Marks
Total Contact Hoirs:30 Hours
Practical : NIL End Semester Examination : 60 Marks
Aim: Learn Scripting Language features and programming
Course Objectives:
• To learn how to work with a scripting language.
• To introduce Python programming language through its core language basics and program
design techniques suitable for modern applications.
• To understand the wide range of programming facilities available in Python covering
graphics, GUI, data visualization.
• To utilize high-performance programming constructs available in Python to strengthen
applications and development in practical scenarios.
Course Content:
UNIT 1: Introduction, Variables and Data Types 7 A
➢ History, Features, setting up path, Installation and Working with Python, Basic Syntax
➢ Understanding Python variables
➢ Numeric data types: int, Long int, float, complex/imaginary
➢ String data type and string operations: String literals, manipulating strings, comparing
strings, Unicode string literals, converting between Simple Types, Converting to strings,
String Formatting, String Methods.
➢ Date and Time
➢ Other Data Types:
• Tuples
• List: Defining list, list slicing, Split, Join, Manipulating Lists, Copying Lists
• Dictionary
• Arrays
➢ Basic Operators: Arithmetic Operators, Relational Operators, Assignment Operators (Simple

assignment and Multiple Assignment-Tuple packing & unpacking) Logical Operators,
Bitwise Operators, Membership Operators, Identity Operators
➢ Operator Precedence
➢ Understanding coding blocks
UNIT 2: Control Structures 5 A
➢ Conditional blocks using if, else and elif

➢ For loops and iterations
➢ while loops
➢ Loop manipulation using continue, break and else and pass
➢ Programming using conditional and loops block
➢ Modify loops : break and continue
UNIT 3: Functions, Modules and Packages 6 B
Organizing codes using functions

• Defining Functions & Calling Functions
• Pass by object reference
• Parameters
• Arbitrary arguments
• Optional and Named Arguments
• Passing arguments from a tuple
• Variable Scope and Binding: Local Variables, Nonlocal Variables, Global Variables, class
scope
Organizing projects into modules: Grouping Code with Modules
Importing own module as well as external modules
Understanding Packages: Grouping Modules into Packages
UNIT 4: : File I/O, Text Processing, Regular Expressions 6 C
Accessing Keyboard Input: raw_input and input

Printing to the Screen: print
File modes and permissions
read functions: read(), readline(), readlines()
write functions :write(),writelines()
other file operations: open(),close(),tell(),seek(),flush(),fileno(), isatty(),next()
Redirecting output streams to files.
Programming using file operations
Powerful pattern matching and searching: re.match(),re.searh(),re.findall(), re.finditer()
Creating and Using Regular Expression Objects- import re, re.compile(),re.sub(), re.subn(),
re.split()
Power of pattern searching using regex
UNIT 5: Frameworks 6 C
Frameworks - The MVC framework, Django- What is Django and why should you use Django?
Creating URL, Templates
• Send data to a template

• Display data in a template
• Display object lists in a template
• Handle chains with filters in Django

• Use URLs effectively
• Create base templates in order to extend other templates
• Insert static files in our templates
Django Form
• Create an HTML form

• Handle the data sent by a form
• Create a Django form
• Validate and manipulate data sent from a Django form
• Create forms based on models
• Customize error messages and usage of widget
Reference Books
1. Taming Python by Programming, Jeeva Jose, Khanna Publishing House

2. Core Python Programming, Dr. R. Nageswara Rao, Dreamtech Press
3. Python Programming: Using Problem Solving Approach, Reema Thareja, Oxford
University Press
4. Core Python Programming, Wesley J. Chun, Pearson
5. Python for programming, P. Deitel, H. Deitel, Pearson
6. Starting Out with Python, Tony Gaddis, Pearson
7. Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python. John V. Guttag, MIT Press.
8. An Introduction to Python, G.v. Rossum, SPD
9. Practical Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science using Python 3, Paul Gries,
The Pragmatic Bookshelf
Course outcomes: At the end of the course student will be able to build program with a scripting
language and will be able to learn any other scripting language on their own.
Design real life situational problems and think creatively about solutions of them. Apply a solution
clearly and accurately in a program using Python. Apply the best features of Python to program real
life problems.
Course Title: Data Structures
Course Code CST205

Prerequisites Basic Knowledge of Computer system
Course Category Computer Science and Technology
Course code: CST Semester: THIRD
Continuous Internal Assessment: 20 Marks
Theory: 3 hrs/week Attendance: 10 Marks
Viva/Presentation/Assignment/Quiz etc: 10 Marks
Total Contact Hours: 45 Hours End Semester Examination: 60 Marks
Aim of the Course

➢ To study the structure programming concept.
➢ To study Linear Data Structure.
➢ To study Dynamic Memory Allocation.
➢ To study Non-Linear Data Structure.
➢ To study user defined Graf theory.
➢ To study Recursion in depth.
Course Objectives
To enable student, develop structured solutions to problems and implementing them using computers. This
involves two parts:
• Formulating a solution for a given problem as a well-defined sequence of actions, and
• Expressing solution in a machine-readable form or a programming language.
To provide strong foundation for implementing programming language to formulate, analyze and
develop solutions related to various data structures problems.
Course Content:
UNIT 1: Introduction to Data Structures 3 A
✓ Basic Terminology
✓ Classification of Data Structures
✓ Operations on Data Structures.
UNIT 2: Linear Data Structures 12 A
✓ Stacks:
• Introduction to Stacks
• Array Representation of Stacks
• Operations on a Stack
• Applications of Stacks-Infix-to-Postfix Transformation
• evaluating Postfix Expressions.
✓ Queues:
• Introduction to Queues
• Array Representation of Queues
• Operations on a Queue
• Types of Queues-De-Queue
• Circular Queue
• Applications of Queues-Round Robin Algorithm.
✓ Recursion (GCD, Tower of Hanoi Problem)
UNIT 3: Linked Lists 15 B
✓ Singly Linked List

• Representation in Memory,
• Operations on a Single Linked (add new node- first, in-between, end position.
Delete-- first, in-between, end position),
✓ Circular Linked Lists
• Operations on a circular Single Linked (add new node- first, in-between, end
position.
• Delete-- first, in-between, end position),
✓ Doubly Linked Lists
• Operations on a Double Linked (add new node- first, in-between, end position.
Delete-- first, in-between, end position),
✓ Circular Linked Lists
• Operations on a circular Double Linked (add new node- first, in-between, end
position.
• Delete-- first, in-between, end position),
✓ Linked List Representation
• Operations of Stack,
• Operations of Queue.
UNIT 4: Non-Linear Data Structures 15 C
✓ Trees:
• Basic Terminologies
• Definition and Concepts of Binary Trees
• Representations of a Binary Tree using Arrays and Linked Lists
• Operations on a Binary Tree-Insertion, Deletion
• Traversals, Types of Binary Trees
• B-Tree
• AVL Tree
✓ GRAPHS:
• Graph Terminologies
• Representation of Graphs- Set, Linked
• Matrix
• Graph Traversals
• BFS and DFS
Course outcomes
• Student should be able to computationally formulate basic problems and write code to
execute them and have a good understanding of Data Structures and its applications in
algorithms
• The focus of the course as mentioned above should be on example-based learning.
Reference Books
1. Introduction to Data Structures in C, Kamthane, Pearson
2. Data Structures Using C, Reema Thareja, Oxford University Press India.
3. Data Structures, Lipschutz Seymour, McGraw-Hill Education
4. A simplified approach to data structures, Pawan Goyal, Published by SPD
5. Data Structures Using C, 1e, Tenenbaum, Pearson
6. Data Structures and Algorithms, Aho, Pearson
Course Title : Computer System Organization
Course Code CST207

Prerequisites Basic Knowledge of Computer system and Digital
gates
Course Category Computer Science
Teaching Scheme Theory : - 3 hrs/week, Tutorial: - 1 hr/week
Examination Scheme Continuous Internal Assessment :
20 Marks
Attendance-10 Marks
Aim: Develop the concept of how computer works

internally.
Course Learning Objectives: To have a thorough understanding of the basic structure and operation
of a digital computer, it’s Architecture, computational designs and how computer works.
Course Content:
UNIT 1: 6 A
Structure of Computers:
• Computer Functional units, Von-Neumann architecture, Bus structures, Basic Operational
Concepts, Data representation (Fixed and Floating point), Error detecting codes.
Register Transfer and Micro Operations:
• Register transfer, Memory transfers, Arithmetic micro-operations, Logic micro-
operations, Shift micro-operations, and Arithmetic logic shift unit.
UNIT 2: 20 A
Micro Programmed Control:

• Control memory, Address sequencing, and design of control unit.
Computer Arithmetic:
• Addition and Subtraction, Multiplication and Division algorithms, Float- ing-point
arithmetic operation,
Pipelining:
• Arithmetic Pipeline, Instruction Pipeline, RISC Pipeline
• Vector Processing, Array Processors.
UNIT 3: 10 B
Introduction to Microprocessor Architecture:

• Instruction Set, Architecture design principles from programmer’s perspective.
• One example microprocessor (Intel 8086), Block diagram, Pin functions, Register structure,
Segmentation, Interrupt mechanism, Addressing modes, Instructions.
UNIT 4: 9 B
Assembly Language Programming:

• Simple programs, Assembly language programs involving logical, branch and call
instructions,
• sorting, evaluation of arithmetic expressions, string manipulation,
• assembler directives, procedures and macros.
UNIT 5: 15 C
Memory and Digital Interfacing:

• addressing and address decoding, interfacing RAM, ROM, EPROM,
• programmable peripheral interface,
• Cache Memory (Mapping and Hit ratio),Virtual Memory Technique (Logical address,
Physical address, TLB etc.)
Reference Books
8. Computer Organization, Carl Hamacher, Zvonks Vranesic, SafeaZaky, McGraw-Hill

9. Computer Organization and architecture, William Stallings, Pearson
10. Microprocessors Interface, Douglas V.Hall, Tata McGraw-Hill.
11. Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, Senthil Kumar, Saravanan, Jeevananthan, Oxford
12. Computer System Architecture, M. Moris Mano, Pearson/PHI, India.
13. The X86 Microprocessors - Architecture and Programming and Interfacing, Das, Pearson
14. Computer organization design and Architecture 5th edition, Shiva (SPD/CRC press)
15. Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals- Architecture, Programming and
interfacing, A.K.Ray, K.M.Bhurchandi, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, India.
16. Computer Organization and Design: A Hardwar/Software Interface (MIPS Edition) by
Patterson and Hennessy
Course outcomes:
• Have a good understanding of functioning of computer system as such and its various
subcomponents.
• Student will be able to understand computing requirement for a specific purpose,
• Analyseperformance bottlenecks of the computing device and choose appropriate computing
device fora given use case.
• Acquire Knowledge to write assembly language programs
Course Title : Algorithms
Course Code CST209

Prerequisites NIL
Course Category PC
Theory : - 3 hrs/week Continuous Internal Assessment :
20 Marks
Tutorial: - 1 hr/week Attendance-10 Marks

Aim: Develop basic concept of Algorithms in Computer

Science
Course Objectives: The objective of this course is to prepare the student with the algorithmic
foundations of computing. A sound grasp of algorithms is essential for any computer science engineer.
Almost all programming involves algorithms at some level.
Course Content:
UNIT 1: Fundamentals of Algorithms 6 A
• Definitions and Characteristics of Algorithm. Examples.

• Data Abstraction.
• Sets, Multisets,
• Stacks, Queues.
• Asymptotic Notations (Order Notation, Omega Notation, Theta Notation) with Examples.
• Time and Space Complexity. Best Average and worst-case analysis of algorithms.
• Programming Models Concepts: -Divide and Conquer, Greedy Methods, Dynamic
Programming,
UNIT 2: Sorting 16 A
The sorting problem.

• Bubble sort.
• Selection sort.
• Insertion sort.
• Shell sort
• Merge sort.
• Quicksort.
• Heapsort.
Computation of Best Average and worst-case Time complexity of all the above sorting algorithms.
Linear Time sorting
• Count Sort
• Bucket Sort
• Radix Sort
UNIT 3: Searching 16 B
Linear Search Algorithm.

Binary Search Algorithm.
Computation of Best, Average and Worst-case Time complexity of Linear and Binary Search
Binary Search Trees: Algorithms, Searching Time & space complexity.
Balanced Search Trees: What is the signification and advantage of height
balancing?
Insertion, Deletion and Searching Algorithms of different types of
Balanced Search Trees and their comparative study.
Hashing, Hash Tables Hash functions, Collision and Collision resolving techniques.
Symbol Tables
UNIT 4: 16 C
Definitions: Graph Directed and Undirected graph-Examples.

Paths, Cycles, Spanning trees-Examples.
Directed Acyclic Graphs-Examples.
Topological Sorting.
Minimum Spanning Tree algorithms:
• Prim’s Algorithm with Examples
• Kruskal’s Algorithm with Examples
Shortest Path algorithms:
✓ Dijkstra’s algorithm.
✓ Bellman–Ford Algorithm,
Floyd-Warshall all pairs shortest path algorithm
UNIT 5: Strings 6 C
• String Sort.
• Tries.
• Search a Substring within a string.
• String Matching Algorithms and their complexity analysis

✓ Simple/Naive String Matching Algorithm
✓ Rabin-Karp Algorithm
✓ Knuth-Moris-Pratt Algorithm
✓ Horspool String Matching Algorithm
✓ Boyer-Moore String Matching Algorithm
• Regular Expressions.
• Elementary Data compression.
Reference Books
1. Algorithm Design, Jon Kleinberg| Eva Tardos, Pearson

2. Introduction to Algorithms, Cormen, Leiserson, Rivest and Stein. MIT Press
3. Design and Analysis of Algorithms, S.Sridhar, Oxford University Press.
4. Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms, E. Horowitz, S. Sahani, S. Rajasekaran,
Galgotia.
5. Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms, Anany Levitin, Pearson
6. Algorithms in a Nutshell, G.T.Heinemam, SPD
7. Design & Analysis of Algorithms, Gajendra Sharma, Khanna Publishing House
Course outcomes:
• The student should be able to understand the basic notions of time and space complexity of
algorithms.
• The student should be able to design basic algorithms for sorting and searching.
• The student should be able to realize Graph concepts, Minimum spanning Tree algorithms
and shortest path algorithms.
• The student should be able to implement sorting, searching, tree and graph algorithms in a
modern computer programming language
• The student should be able to understand String sort and how to search a substring within a
string.
Examination Scheme of ESE (End Semester Examination)

Questions to be
Question Type Question to be set Marks
answered
MCQ type questions carrying 1
15 10 10
mark.
Fill in the blanks type questions
15 10 10
carrying 1 mark.
Theoretical Short answer type questions
15 10 10
carrying 1 mark.
Subjective type questions carrying
10 6 12
2 marks.
9
Subjective type questions carrying
(3 each from each of 3 3 18
6 marks.
modules)
TOTAL 60
Course Title: Computer Programming Lab in C
Course Code CST211

Prerequisites Basic Operations on Computer
Course Category PC
Course Code: CST Semester: THIRD
Laboratory: 3 hrs/week Continuous Internal Assessment: 60Marks
Total Contact Hours: 45 Hours External Assessment: 40 Marks
Course Objectives:
This Lab course is intended to practice what is taught in theory class of ‘Computer Programming’ and become
proficient in computer programming. Computer programming is all about regular practice. Students should
work on solved and unsolved problems listed in the text books, and the problems given by the teacher. Some
of the topics that should necessary be covered in lab are listed below.
Course Content:
Sr. No. Topics for Practice
01 Familiarization with programming environment (Editor, Compiler, etc.) Skill Area
a) Displaying hexadecimal, decimal, octal number format of the Programs

entered numbers. using
02 b) Displaying entered number with leading zeros and trailing zeros. Formatted
c) Displaying entered number with right and left justification. input and
d) Displaying with different formatting specifiers. output.
a) To find greatest / smallest of three numbers.
b) To display pass class, second-class, distinction according to the
marks entered from the keyboard. Programs
c) To find even or odd numbers. using decision
d) To display spellings of number 1-10 on entry. making
03
e) Implementation and displaying the menu to execute 1. ADD, 2. statements and
SUBTRACT 3. MULTIPLICATION, 4. DIVISION using branching
switch case. statements
f) To check whether there exist real (float) roots of a quadratic
equation and if exist find them.
a) To display our College name twenty times on screen.
b) To demonstrate Continue and Break statements within loop
structure.
c) To add first ‘n’ natural, even, odd numbers using different loop
structures. Programs
04 d) To find GCD, LCM of two integral numbers. using loop
e) To generate simple number triangle for n rows. statements
f) To generate Pascal triangle for n rows.
g) To add the series 1 + (1 + 2) + (1 + 2 + 3) + …+ (1 + 2 + 3 + …
+ n)
h) To generate all prime numbers within the given range.
i) To find all the Armstrong numbers within 100 to 1000.
a) To find the largest and smallest numbers from array elements.

b) To sort array elements in ascending / descending order.
c) To enter elements for 3X3 matrix and display them.
d) To calculate addition / subtraction of 2-dimensional matrix. Programs to
demonstrate
e) To calculate multiplication of 2-dimensional matrix.
applications of
f) To find the number of vowels and consonants in a string.
05 1 & multi-
g) Implementation of strlen(), strcpy(), strcat() and strcmp()
dimensional
functions.
arrays &
h) To check whether a string is palindrome or not. Strings
i) To replace a specific character/string by another character/string
in a multiword string.
j) To make the abbreviated form of a multiword string.
a) To calculate the value of nCr, n≥r using function
x x2 xn
b) To find the sum of the series 1 + + ⋯ for n ≥ 1, x ≥ 0
1! 2! n! Programs to
using function. demonstrate
c) To interchange the biggest and smallest number in to calculate parameter
06
factorial a one-dimensional array using function. passing
d) To calculate addition, subtraction and multiplication of 2- mechanism &
dimensional matrix using function. recursion.
e) Write a program in C to find GCD of two numbers using recursion.
f) To calculate factorial of any given number using recursion.
g) To demonstrate call by reference, call by value.
a) To read and display an integer array using pointer.
b) To read and display a text using a character pointer to a string.
Also count the number of characters, words and lines in the text.
c) To read, display, add and subtract of two times defined using
hour, minutes and values of seconds. Programs to
d) To read and display the contents of a structure variable using demonstrate
pointer to a structure. use of pointers
07 e) Write a program in C to create a singly linked list of n nodes and and dynamic
display it in reverse order. memory
f) Write a program in C to insert a new node to a Singly Linked List after allocation.
a desired node and display the list.
g) Write a program in C to delete a node from a Singly Linked List after/
before a desired node and display the list.
h) Implement Stack and Queue data structure using dynamic memory
allocation.
Course outcomes
• Use of programming language constructs in program implementation.

• Apply different logics to solve given problem.
• Write program using different implementations for the same problem.
• Identify different types of errors as syntax, semantic, fatal, linker & logical.
• Debugging of programs.
• Understanding different steps and stages to develop complex program.
Reference Books
1. Programming in C, Author: Reema Thareja, OXFORD University Press

2. Programming in C, Author: E. Balagurusamy, TMH
3. C in Depth, Author: Srivastava, BPB
4. Mastering C, Author: Venugopal, TMH
5. C programming: Test your skills, Author: Kamthane Ashok, Pearson Education India
6. Head First C, David Griffiths, SPD
Course Title: Scripting Languages Lab
Course Code CST213

Number of Credits :2 2(L: 0, T: 0, P: 4)
Prerequisites NIL
Course Category PC
1.Continuous Internal Assessment :60 Marks
This 60 Marks will be comprised of the following Marks
division:
• Assignment: 20 Marks
• Class Performance: 20 Marks
• Viva Voce: 10 Marks
• Attendance: 10 Marks
2.End Semester Examination (External Assessment/
Sessional) :40 Marks
Practical: - 4 hrs/week
Course Objectives: This Lab course is intended to practice whatever is taught in theory class of
Scripting Languages’ and become proficient in scripting. Computer programming is all about
regular practice. Students should work on solved and unsolved problems listed in the text books, and
the problems given by the teacher. Some of the topics that should necessary be covered in lab are
listed below.
Course Content:
Contents (Practical)
Installing Python in Windows/Linux/Ubantu/Mac OS
Sr. No. Topics for Practice

S.No. Topics for Practice

1 Practice basic coding syntax
2 Write and execute scripts based on data types
3 Write and execute Python scripts with conditionals and loops
4 Write and execute Scripts based on Functions and Modules
5 File Processing scripts
6 Write and execute Regular Expressions
7 Develop a simple web application
Some of the suggested sample programs are:

• Running instructions in Interactive interpreter and a Python Script
• Write a script to purposefully raise Indentation Error and Correct it
• Write a script to find Sum and average of first n natural numbers
• Given 2 strings, s1 and s2, create a new string by appending s2 in the middle of s1
• Write a script to check whether a given string is palindrome or not.
• Write a program add.py that takes 2 numbers as command line arguments and
prints its sum.
• Write a script using a for loop that loops over a sequence
• Write a script to count the numbers of characters in the string and store them in a
dictionary data structure
• Write a program to use split and join methods in the string and trace a birthday
with a dictionary data structure.
• Write a script that combines more than one lists into a dictionary
• Compute the GCD & LCM of two numbers.
• Check a number is prime or not
• Find the square root of a number
• Exponentiation (power of a number)
• Find all primes within a given range
• Find First n Fibonacci numbers.
• Find the maximum of a list of numbers
• Linear search and Binary search
• Write a function nearly equal to test whether two strings are nearly equal. Two
strings a and b are nearly equal when a can be generated by a single mutation on b.
• Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
• Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
• Write a function to find all duplicates in the list
• Remove empty strings from the list of strings
• Write a program to print each line of a file in reverse order.
• Write a program to compute the number of characters, words and lines in a file.
• Write a script to Calculate age in year month days of a person taking his/her date
of birth as input and accessing current system date.
• Write a regular expression to search digit inside a string
Finding Whether PIP is installed, Install virtual environment using pip, Installing Django, Setting
PATH , Creating and Deploying Applications Using Django
Some of the suggested sample Exercises using Django
• Send data to a template
• Display data in a template
• Display object lists in a template
• Handle chains with filters in Django
• Create and Use URLs in Django
• Create base templates in order to extend other templates
• Insert static files in our templates
• Create an HTML form
• Handle the data sent by a form
• Create a Django form
• Validate and manipulate data sent from a Django form
• Create forms based on models
• Customize error messages and usage of widget
Course outcomes
Course outcomes: At the end of the course student will be able to build program with a scripting
language and will be able to learn any other scripting language on their own.
Reference Books
1.Taming Python by Programming, Jeeva Jose, Khanna Publishing House

2. Python Programming: Using Problem Solving Approach, Reema Thareja, Oxford
University
3. Starting Out with Python, Tony Gaddis, Pearson
4. Core Python Programming, Wesley J. Chun, Prentice Hall
5. Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python. John V. Guttag,
MIT Press.
6. Beginning Python using Python 2.6 and Python 3, James Payne, Wrox publishing
7. Practical Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science using Python 3,
Paul Gries, The Pragmatic Bookshelf
Course Title: Data Structures Lab
Course Code CST215

Prerequisites Basic Knowledge of Computer system
Course Category Computer Science and Technology
Course Code: CST Semester: THIRD
Laboratory: 4 hrs/week Continuous Internal Assessment: 40 Marks
Total Contact Hours: 60 Hours Attendance, Assignment & Quiz: - 20 Marks
End Semester Examination: 40 Marks
Course Objectives:
This Lab course is intended to practice what is taught in theory class of ‘data Structure’ and become proficient
in computer programming. Computer programming is all about regular practice. Students should work on
solved and unsolved problems listed in the text books, and the problems given by the teacher. Some of the
topics that should necessary be covered in lab are listed below.
Course Content:
01 Skills to be developed
➢ Intellectual Skills:
➢ Use of programming language constructs in program
implementation.
➢ To be able to apply different logics to solve given problem.
➢ To be able to write program using different implementations for the
same problem
➢ Study different types of errors as syntax semantic, fatal, linker & Programs
logical using
➢ Debugging of programs Formatted
➢ Understanding different steps to develop program such as input and
➢ Problem definition output.
➢ Analysis
➢ Design of logic
➢ Coding
➢ Testing
➢ Maintenance (Modifications, error corrections, making changes
etc.)
02 g) Motor Skills: Proper handling of Computer System.
List of Practical:
Programs based on:

01
Array operations, insertion, deletion
Programs based on Stacks
Implementation of PUSH & POP operations, Evaluate postfix expressions, Infix to postfix
02
h) conversions.
Programs to demonstrate parameter passing mechanism & recursion.
Recursive programs: factorial, Fibonacci, Ackerman function, and tower of Hanoi.(any two)
03
Programs for demonstrating queue operations.

04
one recursive program converted to non-recursive ones
Programs based on Linked lists
05
Programs based on trees

06 Creating a binary tree, in order, pre order and post order traversal of binary tree, deleting a
node from binary tree.
Programs for implementing various sorting techniques.
07
(Minimum three sorting techniques from topics mentioned in the syllabus))
Programs for implementing various sorting and searching techniques.
08
(Minimum two searching techniques from topics mentioned in the syllabus.)
Assignments based on graph theory.
09
10 Assignments based on graph theory.

LIST OF SAMPLE PROBLEMS FOR DATA STRUCTURE LAB ( Example )
1. To write a program to check whether a word is palindrome or not.

2. To create a two- dim en sio nal array of numbers and calculate & display the row & column
sum and thegrand total.
3. To write a program of matrix multiplication.
4. To write a program to insert (Push) an element into the sack and delete (Pop) an element from
the stack using pointer.
5. To write a program to convert an infix expression to a postfix expression.
6. To evaluate a postfix expression.
7. To write a program to insert an element in the queue and delete an element from the queue using
pointer.
8. To create a circular queue and add an element and delete an element from a circular queue.
9. To write a program of a structure containing an item name along with the unit price. The user
enters the item name and quantity to be purchased. Program print outs total price of item with
name using pointer in a structure or array in a structure.
10. To create a single linked list and — (a) insert a node in the list (before header node, in between
two nodes, end of the list); (b0 delete a node from the list (1 st node, last node, in between two
nodes); (c) Concatenate two lists.
11. To create a doubly linked list and — (a) insert a node in the list (before header node, in between
two nodes, end of the list); (b) delete a node from the list (1 st node, last node, in between two
nodes); (c) Concatenate two lists.
12. To create a circular linked list and insert & delete an element from the list.
13. Write a program to merge two shorted linked list.
14. Write a program to reverse a linked list.
r
15. To write a program to calculate the binomial co-efficient of n C of two numbers using
recursive function.
Also write the same program using function in non-recursive way.
16. To write a program to generate Fibonacci Series using recursive function. Also write the
same program using function in non-recursive way.
17. To write a program to create a binary tree and traverse it in pre-order and post-order form.
18. To write a program to create a binary search tree and —
(a) insert a new node in the BST

(b) search anode in the BST
(c) delete a node from the BST
Course outcomes
• Using of programming language implement data Structure.
• Apply different logics to solve given problem.
• Write program using different implementations for the same problem.
• Identify different types of errors as syntax, semantic, fatal, linker & logical.
• Debugging of programs.
• Understanding different steps and stages to develop complex program.
Reference Books
1. Introduction to Data Structures in C, Kamthane, Pearson
2. Data Structures Using C, Reema Thareja, Oxford University Press India.
3. A simplified approach to data structures, Pawan Goyal, Published by SPD
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Electrical & Electronics

Engineering [EEE]
Revised 2022
SYLLABUS FOR DIPLOMA ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
SMESTER- 3rd
Sl. Category of Code Course Title Credit Marks Total Contact

No course No s Hours per Week
L P
1 Program Core Introduction to 3 100 3 0
Course Electric Generation
Systems
Systems Laboratory
3 Program Core Electrical Circuits 3 100 3 0
Course
Course Laboratory
5 Program Core Electrical and 3 100 3 0
Course Electronic
Measurement
Course Electronic
Measurement
Laboratory
7 Program Core DC Machines and 3 100 3 0
Course Transformers
Course Transformers
Laboratory
9 Program Core Electronic Devices and 3 100 3 0
Course Circuits
10 Program Core Electronic Devices and 1 100 0 2
Course Circuits Laboratory
11 Internship Internship-I 1 100 0
TOTAL 21 1100 15 10
 Student contact hrs./ week =25

 Theory and practical periods of 60 minutes each
 Abbreviation: L: Lecture class; P: Practical class
 For Theoretical subjects: Internal Assessment (40 Marks): Mid semester class test: 20 Marks;
Quizzes, viva-voce, Assignment: 10 Marks; Attendance: 10; External Assessment: 60 Marks.
 For Practical/ Sessional Subjects: Internal Assessment-60Marks [Continuous
Evaluation:50; Class Attendance:10]; End Semester Assessment-40Marks [Assignment on
the day of Viva-voce and Practical Report submission:20; Viva-voce:20]
 To make the students more familiar with software, effort should be made to prepare laboratory
report (like graph; data table etc.) in soft format in addition with traditional hard copy wherever
possible.
Page 1 of 29
Course Code :
Course Title : INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC GENERATION SYSTEMS
Semester 3rd
Number of Credits : 3 (L:3,P:0)
Prerequisites : NIL
Full Marks 100 [ Internal :40 Marks+ External: 60 Marks]
Course Objective
The aim of this course is to help the student to attain the following industry identified competency through
various teaching learning experiences –
 Maintain the efficient operation of various conventional electric power generating plants.
Contents (Theory): Hrs./Unit
Unit : 1 Coal Based Thermal Power Plant 12
1.1 Selection of site

1.2 Layout and working with block diagram
1.3 Features and Function of the following equipments –
(a) Boiler (b) Economiser (c) Super Heater & Reheater (d) Air Pre-Heater (e) F.D. Fan &
I.D. Fan, Chimney (f) Steam Turbine (g) Condenser (h) Feed Water Heater and feed water
pump (i) De-aerator (j) Spray pond & Cooling Tower (k) D.M. Water plant (l) Coal
Handling Plant (m) Ash Handling (n) ESP (o) concept of zero discharge system.
1.4 Basic concept of Rankine Cycle
1.5 Fuel combustion: Stokers, Pulverisers, Fluidised Bed Combustion (concept only)
1.6 Basic concept of Super Critical Boiler
1.7 Classification of coal, Calorific Value, selection of coal for power generation
1.8 Merits & Demerits of coal power plant
1.9 Thermal, Electrical and Overall Efficiency, simple numerical problems.
1.10 List of important coal power plants in India with their capacities
Unit : 2 Nuclear Power Plant 07

2.2 Nuclear Fission & Fusion, Chain Reaction, Half-Life period
2.4 Construction and Working of Nuclear Reactor. Features and Function of the following
equipments – (a) Core (b) Fuel rod (c) Moderator (d) Control rod (e) Thermal shielding (f)
Reflector
2.5 Nuclear fuels : Fissile & Fertile materials, Types of reactors
2.6 Disposal of nuclear waste
2.7 Merits & Demerits of nuclear power plant
2.8 List of important nuclear power plants in India with their capacities
Page 2 of 29
Unit: 3 Gas and Diesel Power Plant 06
(A) Gas Turbine Power Plant

3.3 Fuels and different elements used in gas turbine power plant
3.4 Merits and Demerits of Gas Turbine Power Plant
(B) Diesel Electric Power Plant

3.6 Working of different elements used in diesel power plant
3.7 Merits & Demerits of Diesel Electric Power Plant
3.8 Field of application
Unit: 4 Large Hydro Power Plants 08

4.2 Layout and working with schematic diagram
4.3Classification of different head hydro power plants and Function of different
components – Storage reservoir, Dam, Spillway,Penstock, Surge Tank etc.
4.4 Types of Water Turbines and their construction,basic operation of each type and their
use(concept only)
4.5 Pumped Storage Plant
4.6 Merits & Demerits
4.7 Power calculation and plant related simple numerical problems
4.8 List of important Large Hydro Plants in India with their capacities
Unit: 5 Economics of Power Generation and Interconnected Power Station 12
5.1 Related Terms – Connected Load, Firm Power, Cold Reserve,Hot Reserve,Operating
Reserve, Spinning Reserve, Average Demand, Maximum Demand
5.2 Base Load Plant & Peak Load Plant
5.3 Load Curve, Load Duration Curve, Integrated Duration Curve, Mass Curve, simple
numerical problems
5.4 Factors affecting the cost of generation – Demand Factor, Load Factor, Diversity
Factor, Plant Use Factor, Plant Capacity Factor. Simple numerical problems
5.5 Different types of Tariff system - Flat Rate, Block Rate, Two Part, Three Part, simple
numerical problems
5.6 Significance of Interconnected Power System
5.7 Choice of size and number of units, combined operation of power stations
5.8 Reasons and impact of grid system faults, State Grid and National Grid
5.9 Brownout and Blackout
Total 45
Page 3 of 29
References:
1. P.K. Nag, PowerPlantEngineering,McGrawHill,NewDelhi,ISBN:978-9339204044
2. TanmoyDeb,ElectricalPowerGeneration,KhannaPublishingHouse,Delhi(Ed.2018) ISBN-10-
9789386173379 ; ISBN: 13- 978-9386173379
3. B.R.Gupta, Generation of Electrical Energy, S. Chand & Co. New Delhi,
4. J.B. Gupta, A Course in Electrical Power- S. K Kataria and Sons, New Delhi. ISBN:13- 978-
9350143742; ISBN:10- 9350143747
5. Soni, Gupta, Bhatnagar, A Course in Electrical Power. – Dhanpat Rai and Sons
6. V K. Mehta, Principles of Power System – S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi.ISBN-13- 978-
8121924962; ISBN:10- 9788121924962
Course Outcomes
The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with the course are to be taught and
implementatecd
So that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated with the above mentioned
competency:
CO1 Explain the features, functioning, merits and demerits of Coal Based Thermal
Power Plant
CO2 Analyze the optimized working of the nuclear power plant.
CO3 Describe the construction, merits and demerits of Nuclear Power Plant.
CO4 Identify elements of gas turbine Power plant and Diesel Electric Power Plant
through appropriate block diagram.
CO5 Understand the merits and demerits of gas turbine Power Plant and Diesel
Electric Power Plant for application in real field.
CO6 Explain the layout and functioning of Large Hydro Power Plant with respect to
it’s various components.
CO7 Identify various factors associated in the economic use of Power generation and
interconnected Power Station.
Internal Assessment (40 Marks)

Mid Semester Class Test:20 Marks Quizzes, viva-voce, Assignment: 10 Marks Attendance: 10
External Assessment (End Semester Examination:60 Marks)

GROUP UNIT
A 1
B 2,3
C 4,5
Page 4 of 29
Course Code :
Course Title : INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC GENERATION
SYSTEMS LABORATORY
Semester 3rd
Prerequisites : NIL
Full marks 100 [Internal :60; External:40]
Course Objective
 The aim of this course is to help the student to attain the following industry identified competency
through various teaching learning experiences –
 Maintain the efficient operation of various conventional electric power generating plants.
Practicals
At least EIGHT are to be done
1. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the coal fired thermal power plant after watching a
video programme
2. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the gas fired thermal power plant after watching a
video programme
3. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the diesel generator power plant after watching a
video programme
4. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the nuclear fired thermal power plant after watching
a video programme
5. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the large hydro power plant after watching a video
programme
6. Study on the different types of Boiler used in coal based thermal power plant
7. Study on different types of Nuclear Reactor used in nuclear power plant
8. Study on different types of Water Turbines used in large hydro power plant
9. Draw Load Curve, Load Duration Curve and Mass curve of your institute
10. Calculate the total energy cost in a (i) Residential (ii) Commercial and (iii) Industrial Bill
11. A. Visit the website of WBPDCL https://wbpdcl.co.in/Home and collect data and prepare a
report on the following
a) Coal based power station and their generation capacity
b) Renewable Energy generation
c) Future projects
B.Visit the website of WBSEDCL

https://www.wbsedcl.in/irj/go/km/docs/internet/new_website/Home.html
Collect data and prepare a report on the followings
a) Hydel power plants
b) Pumped Storage plants
c) Solar power plants
C.Visit the website of NPCIL
https://www.npcil.nic.in/content/282_1_ClearancesfromMoEFCC.aspx
Collect data and prepare a report on
a) Nuclear power plants in India and their capacity.
b) Future Nuclear projects .
c) Study on Environmental impact, safety and policy.
Page 5 of 29
Course Outcomes
implementatecd so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated with the
above mentioned competency:
CO1 Analyze the optimized working of the coal power

plant.
CO2 Analyze the optimized working of the nuclear
power plant.
CO3 Explain the optimized working of the gas power
plant.
CO4 Explain the optimized working of the diesel
power plant
CO5 Analyze the optimized working of the large
hydro power plant.
CO6 Calculate the cost of electricity for different class
of consumers.
CO7 Explain the power sector scenario of West
Bengal and Nuclear power scenario of India.
E X A M I N A T I O N S C H E M E (SESSIONAL)
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 60 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Third
Semester. Distribution of marks: Continuous evaluation:50 Marks; Class Attendance: 10 Marks
2. External Assessment (end Semester examination) of 40 marks shall be held at the end of the Third
Semester on the entire syllabus. Assignment on the day of Viva-voce and practical report
submission:20; Viva-voce:20
Course Code :
Course Title : ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
Page 6 of 29
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Full Marks 100 Internal :40; External:60]
Course Objective
through various teaching learning experiences
 Maintain electrical systems applying AC and DC circuit fundamentals.
Unit : 1 Network Theorems (Statement, procedure, areas of applications and limitations of 08

all theorems)
1.1. Source transformation
1.2. Mesh Analysis and Node Analysis
1.3. Star/delta and delta/star transformation
1.4. Superposition theorem.
1.5. Thevenin’s theorem.
1.6. Norton’s theorem
1.7. Maximum power transfer theorem
1.8. Related Numerical problems.
Unit : 2 Single Phase A.C Circuits 08
2.1 Generation of alternating voltage.
2.2 Phasor representation of sinusoidal quantities
2.3 R, L, C circuit elements its voltage and current response.
2.4 R-L, R-C, R-L-C combination of A.C series and parallel circuit, impedance,
reactance, impedance triangle, Power factor, active power, reactive power,
apparent power, power triangle and vector diagram.
2.5 Resonance, Bandwidth, Quality factor and voltage magnification in series and
parallel R- L-C circuit.
2.6 Related Numerical problems.
Unit: 3 Three Phase A.C Circuits 08

3.1 Phasor and complex representation of three phase supply
3.2 Phase sequence and polarity -
3.3 Rectangular to polar conversion and vice versa
3.4 Types of three-phase connections, Relationship between Phase and line quantities
in three phase star and delta system with derivation.
3.5 Concept of balanced and unbalanced load, neutral shift in unbalanced load
3.6 Three phase power, active, reactive and apparent power in star and delta system.
Page 7 of 29
Unit: 4 Transient Analysis 06
4.1 Introduction
4.2 Simple R-L Circuit supplied from a DC voltage source
4.3 Simple R-C circuit supplied from a DC voltage source.
4.4 Time Constant.
Unit: 5 Laplace Transform 07

5.1 Definition & Properties.
5.2 Laplace Transform of Unit Step, Impulse, Ramp, Exponential, Sine, Cosine
Function. Initial value and Final Value Theorem.
5.3 Applications of Laplace Transformations for solving differential equations
describing simple electrical circuits
Unit: 6 Two port network 04

6.1 Open circuit Impedance and Short circuit Admittance parameters,
6.2 Transmission parameters and their Inter relations. (Simple Numerical)
Unit-7 Coupling 04
7.1 Concept of coupling, Dot Convention
7.2 Concept of independent flux and mutual flux
7.3 Concept of mutual coupling, factors of mutual coupling
7.4 Self inductance and mutual inductance
7.5 Study the example s of coupled circuit
Total 45
References:
1. B.L. Theraja, Basic Electrical Engineering Volume – S. Chand; ISBN-13 : 978-8121924405
1. Mahmood Nahvi & Joseph AEdminister, Schaum’s outlines Electriccircuits, McGrawhill
Education(India) Pvt. Ltd., ISBN-13 : 978-9389538908
2. D RoyChoudhury, NetworksandSystems, Publisher: NEW AGE, ISBN-13 : 978-8122427677; ISBN-10
: 9788122427677
3. A.Chakraborty, Circuit Theory Analysis and Synthesis.–Dhanpat Rai&Co.
4. S P Ghosh & A KChakraborty, NetworkAnalysis&Synthesis –McGrawhillEducation(India)Pvt.Ltd.,
ISBN-13- 9780070144781;ISBN-10- 9780070144781
5. S Salivahanan; Circuit theory Analysis and Synthesis; Pearson India Education Service Pvt Ltd;
ISBN: 978-93-539-4818-4
7. Gargi Basu; Introduction to circuit and Network; Platinum Publishers; ISBN: 978-8189874-46-9
Course Outcomes
implementatecd so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated with the
Page 8 of 29
CO1 Explain the statement, procedure, areas of
application and limitations of Network Theorems.
CO2 Describe the generation, phasor diagram of
sinusoidal quantities, R,L,C series and parallel
combination of Single Phase AC Circuits.
CO3 Identify Resonance, Bandwidth, Quality factor in
series and parallel R-L-C circuits.
CO4 Describe phasor and Complex representation of
Three phase supply and explain the concept of
Balanced and Unbalanced load, Three phase power,
Active, Reactive and Apparent Power in Three phase
AC Circuits.
CO5 Explain Transient, Transient Analysis of R-L and R-
C circuits supplied from DC Voltage Source and
concept of time constant.
CO6 Describe definition and properties of Laplace
Transform and identify Laplace transformation of
various signal.
CO7 Explain the application of Laplace transformation
CO8 Identify different parameters and their inter relations

in transmission network in two port network


GROUP UNIT
A 1,6,7
B 2,3
C 4,5
Page 9 of 29
Course Code :
Course Title : ELECTRIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Full Marks 100 [Internal 60 Marks; External:40 Marks]
Course Objective
through various teaching learning experiences
 Maintain electrical systems applying AC and DC circuit fundamentals.
Practicals
1) To verify Kirchhoff’s Current Law and Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law.
2) Use dual trace oscilloscope to determine A.C voltage and current response in given R, L, C circuit.
3) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter to determine active, reactive and apparent power consumed in
given R-L / R-C series circuit. Draw phasor diagram.
4) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter to determine active, reactive and apparent power consumed in
given R-L-C series circuit. Draw phasor diagram.
5) Use variable frequency supply to create resonance in given series and parallel R-L-C circuit or by
using variable inductor or variable capacitor
6) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter to determine current, p.f. , active, reactive and apparent power
in R-L / R-C parallel A.C. circuit.
7) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter, p.f meter to determine current, p.f., active, reactive and
apparent power for given R-L-C parallel circuit with series connection of resistor and inductor in
parallel with capacitor
8) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter, p.f meter to determine line and phase quantities of voltage and
current for balanced three phase star and delta connected load and calculate active, reactive, and
apparent power. Draw phasor diagram.
9) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter, p.f meter to determine line and phase quantities of voltage and
current for unbalanced three phase star and delta connected load and calculate active, reactive, and
apparent power. Draw phasor diagram
10) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine current through the given branch of an electric network by
applying mesh analysis.
11) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine current through the given branch of an electric network by
applying node analysis.
12) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine current through the given branch and voltage across the
given element of circuit by applying superposition theorem.
13) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine equivalent circuit parameter in a given circuit by applying
Thevenin’s theorem
14) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine equivalent circuit parameter in a given circuit by applying
Norton’s theorem
15) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine load resistance for maximum power transfer for a given
circuit by applying maximum power transfer theorem.
Page 10 of 29
Course Outcomes
implementatecd
sothatthestudentdemonstratesthefollowingindustryorientedCOsassociatedwiththeabovementionedcompetency
:
CO1 Learn to troubleshoot problems related to single phase A.C series circuits.
CO2 Learn to troubleshoot problems related to single phase A.C parallel circuits.
CO3 Apply skills to solve problems related to three phase circuits.
CO4 Apply principles of circuit analysis to troubleshoot electric circuits.
CO5 Apply network theorems to troubleshoot electric circuits.
2. External Assessment (end Semester examination) of 40 marks shall be held at the end of the Third Semester
on the entire syllabus. Assignment on the day of Viva-voce and practical report submission:20; Viva-voce:20
Page 11 of 29
Course Code :
Course Title : ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS
Semester 3rd
Prerequisites : NIL
Full Marks 100 Marks [ Internal :40 Marks + External: 60 Marks]
Course Objective
The aim of this course is to help the student to attain the following industry identified competency through
various teaching learning experiences –
1. Know relevant measuring instrument in different electrical & electronics applications.
2. Know working of relevant measuring instruments in analog & digital applications.
Unit : 1 Fundamentals of Measurements: 05
1.1 Purpose of measurement and significance of measurement.

1.2 Definition & brief explanations of: -
Range, sensitivity, true & indicated value, Errors (including limiting
errors), Resolutions, Accuracy, Precision and instrument efficiency.
1.3 Classification of instrument systems: -
1.3.1 Null and deflection type instruments
1.3.2 Absolute and secondary instruments
1.3.3 Analog and digital instruments
1.3.4 Static and dynamic characteristics, types of errors
1.4 Calibration of instruments: Necessity and procedure
1.5 Classification of measuring instruments: -
Indicating, Recording and Integrating instruments.
1.5.1 Essential requirements of indicating instruments
Unit : 2 Measurement of voltage and current: 08
2.1 Construction, working principle, salient features, merits and demerits of –

i) Permanent Magnet Moving Coil (PMMC) type Instrument
ii) Moving Iron (MI) type Instrument
iii) Dynamometer type Instrument
2.2 AC voltmeter: Rectifier type (half wave and full wave) – their construction,
working principle, salient features.
2.3 Different Methods of range extension of Ammeter and Voltmeter & related
problems.
2.4 Calibration of Ammeter and Voltmeter.
2.5 CT: Construction, working principle, different errors and their reduction,
Accuracy class, Burden on CT, Specifications, Precautions in the use of CT,
application.
Page 12 of 29
2.6 PT: Working principle, Errors (concept only), Accuracy class, Burdens,
Specifications, Precautions in the use of PT, application.
2.7 Clamp-on meter: Construction, working principle, application.
Unit: 3 Measurement of Electric Power: 08
3.1 Dynamometer type wattmeter: Construction and working principle, Multiplying
factor and extension of range, Different types of errors and their compensation.
3.2 Measurements of active power in three phase circuit for balanced load by one
wattmeter method, two wattmeter method, three wattmeter method, related
problems.
3.3 Measurement of active power in three phase circuit for unbalanced load.
3.4 Effect of power factor variation on wattmeter readings in two wattmeter method
– Numerical problems.
3.5 Measurement of reactive power in three phase circuit.
3.6 Maximum Demand indicator - Construction and working principle.
Unit: 4 Measurement of Electric Energy: 06

4.1 Single phase and three phase electronic energy meter: Constructional features
and working principle, Different types of errors and their compensation.
4.2 Constructional feature & working principle of single phase and three-phase
induction type energy meter. Different types of errors and their compensation.
4.3 Calibration of single-phase electronic energy meter using direct loading.
Unit: 5 Measurement of Circuit Parameter, CRO and Other Meters: 15
5.1 Measurement of resistance:
5.1.1 Low resistance: Kelvin’s double bridge
5.1.2 Medium Resistance: Voltmeter and ammeter method
5.1.3 High resistance: Megger
5.1.4 Ohm meter: Series, Shunt type
5.2 Measurement of inductance using Anderson bridge.
5.3 Measurement of capacitance using Schering bridge.
5.4 Earth tester: Working and connection diagram, application.
5.5 Digital Multimeter: Working principle and basic block diagram, application.
5.6 L-C-R meter: Working and basic block diagram, application.
5.7 Digital Frequency meter: Working and basic block diagram, application.
5.8 Phase sequence indicator: Working and basic block diagram, application.
5.9 Power factor meter:
Single phase and Three phase dynamometer type: Working principle and circuit
diagram.
5.10 Synchroscope: Working principle and circuit diagram, application.
5.11 Tri-vector meter: Working principle, application.
5.12 Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO):
5.12.1 Single beam/single trace, Dual trace CRO
5.12.2 Digital storage Oscilloscope: Basic block diagram, working.
5.12.3 Cathode ray tube, electrostatic deflection, vertical amplifier, horizontal
amplifier, time base generator.
5.12.4 Measurement of voltage, amplitude, time period, frequency, phase angle
using CRO. Lissajou figure.
5.12.5 Specifications of CRO.
Page 13 of 29
5.13 Signal generator: Working and basic block diagram, Applications.
5.14 Function generator: Working and basic block diagram, function of symmetry,
Applications.
Unit: 6 Transducers 03
6.1 Basic Concepts of Transducers
6.2 Classification of Transducers
6.3 Basic working principle of Resistive, Capacitive, Inductive, LVDT and HALL
effect Transducer
6.4 Measurement of Pressure- Pizoelectric effect- Pizoelectric materials.
Total 45
References:
1. Sawhney A.K., Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation.,DhanpaiRai
andSons,New Delhi, ISBN : 9780000279744
2. Mittle V. N., Basic Electrical Engineering, McGraw-Hill New Delhi, ISBN : 978-0-07-0088572-5
3. Edward Hughes, Electrical Technology, Pearson Education, New Delhi, ISBN-13: 978-
0582405196
4. Rajput R.K., Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation, S.Chand and Co.
NewDelhi, ISBN : 9789385676017
5. Theraja B. L., Theraja A. K., A Text Book of Electrical Technology Vol-I(Basic Electrical
Engg.),S.Chand and Co. New Delhi, ISBN: 9788121924405
6. Suryanarayna N.V., Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments, S.Chand and Co.
NewDelhi , ISBN :8121920116
7. Kalsi H S; Electronic Instrumentation; McGraw-Hill New Delhi; ISBN13:978-0-07-070206-6;
ISBN10:0-07-070206-3
Course Outcomes:
The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with this course are to be taught
and implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated
with the above mentioned competency:
CO1 Explain the features, functioning and classification of Measuring instruments.

CO2 Describe the functioning and classification of different types of measuring
instrument for measuring voltage and current.
CO3 Identify the construction, features and application of instrument for measurement
of electric power.
CO4 Describe the features and application of Energy Meter.
CO5 Explain the functioning and application of different types of electrical
instruments for measuring various electrical parameters.
CO6 Describe the features, working and application of Transducers.
Page 14 of 29
Mid Semester Class Test:20 Marks Quizzes, viva-voce, Assignment: 10 Marks Attendance: 10 Marks

GROUP UNIT
A 1,2
B 3,4
C 5,6
Course Code :
LABORATORY
Semester Third
Number of credits : 1 (L:0, P:2)
Prerequisites : NIL
Full marks 100Marks[Internal :60 Marks; External:40 Marks]
Course Objective
The aim of this course is to help the student to attain the following industry identified competency
1. Use relevant measuring instrument in different electrical & electronics applications.
2. Use working of relevant measuring instruments in analog & digital applications.
3. Know the troubleshooting of different electrical & electronic instruments.
List of Practicals: (At least EIGHT are to be performed)
1. Use Clamp-on meter / digital multi-meter for measurement of AC/DC current, AC/DC voltage.
2. Extend range of ammeter and voltmeter by using (i) shunt and multiplier (ii) CT and PT.
3. Use single wattmeter for measurement of active and reactive power of three phase balanced
load.
4. Use two watt-meters for measuring active power of three-phase balanced load.
Page 15 of 29
5. Calibrate single phase electronic energy meter by direct loading.
6. Troubleshoot single phase electronic energy meter.
7. Use Kelvin’s double bridge for measurement of low resistance.
8. Use voltmeter and ammeter method / Wheatstone bridge for measurement of medium resistance.
9. Use Megger for measurement of insulation resistance.
10. Use earth tester for measurement of earth resistance.
11. Measure unknown inductance using Anderson bridge.
12. Measure unknown capacitance using Schering bridge.
13. Use CRO for the Measurement of voltage, frequency, phase angle.
14. Use Tri-vector meter for measuring kW, kVAr and kVA of a power line.
Course Outcomes
CO1 Acquire knowledge about the working of the electrical measuring

instrument.
CO2 Calibrate single phase electronic energy meter.
CO3 Determine the magnitude of active and reactive power by single wattmeter and
two wattmeter method.
CO4 Measure low resistance, inductance and capacitance using dc and ac Bridge.
CO5 Measurement of high resistance using megger.
CO6 Acquire knowledge about the functional block diagram and principle of
operation of cathode ray oscilloscope, digital voltmeter, multi-meter.
Semester on the entire syllabus. Assignment on the day of Viva-voce and practical report submission:20; Viva-
voce:20
Page 16 of 29
Course Code :
Course Title : DC Machines and Transformers
Semester 3rd
Number of Credits : 3(L:3,P:0)
Prerequisites : NIL
Full Marks 100 [ Internal :40+ External: 60]
Course Objective:The aim of this course is to help the student to attain the following industry identified
competency through various teaching learning experiences: Maintain dc motors and transformers.
Contents (Theory): Hrs/ unit

Unit:1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION OF ROTATING MACHINE 02
1.1. Mechanism of Electro-Mechanical energy conversion for generator & motor mode
1.2. Laws related to Electromechanical Energy Conversion- Faradays law of
Electromagnetic Induction, Lenz’s law, Fleming’s right hand rule and left hand rule.
Unit: 2 D.C. Generator 08

2.1 Working principles, Construction & Types of dc generator.
2.2 Armature winding types – Concept of Lap & Wave winding.
2.3 E.m.f equation
2.4 Generator characteristics: Open circuit characteristics; External Characteristics
(Concept only); Methods of building up of e.m.f, Significance of Critical resistance and
Critical speed (Numerical).
2.5 Concept of flux distribution in DC machine.
2.6 Armature reaction in DC machine and remedial measures. (Concept only).
2.7 Commutation method, Concept of reactance voltage.
2.8 Applications of different types of D.C. generator.
2.9 Parallel operation of dc generator.
Unit:3 3. D.C. Motor 08

3.1 Working principles, Back e.m.f., Speed and Torque equation. (Numerical)
3.2 Characteristics of Series, Shunt & Compound motors.
3.3 Methods of speed control of DC motors. (Numerical)
3.4 Starting methods of DC motor – 3-point & 4-point starter.
3.5 Losses and Efficiency (Numerical).
3.6 Braking methods of DC motor – Regenerative breaking, Counter current braking,
Dynamic braking.
3.7 Applications of different types of DC motor.
3.8 Brushless DC motors: Construction; working principle and applications.
Unit:4 4.Single phase Transformer: 14

4.1 Types of transformers: Shell type and Core type; construction; different parts of
transformer and their function. Material used for different parts: CRGO, CRNGO, HRGO,
amorphous core.
4.2 Principle of operation.
4.3 E.m.f. equation, Transformation ratio, rating of transformers. (Numerical)
4.4 Concept of ideal and practical transformer.
4.5 Performance under no-load condition with phasor diagram. (Numerical)
Page 17 of 29
4.6 Performance under load condition with phasor diagram. (Numerical)
4.7 Equivalent circuit. (Numerical)
4.8 Per unit representation of impedance (Numerical).
4.9 Voltage Regulation at upf, lagging pf & leading pf. (Numerical)
4.10 Polarity test of transformer.
4.11 Open Circuit and Short Circuit tests – Estimation of losses & Equivalent circuit
parameters. (Numerical)
4.12. Losses, Efficiency, Maximum efficiency, All-day efficiency. (Numerical)
4.13 Parallel operation of single phase transformers (Numerical).
4.14 Tap-changing methods, Tap changers – Off load & On-load type.
4.15 Single-phase Auto transformer: Construction, Working principles and application.
Unit:5 5. Three phase Transformer: 09
5.1 Types of three phase transformer: Bank of three single phase transformers, single unit
three phase transformers.
5.2 Construction of 3-phase transformer –different types of Winding.
5.3 Connections of 3-phase transformer – As per IS:2026 (part-IV)-1977 (Classification &
necessity)- Basic idea about vector groups of transformers
5.4 Practical application of zig-zag connection in earthing transformer.
5.5 Concept of Tertiary winding and its utility.
5.6 Different cooling methods of transformer.
5.7 Three-phase Auto transformer – Construction; working principle and application.
5.8 Scott-connected transformer – working principle, connection
Diagram, practical application.
5.9 Open delta connection – working principle, connection diagram and practical
application.
5.10 Criteria for selection of Power transformer and distribution transformer. Amorphous
Core type distribution transformer; Specification of three phase distribution transformer as
per IS: 1180(Part I)-1989
5.11 Need of parallel operation of three phase transformer, Conditions for parallel
operation.
5.12 Phasing out test on Three-phase transformer.
Unit:6 6. Special Purpose Transformers 04

6.1 Isolation transformer: Construction, working principle and applications.
6.2 Single phase welding transformer: Construction, working principle and applications.
6.3 Pulse transformer: Construction, working principle and applications.
6.4 ‘K’ factor of transformers: overheating due to non-linear loads and harmonics.
45 hrs
References:
1. Purkait & Bandyopadhyay; Electrical Machines; Oxford University Press (ISBN-10: 0-19-947263-7), New
Delhi.
2. Bhattacharya,S.K.,ElectricalMachines,McGrawHillEducation,NewDelhi,ISBN:9789332902855
3. Electric Machines,Ashfaq Husain, Harroon Ashfaq; Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Limited; ISBN 10-
8177001663
4. Theraja,B.L.,ElectricalTechnologyVol-II(ACandDCmachines),S.ChandandCo.Ltd.,NewDelhi,
Page 18 of 29
ISBN:9788121924375
5.
Mittle,V.N.andMittle,Arvind.,BasicElectricalEngineering,McGrawHillEducation,NewDelhi,ISBN:9780070593
572
6. Kothari, D. P. and Nagrath, I. J., Electrical Machines, McGraw Hill Education. New Delhi,ISBN:
9780070699670
7. G.C. Garg &P.S. Bimbhra, Electrical Machines, Vol-I, II, Khanna Book Publishing House ISBN: 978-
9386173-447, 978-93-86173-607, NewDelhi
8. Mehta,V.K.andMehta,Rohit,PrinciplesofElectricalMachines,S.ChandandCo.Ltd.,NewDelhi,
ISBN:9788121930888
9. Bandyopadhyay,M.N.,ElectricalMachinesTheoryandPractice,PHILearningPvt.Ltd.,New Delhi, ISBN:
9788120329973
10. S K Sen, Electrical Machinery, Khanna Book Publishing House, New Delhi; ISBN: 8174091521
Course Outcomes: The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with this course are
to be taught and implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated
with the above mentioned competency
CO1 Explain the mechanism of energy conversion for motor and generator mode.
CO2 Describe the construction, classification and applications of DC Generator.
CO3 Identify features, classification and application of DC motors and staters.
CO4 Describe the working principle, construction, classification and application of single-
phase transformer.
CO5 Explain the construction, classification, applications and different circuit connections of
three phase transformer in real field.
CO6 Identify the construction, features and application of various Special Purpose
Transfromers.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,2,3
B 4
C 5,6
Page 19 of 29
Course Code
Course Title DC Machines and Transformers Laboratory
Semester 3rd
Number of credits 1 (L:0, T:0; P:2)
Prerequisites NIL
Course Category PC
Full Marks 100 [Internal :60; External:40]
Course Objective:
 The aim of this course is to help the students to attain the following industry identified competency
through various teaching learning experiences:
 Know the use of dc machines and transformers.
List of Practical:
At least eight Experiments to be performed (four from dc machines and four from transformers)
1. Dismantle a DC machine.
2. Plot the O.C.C. of a D.C. generator & find the critical resistance.
3. Starting and reversing of DC motor.
3. Control the speed of DC shunt motor above& below rated speed & draws the speed characteristics.
1. 4. Perform the brake test on DC series motor.
5. Compute the efficiency of a D.C. motor by Swinburne’s test.
6. Determine equivalent circuit parameters of single-phase transformer by performing O.C. test and S.C.
test.
7. Determine the regulation & efficiency of single-phase transformer by direct loading method
8. Compute the efficiency of a single-phase transformer by Back-to-Back test.
9. Perform parallel operation of two single phase transformers to determine the sharing of load current,
apparent and real power.
10. Check the functioning and testing of the isolation transformer.
11. Check the functioning and testing of pulse transformer
12. Study and check the connections (vector grouping) of three phase transformers
Course outcomes
The theory, practical experiences and relevant of the skills associated with this course are to be taught and
implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated with the
CO1 Explain different types of DC generators.
CO2 Explain different types of DC motors.
CO3 Check the performance of a single phase transformer.
CO4 Explain three phase transformers.
CO5 Analyze different types of special purpose transformers used in different applications.
Page 20 of 29
Semester. Distribution of marks: Continuous evaluation: 50 Marks; Class Attendance: 10 Marks
on the entire syllabus. Assignment on the day of Viva-voce and practical report submission: 20; Viva-voce: 20
Page 21 of 29
Course Code :
Course Title : ELECTRONICS DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
Semester 3rd
Number of Credits : 3 (L:3,T:0,P: 2)
Prerequisites : FUNDAMENTAL OF ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING (FEEE)
Full Marks 100 [ Internal:40; External:60]
Course Objective
 Maintain the proper functioning of Electronics Devices and Circuits.
Course Contents:
Unit : 1 1 Diode 10
1.1 PN Junction Diode
1.1.1 Drift and diffusion currents through Semiconductor...
1.1.2 Concept of PN junction - Formation and behavior, Diffusion, Barrier potential,

Depletion region, Junction capacitance.
1.1.3 Forward & Reverse biasing of P-N junction, Diode symbol, Circuit diagram for
characteristics of diode (Forward & Reverse).
1.1.4 Diode specifications – Forward voltage drop, reverse saturation current, maximum
forward current, power dissipation.
1.2 Zener Diode
1.2.1 Construction, Symbol, Circuit diagram for characteristics of Zener diode
(Forward & Reverse), Zener & Avalanche Breakdown
1.2.2 Zener diode specifications – Zener voltage, power dissipation, break over
current, dynamic resistance & maximum reverse current.
1.3 Other Diodes: Varactor diode, Schottky diode and Photo diode –
Operating Principles & applications of each only.
1.4 Rectifiers and Filter

1.4.1 Need of rectifier, Types of single-phase rectifiers - Half wave &full
wave rectifier (Bridge & Centre tapped).
1.4.2 Circuit operation of the rectifiers, Input & output waveforms for voltage
& current, Average and RMS value of voltage & current (expression
only), Ripple, Ripple factor, Ripple frequency, Form Factor, PIV,
Page 22 of 29
Rectifier efficiency.
1.4.3 Need of filters, Types of filters – a) Series inductor,b) Shunt capacitor, c)
LC filter, d) πfilter.
1.4.4 Circuit operation of the filters, limitations & advantages.
1.5 Regulaterd Power Supply
1.5.1 Need of regulation, voltage regulation factor. Concept of load regulation
& line regulation.
1.5.2 Zener diode voltage regulator.
1.5.3 Basic block diagram of DC power supply.
Unit : 2 2 Transistors: 14
2.1 Bipolar Junction Transistor(BJT):
2.1.1 Symbol, Construction, Operation of NPN and PNP transistor – current

flows, relation between different currents.
2.1.2 Transistor configurations – CB, CE, CC. Circuit diagram for input &
output characteristics of CB and CE. Comparison between three
configurations.
2.1.3 Transistor parameters – input & output resistance, α, β and relation

between them.
2.1.4 Transistor specification – VCESat, ICMax, VCEO,ICEO, VCEBreakdown, α, β,

Powerdissipation.
2.1.5 Basic CE Amplifier and D.C Load Line : Importance of DC load line and
AC load line, operating point, selection of Q point and stabilization.
2.1.6 Biasing of BJT: Need of biasing, Types of biasing circuits (concept and
Circuit only).
2.1.7 Power Amplifier: Classification of power amplifier – Class A, Class -B,

Class AB and class C, Operation of Push – pull amplifier.
2.2 Field Effect Transistor(JFET):

2.2.1 Symbol, Construction of JFET, working principle and V-I characteristics of
JFET, pinch-off voltage, drain resistance, transconductance, amplification
factor and their relationship.
2.2.2 Introduction to MOSFET-Types ofMOSFET, construction, working
principle and applications.
2.3 Unit-Junction Transistor(UJT):

Symbol, Construction, Working principle and characteristics of UJT, Equivalent circuit,
UJT as relaxation oscillator, Applications.
Page 23 of 29
Unit: 3 3 Small Signal Amplifiers: 05
3.1 Small signal amplifier using BJT.
3.2 Determination of current, Voltage & Power gain, phase shift between
3.3 Function of input & output coupling capacitors, emitter bypass capacitor.
3.4 Frequency response of Single stage CE amplifier, Bandwidth and its
Significance.
3.5 Need of Cascade (multistage) amplifiers, Gain of amplifier.
3.6 Types of amplifier coupling – RC, Transformer & Direct coupling.
3.7 Tuned Amplifier - Circuit operation of single tuned, double tuned
amplifiers
Unit: 4 4 Feedback Amplifiers and Oscillators 08
4.1 Concept of Positive and Negative feedback, Effect of negative feedback on
gain, gain stability, distortion, noise, bandwidth, phase shift, input and
4.2 Performance of emitter follower circuit – Calculation of gain and input &
4.3 Introduction to oscillator, Block diagram of sine wave oscillator,
4.4 Operation of following oscillators: — a) tuned collector, b) Hartley,

c) Colpitt, d) Wein-bridge, e) Phase Shift, and, f) Crystal.
Unit: 5 5 Operational Amplifier 04
5.1 Introduction to OP-AMP : Inverting and non-inverting mode and their gain
calculation – CMRR – Bias current – Offset voltage and current – Slew
rate
– Open loop and closed loop gain – Input and output impedance –
Frequency response and virtual ground.
5.2 Applications of OPAMP: Adder – Subtractor – Voltage Follower –
Integrator – Differentiator – Comparator.
Unit: 6 6 Relaxation Oscillator 04

6.1 Operation of monostable, astable and bistable multivibrator with
waveforms
6.2 Schmitt trigger circuits
6.3 IC-555, internal block diagram and pin function, construction of
multivibrators with IC-555
Total 45
References:
1. V K Mehta & Rohit Mehta; Principles of Electronics, S. Chand Publishing;

2. Sanjay Sharma, Electronic Principles, S.K. Kataria & Sons
Page 24 of 29
3. Electronics Engineering, J.B.Gupta, S.K.Kataria & Sons;
4. S Salivahanan, N Suresh Kumar, Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw Hill Education;
5. Sanjeev Gupta, Electronic Devices & Circuits, Dhanpat Rai.
Course Outcomes
implemented so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented Cos associated with the above
mentioned competency:
CO1 Describe the features and applications of diode and rectifiers.

CO2 Explain construction, different types of circuit configurations and
applications of Transistors.
CO3 Describe the concept, features and different application of Feedback
Amplifiers and Oscillators through block diagram.
CO4 Describe an operational amplifier,
CO5 Explain how its operation in a circuit depends on certain parameters,
CO6 Recognize various op-amp circuit and its applications,

GROUP UNIT
A 1,2
B 3.4
C 5,6
Course Code :
Course Title : ELECTRONICS DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
LABORATORY
Number of Credits : 1 (L:0,T:0,P:2)
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
 Maintain the efficient operation of various electronics devices and circuits
Page 25 of 29
Practicals (No.1 & 2 and at least Five experiments are to be performed from the rest)
1. Identification of the following basic components – Resistor, Potentiometer, Capacitor

(polarised, Non-polarised), Choke coil, Diode, Zener diode, Transistor (NPN & PNP),
Thyristor, Diac, Triac, UJT, IGBT, MOSFET, JFET, OPAMP(IC741), IC78XX, IC79XX.
2. To be familiar with the following basic instruments: — Digital Multimeter, Oscilloscope,
Power supply (single / dual channel), Function generator, LCR Meter.
3. To plot the forward & reverse characteristics of P-N junction diode.
4. To construct half-wave & full-wave rectifier circuit & draw input, output waveforms.
5. To Plot the characteristics of Zener diode.
6. To study the Zener diode as voltage regulator & calculate load regulation.
7. To plot the characteristics of FET.
8. To plot the characteristics of UJT.
9. To plot the input & output characteristics of a BJT in CE or CB mode.
10. To construct a single stage CE amplifier circuit on a bread board to find out the gain at
different frequency and plot Gain vs. Frequency characteristics and also find out the
Bandwidth.
11. To study the waveforms and measure the frequency of : — a) Wien bridge, b) Hartley, c)
Colpitt, d) tuned collector, e) RC phase shift, and, f) crystal oscillator
12. To study the waveform of UJT as relaxation oscillator.
13. To study the characteristics of IC555 timer connected as: astable multivibrator, b) monostable
multivibrator.
14. To determine the following characteristics of op-amp: — a) input offset voltage, b) slew rate,
c) non-inverting gain, d) inverting gain.
15. To study the following applications of op-amp using IC741: — a) adder, b) subtract or, c)
differentiator, d) integrator, and, e) voltage follower
Course Outcomes
implemented so that the student acquires industry oriented competency:
CO1 Learn different components used in electronic circuit.

CO2 Acquire Knowledge about basic instruments like Digital Multimeter, Oscilloscope,
Power supply (single / dual channel), Function generator, LCR Meter
CO3 Determine the characteristics of P-N junction diode, Zener diode, BJT, FET, UJT
CO4 Demonstrate the characteristics of IC555 timer as astable and monostable
multivibrator
CO5 Demonstrate the characteristics of op-amp
CO6 Learn various application of op-amp, using IC741 in different mode
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 60 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the
Third Semester. Distribution of marks: Continuous evaluation:50 Marks; Class Attendance: 10 Marks
Page 26 of 29
Internship-I

 To understand industrial environment and Electrical Engineering activities.
 To get exposure to field level works.
 To get brief idea on drawings/auto CAD for electrical etc.
After 2nd semester, for Internship I, students are required to be involved in Inter/Intra Institutional activities viz;
Training and simulation programmed with different Institute like workshop of ITI, Other Polytechnics and
Technical Institutes Institutions; Soft skill training organized by Training and Placement Cell of the respective
institutions; contribution at innovation/entrepreneurship cell of the institute; participation in workshops/
competitions etc; Learning at Departmental lab/ Institutional workshops.
After completion of Internship, the student should prepare a comprehensive report to indicate what he/she has
observed and learnt in training period. The student may contact Industrial Supervisor/Faculty Mentor/ TPO for
assigning topics and problems and should prepare the final report on the assigned topics. The training report
should be signed by the Industrial Supervisor/ Internship Faculty Mentor, TPO and HOD.
Institute may follow
 Basic and applied Science in Inter/ Intra Institution.
OR
 Technical Drawings/ auto CAD for electrical in Inter/ Intra Institution.
OR
 Computer application like module course on “C Programming language “etc in Inter/ Intra Institution.
OR
 Mini project as beginner in Sci Lab/Tinkercad / any other simulation software in Inter/ Intra Institution.
OR
 Workshop practice in Inter/ Intra Institution.
OR
 Industrial Visit
OR
 Free online technical courses
OR
 Different combination of the above.
 Activities may be conducted continuously for stipulated period of time or may be arranged in a staggered
fashion.
Course outcome
The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with this course are to be
taught and implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry-oriented
Page 27 of 29
COs associated with the above-mentioned competency:
CO1 Learn new skills and supplement knowledge.

CO2 Learn & practice communication and teamwork skills.
CO3 Learn strategies like time management, multi-tasking etc in an industrial setup.
CO4 Meet new people and learn networking skills
The Internship Report will be evaluated on the basis of following criteria (as applicable)
Sl. No. Criteria for evaluation of Internship Report
1 Originality
2 Adequacy and purposeful write up
3 Organizations, format, drawing, sketches, style, language
4 Practical applications and relationships with basic theory
5 Concept taught in the course outcome
6 Practical applications, relationships with basic theory and concept taught in the course
7 Attendance record, daily diary, quality of Internship Report.
Seminars must be arranged for the student based on his/her training report, before an Internal Committee
constituted by the concerned department of the Institute. The evaluation will be based on the following
criteria:
Sl. No. Criteria for evaluation of Internship Seminar
2 Proper Planning for presentation
5 Viva voce
Page 28 of 29
Prepared by-
1. Dr. Arnab Ghosh (9433379717 / ghosha@nitrkl.ac.in)
2. Mr. Moumit Maji (9635592469 / moumitmaji228@gmail.com)
3. Mr. Pratik Biswas (9775882520 / pratik.biswas@dvc.gov.in)
4. Mr. Saurav Mondal (8013128395 / sauravmondal@wbscte.ac.in)
5. Dr. Saptarshi Roy (9831691293 / saptarshi.roy.ju@gmail.com)
6. Mr. Samit Chakraborty (9749170066 / samit.chakraborty@gmail.com)
End of EEE 3rd sem syllabus
Page 29 of 29
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Electrical Engineering [EE]
Revised 2022
3rd Semester
Sl. Category of Code No Course Title Credits Marks Total Contact

No course Hours per Week
L P
Systems
Systems Laboratory
Course
Course Laboratory
Course Electronic
Measurement
Course Electronic
Measurement
Laboratory
Course Transformers
Course Transformers
Laboratory
9 Program Core Analog and Digital 3 100 3 0
Course electronics
Course electronics Laboratory
TOTAL 21 1100 15 10
• Student contact hrs./ week =25

• Theory and practical periods of 60 minutes each
• Abbreviation: L: Lecture class; P: Practical class
• For Theoretical subjects: Internal Assessment (40 Marks): Mid semester class test: 20 Marks; Quizzes,
viva-voce, Assignment: 10 Marks; Attendance: 10; External Assessment: 60 Marks.
• For Practical/ Sessional Subjects: Internal Assessment-60 Marks [Continuous Evaluation:50;
Class Attendance:10]; End Semester Assessment-40 Marks [Assignment on the day of Viva-voce
and Practical Report submission:20; Viva-voce:20]
• To make the students more familiar with software, effort should be made to prepare laboratory report
(like graph; data table etc.) in soft format in addition with traditional hard copy wherever possible.
Page 1 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Number of Credits : 3 (L: 3, P: 0)
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
The aim of this course is to help the student to attain the following industry identified competency through various
teaching learning experiences –
• Maintain the efficient operation of various conventional electric power generating plants.

(a) Boiler (b) Economiser (c) Super Heater & Reheater (d) Air Pre-Heater (e) F.D. Fan & I.D.
Fan, Chimney (f) Steam Turbine (g) Condenser (h) Feed Water Heater and feed water pump
(i) De-aerator (j) Spray pond & Cooling Tower (k) D.M. Water plant (l) Coal Handling Plant
(m) Ash Handling (n) ESP (o) concept of zero discharge system.

equipments – (a) Core (b) Fuel rod (c) Moderator (d) Control rod (e) Thermal shielding
(f) Reflector
Page 2 of 23



4.3 Function of different components – Storage reservoir, Dam, Spillway,Penstock, Surge
Tank etc.
4.4 Types of Water Turbines and their construction,basic operation of each type and their
use(concept only)
5.1 Related Terms – Connected Load, Firm Power, Cold Reserve,Hot Reserve,Operating
Reserve, Spinning Reserve, Average Demand, Maximum Demand
numerical problems
numerical problems
Total 45
Page 3 of 23
References:
1. P. K. Nag, Power Plant Engineering, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, ISBN: 978-9339204044
2. Tanmoy Deb, Electrical Power Generation, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi (Ed. 2018) ISBN-10- 9789386173379 ;
ISBN: 13- 978-9386173379
4. J.B. Gupta, A Course in Electrical Power- S. K Kataria and Sons, New Delhi. ISBN:13- 978-9350143742; ISBN:10-
9350143747
6. V K. Mehta, Principles of Power System – S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi.ISBN-13- 978-8121924962; ISBN:10-
9788121924962
Course Outcomes
After completion of this course, the students will be able to-
1. Explain the features, functioning, merits and demerits of Coal Based Thermal Power Plant.
2. Describe the construction, merits and demerits of Nuclear Power Plant.
3. Identify elements of gas turbine Power plant and Diesel Electric Power Plant through appropriate block diagram.
4. Select the merits and demerits of gas turbine Power Plant and Diesel Electric Power Plant for application in real
field.
5. Explain the layout and functioning, merits and demerits of Large Hydro Power Plant with respect to it’s various
components.
6. Identify various factors associated in the economic use of Power generation and interconnected Power Station.


GROUP UNIT
A 1
B 2,3
C 4,5
Page 4 of 23
Course Code :
LABORATORY
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Practicals
1. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the coal fired thermal power plant after watching a video programme
2. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the gas fired thermal power plant after watching a video programme
3. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the diesel generator power plant after watching a video programme
4. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the nuclear fired thermal power plant after watching a video programme
5. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the large hydro power plant after watching a video programme
10. Calculate the total energy cost in a (i) Residential (ii) Commercial and (iii) Industrial Bill.
Course Outcomes
implementatecd so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated with the above
mentioned competency:
a) Analyze the optimized working of the coal power plant.
b) Analyze the optimized working of the nuclear power plant.
c) Explain the optimized working of the gas power plant.
d) Explain the optimized working of the diesel power plant.
e) Analyze the optimized working of the large hydro power plant
f) Calculate the cost of electricity for different class of consumers.
1. Continuous Internal Assessment of 60 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout the Third Semester.
Distribution of marks: Continuous evaluation:50 Marks; Class Attendance: 10 Marks
2. External Assessment (end Semester examination) of 40 marks shall be held at the end of the Third Semester on the
entire syllabus. Assignment on the day of Viva-voce and practical report submission:20; Viva-voce:20
Page 5 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Full Marks 100 [ Internal :40; External:60]
Course Objective
• Maintain electrical systems applying AC and DC circuit fundamentals.
Unit : 1 Network Theorems (Statement, procedure, areas of applications and limitations of all 10
theorems)



3.2 Phase sequence and polarity
3.3 Types of three-phase connections, Relationship between Phase and line
quantities in three phase star and delta system with derivation.
3.5 Three phase power, active, reactive and apparent power in star and delta
system.
Page 6 of 23
4.1 Introduction
4.4 Time Constant.


Total 45
References:
2. Mahmood Nahvi & JosephA Edminister, Schaum’s outlines Electric circuits, McGrawhill Education (India)Pvt. Ltd., ISBN-
13 : 978-9389538908
3. D Roy Choudhury, Networks and Systems, Publisher: NEW AGE, ISBN-13 : 978-8122427677; ISBN-10 :
9788122427677
4. A.Chakraborty, Circuit Theory Analysis and Synthesis. – Dhanpat Rai & Co.
5. S P Ghosh & A KChakraborty, Network Analysis & Synthesis – McGrawhill Education (India)Pvt. Ltd.,
ISBN-13- 9780070144781;ISBN-10- 9780070144781
6. S Salivahanan; Circuit theory Analysis and Synthesis; Pearson India Education Service Pvt Ltd; ISBN: 978- 93-
539-4818-4
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the statement, procedure, areas of application and limitations of Network Theorems.
2. Describe the generation, phasor diagram of sinusoidal quantities, R, L, C series and parallel combination of
Single-Phase AC Circuits.
3. Analyze circuits and systems by their standard parameters to identify their characteristics in Three Phase AC
circuits
4. Explain Transient Analysis of R-L and R-C circuits supplied from DC Voltage Source and concept of time constant.
5. Apply Laplace Transformation to solve various real-life problem in Electrical Circuit Networks.
Page 7 of 23

GROUP UNIT
A 1,6
B 2,3
C 4,5
Course Code :
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Practicals
2) Use dual trace oscilloscope to determine A.C voltage and current response in given R, L, C
circuit.
3) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter to determine active, reactive and apparent power
consumed in given R-L / R-C series circuit. Draw phasor diagram.
consumed in given R-L-C series circuit. Draw phasor diagram.
5) Use variable frequency supply to create resonance in given series and parallel R-L-C circuit
or by using variable inductor or variable capacitor
6) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter to determine current, p.f. , active, reactive and
apparent power in R-L / R-C parallel A.C. circuit.
7) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter, p.f meter to determine current, p.f., active, reactive
and apparent power for given R-L-C parallel circuit with series connection of resistor and
inductor in parallel with capacitor
8) Use voltmeter, ammeter, wattmeter, p.f meter to determine line and phase quantities of
voltage and current for balanced three phase star and delta connected load and calculate
active, reactive, and apparent power. Draw phasor diagram.
Page 8 of 23
voltage and current for unbalanced three phase star and delta connected load and
calculate active, reactive, and apparent power. Draw phasor diagram
10) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine current through the given branch of an electric
network by applying mesh analysis.
network by applying node analysis.
12) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine current through the given branch and voltage
across the given element of circuit by applying superposition theorem.
13) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine equivalent circuit parameter in a given circuit by
applying Thevenin’s theorem
applying Norton’s theorem
15) Use voltmeter, ammeter to determine load resistance for maximum power transfer for a
given circuit by applying maximum power transfer theorem.
Course Outcomes
The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with the course are to be taught
and implementatecd so that the student demonstrates the following industry-oriented COs associated with
the above-mentioned competency:
a) Troubleshoot problems related to single phase A.C series circuits.
b) Troubleshoot problems related to single phase A.C parallel circuits.
c) Troubleshoot problems related to three phase circuits.
d) Use principles of circuit analysis to troubleshoot electric circuits.
e) Apply network theorems to troubleshoot electric circuits.
Page 9 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Number of Credits : 3 (L:3, P:0)
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective


problems.
application.
Page 10 of 23
3.1 Dynamometer type wattmeter: Construction and working principle,
Multiplying factor and extension of range, Different types of errors and their
compensation.
problems.
3.4 Effect of power factor variation on wattmeter readings in two wattmeter
method – Numerical problems.
diagram.
Applications.
Total 45
Page 11 of 23
References:
1. Sawhney A.K., Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation.,DhanpaiRai and
Sons, New Delhi, ISBN : 9780000279744
0582405196
4. Rajput R.K., Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation, S.Chand and Co. New
Delhi, ISBN : 9789385676017
5. Theraja B. L., Theraja A. K., A Text Book of Electrical Technology Vol-I(Basic Electrical Engg.),
S.Chand and Co. New Delhi, ISBN: 9788121924405
6. Suryanarayna N.V., Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments, S.Chand and Co. New
Delhi , ISBN :8121920116
ISBN10:0-07-070206-3
Course Outcomes:
1. Explain the features, functioning and classification of Measuring instruments.

2. Describe the functioning and classification of different types of measuring instrument for
measuring voltage and current.
3. Identify the construction, features and application of instrument for measurement of electric
power.
4. Describe the features and application of Energy Meter.
5. Explain the functioning and application of different types of electrical instruments including CRO
for measuring various electrical parameters.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,2
B 3,4
C 5
Page 12 of 23
Course Code :
LABORATORY
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Full marks 100 Marks [Internal :60 Marks; External:40 Marks]
Course Objective

3. Use single wattmeter for measurement of active and reactive power of three phase balanced
load.

14. Use Tri-vector meter for measuring kW, kVAr and kVA of a power line.
Course Outcomes
taught and implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry-oriented COs
associated with the above-mentioned competency:
a) Check the working of the electrical measuring instrument.
b) Use different types of measuring instruments for measuring voltage and current.
c) Use different types of measuring instruments for measuring electric power
d) Use different types of measuring instruments for measuring electric energy.
e) Use different types of electrical instruments for measuring various ranges of electrical
parameters.
f) Know the use of CRO, Signal generator, Function generator.
Page 13 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective: The aim of this course is to help the student to attain the following industry identified


2.3 E.m.f equation

3.6 Braking methods of DC motor – Regenerative braking, Counter current braking,
Dynamic braking.
Unit:4 4.Single phase Transformer: 14

amorphous core.
Page 14 of 23
5.1 Types of three phase transformer: Bank of three single phase transformers, single
unit three phase transformers.
necessity).
application.
Core type distribution transformer; Specification of three phase distribution transformer
as per IS: 1180(Part I)-1989
operation.
Unit:6 Special Purpose Transformers 04

45 hrs
References:
Delhi.
2. Bhattacharya, S. K., Electrical Machines, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, ISBN: 9789332902855
3. Electric Machines, Ashfaq Husain, Harroon Ashfaq; Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Limited; ISBN 10-
8177001663
4. Theraja, B.L., Electrical Technology Vol-II (AC and DC machines), S. Chand and Co. Ltd., New Delhi, ISBN:
9788121924375
5. Mittle, V.N. and Mittle, Arvind., Basic Electrical Engineering, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, ISBN:
9780070593572
Page 15 of 23
6. Kothari, D. P. and Nagrath, I. J., Electrical Machines, McGraw Hill Education. New Delhi, ISBN:
9780070699670
7. G.C. Garg & P.S. Bimbhra, Electrical Machines, Vol-I, II, Khanna Book Publishing House ISBN: 978-
9386173-447, 978-93-86173-607, New Delhi
8. Mehta, V. K. and Mehta, Rohit, Principles of Electrical Machines, S. Chand and Co. Ltd., New Delhi, ISBN:
9788121930888
9. Bandyopadhyay, M. N., Electrical Machines Theory and Practice, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
ISBN: 9788120329973
Course Outcomes: After completion of this course, the students will be able to-
1. Describe the construction, classification and applications of DC Generator.

2. Identify features, classification and application of DC motors and staters.
3. Describe the working principle, construction, classification and application of single-phase
transformer.
4. Explain the construction, classification, applications and different circuit connections of three
phase transformer in real field.
5. Identify the construction, features and application of various Special Purpose Transformers.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,2,3
B 4
C 5,6
Page 16 of 23
Course Code
Semester Third
Prerequisites NIL
Course Category PC
competency through various teaching learning experiences:
• Use dc machines and transformers.
List of Practical:
At least eight Experiments to be performed (four from dc machines and four from
transformers)
3. Control the speed of DC shunt motor above & below rated speed & draw the speed characteristics.
1. 4. Perform the brake test on DC series motor.
6. Determine equivalent circuit parameters of single-phase transformer by performing O.C. test and
S.C. test.
Course outcomes
The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with this course are to be taught and
implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated with the
1. Maintain DC generators and determine the performance characteristics.
2. Maintain different types of DC motors and determine their performance characteristics.
3. Maintain single phase transformer and determine the performance characteristics.
4. Check different types of connections of three phase transformers.
5. Maintain different types of special purpose transformers used in different applications.
Page 17 of 23
Course Code :
Course Title : ANALOG AND DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Semester Third
Number of Credits : 3 (L: 3, T: 0, P: 0)
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
• Maintain the proper functioning of analog and digital electronic devices.
Course Contents:
Unit : 1 1. Diode 6
1.1 Zener Diode
1.2 Rectifiers and Filters:
1.2.1 Need of rectifier, Types of single-phase rectifiers - Half wave & full
1.2.2 Circuit operation of the rectifiers, Input & output waveforms for
voltage & current, Average and rms value of voltage & current
(expression only), Ripple, Ripple factor, Ripple frequency, form factor,
PIV of diode used, Rectifier efficiency.
1.2.3 Need of filters, Types of filters – a) Series inductor, b) Shunt capacitor,
c) LC filter, d) π filter.
1.2.4 Circuit operation of the filters, limitations & advantages
Unit : 2 2. Transistors: 14
2.1 Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT):
2.1.1 Transistor configurations – CB, CE, CC, circuit diagram for input &
output characteristics of each configuration, Input & output
characteristics. Comparison between three configurations.

between them, Related numerical problems.
2.1.3 Transistor specification – VCE Sat, IC Max, VCEO, ICEO, VCE Breakdown, α, β, Power
dissipation.
2.1.4 Basic Common Emitter Amplifier and D.C Load Line : Importance of DC
load line and AC load line, Operating point, selection of Q point and
stabilization, Related numerical problems.
Page 18 of 23
2.1.5 Need of biasing, Name of different biasing methods of transistor.
2.1.6 Voltage Divider biasing method

2.2 Field effect transistor (JFET):

2.2.2 Introduction to MOSFET-Types of MOSFET, construction, working
2.3 Unijunction transistor (UJT):

Symbol, Construction, Working principle and characteristics of UJT, Equivalent
circuit, UJT as relaxation oscillator, Applications.
Unit: 3 3. Feedback Amplifiers and Oscillators 05
3.1 Concept of Positive and Negative feedback, Voltage gain of amplifier for
negative and positive feedback.
requirement of oscillation, Barkhausen criterion. Wien bridge oscillator,
Colpitt oscillator – operating principle, frequency of oscillation.
Unit: 4 4. Combinational Logic Circuits: 06
4.1 Half adder, Full adder, Half subtractor, Full subtractor, N bit parallel adder,
Parity Generator and checker, Digital comparator
4.2 Code converter, Encoder, Decoder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer.
Unit: 5 5 Sequential Logic Circuits: 09
5.1 Flip-flops – RS, D, T, JK, JK Master Slave Flip Flops using basic gates, preset and
clear signals.
5.2 Counters - Asynchronous & Synchronous Counter, Mod-N counter, Up Down
Counter, Ring counter
5.3 Registers - Shift register, Serial in Serial out, Serial in Parallel out, Parallel in
serial out, Parallel in Parallel out.
Unit: 6 6 Data Converters & Memory Devices: 05
6.1 D/A Converter: Basic concepts, Weighted Resistor D/A converter, R-2R
Ladder D/A converter.
6.2 A/D Converter: Successive approximation method, Dual slope method.
6.3 Concept of - Static Memory & Dynamic Memory, SDRAM, DDR RAM, PROM,
EEROM, EPROM.
6.4 Comparison of Logic families – DTL, TTL and ECL Gates
Total 45
Page 19 of 23
References:
1. Electronic Principles, Albert Malvino & D.J.Bates , McGraw Hill Publisher; ISBN:13- 978-
9354602399
2. David A. Bell; Electronic Device and Circuit; Oxford University Press, India; ISBN: 13-9780-0-19-
569340-9
3. Electronics Engineering, J.B.Gupta, S.K.Kataria & Sons; ISBN:13-978-9350144374
4. V K Mehta & Rohit Mehta; Principles of Electronics, S. Chand Publishing; ISBN: 13- 978-
9352838363
ISBN:13- 978-9339219505
6. Digital Principles & Applications , Leach, Malvino, Saha , McGraw Hill Education; ISBN:13- 978-
9339203405
7. Digital Electronics, G.K. Karate, Oxford University Press
8. Digital Circuits and Design: S. Salivahanan; Oxford University Press, India ISBN: 13-9780-0-19-
948868-1
Course Outcomes
1. Describe the features and applications of diode and rectifiers.

2. Explain construction, different types of circuit configurations and applications of Transistors.
3. Describe the concept, features and different application of Feedback Amplifiers and Oscillators
through block diagram.
4. Describe and explain different combinational circuits and the practical applications in digital
electronics.
5. Describe and explain different sequential circuits in digital electronics.
6. Describe and explain different data converter and memory devices.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,3,4
B 2
C 5,6
Page 20 of 23
Course Code :
Course Title : ANALOG AND DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LABORATORY

Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
• Maintain the efficient operation of various analog and digital electronic devices.
Practicals
1. Analog Electronics: (At least Four Experiments are to be performed) :
1.1 Construct full-wave rectifier circuit & draw input, output waveforms – with filters and
without filters.
1.2 Plot the characteristics of Zener diode and find the breakdown voltage.
1.3 Plot the input & output characteristics of a BJT in CE or CB mode.
1.4 Plot the characteristics of JFET / MOSFET.
1.5 Construct a single stage CE amplifier circuit on a bread board to find out the gain and
observe the input and output waveforms.
1.6 Construct Relaxation Oscillator using UJT and observe output waveform by CRO.
1.7 Construct a ±12V power supply on bread board and observe the output waveform by
CRO with and without filter circuit. Also observe the output voltage using IC regulator
78XX & 79XX.
2. Digital Electronics: (At least Four Experiments are to be performed) :

2.1 Realization of Half Adder, Full Adder, Half Subtractor and Full Subtractor.
2.2 Verification of the function of SR, D, JK and T Flip-flops.
2.3 Realization of Encoder and Decoder circuit.
2.4 Realization of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer circuit.
2.5 Construction of binary Asynchronous or Synchronous counter.
2.6 Construction controlled shift register & verify SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO operation.
2.7 Implementation of D/A converter and A/D converter using trainer kit.
Course Outcomes
implementatecd so that the student demonstrates the following industry-oriented COs associated with the
above-mentioned competency:
a) Analyze and describe the performance of Full wave rectifier, Zener Diode, BJT, JFET, MOSFET, UJT, Single
stage Amplifier.
b) Construct and analyze the performance of dc power supply (± 12 V).
c) Explain and describe the performance of combinational circuits.
d) Explain and describe the performance of sequential circuits.
Page 21 of 23
Internship-I
• To understand industrial environment and Electrical Engineering activities.
• To get exposure to field level works.
• To get brief idea on drawings/ auto CAD for electrical etc.
After 2nd semester, for Internship I, students are required to be involved in Inter/Intra Institutional
activities viz; Training and simulation programmed with different Institute like workshop of ITI, Other
Polytechnics and Technical Institutes Institutions; Soft skill training organized by Training and Placement
Cell of the respective institutions; contribution at innovation/entrepreneurship cell of the institute;
participation in workshops/ competitions etc; Learning at Departmental lab/ Institutional workshops.
After completion of Internship, the student should prepare a comprehensive report to indicate what
he/she has observed and learnt in training period. The student may contact Industrial Supervisor/Faculty
Mentor/ TPO for assigning topics and problems and should prepare the final report on the assigned topics.
The training report should be signed by the Industrial Supervisor/ Internship Faculty Mentor, TPO and
HOD.
• Basic and applied Science in Inter/ Intra Institution.
OR
• Technical Drawings/ auto CAD for electrical in Inter/ Intra Institution.
OR
• Computer application like module course on “C Programming language “etc in Inter/ Intra
Institution.
OR
• Mini project as beginner in Sci Lab/Tinkercad / any other simulation software in Inter/ Intra
Institution.
OR
• Workshop practice in Inter/ Intra Institution.
OR
• Industrial Visit
OR
• Free online technical courses
OR
• Different combination of the above.
• Activities may be conducted continuously for stipulated period of time or may be
arranged in a staggered fashion.
Course outcome
The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with this course are to
be taught and implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry-
oriented COs associated with the above-mentioned competency:
Page 22 of 23
• To learn new skills and supplement knowledge.
• To practice communication and teamwork skills.
• To learn strategies like time management, multi-tasking etc. in an industrial setup.
• To meet new people and learn networking skills
1 Originality
Seminars must be arranged for the student based on his/her training report, before an Internal
Committee constituted by the concerned department of the Institute. The evaluation will be based on the
following criteria:
5 Viva voce
Page 23 of 23
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Electrical Engineering

(Industrial Control) [EEIC]
Revised 2022
3rd Semester

L P
Systems
Systems Laboratory
Course
Course Laboratory
Course Electronic
Measurement
Course Electronic
Measurement
Laboratory
Course Transformers
Course Transformers
Laboratory
Course electronics
TOTAL 21 1100 15 10

Page 1 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective

(m) Ash Handling (n) ESP (o) concept of zero discharge system.(p) FGD System.

(f) Reflector
Page 2 of 23



4.3 Function of different components – Storage reservoir, Dam, Spillway, Penstock,
SurgeTank etc.
4.4 Types of Water Turbines and their construction, basic operation of each type and
theiruse(concept only)
5.1 Related Terms – Connected Load, Firm Power, Cold Reserve, Hot Reserve,
OperatingReserve, Spinning Reserve, Average Demand, Maximum Demand
numerical problems
numerical problems
Total 45
Page 3 of 23
References:
2. Tanmoy Deb, Electrical Power Generation, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi (Ed. 2018) ISBN-10-
9789386173379 ; ISBN: 13- 978-9386173379
9350143742; ISBN:10- 9350143747
8121924962; ISBN:10- 9788121924962
Course Outcomes
After completion of this course , the students will be able to-
field.
5. Explain the layout and functioning of Large Hydro Power Plant with respect to it’s various components.


GROUP UNIT
A 1
B 2,3
C 4,5
Page 4 of 23
Course Code :
LABORATORY
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Practicals
1. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the coal fired thermal power plant after watching a video
programme
2. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the gas fired thermal power plant after watching a video
programme
3. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the diesel generator power plant after watching a video
programme
4. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the nuclear fired thermal power plant after watching a
video programme
programme
Course Outcomes
and implemented so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated withthe
e) Analyze the optimized working of the large hydro power plant.
Third Semester. Distribution of marks: Continuous evaluation:50 Marks; Class Attendance: 10
Marks
Page 5 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
theorems)



system.
Page 6 of 23
4.1 Introduction
4.4 Time Constant.


Total 45
References:
2. Mahmood Nahvi & JosephA Edminister, Schaum’s outlines Electric circuits, McGrawhill Education
(India)Pvt. Ltd., ISBN-13 : 978-9389538908
3. D Roy Choudhury, Networks and Systems, Publisher: NEW AGE, ISBN-13 : 978-8122427677; ISBN-10
: 9788122427677
ISBN-13- 9780070144781;ISBN-10- 9780070144781
6. S Salivahanan; Circuit theory Analysis and Synthesis; Pearson India Education Service Pvt Ltd; ISBN: 978-
93-539-4818-4
Course Outcomes
2. Describe the generation, phasor diagram of sinusoidal quantities, R,L,C series and parallel combination of Single
Phase AC Circuits.
circuits
4. Explain Transient Transient Analysis of R-L and R-C circuits supplied from DC Voltage Source and concept of time
constant.
5. Apply Laplace Transformation to solve various real life problem in Electrical Circuit Networks.
Page 7 of 23

GROUP UNIT
A 1,6
B 2,3
C 4,5
Course Code :
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Practicals
circuit.
Page 8 of 23
Course Outcomes
Page 9 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective


problems.
application.
Page 10 of 23
compensation.
problems.
diagram.
Applications.
Total 45
Page 11 of 23
References:
0582405196
Delhi, ISBN : 9789385676017
Delhi , ISBN :8121920116
ISBN10:0-07-070206-3
Course Outcomes

2. Describe the functioning and classification of different types of measuring instrument for measuring voltage and
current.
3. Identify the construction, features and application of instrument for measurement of electric power.
5. Explain the functioning and application of different types of electrical instruments for measuring various
electrical parameters.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,2
B 3,4
C 5
Page 12 of 23
Course Code :
LABORATORY
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective

3. Use single wattmeter for measurement of active and reactive power of three phase balanced load.
14. Use Tri-vector meter for measuring kW, kVAR and kVA of a power line.
Course Outcomes
taught and implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs
associated with the above mentioned competency:
parameters.
f) Demonstrate the use of CRO, Signal generator, Function generator.
Page 13 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL


2.3 E.m.f equation

Dynamic braking.
Unit:4 4. Single phase Transformer: 14

amorphous core.
Page 14 of 23
necessity).
application.
operation.

Total 45
References:
Delhi.
2. Bhattacharya, S.K., Electrical Machines, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, ISBN:9789332902855
8177001663
9788121924375
9780070593572
Page 15 of 23
9780070699670
9386173-447, 978-93-86173-607, New Delhi
8. Mehta, V.K. and Mehta, Rohit, Principles of Electrical Machines, S. Chand and Co. Ltd., New Delhi, ISBN:
9788121930888
ISBN: 9788120329973
Course Outcomes

3. Describe the working principle, construction, classification and application of single-phase transformer.
4. Explain the construction, classification, applications and different circuit connections of three phase transformer
in real field.
5. Identify the construction, features and application of various Special Purpose Transfromers.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,2,3
B 4
C 5,6
Page 16 of 23
Course Code
Semester Third
Prerequisites NIL
Course Category PC
List of Practical:
transformers)
4. Perform the brake test on DC series motor.
S.C. test.
Course Outcomes
a) Determine the performance characteristics of DC generators, DC motors and to perform speed control operation.
b) Carry out various connections of single phase and three phase transformers.
c) Understand different types of special purpose transformers used in different applications.
Page 17 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Course Contents:
Unit : 1 1. Diode 6
1.1 Zener Diode

dissipation.
Page 18 of 23



clear signals.
EEROM, EPROM.
Total 45
Page 19 of 23
References:
9354602399
569340-9
9352838363
ISBN:13- 978-9339219505
9339203405
948868-1
Course Outcomes

3. Describe the concept, features and different application of Feedback Amplifiers and Oscillators through block
diagram.
4. Identify the adder circuits and the practical applications of adder and multiplexer circuits in digital electronics.
5. Describe the concepts and applications of Flip-flops, Counters and Registers, data converter and memory devices
in real field.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,3,4
B 2
C 5,6
Page 20 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Practicals
without filters.
78XX & 79XX.

Course Outcomes :
implemented so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated with the
a) Design different combinational circuits to execute truth table.
b) Analyze and describe the performance of combinational circuits.
c) Apply the knowledge of clock and memory to describe the desired output of sequential circuits and
solve problems.
d) Understand testing strategies and select proper instruments to evaluate performance characteristics
of electronic circuit.
Page 21 of 23
Internship-I Course
Objectives: Following are the objectives of this course:
HOD.
OR
OR
Institution.
OR
Institution.
OR
OR
OR
OR
Course Outcomes

Page 22 of 23
1 Originality
following criteria:
5 Viva voce
Page 23 of 23
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Electrical Power Systems [EPS]
Revised 2022
3rd Semester

L P
Systems
Systems Laboratory
Course
Course Laboratory
Course Electronic
Measurement
Course Electronic
Measurement
Laboratory
Course Transformers
Course Transformers
Laboratory
Course electronics
TOTAL 21 1100 15 10

Page 1 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective

(m) Ash Handling (n) ESP (o) concept of zero discharge system.(p) FGD System.

(f) Reflector
Page 2 of 23



4.3 Function of different components – Storage reservoir, Dam, Spillway, Penstock,
SurgeTank etc.
4.4 Types of Water Turbines and their construction, basic operation of each type and
theiruse(concept only)
5.1 Related Terms – Connected Load, Firm Power, Cold Reserve, Hot Reserve,
OperatingReserve, Spinning Reserve, Average Demand, Maximum Demand
numerical problems
numerical problems
Total 45
Page 3 of 23
References:
2. Tanmoy Deb, Electrical Power Generation, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi (Ed. 2018) ISBN-10-
9789386173379 ; ISBN: 13- 978-9386173379
9350143742; ISBN:10- 9350143747
8121924962; ISBN:10- 9788121924962
Course Outcomes
field.
5. Explain the layout and functioning of Large Hydro Power Plant with respect to it’s various components.


GROUP UNIT
A 1
B 2,3
C 4,5
Page 4 of 23
Course Code :
LABORATORY
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Practicals
1. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the coal fired thermal power plant after watching a video
programme
2. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the gas fired thermal power plant after watching a video
programme
3. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the diesel generator power plant after watching a video
programme
4. Identify the routine maintenance parts of the nuclear fired thermal power plant after watching a
video programme
programme
Course Outcomes
e) Analyze the optimized working of the large hydro power plant.
Third Semester. Distribution of marks: Continuous evaluation:50 Marks; Class Attendance: 10
Marks
Page 5 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
theorems)



system.
Page 6 of 23
4.1 Introduction
4.4 Time Constant.


Total 45
References:
2. Mahmood Nahvi & JosephA Edminister, Schaum’s outlines Electric circuits, McGrawhill Education
(India)Pvt. Ltd., ISBN-13 : 978-9389538908
3. D Roy Choudhury, Networks and Systems, Publisher: NEW AGE, ISBN-13 : 978-8122427677; ISBN-10
: 9788122427677
ISBN-13- 9780070144781;ISBN-10- 9780070144781
6. S Salivahanan; Circuit theory Analysis and Synthesis; Pearson India Education Service Pvt Ltd; ISBN: 978-
93-539-4818-4
Course Outcomes
2. Describe the generation, phasor diagram of sinusoidal quantities, R,L,C series and parallel combination of Single
Phase AC Circuits.
circuits
4. Explain Transient Transient Analysis of R-L and R-C circuits supplied from DC Voltage Source and concept of time
constant.
5. Apply Laplace Transformation to solve various real life problem in Electrical Circuit Networks.
Page 7 of 23

GROUP UNIT
A 1,6
B 2,3
C 4,5
Course Code :
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Practicals
circuit.
Page 8 of 23
Course Outcomes
Page 9 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective


problems.
application.
Page 10 of 23
compensation.
problems.
diagram.
Applications.
Total 45
Page 11 of 23
References:
0582405196
Delhi, ISBN : 9789385676017
Delhi , ISBN :8121920116
ISBN10:0-07-070206-3
Course Outcomes

2. Describe the functioning and classification of different types of measuring instrument for measuring voltage and
current.
3. Identify the construction, features and application of instrument for measurement of electric power.
5. Explain the functioning and application of different types of electrical instruments for measuring various
electrical parameters.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,2
B 3,4
C 5
Page 12 of 23
Course Code :
LABORATORY
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective

3. Use single wattmeter for measurement of active and reactive power of three phase balanced load.
14. Use Tri-vector meter for measuring kW, kVAR and kVA of a power line.
Course Outcomes
taught and implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs
associated with the above mentioned competency:
parameters.
f) Demonstrate the use of CRO, Signal generator, Function generator.
Page 13 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL


2.3 E.m.f equation

Dynamic braking.
Unit:4 4. Single phase Transformer: 14

amorphous core.
Page 14 of 23
necessity).
application.
operation.

Total 45
References:
Delhi.
2. Bhattacharya, S.K., Electrical Machines, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, ISBN:9789332902855
8177001663
9788121924375
9780070593572
Page 15 of 23
9780070699670
9386173-447, 978-93-86173-607, New Delhi
8. Mehta, V.K. and Mehta, Rohit, Principles of Electrical Machines, S. Chand and Co. Ltd., New Delhi, ISBN:
9788121930888
ISBN: 9788120329973
Course Outcomes

3. Describe the working principle, construction, classification and application of single-phase transformer.
4. Explain the construction, classification, applications and different circuit connections of three phase transformer
in real field.
5. Identify the construction, features and application of various Special Purpose Transfromers.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,2,3
B 4
C 5,6
Page 16 of 23
Course Code
Semester Third
Prerequisites NIL
Course Category PC
List of Practical:
transformers)
4. Perform the brake test on DC series motor.
S.C. test.
Course Outcomes
a) Determine the performance characteristics of DC generators, DC motors and to perform speed control operation.
b) Carry out various connections of single phase and three phase transformers.
c) Understand different types of special purpose transformers used in different applications.
Page 17 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Third
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Course Contents:
Unit : 1 1. Diode 6
1.1 Zener Diode

dissipation.
Page 18 of 23



clear signals.
EEROM, EPROM.
Total 45
Page 19 of 23
References:
9354602399
569340-9
9352838363
ISBN:13- 978-9339219505
9339203405
948868-1
Course Outcomes

3. Describe the concept, features and different application of Feedback Amplifiers and Oscillators through block
diagram.
4. Identify the adder circuits and the practical applications of adder and multiplexer circuits in digital electronics.
5. Describe the concepts and applications of Flip-flops, Counters and Registers, data converter and memory devices
in real field.


GROUP UNIT
A 1,3,4
B 2
C 5,6
Page 20 of 23
Course Code :
Semester Three
Prerequisites : NIL
Course Objective
Practicals
without filters.
78XX & 79XX.

Course Outcomes :
implemented so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented COs associated with the
a) Design different combinational circuits to execute truth table.
b) Analyze and describe the performance of combinational circuits.
c) Apply the knowledge of clock and memory to describe the desired output of sequential circuits and
solve problems.
d) Understand testing strategies and select proper instruments to evaluate performance characteristics
of electronic circuit.
Page 21 of 23
Internship-I Course
Objectives: Following are the objectives of this course:
HOD.
OR
OR
Institution.
OR
Institution.
OR
OR
OR
OR
Course Outcomes

Page 22 of 23
1 Originality
following criteria:
5 Viva voce
Page 23 of 23
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Electronics & Tele-

Communication Engineering [ETCE] &
Electronics & Communication Engineering
[ECE]
Revised 2022
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA IN ENGINEERING
COURSES
COURSE NAME: FULL TIME DIPLOMA IN ETCE & ECE
SEMESTER: THIRD
BRANCH: ELECTRONICS & TELECOMMUNICATION ENGG. and ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGG.
SR. SUBJECT CREDITS PERIODS EVALUATION SCHEME
NO.
L PR Total
THEORETICAL PRACTICAL
Marks
Inter
TA CT Total ESE Internal External
Principles of Electronic
1. 3 4 - 20 20 40 60 - - 100
Communication
Electronic Devices and Circuits

2. 3 4 - 20 20 40 60 - - 100
3. Digital Electronics 2 3 - 20 20 40 60 - - 100

4. Electric circuits and network 3 4 - 20 20 40 60 - - 100
5. Computer Programming Language 2 3 - 20 20 40 60 - - 100
Principles of Electronic
6. 1 - 3 - - - - 60 40 100
Communication Lab
Electronic Devices and

7. 1 - 3 - - - - 60 40 100
Circuits Laboratory
8. Digital Electronics Laboratory 1 - 2 - - - - 60 40 100

Electric circuits and network
9. 1 - 3 - - - - 60 40 100
Laboratory
10. Computer Programming Language
1 - 2 - - - - 60 40 100
Laboratory
11. Internship-I 1 - - - - - - - - 100
Total 19 18 13 100 100 200 300 300 200 1100
 STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 31+2 = 33 hours (2 hours for Library)
 ACADEMIC CONTACT WEEKS PER SEMESTER : 17 weeks (Teaching-15 weeks + Internal Exam-2 weeks)
 THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH
 ABBREVIATIONS: L- Lecture, PR- Practical, IA- Internal Assessment, CT- Class Test, ESE- End Semester Exam
 IA (Internal Assessment for Theoretical) = 40 marks: CT= 20 Marks, Attendance =10 marks and
Quizzes/Assignment/Student Activity = 10 marks.
 Minimum qualifying marks for both Theoretical and Sessional subjects (for internal assessment and external assessment separately) are 40%.
 IA (Internal Assessment for Practical) =60 marks: 50 marks for continuous evaluation and 10 marks for Class attendance.
 Internship-I will be completely assessed internally.
3
Name of the course: Principles of Electronic Communication
Course Code: ETCE/PEC/S3 Semester: Third
Duration: One Semester (Teaching - 15 Maximum Marks: 100 Marks
weeks + Internal Exam-2 weeks )
Teaching Scheme: Examination Scheme
Theory: 4 contact hrs./ week Class Test (Internal Examination): 20 Marks
Practical: 3 contact hours/ week Attendance =10 marks and Quizzes/Assignment/Student Activity = 10
marks
Credit: 4 ( TH:3+PR:1 ) Practical: 100 Marks
Course Outcomes:
On completion of the course students will be able to :
 Describe the basic structure of a telecommunication system, frequency and time domain representation of a
signal.
 Know how and why signals are modulated and different types of analog modulation system including pulse
modulation and also the demodulation process of modulated signals.
 Understand the functions and operating principles of transmitting and receiving systems with clear idea of
basic telephony system, electronic exchange and switching systems used in telephony.
 Acquire knowledge on propagation of electromagnetic wave of different frequency bands and using various
methods.
 Differentiate the analog and digital communication systems and understand the form of digital data including
information theory, error correction and coding methods.
Content (Name of the topic) Periods

Group – A
Unit 1 Basics of Electronic communication 07
1.1 Electromagnetic spectrum, elements of basic electronic communication system

1.2 Concept of noise, signal to noise ratio
1.3 Idea of simplex, half duplex and full duplex
1.4 Basic idea of Fourier series and Fourier transform
Unit 2 Analog modulation techniques 12
2.1 Concept of modulation and need for modulation

2.2 Amplitude Modulation( AM ) – Mathematical representation of AM wave, Modulation
Index, percentage of modulation, Bandwidth and side bands, Representation of AM wave
in time domain and frequency domain, Concept of DSB, SSB and VSB, Power
requirement in AM wave
2.3 Frequency Modulation(FM) -Mathematical representation of FM wave, Frequency
deviation, Modulation Index, Representation of FM wave in time domain and frequency
domain, Bandwidth requirement, NB and WB frequency modulation
2.4 Phase Modulation(PM) - Mathematical representation of PM wave, Modulation Index
2.5 Comparison of AM, FM and PM
Group – B
4
Unit 3 Transmitter and Receiver 12
3.1 Generation of AM wave – Collector modulated class C amplifier for generation of AM

wave, operation of Balanced Modulator, Filter method for SSB generation, Block diagram
of AM broadcast transmitter
3.2 Receiver of AM – Block diagram of AM super heterodyne receiver and its working
principle, IF amplifier and choice of IF, Mixer and converter, Alignment and tracking,
Receiver characteristics and testing, sensitivity, selectivity and fidelity
3,3 Demodulation of AM – Envelop detector, AGC and delayed AGC circuit and its
operation
3.4 Generation of FM wave – Direct (Varactor diode modulator) and Indirect (Armstrong)
method, Block diagram and operation of FM broadcast transmitter
3.5 Receiver of FM – Block diagram and operation of FM receiver, Pre-emphasis and De-
emphasis, AFC and PLL
3.6 Demodulation of FM – Foster-Seeley discriminator, ratio detector, limiter
Unit 4 Wave propagation 07

4.1 Concept of Electromagnetic Wave and its properties – Transverse electromagnetic
wave, concept of plane and spherical wavefronts, Reflection, Refraction, Polarization,
Diffraction, radiation, absorption, attenuation, interference
4.2 Ground wave propagation – VLF propagation
4.3 Sky wave propagation – Ionosphericlayers, virtual height, critical frequency, MUF,
skip distance
4.4 Space wave propagation – Line of sight propagation, multipath space wave
propagation, Radio horizon, Duct propagation (microwave space wave propagation)
4.5 Tropospheric scatter propagation
Unit 5 Telephony 08
5.1 Block diagram and operation of Telephone hand set, Transmitter, Receiver, side tone
and anti-side tone circuit and operation, ringer, switch hook, tone dialing, DTMF, Hybrid
circuit and its operation, local loop
5.2 Block diagram of Electronic exchange, Space division switching, Time division
switching
5.3 Numbering plan of telephone network- National and International scheme of
numbering plan
Group – C
Unit 6 Analog Pulse Modulation 06
6.1 Introduction and comparison with continuous wave modulation and advantages,
Sampling Theorem, Nyquist rate, natural and flat top sampling
6.2 Definition, principle of generation and reception of PAM (Pulse Amplitude
Modulation), PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) and PPM (Pulse Position Modulation) with
block diagram and applications
Unit 7 Digital Communication Systems and Coding Methods 08
5
7.1 Idea of Digital Communication – Advantages of digital communication over analog
communication, Elements of digital communication system with block diagram – source,
channel, transmitter and receiver
7.2 Channel characteristic – Bit rate, Baud rate, channel capacity, Synchronous and
Asynchronous data
7.3 Information Theory – Relationship between data speed and channel capacity, Hartley’s
Law, Hartley – Shannon Theorem
7.4 Error correction – Causes of error and its effect, error detection and correction using
Parity Check, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
7.5 Idea of Inter Symbol Interference (ISI) and interpretation of EYE diagram
7.6 Line coding format – RZ, NRZ, AMI and Manchester code
Total 60
Sl. No. Suggested List of Laboratory Experiments

1 To study generation of AM signal and the waveforms
2 To study Envelop detector for demodulation of AM and observe the effect
3 To study generation of FM signal using varactor and reactance modulator and the waveforms
4 To study detection of FM signal using Foster Seeley method.
5 To study the frequency spectrum of AM and FM using spectrum analyzer
6 To study super heterodyne AM receiver and measurement receiver parameters as i)Sensitivity, ii) selectivity
and iii) Fidelity
7 To study PAM modulation and demodulation
8 To study PWM modulation and demodulation
9 To study PPM modulation and demodulation
10 To study the analog signal sampling and reconstruction for different sampling frequency
11 To study the different blocks of a telephone receiver
12 Mini projects on
(A) AM radio receiver
(B) FM radio receiver
(C) AM transmitter
(D) FM transmitter
Name of the course: Electronic Devices and Circuits

Course Code: ETCE/EDC/S3 Semester: Third
marks
6
Credit: 4 (TH:3+PR:1) Practical: 100 Marks
Course Outcomes:
On completion of the study of the subject a student should be able to:
 Explain the principle of operation and application of different types of diodes viz. Rectifiers (without filters
and with filters), Clippers and Clampers.
 Discuss the working principle of BJT, its biasing circuit, different types of gains in terms of h-parameter and
stabilization of their operating points.
 Compare different types of Coupling in Amplifier
 Explain the construction and working principle of JFET, MOSFET and UJT
 Illustrate and compare the performance of different types of Power amplifiers.
 Explain different types of feedback in amplifiers, illustrate the effect of feedback on different parameters of an
amplifier and hence, deduce the concept of oscillation.

Group – A
Unit 1 Diodes and their applications 10
1.1 Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifiers(with Centre Tapped Transformer and Bridge) :
Average voltage – R.M.S. voltage, efficiency and ripple factor, Percentage voltage
regulation & TUF
1.2 Function of filter circuits – Capacitor input filter – Inductive filter – PI filter –
Calculation of ripple factor and average output voltage
1.3 Diode wave shaping circuits – clipper and clamper circuits
1.4 Zener diode, Zener breakdown & Avalanche Breakdown.
1.5 Varactor diode & Schottky diode.
Unit 2 Bipolar Junction Transistor and its biasing 10
2.1 Transistor configurations (CB, CE & CC), input and output characteristics. α, β, and γ
factors
2.2 Comparison of CB, CE, and CC configurations
2.3 Concept of Q-point, ac and dc load lines
2.4 Stabilization and stability factor
2.5. BIASING: Base bias — Collector feedback bias — Emitter feedback bias — Potential
divider bias.
Group – B
Unit 3 Small Signal Transistor Amplifiers 10
3.1 Hybrid model and h-parameters of CB, CE & CC mode transistor amplifiers –
Calculation of voltage gain, current gain, power gain, input and output impedance in terms
of h-parameters
3.2 High frequency model of BJT
3.3 Types of Coupling in Amplifier: RC coupled, Direct coupled & Transformer-coupled
amplifiers; their relative advantages and disadvantages.
3.4 Effect of cascading on Gain & Bandwidth and Frequency response
7
Unit 4 JFET, MOSFET AND UJT 10
4.1 Field Effect Transistors: FET – Working Principle, Classification
4.2 N-Channel/ P-Channel MOSFETs – characteristics, enhancement and depletion mode,
MOSFET as a Switch
4.3 MOSFET Small Signal model
4.4 Small signal FET equivalent circuits – Common Source and Common Drain amplifier
– FET application as VVR, Constant Current Source etc.
4.5 Uni-Junction Transistor – equivalent circuit, operation and application.
Group – C
Unit 5 Power Amplifier 08
5.1 Characteristics of Class A, Class B, Class C and Class AB amplifier
5.2 Transformer Coupled Audio Power Amplifier- Impedance Matching and Maximum
Power Output.
5.3 Push-Pull Amplifiers: Advantages of Push-Pull amplifier, Power considerations&
Distortion in class B Push-Pull Amplifier.
Unit 6 Feedback Amplifier and concept of oscillation 12

6.1 Basic idea of positive and negative feedback
6.2 Basic Feedback Amplifier Topologies: Voltage Series, Voltage Shunt, Current Series,
Current Shunt
6.3 Effect of negative feedback on gain, gain stability, distortion, noise, bandwidth, phase
shift, input and output impedances
6.4 Performance of emitter follower circuit – Calculation of gain and input & output
impedances
6.5 Barkhausen criteria and operation of Tuned Collector Oscillator.
Total 60

1 To study the rectifier with and without capacitor filter for : —
(a) Half-wave rectifier,
(b) Full-wave rectifier,
2 To observe the waveform at the input and output of clipping circuits in different clipping configuration.
3 To study the operation of positive and negative clamper circuit.
4 To study the VI characteristics of a forward and reverse biased Zener diode.
5 To study the input and output characteristics and to determine the h-parameters of a BJT for : —
(a) C-E configuration,
(b) C-B configuration,
(c) C-C configuration
6 To determine frequency response characteristics of RC coupled amplifier circuit and calculation of
bandwidth, midband gain, input impedance and output impedance for :
(a) Single-stage amplifier,
(b) Double-stage amplifier
7 To study Drain Characteristics and Transfer Characteristics of a Field Effect Transistor (FET).
8
8 To study Drain Characteristics and Transfer Characteristics of a MOSFET.
9 To study the V-I characteristics of UJT ( show the cut-off, saturation and negative resistance region)
10 To study the operation of a Class B Push-Pull Amplifier
11 To determine the frequency characteristics of a negative feedback amplifier and compare with that of an
amplifier without feedback.
Name of the course: Digital Electronics

Course Code: ETCE/DE/S3 Semester: Third
marks
Course Outcomes:
 Describe the difference between Analog and Digital logic systems, different number systems and their
conversions
 Know the rules and laws of Boolean Algebra, basic logic, derived and special logic gates, De-Morgan's
theorem , minimization technique of Boolean expressions by using K- Map
 Understand the operation of different Combinational Logic Circuits like Adder, Subtractor, MUX, DEMUX,
Encoder, Decoder etc
 Acquire knowledge on basic working principle of different types of FLIP-FLOPS like JK, SR, D, T, Master-
Slave
 Have a clear idea of Asynchronous and synchronous counters, Ring and Twisted Ring Counters and Shift
REGISTERS
 Understand ideas on different Memory Devices and different types of A to D and D to A converter.

Group – A
Unit 1 NUMBER SYSTEMS AND CODES 03
1.1 Difference between Analog and Digital Logic system, Positive and Negative Logic
system, Introduction to different number systems – Binary, Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal
and Conversion from one number system to another.
1.2 Gray code (unit distance code), BCD (weighted code), Excess3(self-complementary)
code, ASCII, EBCDIC Code, conversion between Gray and Binary codes
Unit 2 LOGIC GATES, BOOLEAN ALGEBRA & SIMPLIFICATION OF LOGIC 08
9
EXPRESSIONS
2.1 Symbolic representation , truth table and expressions of different logic gates: BUFFER
– (NOT, OR, AND ) – (NAND,NOR)– (XOR, X-NOR)
2.2 Rules and laws of Boolean Algebra, Difference between boole and ordinary variables,
Basic logic circuits, De-Morgan's theorem
2.3 Max. term and Min term – Canonical form of equation – Simplification of Boolean
expressions
2.4 Karnaugh Map technique ( upto 4 variables) – Don’t care condition – Prime implicants
– Canonical forms – Quine-McClusky method
2.5 Realization of Boolean expression with different logic gates
Unit 3 Combinational Logic Circuits 12
3.1 Arithmetic Circuits – Addition, Subtraction, 1’s 2’s Complement and 9’s complement
method of addition, Half Adder, Full Adder, Half Subtractor, Full Subtractor, Parallal and
Series Adders.
3.2 Realization of NAND and NOR as a universal Logic Gate, Realization of AND-OR is
equivalent to NAND-NAND and OR-AND is equivalent to NOR-NOR
3.3 Different Code converters, Operation, Truth Table and Circuit diagram of 2: 4 ,3: 8
Decoder and 4: 16 Decoders, Cascading of Decoders, Realization of different Boolean
functions by using Decoders, BCD to seven segment Decoder, Operation of 4: 2 Encoder,
8: 3 Encoder and Priority Encoder.
3.4 Multiplexer – Operation, Truth Table and Circuit diagram of 2 to 1 MUX, 4:1 MUX,
8:1 MUX and 16: 1 MUX. Cascading of MUX, Realization of Boolean functions by using
MUX, Design of Universal Gate by using MUX.
3.5 Demultiplexer – Operation, Truth Table and Circuit diagram of 1:2 DEMUX, 1:4
DEMUX, 1:8 DEMUX, Conversion in between Decoder and Demultiplexer.
3.6 Design of 2,3,4 bit odd and even Parity Generator and Checker, Design of 2, 3 and 4
bit Binary Comparators.
Group – B
Unit 4 Sequential Logic Circuits (FLIP-FLOP) 05
4.1 Difference between Combinational and Sequential Logic Circuits, Idea of clock pulse,
Concept of Flip Flops – Difference between flip flop and latch
4.2 Construction and Operation of RS, JK, D and T Flip Flops, Operation of preset and
clear signal. Race Around Condition, Master slave JK Flip flop, Positive and Negative
Edge triggered flip-flop, Excitation/ Transition Table of all Flip flops.
Unit 5 Sequential Logic Circuits (COUNTERS and REGISTERS) 08

5.1 Concept of Counter, Difference between Asynchronous and Synchronous counter –
Operation of 3 & 4 bit Ripple UP/DOWN counter with timing diagram–Programmable
ripple counter, Application of counter
5.2 Design of (a) Ring (N:1) counter with Truth Table and waveform diagram. (b) Johnson
counter (2N:1) with Truth Table and waveform diagram.
5.3 Design of Synchronous counter with the help of RS, JK, D, and T Flip-Flop (e.g Mod
5,7,10 etc.)
5.4 Registers – 4bit Shift Register: Operation of Serial In Serial Out, Serial in Parallel Out,
Parallel In Serial Out, Parallel In Parallel Out, Concept of Bidirectional Shift Register,
Application of Shift Register
10
Group – C
Unit 6 Memory Devices 04
6.1 Classification of Memories – RAM Organization, Address Lines and Memory Lines,
Static RAM, Bipolar RAM, cell Dynamic RAM, D RAM, DDR RAM
6.2 Read Only memory – ROM organization, Expanding memory, PROM, EPROM,
EEPROM, Flash memory CDROM
6.3 Digital Logic Arrays- PLA, PAL, GAL, FPLA, FPGA
Unit 7 Data Converters 05
7.1 DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTERS: Binary weighted resistor type DAC, R-2R
ladder type DAC, specifications and applications of DAC.
7.2 ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER: Comparator type, Successive approximation
type, Dual slope AD converter specifications and applications of AD converter.
Total 45

1 To verify the truth tables for all logic fates – NOT, OR ,AND, NAND, NOR ,XOR and XNOR using CMOS
Logic gates [CMOS ICs4001,4011,4030,4070,4071,4077,4081,4093] and TTL Logic Gates [TTL ICs-
7400,7402,7404,7408,7432,7486]
2 Implement and realize Boolean Expressions with different Logic Gates
3 Implement Half Adder, Full Adder, Half Sub tractor and Full sub tractor by using different digital ICs
4 Realization of parallel and serial full-adder using ICs (IC- 74LS83)
5 To implement encoder (IC-74147), decoder (IC-74138), multiplexer (IC-74151) and demultiplexer (IC-
74138).
6 Construct a Single digit Decade Counter (0-9) with 7 segment display (74LS90)
7 To construct 2 bit parity generator and checker & 2 bit comparator by using logic gates.
8 To verify the Truth Table of SR, D, JK and T Flip-flops ( IC-74LS76)
9 To construct binary synchronous and asynchronous counter.
10 To design programmable up / down counter.
11 To design controlled shift register and study their function as SIPO.SISO, PIPO, PISO (by using IC74LS76)
12 To study different memory ICs.
13 To study DA and AD converters
Name of the course: Electric Circuits and Network

Course Code: ETCE/ECN/S3 Semester: Third
11
marks
Course Outcomes:
 Simplify networks using graph theory or proper reduction techniques.
 Solve two-port network and resonant circuit.
 Design filter, attenuator and equalizer circuit.
 Interpret the circuit response and output spectrum by using Laplace and Fourier Transform respectively.
 Develop an understanding on Transmission Lines.

Group – A
Unit 1 Basic of Network and Network Theorems 12
1.1 Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law, Kirchhoff’s Current Law, Voltage divider, current divider
rule, star – delta conversion, Source Transformation and duality.
1.2 Node and Mesh Analysis using Independent and Controlled Source
1.3 Thevenin’s Theorem, Norton’s Theorem, Superposition Theorem, Maximum Power
Transfer Theorem, Reciprocity Theorem – simple problems.
1.4 Idea of resonance – series and parallel resonant circuits – Q value, Selectivity and
Bandwidth.
Unit 2 Graph Theory 04
2.1 Graph of a network, tree, incident matrix, concepts of path, cycle and tree, independent
loops
2.2 F – Tie Set and analysis of resistive network using tie – set
2.3 F - Cut Set and analysis of resistive network using cut – set. Duality.
Unit 3 Two Port Network 08
3.1 Introduction of Two Port Network - Open circuit impedance parameters, Short circuit
impedance parameters, hybrid parameters, transmission parameters – simple problems.
3.2 Open and short circuit impedance, characteristics impedance and its relation with open
and short circuit impedance, propagation constant and image impedance.
Group – B
Unit 4 Filter Circuits 05
4.1 Definition and relationship between neper and decibel.
4.2 Basic idea of passive filters – definition of pass band, stop band, cut – off frequency.
4.3 Constant K – prototype filters: a) Low pass filter b) high pass filter c) Band pass filter
d) Band reject filter
4.4 Active filter - Basic idea, advantages and disadvantages of basic filters, application of
filter circuits.
Unit 5 Attenuators and Equalizers 07
12
5.1 Basic idea of attenuators, difference between attenuator and filter, symmetrical T and π
attenuator – field of application of attenuators.
5.2 Concept of equalizer – purpose of equalizer and its classification – Difference between
series & shunt equalizer and their field of applications
Unit 6 Transmission Lines 06
6.1 Types of transmission lines: Parallel wire and coaxial cable
6.2 Primary and secondary constants of transmission lines
6.3 Characteristic impedance – Reflection co-efficient – Standing wave ratio and their
relationship
6.4 Simple matching methods, single and double stub match for transmission lines
6.5 Losses in transmission lines
6.6 Distortion in transmission line – Causes of distortion and condition for distortion less
transmission – Practical feasibility for distortion less transmission
Group – C
Unit 7 Laplace Transform 12
7.1 Laplace Transform and its properties

7.2 Analysis of electrical circuits using Laplace transform for standard inputs (unit step,
ramp)
7.3 Initial and Final Conditions for network elements
7.4 Forced and free response, time constants
7.5 Steady state and transient state response
7.6 Solution of 1st and 2nd order differential equations for series and parallel RL, RC,
RLC circuits
7.7 Inverse Laplace Transform
Unit 8 Fourier Series 06
8.1 Discrete spectra and symmetry of waveforms for Exponential and Trigonometric
Fourier Series
8.2 Steady state response of a network to non-sinusoidal periodic inputs, power factors,
effective values.
8.3 Fourier Transform and continuous spectra
Total 60

1 To verify node and mesh analysis using independent and controlled sources
2 To verify Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems
3 To verify Superposition theorem.
4 To verify Maximum Power Transfer theorem and Reciprocity Theorem.
5 To verify characteristics of Series resonant Circuit
6 To verify characteristics of Parallel resonant Circuit
7 To measure the characteristic impedance of symmetrical T and π networks
13
8 To measure the cut –off frequencies of the following: —
(a) constant k-type low pass filter;
(b) constant k-type high pass filter;
9 To measure T and π type attenuator
10 To observe standing wave pattern for a transmission line of finite length with:
(a) open termination,
(b) shorted termination and
(c) matched termination,
11 To measure the attenuation constant and phase shift constant for matched termination.
Name of the course: Computer Programming Language

Course Code: ETCE/CPL/S3 Semester: Third
marks
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the concept of hardware and software part of a computer.
 Explain compiler, interpreter, linker and loader function.
 Understand flow charts and algorithms and the basic structure of a program in C.
 Learn about one dimensional array and pointers.
 Understand the definition of a function and its advantages.
 Understand the concept of Object Oriented Programming.

Group – A
Unit 1 Computer Fundamentals 07
1.1 Introduction of computers, Classification of computers, Anatomy of a computer,

Memory hierarchy, Introduction to OS, Operational overview of a CPU.
1.2 Generation and classification of programming languages, Compiling, Interpreting,
Loading, Linking of a program, Developing program, Software development.
1.3 Flow chart and algorithm development.
Unit 2 Basics of C 07
14
2.1 Overview of C, Structure of a C program, Comments, Program statements, C tokens,
Keywords, Identifiers, Data types, Variables, Constants, Operators, Expressions and
precedence.
2.2 Non-formatted and formatted input and output functions.
Unit 3 Control Statements 06
3.1 Selection statements – if, if-else, nested if, nested if-else, comma operator, conditional
operator, switch.
3.2 Iterative statements – while, for, do-while.
3.3 Special control statements – goto, break, continue, return, exit.
Group – B
Unit 4 Arrays and Pointers 09
4.1 Introduction of one-dimensional arrays, Declaration and initialization of Array,

Accessing of array elements and other allowed operations, Definition of header file, Use of
header files, Different header files, Functions from ctype.h, string.h, Simple program with
a one dimensional array.
4.2 Understanding pointers, declaring and accessing pointer, ’&‘ and ‘*‘ operators, Pointer
expressions, Pointer assignments, Pointer arithmetic.
Unit 5 Functions 07
5.1 Concept of function, Using functions, Call-by-value Vs Callby-reference, Passing
arrays to functions, Recursion, Simple programs.
Unit 6 Basic Concepts of Object Oriented Programming 09
6.1 Introduction to Object Oriented Programming, Concepts of Objects and Classes.
Total 45

1 Familiarization with programming environment (Editor, Compiler, etc.)
2 Verify the programs using I/O statements and various operators
3 Verify the programs to check whether a number is even or odd
4 Verify the programs to find the sum of n natural numbers
5 Verify the programs to find the largest and smallest number among five numbers
6 Verify the programs to find factorial of a number
7 Verify the programs to display Fibonacci sequence
8 Verify the programs to find GCD and LCM of two numbers
9 Verify the programs to count number of digits in an integer
10 Verify the programs to demonstrate recursion
11 Verify the programs to demonstrate use of pointers
12 Verify the programs to sort 10 elements in ascending or descending order
15
13 Verify the programs to find the summation of three numbers using function
14 Verify the programs to find the maximum between two numbers using function
Name of the course: Internship-I

Course Code: ETCE/INT-I/S3 Semester: Third
Duration: During vacation Maximum Marks: 100 Marks
Credit: 1
Students are required to be involved in Inter/Intra Institutional activities viz: Training and simulation program with
different Institutes like Workshop of ITI, Other Polytechnics and other technical institutes; Soft skill training organized
by Training and Placement Cell of the respective institutions, contribution at innovation/entrepreneurship cell of the
institute; participation in workshops/competitions etc.; Learning at Departmental Lab/Institutional workshop.
Course Outcomes:
 Understand the real time industrial environment.
 Get exposure about entrepreneurship development.
 Learn about the training and simulation program of the industry/institute.
 Handle different Industrial/Institutional equipments/machineries.
16
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Electronics & Instrumentation

Engineering [EIE]
Revised 2022
Detailed Syllabus for Semester III
Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering
Semester : III
Course Code : EIEPC201
Course Title : Analog Electronics
Number of Credits : 3 (L:2, T:1, P:0)
Prerequisite : Idea on Basic Electronics
Course Objective
Following are the objectives of this course
❖ To know different analog electronic components with their characteristics.
❖ To operate and troubleshoot different electronic circuit.
❖ To learn different biasing techniques and characteristics of Diode, BJT, FET.
Course Content Hrs/Unit

Module 1 Unit 1 Semiconductor & Diode 7
Semiconductor Definition, Extrinsic/Intrinsic, N-type &
p-type.
PN Junction Diode, Forward and Reverse Bias
Characteristics of diode, Half Wave, Full Wave and
bridge rectifier. Capacitor filter.
Zener Diode – Principle, characteristics, construction, use.
Unit II Bipolar Junction Transistor 9

NPN and PNP Transistor, Operation and characteristics of
CE, CB, CC Configuration. Transistor as amplifier and
switch. Transistor lead identification.
Need for transistor biasing, operation of emitter and
voltage divider biasing.
Operation of RC coupled and Transformer coupled
amplifier.
Module 2 Unit III Field Effect Transistors 8

Principle and Working of JFET, Characteristics of JFET.
N-Channel/ P-Channel MOSFETs – characteristics,
enhancement and depletion mode, MOSFET as a Switch.
Unit IV Feedback Amplifier 8

Positive and negative feedback concept, Transfer gain
with feedback, General characteristics and advantages of
negative feedback, Study of Negative feedback on Gain,
Bandwidth, Noise, Distortion, Input and Output
impedances with the help of Block Schematic and
Mathematical Expressions.
Module 3 Unit V Oscillator 5

Basic principle of oscillator, Barkhausen criterion,
damped & un-damped oscillation.
Operation of L-C tuned oscillator, R-C phase shift
oscillator, Wien bridge oscillator.
Unit VI Operational Amplifier 8

Symbol, pin diagram, characteristics of an ideal op-amp,
OpAmp IC.
Application of Op-amp:
Inverting amplifier, Non-inverting amplifier, Adder,
Subtractor, Differentiator, Integrator, Unity gain buffer, V
to I and I to V converter, Comparator, Sine wave
generator, square wave generator, Triangular wave
generator, Sawtooth wave generator.
Suggested Learning resources
Title Author Publisher

Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory Boylestad & Nashelsky PHI Pub. Co.
Electronic Principles A.P. Malvino Mc Graw Hill
Principle of Electronics V K Mehta, Rohit Mehta S Chand
Operational Amplifier and linear ICs D. A. Bell Oxford University Press
Electronic Devices & Circuits D. A. Bell Oxford University Press
Integrated Electronics Millman & Halkias Mc Graw Hill
Op-amps & linear integrated circuits R. Gayakwad PHI
Foundation of Electronics Chattopadhayay, New Age
Rakshit, Saha, Purkait
Analog Integrated Circuit Design Johns Wiley India
Linear Integrated Circuit Ganesh Babu, Suseela B. Scitech Publication
Linear Integrated Circuit D Roy Choudhury New Age
Electronic Device & Circuit Mottershed PHI
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Explain basic principle and operation of Diode, Transistor,
course student will Amplifier, Oscillator.
be able to: 2. Identify circuit element like Diode, BJT, FET, Op-Amp.
3. Construct electronic circuits using Diode, BJT, FET, Op-Amp.
4. Design and Develop circuits f or different applications of Op-Amp.
5. Troubleshoot problems related to electronic circuits.
Semester : III
Course Title : Electrical Machine and Measurement
Prerequisite : Basic knowledge on Electrical & Electronics components
Course Objective
Following are the Objectives of this course
• Operation, Maintenance and application of Transformer, DC Machine, AC
Machine.
• Use relevant measuring instrument in different electrical applications.
Module 1 Unit 1 Transformer 5

1.1 Construction, working principle and EMF equation of
transformer and simple problem.
1.2 Open & short circuit test, Losses & efficiency of
transformer.
1.3 Working principle and characteristics of Single phase
Current & Potential transformer.
Unit II DC Generator and DC Motor 8

D.C. Generator
2.1 Construction & working principle of D. C. Generator,
EMF equation.
2.2 Excitation system, types of D.C. Generator, terminal
voltage, losses & efficiency, Specification of DC
machine.
D. C. Motor
2.3 Construction & working principle of D. C. Motor.
2.4 Type of motors & their uses
2.5 Speed control of DC Motor by field flux control &
armature voltage control of dc shunt motor.
Module 2 Unit III Synchronous Generator (Alternator) and A. C. Motors 9
Synchronous Generator (Alternator)
3.1 Construction, Working principle,
3.2 Relation between speed & frequency,
3.3 Pitch factor, Distribution Factor (No derivation
required).
A. C. Motors
3.4 Induction Motor: construction, types of rotor, rotating
magnetic field, principle of operation of single-phase
induction motor.
3.5 Synchronous speed, actual speed & slip, torque
equation, speed torque characteristics.
Unit IV D’Arsonaval Galvanometer 6
4.1 Construction, working principle, Deflecting torque
equation
4.2 Applications
4.3 Scale shape, damping arrangement, shunt, swamping
resistance
Module 3 Unit V Measurement of Voltage & Current, Power & Energy 12

Measurement of Voltage & Current
5.1 Construction, working principle, torque equation,
scale shape, sources of error, merits & demerits, &
applications of
a. Permanent Magnet Moving Coil Instrument,
b. Induction type instrument,
c. Moving Iron instrument,
5.2 Extension of instrument ranges: shunts & multipliers.
Measurement of Power & Energy
5.3 Construction & working principle of –
a. Single-phase dynamometer type wattmeter,
b. Induction type Watt-hour meter (single phase).
5.4 Errors , adjustments, advantages & disadvantages of
those.
Unit VI Measurement of Circuit Parameters 5

6.1 Classifications of low, medium, high resistance.
6.2 Measurement of Resistance by Wheatstone bridge,
Kelvin
Double Bridge & Megger
6.3 Maxwell’s Bridge
6.4 Schering Bridge
A Text Book of Electrical Technology Part-II B.L. Thereja S. Chand &. Co
Basic Electrical Engineering Mittle V. N. McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Electrical Technology Vol2: Machines & S.P. Bali Pearson Education
Measurement
Electrical Technology E. Huges Longman
Electrical Technology H. Cotton CBS Publisher
Electrical Machine Design A K Sahwney Dhanpat Rai & Co (P)
Ltd
Electrical Machines Samarjit Ghosh Pearson Education
Electrical Machines P.S. Bimbhra Khanna Book Publishing
Co
Electrical Machine P K Mukherjee Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Co (P) Ltd
DC Machine & Transformer K Murgesh Vikas
Kumar
Electrical Machine S K Bhattachaya Mc Graw Hill
Electrical Machine R.K. Rajput Laxmi Publication
A course in Electrical & Electronics A.K. Sawhney. Dhanpat Rai & Co
Measurement
& Instrumentation
Electrical Measurements and Measuring Suryanarayna S.Chand and Co
Instruments N.V
A Course in Electrical & Electronics J.B. Gupta S. K.Kataria & Sons
Measurement & Instrumentation
Electrical & Electronics Measurements and Purkait, Biswas, McGraw Hill Education
Instrumentation Das, Koley
Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Rajput R.K S.Chand and Co
Instrumentation
Electrical Measurements & Measuring Golding & A H Wheeler
Instruments Widdis
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Demonstrate and Explain the Operation of single-phase
course student will transformer, single phase DC machines, single phase AC machines,
be able to: D’Arsonval Galvanometer.
2. Do maintenance on transformer, DC and AC machine.
3. Make use of galvanometer, PMMC, MI, wattmeter, watt-hour
meter.
4. Measure electric voltage, current, power and energy.
5. Choose proper bridge circuit to measure resistance, capacitance and
inductance.
Semester : III
Course Title : Circuit Theory
Prerequisite : NIL
Course Objective
To Maintain electrical systems applying AC and DC circuit fundamentals.
Module 1 Unit 1 Application of Network Theorems in DC circuits 8

KCL, KVL, Node and Mesh Analysis
Statement, Explanation and solution of numerical
problems on: Thevenin’s Theorem, Norton’s Theorem,
Superposition Theorem, Maximum Power Transfer
Theorem.
Unit II Resonance of Series RLC Circuit 8

Sinusoidal Response of Series RLC circuit
Properties of Resonance of RLC series Circuit
Variation of Resistance, Inductance, and Capacitive
Reactance with frequency
Q factor, Bandwidth, Selectivity, of Series Resonant
Circuit
Half Power frequency
Numerical solutions
Module 2 Unit III Resonance of Parallel RLC Circuit 7

Sinusoidal Response of Parallel RLC circuit
Properties of Resonance of RLC series circuit
Variation of Capacitance, Inductive Susceptance,
Impedance and current with frequency
Q factor, Bandwidth, Selectivity, Detuning Factor of
Parallel Resonant Circuit
Numerical solutions
Unit IV Filter Circuit 9

Ideal Filter, Practical Filter, Active and Passive Filter,
Properties of Filter, Classification of Filter.
Explanation of LPF, HPF, BPF, BSF with frequency
characteristics using reactive element
Analysis and Design of Prototype LPF and HPF with
Numerical solution.
Module 3 Unit V Laplace Transformation 8
Definition.
LT of Step, Pulse, Ramp, Sinusoidal, Exponential
function.
Laplace Transfer Theorem: Final Value, Initial Value,
Differentiation, Integration.
Inverse Laplace Transform with numerical problems
Unit VI Transient Response Analysis 5

Transient response of RL, RC and RLC Circuits using
Laplace transform for DC input
Circiut Theory (Analysis & Synthesis) A. K. Chakraborty Dhanpat Rai & Co
Electric Circuit Analysis Kumar Pearson Education
Electric Circuits David A. Bell Oxford University
Press
Introduction to Electric Circuits Dorf Wiley
Network Theory: Analysis & Synthesis Ghosh PHI
Circuit Theory S. Salivahanan, S. Pravin Vikas
Kumar
Fundamentals of Electric Circuit Alexander Mc Graw Hill
Electric Circuit David A. Bell Oxford
Circuits & Network Sukhua, Nagsarkar Oxford
A Text Book of Electrical Technology B.L. Thereja S. Chand &. Co
Part-I
Electric Circuit Analysis P Ramesh Babu Scitech
Electric Circuit Theory Chattopadhyay, Rakshit S. Chand &. Co
Circuit Network A. Dani BPB
Network Analysis & Synthesis R R Singh Mc Graw Hill
Electric Circuit Analysis S.N. Sivanandam Vikas
Introductory circuit Analysis Boylested, R.L. Wheeler
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Apply network theorems to troubleshoot electric circuits.
course student will 2. Troubleshoot problems related to single phase A.C series and
be able to: parallel circuits.
3. Distinguish Series and Parallel resonance with circuit parameters
4. Design filter circuit with particular frequency and troubleshoot
problems related to filter Circuits
5. Solve numerical problems on Network theorems, Resonance, LT
6. Evaluate LT of signals and explain LT theorem.
Semester : III
Course Title : Programming in C
Prerequisite : Basic operation of computer
Course Objective
❖ To make students as a worthy programmer by getting idea on basic, looping,
branching, structure, pointer, array etc.

Module 1 Unit I Keywords, Variables Functions and Library is C 7
programming
Keywords in C. Definition of variables, Relation
between variable and memory location.
Function or method, classification of methods with
examples. Function call.
Library with header files. Idea on IDE.
Unit II Data types and operators in C 7

Classification and range of data types in C, idea on
memory allocation, declaration of data type with
format specifier,
Example of signed and unsigned data, character type
data.
Idea on ASCII.
Concepts of sizeof() and limits of each data type.
Explanation with example of Relational, Bitwise,
Logical, Arithmetic, Assigned, modify, conditional
operators
Module 2 Unit III Control Statements in C 8

If, if else, if else-if else, nested if else, while loop, do
while loop, nested while loop, for loop, break and
continue statements.
Switch case statement.
Explanation of all with programming.
Unit IV Array in C 7
Definition of Array, memory allocation, local and
global declaration of 1 dimensional array, how to
process array element. Explanation of all with
programming.
Module 3 Unit V Structure and Union in C 8
Definition, memory allocation, size, local and Global
structure, initialization of structure, Array of structure,
nested structure.
Unions. Difference between structure and union.
Unit VI Pointer in C 8
Definition, declaration of pointer variable, types and
size of pointer, Call by value and call by reference,
pointer to function, pointer to array, pointer to pointer,
pointer to character string. Explanation of all with
programming.

Programming in C E. Balagurusamy Mc Graw Hill
Let Us C Kanetkar BPB
Programming in C Reema Thereja Oxford University Press
Complete Reference C Herbert Shield Mc Graw Hill
A Textbook on C E. Karthikeyan PHI
Introduction to programming using C Pawar Wiley
Programming With C T. Jeyapoovan Vikas
All of C Ghosh PHI
Project Using C P V N Varalakshmi Scitech
Programming in C S. S. Khandare S. Chand &. Co
Programming in C J. Shah Charotar
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Get knowledge on Basic, variables, functions, libraries, data
course student will be types Operators in C.
able to: 2. Apply looping and branching concept in C programming as well
as any other programming language.
3. Apply array, pointer and structure to write program.
4. Debug and troubleshoot any programming in C
5. Improve themselves and become a good programmer to solve
different problems in industrial automation
Semester : III
Course Title : Fundamentals of Instrumentation
Prerequisite : Basic idea of Physics and Electronics
Course Objective
➢ To get overall idea of Instrumentation.
➢ To know about different parameters, specifications, characteristics and
subsystem in Instrumentation.
➢ To get knowledge on different sensors and transducers related with force,
strain, displacement, angular velocity, acceleration, torque, density, viscosity.
➢ To get knowledge on Pneumatic system and recording system
➢ To get concept of nuclear sensor
Module 1 Unit 1 Introduction 8

1. Significance of measurements, Classification of
instruments – absolute and secondary
2. Elements of a generalized measurement system with
diagram and functions of different components
3. Performance Characteristics of Instruments:
True value, indicated value, error, range, span,
sensitivity, accuracy, precision, drift, threshold,
resolution, hysteresis, , repeatability, reproducibility,
speed of response, lag, fidelity (definition with
example)
4. Errors in measurements:
Type of errors – gross, systematic (instrumental,
environmental and observational) and random errors
(definition with example only)
5. Concept of calibration
Unit II Sensors and Transducers 17

1. Definition of sensors & transducers, difference between
sensor & transducer, factors governing the choice of
transducer
2. Classification of Transducer:
• Primary & Secondary,
• Electrical & Mechanical,
• Analog & Digital,
• Active & Passive
3. Description of the following transducers (construction,
working principle, advantages, disadvantages, application
and range):
• Potentiometer
• Strain gauge
• LVDT
• RVDT
• Capacitive type (change in area, distance and
dielectric constant)
• piezoelectric type
• Magneto-strictive type
• Hall Effect type
Module 2 Unit III Velocity Acceleration Torque Density Viscosity 10

Measurements of following parameters (construction, working
principle, advantages, disadvantages, application and range):
• Angular velocity – DC tachometer generator, stroboscope
• Acceleration – potentiometric and LVDT accelerometer
• Torque – strain gauge torque meter and magneto-strictive
torque meter
• Density – hydrometer
• Viscosity – rotational cylinder method and capillary tube
method
Unit IV Basics of Pneumatic system 3

• Advantages and limitations of pneumatic system
• Construction, working principle and application of
flapper-nozzle assembly and pneumatic relay
• Concept of pneumatic transmitter
Module 3 Unit V Recorders 3

1. Necessity of recording in Instrumentation systems
2. Classification of recorders
3. Construction, working principle, advantages and
disadvantages of following recorders:
• XY recorder
• Strip chart recorder and
• Magnetic tape recorder
Unit VI Nuclear Instrumentation 4
• Type of radiations
• Geiger Muller tube
• Ionization chamber
• Scintillation counter

Principles of Industrial Instrumentation D. Patranabis TMH
Sensors & Transducers D. Patranabis PHI
Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Dhanpat Rai &
A. K. Sawhney
Instrumentation Co.
Instrumentation Devices & System Rangan, Sarma, Mani Mc Graw Hill
Measurement System Application & Design E.O. Doeblin Mc Graw Hill
Principles of Measurement &
Alan S. Morris PHI
Instrumentation
Instrumentation for Engineering Wiley India Pvt
Dally
Measurement Ltd
Introduction to Measurement & PHI
Ghosh
Instrumentation
Process Control Instrumentation Technology Kartis Johnson PHI
Sensors & Transducers Yes Dee
Sinclair
Publishing
Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation Wiley India Pvt
A Barua
Ltd
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Define instrumentation and demonstrate generalized
course student will Instrumentation system.
be able to: 2. Illustrate performance characteristics of Instruments and errors in
measurements.
3. Explain operation of sensors, transducers and other measuring
instruments.
4. Classify sensors and transducers.
5. Measure velocity, acceleration, torque, density, viscosity.
6. Install & troubleshoot measuring instrument like force, strain,
displacement, angular velocity, acceleration, torque, density, viscosity
etc.
7. Install & troubleshoot Pneumatic, recording and nuclear instrument
Semester : III
Course Title : Analog Electronics Lab
Number of : 1 (L:0, T:0, P:2)
Credits
Prerequisite : Basic on Analog Electronics
Course : PC
Category
Course Objective
❖ To identify the analog electronic components, construct electronic
circuits and troubleshoot the problem with different electronic circuits.
List of Practical work to be performed.
Construct the circuit and do the experiments with following aims:
Sl. No. Aims;
1 To study diode characteristics under forward and reverse bias condition
using junction diode and Zener diode.
2 To study half wave, full wave and Bridge rectifier with and without
capacitor filer. Check voltage waveform in CRO.
3 To plot transistor characteristics in CE/CB configuration.
4 To show biasing of a BJT, take output readings and draw characteristics
curve.
5 To plot drain and transfer characteristics for a given FET and to find drain
resistance and transconductance
6 Construct a circuit to show MOSFET acting as a switch
7 To design and construct a wien bridge/ RC phase shift oscillator for a
given cut-off frequency. See the output in oscilloscope.
8 Construct circuit to study following application of Op-Amp using IC
LM741
a) Inverting Amplifier
b) Non inverting amplifier
c) Adder
d) Subtractor
e) Integrator
f) Differentiator
9 To design circuit and study the non-linear application of Op-Amp
a) Sine wave generator
b) Square wave generator
c) Triangular wave generator
d) Sawtooth wave generator
Course Outcome
At the end of 1. Identify Analog electronics components like Diode, BJT, FET, Op-Amp.
the course 2. Construct and design of electronic circuit with the help of Diode,
student will Transistor, Op-Amp.
be able to: 3. Analyse input output characteristic of diode and transistor.
4. Design and construct rectifier and oscillator circuit.
5. Demonstrate and analyse application of LM741
Semester : III
Course Title : Electrical Machine and Measurement Lab
Number of : 1 (L:0, T:0, P:2)
Credits
Course : PC
Category
Course Objective
• Experiment with machine and measuring instruments.
• Use relevant measuring instrument in different electrical applications.
List of Practical to be performed
1 To identify the construction details of A.C. synchronous machine and
asynchronous machine
2 Speed control of D.C. shunt motor by-(a) Armature voltage control.
(b) Field flux control.
3 Measurement of performance of single phase transformer by conducting
O.C. and S.C. test
4 Measurement of current and voltage by low range ammeter and voltmeter
respectively with shunt and multiplier
5 Measurement of low valued resistance by Kelvin’s double bridge.
6 Measurement of insulation resistance by Megger.
7 Measurement of power & PF by Wattmeter for a load like fluorescent
lamp.
8 Measurement of Circuit Parameter using
8.1 Wien Bridge
8.3 Schering Bridge
Course Outcome
At the end of 1. Demonstrate operation of single phase transformer, DC and AC
the course machines.
student will 2. Do maintenance on transformer, DC and AC machine.
be able to: 3. Make use of galvanometer, PMMC, MI, wattmeter, watt-hour meter,
multimeter etc.
4. Measure electric voltage, resistance, current, power and energy.
inductance.
Semester : III
Course Title : Circuit Theory Lab
Number of : 1.5 (L:0, T:0, P:3)
Credits
Prerequisite : Idea on basic Circuit components
Course : PC
Category
Course Objective
• To maintain electrical systems applying AC and DC circuit fundamentals.
List of Experiment to be performed

1 Using voltmeter, ammeter, multimeter to prove KCL and KVL.
2 Experimentally prove Thevenin’s Theorem. For that, calculate Thevenin
voltage and Thevenin resistance of a composite circuit and using those
values make Thevenin Equivalent circuit and find load current or voltage of
original circuit and Thevenin equivalent Circuit. Use voltmeter, ammeter,
multimeter to take readings.
3 Experimentally prove Norton’s Theorem. For that, calculate Norton Current
and Norton resistance of a composite circuit and using those values make
Equivalent circuit and find load current or voltage of original circuit and
Norton equivalent Circuit. Use voltmeter, ammeter, multimeter to take
readings.
4 Experimentally prove Maximum Power Transfer Theorem. For thar,
calculate power dissipated by load resistance by changing load resistance
of a composite circuit and show that Maximum power is transferred from
source to load when source resistance is equal to load resistance.
5 Experimentally prove Superposition Theorem.
6 Determine A.C voltage response across different components and current
response in given R, L, C Series circuit. Use Multimeter and Oscilloscope
to take readings. Draw phasor diagrams with readings.
7 Determine A.C voltage across different components and current response
in given R, L, C parallel circuit. Use Multimeter and Oscilloscope to take
readings. Draw phasor diagram with the readings.
8 Using variable frequency supply check the resonance condition of any
arbitrary series R-L-C circuit
9 Using variable frequency supply check the resonance of an arbitrary
parallel R-L-C Circuit
10 Design and implement of a Series RLC resonant circuit for a given
frequency.
11 Design and implement of a parallel RLC resonant circuit for a given
frequency.
12 Design and implement of a protype LPF for a given frequency. Check the
response in CRO.
13 Design and implement of a protype HPF for a given frequency. Check the
response in CRO.
Course Outcome
At the end of 1. Prove network theorems experimentally.
the course 2. Make use of ammeter, voltmeter, multimeter, CRO, function generator.
student will 3. Calculate and analyse circuit parameter on RLC circuits.
be able to: 4. Design and analyse filter circuit
5. Design and analysis of resonance in series and parallel RLC circuit.
6. Troubleshoot problems related to single phase A.C series and parallel
circuits.
Semester : III
Course Title : Programming in C Lab
Number of Credits : 1.5 (L:0, T:0, P:3)
Prerequisite : Programming concept in C
Course Objective
❖ To make students as a worthy programmer by getting idea on
basic, looping, branching, structure, pointer, array etc.
List of Programs to be performed ( At least 20 Programs )

Write program and check output to achieve following:
1 Display your name 10 times on monitor.
2 Find biggest of given three number.
3 Calculate area of circle
4 Print the number if it is negative.
5 Program to check if the number is odd or even.
6 Print value from 1 to 10.
7 Print even numbers from 1 to 10.
8 Print summation of given numbers until the given number is 0.
9 Print numbers 1 to 30 which are multiple of 3.
10 Find roots of a quadratic equation.
11 Find whether a given number is Palindrome number.
12 Print sum of first n number.
13 Write program to find Fibonacci series.
14 Find whether given number is prime or not.
15 Find factorial of any number.
16 Check the given number is strong number or not.
17 Find Strong number in a given range of numbers.
18 Find sum of all digits from a positive integer.
19 Convert a decimal number into its binary.
20 Find largest element in an array.
21 Sort array elements in ascending/descending order
22 Take one employee record as input and display it on monitor using
structure.
23 Find sum of two numbers using pointers.
24 Find biggest of two numbers using pointers.
25 Swapping of two numbers using call by value and call by reference
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Apply looping and branching concept in programming.
course student will 2. Apply array, pointer and structure to write program.
be able to: 3. Debug and troubleshoot any programming in C
Note:
After 2nd Semester, for Internship-1, students are required to be involved in Inter / Intra Institutional
activities viz – Training and simulation program with different Institutes like Workshop of ITI / Other
polytechnics / other Technical Institutes, Soft Skill training organized by Training and Placement Cell,
Contribution at innovation /entrepreneurship cell of the Institute, Participation in workshop / competition,
learning at Department Lab / Institutional workshop etc.
After completion of Internship, the student should prepare a comprehensive report to indicate what he/she
has observed and learnt in the training period. The student should prepare final report on the assigned topics.
The training report should be signed by the Industrial Supervisor / Internship Faculty Mentor / HOD.
Seminar must be arranged for the students based on his/her training report, before an internal committee
constituted by the concerned department of the Institute. It needs to follow general guidelines, if any, in
this regard.
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Food Processing Technology

[FPT]
Revised 2022
PROPOSED DETAILS SYLLABUS FOR THE PART - II (2ND YEARS, 3RD SEMESTER)
OF THE FULL TIME DIPLOMA COURSE IN FOOD PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY
WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL &VOCATIONAL EDUCATION

AND SKILL DEVELOPMENT
TEACHING & EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR DIPLOMA IN ENGINEERING COURSES
COURSE NAME: FOOD PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY
COURSE CODE: FPT
SEMESTER: THIRD
Sl. Category of Code Course Title Hours Per Total Credit Full Internal ESE
No Course No Week Contact Marks
Hours
Per Week
L P
1 Program Core FPTPC Food Microbiology 2 0 2 2 100 40 60

Course 201
2 Program Core FPTPC Chemistry of Food 2 0 2 2 100 40 60
Course 203
3 Program Core FPTPC Unit Operation of Chemical 3 0 3 3 100 40 60
Course 205 Engineering-I
4 Program Core FPTPC Engineering 2 0 2 2 100 40 60
Course 207 Thermodynamics and
Chemical Kinetics
5 Program Core FPTPC Fundamental Chemistry 2 0 2 2 100 40 60
Course 209
6 Program Core FPTPC Technology of Food 2 0 2 2 100 40 60
Course 211 Preservation
7 Program Core FPTPC Food Microbiology Lab. 0 3 3 1.5 100 60 40

Course 213
8 Program Core FPTPC Chemistry of Food Lab. 0 4 4 2 100 60 40
Course 215
9 Program Core FPTPC Unit Operation of Chemical 0 3 3 1.5 100 60 40
Course 217 Engineering-I Lab.
10 Program Core FPTPC Food Preservation Lab. 0 4 4 2 100 60 40
Course 219
11 0 0 0 1 100 100 0
Internship SI201 Internship-I
TOTAL 13 14 27 21* 1100 580 520
FULL MARKS-1100 (Internal Marks = 580; ESE Marks = 520)
1
Name of the Course: Diploma in Food Processing Technology
Category: Program Core Semester: Third

Code No.: FPTPC201 Theory: 100 Marks
Course Title: Food Microbiology Examination Scheme:
i) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration: 17 weeks (Total hours per week = 2)
Total lecture class/week: 2 hours ii)Internal Assessment:40 Marks
[ Class test: 20 Marks
Home assignments: 10 Marks
Credit: 2 Class attendance: 10 Marks]
Pass Criterion: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (pass marks) in both internal assessment and end
semester examination separately.
1. Objective:
It is essential to acquire the knowledge of Microorganism, their culture techniques, microbial

growth and also the concepts of preventing the growth of bacteria by means of sterilization and
pasteurization for proper preservation and processing of food. The course will introduce students to
the essential concepts of understanding microbes and their morphology, preparation of culture,
growth nutrition, methods of prevention from contamination of food and Food borne diseases and
its control.
Unit Unit Name Topics and Sub-topics Teaching Hours
Unit 1 Study of Microscope 1.1 Definition and classification of microscope, 03

working principle of light-field, dark-field
microscope, Types of electron microscopes (only
Classification), Difference between optical and
electron microscope.
1.2 Function of different part of light microscope,
importance of numerical aperture, resolving power,
immersion objective, depth of focus, compensating
eyepiece, condensers of microscope.
Unit 2 Staining Technique 2.1 Definition of dye, acidic and basic dyes, mode of 03
action of dyes, importance of chromospheres.
2
2.2 Define stain, types of stain, Basic principle of simple
and gram staining process, mordant and its action,
spore staining of bacteria.
Unit 3 Bacterial Kingdom 3.1 Characteristic of Prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cell, 08

definition of Bacteria, Classification of bacteria
based on (size, shape, arrangement, flagella).
3.2 Morphology of bacteria (internal structure of flagella,

pilli, capsule, cell wall, cell membrane, nucleus).
Cell wall structure of gram positive and gram-
negative bacteria and their differences.
3.3 Binary fission of bacteria, Generation Time,
bacterial growth cycle, Bacterial nutrition,
Classification of bacteria based on nutritional
requirement (lithotrophs, organotrophs, autotrophs,
heterotrophs, facultative), Intrinsic and Extrinsic
factors affect the growth of bacteria (pH,
temperature, oxygen, humidity, nutrient)
Classification of bacteria based on pH,
temperature, oxygen requirement.
3.4 Definition and types of spores, sporulation process,
spore staining technique.
3.5 Industrial use of bacteria.
Unit-4 Morphology of other 4.1 Definition, classification, morphology of fungi, 03
Microbes yeast, molds, algae, structure of hyphae, structure of
yeast.
4.2 Budding of yeast, Reproduction process of fungi.
4.3 Industrial importance of yeast and molds.
4.4 Morphology and classification of bacteriophage.
Unit 5 Culture Media 5.1 Classification and preparation of growth medium for 03
bacteria, yeast, mold.
5.2 Techniques of serial dilution, pure culture, mixed

culture, slant culture, liquid broth culture.
5.3 Bacterial count by direct and indirect method, pour

plate, spread plate and streak-plate method of
isolation.
Unit 6 Thermal inactivation 6.1 Concept of thermal inactivation of microbes, 03
sterilization process (dry heat and moist heat),
fractional sterilization or arnoldization. working
principle of autoclave.
6.2 Pasteurization process, Types of pasteurization

process based on variation of time temperature.
Phosphatase test, MBRT Test.
6.3 Determination and importance of TDT, lethal rate,

F, Z and D values.
Unit 7 Disinfection and 7.1 Inhibition of bacteria by chemical method using 02

disinfectants phenol, minerals, alcohol, halogen and dyes.
3
7.2 Inhibition of bacteria by using UV light, desiccation,
osmotic pressure, gaseous agent, fumigation and
sanitization.
Unit 8 Microbiology of Food 8.1 Food borne diseases and its control, Main causes of 05
and hygiene concepts food borne disease, Types of Food Contaminants,
Bacterial infection and intoxication, Disease Caused
by bacteria (Botulism, E-coli infection,
Salmonellosis, Staphylococcal illness), Disease
Caused by Toxin (Botulinum toxin, Staphylococcus
toxin, Afalatoxin, Mycotoxin).
8.2 Microbial group associated with fish, meat, poultry,

egg; fruits and vegetable products like jam, jelly,
sauce, juice; cereal products like bread, biscuits,
confectionary; milk and milk products.

Grand Total: 34
3. Course Outcome: The students of the course should be able to
i) CO1: Explain the working principle of different types of microscope and staining techniques.
ii) CO2: Describe the morphological features of different types of microorganism and their growths.
iii) CO3: Explain the method of thermal inactivation of microorganism and mode of action of different disinfectants.
iv) CO4: Describe the causes of different Food borne diseases and its control.
v) CO5: To identify particular microbes associated with different foods and causes of spoilages.
4. Suggested Home Assignment/Student Activities: (At least Two assignments)
Other than practice work in classroom, students should conduct the following suggested activities in group or
individual, which are suitable for this subject as per instruction of the subject teacher.
Topics for Home assignment

Sl. No. Marks
1. Explain Function of different part of light microscope. 5
2. Illustrate the importance of numerical aperture and resolving power of microscope. 5
3. Classify stain with example. 5
4. Classify bacteria based on (size, shape, arrangement). 5
5. Classify bacteria based on flagella. 5
6. Explain Morphological feature of a bacteria. 5
7. Illustrate Bacterial growth curve. 5
8. Classify Bacteria based on nutritional requirement. 5
9. Classify Bacteria based on pH, temperature, oxygen requirement. 5
10. Illustrate sporulation process. 5
11. Explain structure of yeast and budding process. 5
12. Explain Reproduction process of fungi. 5
13. Differentiate Lytic and lysogenic cycle of bacteriophage. 5
14. Illustrate techniques of serial dilution. 5
15. Explain Bacterial count by direct and indirect method. 5
16. Describe process of thermal inactivation of microbes. 5
17. Differentiate types of pasteurization process. 5
18. Explain the importance of TDT, lethal rate, F, Z and D values. 5
4
19. Describe process of inhibition of bacteria by chemical method. 5
20. Describe process of inhibition of bacteria by physical method. 5
21. Define Food borne diseases and its control. 5
22. Define Bacterial infection and intoxication with example. 5
23. Describe Disease Caused by bacteria. 5
24. Describe Disease Caused by Toxin. 5
25. List out microbial group associated with fish, meat, poultry, egg. 5
26. List out microbial group associated with fruits and vegetable products like jam, jelly, sauce, juice. 5
27. List out microbial group associated with cereal products like bread, biscuits, confectionary. 5
28. List out microbial group associated with milk and milk products. 5
(Full Marks = 20)

Distribution of internal questions
(Remember) (understand) (Apply & above)
Total
Class Test - 1 20
Class Test - 2 20
6. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [60 marks]
A: Multiple Choice Type Questions (Carrying 1 mark each)

Group Unit To be Set To be Answered Total Marks
A1 1 & 2 &3 07
A2 4 & 5 &6 04 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 7&8 04
Total: 15 10 10
B: Fill-in the Blank Type Questions (Carrying 1 mark each)
B1 1 & 2 &3 07
B2 4 & 5 &6 04 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 7&8 04
Total: 15 10 10
C: Short Answer Type Questions (Carrying 1 mark each)
C1 1 & 2 &3 07
C2 4 & 5 &6 04 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 7&8 04
Total: 15 10 10
Sub-Total [A+B+C]: 30
D: Subjective Type Questions (Carrying 2 marks each)
D1 1 & 2 &3 05
D2 4 & 5 &6 03 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 7&8 02
Total: 10 06 12
E: Subjective Type Questions (Carrying 6 marks each)
5
E1 1 & 2 &3 04
E2 4 & 5 &6 03 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 7&8 02
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
Total [A+B+C+D+E]: 60
i. Microbiology by Pelczar& Chang, Publisher: Mc Graw Hill Education.

ii. Food Microbiology by Fraizer& Foster, Burgess Publisher.
iii. Industrial Microbiology by Prescott & Dunn, AVI Publishing Company.
iv. Food Microbiology by M.R. Adams & M.O. Moss, New age International.
v. Microbiology by S.K. Purohit, Publisher: Agrobios (India).
vi. Bacteriology by S. J. Salle, Publisher: McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc.
vii. Microbiology by R.P.Sing, Publisher: Kalyani Publications.
viii. Laboratory Manual of Food Microbiology by Fraizer& Foster.
ix. Practical Food Microbiology & Technology by H. H. Weoser& W. J. Mountney, AVI.
6
Course Title: Chemistry of Food Examination Scheme:
Duration: 17 weeks (Total hours per week = 2)
Total lecture class/week: 2 hours ii) Internal Assessment: 40 Marks
Credit: 2 Class attendance: 10 Marks]
1. Objective:
For a professional in the field of food processing, the fundamental knowledge of biochemistry comprising
bio-molecules, bio-energetic. Moreover, a food technologist should have the knowledge of basic
components of food, their characteristics and applications. After successful completion of this subject the
student will be able to understand the definition, nomenclature, classification, structure, properties and
physiological functions of water, carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, vitamins and minerals. Students will also
able to know the role of pigments, flavors, enzyme in food processing.
Unit 1 Introduction 1.1 Introduction to various components present in foods: 01

their occurrence, common sources and examples from
each category.
Unit 2 Water 2.1 Significance of water content in foods, chemical 02

structure of water and its physical transformation to
ice and moisture vapour; Types of water and its
presence in foods.
2.2 Water activity and shelf-life of foods; Quantitative

analysis of moisture in foods (low, medium or high
moisture foods), measurement of water activity.
Unit 3 Carbohydrate 3.1 Classification – Structure and physicochemical 06

properties of important monosaccharides (Glucose,
7
fructose, galactose), monosaccharides reaction with
phenyl hydrazine, oxidation, reduction, ring
formation, mutarotation; disaccharides (sucrose,
lactose, moltose).
3.2 Source and property of complex carbohydrate

(polysaccharides, oligosaccharides, gummy matter,
soluble fibre, insoluble or crude fibre), concept of
different polysaccharides (starch, glycogen,
cellulose, hemi cellulose, pectic substances, gum
arabic); Structure of starch (amylose, amylopectin).
3.3 Analysis of carbohydrate (soluble and insoluble).

Reducing and non-reducing sugar: concept and their
estimation.
3.4 Basic idea about Gelatinization, Gel formation,

Retrogradation, Crystallization, Caramelization,
Maillard reaction.
Unit 4 Protein 4.1 Basic unit of protein: amino acids (type, 06

nomenclature), essential amino acid, peptides.
4.2 Structural classification of protein, physical and

chemical properties of protein; Denaturation and
coagulation of protein.
4.5 Extraction, isolation and purification of proteins;

quantitative estimation methods of protein (kjeldhal
Method).
4.6 Separation of amino acid by chromatographic

method. (Paper, thin layer, liquid column
chromatography).
Unit 5 Fats and oil 5.1 Structural classification of fatty acids, nomenclature 06
of fatty acids, cis and trans fats; importance of fat in
our body, essential fatty acids, sources of vegetable
oil and animal fat.
5.2 Physical properties of fats/oil – melting and boiling

point, specific gravity, density; Chemical constants
of fats (Acid value, Per-oxide value, Saponification
number, Iodine value, Reichert-Meissl number);
comparison of physical and chemical properties in
different vegetable oil.
5.3 Concepts of rancidity and reversion of fats/oil, fat

spoilage. Basic idea about plasticity, hydrogenation,
winterization, interesterification.
5.4 Estimation of total fat by solvent extraction method

and analysis of fats/oil.
8
Unit 6 Vitamins and 6.1 Vitamins and minerals as micronutrients- their 02
minerals sources, occurrences and physiological functions in
body, deficiency disorder, provitamins A and D,
Vitamins as antioxidants.
6.2 Extraction, isolation and estimation of vitamins (A,

C, Thiamine, Riboflavin) and minerals (sodium,
potassium, Iron,Calcium).
Unit 7 Pigments and 7.1 Pigments – definition, sources; plant pigments – 02

Flavours types of pigments, functional group in chemical
structure (carotenoid and chlorophyll), Properties,
effect of processing and storage; animal pigments –
types and basic structure (haemoglobin and
myoglobin), properties, permitted colour in Food.
7.2 Types of natural and synthetic flavouring agents,

their sources and uses.
Unit-8 Enzymes 8.1 Enzymes Concepts, Classification, Physico- 05

chemical nature, Mechanism of enzyme action,
Enzyme kinetics (MME), Factors affecting enzyme
activity.
8.2 Enzyme inhibition (No kinetics), Enzyme
specificity, Co-factors, Basic concepts onlysozymes
and Isozymes, Enzyme unit, Turn over number,
Allosteric enzyme.
Grand Total: 34
i) CO1: To explain different components present in food matrix.

ii) CO2: To outline sources, physical, chemical properties of food components.
iii) CO3: To explain the fundamentals of pigments, flavoring agents and enzymes used in food processing.
iv) CO4: To identify the deficiency syndrome related to vitamins and minerals.
v) CO5: To outline estimation methods of chemical components present in food matrix and their
significance.
4. Suggested Home Assignment/Student Activities:(At least two assignments)
Other than practice work in classroom, students should conduct the following suggested activities in
group or individual, which are suitable for this subject as per instruction of the subject teacher:
Topics for Home assignment

Sl. No. Marks
1. Write down chemical structure of water and its physical transformation to ice and vapour. 5
2. Explain Water activity and shelf-life of foods. 5
3. Classify carbohydrate and draw structures. 5
4. Explain monosaccharide’s reaction with phenyl hydrazine. 5
5. Explain Oxidation and reduction of monosaccharides. 5
9
6. Classify Polysaccharides and draw structures. 5
7. Classify disaccharides and draw structures. 5
8. Explain Pectic substances. 5
9. Write down Structure of starch and its properties. 5
10. Explain theory of Estimation of Reducing and non-reducing sugar. 5
11. Explain Gelatinization and Retrogradation of starch. 5
12. Explain Caramelization and Maillard reaction. 5
13. Classify Amino acids and draw structures. 5
14. Classify of protein on the basis of Structure. 5
15. Write down Physical and chemical properties of protein. 5
16. Explain denaturation and coagulation of protein. 5
17. Explain theory of Estimation of protein by Kjeldhal Method. 5
18. Illustrate theory of separate amino acid by paper chromatographic method. 5
19. Illustrate theory of separate amino acid by thin layer chromatographic method. 5
20. Classify fatty acids with examples. 5
21. Write down Physical properties of fats/oil. 5
22. Write down Chemical constants of fats/oil. 5
23. Explain rancidity and reversion of fats/oil. 5
24. Describe hydrogenation, winterization, interesterification of fats. 5
25. Write down Sources, occurrences, physiological functions, deficiency disorder of vitamin. 5
26. Explain technique of extraction, isolation and estimation of vitamins C. 5
27. Explain technique of extraction, isolation and estimation of Thiamine. 5
28. Categorize different types of pigments. 5
29. Illustrate the application of Permitted colour in food processing. 5
30. Illustrate the application of natural and synthetic flavouring agents in food processing. 5
31. Explain mechanism of enzyme action. 5
32. Explain enzyme kinetics (MME). 5
33. Explain Enzyme inhibition technique. 5
(Full Marks = 20)

Total
Class Test - 1 20
Class Test - 2 20
10
6. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: (Full Marks = 60)

A1 1&2&3 07
A2 4&5 04 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 6 & 7 &8 04
Total: 15 10 10
B1 1&2&3 07
B2 4&5 04 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 6 & 7 &8 04
Total: 15 10 10
C1 1&2&3 07
C2 4&5 04 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 6 & 7 &8 04
Total: 15 10 10
D1 1&2&3 05
D2 4&5 02 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 6 & 7 &8 03
Total: 10 06 12
E1 1&2&3 04
E2 4&5 02 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 6 & 7 &8 03
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
11
i. Principles of Biochemistry by Albert L. Leninger, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi.
ii. Biochemistry Laboratory Techniques by Sterling Chaykin, Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd.
iii. Foods Facts & Principles by N. Shakuntala Manay & M. Shadaksharaswamy, New Age International.
iv. Food Science by N.N. Potter, CBS Publishers & Distributors Pvt Ltd, India.
v. Food Chemistry by L. H. Meyer, Publisher: Reinhold.
vi. Food Analysis & Practice by Y. Pamaranz, Publisher: AVI.
vii. Text Book of Biochemistry by Webb, Todd, Mason, Macmillan Publishing Company.
viii. Principles of Food Science Vol. I by Fennema, Karrel.
ix. Food Science by B. Srilaxmi, New Age international.
x. Principles of Food Science / Karek & L.M. Delker.
xi. Handbook of Analysis and Quality Control for Fruit and Vegetable Products by Ranganna, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education.
xii. Food Analysis / R. Lees / C.R.C Press Ltd.
12
Course Title: Unit Operation of Chemical Examination Scheme:
Engineering-I i) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration: 17 weeks (Total hours per week = 3) (End Semester Examination)
ii) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
Total lecture class/week: 3 hours [ Class test: 20 Marks
Credit: 3
1. Objective:
This course will provide the students the knowledge of the principles and equipment of the various
mechanical operations, which include fluid and solid handling and their transportation and physical
separation techniques. The knowledge of this subject will have great significance in chemical industries
in regards to controlling the operation of the equipment and regulating the production of the plant.
Unit 1 Dimensional Analysis 1.1Concepts, Aims, Dimensionless numbers (Prandtl 01

Number, Nusselt Number) and their physical
significance.
Unit 2 Size Reduction, 2.1 Size Reduction: Reasons/Benefits of size reduction, 08

Screen analysis and forces used in size reduction, criteria of size reduction,
Material Handling Factors affecting comminution, comminution laws:
Kick’s law, Rittinger’s law and Bond’s law and their
limitations. Crushing efficiency and power
consumption,
2.2 Size reduction equipment: working principle of

Primary crusher – Jaw crusher, Secondary crusher – Roll
crusher (smooth roll) its selection and capacity, Grinder
– Construction and operation of Hammer mill, Ball mill
and their materials suitability, Close circuit and Open
circuit operation. (No mathematical problems and
mathematical expressions)
13
2.3 Screen analysis: Separation based on size, Type of
screens, ideal screen, real screen, screen effectiveness,
differential and cumulative analysis, screen capacity.
Factors affecting the screening process/sieving process.
2.4 Screening equipment: stationary screens, vibrating

screens, trammels screen, Rotap sieve shaker
2.5 Classification of various material handling

equipment-conveyors, elevators. Pneumatic conveying,
conveyor belts, conveyance of food grain and powder in
screw and vibratory conveyors, advantage and
disadvantage of screw conveyor, Bucket elevators –
types of buckets, Chain conveyor and its type’s chain
pull conveyor. (No mathematical problems and
Unit 3 Mixing 4.1 Mixing and agitation: Mixing terminology (agitating, 06

kneading, blending, and homogenizing), Units and
dimensions, Principles of agitation, Impellers types,
flow patterns: prevention of swirling/vortex, draft tubes,
Mixing effectiveness and Mixing index. (No
mathematical problems and mathematical expressions)
4.2 Mixing and agitation equipment: Mixers for liquids

of low or moderate viscosity (Paddle agitators, turbine
agitators and propeller agitators), mixers for high
viscosity pastes (horizontal mixer, planetary mixture,
sigma mixer), mixers for dry solids (tumbler mixer and
vertical screw mixer) (No mathematical problems and
Unit 4 Filtration, 5.1 Filtration: Filtration terminology (feed slurry, 08

Sedimentation and filtrate, filter medium, filter aids, filter cake and filter)
Centrifugation Theory and principle of solid liquid filtration, cake
filters, discontinuous pressure filter: principle and
working of filter press, compressible and
incompressible filter cakes, filter-medium resistance,
constant pressure filtration, constant rate filtration,
principles of cake filtration, pressure drop through filter
cake, cake washing and filtration cycle, continuous
vacuum filter: principle and working of rotary drum
filters, Filtration of solid from gas – bag filter. (No
mathematical problems and mathematical expressions)
5.2 Sedimentation: Principle of Sedimentation, Factors

affecting Sedimentation, sedimentation zones, batch
sedimentation, rate of sedimentation. Equipment for
sedimentation
5.3 Centrifugation: Preparative Centrifuges:Differential

Centrifugation, Density Gradient Centrifugation,
Applications, Analytical Centrifuges:
Ultracentrifugation, Working and Applications.
Different types of centrifuges (tubular bowl centrifuge,
Disc centrifuge, Basket centrifuge) (No mathematical
problems and mathematical expressions)
14
Unit 5 Mass Transfer 6.1 Mass Transfer: Introduction, Basic concepts of 07
Concentrations, Velocities and Fluxes, Mode of Mass
Transfer – By Diffusion, By Convection, By Change of
Phase.
6.2 Diffusion: Steady state molecular diffusion in gases

and liquids, Fick’s first Law of diffusion, Fick’s second
Law of diffusion, Correlation for diffusivity in gases and
liquids for binary systems, Diffusion in solids, Types of
solid diffusion. (No mathematical problems only
6.3 Interphase Mass Transfer: Equilibrium curve,

Diffusion between phases, Overall mass transfer
coefficient, two film theory in mass transfer, Steady
state concurrent and counter current Process. (No
mathematical problems only mathematical expressions)
Unit 6 Distillation 7.1 Distillation: Introduction to distillation tower, 03

boiling point diagram, concept of flux ratio, azeotrope,
Batch Distillation, flash distillation, Steam distillation
(No problem required)
Unit 7 Absorption and 8.1 Absorption: Introduction to absorption, The 06

Adsorption mechanism of absorption, factor effecting absorption,
Absorption equipment, Limiting gas-liquid ratio,
Flooding, loading in packed column, packing material,
two film theory of gas-liquid absorption, Gas film
coefficient, Liquid film coefficient. (No problem
required)
8.2 Adsorption: Types of adsorptions, nature of

adsorbents, Adsorption isotherms (Freundlich,
Langmuir, BET adsorption equations) Surface Films,
Operation of adsorption columns. Batch and continuous
operations, Breakthrough analysis. (No problem
required)
Unit 8 Liquid-liquid 9.1 Liquid-liquid extraction: Introduction to Extraction, 03

extraction Liquid-liquid equilibria, Triangular diagram, Selectivity
and choice of solvents, extraction equipment [ batch
(single stage, multi-stage), continuous (single stage,
multi-stage)] (No problem required)
Unit 9 Crystallization 10.1 Crystallization: Principles of Crystallization- Super 03

saturation, Nucleation-Crystal growth, Crystal size
distribution, Equipment for crystallization: batch
crystallizer, Swenson Walker crystallizer, scraped
surface continuous crystallizer).
Grand Total: 51
15
i) CO1: Apply the concept of dimensionless number in solving related problem.

ii)CO2: Illustrate the mechanism of size reduction and screen analysis method.
iii)
CO3: Identify the appropriate material handling equipment required for specific raw materials and end products.
iv)CO4: Categories different mixing equipments and separation techniques applicable to different food
processing operation.
v) CO5: Apply the concept of Mass Transfer in different process (Distillation, Absorption, Adsorption,
Liquid-liquid extraction, Crystallization).
4. Suggested Home Assignment/Student Activities:(At least Two assignments)

group or individual, which are suitable for this subject as per instruction of the subject teacher.
Sl. Topics for Home assignment

No. Marks
1. Apply the concept of dimensional analysis to show the following numbers are dimensionless- 5
a. Prandtl Number, b. Nusselt Number
2. Compare between Hammer Mill and Ball Mill. 5
3. Illustrate the advantages of size reduction. 5
4. Explain the working principle of Rotap Sieve shaker. 5
5. Illustrate the role of conveyors in food industries. 5
6. Classify the different mixing terminology. 5
7. Outline the principle of cake filtration. 5
8. Compare between vacuum filter and drum filter. 5
9. Illustrate the application of centrifugation in food processing. 5
10. Explain the different modes of mass transfer. 5
11. Explain the laws of diffusion. 5
12. Outline the basic differences between absorption and adsorption. 5
13. Explain the working principle of batch type extraction equipment. 5
14. Categorize different types of crystallizers. 5
15. Outline the diffusivity of gases and liquids for binary systems. 5
16. Illustrate the theory of Interphase Mass Transfer. 5
17. Explain the principle of azeotropic distillation. 5
18. Compare between mixing and agitation. 5
19. Classify adsorption isotherms. 5
20. Explain two film theory of gas-liquid absorption. 5
21. Categorize different types of extractors. 5
22. Explain the working of rotary drum filters. 5
23. Explain the working principle of turbine agitators and propeller agitators. 5
24. Explain the working principle of planetary mixture. 5
25. Explain the working principle of Disc centrifuge. 5
26. Explain the working principle of Swenson Walker crystallizer.
16
(Full Marks = 20)

Total
Class Test - 1 20
Class Test - 2 20

A1 1&2&3 04
A2 4&5 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 6 & 7 & 8 &9 06
Total: 15 10 10
B1 1&2&3 04
B2 4&5 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 6 & 7 & 8 &9 06
Total: 15 10 10
C1 1&2&3 04
C2 4&5 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 6 & 7 & 8 &9 06
Total: 15 10 10
D1 1&2&3 03
D2 4&5 03 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 6 & 7 & 8 &9 04
Total: 10 06 12
E1 1&2&3 02
E2 4&5 03 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 6 & 7 & 8 &9 04
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
17
i. Unit operations of Chemical Engineering, 4th ed. by McCabe and Smith, McGraw-Hill Book Co.Ltd., New
York and Kogakusha Co. Ltd., Tokyo.
ii. Introduction to Chemical Engineering by Badger &Banchero, McGraw-Hill Book Co. Ltd., NewYork and
Kogakusha Co. Ltd., Tokyo.
iii. Introduction to Chemical Engineering by Ghosal, Sanyal and Dutta, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
iv. Chemical Engineering, Vol. 2 & 5 by Coulson & Richardson, Pergamon Press, Oxford.
v. Principles of Unit Operations, 2nd ed. by Foust & others, John Wiley & Sons Inc., London.
vi. Mass Transfer Operations by Robert E. Treybal, MGH, International Student Edition.
vii. Principles of Mass Transfer and Separation Processes by Binay K. Dutta, Phi Learning Private Ltd.
viii. Narayanan C.M.& Bhattacharya B.C. “Mechanical opeartions for chemical engineers”, Khanna.
ix. R.S.Hiremath & A.Kulkarni. Mechanical Operations Vol.I, Everest Publishing House.
x. Fundamentals of Food Engineering, D. G. Rao. PHI.
18
Course Title: Engineering Thermodynamics and Examination Scheme:
Chemical Kinetics i) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration: 17 weeks (Total hours per week = 2) (End Semester Examination)
Total lecture class/week: 2 hours ii)Internal Assessment: 40 Marks
Credit: 2 Home assignments: 10 Marks
1. Objective:
To state definition of system, surrounding, closed and open system, extensive and intensive properties and
other thermodynamics properties. Study of energy relationship involving heat, mechanical energy and other
forms of energy. Calculate changes in kinetic, potential, enthalpy internal energy and free energy.
Applications and limitations of first law and second law of thermodynamics.
To understand the concept of rate, average rate, instantaneous rate, rate of change associated with chemical
change. Determine rate law of chemical change based on experimental data. Identify the reaction order for a
chemical change.
To develop an ability to observe, analyze and to interpret objectively and to make rational decisions to solve
problems in the field of thermodynamics and chemical kinetic.
Unit Unit Name Topics and Sub-topics Teaching

Hours
Unit 1 Fundamentals of 1.1 Concept of thermodynamics, Macroscopic and microscopic 04
thermodynamics view. The scope of thermodynamics. Thermodynamic
systems and surroundings.
1.2 Concepts of force, properties, energy, temperature,
pressure, heat, work, equilibrium, phase, process, Internal
Energy. Different units for measurement of heat, energy,
work done. Knowledge of Continuum and macroscopic
approach; thermodynamic systems (closed, open and
isolated); thermodynamic properties (like temperature,
pressure, internal energy etc.) and equilibrium (thermal
equilibrium);
1.3 state of a system, state postulate for simple compressible
substances, Properties of Substance: Intensive and Extensive
19
property; state diagrams, paths and processes on state
diagrams;
1.4 Concepts of Different thermodynamics processes
(isothermal, isobaric, isochoric, cyclic process etc.).
Calculation of work done for different thermodynamics
process.
Unit 2 First law of 2.1 First law of thermodynamics, thermodynamic state and state 04
thermodynamics and functions. mathematical statement of first law, the reversible
its applications and irreversible process. the adiabatic process. the constant
volume and constant pressure process.
2.2 Enthalpy, heat capacities and relation between them.
application of first law of thermodynamics.
Unit 3 Thermochemistry 3.1 Laws of thermochemistry (Hess’s law), Heat of reaction, Heat 03
of combustion, Heat of formation, Simple mathematical
problems related to it. Exothermic and endothermic
reactions.
Unit 4 Second law of 4.1 Limitations of first law, Statements of Second law of 12
thermodynamics Thermodynamics (Clausius statement, Kelvin statement,
Plan’s proposition), Mathematical expression of second
law
4.2 Concepts of heat engines, heat pump, refrigerator, Carnot
Theorem and Carnot Cycle, Efficiency, Refrigeration
Cycle, Coefficient of Performance.
4.3 Entropy and its changes involving different processes, T-S
diagram, Available work, Work function, Free energy.
4.4 Analysis of second law, T-ds relations, Helmholtz and
Gibbs functions, Gibbs relations, Maxwell relations, Joule-
Thomson coefficient, coefficient of volume expansion,
adiabatic and isothermal compressibility, Clapeyron and
Clapeyron-Clausius equations. Third law of
thermodynamics. (Concept only).
Unit 5 Psychometry 5.1 Dalton’s and Amagat’s law of ideal gas mixtures, Air-Water 02
vapour mixtures, Specific and Relative humidity, Dew point,
Dry and Wet bulb temperature, Adiabatic saturation
temperature.
5.2 Construction of Psychometric chart, terms, relations. Uses of
Log-Log, Semi-log graph papers. Application of
psychometry in food industries.
20
Unit 6 Chemical Kinetics 4.1 Rate of a chemical reaction (Average and instantaneous), 05
factors affecting rate of reaction: concentration, temperature,
catalyst.
4.2 Order and molecularity of a reaction, rate law and specific
rate constant, understanding of zero, first, second, fractional
order reactions with example. Integrated rate equations and
half-life (only for zero and first order reactions).
4.3 Elementary and Non-elementary reactions, Simple and
complex reactions, concept of collision theory (elementary
idea, no mathematical derivation), activation energy,
Arrhenius equation. (no problem)

Grand Total: 34
i) CO1: Know the basic concepts of thermodynamic parameters and all the laws of thermodynamic.
ii)CO2: Illustrate the different thermodynamic relationships and their applications
iii)
CO3: Apply the concepts of different thermodynamic relationships in thermochemistry.
iv)CO4: Comprehend the different Psychometric properties of air water vapour mixtures, their
relationships and applications.
v) CO5: Understand the basic concept of chemical kinetics, integrated rate laws and rate expression of
different orders.
4. Suggested Home Assignment/Student Activities:(At least two assignments)

Unit
Topics for Home assignment Marks
No.
1. Illustrate all the thermodynamic systems with example. 5
2. Describe all the thermodynamic processes. (With respect to pressure, temperature, volume, 5
reversibility).
3. Write down relation between heat capacities. 5
4. Outline Work done in reversible and Irreversible processes. 5
5. Write down heat of reaction of a certain exothermic reaction with the help of a proper reaction. 5
6. Describe Refrigeration Cycle. 5
7. Describe Carnot Cycle. 5
8. Explain Entropy and its changes with T-S diagram. 5
9. Write down relation between Helmholtz and Gibbs function. 5
10. Explain of Psychometric chart with all properties of Air- Water -Vapour mixture. 5
11. Write down half -life period of a zero-order reaction with example. 5
12. Illustrate Activation energy with related equation. 5
13. Compare Order and molecularity of a reaction. 5
14. Write down half -life period of a first order reaction with example. 5
15. Illustrate kinetic rate expression of first order reaction. 5
16. Illustrate kinetic rate expression of zero order reaction. 5
17. Write down statements of Second law of Thermodynamics with mathematical expression. 5
21
18. Categorize different thermodynamics processes. 5
19. Categorize different thermodynamic systems. 5
20. Write down statements of first law of Thermodynamics with mathematical expression. 5
(Full Marks = 20)

Total
Class Test - 1 20
Class Test - 2 20

A1 1&2 05
A2 3&4 06 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 5&6 04
Total: 15 10 10
B1 1&2 05
B2 3&4 06 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 5&6 04
Total: 15 10 10
C1 1&2 05
C2 3&4 06 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 5&6 04
Total: 15 10 10
D1 1&2 03
D2 3&4 04 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 5&6 03
Total: 10 06 12
E1 1&2 02
E2 3&4 05 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 5&6 02
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
22
i. Smith & Vanness, Thermodynamics for Chemical Engineers, MGH.
ii. A Text Book of Thermodynamics, R. K. Rajput; Laxmi Publication.
iii. Thermodynamics, S. C. Gupta; Pearson Education India.
iv. Richardson, J.F., Peacock, D.G.Coulson & Richardson’s Chemical Engineering- Volume
Asian Books Pvt. Ltd.
v. Levenspiel.O., Chemical Reaction Engineering, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
vi. Engineering Thermodynamics; P.K.Nag, Mc.grawhill.
vii. Physical Chemistry: Castellan, Narosa Publishing.
viii. Physical Chemistry, Moore, PHI.
ix. Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics by Pradeep Ahuja, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
x. Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics by Smith, Van Ness, Abbott, Mc Graw Hill Education
23
Course Title: Fundamental Chemistry Examination Scheme:
Duration: 17 weeks (Total hours per week = 2) i) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Total lecture class/week: 2 hours ii) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
Credit: 2 Home assignments: 10 Marks
1. Objective:
To achieve the key knowledge of Principles of various fields of chemistry including Physical, Inorganic
and Organic chemistry. To develop an ability to observe, analyze and to interpret objectively and to make
rational decisions to solve problems involving different fields of chemistry. To motivate students to think
independently for their own learning and apply the knowledge of chemistry in the field of Food
Processing Technology.

Hours
Unit 1 Solid state 1.1 Classification of solids based on different binding forces: 03
molecular, ionic, covalent and metallic solids, amorphous and
crystalline solids (elementary idea).
1.2 Unit cell in two dimensional and three-dimensional lattices,
calculation of density of unit cell, packing in solids, packing
efficiency, voids, number of atoms per unit cell in a cubic unit cell,
point defects, electrical and magnetic properties.
Unit 2 Liquid state 2.1 Different Physical properties of liquids: Density, vapour pressure, 03
surface tension and coefficient of viscosity and their determination.
2.2 Units and dimensions of density, surface tension, viscosity.
Temperature variation of viscosity of liquids and comparison with
that of gases.
Unit 3 Gaseous state 4.4 Different properties of gas. Charle’s law, Boyle’s law. Ideal gas 03
equation, absolute temperature, compressibility factor. (Simple
numerical problems.)
24
4.5 Van der Waals equation expressed in virial form and calculation of
Boyle temperature. Isotherms of real gases and their comparison
with van der Waals isotherms, continuity of states, critical state,
relation between critical constants and van der Waals constants,
law of corresponding states.
Unit 4 Solutions and 4.1 Strengths of solution (Normality, molarity, molality, g/lit), (Simple 06
Colligative numerical problems associated with strengths of solution.)
Properties: 4.2 Dilute solutions, Oswald’s dilution law, Degree of dissociation.
4.3 Colligative properties (relative lowering of vapour pressure,
elevation of boiling point, depression of freezing point, osmotic
pressure, determination of molecular masses using colligative
properties, abnormal molecular mass, Van't Hoff factor).
4.4 Raoult’s and Henry’s Laws and their applications (no mathematical
problem).
4.5 Concept of pH and pH scale. Understanding of buffer solution.
Functioning of buffer soln. (no mathematical problem)
4.6 Concept of Colloid and Emulsion (hydrophilic and hydrophobic).
Unit 5 Chemical 5.1 Concepts of chemical equilibrium, reversible and irreversible 02

Equilibrium reaction with examples, Types, characteristics.
5.2 Rate of a reaction, Active mass, Law of mass action, Equilibrium

Constants, interrelationship (Kp, Kc, Kx), Characteristics and
Importance (No mathematical problems).
Unit 6 Basics of Organic 6.1 General introduction to organic chemistry, classification and 06
Chemistry: IUPAC nomenclature of organic compounds.
6.2 Electronic displacements in a covalent bond: inductive effect,
electromeric effect, resonance and hyper conjugation.
6.3 Concepts of homolytic and heterolytic dissociation of a covalent
bond: free radicals, carbocations, carbanions, electrophiles and
nucleophiles,
6.4 Types of organic reactions (Elementary mechanism of Addition,
Elimination and Substitution reactions.) Examples of all reactions.
6.5 Understanding of different functional groups like Alcohols,
Phenols, Ethers, Ester, Amines, Amides, Alkyl halides, Epoxides,
Carbonyl Compounds, Carboxylic Acids and their Derivatives etc.
for both aliphatic and aromatic compounds. Examples of all
functional groups.
Unit 7 Aromatic 7.1 Aromaticity, Hückel’s rule, aromatic character of arenes, cyclic 03
Hydrocarbons carbocations/carbanions and heterocyclic compounds with suitable
examples.
7.2 Electrophilic aromatic substitution: halogenation, nitration,
sulphonation and Friedel-Craft’s alkylation/acylation with their
mechanism.
Unit 8 Stereochemistry 8.1 Discussion of chirality (chiral carbons, allenes) 04

8.2 Nomenclature (R/S, E/Z, D/L, d/l) (monodaccharide, amino acids,
fatty acids)
8.3 2-D representations (line drawings, Fischer projections, Haworth
projections) (monosaccharide)
8.4 Stereochemical terminology for sugars, amino acids.
25
8.5 identifying stereochemical relationships (enantiomers,
diastereomers, epimers, etc.)

Grand Total: 34

i) CO1: Explain the fundamentals and application of different chemicals and scientific theories of
organic, inorganic and physical chemistry.
ii) CO2: Interpret the evidences, reactivity and mechanism of various types of reactions.
iii) CO3: Solve different mathematical problems related to gas laws and strength of solution.
iv) CO4: Explain the relative spatial arrangement of molecules and their manipulation.
v) CO5: To identify different functional groups associated with food components.
4. Suggested Home Assignment/Student Activities: (At least Two assignments)

Unit
No.
1. Classify the different type of solids based on binding forces. 5
2. Explain two dimensional and three-dimensional lattices with example. 5
3. Compare between Density and Viscosity of a liquid. 5
4. Compare between Colloid and Emulsion. 5
5. Illustrate different gas laws with P-V isotherm. 5
6. Compare real gases isotherms and van der Waals isotherms. 5
7. Write down relation between critical constants and van der Waals constants. 5
8. Explain continuity of states and law of corresponding states. 5
9. Illustrate the application of elevation of boiling point and depression of freezing point in food processing. 5
10. Explain action of buffer solution to control the pH of a solution. 5
11. Illustrate mechanism of Addition /Elimination /Substitution reaction with proper examples. 5
12. Categorize different electronic displacements in a covalent bond. 5
13. Outline the different functional groups associated with aliphatic and aromatic compounds. 5
14. Explain Huckels rule with example. 5
15. Illustrate Electrophilic and nucleophilic reaction with example. 5
16. Illustrate Electrophilic aromatic substitution reaction with examples. 5
17. Illustrate Friedel-Craft’s alkylation/acylation reaction with mechanism. 5
18. Apply Fischer and Haworth projection of mono and di saccharide compound. 5
19. Compare Enantiomers, Diastereomers, Epimers with examples. 5
20. Apply concepts of D/L and d/l isomerism for mono saccharide. 5
21. Illustrate relationship of Kp, Kc, Kx for a reversible reaction. 5
26
(Full Marks = 20)

Total
Class Test - 1 20
Class Test - 2 20

A1 1&2&3 06
A2 4&5 03 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 6&7&8 06
Total: 15 10 10
B1 1&2&3 06
B2 4&5 03 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 6&7&8 06
Total: 15 10 10
C1 1&2&3 06
C2 4&5 03 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 6&7&8 06
Total: 15 10 10
D1 1&2&3 03
D2 4&5 03 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 6&7&8 04
Total: 10 06 12
E1 1&2&3 03
E2 4&5 03 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 6&7&8 03
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
27
i. Physical Chemistry by P. C. Rakshit, Sarat Book House.

ii. Inorganic Chemistry by R. L. Madan, G. D. Tuli, S.Chand & Company Ltd.
iii. Organic Chemistry by Dr. R.L.Madan, S.Chand & Company Ltd.
iv. Advanced Organic Chemistry by Arun Bhal and B. S. Bhal, S.Chand & Company Ltd.
v. Physical Chemistry, by P. W. Atkins, W.H.Freeman and Company, New York.
vi. Inorganic Chemistry 4th Ed: principles of Structure and Reactivity by James E. Huheey, Ellen A.
Keiter, Richard L. Keiter, Okhil K. Medhi, Pearson.
vii. Mechanism in Organic Chemistry by Peter Sykes, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd.
viii. Organic Chemistry: Structure and Function by K. P. C. Volhardt and N. E. Schore, 5th Edition,
W.H.Freeman and Company, New York.
ix. Organic Chemistry, Finer, Vol-I and Vol -II, Pearson.
28
Course Title: Technology of Food Preservation Examination Scheme:
Duration: 17 weeks (Total hours per week = 2) i) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Total lecture class/week: 2 hours (End Semester Examination)
ii) Internal Assessment: 40 Marks
Credit: 2 [ Class test: 20 Marks
1. Objective:
To know the different types of spoilage of food which will results in understanding the importance of
food preservation. To get the knowledge about canning and other technologies used in food preservation.
Working principle of different types of drier. To get the knowledge about CA Storage and MAP, food
irradiation, freeze drying, food fermentation and non-thermal preservation technique in food
preservation.

Hours
Unit 1 Food Spoilage and 1.1 General Principle of food preservation, scope and benefit of 01
Preservation industrial food preservation, perishable, non-perishable food.
1.2 Causes of food spoilage. Microbial spoilage by Bacteria,
Fungi and Chemical spoilage by Enzymatic reactions,
Oxidation, Maillard reaction and light-induced reaction.
Unit 2 Preservation by high 2.1 Thermal Processing- Commercial heat preservation methods: 06
temperature Sterilization, commercial, sterilization, Pasteurization and
blanching.
2.2 Canning history, Construction of Cans (two and three piece),
Can lacquer, can filling, can sealing and can scaling
compounds, testing of Cans, mechanical defects and Can
defects.
2.3 Principal of Canning technique, General steps of canning fruits
and vegetables with object of each steps, Effect of temperature,
time, pH, altitude on thermal Processing of cans. (Process time
calculation not required). Canning equipments and tools (can
29
reformer, can flanger, can seamer, peeling equipment, slicing
equipment, blanching equipment, exhausting equipment, batch
and continuous caning retort, can cooling equipment, can
embossing machine, can cutter, can pressure gauge, can
vacuum gauge).
2.4 Method of canning of apple, sliced pineapple, ripen sliced

mango, sliced carrot, potato, green peas, corn seed; Methods of
Canning of fruit juice beverage (pineapple juice, grape juice,
orange juice) and pulp (mango pulp, tomato pulp), Canning of
fresh and processed meat and fish.
2.5 Process of aseptic canning, Spoilage of canned food (physical,
chemical, biological).
Unit 3 Preservation by 3.1 Dehydration and Drying: Concept of food preservation by 06

Moisture control dehydration and drying, heat and mass transfer mechanism of
surface drying (no mathematical derivation and problem
required), differences between sun drying and mechanical
drying, factors affecting rate of drying, Normal drying curve,
concept of critical moisture, equilibrium moisture content,
changes in food during drying, changes of water activity in
food during drying. Concept of casehardening and shrinkage.
3.2 Concept of intermediate moisture food and osmotic

dehydration.
3.3 Drying method of fruits and vegetable (carrot, cabbage, potato,

peas, mango pulp, tomato pulp), Pre-treatment operation
before drying (balancing, sulphatising), Different type of driers
- solar drier,tray drier, vacuum tray drier, fluidized bed drier,
tunnel drier, continuous belt dryer, spray drier, drum drier
(working principles, schematic diagram and use only). working
principles and application of dehydrator.
3.4 Evaporation: Definition, factors affecting evaporation, names

of evaporators used in food industry. Working principle of Pan
Type, Natural Circulation Evaporator, Forced Circulation
Evaporator, Single ffect Evaporator, Multiple Effect
Evaporator.
30
Unit 4 Preservation by Low 4.1 Refrigeration: Role of refrigeration in preservation, Mechanism 07
temperature of Refrigeration process, Types of refrigerants and their use,
requirements of refrigerated storage controlled- low
temperature, air circulation and humidity, changes in food
during refrigerated storage, Ton of Refrigeration.
4.2 Chilling Injury: Concept of Cold Chain in food preservation,

Working principles and application of refrigerated van and
cold storage (Bulk Cold Stores, Multi-purpose Cold Stores,
Frozen Food Stores, Walk-in Cold Stores)
4.3 Principle of freezing, freezing curve, changes occurring during

freezing, concentration effect and ice crystal damage, freezer
burn, glazing, factors determining freezing rate, types of
freezing- slow freezing, quick freezing, introduction to
thawing, changes during thawing, drip loss and its effect on
food.
4.4 Freezing methods: direct and indirect method of freezing, blast
freezer, plate freezer, immersion freezer, cryogenic freezing
(working principles, schematic diagram and use only)
4.5 Principle of freeze drying, Different phases of freeze drying,

triple point of water, Time-temperature relation, Freeze drying
equipment, Quality aspect of freeze-dried food product.
Unit 5 Preservation by 5.1 Introduction to fermentation: General principle of 01

Fermentation fermentation, fermentation type (acetic acid fermentation,
lactic acid fermentation, alcoholic fermentation), advantages,
disadvantages, Factors effecting fermentation and Role of
fermentation in preservation of food (general view).
5.2 Different fermented food (only name, source and use).
Unit 6 Preservation by 6.1 Ionizing radiation and sources, unit of radiations, Methods of 03
Irradiation and Irradiation, measurement of radiation dose, dose distribution
Microwave Heating (high, medium and low), effect on microorganisms, direct and
indirect radiation effects.
6.2 Concept of cold sterilization, Safety and wholesomeness of
irradiated food. Effect of irradiation on food product.
6.3 Packaging and labeling required for irradiated foods,
6.4 Basic principle and application of Microwave heating.
31
Unit 7 Food Preservatives 7.1 Preservation of foods by Preservatives: chemicals (Benzoate, 02
and Hurdle sorbate, propionate, sulphur dioxide), antioxidants, mold
technology inhibiters, antibodies, acidulates etc. Preservation by salt,
sugar, oil (Principle, Method and effect on food quality).
7.2 Principle of Hurdle technology, Concept of Bio-preservation of

food, Mode of action and application of bio-preservative
agents such as Lactic acid bacteria, Yeast and Bacteriophage
in food.
Unit 8 CA Storage and MAP 8.1 Basic principles of Controlled Atmosphere storage, 03
Temperature and Humidity Control, Gas Control Equipment,
Oxygen Control, Carbon Dioxide Control, Ethylene gas
measurement and control, Fruit Ripening, Hypobaric and
Hyperbaric Storage.
8.2 Basic principles of Modified Atmosphere Packaging, Film and
Coating types, Permeability, Gas Flushing, Perforation,
Adjustable diffusion leak, Absorbents, Humidity,
Temperature, Shrink-wrapping, Vacuum Packing, Modified
Interactive Packaging, Effect of scavengers.
Unit 9 Non thermal 9.1 Pulsed electric field processing, High pressure processing, 01
preservation Processing using ultrasound, dielectric, ohmic heating and
technique infrared heating. (Only basic principle).
Grand Total: 34
3. Course outcome: The students of the course should be able to

i) CO1: Explain the principle of food preservation techniques.
ii) CO2: To demonstrate the working principle of different equipment’s used in food preservation techniques.
iii) CO3: To demonstrate techniques of Irradiation and fermentation in food preservation
iv) CO4: To compare preservation technique by CA Storage and MAP.
v) CO5: To identify the techniques required for preservation of different types of food.
4. Suggested Home Assignment/Student Activities: (At least two assignments)

Unit
No.
1. Classify different thermal processing operation. 5
2. Demonstrate Construction of two and three piece can. 5
3. Explain the canning procedure of sliced pineapple and pineapple juice with flow diagram. 5
4. Explain the canning procedure of ripen sliced mango and mango pulp with flow diagram. 5
5. Explain the canning procedure of green peas with flow diagram. 5
6. Explain the canning procedure of orange juice and grape juice with flow diagram. 5
7. Explain the canning procedure of tomato pulp with flow diagram. 5
32
8. Explain the canning procedure of fresh and processed meat with flow diagram. 5
9. Explain the canning procedure of corn seeds with flow diagram. 5
10. Categorize spoilage of canned food. 5
11. Compare between sun drying and mechanical drying. 5
12. Illustrate drying curve for food material. 5
13. Outline the principle of spray drier. 5
14. Write down working principle of fluidized bed drier. 5
15. Write down working principle of tray drier and vacuum tray drier. 5
16. Write down working principle of tunnel drier in both cocurrent and counter current material flow 5
condition.
17. Write down working principle of continuous belt dryer. 5
18. Compare working principle of Natural Circulation and Forced Circulation Evaporator. 5
19. Compare working principle of Single Effect and multiple effect Evaporator. 5
20. Illustrate mechanism of Refrigeration process. 5
21. Outline the principle of different types of cold storage. 5
22. Illustrate freezing curve for food material. 5
23. Compare between slow freezing and quick freezing. 5
24. Write down working principle of cryogenic freezing. 5
25. Write down working principle of blast freezer and plate freezer. 5
26. Illustrate the role of fermentation in food preservation. 5
27. List out 10 fermented foods along with their sources and uses. 5
28. Illustrate the role of irradiation in food preservation. 5
29. Write down principle and application of Microwave heating. 5
30. List out 10 preservatives and their application in food. 5
31. Write down principles of Controlled Atmosphere storage. 5
32. Write down principles of Modified Atmosphere Packaging. 5
33. Compare ohmic heating and infrared heating. 5
34. Illustrate mechanism of freeze drying. 5
(Full Marks = 20)

Total
Class Test - 1 20
Class Test - 2 20
33

A1 1&2&3 07
A2 4&5&6 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 7&8&9 03
Total: 15 10 10
B1 1&2&3 07
B2 4&5&6 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 7&8&9 03
Total: 15 10 10
C1 1&2&3 07
C2 4&5&6 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 7&8&9 03
Total: 15 10 10
D1 1&2&3 05
D2 4&5&6 03 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 7&8&9 02
Total: 10 06 12
E1 1&2&3 04
E2 4&5&6 03 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 7&8&9 02
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
34
i. The Technology of Food Preservation by J.N. Desrosier and N. W. Desrosier, AVI Publishing
company Inc., USA.
ii. Food Preservation Techniques by P. Zeuthen and L.B. Sorensen, Woodhead Publishing Ltd., UK,
iii. Food Science by N.N. Potter and J.H. Hotchkiss, AVI Publishing company Inc., USA, 1986.
iv. Food Preservation Techniques by P. Zeuthen and L.B. Sorensen, Woodhead Publishing Ltd., CRC
Press, London.
v. New Methods of food preservation, Gould, G. W., Springer Science & Business Media.
vi. Food Science, B. Sri Laxmi, New Age International.
vii. Food Processing and Preservation, G. Subbulakhsmi & S.A. Uddipi , New Age International.
viii. Foods Facts and Principles, N. Shakuntala Manay & M. Shadaksharaswamy , New age International.
x. Fundamentals of Food Engineering, S.E Charm, AVI.
xi. Processing of Fruits & Vegetables, Giridharilal & Siddappa, ICAR.
xii. Fundamentals of Food Processing Operations, J.L. Heid & M.A Joslyn, AVI.
xiii. Elements of Food Engineering, J.C. Harper, AVI.
xiv. Food Science & Technology, Magnus Pyke, John Murray, London.
xv. Fruit and vegetable preservation, Srivastava, R.PO and Kumar, S., International Book distribution
Company, Lucknow.
xvi. Modern Food preservation, MC.Williams, M and Paine, H.. Surjeet Publications, Delhi.
xvii. Commercial fruits and vegetable products, Cruess, W.V., Anees Offset press, New Delhi.
35
Code No.: FPTPC213 Total Marks: 100
Course Title: Food Microbiology Lab. Examination Scheme:
(i) Internal Assessment: 60 marks
Duration: 17 weeks (3 hours per week)
[Continuous Evaluation: 50 marks
Total Practical Class /week: 3 hours
Class Attendance: 10 marks]
Credit: 1.5
[Assignment on the day of viva voce
and practical report submission: 20 marks
Viva voce (Board of External Examiner): 20 marks]
Pass Criterion: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (pass marks) in both internal assessment and end semester
examination separately.
Pre-requisite:
• Knowledge in Food Microbiology [Code No. – FPTPC201]
1. Objective:
Food microbiology is the study of microorganisms that play major roles in food processing and
preservation. It is important to understand the morphological features of the microorganism and
the growth medium needed to grow them in laboratory condition. It is also necessary to identify
factors essential for the growth of microorganisms and relate the requirements for bacterial
growth.
2. Practical Components:
Sl.
List of Practical
No.
1. Study of bright-field microscope.
2. Simple Staining of bacteria and morphological study.
3. Gram Staining of bacteria and morphological study.
4. Spore staining of bacteria.
36
5. Morphological study of yeast and mold.
6. Study of autoclave.
7. Preparation, sterilization and inoculation of nutrient broth and nutrient agar media.
8. Preparation, sterilization and inoculation of culture media (broth and agar) for yeast.
9. Preparation, sterilization and inoculation of Czapeck Dox Agar (CD) media for mold.
10. Dilution and Plating by streak-plate, spread –plate and pour –plate techniques.
11. Isolation of a pure culture by pour plate method.
12. Study of growth of E.coli by a spectrophotometer.
13. Determination of Thermal death point of bacteria.
14. Study of microbiological quality of milk by Methylene blue reduction time (MBRT) test.
15. Measurement of total and faecal coliforms in water samples.
16. Quantitative bacteriological examination of milk or fruit juice.

i) CO1: Explain the working principle of a microscope.
ii) CO2: Perform the different types of staining technique.
iii) CO3: Identify microorganism on the basis of their morphological feature.
iv) CO4: Grow microorganism in proper medium at proper physical condition.
v) CO5: Analyse water and food samples qualitatively and quantitatively.
4. Suggested Scheme for Internal Assessment and End Semester Examination:

(Full Marks = 100)
Food Microbiology Lab.
Practical / Sessional = 100 Marks
Internal Assessment = 60 Marks End Semester Assessment = 40 Marks
Continuous Evaluation 50 Assignment on the day of viva- 20

voce and practical repot
submission.
Class Attendance 10 Viva voce (Board of External 20

Examiner)
Total 60 Total 40
37
5. Suggested Rubrics for the Internal Continuous Evaluation of Food Microbiology Lab.
[50 marks]:
Sl No. Performance Indicators/ Criteria Weightage in

%
1 Awareness about the significance of particular test.
2 Understanding working principle of equipment and machinery.
3 Preparation of experimental set up.
4 Performance and operation.
5 Observations and recording.
6 Interpretation of result and conclusion.
7 Answer to sample questions.
8 Submission of report in time.
9. Safety precautions and good housekeeping.
Total Weightage (%) 100
38
Code No.: FPTPC215 Total Marks: 100
Course Title: Chemistry of Food Lab. Examination Scheme:
Total Practical Class /week: 4 hours Class Attendance: 10 marks]
Credit: 2
Pre requisite:
• Knowledge in Chemistry of Food [Code No. – FPTPC203]
1. Objective:
Food chemistry lab deals with analysis of different food components and their estimation
method. It also deals with quality of fats/oils through its details analysis of chemical
components.
Sl. No. List of Practical
1. Determination of Moisture in food sample.
2. Determination of Protein in food sample by Kjeldhal method.
3. Determination of Acidity and pH in food sample.
4. Determination of non-reducing and reducing sugars in food sample.
5. Estimation of crude fat in a food sample.
39
6. Determination of acid value in fats or oils sample.
7. Determination of per-oxide value in fats or oils sample.
8. Determination of iodine value in fats or oils sample.
9. Determination of saponification value in fats or oils sample.
10. Determination of Ash (acid soluble and insoluble fraction) content in food sample.
11. Separation of amino acids and sugar by Chromatographic method (paper, thin layer, liquid
column chromatography).
12. Determination of ascorbic acid, thiamine, riboflavin in food sample.
13. Estimation of sodium, potassium, calcium, iron in food products.
14. Estimation of zinc, copper, lead, arsenic in food sample.
15. Determination of carotenoids and chlorophyll content in food sample.
i) CO1: Estimate food components present in food sample qualitatively and quantitatively.
ii) CO2: Explain quality of Fat/Oil sample with respect to chemical parameters.
iii) CO3: Analyze Vitamins and pigments content in food sample.
iv) CO4: Estimate metal ions present in food sample qualitatively and quantitatively.
v) CO5: Apply Chromatographic method for separation of amino acid and sugar.
4. Suggested Scheme for Internal Assessment and End Semester Examination: (Full
Marks = 100)
Chemistry of Food Lab.

submission.

Examiner)
Total 60 Total 40
40
5. Suggested Rubrics for the Internal Continuous Evaluation of Chemistry of Food Lab.
[50 marks]:

%
41
Code No.: FPTPC 217 Total Marks: 100
Course Title: Unit Operation of Chemical Examination Scheme:
Engineering-I Lab (i) Internal Assessment: 60 marks
Duration: 17 weeks (3 hours per week) [Continuous Evaluation: 50 marks
Class Attendance: 10 marks]
Total Practical Class /week: 3 hours
Credit: 1.5 (ii) External Assessment: 40 Marks
Pre-requisite:
• Knowledge in Unit Operation of Chemical Engineering-I [Code No. – FPTPC205]
1. Objective:
To understand the requirement of different unit operations applicable to Food processing industries.
To apply the basic principles of science and chemical engineering in understanding the unit operations.
To compare different equipment on the basis of their applicability.
1. Determination of crushing efficiency of Jaw crusher for solid sample.
2. Determination of crushing efficiency Roll crusher for solid sample.
3. Study screen analysis of different size particles in vibrating screen.
4. Determination of reduction ratio and capacity of a laboratory scale ‘Ball Mill’.
5. Determine average particle size of solid particles in a ROTAP type sieve shaker.
42
6. Estimation of capacity and reduction ratio of a batch ‘Hammer Mill’.
7. Study the solid-liquid mixing characteristics in sigma mixer and planetary mixture.
8. Determination of specific cake resistance ‘α’ and filter medium resistance ‘Rm’ by filtering a
slurry in plate and frame filter.
9. Study the filtration characteristics in a Rotary Vacuum Filter apparatus.
10. Study the filtration characteristics in a vacuum filtration apparatus with Buckner Funnel.
11. Determination of rate of sedimentation for a given slurry by plotting interface height vs time.
12. Separation of solid from liquid by centrifugation using centrifuge tube.
13. Separation of two liquid by batch distillation process.
14. Study of absorption process in packed bed column.
15. Study of adsorption process using charcoal bed.
i) CO1: Apply the working principle of different unit operations during study of the equipment.
ii) CO2: Analyze the result obtained from the experimental data.
iii) CO3: Select appropriate equipment according to feed material.
iv) CO4: Develop their motor skill through handling of equipment.
Marks = 100)
Unit Operation of Chemical Engineering-I Lab.

submission.

Examiner)
Total 60 Total 40
43
5. Suggested Rubrics for the Internal Continuous Evaluation of Unit Operation of
Chemical Engineering-I Lab. [50 marks]:

%
44
Code No.: FPTPC 219 Total Marks: 100
Course Title: Food Preservation Lab. Examination Scheme:
Total Practical Class /week: 4 hours Class Attendance: 10 marks]
Credit: 2
Pre-requisite:
• Knowledge in Technology of Food Preservation [Code No. – FPTPC 211]
1. Objective:
It provides an extensive introduction into the needs and mechanisms of preservation technique.
Students will be exposed to hand on experiments on different food preservation technology
applied to food materials for extension of its shelf life.
1. Study of can reforming, can flanging and can seaming operation.
2. Preparation of canned vegetable (sliced carrot, potato, peas)
3. Preparation of canned fruits (sliced pineapple, ripe sliced mango, orange pieces)
4. Preparation of canned fruit juice beverage (pineapple juice, grape juice, orange juice)
45
5. Preparation of canned pulp (mango pulp, tomato pulp)
6. Preparation of canned hominy/corn seeds.
7. Preparation of canned processed fish and processed meat.
8. Drying of sliced carrot, sliced potato in tray dried and development of drying curve.
9. Drying of shredded cabbage in vacuum tray dried or dehydrator and determination of %

moisture loss.
10. Dehydration of sliced potato, sliced carrot in cabinet solar drier and determination of
%moisture loss.
11. Drying of green peas, potato cube in fluidized bed drier and determination of %
moisture loss.
12. Preparation of frozen fish and meat in plate freezer or air blast freezer.
13. Study of freeze drying and preparation of freeze-dried product.
14. Preparation of fermented vegetable product from cabbage.
15. Study of modified atmosphere packaging technology (vacuum packaging or inert gas
flashing)
i) CO1: Demonstrate canning process of different types of food materials.

ii) CO2: Apply dehydration and drying technique for preservation of different types of food
materials.
iii) CO3: Develop frozen fish and meat in different types of freezers.
iv) CO4: Outline process of vegetable fermentation for its preservation.
v) CO5: Demonstrate the modified atmosphere packaging technology for preservation of
food products.
Marks = 100)
Food Preservation Lab.


submission

Examiner)
Total 60 Total 40
46
5. Suggested Rubrics for the Internal Continuous Evaluation of Food Preservation Lab.
[50 marks]:

%
47
Category: Internship Semester: Third
Code No.: SI 201 Total Marks: 100
Course Title: Internship-I Examination Scheme:
Time: After the End of 2nd Semester Internal Assessment: 100 Marks
Total Practical Class /week: After 2nd Semester [Internship Report = 60 marks
Credit: 1
Internship Seminar = 40 marks]
Pass Criterion: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (pass marks) in internal assessment examination.
Pre-requisite:
• Basic Knowledge in Engineering and Technology subjects.
1. Area of Internship-I: After the end of 2nd Semester, for Internship-I, students are required to
be involved in Inter/ Intra Institutional activities viz; Training with higher Institutions; Soft skill
training organized by Training and Placement Cell of the respective institutions; contribution at
innovation /entrepreneurship cell of the institute; participation in workshops/ competitions etc.;
Learning at Departmental Lab/ Institutional workshop.
2. Evaluation of Internship-I: After completion of Internship-I, the student should prepare a

comprehensive report to indicate what he/she has observed and learnt in the training period. The
student may contact Industrial Supervisor / Faculty Mentor/TPO for assigning topics and problems
and should prepare the final report on the assigned topics. The training report should be signed by
the Industrial Supervisor / Internship Faculty Mentor, TPO and HOD.
48
3. Criteria of evaluation of Internship-I report: The Internship report will be evaluated on
the basis of following criteria (as applicable):
Sl. No. Criteria of evaluation of Internship-I report
1. Originality.
2. Adequacy and purposeful write-up.
3. Organization, format, drawings, sketches, style, language.
4. Practical applications and relationships with basic theory.
5. Concepts taught in the course outcome.
6. Practical applications, relationships with basic theory and concepts taught in the
course.
7. Attendance record, daily diary, quality of the Internship Report.
4. Criteria of evaluation of Internship-I seminar: The student will give a seminar based
on his/her training report, before an internal committee constituted by the concerned department of
the institute. The evaluation will be based on the following criteria (as applicable):
Sl. No. Criteria of evaluation of Internship-I seminar
1. Quality of content presented.
2. Proper planning for presentation.
3. Effectiveness of presentation.
4. Depth of knowledge and skills.
5. Viva voce.
49
DRAFT OF CURRICULLUM AND SYLLABUS OF
3RD SEMESTER OF DIPLOMA IN FOOTWEAR TECHNOLOGY
UNDER WBSCT&VE&SD
CURRICULAR STRUCTURE OF DIPLOMA IN FOOTWEAR TECHNOLOGY
WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND SKILL DEVELOPMENT
THIRD SEMESTER
Hours Per Week EXAMINATION SCHEME
S.L Course Code Course Title Total Credits Marks External Internal Assessment
No Category Contact
Assessment
Hours/Week
End Mid Quizzes/ Class
L T P Semester Semester Viva Voce/ Attendance
Examination Test Assignment
THEORETICAL SUBJECTS
1. Programme FWTPC Principles of Footwear 3 0 0 3 2 100 60 20 10 10
Core Course 201 Manufacture
2. Programme FWTPC Elements of Footwear 3 0 0 3 2 100 60 20 10 10
Core Course 203 Designing & Pattern
Cutting
3. Programme FWTPC Footwear Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 2 100 60 20 10 10
Core Course 205 Techniques I
4. Programme FWTPC Footwear Material Study I 3 0 0 3 2 100 60 20 10 10
Core Course 207
5. Programme FWTPC Footwear Auxiliary 3 0 0 3 2 100 60 20 10 10
Core Course 209 Materials
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
S.L Course Code Course Title Hours Per Week Total Credits Marks EXAMINATION SCHEME
No Category Contact
Hours/Week Practical Internal Practical External
L T P Assessment Assessment
6. Programme FWTPC Design Process and Pattern 0 0 6 6 3 100 60 40
Core Course 211 Engineering I
7. Programme FWTPC Footwear Upper Fabrication 0 0 1.5 100 60 40
Core Course 213 Technology I
8. Programme FWTPC Footwear Bottom Fabrication 0 0 6 6 1.5 100 60 40
Core Course 215 Technology I
9. Programme FWTPC Fundamentals of Computer 0 0 3 3 2 100 60 40
Core Course 217 Graphics Designing
Lab
10. Programme FWTPC Communication Skills II 0 0 2 2 1 100 60 40
Core Course 219 Lab
11. Internship SI201 Summer Internship I 1 0 0 1 1 100
TOTAL 16 00 17 33 20 1100
PRINCIPLES OF FOOTWEAR MANUFACTURE
(FWTPC 201)
Course Code : FWTPC 201.
Course Title : PRINCIPLES OF FOOTWEAR MANUFACTURE.
Course Category : Programme Core Course.
Number of Credits : 2.
Contact : 3 lecture/week, 1hr/lecture, Total 45 lecture.
Offered to : 3rd Semester, FWT students.
Pre Requisite : Elementary knowledge on basic shoe styles.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 201 Principles of Footwear Manufacture The course aims at providing exposure to the
students in understanding the
. • Relationship between the foot, the last and the shoe during shoe making.
• Foot anatomy and the shoe sizing systems.
Course Content
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
• Definition and Function of footwear.
• Historical background of footwear.
UNIT II ANATOMY OF HUMAN FOOT
• Introduction & Function of human foot.
• Skeletal structure of foot.
• Joints and Muscles of foot and the ankle.
• Growth of foot from infancy to maturity arches of foot.
• Foot hygiene, common foot abnormalities and their remedies.
UNIT III BIO MECHANICS
• Free body diagram analysis.
• Biomechanics of walking.
• Types of forces-friction movements.
• Gait analysis.
• Gait patterns, pressure distribution etc. in case of normal and
abnormal feet.
UNIT IV SHOE SIZING SYSTEM AND FITTINGS
• Introduction to foot Anthropometry.
• Design of anthropometric foot surveys-data collection and statistical
analysis of foot data.
• Introduction to Shoe Size and Sizing System.
• Principles of Size and Fit.
• Systems of measurements of size and fittings.
• Conversion of shoe sizes from one system to another.
• Fitting of shoe.
• Foot measuring devices.
• Techniques for foot measurement.
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF FOOTWEAR LAST
• Basic principles of solid modelling and surface modelling using
contours and geometry.
• Use of solid modelling in designing and developing modern footwear.
• Introduction, definition and utility of shoe last.
• Classification of Shoe last.
• Various features and functional attributes.
• Manufacturing of Shoe last.
• Last assessment (Measurements/Checkpoints of New Last).
• Difference between shoe making last and human foot.
UNIT VI PRINCIPLES FOR MANUFACTURING OF SPECIAL FOOTWEAR TYPES
• Introduction to Diabetic and Orthopedic shoe.
• Considerations for choosing Diabetic and Orthopedic footwear.
• Various parameters for designing and manufacturing of special type of
footwear.
UNIT VII FOOT COMFORT
• Introduction and conditions for foot comfort.
• Factors affecting foot comfort.
• Foot care for an individual.
• Materials aids for foot comfort.
UNIT VIII CONSTRUCTION
• Introduction.
• Types.
• Pictorial representation of shoe types based on various method of
construction.
Expert Lecture (Mandatory)
It is mandatory to organize at least One Expert Lecture on the aforesaid subject by inviting resource
persons from domain specific (Footwear) industry.
Evaluation Scheme
THEORY
(100 MARKS)
External Assessment Internal Assessment
(60 Marks) (40 Marks)
End Semester Examination Mid Semester Quizzes/ Class
Test Viva voce/ Attendance
Assignment
60 20 10 10
Pass Criterion Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (Pass marks) in both Internal Assessment
and External Assessment separately.
References/Suggested Learning Resources
1. Comprehensive Footwear Technology by Somenath Ganguly (1st Edition)- ILTA Publications.
2. Introduction to Modern Footwear Technology by B. Venkatappaiah-CLRI Publications.
3. Manual of Shoe Making by C.J Clarks-Clarks limited.
4. Modern Concept of Leather and Footwear Manufacturing by R.D Singh-Invincible Publications.
5. Mastering Shoe Making by Debabrata Chakrabarty-Business Press India, Delhi, India.
Course Outcomes
At the successful completion of this course, students will be able to understand
CO I About the history and evolution of footwear.
CO II About the basic anatomy of human foot.
CO III About various shoe sizing scales prevalent in shoe industry.
CO IV About various types of last used in footwear manufacturing.
*******
ELEMENTS OF FOOTWEAR DESIGNING AND
PATTERN CUTTING
(FWTPC 203)
Course Title : ELEMENTS OF FOOTWEAR DESIGNING AND PATTERN
CUTTING.
Pre Requisite : Elementary knowledge on creative & technical drawing.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 203 Elements of Footwear Designing and Pattern Cutting I The course aims at providing
exposure to the students in understanding the
• Factors governing footwear designing.

• Construction of mean forme and standard on a given last.
• Method of construction of upper, lining and bottom standards for Men’s style.
Course Content
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN PROCESS

• Definition of the term “DESIGN” under the domaign of broader
context.
• Footwear design-Then & Now.
UNIT II DESIGN RESEARCH
• Inspiration.
• Investigation.
• Process.
• Design sketches.
• Mood board.
• Digital research.
• Creating an ideas book.
• Color and materials.
• Trend analysis and forecasting.
UNIT III DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
• Creation of design brief.
• Ideation of shapes, forms, colors, texture, material selection,
hardware selection, sourcing etc.
UNIT IV SHOE BASICS
• Anatomical make up of the foot.
• Basic sections of the foot.
• Introduction to shoe components.
• Last.
• Patterns.
• Materials for shoe manufacturing.
• Footwear styles.
• Introduction to Stage Sample Board and Production
Specification/Guide.
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF FOOTWEAR DESIGNING
• Introduction to Product design.

• Basis of design.
• Markets and design.
• From design to production.
• The role of shoe designer.
• Essential tools of a shoe designer.
• Safety when working with knives.
• Design tips & techniques.
• Basic shoe standard and size increment.
UNIT V FORM CUTTING AND LAST
• Explain Fundamental parts of shoe.

• Explain Shoe making pattern points and construction lines.
• Explain Mean Forme as an essential designing tool.
• Explain Fish bone method (Paper slotted forms).
• Explain Taped forms.
• Explain Vaccum forms.
• Explain Fabric forms.
• Explain CAD method.
• Explain Last surface area (Manual).
UNIT VI THEORY AND PRACTISES OF MODELLING GEOMETRIC UPPER STANDARD
• Explain the method of making Base Standard of Mens Chappal &
Sandal (atleast 2 styles, each), Toe cap and Mudguard Derby and Toe-
cap Oxford Shoe.
• Explain the method of making sectional patterns of the aforesaid
designs.
• Explain the method of making lining patterns of the aforesaid designs.
UNIT VII THEORY AND PRACTICES OF MODELLING OF BOTTOM PROFILES
• Explain the method of construction of Bottom Standard Design of
Mens Chappal & Sandal (atleast 2 styles each), Toe cap and Mudguard
Derby and Toe Cap Oxford Shoe.
• Explain the method of preparation of bottom profile patterns of the
aforesaid designs.
UNIT VII GRADING
• Introduction and importance of grading.
• Tools for grading.
• Hand and machine grading methodologies.
UNIT IX FITTING AND WEARING TEST
• Explain the procedure for Fitting Test.
• Explain the procedure for Wearing test.
Evaluation Scheme
THEORY
(100 MARKS)
Assignment
60 20 10 10
Pass Criterion: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (Pass marks) in both Internal Assessment
1. Comprehensive Footwear Technology by S.N Ganguly- ILTA Publications.
2. Bata Manual by Bata India Pvt Ltd.
3. Footwear Pattern & Last Design by Wade Motawi-Sneaker factory.
4. New Fashion Designers Sketch Books by A & C Black Visual Arts.
5. Fashion Course: Accessories Hats, Bags, Shoes & more by Thames & Hudson Zaman Z.
6. Shoes: A history from Sandals and Sneakers by G. Riello and P. Mc Neil-Oxford: Berg.
7. Footwear Design (2012) by Aki. Chokolat- London Laurence King.
8. Principles of Shoe Designing (Vol 1 & 2) by J.A.J Luijten & P.W.J Velden- TNO Leather & Shoe
Research Institute
Course Outcomes
At the successful completion of this course, students will be able to do about the following
CO I Articulate the fundamental knowledge about foot and its modelling.
CO II Apply the knowledge and skill on the process of product designing.
CO III Profund skill and knowledge on pattern grading from one size to another.
CO IV Apply skill on fitting and wearing test of prototype modelling.
*******
FOOTWEAR MANUFACTURING TECHNIQUES I
(FWTPC 205)
Course Title : FOOTWEAR MANUFACTURING TECHNIQUES I.
Pre Requisite : Elementary knowledge on skiving, splitting and stitching.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 205 Footwear Manufacturing Techniques I The course aims at providing exposure to the
students in understanding the
• Aspects of upper making procedure and the importance of correct preparation of

components and techniques of stitching.
• Theory of skiving practices.
• Theory of various edge treatment operation
• Methods of insole preparation.
Course Content
UNIT I REVIEW ON CLICKING TECHNOLOGY

• Definition and Importance of Cutting/Clicking department.
• Concept of cutter’s ticket.
• Methods of Cutting/Clicking.
• Pattern system.
• Principles of pattern nesting on various material grades and cutting.
• Quality control in cutting department.
UNIT II PRE FITTING/PREPARATION
• Introduction.
• Pre-fitting/Preparation methods.
• Identification marking- Purpose and its types.
• Stitch markings-Purpose and its types.
• Perforation and Gimping.
• Embossing.
• Skiving- Definition, Purpose and types.
• Splitting.
UNIT III TOP LINE & EDGE TREATMENTS
• Introduction and Purpose.
• Types of topline & edge treatments
 Raw edge.
 Burnishing.
 Edging.
 Folding.
 Binding (HOB & ROB).
 Channelbinding/English binding/Flat binding.
 Slip beading.
 Bagged edge.
 Ghillie top line edge.
• Quality checking.
UNIT IV CLOSING TECHNOLOGY
• Introduction.
• Reinforcing- Objectives and material types.
• Fitting- Definition and types.
• Stitching Formulation types.
• Seam-Introduction and types.
• Decorative Stitches-Introduction and types.
• Subsidiary stitches-Introduction and types.
• Eyeletting.
• Lacing.
UNIT V THEORY AND PRACTICES OF UPPER MAKING OF MEN’S STYLE.
• Introduction.
• Sequence of operation for upper closing of Chappal, Sandal, Toe Cap
and Mudguard Derby & Toe Cap Oxford Shoe.
• List of associated tools and machineries required for manufacture.
• Tools and machine preparation.
UNIT VI INSOLE PREPARATION.
• Introduction.
• Sequence of operation of preparation of various insole types.
• Insole Preparation for cemented construction.
• Insole covering.
• Contoured Insoles.
Expert Lectures (Mandatory)
Evaluation Scheme
THEORY
(100 MARKS)
Assignment
60 20 10 10
1. Comprehensive Footwear Technology by S.N. Ganguly-ILTA Publication.
2. Manual of Shoe Making by Clarks-Clarks Limited.
3. Modern Concept of Leather and Footwear Manufacturing by R.D Singh- Invincible Publishers.
5. Text Book of Footwear Manufacture by J.H Thonton-London the National Trade Press Ltd 1953.
6. Mastering Shoe Making by Debabrata Chakrabarty-Business Press India, Delhi, India.
Course Outcomes
CO I Articulate the fundamental knowledge about stitch formation.
CO II Apply the knowledge and skill during upper making.
CO III Profund skill and knowledge on correct thread-needle selection.
CO IV Apply skill on upper making and the intracacies involved at the level of each operation.
*******
FOOTWEAR MATERIAL STUDY I
(FWTPC 207)
Course Title : FOOTWEAR MATERIAL STUDY I.
Pre Requisite : Elementary knowledge on leather types.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 207 Footwear Material Study I The course aims at providing exposure to the students in
understanding the
• basic knowledge of the anatomical and chemical structure of hides and skines.
• classification of hides and skines.
• defects of raw hides and skines.
• basic knowledge about pre and post tanning processes of leather making.
• preliminary knowledge about leather grading and storage.
Course Content
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
• Introduction to footwear materials.
• Classification of footwear materials.
UNIT II STRUCTURE OF HIDES AND SKINES
• Introduction to hides & skines.
• Classification, Distribution and availability.
• Anatomical structure and chemical composition and constituents of
hides and skines.
• Suitability as Principal footwear materials (different attributes).
• Defects of raw hides and skins.
• Selection of hides and skines after sizing.
UNIT III PRE TANNING OPERATION
 Curing and preservation of hides and skines, their objectives,
different methods followed merits and demerits of each
method.
• Principles and Objectives involved in
 Soaking.
 Liming.
 Fleshing and Reliming.
 Deliming.
 Bating and Degreasing.
 Pickling and De-pickling.
UNIT IV TANNING OPERATION
 Introduction.
 Various vegetable, chromium and mineral/synthetic tanning
agents.
 Types of tanning.
 Process of tanning.
 Comparison between vegetable and chrome tanned leather.
 Introduction to Chrome free leather.
UNIT V POST TANNING OPERATION
• Principles and Objectives involved in
 Neutralization.
 Dyeing.
 Re-tanning.
 Fat liquoring.
 Fixing.
 Drying.
 Trimming.
 Crust Selection.
UNIT VI FINISHING OPERATION
• Objectives.
• Classification and types of finishing.
• Finishing process and associated machineries.
• Different types of leather used for footwear manufacture.
UNIT VII LEATHER GRADING
• Objectives of leather grading.
• Assessment of defects
 Skin defects.
 Area measurement.
 Defect measurement.
 Objectives of leather grading.
• Leather garding, sorting and storage.
Educational Visit (Mandatory)
It is mandatory to organize an educational visit to a Leather Tannery/Leather Market to provide an
exposure to the students to co-relate between theoretical and practical knowledge on leather
processing and manufacturing. Documentation in the form of report should be submitted by the
candidates for evaluation purposes.
Evaluation Scheme
THEORY
(100 MARKS)
End Semester Examination Mid Semester Quizzes Class
Test Assignment Attendance
60 20 10 10
Pass Criterion Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (Pass marks) in both Internal Assessment
1. Comprehensive Footwear Technology by S.N. Ganguly-ILTA Publication.
2. Modern Concept of Leather and Footwear Manufacturing by R.D Singh-Invincible Publishers.
3. An Introduction to Principles of Leather Manufacture (4th Edition) by S.S Dutta- ILTA Publications.
4. Analytical Chemistry of Leather Manufacture by P.K Sarkar- ILTA Publications.
5. Handbook of Tanning by B.M Das-ILTA Publications.
Course Outcomes
CO I Articulate the fundamental knowledge about the anatomical structure of a hide and
skines.
CO II Apply the knowledge and skill during processing of leather from raw hides and skines.
CO III Profund skill and knowledge on various leather finishing techniques.
CO IV Apply skill on selection of leather for footwear manufacture.
*******
FOOTWEAR AUXILIARY MATERIALS
(FWTPC 209)
Course Title : FOOTWEAR AUXILIARY MATERIALS.
Pre Requisite : Elementary knowledge on leather accessories.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 209 Footwear Auxiliary Materials The course aims at providing exposure to the students in
skill development and understanding
• the basic knowledge of the types, properties and quality check of a wide range
of auxiliary materials used in footwear manufacture.
• the basic knowledge about various types of adhesive used in footwear co
process.
• the introductory knowledge to various types of grinderies used in footwear
manufacture.
Course Content
UNIT I FOOTWEAR ADHESIVES

• Introduction.
• Principles of adhesion and types.
• Classes of Adhesive used in footwear Industry.
• Basis of selecton of adhesives.
• Use of adhesives in different operational stages of in footwear making
viz fitting, combining, french binding, folding, lasting, stock attaching,
heel covering, sole attaching (based on quality).
• Selection of hardener, solvent in adhesives.
• Advantages & disadvantages of different adhesive.
UNIT II SHOE STITCHING THREAD
• Introduction & thread terminologies.
• Properties of thread.
• Classification of thread.
• Construction of thread.
• Size, system and consumption of thread.
• Thread Identification.
• Basis of selection of thread.
• Seam and stitching types for footwear manufacture.
UNIT III STITCHING NEEDLES
• Introduction to needle and its importance as a tool.
• Needle parts and their role.
• Needle size.
• Needle points.
• Needle finish.
• Needle selection.
• Relations of needle and thread.
• Needle policy.
UNIT IV SHOE HARDWARE AND EMBELLISHMENTS
• Introduction.
• Need of hardware.
• Types of hardware.
• Eyelet selection.
• Type of eyelet used in shoe making.
• Tools, Accessories and Machineries for eyeletting.
• Setting of various types of eyelets.
• Selection of rivets, buckels, rings, press studs etc.
UNIT V LACE , WEBBING, LOGO, FOAM, PLASTIC PARTS FOR SHOES
• Introduction.
• Lace length and size recommendation.
• Shoe Lacing materials.
• Lacing methods.
• Introduction, operations and uses of webbing.
• Shoe logo at its types.
• Footwear Foam- Definition, types, characteristics and selection.
• Plastic parts for shoes.
UNIT VI FOOTWEAR GRINDERIES
• Introduction.
• Types of Grinderies.
• Shank- Function, material specification and attachment .
• Bottom Filler- Function, material specification and attachment.
• Abrasives- Purpose of use and types.
• Shoe Tacks/Nails- Purpose of use and types.
• Heel- Definition, material specification and types.
• Welt- Purpose of uses.
UNIT VII SHOE FINISHES, CLEANERS AND DRESSINGS
• Wax, Polishes & Cream.
• Upper leather finishes.
• Uppers synthetic finishes.
• Glazing materials, lacquers, binders, resins, plasticizers, special
dressings etc.
Educational Visit (Mandatory)
It is mandatory to organize an educational visit to a Footwear Market to provide an exposure to the
students to bridge the gap between theoretical and practical knowledge on footwear accessories.
Documentation in the form of report should be submitted by the candidates for evaluation purposes.
Evaluation Scheme
THEORY
(100 MARKS)
Assignment
60 20 10 10
1. Comprehensive Footwear Technology by Somenath Ganguly-ILTA Publication.
2. Modern Concept of Leather and Footwear Manufacturing by R.D Singh-Invincible Publishers.
3. Footwear Materials and Process Technology by A.J Harvey-N.Z Leather and Shoe Research
Association.
4. Shoe Design-A Handbook for Footwear Designers- Fashionary International Ltd.
5. Manual of Shoe Making by Clarks-Clarks Limited..
6. Leather and Shoe Finishing by R.D Singh- Invincible Publishers.
Course Outcomes
CO I Articulate the fundamental knowledge about various types of auxiliary materials used
in footwear manufacture.
CO II Apply the knowledge and skill during selection of shoe finishing materials.
CO III Profund skill and knowledge on selection of design specific footwear accessories.
CO IV Apply skill on selection of various types of footwear grinderies.
*******
DESIGN PROCESS AND PATTERN
ENGINEERING I
(FWTPC 211)
Course Title : DESIGN PROCESS AND PATTERN ENGINEERING I.
Contact : 6 Practical/week, 1hr/Practical, Total 90 Practical.
Pre Requisite : Elementary knowledge of technical drawing and skills.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 211 Design Process and Pattern Engineering I The course aims at providing exposure to the
students in skill development and
 To understand the design process of mens footwear styles.

 To acquire skill on upper and bottom pattern engineering of various mens styles.
 To acquire skill and knowledge on prototype development and pattern trial for mens
footwear.
 To acquire skill and knowledge on component pattern grading.
Course Content
• Mens Styles: CHAPPAL & SANDAL, TOE CAP & MUDGUARD DERBY & TOE CAP OXFORD.
UNIT I SKETCHING AND RENDERING

• Sketching of Footwear designs
 Mens Style – Chappal, Sandal and Formal Shoes (atleast four
variations for each style) etc along with its component parts.
• Rendering medium of sketching – Water color, Pencil color, Oil color,
Texture, Volume, Light and Shade effects.
• Sketching and rendering Materials and Accessories – Fittings and
Fasteners.
UNIT II MODELLING AND PATTERN ENGINEERING OF CHAPPAL & SANDAL (ATLEAST 2 STYLES
EACH) FOR MEN.
• Masking.
• Derivation of Mean forme.
• Derivation of Geometric Base Standard for Chappal/Sandal.
• Derivation/Preparations of sectional patterns, folding copies and
lining patterns.
• Derivation/Preparation of Bottom standard.
• Derivation of Bottom profiles.
• Prototyping and pattern trial.
• Development of specifications, quality checks and pattern trial.
UNIT III MODELLING AND PATTERN ENGINEERING OF TOE CAP DERBY SHOE FOR MEN.
• Masking.
• Derivation of Geometric Base Standard for Toe Cap Derby Shoe.
lining patterns.
• Derivation of bottom profiles (Outsole, Insole, Full/Half/Arch
supported socks, Stiffener, Toe puffs etc.).
• Prototyping.
UNIT IV MODELLING AND PATTERN ENGINEERING OF MUDGUARD DERBY SHOE FOR MEN.
• Masking.
• Derivation of Geometric Base Standard for Mudguard Derby Shoe.
lining patterns.
• Prototyping.
UNIT V MODELLING AND PATTERN ENGINEERING OF TOE CAP OXFORD SHOE FOR MEN.
• Masking.
• Derivation of Geometric Base Standard for Toe Cap Oxford Shoe.
lining patterns.
• Prototyping.
UNIT VI GRADING OF FOOTWEAR COMPONENT
• Grading of the upper and bottom components (one size up & down of
mean size) of various mens style on English Sizing System.
Expert Lectures (Mandatory)
Evaluation Scheme
PRACTICAL
(100 MARKS)
Practical Internal Assessment Practical External Assessment
Class Assignments Class Class Exam Day Exam Day
Performance Attendance Assignment Viva
30 20 10 20 20
1. Footwear Design (2012) by Aki Chokolat- London Laurance King.
2. Footwear Pattern Making and Last Design (2020) by Wade Motawi-Sneaker Factory.
3. ARS magazines and Publications.
4. Designing Manual by Bata India Pvt Ltd.
5. History of Shoe and Shoe Making.
Course Outcomes
CO I Articulate the basic skill and knowledge on design and development of various men’s
style.
CO II Apply the knowledge and skill on Pattern Engineering on various men on varirious mens
footwear styles and variation.
CO III Profund skill and knowledge on component pattern grading.
CO IV Apply skill on prototype development and pattern trial on various mens styles.
*******
FOOTWEAR UPPER FABRICATION
TECHNOLOGY I
(FWTPC 213)
Course Title : FOOTWEAR UPPER FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY I.
Number of Credits : 1.5
Pre Requisite : Elementary knowledge of Clicking/Closing Operations.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 213 Footwear Upper Fabrication Technology I The objective of the course is to enable the
student to understand
 The various operations of upper fabrication in footwear manufacturing of various mens

style.
 To understand the basic techniques of hand cutting operation.
 To understand the area consumption and wastage calculation on a hide or skines after
pattern layouting.
 To practice all upper fabrication operation relating to upper making of mens style.
 To perform quality checking of cut components and ready upper.
Course Content
UNIT I PATTERN NESTING USING VARIOUS COMPONENT PATTERNS OF MEN’S STYLES AND
CUTTING.
• Sorting and identification of leather/non-

leather/textiles/synthetics/bottom materials.
• Practising Identification of lines of tightness & stretch in upper
materials.
• Practising identification of material defects & their possible usage in
production.
• Nesting techniques of sectional/lining/bottom profiles by tracing
method followed by cutting (hand & machine both).
• Quality check and material optimization.
• Area consumption and wastage calculation.
UNIT II UPPER CLOSING
• Practising all operations of upper closing for all the aforesaid Men’s
styles.
 Skiving exercises.
 Upper marking exercises for closing.
 Edge coloring exercises.
 Folding and lining attaching exercises.
 Stitching on different machine exercises.
 Eyeletting exercises.
 Excess lining trimming exercises.
 Quality checking of the fabricated upper.
UNIT III SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
• Explanation of sequence of operation from cut components to upper

closing of the aforesaid mens styles.
Evaluation Scheme
PRACTICAL
(100 MARKS)
30 20 10 20 20
2. Comprehensive Footwear Technology by S.N Ganguly- ILTA Publications
3. Text Book of Footwear Manufacture by J.H Thornton-Temple Press Book Limited.
Course Outcomes
CO I To articulate the basic skill and knowledge on pattern layouting on hides and skines.
CO II To apply the knowledge and skill on footwear upper making of various mens styles.
CO III Profund skill and knowledge on the process of upper making and the intricacies
involved at the level of each operation.
CO IV Apply skill on making uppers from given cut components of a particular style/design
following the standards and quality specifications.
*******
FOOTWEAR BOTTOM FABRICATION
TECHNOLOGY I
(FWTPC 215)
Course Title : FOOTWEAR BOTTOM FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY I.
Number of Credits : 1.5
Pre Requisite : Elementary knowledge of Lasting and Finishing Operations.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 215 Footwear Bottom Fabrication Technology I The course aims at providing exposure to the
students in skill development and
 To understand the preparation of various footwear bottom components such as Insole,
sole, heel, shank, bottom filler, stiffeners etc.
 To acquire knowledge and skills on insole attaching.
 To understand knowledge and skill on drafting and hand/machine lasting pulls.
 To acquire knowledge and skills on sole attachment process and adhesion techniques.
 To acquire skil and knowledge on various shoe finishing operations.
Course Content
UNIT I Practising the preparation of the bottom profiles of aforesaid mens styles.
UNIT II Practising drafting pulls and exercises on pre-fabricated uppers.
UNIT III Practising upper preparation practical exercises on pre-fabricated uppers.
UNIT IV Practising hand/machine iasting exercises on pre-fabricated uppers.
UNIT V Practising bottoming exercises on lasted bottom.
UNIT VI Practising finishing and packing exercises on complete footwear.

Evaluation Scheme
PRACTICAL
(100 MARKS)

30 20 10 20 20
2. Comprehensive Footwear Technology by S.N Ganguly- ILTA Publications
3. Text Book of Footwear Manufacture by J.H Thornton-Temple Press Book Limited.
5. Leather and Shoe Finishing by R.D Singh-Invincible Publishers.
Course Outcomes
CO I To articulate the basic skill and knowledge on drafting pulls and exercises.
CO II To apply the knowledge and skill on upper preparation for bottoming operations.
CO III Profund skill and knowledge on hand & machine lasting techniques.
CO IV Apply skill on bottoming and finishing operations.
*******
FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER
GRAPHICS DESIGNING LAB
(FWTPC 217)
Course Title : FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER GRAPHICS DESIGNING LAB.
Pre Requisite : Elementary knowledge on basic computer applications.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 217 FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER GRAPHICS DESIGNING LAB The course aims at providing
exposure to students in skill development towards basic computer graphics.
Course Content
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS
• Introduction.
• Definition of Graphics.
• History of Computer Graphics.
• Application domains of Computer Graphics.
• Areas of Computer Graphics.
• Types of Graphics.
UNIT II GRAPHICS SOFTWARE
• Introduction & Applications.

UNIT III DRAWING USING MICROSOFT PAINT
• Getting started with Microsoft Paint.

• The Microsoft Paint User Interface.
• Basic Tools of Microsoft Paint.
• Editing & Drawing a Picture.
• Colour Palette.
• Text Boxes.
• Selecting, Cropping, Resizing Pictures.
UNIT IV DESIGNING USING CORELDRAW
• Getting started with CorelDraw.

• Introduction to CorelDraw.
• The CorelDraw User Interface.
• Understanding the basics in CorelDraw.
• Drawing – lines, shapes, inserting pictures, objects, tables, templates
• Psychology of Colours.
• Understanding the Colour Palette.
• Adding special effects, Exporting drawings, outlining & filling objects,
inserting symbols & Clip arts.
• Understanding other controls.
UNIT V WORKING WITH ADOBE PHOTOSHOP
• Photoshop history.
• Getting started with Photoshop.
• Introduction to Photoshop.
• Interface Layout.
• Palettes, Toolbox.
• Drawing lines & shapes.
• Inserting picture & shapes, filling colours, colour adjustments, text
effects, working with layers.
• Photoshop presentations.
• Web Gallery in Photoshop.
UNIT VI WORKING WITH ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR
:
• Introduction to Adobe Illustrator.
• Getting started with Adobe Illustrator.
• Exploring the Interface.
• Toolbox description.
• Art board overview.
• Drawing with Pen and Pencil Tools.
• Colour & Painting.
• Working with Layers.
• Inserting and Formatting Text.
• Applying Style and Effects.
• Exporting & Saving.
Evaluation Scheme
PRACTICAL
(100 MARKS)
30 20 10 20 20
1. Adobe Photoshop CS6 Digital Classroom by Jenifer Smith-Willey Publications
2. Corel Draw X7 User Guide by Corel Corporation.
3. Adobe Illustrator Classroom in a Book (2020 release) by Brian Wood.
4. Best Computer Learning BooksII Application softwareIMS Paint by Digital Dishari Computer
Education Centre.
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the students will be able to understand the computer graphics and can be
able to understand the fundamentals of Corel Draw, Photoshop & Adobe Illustrators.
CO I Articulate the basic skill and knowledge on computer graphics.
CO II Apply the knowledge and skill on the fundamentals of coral draw, adobe photoshop &
adobe illustrators.
CO III Profund skill and knowledge on application of this software in development various
footwear designs.
CO IV Apply designing skill on insole designing.
*******
COMMUNICATION SKILL II LAB
(FWTPC 219)
Course Title : COMMUNICATION SKILL II LAB.
Pre Requisite : Basic knowledge on parts of speech, sentence making etc.
Course Objectives
FWTPC 219 COMMUNICATION SKILL II LAB The course aims at providing exposure to students in skill
development and
 To acquire a new perspective on Communication Skills in English.
 To improve the student’s fluency in English language, through a well developed
vocabulary and enabled them to respond appropiately in different socio-cultural
contexts.
 To enable them to listen to English spoken at normal conversational speed.
 To communicate their ideas relevently and coherently in writing.
 To strengthen their professional skill.
 To make the students industry-ready.
Course Content
UNIT I BUILDING VOCABULARY
• Synonyms.
• Antonyms.
• Homophones.
• Homonyms.
• Words often confused.
• One word substitution.
• Prefixes and Suffixes.
• Idioms and Phrasal Verbs.
• Some commonly used Idioms.
• Some common Phrasal Verbs.
UNIT II LISTENING SKILLS
• Listening to Eminent Speeches by Great Speakers, TV News.

• Listening to Short stories.
• Listening to Video clips, documentaries, feature films and
presentations.
• Listening for the gist of the text – for identifying topic’s general
meaning and specific information.
• Listening for multiple-choice questions- for positive & negative
comments, for interpretation.
UNIT III SPEAKING SKILLS
• Introduction oneself, Friends, Family, Starting a conversation.

• Polite Expressions (Greetings, Requesting, Thanking, Apoligizing,
Opinions, Suggestions).
• Using the right body language.
• Role playing in different situations.
• Describing an Object, Describing a Process, Describing Situations.
• JAM.
• Public Spaeaking and Debates.
UNIT IV READING SKILLS
• Reading Newspaper, Magazines, Articles.

• Reading for facts.
• Guessing meaning for contexts, Skimming, Scanning, Summary,
Inferring meaning, Critical Reading.
• Reading for the gist of a text-for information transfer and
interpretation.
UNIT V WRITING SKILLS
• Developing Outlines, Key Expressions about situations.

• Dialogue writing.
• Interpreting Pictures.
• Writing memos, Notices, Agendas, Leaflets, Brochures, and Minutes of
a meeting.
• Drafting Editorial Letters, Writing Technical Reports.
• Writing Short Proposals.
UNIT VI GETTING READY FOR JOB
• Before Interview - Curriculum Vitae / Resume, Covering Letter, E-mail
Writing.
• During Interview- G.D, Mock Interviews, Psychometric Tests, Follow

Up.
• After Interview- Excelling in Profession, Team Spirit and Work Culture.
Evaluation Scheme
PRACTICAL
(100 MARKS)
30 20 10 20 20
1. Effective Technical Communication by M Ashraf Rizvi-McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited.
2. English for Effective Communication by Kumar, Sanjay and Pusp Lata-Oxford University Press.
3. Manual for Effective Language Communication Skills by D.Sudharani-Pearson.
4. English Language Laboratories-Nira Konar-PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
5. Communicative English for Engineers & Professionals by Nitin Bhatnagar-Pearson.
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO I Acquire vocabulary and use it contextually.
CO II Develop proficiency in listening, speaking, reading and writing.
CO III Increase possibilities of job prospects.
CO IV Communicate confidently in both formal & informal contexts.
*******
SUMMER INTERNSHIP I
(SI 201)
Course Code : SI 201.
Course Title : SUMMER INTERNSHIP I.
Course Category : Internship Programme.
Contact : 1 Lecture/week, 1hr/Lecture, Total 15 Practical.
Pre Requisite : Basic knowledge on theoritical subjects of Footwear manufacture.
Course Objectives
SI 201 SUMMER INTERNSHIP I The course aims at providing exposure to students in skill development
and
 To offer an opportunity for the young students to acquire on job the skills, knowledge,
attributes and perceptions along with the experience needed to constitute a
professional identity.
 To provide means to immerse students in actual supervised professional experiences.
Course Content
After the end of Second Semester, the students are required to involve in Inter/Intra Institutional
activities viz. training and simulation program with different Institutes like workshops of ITI. Other
polytechnics and other technical Institutions; Soft skill training organized by Training & Placement Cell
of the respective Institutions; contribution at innovation/entrepreneurship cell of the institute;
participaion in workshops/competitions etc; Learning at Departmental Lab/ Institutional workshop.
Documentation in the form of report should be submitted by the candidates for evaluation purposes.
Evaluation Scheme
PRACTICAL
(100 MARKS)
Project Report Submission/ Presentation Viva Voce
Feedback from Industry
50 Marks 25 Marks 25 Marks
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO I To test the theoritical learning in practical situations by acomplising the task assigned
during the internship period.
CO II Able to apply various soft skills such as time management, positive sttitude and
communication skills during performance of the tasks assigned in intership
organisation.
CO III To assess interest and abilities in the field of study.
CO IV Learn to appreciate work and its function in the economy.
*******
PROPOSED
3RD SEMESTER
CURRICULAR STRUCTURE
AND
SYLLABI OF
FULL-TIME DIPLOMA COURSE
IN
GIS & GPS

WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL & VOCATIONAL EDUCATION
AND SKILL DEVELOPMENT

BRANCH: GIS & GPS SEMESTER: III
EVALUATION SCHEME
SL
CLASS/WK
CATEGORY CODE COURSE TITLE CREDIT INTERNAL
NO ESE PIA PEA TOTAL
L T P INT AS/QZ ATD
Program
1 GISPC201 Spatial Statistics-I 3 2 1 20 10 10 60 100
core course
Program
2 GISPC202 Cartography In GIS 2 2 20 10 10 60 100
core course
Program Basic Concept of
3 GISPC203 Navigation
2 2 20 10 10 60 100
core course
Program Problem Solving and
4 GISPC204 Coding
3 3 20 10 10 60 100
core course
Program
5 GISPC205 Applied Surveying 3 3 20 10 10 60 100
core course
Program Computer
6 GISPC206 Programming Lab
1 2 60 40 100
core course
Program Computer Aided
7 GISPC207 Drafting
2 4 60 40 100
core course
Program
8 GISPC208 Field Survey Practice-I 3 6 60 40 100
core course
Summer
9 SI201 Summer Internship-I 1
Internship 100 100
TOTAL 20 12 1 12 900
STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK: 25 Hrs. Theories and Practical Period of 60 Minutes each.
L – Lecture, T –Tutorial, P – Practical, INT- Internal Assessment AS/QZ – Assignment / Quiz ATD- Attendance ESE - End
Semester Exam, PIA-Practical Internal Assessment PEA-Practical External Assessment.
Name of the Course : Diploma in GIS & GPS
Course Title: Spatial Statics-I Course code : GISPC201

Number of Credit : 3 Semester : THIRD
Theory : - 2 hrs/week Continuous Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Tutorial: - 1 Attendance 10 Marks
Practical : NIL Assignment/Presentation/Quiz 10 Marks
Total Contact Hours: 45 Hours End Semester Examination 60 Marks
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of mathematics and statistics is required.

Aim: To study, understand and apply the basic concepts of Spatial Statistics in GIS.
Course Objective :
Understand the concept of Basic Spatial Statistics.
Understand and develop the concepts of statistical analysis in GIS.
Understand the concept of Sampling methods, Network analysis, overlaying data,organization of data, etc.
Understand the concept of measuring area, perimeter of a region.
Course Content :
Content (Theory) Module Hrs./Unit
Introduction
1.1 Introduction to statistics.
Unit:1 1.2 Univariate statistics 5
1.3 Multivariate statistics
1.4 Inferential statistics.
1.5 Set Theory.
2.1 Spatial scale.
2.2 Spatial data collection.
2.3 Spatial sampling. Module 1
2.4 Secondary data sources.-Remote sensing;
Unit: 2 Ground survey 10
2.5 Sources of data error.
2.6 Uncertainty in spatial data analysis.
2.7 Visualizing spatial data.
2.8 Querying data.
2.9 Boolean logic
3.1 Introduction to spatial data analysis.
3.2 Key Concepts-Distances, Measuring lengths
Unit: 3 3.3 and perimeters, Length of vector features, 10
Measuring areas, Areas of polygons, Distances
from objects: buffers- Vector buffers and
Rasterproximity
Moving windows: basic statistics in sub
regions
3.3 Geographical weights
3.4 Spatial dependence and spatial autocorrelation
3.5 The ecological fallacy and the modiﬁable
arealunit problem.
3.6 Merging polygons. Module 2
4.1 Combining data layers
4.2 Multiple features: overlays.
4.3 Point in polygon.
Unit: 4 4.4 Overlay operators. 10
4.5 ‘Cookie cutter’ operations: erase and clip.
4.6 Applications and problems.
4.7 Multi-criteria decision analysis
4.8 Case study
5.1 Network analysis-introduction
5.2 Networks
5.3 Network connectivity
Unit: 5 5.4 Summaries of network characteristics Module 3 10
5.5 Identifying shortest paths
5.6 The travelling salesperson problem
5.7 Location–allocation problems
5.8 Case study
Total 45
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type questions
15 10 10
carrying 1 mark.
Fill in the blanks type
questions carrying 1 15 10 10
mark.
Short answer type
Theoretical
mark.
Subjective type
marks.
Subjective type 9
questions carrying 6 (3 each from each 3 18
marks. of 3 modules)
TOTAL 60
References:
1. Carlo Gaetan · Xavier Guyon, Spatial Statistics and Modelling, Springer
2. ALFRED STEIN, FREEK VAN DER MEER AND BEN GORTE, SPATIAL STATISTICS
FOR REMOTE
SENSING, KLUWER ACADEMIC PUBLISHERS
Course outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Distinguish different types of spatial data (geostatistical, areal, point process)
2. Determine which spatial methods to use to in their own research and implement them using
statistical software and GIS.
3. Read and discuss new methods in the spatial statistics literature based on an understanding of
the basic spatial statistics approaches, principles and main assumptions
Course Title: Cartography in GIS Course code : GISPC202
Tutorial: - NIL Attendance 10 Marks
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of geography is required.

Aim : Understand the concept of Cartography.
Course Objective:
To study and understand the basic concepts and development of Cartography.
To acquire knowledge on projection systems, datum and co-ordinate system.
To learn how to apply concept of Cartography in GIS.
Course Content :
Content(Theory) Module Hrs./Unit

1.1 History and Principle of cartography, definitions.
1.2 Elements of map.
1.3 Utility of map.
Unit:1 1.4 Types of Map. Study of topo-map. 4
1.5 Survey of India topographical maps
1.6 Map numbering system.
1.7 Difference between map & photo.
2.1 Map Projection.
2.2 Principles; Developable and Non developable
surfaces;
2.1 Properties of map projections; Map projection Module 1
classification: According to the Development of
Surface, According to Method of Deviation
(Source of Light), According to Global Properties,
Unit: 2 6
According to co-incidence of the projection
surface with the globe, According to projection
surface on the globe.
2.2 Datum. Different types of datum.
2.3 Co-ordinate systems: UTM,UPS,SPC,PLSS
2.4 Computation in Grid – Geographical to UTM and
vice versa.
3.1 Conventional Cartographic Technique.
3.2 SCRIBING- Scribing processes, Advances of
scribing techniques, base materials, instruments.
Unit: 3 3.3 Advantage of scribing over conventional system. Module 2 10
3.4 Developments in Cartography - Development of
cartography and analytical cartography since
World War II.
4.1 MAP REPRODUCTION- Computerized Map
Reproduction Technique.
4.2 Role of remote sensing, GPS & GIS in map
production, reproduction and map analysis.
4.3 Cartographic Visualization- Cartography and
digital cartography and visualisation; Geo-
Unit-4 visualisation. Module 3 10
4.4 Analytical cartography; web cartography;
Cartographic communication – virtual, cognitive,
temporal and permanent maps,
4.5 Digital cartography and World Wide Web.
4.6 Over view of Web map design,
Total 30
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type questions
15 10 10
carrying 1 mark.
mark.
Theoretical Short answer type
mark.
Subjective type
marks.
Subjective type 9
questions carrying 6 (3 each from each of 3 3 18
marks. modules)
TOTAL 60
Course outcomes:
1. Understand the historical development of of Cartography.
2. get clear concept of Map projections and Co-ordinate systems.
3. Understand Map reproduction and apply cartographic concept in GIS.
Course Title: Basic Concept of Navigation Course code : GISPC203
Theory : - 2 hrs/week Continuous Internal 20 Marks
Assessment
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of geography is required.

Aim : To study and understand the concepts of Navigation system. To acquire knowledge on
Global positioning System in detail. To learn application field of GPS
Course Objective:
Understand the concept of Global Positioning System.
Course Content :
1.1 Introduction of Global Positioning System,
Satellite constellation, GPS signals and data, Geo-
Unit:1 positioning-Basic Concepts. Discussion on 5
NAVSTAR, GLONASS,GALLILEO,COMPASS
etc.
2.1 Basic geodesy, Geoid /datum/ Ellipsoid- definition
and basic concepts.
2.2 Coordinate Systems, Special Referencing system,
Map Scale, Scale factors, Indian geodetic System
2.3 Segments of GPS: Control Segment, Space Module 1
Segments, User Segment -operations of GPS,
accuracy, error sources and analysis, methodology
Unit: 2 7
for collection of data, adjustment computations and
analysis.
2.4 Selection of datum, units and scale; GPS
measurement.
2.5 GPS Positioning Types- Absolute Positioning,
Differential positioning Methods-Static & Rapid
static, Kinematic-Real time kinematic Survey.
3.1 DGPS-GPS data processing and Accuracy.
3.2 Selection of Reference Station, Reference Station
Equipment: GPS receiver, GPS antenna. Radio and
its types, Radio Antenna GPS
Unit: 3 Module 2 8
3.3 Application of GPS in Surveying and Mapping,
Navigation, Military, Location Based Services,
Vehicle tracking, etc.
3.4 Limitation of GPS & DGPS.
4.1 Introduction to adjustment computations,
4.2 Observation equations, Code-based, Carrier phase-
based.
4.3 Navigational solution: Code/phase based.
4.4 Data Processing Models, Models for single point
Unit-4 positioning and relative/differential positioning. Module 3 10
4.5 Data combinations, Ambiguity resolution.
4.6 Single difference, Double difference, Triple
difference, Static relative positioning, Kinematic
relative positioning
Total 30
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type
questions carrying 15 10 10
1 mark.
Fill in the blanks
type questions 15 10 10
carrying 1 mark.
1 mark.
Subjective type
2 marks.
Subjective type 9
questions carrying (3 each from each 3 18
6 marks. of 3 modules)
TOTAL 60
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the concept of different segments of GPS system
2. Understand the concept of Differential GPS.
3. Understand the tracking system.
Course Title: Problem Solving and Coding Course code : GISPC204
Prerequisite: : Design and implement classes and methods

Aim : Developing Coding knowledge to solve problems in computing.
Course Objective:
• Design and implement classes and methods
• Understand and implement basic programming constructs
• Apply object-oriented features to real time entities
• Understand and implement the concept of reusability and extensibility
• Create packages and interfaces and used it in programs
• Design and implement multithreaded programs
• Manage errors and exceptions
• Create packages and interfaces and used it in programs
• Design and implement applet and graphics programming
• Make use of Data streams in programs
• Write programs by combining all features of Java.
Course Content :
Introduction to Java
1.1. Fundamentals of Object-Oriented Programming
Object and Classes, Data abstraction and
encapsulation, Inheritance, Polymorphism,
Dynamic
Binding.
1.2. Java Features Compiled and Interpreted,
Platform independent and portable, Object
Unit:1 oriented Distributed, Multithreaded and Module 1 15
interactive, High performance.
1.3. Constant, Variables and Data Types Constant,
Data Types, Scope of variable, Symbolic
Constant, Typecasting, Standard default values
1.4. Operator and Expression Arithmetic Operators,
Relational Operators, Logical Operators,
Assignment Operator Increment and Decrement
Operator, Conditional Operator, Bit wise
Operator, Special Operator
1.5. Decision making and Branching Decision
making with if statement, Simple if statement,
The if else statement, The else if ladder, The
switch statement, The? : Operator.
1.6. Decision making and Looping. the While
statement,
the do statement, the for statement, Jumps in
Loops, Labeled Loops
2.1 Classes, Object and Methods Defining a class,
Creating object, Accessing class members,
Constructor, Methods Overloading, Static
Member.
2.2 Inheritance Extending a Class (Defining a
subclass Constructor, Multilevel inheritance,
Hierarchical inheritance, Overriding Methods,
Unit: 2 10
Final variable and Methods, Final Classes,
Abstract method and Classes.
2.3 Visibility Control Public access, friend access,
Protected access, Private access, Private
Module 2
Protected access.
2.4 Array, Strings and Vectors, One Dimensional
array, Creating an array, Two Dimensional array
Interfaces and Packages
3.1 Interface: Multiple Inheritance Defining interfaces,
extending interfaces, implementing interfaces,
Accessing Interface variable.
Unit: 3 5
3.2 Packages: Putting Classes Together System Package,
using system Package, Naming Convention,
Creating Package, accessing a package, using a
package, adding a class to a package.
Multithreaded Programming and Exception handling
4.1 Multi-Threading:
Creating Thread, extending a thread class, Stopping
and Blocking a thread, Life cycle of thread, using
thread method, Thread exceptions, Thread priority,
Synchronization, Implementing a ‘Runnable’
Unit-4 5
Interface.
4.2 Managing Errors and Exceptions
Types of errors, Exception, Multiple catch
statement,
using finally statement, Using Exception for
Debugging.
Streams and File I/O
5.1 Stream Classes Module 3
Unit-5 5.2 Character Stream, Byte Stream 5
5.3 Serialization.
DATA BASE CONNECTIVITY: JDBC
Java Data Base Client/ Server
6.1 Java as a Database front end Database client/server
methodology, Two-Tier Database Design, Three-
Tier Database Design
Unit-6 5
6.2 The JDBC API. The API Components, Limitations
Using JDBC (Applications vs. Applets), Security
Considerations, A JDBC Database Example JDBC
Drivers, JDBC-ODBC Bridge Current JDBC
Drivers
Total 45
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type
1 mark.
Fill in the blanks
carrying 1 mark.
1 mark.
Subjective type
2 marks.
Subjective type 9
TOTAL 60
References:
1. Core Java for Beginners: A Simplified Approach (Covers Java SE 13) by Shah and Shah
2. JAVA One Step Ahead, Anita Seth. B.L.Juneja, Oxford
Course Outcomes
1. Comprehend Java Virtual Machine architecture and Java Programming Fundamentals.
2. Design applications involving Object Oriented Programming concepts such as inheritance,
association, aggregation, composition, polymorphism, abstract classes and interfaces.
3. Design and build multi-threaded Java Applications.
4. Build software using concepts such as files, collection frameworks and containers.
5. Design and implement Java Applications for real world problems involving Database
6. Connectivity
Course Title: Applied Surveying Course code : GISPC205
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of mathematics, Geometry and drawing skill is required.

Aim : Developing the surveying skill required for application in Geographical Information
system.
Course Objective:
1. Study and understand the working principle of basic survey instruments.
2. Apply the concept of survey in GIS & GPS.
3. Understand linear and angular measurements.
4. Calculate the area of land.
5. Prepare setting out table for alignments for roads, railways, canals, pipelines, tunnels etc.
6. Prepare contour map.to compute area and volume from given contour map.
Course Content :
Types of Survey
Definition, objects of surveying, principles of
surveying, uses of survey, classification of surveying
Unit:1 5
– plain, geodetic, secondary – based on instruments,
method,
object, nature of field.
Measurement of horizontal distance
2.1 Introduction
2.2 Methods of measuring horizontal distance –
pacing, odometer reading, tacheometry,
electronicdistance measurement, chaining and
taping
2.3 Principles of chain surveying and accessories for
chaining and taping - chain, tape, ranging rod, Module 1
arrows, pegs, cross staff, optical square, ranging
rod, plumb bob, object rod
Unit: 2
2.4 Measurement by chain – on level ground and on
10
sloping ground, reduction to measurement in
slope, ranging – direct and indirect ranging
Systematic errors in linear measurement by
chain or tape – incorrect length, tape or chain
not horizontal, fluctuation in temperature,
incorrect tension or pull, sag and incorrect
alignments and chain or tape not straight,
necessary corrections, numerical problems.
2.5 Chain and tape survey of a field - survey lines,
check lines, tie lines, base line. taking offsets –
perpendicular and oblique offset, long and short
offset, degree of offset, error in offset, limiting
length of offset, points to be considered in
selecting station
2.6 Setting out right angles – a. by instruments
(cross staff, optical square, their working
methodology and specific use in field) b. by
chain or tape
2.7 Obstacles in chaining – obstacles to ranging but
notchaining, obstacles to chaining but not
ranging, obstacles to both chaining and ranging,
numerical problems
2.8 chain & cross staff survey for finding area of a
field (numerical problems)
2.9 Field work for chain survey, booking the field
work, conventional signs related to survey,
degree of
accuracy of chaining.
Compass Survey
4.7 Brief introduction to different types of horizontal
angles and directions, Principle of compass survey,
bearing of lines – meridian – true, magnetic, and
arbitrary bearing, fore bearing, back bearing, whole
circle bearing, quadrantal bearing system and
reduced bearing, conversion of bearings, finding
included angles from bearings, declinations, dip of
the magnetic needle. (Numerical problems)
4.8 Prismatic compass, and trough compass –
component, construction and use.
Unit: 3 4.9 Local attraction, causes, precautions to be taken 8
toavoid local attraction and correction of
bearings affected due to local attraction,
calculation of included angles.
4.10 Traversing – open traverse, closed traverse,
check on open and closed traverse, Graphical
adjustmentfor closing error.
4.11 Numerical problems on calculation of bearings, Module 2
angles and local attraction.
4.12 Error in compass surveying – instrumental
error, personal error and natural error,
permissible value of error
Levelling
4.1 Definitions – level surface, level line, horizontal
line,vertical line, datum surface, mean sea level,
reduced level, bench mark and its types.
4.2 Study and use Engineers' level – a. dumpy level
– components, construction b. tilting level and
c.automatic level or self levelling level
Unit-4 10
4.3 Terms used in levelling - line of sight, line of
collimation, bubble tube axis, leveling staff –
telescopic and folding type, foresight, back
sight, intermediate sight, change point, height of
collimation, fundamental axes and their
relationship, recording in level book, temporary
adjustments of dumpy level, procedure for
permanent adjustment
4.4 Method of reduction of levels – height of
instrument method and rise and fall method-
relative merit and demerits, arithmetical checks,
numerical problems, computation of missing
readings.
4.5 Classifications of leveling - simple,
differential profile, cross sectional, fly and check
14eveling (numerical problems)
4.6 Sources of errors in levelling – instrumental
error, personal error and natural error,
precautions and reducing errors and eliminating
mistakes in levelling, error adjustment,
permissible error in levelling, difficulties faced
in levelling.
Contouring
5.1 Definitions – contour, contour interval,
horizontal equivalent.
5.2 Characteristics of contours (e.g. pond, cliff,
overhanging cliff, etc) method of locating
UNIT-5 6
contours- indirect method of contouring
(interpolation of contours), direct contouring
methods, establishing grade contours.
5.3 Uses of contour maps, interpretation of typical
contour sheets.
Plane Table Surveying
7.1 Introduction – principle of plane table
surveying.
7.2 Equipment and accessories in plane table
Module 3
surveying, their use.
7.3 Working with plane table – fixing, levelling,
centering, and orientation – by trough compass
and by back sighting.
UNIT-6 7.4 Different methods of plane tabling work: a.
6
radiation, b. intersection, c. traversing and d.
resection – two point problem, three point
problem.
7.5 Advantage and disadvantage of plane table
survey, errors in plane table survey -
instrumental, in plotting and due to
manipulation and sighting.
Total 45
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type questions
15 10 10
carrying 1 mark.
Theoretical
mark.
Short answer type
mark.
Subjective type questions
10 6 12
carrying 2 marks.
9
(3 each from each 3 18
carrying 6 marks.
of 3 modules)
TOTAL 60
References:
1. Surving and levelling by N N BASAK.
2. SURVING VOL 1 & 2, BY PUNMIA, JAIN & JAIN
3. SURVING VOL 1&2 BY S K DUGGAL
Course Outcomes:
4. Understand the principle of basic Survey instruments.
5. Understand the concepts of Chain survey, Compass Survey , Levelling operation and Plane
tabling.
6. Prepare contour of an area.
7. Understand the terrain condition of an area from the contour diagram.
Course Title: Computer Programming Lab Course code : GISPC206
Theory : - NIL Continuous Internal Assessment 50 Marks
Practical : 2 hrs/week
Prerequisite: Basic Knowledge of Logic and Problem solving, Proper handling of Computer
System.
Aim : Developing programming concept.
Course Objective:
Use of programming language constructs in program implementation.
To be able to apply different logics to solve given problem.
To be able to write program using different implementations for the same problem.
Study different types of errors as syntax semantic, fatal, linker & logical
Debugging of programs.
Understanding different steps to develop program such as Problem definition ,Analysis ,Design of
logic ,Coding ,Testing
Maintenance (Modifications, error corrections, making changes etc.)
Instructions:
1. Group size for Computer Lab should be formed in such a way that each student of a group can
use computer independently to understand the programming concept.
Content :
Assignments / Practical Hrs./Unit
LIST OF SAMPLE PROBLEMS FOR COMPUTER
PROGRAMMING LAB
Write simple programs based on basic syntactical constructs of Java
like:
a) Operators and expressions.
b) Looping statements.
c) Decision making statements.
d) Type casting.
1. Write a simple Java program to demonstrate use of command line
arguments in Java.
2. Write a Java Program to define a class, describe its constructor,
overload the constructors and
instantiate its object
3.Write a Java Program to define a class, define instance methods for
setting and retrieving values of
instance variables and instantiate its object.
4.Write a Java Program to define a class, define instance methods and
overload them and use them for dynamic method invocation.
5.Write a Java Program to demonstrate use of sub class.
6.Write a Java Program to demonstrate use of nested class.
7.Write a Java Program to practice
- use of single Dimensional array.
- use of multidimensional array.
8.Write a Java Program to implement array of objects.
9.Write a Java program to practice
- using String class and its methods.
- using String Buffer class and its methods.
10. Write a Java Program to implement Vector class and its
methods.
11. Write a Java Program to implement Wrapper classes and their
methods.
12. Write a Java Program to implement single inheritance by
applying various access controls to its data members and methods.
13. Write a Java Program to implement multilevel inheritance by
applying various access controls to its data
members and methods.
14. Write a Java Program to implement inheritance and demonstrate
use of method overriding.
15. Write a program to demonstrate
- Use of implementing interfaces.
16. Write a Java program to implement the concept of importing
classes from user defined package and creating packages.
17. Write a program to implement the concept of threading.
18. Write a program to implement the concept of Exception
Handling
- using predefined exception.
- by creating user defined exceptions.
19. Write an application program /Applet to make connectivity with
database using JDBC API.
20. Write an application program/Applet to send queries through
JDBC bridge & handle result.
Total 30
Examination Scheme (End Semester Assessment)
Assessment type Marks
Assignment on the day of viva-
Practical/Sessional voce and practical report 20
submission
Viva-voce 20
Total 40
Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course, students should be able to
1. write programs for solving real world problems using java collection frame work.
2. write programs using abstract classes.
3. write multithreaded programs.
4. write GUI programs using swing controls in Java.
Course Title: Computer Aided Drafting Course code : GISPC207
Prerequisite: Concept/skills in drawing and sketching. Students should be familiarized with
Computer environment.
Aim : Developing the computerized drawing skill required for GIS & GPS.
Course Objective:
Students will be able to:
Work with drawing and drafting software.
Make a drawing, create text, dimension a drawing, hatch patterns and make & insertsymbols in 2D
and 3D.
Draw and plot a drawing with the help of computer, software and plotter / printer.
Prepare a set of drawings of a building, land etc.
Content :
Sl. No. Assignments / Practical Hrs./Unit
GETTING STARTED
A. Starting CAD –CAD screen components – Starting a drawing: Open
drawings, Create drawings (Start from scratch, Use a template & Use
a wizard) – Invoking commands in CAD – Drawing lines in CAD –
Co-ordinate systems: Absolute co-ordinate system, Relative co-
ordinate system – Direct distance method – Saving a drawing: Save
1 & Save As – Closing a drawing – Quitting CAD 10
B. Opening an existing file – Concept of Object – Object selection
methods: Pick by box, Window selection, Crossing Selection, All,
Fence, Last, Previous, Add, Remove – Erasing objects: OOPS
command, UNDO / REDO commands – ZOOM command – PAN
command,
Panning in real time – Setting units – Object snap, running object snap
mode – Drawing circles
USE OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF COMMANDS
A DRAWING COMMANDS. ARC– RECTANG – ELLIPSE
,POLYGON - PLINE – DONUT – POINT – Construction Line:
2 XLINE , RAY – MULTILINE 10
B EDITING COMMANDS . MOVE command – COPY
command – OFFSET command – ROTATE command – SCALE
command – STRETCH command – LENGTHEN command –
TRIM command – EXTEND command – BREAK command –
CHAMFER command – FILLET command – ARRAY command –
MIRROR command –MEASURE command – DIVIDE command –
EXPLODE command – MATCHPROP command – Editing with
grips: PEDIT
C INQUIRY COMMANDS
AREA – DIST – ID – LIST – DBLIST – STATUS – DWGPROPS
D. HATCHING COMMANDS
BHATCH, HATCH commands – Boundary Hatch Options: Quick
tab, Advance tab – Hatching around Text, Traces, Attributes, Shapes
and Solids – Editing Hatch Boundary – BOUNDARY command
DRAWING AIDS
Layers – Layer Properties Manager dialog box – Object Properties:
Object property toolbar, Properties Window – LTSCALE Factor –
Auto Tracking – REDRAW command, REGENcommand.
CREATING TEXT
Creating single line text – Drawing special characters – Creating
multiline text – Editing text –Text style
BASIC DIMENSIONING
3 Fundamental dimensioning terms: Dimension lines, dimension text, 15
arrowheads, extension lines, leaders, centre marks and centrelines,
alternate units – Associative dimensions – Dimensioning methods –
Drawing leader.
EDITING DIMENSIONS
Editing dimensions by stretching – Editing dimensions by trimming &
extending – Editing dimensions: DIMEDIT command – Editing
dimension text: DIMTEDIT command – Updating dimensions –
Editing dimensions using the properties window – Creating and
restoring Dimension styles: DIMSTYLE
BLOCKS
The concept of Blocks – Converting objects into a Block: BLOCK,
_BLOCK commands – Nesting of Blocks – Inserting Blocks:
4
INSERT, MINSERT commands – Creating drawing files: 10
WBLOCK command – Defining Block Attributes – Inserting Blocks
with Attributes – Editing Attributes
3D IN CAD
Introduction , Co-ordinate system, Surface Modeling
Solid Primitives: Box, Wedge, Cylinder,Cone, Sphere, Torus,
Pyramid, Region, Extrude, Revolve, Union, Subtract
5 Intersect, Interfere, Polysolid, Sweep, Helix, Loft, Press/Pull, 10
Advanced Topics in CAD 3D
Rpref, Geographiclocation, Sunproperties, Materials, Image attach
Imageadjust Imageclip Imageframe Imagequality Transparency
Draworder Export/Import
ADVANCED TOPICS IN CAD
6 Importing data from other format to CAD environment- Exporting data 5
into other format from CAD Environment.
Total 60
submission
Viva-voce 20
Total 40
Course Outcomes:
1. Make a drawing using drafting software.
2. Prepare 2D and 3D drawing of a building plan.
3. Import data from other format to CAD environment and Export data into other format from
CAD environment.
Course Title: Field Survey Practice-I Course code : GISPC208
Prerequisite:Perfection in drawing and sketching. Students should have basic knowledge of

Surveying.
Aim : Developing the survey skill required for the areas related to Geographic Informationsystem
Course Objective:
Identify and use different survey instruments.
Record and observe necessary observation with the survey instruments.
Compute necessary survey data from field observation for preparation of drawing etc.
Prepare report including drawing using survey data collected in the field.
Instructions:
2. Group size for survey practical work should be formed in such a way that each student from
a group can handle instruments independently to understand the functions of different
components of the instrument.
3. Drawing and plotting should be considered as part of practical work. A total number of 5
sheet (as per syllabus) must be prepared individually.
4. Term work shall consist of record of all practical and projects in field book and drawing of
Project work on full / half imperial size drawing sheets.
Content :
1. CHAIN SURVEY
1.1 Direct Ranging : Ranging by Eye – Ranging by Line Ranger –
Chaining on Level Ground
1.2 Indirect Ranging: Chaining on Sloping Ground
1.3 Laying of angle with chain and tape: 30°, 60°, 45° & 90°
1.4 Obstacle in Chaining: i) Chaining free but Vision obstructed.
1 ii)Chaining obstructed but vision free iii)Chaining and vision both 15
obstructed
1.5 Surveying an area with Chain and Tape: Reconnaissance the area
to be surveyed – Preparation of Key Plan and Reference Sketch –
Selection of Base Line, Station Points and Marking of Stations –
Booking Field Note – Plotting of Field Data with conventional
signs.
2. COMPASS SURVEY
2.1 Traversing an area with prismatic compass.
2.2 Traversing in presence of local attraction.
2.3 Surveying an area with prismatic compass- Field Work: noting the
2 15
field data-calculate the correct bearings. Post Field Work: plotting
the traverse by bearing and distance. Graphical adjustment of
closing error of the traverse.
3 PLANE TABLE SURVEY

3.1 Introduction to different part and accessories of a Plane Table.
3.2 Setting up and Orientation of plane table with Trough Compass and
Back Ray Method
3.3 Plane Tabling by Radiation Method
3.4 Plane Tabling by Intersection Method
3 20
3.5 Plane Tabling by Traversing Method
3.6 Plane Tabling by Resection Method
3.7 Fixing inaccessible objects in a plane table survey
3.8 Relaying a missing traverse station with plane table and sight vane
3.9 Surveying a small area by plane table and determination of area by
graphical method
4.0 LEVELLING
4.1 Temporary Adjustment of Levels.
4.2 B.M. connection from G.T.S.B.M. or local B.M.
4 4.3 Fly levelling with dumpy level and check levelling and recording 20
level book
4.4 Profile levelling and recording
Plotting longitudinal section in suitable scales from field notes.
5.0 PREPARATION OF CONTOUR
5.1 Preparation of Contour by Indirect Method using Square method.
Size of the grid should not be greater than 5 meter. Contour interval
5 should not be more than 0.5 meter. Preparation of drawing in a suitable 20
scale using interpolation method.
Total 90
submission
Viva-voce 20
Total 40
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the working principle of Chain survey, Compass Survey, Levelling and Plane
Table survey.
2. Hndle different survcey instruments like, Chain, Compass, Dumpy Level, Auto level and
Plane Table.
3. Prepare contour from field data.
Course Title: Summer Internship-I Course code : SI201
Duration : Maximum Marks :
Theory : - NIL Continuous Internal Assessment
Tutorial: - NIL
Practical : NIL
Total Contact Hours: End Semester Examination 100
Course Content :
After Second semester students are required to be involved in Inter/Intra Institutional
activities viz.; Training and simulation programme with different institutes like workshop of
ITI., other polytechnic and other technical institutions; soft skill training organized by
Training & Placement cell of respective Institutions; contribution at
innovative/entrepreneurship cell of the institute; participation in workshops/ competitions etc.;
learning at departmental lab/ institutional workshop.
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Instrumentation & Control

Engineering [ICE]
Revised 2022
WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL & VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND SKILL DEVELOPMENT
(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXVI of 2013)
Karigari Bhavan, 4th Floor, Plot No. B/7, Action Area-III, Newtown, Rajarhat, Kolkata–700 160
WBSCTVESD Curriculum for Diploma Courses in Engineering and Technology
Curriculum for
Instrumentation & Control Engineering
Semester III
Hours Per Examination Scheme
week Total
Sl
Category Code No. Course Title Contact Credits Marks External Internal Assessment-40
No.
L T P hrs/week Assessment
-60
End Sem Mid sem test Quizzies , Class
Theory Subjects Examinatio viva- voce, Attendance
n Assignment
Program
Analog
1 Core ICEPC201 2 1 3 3 100 60 20 10 10
Electronics
Course
Program Electrical
2 Core ICEPC203 Machine and 2 1 3 3 100 60 20 10 10
Course Measurement
Fundamentals
Program
of Electrical 60 20 10 10
3 Core ICEPC205 2 1 3 3 100
Circuit and
Course
network
Program
Programming
4 Core ICEPC207 2 1 3 3 100 60 20 10 10
in C
Course
Program Basic
5 Core ICEPC209 Instrumentation 2 1 3 3 100 60 20 10 10
Course & Control
Continuous Assessment- End Sem Assessment-
Practical Subjects
60 40
Assignment Class Class Assignment on Viva-voce
in classes Performa Attenda the day of grand (Before
nce nce viva board of
Examiners
Program Analog
6 Core ICEPC211 Electronics Lab 3 3 1.5 100 30 20 10 20 20
Course
Electrical
Program
Machine and 30 20 10 20 20
7 Core ICEPC213 3 3 1.5 100
Measurement
Course
Lab
Program Electrical
8 Core ICEPC215 Circuit and 3 3 1.5 100 30 20 10 20 20
Course network Lab
Program
Programming
9 Core ICEPC217 3 3 1.5 100 30 20 10 20 20
in C Lab
Course
Internship-
I (after
10 SI201 1 100
Semester
II)
TOTAL 27 22 1000
Semester : III
Course Code : ICEPC201
Course Title : Analog Electronics
Prerequisite : Basic on Electronics
Course Objective
 To know different analog electronic component with their characteristics.
 To operate and troubleshoot different electronic circuit.
 To learn different biasing techniques and characteristics of Diode, BJT,
FET.

Module 1 Unit 1 Semiconductor &Diode 7
Semiconductor Definition, Extrinsic/Intrinsic, N-type &
p-type.
PN Junction Diode, Forward and Reverse Bias
Characteristics of diode, Half Wave, Full Wave and
bridge rectifier. Capacitor filter.
Zener Diode – Principle, characteristics, construction, use.
Unit II Bipolar Junction Transistor 9

NPN and PNP Transistor, Operation and characteristics of
CE, CB, CC Configuration. Transistor as amplifier and
switch. Transistor lead identification.
Need for transistor biasing, operation of emitter and
voltage divider biasing.
Operation of RC coupled and Transformer coupled
amplifier.
Module 2 Unit III Field Effect Transistors 8

Principle and Working of JFET, Characteristics of JFET.
N-Channel/ P-Channel MOSFETs – characteristics,
enhancement and depletion mode, MOSFET as a Switch.
Unit IV Feedback Amplifier 8

Positive and negative feedback concept, Transfer gain
with feedback,General characteristics and advantages of
negative feedback, Study of Negative feedback on Gain,
Bandwidth, Noise, Distortion, Input and Output
impedances with the help of Block Schematic and
Mathematical Expressions.
Module 3 Unit V Oscillator 5

Basic principle of oscillator, Barkhausen criterion,
damped & un-damped oscillation.
Operation of L-C tuned oscillator, R-C phase shift
oscillator, Wien bridge oscillator.
Unit VI Operational Amplifier 8

Symbol, pin diagram, characteristics of an ideal op-amp,
OpAmp IC.
Application of Op-amp:
Inverting amplifier, Non-inverting amplifier, Adder,
Subtractor, Differentiator, Integrator, Unity gain buffer, V
to I and I to V converter, Comparator, Sine wave
generator, square wave generator, Triangular wave
generator, Sawtooth wave generator.

Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory Boylestad & Nashelsky PHI Pub. Co.
Electronic Principles A.P. Malvino Mc Graw Hill
Principle of Electronics V K Mehta, Rohit Mehta S Chand
Operational Amplifier and linear ICs D. A. Bell Oxford University Press
Electronic Devices & Circuits D. A. Bell Oxford University Press
Integrated Electronics Millman & Halkias Mc Graw Hill
Op-amps & linear integrated circuits R. Gayakwad PHI
Foundation of Electronics Chattopadhayay, New Age
Rakshit, Saha, Purkait
Analog Integrated Circuit Design Johns Wiley India
Linear Integrated Circuit Ganesh Babu, Suseela B. Scitech Publication
Linear Integrated Circuit D Roy Choudhury New Age
Electronic Device & Circuit Mottershed PHI
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Explain basic principle and operation of Diode, Transistor,
course student will Amplifier, Oscillator.
be able to: 2. Identify circuit element like Diode, BJT, FET, Op-Amp.
3. Construct electronic circuits using Diode, BJT, FET, Op-Amp.
4. Design and Develop circuits in application of Op-Amp.
Semester : III
Course Title : Electrical Machine and Measurement
Course Objective
 Operation, Maintenance and application of Transformer, DC Machine,
AC Machine.
 Use relevant measuring instrument in different electrical applications.
Module 1 Unit 1 Transformer 5

1.1 Construction, working principle and EMF equation of
transformerand simple problem
1.2 Open & short circuit test, Losses & efficiency of
transformer,
1.3 Working principle and characteristics of Single phase
Current & Potential transformer.
Unit II DC Generator and DC Motor 8

D.C. Generator
2.1 Construction & working principle of D. C. Generator,
EMFequation.
2.2 Excitation system, types of D.C. Generator, terminal
voltage, losses & efficiency, Specification of DC
machine.
D. C. Motor
2.3 Construction & working principle of D. C. Motor.
2.4 Type of motors & their uses
2.5 Speed control of DC Motor by field flux control &
armature voltage control of dc shunt motor.
Module 2 Unit III Synchronous Generator (Alternator) and A. C. Motors 9
Synchronous Generator (Alternator)
3.1 Construction, Working principle,
3.2 Relation between speed & frequency,
3.3 Pitch factor, Distribution Factor (No derivation
required).
A. C. Motors
3.4 Induction Motor: construction, types of rotor, rotating
magneticfield, principle of operation of single-phase
induction motor.
3.5 Synchronous speed, actual speed & slip, torque
equation, speed torque characteristics.
Unit IV D’Arsonaval Galvanometer 6

4.1 Construction, working principle, Deflecting torque
equation
4.2 Applications
4.3 Scale shape, damping arrangement, shunt, swamping
resistance
Module 3 Unit V Measurement of Voltage & Current, Power & Energy 12

Measurement of Voltage & Current
5.1 Construction, working principle, torque equation,
scale shape,sources of error, merits & demerits, &
applications of
a. Permanent Magnet Moving Coil Instrument,
b. Induction type instrument,
c. Moving Iron instrument,
5.2 Extension of instrument ranges: shunts & multipliers.
Measurement of Power & Energy
5.3 Construction & working principle of –
a. Single-phase dynamometer type wattmeter,
b. Induction type Watt-hour meter (single phase).
5.4 Errors , adjustments, advantages & disadvantages of
those.
Unit VI Measurement of Circuit Parameters 5

6.1 Classifications of low, medium, high resistance.
6.2 Measurement of Resistance by Wheatstone bridge,
Kelvin
Double Bridge & Megger
6.4 Schering Bridge
A Text Book of Electrical Technology Part-II B.L. Thereja S. Chand &. Co
Basic Electrical Engineering Mittle V. N. McGraw-Hill New Delhi
Electrical Technology Vol2:Machines & S.P. Bali Pearson Education
Measurement
Electrical Technology E. Huges Longman
Electrical Technology H. Cotton CBS Publisher
Electrical Machine Design A K Sahwney Dhanpat Rai & Co (P)
Ltd
Electrical Machines Samarjit Ghosh Pearson Education
Electrical Machines P.S. Bimbhra Khanna Book Publishing
Co
Electrical Machine P K Mukherjee Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Co (P) Ltd
DC Machine & Transformer K Murgesh Vikas
Kumar
Electrical Machine S K Bhattachaya Mc Graw Hill
Electrical Machine R.K. Rajput Laxmi Publication
A course in Electrical & Electronics A.K. Sawhney. Dhanpat Rai & Co
Measurement
& Instrumentation
Electrical Measurements and Measuring Suryanarayna S.Chand and Co
Instruments N.V
A Course in Electrical & Electronics J.B. Gupta S. K.Kataria& Sons
Measurement & Instrumentation
Electrical & Electronics Measurements and Purkait, Biswas, McGraw Hill Education
Instrumentation Das, Koley
Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Rajput R.K S.Chand and Co
Instrumentation
Electrical Measurements & Measuring Golding &Widdis A H Wheeler
Instruments
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Demonstrate and Explain the Operation of single-phase
course student will transformer, single phase DC machines, single phase AC machines,
be able to: D’Arsonval Galvanometer.
2. Do maintenance on transformer, DC and AC machine.
3. Make use of galvanometer, PMMC, MI, wattmeter, watt-hour
meter.
4. Measure electric voltage, current, power and energy.
inductance.
Semester : III
Course Title : Fundamentals of Electrical Circuit and network
Prerequisite : Idea of components used in a circuit, Fundamentals of AC
circuit.
Course Objective
 Able to solve dc and ac circuits using basic laws and by applying
network theorems and apply Laplace transform for solving the 1st order
and 2nd order circuits along with the concept of characteristics and design
of different types of filters.
Module 1 Unit 1 Application of Network Theorems in DC circuits 8

KCL, KVL, Node and Mesh Analysis, Source
Transformation
Statement, Explanation and solution of numerical
problems on: Thevenin’s Theorem, Norton’s Theorem,
Superposition Theorem, Maximum Power Transfer
Theorem.
Unit II Resonance of Series RLC Circuit 5

Properties of Resonance of RLC series Circuit
Variation of Resistance, Inductance, and Capacitive
Reactance with frequency
Q factor, Bandwidth, Selectivity, of Series Resonant
Circuit
Half Power frequency
Numerical solutions
Module 2 Unit III Resonance of Parallel RLC Circuit 5

Properties of Resonance of RLC series circuit
Variation of Capacitance, Inductive Susceptance,
Impedance and current with frequency
Q factor, Bandwidth, Selectivity, Detuning Factor of
Parallel Resonant Circuit
Numerical solutions
Unit IV Filter Circuit 8

Ideal Filter, Practical Filter, Active and Passive Filter,
Properties and Classification of Filter.
Frequency characteristics of low pass filters, high pass
filters, band pass filters and band stop filters (using
reactive elements)
Analysis and design of first order low pass and high pass
filters
Module 3 Unit V Laplace Transformation 8

Definition.
LT of Step, Pulse, Ramp, Sinusoidal, Exponential
function.
Laplace Transfer Theorem: Final Value, Initial Value,
Differentiation, Integration.
Inverse Laplace Transform with numerical problems
Unit VI Time Domain and Frequency Domain Analysis 6

Solution of first and second order differential equations
for series R-L, R-C, R-L-C circuits. Forced and free
response (Steady state and transient state response) and
time constants, Initial and final conditions in inductor and
capacitor
Analysis of electrical circuits using Laplace transform for
standard inputs (impulse, step, sinusoidal)

Circiut Theory(Analysis & Synthesis) A.K.Chakraborty DhanpatRai&Co
Electric Circuit Analysis Kumar PearsonEducation
Electric Circuits David A. Bell Oxford University
Press
Introduction to Electric Circuits Dorf Wiley
Network Theory:Analysis & Synthesis Ghosh PHI
Circuit Theory S.Salivahanan,S.Pravin Vikas
Kumar
Fundamentals of Electric Circuit Alexander McGrawHill
Electric Circuit David A.Bell Oxford
Circuits & Network Sukhua,Nagsarkar Oxford
A textBook of Electrical Technology Part-I B.L.Thereja S.Chand&.Co
Electric Circuit Analysis PRameshBabu Scitech
Electric Circuit Theory Chattopadhyay,Rakshit S.Chand&.Co
Circuit Network A.Dani BPB
Network Analysis & Synthesis RRSingh McGrawHill
Electric Circuit Analysis S.N.Sivanandam Vikas
Introductory circuit Analysis Boylested, R.L. Wheeler
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Apply network theorems to troubleshoot electric circuits.
course student will 2. Troubleshoot problems related to single phase A.C series and
be able to: parallel circuits.
3. Distinguish Series and Parallel resonance with circuit parameters
4. Design filter circuit with particular frequency and troubleshoot
problems related to filter Circuits
5. Solve numerical problems on Network theorems, Resonance, LT
6. Evaluate LT of signals and explain LT theorem.
Semester : III
Course Title : Programming in C
Prerequisite : Basic operation of computer
Course Objective
 To make students as a worthy programmer by getting idea on basic, looping,
branching, structure, pointer, array etc.

Module 1 Unit I Keywords, Variables Functions and Library is C 7
programming
Keywords in C. Definition of variables, Relation
between variable and memory location.
Function or method, classification of methods with
examples. Function call.
Library with header files. Idea on IDE.
Unit II Data types and operators in C 7

Classification and range of data types in C, idea on
memory allocation, declaration of data type with
format specifier,
Example of signed and unsigned data, character type
data.
Idea on ASCII.
Concepts of sizeof() and limits of each data type.
Explanation with example of Relational, Bitwise,
Logical, Arithmetic, Assigned, modify, conditional
operators
Module 2 Unit III Control Statements in C 8

If, if else, if else-if else, nested if else, while loop, do
while loop, nested while loop, for loop, break and
continue statements.
Switch case statement.
Unit IV Array in C 7
Definition of Array, memory allocation, local and
global declaration of 1 dimensional array, how to
process array element. Explanation of all with
programming.
Module 3 Unit V Structure and Union in C 8

Definition, memory allocation, size, local and Global
structure, initialization of structure, Array of structure,
nested structure.
Unions. Difference between structure and union.
Unit VI Pointer in C 8
Definition, declaration of pointer variable, types and
size of pointer, Call by value and call by reference,
pointer to function, pointer to array, pointer to pointer,
pointer to character string. Explanation of all with
programming.

Programming in C E.Balagurusamy McGraw Hill
Let Us C Kanetkar BPB
Programming in C ReemaThereja Oxford University Press
Complete Reference C Herbert Shield McGraw Hill
A textbook on C E.Karthikeyan PHI
Introduction to programming using C Pawar Wiley
Programming With C T.Jeyapoovan Vikas
All of C Ghosh PHI
Project Using C PVNVaralakshmi Scitech
Programming in C S.S.Khandare S.Chand &.Co
Programming in C J.Shah Charotar
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Get knowledge on Basic, variables, functions, libraries, data
course student will be types Operators in C.
able to: 2. Apply looping and branching concept in C programming as well
as any other programming language.
3. Apply array, pointer and structure to write program.
4. Debug and troubleshoot any programming in C
Semester : III
Course Title : Basic Instrumentation & Control
Prerequisite : Basic idea of Physics and Electronics
Course Objective
 To get overall idea of Instrumentation.
 To know about different parameters, specifications, characteristics and
subsystem in Instrumentation.
 To know the principle and application of different proximity sensors
 To get idea on different sensors and transducers related with force, strain,
displacement etc
 To get knowledge on Pneumetic and recording system
 To get concept of basics of process and control system
 To get concept of the mathematical equation from physical system for further
analysis
Module 1 Unit 1 Introduction 8

1. Significance of measurements, Classification of
instruments – absolute and secondary
2. Basic concepts of Instrumentation ,Elements of a
generalized measurement system with diagram and
functions of different components
3. Performance Characteristics of Instruments :
True value, indicated value, error, correction ,
range, span, sensitivity, accuracy, precision,
drift, threshold, resolution, hysteresis, ,
repeatability, reproducibility, speed of
response, lag, fidelity (definition with
example)
4. Errors in measurements:
Type of errors – gross, systematic
(instrumental, environmental and
observational) and random errors (definition
with example only)
5. Concept of calibration
Unit II Sensors and Transducers 17

1. Definition of sensors & transducers, difference
between sensor & transducer, factors governing the
choice of transducer
2. Classification of Transducer :
 Primary & Secondary,
 Electrical & Mechanical,
 Analog & Digital,
 Active & Passive
3. Description of the following transducers & proximity
sensors (construction, working principle, advantages,
disadvantages, application and range):
 Potentiometer,
 strain gauge,
 LVDT,
 RVDT,
 Capacitive type (change in area, distance and
dielectric constant),
 piezoelectric type,
 Magneto-strictive type,
 Hall Effect type
 Inductive type
 Optical type
 Ultrasonic type
Module 2 Unit III Basics of Pneumatic system 10

 Advantages and limitations of pneumatic system
 Construction, working principle and application of
flapper-nozzle assembly and pneumatic relay
 Concept of pneumatic transmitter
Unit IV Recorders 3
1. Necessity of recording in Instrumentation systems
2. Classification of recorders
3. Construction, working principle, advantages and
disadvantages of following recorders:
 XY recorder
 Strip chart recorder
 Magnetic tape recorder
Module 3 Unit V Introduction to Process & Control System: 3

1. Concept of process
2. Classification of process variables
3. Concept of open loop and closed loop control system.
4. Different elements in automatic close loop control systems.
Unit VI Mathematical Models of Physical System: 4
1. Concept of physical system, physical model and
mathematical model.
2. Mechanical system – translator (mass-spring-dashpot
system) system and rotational system.
3. Electrical system – RLC series and RLC parallel
system.
4. Concept of transfer function.
5. Block diagram representation of Control System,
Block diagram reduction techniques – simple problems.

Principles of Industrial Instrumentation D. Patranabis TMH
Sensors & Transducers D. Patranabis PHI
Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Dhanpat Rai &
A. K. Sawhney
Instrumentation Co.
Instrumentation Devices & System Rangan, Sarma, Mani Mc Graw Hill
Measurement System Application & Design E.O. Doeblin Mc Graw Hill
Principles of Measurement &
Alan S. Morris PHI
Instrumentation
Instrumentation for Engineering Wiley India Pvt
Dally
Measurement Ltd
Introduction to Measurement & PHI
Ghosh
Instrumentation
Process Control Instrumentation Technology Kartis Johnson PHI
Sensors & Transducers Yes Dee
Sinclair
Publishing
Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation Wiley India Pvt
A Barua
Ltd
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Get idea what is Instrumentation
course student will 2. Know important parameter/ specification & characteristic of
be able to: instruments
3.To know the principle and application of different proximity sensors
3. Install & troubleshoot measuring instrument like force, strain,
displacement etc.
4. Install & troubleshoot Pneumatic and recording instrument
5. Know basics of process and control system
6. Define the mathematical equation from physical system for further analysis
Semester : III
Course Title : Analog Electronics Lab
Number of : 1.5 (L:0, T:0, P:3)
Credits
Prerequisite : Basic on Analog Electronics
Course : PC
Category
Course Objective
 To identify the analog electronic components, construct electronic
circuits and troubleshoot the problem with different electronic circuits.
List of Practical work to be performed.

Construct the circuit and do the experiments with following aims:
Sl. No. Aims;
1 To study diode characteristics under forward and reverse bias condition
using junction diode and Zener diode.
2 To study half wave, full wave and Bridge rectifier with and without
capacitor filer. Check voltage waveform in CRO.
3 To plot transistor characteristics in CE/CB configuration.
4 To show biasing of a BJT, take output readings and draw characteristics
curve.
5 To plot drain and transfer characteristics for a given FET and to find drain
resistance and transconductance
6 Construct a circuit to show MOSFET acting as a switch
7 To design and construct a wien bridge/ RC phase shift oscillator for a
given cut-off frequency. See the output in oscilloscope.
8 Construct circuit to study following application of Op-Amp using IC
LM741
a) Inverting Amplifier
b) Non inverting amplifier
c) Adder
d) Subtractor
e) Integrator
f) Differentiator
9 To design circuit and study the non-linear application of Op-Amp
a) Sine wave generator
b) Square wave generator
c) Triangular wave generator
d) Sawtooth wave generator
Course Outcome
At the end of 1. Identify Analog electronics components like Diode, BJT, FET, Op-Amp.
the course 2. Construct and design of electronic circuit with the help of Diode,
student will Transistor, Op-Amp.
be able to: 3. Analyse input output characteristic of diode and transistor.
4. Design and construct rectifier and oscillator circuit.
5. Demonstrate and analyse application of LM741
Semester : III
Course Title : Electrical Machine and Measurement Lab
Number of : 1.5 (L:0, T:0, P:3)
Credits
Course : PC
Category
Course Objective
 Experiment with machine and measuring instruments.
 Use relevant measuring instrument in different electrical
applications.
List of Practical to be performed
1 To identify the construction details of A.C. synchronous machine and
asynchronous machine
2 Speed control of D.C. shunt motor by-(a) Armature voltage control.
(b) Field flux control.
3 Measurement of performance of single phase transformer by conducting
O.C. and S.C. test
4 Measurement of current and voltage by low range ammeter and voltmeter
respectively with shunt and multiplier
5 Measurement of low valued resistance by Kelvin’s double bridge.
6 Measurement of insulation resistance by Megger.
7 Measurement of power & PF by Wattmeter for a load like fluorescent
lamp.
8 Measurement of Circuit Parameter using
8.1 Wien Bridge
8.3 Schering Bridge
Course Outcome
At the end of 1. Demonstrate operation of single phase transformer, DC and AC
the course machines.
student will 2. Do maintenance on transformer, DC and AC machine.
be able to: 3. Make use of galvanometer, PMMC, MI, wattmeter, watt-hour meter,
multimeter etc.
4. Measure electric voltage, resistance, current, power and energy.
inductance.
Semester : III
Course Title : Electrical Circuit and network Lab
Number of : 1.5 (L:0, T:0, P:3)
Credits
Prerequisite : Idea on basic Circuit components
Course : PC
Category
Course Objective
 Enable a student to connect a circuit properly including selection of
suitable instruments for measurement and taking accurate readings.
 Apply Network theorems to find the responses in a circuit.
 Learn the properties of resonance in a series and parallel R-L-C
circuit.
 designing filters using passive reactors.
List of Experiment to be performed

1 Using voltmeter, ammeter, multimeterverification of KCL and KVL
experimentally.
2 Verification of Thevenin’s Theorem experimentally.
3 Verification of Norton’s Theorem experimentally.
4 Verification of Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.
5 Verification of Superposition Theorem
6 Determination of A.C voltage, current, power and power factor in a given
R, L, C Series circuit and observation of resonance using variable
frequency power supply.
7 Using variable frequency supply observation of resonance in a given
parallel R-L-C circuit.
9 Design and implementation of a low pass filter for a given cut off
frequency
10 Design and implementation of a high pass filter for a given cut off
frequency
Course Outcome
At the end of a) Ability to connect a circuit with necessary measuring
the course instruments properly and to take accurate readings.
student will b) Ability to perform experiments to verify different
be able to: network theorems.
c) Ability to verify the properties of resonance in R-L-C
circuits.
d) Ability to design a 1st order low pass and high pass filter
of desired cut off frequency.
Semester : III
Course Title : Programming in C Lab
Number of Credits : 1.5 (L:0, T:0, P:3)
Prerequisite : Programming concept in C
Course Objective
 To make students as a worthy programmer by getting idea on
basic, looping, branching, structure, pointer, array etc.
List of Programs to be performed ( At least 20 Programs)

Write program and check output to achieve following:
1 Display your name 10 times on monitor.
2 Find biggest of given three number.
3 Calculate area of circle
4 Print the number if it is negative.
5 Program to check if the number is odd or even.
6 Print value from 1 to 10.
7 Print even numbers from 1 to 10.
8 Print summation of given numbers until the given number is 0.
9 Print numbers 1 to 30 which are multiple of 3.
10 Find roots of a quadratic equation.
11 Find whether a given number is Palindrome number.
12 Print sum of first n number.
13 Write program to find Fibonacci series.
14 Find whether given number is prime or not.
15 Find factorial of any number.
16 Check the given number is strong number or not.
17 Find Strong number in a given range of numbers.
18 Find sum of all digits from a positive integer.
19 Convert a decimal number into its binary.
20 Find largest element in an array.
21 Sort array elements in ascending/descending order
22 Take one employee record as input and display it on monitor using
structure.
23 Find sum of two numbers using pointers.
24 Find biggest of two numbers using pointers.
25 Swapping of two numbers using call by value and call by reference
Course Outcome
At the end of the 1. Apply looping and branching concept in programming.
course student will 2. Apply array, pointer and structure to write program.
be able to: 3. Debug and troubleshoot any programming in C
Semester : III
Course Code : SI201
Course Title Internship-I
:
Number of : 1
Credits
Prerequisite :
Course :
Category
Course Objective
Following is the Objectives of this course
 Internships are educational and career development opportunities,
providing practical experience in a field or discipline.
 They are structured, short-term, supervised placements often
focused around particular tasks or projects with defined timescales.
 An internship may be compensated, non-compensated or some time
may be paid.
 The internship has to be meaningful and mutually beneficial to the
intern and the organization.
Course Outcome
Internship may be full time or part time. Full time during summer vacation after
second semester and part time during the academic session. Duration of training
course can be 3 to 4 weeks.
After completion of Internship program students should submit an Internship
report along with their attendance to the Institute.The Industrial training will be
evaluated by Industry, faculty members and through seminar presentation/ viva
voce.
Summary
Sem Subject Credit Marks
I 10 18 1000
II 10 20 1000
III 10 22 1000
IV 10 21 1000
V 11 22 1100
VI 9 21 900
SUM 60 124 6000
PROPOSED CURRICULAM AND SYLLABI OF
FULL–TIME DIPLOMA COURSES IN
INTERIOR DECORATION
(PART – II SEMESTER-3rd)
W.E.F.2020-21

(A Statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI of 1995)
“Kolkata Karigori Bhavan”, 2nd Floor, 110 S. N. Banerjee Road, Kolkata – 7 00013
INTERIOR DECORATION | PART II SEMESTER- 3RD
Course Structure of 3rd Semester, Diploma in Interior Decoration
[As per guidelines of AICTE]
Sl. No Type Course Title Course code Credit Periods/wk Marks

1 Theory Evolution of Interior Design – I IDPC201 2 2 100
2 Theory Materials & Construction – I IDPC203 2 2 100
3 Theory Interior Design Fundamentals-II IDPC205 1 1 100
4 Theory Services-I IDPC207 2 2 100
5 Theory Indian Art IDPC209 1 1 100

6 Theory Introduction to Structures IDPC211 3 3 100
Subtotal (Theory) 11 11 600
7 Sessional Space Planning IDPC213 1 2 100

8 Sessional Graphics – I(Lab) IDPC215 2 4 100
9 Sessional Interior Design & Drawing - IDPC217 2 4 100

I(Lab)
10 Sessional CAD Lab - I(Lab) IDPC219 2 4 100
11 Sessional Market Study - I(Lab) IDPC221 1 2 100
12 Summer Intern Summer Internship SI201 1 0 100
Subtotal (Sessional) 9 16 600
Total 20 27 1200
Total Contact Periods per week= 27

Library Periods= 2
Guided Study periods = 4 (Extra tutorial periods required as and when necessary)
2
EVOLUTION OF INTERIOR DESIGN – I

Subject Code Course offered in Duration Periods/Week Full Marks 100
IDPC201 3rd Semester 17 weeks 2 lectures Int. Assess. 40 Examination 60
OBJECTIVE
This course aims to inculcate an awareness and appreciation among the students about the evolution of art and
architecture, its growth and development through ages, with specific reference and focus on the interior spaces- for living,
working, entertainment and worship. The following styles and influences would be the subject of study, in order to chart
the development process.
MODULAR DIVISION
Topic Contact Periods

Group Module
1 Ancient Era 8
A 2 European Classical 6
3 Medieval & Renaissance Europe 6
B 4 Europe & American (16th – 19th) 10
Contact Periods 30 Internal Assessment 4 Total Periods 34
EVALUATION SCHEME
1. Examination (60 marks)
Module Objective Questions Subjective Questions

Group To be
To be To be Marks/ Total To be Marks / Total
set
Set(Nos.) answered question Marks answered question marks
(Nos.)
45
(M.C.Q.-15,Fill in 10 6 2
A&B 1,2,3&4 12+18=
the Blanks-15, 30 1 1x30= 30
Short Answer 30
Type-15)
9 3 6
2.Internal Assessment (40 marks)
a. Mid Semester: 20 marks

b. Teacher’s assessment: 10 marks (seminar / homework / class performance etc.)
c. Attendance: 10 marks
3

GROUP A ANCIENT ERA TO RENAISSANCE 20 periods
Module 1 Ancient Era 8 periods
1.1 Prehistoric Civilization – Old Stone Age, Mid Stone Age, New Stone Age
1.2 Mesopotamia – The cradle of civilization- Sumerian period – Babylonian period – Assyrian period – Persian period
1.3 Chinese Civilization: Architectural styles – History of Chinese antique furniture
1.4 Egyptian Civilization: Egyptian Architecture – Egyptian furniture: Characteristics and major forms
Module 2 European Classical 6 periods
2.1 Greek Period: Architecture – The Classical Greek Orders, Greek furniture: Types of furniture, materials and decoration
2.2 Roman Civilization: Architecture, Roman furniture, major forms
Module 3 Medieval & Renaissance Europe 6 periods
3.1 Christian Periods: Gothic Architecture

3.2 Renaissance Architecture –Italian Renaissance – Renaissance in France – The English Renaissance (The Tudor Period, The
Elizabethan Period)
GROUP B EUROPE &AMERICA 10 periods

Module 4 Europe & American (16th – 19th) 10 periods
4.1 English Period (16 cen. To 19 cen.) – the Restoration Period – The Queen Anne Period – The Georgian Periods (Early and Middle)
th th
– The Neo-classical Periods (English Late Georgian: Adam, Hepple white and Sheraton, English Neo-classical, George Hepplewhite,
Thomas Sheraton)
4.2 French Period (17Theory cen. To 19Theorycen): Louis X11 –Louis X111 – Louis XIV – Louis XV – Louis XVI –Directoire – Empire
4.3 American Period (17Th Century to 19Th Century): Colonial – Federal – Victorian
SUGGESTED READINGS

 Architecture and Interior Design; A Basic History Through The Seventeenth Century/Victoria ClossBall/Wiley
 History of Interior Design/John Pile/Harry M Abrams, Prentice Hall, New York
 A History of Architecture (Century Edition) / Sir Banister Fletcher / ButterworTheory Heinemann (Hb), CBS
Publishers & Distributors (Pb)
 The Story of Architecture FROM ANTIQUITY TO THEORYE PRESENT / Jan Gympel / KÖNEMANN (Pb)
 The Great Ages of World Architecture / G. H. Hiraskar / Dhanpat
*** *** ***
4
MATERIALS & CONSTRUCTION – I
OBJECTIVE
The course aims to provide knowledge of basic structural components of an RCC framed structure, their properties and construction
techniques, which enables students to prepare scaled drawings of the sectional details as a whole or part of the building depicting
various necessary layers of materials, mix and dimensions.
MODULAR DIVISION
Group Module Topic Periods Group Module Topic Periods
1 Stones 3 5 Masonry 4
2 Bricks & Other clay products 3 6 Lintels and Arches 4
A B
3 Mortars and concrete 4 7 Doors 4
4 Wood and Wood Products 4 8 Windows 4
EVALUATION SCHEME
Objective Questions Subjective Questions

Group Module To be To be To be
To be Set Marks/ Marks / Total
answered Total Marks set answered
(Nos.) question question marks
(Nos.) (Nos.) (Nos.)
45(M.C.Q.-
15,Fill in 10 6 2
the Blanks-
1-4, 12+18=30
A&B 15, Short 30 1 1x30= 30 9 3 6
5-8 Answer
Type-15)

GROUP A MATERIALS 14 periods

Module 1 Stone 3 periods
1.1 Classification of Rocks: Igneous, Sedimentary, Metamorphic (Definitions with examples) ,Geological, Physical & Chemical
classification of stone-Suitability of uses of different stones
1.2 Characteristics of good building stones , Dressed surfaces of stones
1.3 Artificial stones-Definition, different types and their uses , Deterioration of stone - Preservation of stones
5
Module 2 Bricks & Other clay products 3 periods
2.1 Raw materials for bricks - Classification of Bricks - Sizes of bricks, Orientation of bricks
2.2 Properties and uses of bricks - Advantages and Disadvantages of bricks
2.3 Burnt-clay hollow brick, Fire clay Fly-ash brick, Autoclaved aerated concrete bricks (Definitions &Uses) - Clay-tiles: Flat & curved
pan tiles – Half-round country tiles – Mangalore tiles (Definitions & uses)
2.4 Terracotta – Porcelain – Stoneware- Earthenware – Glazing (Definitions & uses) – Vitrifying (Definitions & uses)
Module 3 Mortars and Concrete 4 periods
3.1 Definition of Concrete - Concrete making materials: Cement, Lime, Aggregates - Water-their types, properties & functions -
Storage of cement - Properties of concrete - Strength, Durability-Water - cement ratio-Workability, Principal types of concrete:
P.C.C-R.C.C-Definitions, Advantages, Disadvantages and Uses, Non-conventional Concrete: Pre-cast,Prestressed, Ferrocement-FRC
(Definitions and uses)
3.2 Mortar-Definition-Classification of mortars on the basis of binder materials-Cement, Lime, Mud, Surkhi, Gypsum - Functions and
suitability of uses: Cement mortar- Lime mortar - Mud mortar - Composite mortar-Gypsum mortar
Module 4 Wood and Wood Products 4 periods
4.1 Classification of trees: Exogenous & Endogenous – Structure of timber - Characteristics of good timber – names of commonly
used good quality timber - Defects in timber, Preservation & Seasoning of timber
4.2 Wood products: Veneer – Plywood – Laminated Board – Block Board – Batten board – Composite boards – Fiber board – Particle
board (Definitions & uses)
GROUP B CONSTRUCTION 16 periods

Module 5 Masonry 4 periods
5.1 Technical terms associated with Stone masonry - General principles to be followed in Stone Masonry
5.2 Types of Stone masonry: Rubble work & Ashlars (Concept and Uses only)
5.3 Technical terms associated with Brick masonry - General Principles to be followed in Brickwork - Bonds in Brickwork: English,
Flemish, Rat-trap, CBRI
Module 6 Lintels and Arches 4 periods
6.1 Definitions – Spanning of Openings- Post & Lintel opening, Arch Opening, Limitation in masonry opening - Typical detail of a
masonry window opening showing sill, lintel & chhajja projection – Types of Lintel : Based on Material (with or without Chajja)
6.2 Typical detail of an arched opening showing various parts of arch – Types of Arches based on material and geometrical shapes.
Module 7 Doors 4 periods
7.1 Types of Doors based on operation & material : Swing door – Revolving door – Sliding door – Folding door – Collapsible door –
Rolling shutter – Fire door – Collapsible door – Rolling Shutter – Fire door - Detail of Timber (in detail): Paneled door– Flush door -
Rolling Shutter door - Details of Aluminum: Swing door – Sliding door
Module 8 Windows 4 periods
8.1 Types of Windows based on operation (Concepts and Uses only): Fixed Window – Casement Window – Sliding window – Pivoted
Window – Louvered (or Venetian) Window – Bay Window – Clerestory Window – Corner Window – Dormer Window
8.2 Windows of Timber (in detail): Paneled & Glazed timber casement window - Windows of Steel (in detail): Glazed fixed &
Casement steel window - Windows of Aluminium(in detail): Sliding Aluminium Window.
SUGGESTED READINGS

 Building Construction Volume, I, II, III & IV (Metric Ed.) / J. K. McKay& W. B. McKay / Orient Longman
6
 The Construction of Buildings Volume 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 / R. Barry / English Language Book Society
 A Text Book of Building Construction / S. P. Aurora & S. P. Bindra
 Building Construction/Sushil Kumar/Standard Book House
 Building Construction/P.C.Varghese/Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi
 Building Materials /S.K. Duggal/New Age International
 Building Materials/Satish Agarwal/Dhanpat Rai
*** *** ***
INTERIOR DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS – II

IDPC205 3rd Semester 17 weeks 1 Lecture Int. Assess. 40 Examination 60
OBJECTIVE
This course aims at building the knowledge of the students about anthropometric data and ergonomics for space planning in interior
design. It also intends to equip the students with the theoretical concept of design principles in space organization in visual context
and appropriate use of colour and light in the composition.
MODULAR DIVISION
Topic Module Contact Periods
Anthropometric Data and Ergonomics 1 3
Space Organization 2 4
Colour and Light 3 8
EVALUATION SCHEME

45(M.C.Q.-
15,Fill in 10 6 2
the Blanks- 12+18=30
A&B 1,2&3 15, Short 30 1 1x30= 30 9 3 6
Answer
Type-15)
2. Internal Assessment (40 marks)

a. Mid Semester:20 marks
c. Attendance : 10 marks
7
GROUP A Anthropometry & Space Organization 7 periods

Module 1 Anthropometric Data and Ergonomics 3 periods
Definition of Anthropometry and Ergonomics; Basic anthropometrics - Its study and the graphic representation - Proportions of male
and female body on the basis of 7 ½ head - Structural dimensions - Functional dimensions. Graphic representation; Movement and
Circulation Spaces; Furniture Sizes.
Module 2 Space Organization 4 periods
Figure and Ground Relationship; Figure organization; Movement and Balance; Proportion and Rhythm; Depth and Plastic Illusion-
Basis of space illusion-Concepts of space-Plastic effect on a two dimensional plane-Depth and the picture plane; Three –Dimensional
Organization.
GROUP B Colour & Light 8 periods

Module 3 Colour and Light 8 periods
Colour in interiors;The Eye-Light-The visible Spectrum- Colour Systems-Munsell System-Ostwald System-NCS system ;Colour Chart-
Abstract Charts-Chart Materials-Mixing Colour Chips-Making a Chart-Plan Colour Charts-Using Colour Charts ; Colour Schemes-
Colour Harmony-Colour Schemes by Type-Monotonal Colour-Monochromatic Colour-Analogous Colour-Complimentary Colour-
Schemes-Triad Colour Schemes- Tetrad Colour Schemes-Use ; Basic principles for working out a colour scheme-Dominant or
controlling colour-Greying-Relief and contrast colours-Accent colours-Keying; Psychological impacts of colour ; Use of colour in
various functional spaces
SUGGESTED READINGS
1. Human Dimension and Interior Space: A Source Book of Design Reference Standards By Julius Panero,/ Martin Zelnik
2. The Fundamentals of Interior Design By Linda O'Shea, Chris Grimley, Mimi Love / Rockport
3. The Fundamentals of Interior Design By Simon Dodsworth, Stephen Anderson/Bloomsbury Publishing
4. Design Fundamentals By Robert Gillam Scott/McGraw-Hill Book Company,INC.
*** *** ***
SERVICES - I
OBJECTIVE
On satisfactory completion of the course, the students should be in a position to understand the basic principles of the water supply
system, sanitation & drainage system, and, the materials, fittings & appliances of the water supply and drainage systems.
8
MODULAR DIVISION
Module Topic Contact Periods

1 Water Supply 12
2 Sanitation & Drainage 12
3 Materials , Fittings & Appliances 6
EVALUATION SCHEME

45(M.C.Q.-
15,Fill in
the Blanks-
12+18=30
A&B 1,2&3 15, Short 30 1 1x30= 30 10 6 2
Answer
Type-15)

GROUP A WATER SUPPLY &DRAINAGE 24 Periods

Module 1 Water Supply 12 periods
WATERSUPPLY: SOURCES & REQUIREMENTS

Ground Water — Springs: Gravity Springs, Artesian Springs – Wells: Open Wells, Artesian Wells, Tube Wells (Shallow / Deep) –
Infiltration Wells & Galleries — Surface Water —Water Supply Requirements for — ‘residences’, ‘restaurants’, ‘cinemas & theatres’,
‘day schools’, ‘boarding schools’, ‘hostels’, ‘hospitals (including laundry)’, ‘offices’ [per capita per day consumption value only] —
Portable Water (Brief idea) - Water treatment - Screening – Plain Sedimentation – Coagulation & Sedimentation – Filtration –
Disinfection – Softening – Aeration [Definitions & Sequence only] .
System & Period of Water Supply: Direct & Indirect System— Constant, Continuous & Intermittent Supply. Design Of Water
Distribution Systems.
General Requirements Of Water Distribution System- Estimate Of Demand Load: Occupant Load, Fire Protection — Basic Principles
Of Water Distribution within the premises—Water Main — Service Pipe: Ferrule, Goose-neck, Stop-cock box, Water-meter box –
Communication Pipe – Consumer’s Pipe Storage Of Water &Downtaker Distribution Pipes.
ColdandHotwaterdistribution&mixingsystemsusinglofttanks, pressure pumps, geysers, boilers, mixers, diverters,etc.
Waste and Soil Disposal systems using principles of Siphoning, Anti-Siphoning, Venting, etc. Distribution & Disposal
(Open and Concealed) for: CookingandDrinking–(FocusonKitchenandPantryareas) Washing – (Manual and machine
based,etc.) Bathing–(Modessuchasshower,pressurejetsandtubs) Flushing–(Urinal,WaterClosetandToiletareas)
9
Miscellaneous - (Gardening, Indoor Fountain, Falls, Cascades) Understanding Distribution and Disposal layouts in
context with appropriategradients&Sizes,waterproofingconsideration,appropriateuse of specials such as joints &
junctions.
Requirement for storage — Quantity to be stored — Materials used — Underground & Over-Head Reservoires—Downtakers (Cold
Water Drops)
Module 2 Sanitation & Drainage 12 periods
Requirement- Wash Basins (flat-back) — Cleaner’s Sink — Drinking Water Fountain — Water Closets (WC): Squatting type (Indian
style) & Sitting type (European style) — Urinals -different types for male and female- Flushing Cisterns -Baths – Showers—Number
of Sanitation Equipment Requirements for ‘residential’, ‘business’, ‘commercial’, ‘institutional ’ — Layout Drawings: Students should
be able to read orthographic & isometric projections of toilets-kitchens-WCs etc. (supplied by the teachers) fitted with the above
mentioned sanitations.
House Drainage Pipe : Soil Pipe (SP):Main Soil Pipe (MSP), Branch Soil Pipe (BSP) —Waste PIPE (WP):Main Waste Pipe (MWP),
Branch Waste Pipe (BWP), Rain Water Pipe (RWP) — Main Soil Waste Pipe (MSWP), Branch Soil Waste Pipe (BSWP) — Ventilating
Pipe (VP): Main Ventilating Pipe (MVP), Branch Ventilating Pipe (BVP), Drain Ventilating Pipe (DVP), Anti Siphonage Pipe (ASP) —
Vent Pipe — Junction Pipe [Definitions only] Plumbing System: Two Pipe System — One-Pipe System — Single Stack System —
Partially Ventilated Single Stack System —Choice Of Plumbing System
Traps : Trap: Water seal, Essentials of a good trap, Causes of loss or breaking of water seal — Classification Of Traps: Based on
shape (P, Q, S); Based on use/ location (Floor trap, Gully trap, Intercepting trap, Grease trap, Silt trap)
Chamber :Invert-Collection Chamber — Gully Chamber — Inspection Chamber-Manhole- Drop Manhole- Inceptor Manhole-Manhole
Chamber [Definitions & sketches only]
Design Consideration For Drainage System : Sewage : soil waste, waste water (sullage), storm water (rain water) - Solid Refuse –
Channel Drain -Drainage — Sewer- Systems Of Sewage Disposal: Dry or conservancy system (earth closets, trench latrines, bore-
hole latrines, sanitary latrines); Water carriage or drainage system-Rain water pipes for roof drainage — Quantity Of Sewage: dwf —
Systems of drainage: Separate system, Combined system, Partially separate system – Disposal Of Sewage From Isolated Buildings :
Septic Tank: sludge & scum — Design Considerations: Capacity (detention period, sludge removal, consumption of water) – shape &
dimensions; inlet & outlet; baffle wall; cover & manholes; ventilation; lining — Disposal of Septic Tank Effluent: Chlorination
Chamber – Soak Pit
GROUP B MATERIALS,FITTINGS & APPLIANCES 6 periods

Module 3 Materials , Fittings & Appliances 6 periods
Pipe Materials: Supply Pipes: Cast Iron, Steel, Reinforced concrete, Prestressed concrete, Galvanized Mild Steel tubes, Copper,
Brass, Wrought Iron, Asbestos Cement, Lead, Polythene, Unplasticized PVC -Drainage Pipes: Salt Glazed Stoneware, Cast Iron,
Asbestos Cement, Lead, Unplasticized PVC - Jointing Of Pipes: Names of different type of joints for different pipe materials with
detail reference to Spigot & Socket Joints, Flanged Joints and Cement Mortar Joints —Lagging Of Pipes -
Valves,Cocks,Taps,Firehydrants& Other Fittings : Valves-Air relief valves, Reflux valves or check valves or non-return valves or flap
valves or foot valves, Safety valves or pressure relief valves, Sluice valves or gate valves , Scour valves or wash-out valves or blow-off
valves, Mixing valves — Stop Cocks — Taps: Bib taps, Self-closing taps — Fire Hydrants — Fittings: Bends or elbows, Tees, Crosses,
Wyes, Reducers, Increasers, Flanges, Caps, Plugs, Back Nuts [Definitions, sketches & applications]
SUGGESTED READINGS
 SP 7 (5): 2005 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA GROUP 5 – PART IX PLUMBING SERVICES / Bureau of Indian Standards
 A Text Book of Water Supply and Waste Engineering / TTTI-10
 Text Book of WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY ENGINEERING / S.K. Hussain / Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
 Solid Waste Management / Sasikumar & Gopi Krishna / PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 5. Hand Book of Water Supply &
Drainage Engineering / S. K. Sharma / Dhanpat Rai & Co., New Delhi
*** *** ***
10
INDIAN ART
OBJECTIVE
The course aims to inculcate an awareness and appreciation among the students about variety of Indian Art forms that has
developed through ages. On its way to modern times, Indian Art has had cultural influences as well as religious influences. The
course specifically focuses on paintings, relief work and sculpture, their origin, characteristics, different styles and eminent artists.
MODULAR DIVISION
Group Topic Module Contact Periods
1 3
Paintings 2 2
A
3 2
B Relief 4 2
5 3
C Sculpture
6 3
EVALUATION SCHEME

45(M.C.Q.-
15,Fill in 10 6 2
1,2,3 the Blanks-
A,B&C 4 15, Short 30 1 1x30= 30 9 3 6 12+18=30
5,6 Answer
Type-15)
2. Internal Assessment (40 marks)

GROUP A PAINTINGS 7 periods

Module 1 3 periods
Royal: Evolution and history, Characteristics, Themes/Schools, Pioneers and Artists of Mughal Painting, Rajput Painting, Thanjavur
Painting and Miniature Art.
11
Module 2 2 periods
Folk: Origin, Characteristics, Process flow of making, Themes/ Style, Use of colors and Prominent artists of Madhubani Art, Kalamkari
Art, Warli Art and Pattachitra
Module 3 2 periods
Mural Painting: Definition, Difference between a painting and a mural, Purpose of mural, Mural paintings in India.
GROUP B RELIEF 2 periods

Module 4 2 periods
Relief: Definition, Types- Low-relief or Bas-relief, Mid-relief, High relief, Sunk relief, Counter-relief, Small objects.
GROUP C SCULPTURE 6 periods

Module 5 3 periods
Sculpture: Definition, Types of sculpture, Difference between “Monumental sculpture” and “Relief sculpture”, Techniques and
Materials, Types of Indian Sculpture: Wooden sculptures, Bronze sculptures, Stone sculptures, Sand sculptures.
Module 6 3 periods
Indian Sculpture: Types of Indian Sculpture: Wooden sculptures, Bronze sculptures, Stone sculptures, Sand sculptures; Study on five
prominent sculptors of India: The Ashoka Pillars, Sanchi Stupa, Ajanta Caves, Kailasa Temple, Dancing Girl of Mohenjodaro.
SUGGESTED READINGS
 History of Art /H.W. Janson/ Prentice Hall and Harry Abrams; 5Theory Revised & enlarged edition (1995)
 Indian Art/Roy. Craven/ Themes & Hudson
 The Arts of India/Basil Gray/Phaidon (1981)
 Indian Art/Parth Mitter/Oxford University Press
 History of Indian Art/ Kajal Kanjilal/ Saraswati House Pvt Ltd
*** *** ***
INTRODUCTION TO STRUCTURE
OBJECTIVE
The subject aims at imparting the students the concept of different types of loads acting on the structural members like beams,
columns and tension members. It includes the concept of the properties and behavior of such structural members against bending,
12
shear and deflections under loaded condition. It also includes the concept of utility of specific structural parts of frame or truss in
industrial practice.
MODULAR DIVISION
Module Topic Periods Module Topic Periods
1 Introduction 2 5 Bending Stress 6
2 Beams & Supports 3 6 Slopes and Deflections 6
3 Shear Force & Bending Moment 8 7 Columns and Struts 6
4 Centre of Gravity and Moment of Inertia 6 8 Trusses and Frames 8
EVALUATION SCHEME

Module To be To be To be
To be Set Marks/qu Marks / Total
(Nos.) estion question marks
45(M.C.Q.-
15,Fill in the
10 6 2
1,2,3,4, Blanks-15,
Short Answer
30 1 1x30= 30 12+18=30
5,6,7,8
Type-15) 9 3 6

Module 1 Introduction 2 periods
Concept of different types of loads, like Point Load (vertical & inclined), UDL, UVL, Shear, Bending, Torsion, Tension, Compression,
etc. & their action with effects.
Module 2 Beams and Supports 3 periods
Different Types of Beams (Simply Supported, Continuous, Over Hang, Cantilever etc.) & different types of support conditions (Fixed,
Hinged, Roller, Propped etc.) simple problems
Module 3 Shear Force & Bending Moment 8 periods
Computing support reactions & drawing Shear Force & Bending Moment Diagrams of different types of loaded beams (simply
supported, cantilever, & overhang)
Module 4 Centre of Gravity and Moment of Inertia 6 periods
Concept of C.G. & Moment of Inertia, & to calculate them for different beams & column sections. Concept of Radius of Gyration
13
Module 5 Bending Stress 6 periods
Concept of Bending Stress & Flexural Rigidity of loaded beams. Simple problems
Module 6 Slopes and Deflections 6 periods
Introductory knowledge for Slopes & Deflections. Simple problems (Simply Supported Beam, Cantilever & Overhang)
Module 7 Columns and Struts 6 periods
Columns & Struts with different support conditions. Concept of Long Column & Short Column. Simple problems using Euler’s Theory
& Rankine’s Theory
Module 8 Trusses and Frames 8 periods
Concept of Static Determinacy & Indeterminacy. Concept of Perfect, Deficient & Indeterminate Frames. Analysis of simple truss or
frames by Method of Joint & Method of Section. Overview of Structural Arrangement & their different parts with their nomenclature
(e.g. Rafter, Tie, Sling, Purlin, Gutter, Gable End, Ridge-Cover, Eaves End etc.
SUGGESTED READINGS

 Strength Of Materials / S. Ramamurtham& R. Narayanan / Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi
 Strength Of Materials / M. Chakraborty / S. K. Kataria& Sons, Gurunanak Market, Delhi
 Theory Of Structures / R. S. Khurmi
 Treatise Of Structural Mechanics / SOME MUKHERJEE
 Analysis Of Structures Vol I / V. N. Vazirani& M. M. Rathwani / Khanna Publishers, Delhi
 Basic Structural Analysis / Reddy / Tata McGraw-Hill
*** *** ***
SPACE PLANNING
IDPC213 3rd Semester 17 weeks 2Practical Classes Int. Assess. 60 Ext. Assess. 40
OBJECTIVE
The subject intends to apply basic design acumen and also enhance the skills in planning of residential as well as other public and
private activity based interior spaces with appropriate usage of basic furniture, knowledge of circulation spaces and services
required for design project. The students shall also learn to represent intellectual and creative skills, implement processes of Design
and detailing of design.
MODULAR DIVISION
Module Topic No. of Sheets

1 Residential Spaces 2
2 Office Spaces 2
3 Hospitality Spaces 2
4 Shops 2
14
EVALUATION SCHEME
Name of the course Marks Allotted

a. Continuous internal assessment of 50 marks is to be carried out by the
teachers throughout the semester
Space Planning b. Attendance of 10 marks
c. External assessment of 40 marks shall be held at the end of the Semester on
the entire syllabus
Interior Space Design should include – Analysis of activity, Selection of furniture and Layout considering circulation and movement
pattern of the following spaces:
Module 1 Residential Spaces 9 periods
Living rooms, Dining rooms, Bed rooms, Bathrooms, Kitchens, Library / Study / Family recreation rooms, Laundry / Sewing rooms,
Closet/Storage areas
Module 2 Office Spaces 12 periods
General offices and multiple workstations, Private offices, Electronic workstations, Conference rooms, Reception areas; Furniture,
Furnishings & Equipment.
Module 3 Hospitality Spaces 12 periods
Eatery (Restaurant, Snack bar, Cafeteria, Coffee shop, Specialty restaurant), Hotels
Module 4 Shops 12 periods
Showroom of a Jewelry Shop – Boutique – Garment’s Shop – Leather goods’ shop – Banks – Department stores – Public restrooms
– Toilets and Coatrooms - Restrooms
ASSIGNMENT
Description Details
Assignments are to be carried out in a journal-form on large size
Students are required make Furniture Facilitation Sheet learning all
square grid pad and/or drawn to scale on A2 size drawing sheet
necessary data of space planning of The related module.
as per instructions.
SUGGESTED READINGS

 Human Dimension and Interior Space: A Source Book of Design Reference Standards/Julius
 Panero, MartinZelink/ Watson-Guptill Publications
 Time Saver Standards for Interior Design and Space Planning/Joseph De Chiara,JuliusPanero and Martin Zelink/ Mcgraw-
Hill(Tx); 1st edition (1991)
 Space Planning Basics/Mark Karlen, RobFleming/John Willey& Sons
 Time Saver Standards for Building Types/Joseph De Chiara, and John Hancock Callender/Mcgraw-Hill
*** *** ***

15
GRAPHICS – I
IDPC215 3rd Semester 17 weeks 4Practical Int. Assess. 60 Ext. Assess. 40
OBJECTIVE
On satisfactory completion of the course, the students will be able to

1. Understand the Basic Principles & nomenclature of Axonometric and Perspective Projection systems;
2. Draw one- & two-point perspective projections of simple interior spaces like a living room, an office interior, a kitchen, a toilet-
showing all furniture &fixtures;
3. Draw landscaping elements, human figure etc.
MODULAR DIVISION
Group Module Topic* Contact Periods# No. of sheets
A 1 Axonometric Projection Systems (Dimetric, Trimetric and Isometric) 8 1
of simple solids; learning of scales
2 Isometric View of interior of a residential unit 8 1
B 3 Two-point perspective projections of Lamina & Solid 10 1
4 Two-point perspective projection of Interiors of Residential space 10 1
C 5 One-point perspective projection of Interiors of Residential space 6 1
6 One-point perspective projection of Interiors of Residential space 6 1
D 7 Perspective view of Interiors of other than residential like 12 1
commercial, office etc.
*Assignments are be carried out in a journal-form on large size square grid pad and/or drawn to scale on A2 size drawing sheet as
per instructions.
#The periods exclude guided studies
EVALUATION SCHEME

a. Continuous internal assessment of 50 marks is to be carried out by the teachers throughout
the semester
Graphics - I b. Attendance of 10 marks
c. External assessment of 40 marks shall be held at the end of the Semester on the entire
syllabus
SUGGESTED READINGS
 Geometrical Drawing for Students / L. H. Morris /Longman, Green&Co.
 Manual of Rendering with Pen and Ink / Robert W. Gill / Thames and Hudson
 Art of Perspective Drawing / Simon Graco /Walter Brooks
 Engineering Drawing /N.D.Bhat/Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd
*** *** ***
16
INTERIOR DESIGN & DRAWING – I

OBJECTIVE
On satisfactory completion of the course, the students should be in a position to

1. Understand the definitions of basic terminologies related with Interior design;
2. To design residential interiors ranging from simple activity based small-scale residence;
3. Present Developed design in scale.
MODULAR DIVISION
Module Topic No. of Sheets

1 Definitions of Basic terminologies 2
2 Design 20
3 Drawing 30
- Tutorials 15
EVALUATION SCHEME

Interior Design & Drawing – I b. Attendance of 10 marks
the entire syllabus
Module 1 Definitions of Basic Terminology 2 periods
Definitions of terms like Balcony, Chajja, Chowk or Courtyard, Chowk, Inner, Chowk, Outer, Covered Area, Garage, Private, Garage, Public,
Mandatory Open Space, Parapet, Parking Space, Partition, Plinth, Plinth Area, Storey, Storey, Topmost, Verandah, Water-Closet, Window , Carpet
Area , False Ceiling, Loft, Niche, Alcove , Arch, Column, Beam, Slab, Strut etc. as per the National Building Code of India.
Module 2 Design 20 periods
While evolving the design, ideas should be given regarding the following: Site analysis highlighting ‘location’, ‘orientation’ and
‘access’; Influence of materials on interior space; Grouping of furniture and circulation; Consideration of services for effective
utilization of space; Learning of theme based interior design; Preparing Case studies, Observations and Analysis of Space
Module 3 Drawing 30 periods
A residential space not more than 50 sqm will be provided by the teacher indicating openings, structural members (beams. columns, struts etc.).
17
Students are required to prepare and present scaled plan/s, sectional elevations, technical representations, (minimum 1:25 scale) and
proportionate 3D visuals all drawn and colour rendered manually that depict concept design and case studies.
ASSIGNMENT
Description Details
Students are required make Design Sheet learning all necessary data of Scaled drawings will be presented on 6 nos. of A1/ A2 size drawing
Interior Design & Drawing of The related module. sheets
SUGGESTED READINGS
 The Interior Design Reference & Specification Book/Linda O’Shea, Chris Grimley, Mimi Love
 Interior Design Course: Principles, Practices and Techniques for Aspiring Designer/Tomris Tangaz/Barron’s
 Neufert Architect’s Data/EmstNeufert/Wiley-Blackwell; 4 edition
 National Building Code
 Time Saver Standards for Interior Design and Space Planning/Joseph De Chiara, Julius Panero and Martin Zelink/Mcgraw-Hill (Tx)
 Time Saver Standards for Building Types/Joseph De Chiara, and John Hancock Callender/Mcgraw-Hill Subsequent Edition
*** *** ***
CAD LAB – I
OBJECTIVE
On satisfactory completion of the course, the students should be in a position

1. to solve two-dimensional drafting and design problems by being able to use AutoCAD commands to make a drawing, create text,
dimension a drawing, hatch patterns and make & insert symbols.
2. to plot drawings
MODULAR DIVISION
Module Topic Contact Periods Module Topic Contact Periods

Lecture Sessional Lecture Sessional
1 Getting Started 1 4 7 Raster Commands 1 3
2 Drawing & Editing Commands 1 6 8 Hatching 1 3
3 Drawing Aids 1 4 9 Blocks 1 3
4 Creating Text 1 3 10 Practice With Complete 1 12
Drawing
5 Inquiry Commands 1 3 11 Plotting Drawings In 1 4
AutoCAD
6 Dimensioning 1 3 - - - -
Total 6 23 5 25
18
EVALUATION SCHEME
Name of the course Courses offered in Marks Allotted

teachers throughout the semester by continues evolution of students work
on each module and recorded on notebook. Distribution of marks: lab.
Notebook -30 ; viva-voce -20.
b. Attendance of 10 marks
c. External assessment of 40 marks shall be held at the end of the Semester
CAD Lab - I Third Semester on the entire syllabus. One assignment per student from any one of the
assignments done is to be performed. Assignments are to be set by lottery
system. Distribution of marks: lab. Notebook–20; on spot job –10; viva-
voce –10.
Module 1 Getting Started 1 Lecture and 5 Sessional periods
Starting AutoCAD – AutoCAD screen components – Starting a drawing: Open drawings, Create drawings (Start from scratch, Use a
template & Use a wizard) – Invoking commands in AutoCAD –Drawing lines in AutoCAD – Co-ordinate systems: Absolute co-ordinate
system, Relative co-ordinate system – Direct distance method – Saving a drawing: Save & Save As – Closing a drawing – Quitting
AutoCAD file – Concept of Object – Object selection methods: Pick by box, Window selection, Crossing Selection, All, Fence, Last,
Previous, Add, Remove – Erasing objects: OOPS command, UNDO / REDO commands – ZOOM command – PAN command, Panning
in real time – Setting units – Object snap, running object snap mode – Drawing circles
Module 2 Drawing & Editing Commands 2 Lecture and 10 Sessional periods
L command - ARC command – RECTANG command – ELLIPSE command, elliptical arc – POLYGON command (regular polygon) –
PLINE command – DONUT command – POINT command – Construction Line: XLINE command, RAY command – MULTILINE
command - MOVE command – COPY command – OFFSET command – ROTATE command – SCALE command – STRETCH command –
LENGTHEORYEN command –TRIM command – EXTEND command – BREAK command – CHAMFER command – FILLET command –
ARRAY command – MIRROR command –MEASURE command – DIVIDE command – EXPLODE command – MATCHPROP command –
Editing with grips: PEDIT- Breaking line into specific divisions: BREAK command – Scale of drawings: SC command
Module 3 Drawing Aids 1 Lecture and 3 Sessional periods
Layers – Layer Properties Manager dialog box – Object Properties: Object property toolbar, Properties Window – LTSCALE Factor –
Auto Tracking – REDRAW command, REGEN command
Module 4 Creating Text 1 Lecture and 2 Sessional periods
Creating single line text – Drawing special characters – Creating multiline text – Editing text – Text style
Module 5 Inquiry Commands 1 Lecture and 2 Sessional periods
AREA – DIST – ID – LIST – DBLIST – STATUS – DWGPROPS
Module 6 Dimensioning 3 Lecture and 2 Sessional periods
Fundamental dimensioning terms: Dimension lines, dimension text, arrowheads, extension lines, leaders, centre marks and
19
centerlines, alternate units – Associative dimensions – Dimensioning methods – Drawing leader
Editing dimensions by stretching – Editing dimensions by trimming & extending – Editing dimensions: DIMEDIT command – Editing
dimension text: DIMTEDIT command – Updating dimensions – Editing dimensions using the properties window – Creating and
restoring Dimension styles: DIMSTYLE
Module 7 Raster Commands 1 Lecture and 2 Sessional periods
Explaining Raster – Importing JEPG file in Auto-cad – Access to Raster Design toolset
Module 8 Hatching 1 Lecture and 2 Sessional periods
BHATCH, HATCH commands – Boundary Hatch Options: Quick tab, Advance tab – Hatching around Text, Traces, Attributes, Shapes
and Solids – Editing Hatch Boundary – BOUNDARY command
Module 9 Blocks 1 Lecture and 2 Sessional periods
The concept of Blocks – Converting objects into a Block: BLOCK, _BLOCK commands – Nesting of Blocks – Inserting Blocks: INSERT,
MINSERT commands – Creating drawing files: WBLOCK command – Defining Block Attributes – Inserting Blocks with Attributes –
Editing Attributes- Breaking block : X command
Module 10 Practice with Complete Drawing 4 Lecture and 20 Sessional periods
Each student is required to prepare a set of orthographic projections of a Furniture/ plan of Interior space designed by himself /
herself or of any other design approved by the teacher-in-charge.
Module 11 Plotting Drawings in AutoCad 2 Lecture and 5 Sessional periods
PLOT command – Plot Configuration – Paper Size & Orientation Area – Plot Rotation & Origin – Plotting Area – Scale – Plotting in PDF
file – Plotting in direct plotter
SUGGESTED READINGS
 Inside AutoCAD/ H.Rice, Daniel Racker/New Riders Publishing
 Mastering AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT/George Omura Brian C.Benton/Wiley
 Advanced Techniques in AutoCAD/Robert Thomas/Wiley, John& Sons Incorporated
*** *** ***
MARKET STUDY – I
OBJECTIVE
This subject intends the student to understand Professional and Practical aspects of Interior Design through Workshops, Market
Surveys, Case studies & Site visits related to the Subject: Materials & Construction – I and Indian Art.
20
EVALUATION SCHEME

b. Attendance of 10 marks
Market Study - I
the entire syllabus
DETAILED COURSE CONTENT
Module 1 Preparation of individual analytical reports on case studies & site-visits conducted to 18 periods
Residential Interiors for recording measurements, preparing measured drawing, learning & observing design, construction & primary
services ; Factory premises for studying stone cutting & polishing, Plywood manufacture, Pottery making etc ; Interior sites for
studying different masonry, carpentry, false ceiling & primary services based on activities.
Module 2 Compilation of data on market surveys conducted for types, availability, sizes, colour, rates, 12 periods
etc. of:
a. Materials and products (common building materials, glass, metals & alloys, polymers & allied composites, natural & synthetic floor
coverings, paints, varnishes, polishes & coatings, Thermal & acoustical insulations, waterproofing, general & decorative hardware
fittings & fixtures, awnings, weather sheds, terrace furniture, etc).
b. Primary services (Plumbing & sanitary materials, electrical & lighting materials, etc).
c. Functional & decorative accessories (Calendars, clocks, ashtrays, lampshades, waterfalls, curios, statues, murals, paintings,
posters, art & artifacts, etc).
d. Appliances & Gadgets (Mixers, juicers, ovens, cooking ranges, geysers, boilers, refrigerators, washing machines, dish washers,
audio & video systems, computers, inverters, etc.
ASSIGNMENT
Description Detail
To be carried out in neatly hand-written or typed (Preferably Scaled drawings will be presented on 2 nos. (Each module) (4 total) of
computer typing), well composed and in individual write-ups A2 size drawing sheets
presented at the end in a single, well composed booklet form.
*** *** ***
Summer Internship
Subject Code Course offered in Duration Periods/Week Full Marks
SI201 3rd Semester 3-4 weeks 0 100
After the 2nd Semester, for Internship-I ,students are required to be involved in Inter/Intra Institutional activities viz; Training and
Simulation Programme with different Institutes like Workshop of ITI, other Polytechnics and other Technical Institutes; Soft skill
21
training organized by Training and Placement Cell of the respective Institutions; Contributions at Innovations/Entrepreneurship Cell
of the Institute; Participation in Workshop/Competitions etc.; Learning at Departmental Lab/Institutional Workshop.
EVALUATION SCHEME
Complete assessment will be done internally on the basis of Internship Report and Internship Seminar
1. The Internship Report will be evaluated on the basis of the following criteria (as applicable)
Sl.No. Criteria for evaluation of Internship Report

1.
Originality
Adequacy and purposeful write-up
2.
3. Organization, Format, Drawings, Sketches, Style, Language
4. Practical applications and Relationships with basic theory
5. Concept taught in the course outcome
Attendance Record, Daily Diary, Quality of the Internship Repot

6.
2. Internship Seminar
Seminars must be arranged for the students based on his/her training report, before an Internal Committee constituted
by the concerned department of the institute.
The evaluation will be based on the following criteria (as applicable)
Sl.No. Criteria for evaluation of Internship Report

1.
Quality of content presented
Proper planning for presentation
2.
3. Effectiveness of presentation
4. Depth of knowledge and skills
5. Viva-Voce
*** *** ***
22
PROPOSED
3RDSEMESTER
CURRICULAR STRUCTURE
AND
SYLLABI OF
FULL-TIME DIPLOMA COURSE
IN
LEATHER GOODS
TECHNOLOGY
BRANCH:LEATHER GOODS TECHHNOLOGY , SEMESTER:3
Class/Week
SLNO CATEGORY CODE COURSE TITLE CREDITS L T P Contact Marks
Hours
1 Prog core LGTPC301 History of Art and Fashion 2 2 0 0 2 100
2 course
Prog core LGTPC302 Designing Principles and Development 3 2 1 0 3 100
3 Prog core LGTPC303 Fashion Studies for leather goods 2 2 1 0 3 100
4 Prog core LGTPC304 Fundamental of leather Goods Manufacturing 3 3 0 0 3 100
5 Prog core LGTPC305 Essential management Studies for Leather Goods 2 3 0 0 3 100
Industry
6 Prog core LGTPC306 Creative, Technical Drawing & Pattern Making -1 2 0 0 6 6 100
7 Prog core LGTPC307 Leather Goods Making Workshop-1 2 0 0 6 6 100
8 Prog core LGTPC308 Essential Computer Application - 1 1.5 0 0 3 3 100
9 Prog core LGTPC309 Communication Skill - II 1.5 0 0 3 3 100

10 S-Intern-I SI201 Internship Programme (Tannery) 2 0 0 1 1 100
TOTAL 21 33 1000
STUDENT CONTACTHOURSPERWEEK:33 Hrs. Theories and Practical Period of 60 Minutes each.
L–Lecture –Tutorial –Practical, INT- Internal Assessment AS/QZ – Assignment/Quiz ATD- Attendance ESE- End
Semester Exam, PIA-Practical Internal Assessment , PEA-Practical External Assessment.
Name of the Course : Diploma in LEATHER GOODS TECHNOLOGY
Course Title: History of Art and Fashion Course code : LGTPC301
Tutorial: -0 Attendance 10 Marks
Prerequisite: No
Aim: - To analyze and understand Century wise Art &Fashion Development andmajor landmarks in
development of costumes and accessories.
Course Objective :
Understand the concept of world art.
Understand the techniques used for different world art
Understand Fashion in the social context and its impact on the various aspects of the society in
the Nineteenth century.
Course Content :
 Introduction to World Art & Cultures
 Introduction: Basics of ―Visual perception‖ and
―Visual Communication‖- Ancient Civilizations
Unit:1 5
 Materials used for Development of Visual Forms
during Pre-historic, Egyptian & Mesopotamian
civilization.
 Ancient Art & Architecture Module 1

 Romanesque and Gothic architecture - Gothic and
early Renaissance painting - Development of
 arches, vaults, buttresses and stained glass windows.
Unit: 2 5
 Visual Art
 Rajput and Mughal Miniature paintings/
Unit: 3 5
architecture. Temple Architecture in South India,
 Ajanta painting, Ellora sculptures. Famous Indian
Art and Artist.
Unit: 4  Fashion Movement (practical presentation
based learning) from 1900 to the Present Fashion
trends. Module 2 6
Assignments
 Designing Leather Goods- inspiring from Art and
any fashion movement
 Presentation on comparison of east and west culture
6
and art
 Field Trips -Art Exhibition &Indian Museum, at Kolkata

FIELD WORK 3
Total 30
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type questions
15 10 10
carrying 1 mark.
mark.
Short answer type
Theoretical
mark.
Subjective type
marks.
Subjective type 9
questions carrying 6 (3 each from each 3 18
marks. of 3 modules)
TOTAL 60
References:
1. Art: A World History, Elke Linda Buchholz (Author), Susanne Kaeppele (Author),Karoline Hille (Author),
Irina Stotland (Author), Gerhard Buhler(Author), Harry N. Abrams (November 2007)
2. The Complete Visual Guide Artists in History - Painting, Sculpture, Styles andSchools (Big Ideas), Robert
Cumming, Penguin (September 2015)
3. Indian Art and Culture Paperback – 11 Jan 2015 by Nitin Singhania
4. The Short Story of Art, Susie Hodge, Lawrence King Pub, 2017
5. Fashions of a Decade The 1930s --Patricia Baker
12. Fashion-Design-Research --Laurence-King-Publishing-2014-MBONU-Ezinma
E BOOKS
1. Indian Culture and Heritage
http://www.nios.ac.in/media/documents/SecICHCour/English/CH.02.pdf
2. The Story of Textiles - https://www2.cs.arizona.edu/patterns/weaving/books/wp_1925-1.pdf
3. Fashion Studies –Text Book

http://cbseacademic.in/web_material/doc/fashion_studies/3_XII_Text_Book.pdf
4. An-Introduction-to-the-History-of-Architecture-Art-Design
https://www.scribd.com/read/529714600/An-Introduction-to-the-History-of-Architecture-Art-Design
Course outcomes:
1. To obtain basic knowledge on world art.
2. To understand the techniques used for different world art
3. To obtain basic knowledge and understand the techniques of paintings/ architecture of India
Name of the Course: Diploma in LEATHER GOODSTECHNOLOGY
Course Title: Designing Principles and Course code: LGTPC302

Development
Number of Credit: 3 Semester : THIRD
Theory : - 2hrs/week Continuous Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Tutorial: -1 hr/week Attendance 10 Marks
Prerequisite: None.
Aim :To develop concepts among the students about designing elements, principles and create a
design brief about the final product.
Course Objective:
1. To understand Elements of Design
2. To Understand Principles of Design
3. To UnderstandColour and its moods
Course Content :
Content(Theory) Module Hrs./Unit

Elements of Design
Introduction to Visual Language

Unit:1  lines 3
 dots,
 shape space
 pattern
 texture
Principles of Design
 Rhythm,
 Harmony, Module 1
Unit: 2  Scale
 Value
 Emphasis
 Balance 3
Colour
 Basics of Color (Hue, Value, Intensity), Flat
Application of colors,
Unit: 3  Color schemes-Monochromatic, analogous, 3
complimentary, split complimentary, triad color
schemes, warm, cool, neutral colors,
 Color composition- Color mixing (visually
identifying the percentage of hues in a color and
generation of the same.
 Color interaction- Interaction of color wavelengths,
its effect on visual perception.
 Colour and Mood-
Psychology of color, emotions attached to colors
and its application in our environment
Unit: 4 Process of Ideation Module 2 3

 Process of ideation
 Integration of elements and principles of design to
develop a product.
Unit: 5 Trend Research and Making Inspiration Board 3
 Deriving inspiration
 Analyzing tangibles and intangibles
 Creating Inspiration boards using Appropriate
images
Unit: 6 Mood Board, Colour Board, Material Board 10
 Explanation of emotive of an inspiration and

translating them into tangible elements.
 Creating a symphony of images by amalgamating
tangibles and intangibles in the form of a
Mood board.
 Deriving color palette from the Inspiration
 Laying down color proportions
 Application of different color harmonies, accent
colors, highlights etc.
 Market survey of appropriate leathers, fabrics,
trims and hardware.
 Placement of sourced materials on the board
along with images to create a look/ material
board.
Create a Design brief
 Converting tangibles and intangibles in to Design/

product ideas.
 Ideation of shapes, forms, colors, textures,
hardware selection, trims sourcing
 Sketches (This will encapsulate the understanding
Unit-7 and analysis of all the boards) Module 3 5
 Evolution of Design from utility to Modernity
 Range Building
ASSIGNM  Exercise on the Elements of Design 15

ENTS  Exercise on the Principles of Design
 Exercise on Colour, Colour compositions and Mood
 Exercise on ideation of both principles and elements
of design
 Exercise on Making Mood Board
 Exercise on Develop design from mood board
colour board and material board
 Exercise on Making Range
Total 45
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type questions
15 10 10
carrying 1 mark.
mark.
mark.
Subjective type
marks.
Subjective type 9
questions carrying 6 (3 each from each of 3 3 18
marks. modules)
TOTAL 60
Reference Book:
8. Bag-Design-by-Fashionary
9. Fabric for Fashion, The Complete Guide Natural and man-made fibers by Clive Hallett and Amanda
Johnston
10. Handbook-of-Color-Psychology-by-Andrew-J-Elliot-Mark-D-Fairchild-Anna-Franklin
Course outcomes:
1. Combine elements and principles of design to create designs
2. Create products or designs based on the principles and elements of Design
3. Think to develop collection on 2-D as per design belief.
Course Title: Fashion Studies for Leather Goods Course code : LGTPC303
Theory : - 2 hrs/week Continuous Internal 20 Marks
Assessment
Tutorial: - 1 hr./week Attendance 10 Marks
Prerequisite: No.
Aim : The Module develops the understanding of fashion concepts and their application in Leather
Garment and accessories. It will also aim to understand the essential components of trend research and
techniques of fashion forecasting.
Course Objective:
1. To develop an understanding of elements of Fashion Forecasting.
2. To develop an understandingregarding the concept of Predicting fashion trends
3. To develop the understanding of determinants of Trends.
4. To develop understanding of Trend boards, analysis of Forecast Stories, fashion forecasting
process.
Course Content :
Introduction to Fashion
 Fashion as a socio-cultural phenomenon

Unit:1  Factors affecting fashion- Social, Political, Technological, 3
Geographical, Demographical, Psychographic
FASHION & CULTURE
 Fashion & Culture, High culture (Fine art, Literature,

Classical Music, Theatre, Pop culture (Television, Pop
Music, Movies, celebrity culture) Low culture (Activities
pursued by “ Special – interest – groups‟ outside the
mainstream e.g. skateboarding)
Module 1
 Study fashion in relation with Modernity and Technological

Unit: 2 advancement; Street styles – “the Bubble up effect‟; 5
industrialization and consumption; globalization
Theories of Fashion & Fashion Terminology

 Fashion theory – Trickle up, Trickle down and Trickle
across
 Fashion Cycle - Classic, FAD, Trend, Style, Fashion
product
Unit: 3  Fashion Seasons – International market and Indian 3
market
 Fashion Terminologies - Design, Prototype,
Manufacturing, Product Launch, Retail store, Couture,
RTW, Mass-produced, Fashion Designer, Stylist, Fashion
Journalist, Fad, Fit, Pattern, Size label, Care label,
Laundering, Fashion Shows, Catwalk, Fashion
Magazines, Webzines, Social Media, Lingerie, Longue
wear, Fragrance, endorsement, Model, Mannequin,
Merchandise & Fashion seasons
Fashion Brands & Icons research Module 2
 Fashion Brands Fashion capitals, Fashion Icons and Role
of Fashion in Movies, Sports, Politics
Unit: 4 2
Unit: 5 Introduction to Fashion Forecasting

 The concept of Predicting fashion trends
 Determinants of Trends
• Short term and Long term Forecasting
 Various Tradeshows and Fashion Forecasting
agencies
 Trend analysis for the current seasons
 Introduction of Stylesight.com and other fashion 8
forecasting sites
 Critically assess and review the requirements and
operational methods of the role of a trend
Module 3
forecaster relevant to fashion and textiles
entrepreneurship.
 Substantiate and apply appropriate research
methodologies to identify and analyze
alternative research sources for identifying global
trend directions.
 Identify, evaluate and communicate the potential
impact of cultural, social, economic and
technological components in the trend forecasting
process.
 Research and critically analyze the challenges
and opportunities of translating trend scenarios
into an exploration.
Analysis of case study
 Do short term Forecasting and Make trend boards

based on market and consumer research for
brandbelonging to categories: Niche, Mass market,
Fast Fashion
Assignm  Study on Cultural events with respect to fashion and 6

ent clothing
 study of a designer Fashion in Movies/Sports/Media

– Case Study
3
FIELD Visit to Renowned Designers Boutiques in the City
WORK
Total 30
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type
1 mark.
Fill in theblanks
carrying 1mark.
Short answer type
Theoretical questions carrying 15 10 10
1 mark.
Subjective type
2 marks.
Subjective type 9
TOTAL 60
References:
TEXT BOOKS
Gini Stephen Frings (2007), Fashion Concept to Consumer, Pearson
Elaine Stone (2013), Dynamics of Fashion, Fair Child Books
Fred Davis (2002), Fashion, Culture and Identity, University of Chicago Press
E BOOKS
1 On Trend – The Fashion Series - http://www.deborahweinswig.com/wp-
content/uploads/2017/02/From-Runway-To-Checkout-February-1-2017.pdf
2 Fashion Studies –Text Book

http://cbseacademic.in/web_material/doc/fashion_studies/3_XII_Text_Book.pdf
3 Fashion & Style - http://www.gov.pe.ca/photos/original/4hsk_fashionRG.pdf

MOOC
https://www.mooc-list.com/course/management-fashion-and-luxury-companies-coursera
https://www.mooc-list.com/course/fashion-style-icons-and-designing-historical-elements-kadenze
SUGGESTED READS
Different types of Culture around the world - National and International fashion designers
Course Outcomes:
1. Obtain basic knowledge on Fashion and Fashion terminology
2. Understand the movement of fashion
3. Obtain knowledge on fashion designers
4. Understand the concept of fashion as a socio-cultural phenomenon
5. Understand the role of fashion in media, sports, movies and various other fields.
Course Title: Fundamental of leather Goods Course code : LGTPC304

Manufacturing

Tutorial: -NIL Attendance 10 Marks
Prerequisite: Basic machinery and material knowledge.

Aim : The Module develops the understanding of Leather Goods, Leather Goods Industry and
Leather Goods Manufacturing. This will also aim to understand basic components of a
Leather Bag, and their manufacturing process.
Course Objective:
1. Understand about the Leather Goods and its categories.
2. Understand about the Industry and functions
3. Recognize the types and styles of leather Handbags and small leather goods.
4. Understand the complete design and manufacturing process in steps.
5. Understand the identification of the material and components used in Leather Handbag.
6. Understanding the functional knowledge on each machine indivisibly.
Course Content :
Leather Goods Classification and their uses
 About leather Goods
 Classification of Leather Goods
 Basic machinery and hand tools
• Major Classification of Leather Goods,

Unit:1 Sub- Categories of Leather Goods Module 1 3
• Information about the subcategories
Personal Leather Accessories 3
Unit:2  About Different types of Personal Leather

Accessories (Hand Bags, Wallets, Clutches,
leather cases etc.)
 Evolution of Leather Handbags , I Handbags,
Clutches, Wallets, etc.
 Leather used for Leather Handbags, Clutches etc.
Unit:3 Introduction to Various categories of Small Leather
Goods
Understanding global markets for Small Leather Goods 3

• Global Mapping of Small Leather Goods Market
• Sizing and styling
• Understanding product categories
Conceptualization and Construction Module 2
Conceptualization
• Formulating design Brief
Unit: 4 • Forecast Analysis 6
• Material Sourcing
• Sketching and Rendering of Various Styles of Goods
Production sequence of -
• Cutting Dept.
• Stitching and closing Dept.
Unit: 5 QC process 9
Finishing and packing dept.
Introduction of work study
Module 3
Different types component measurement techniques and
allowance, wastage calculation process
Pattern measurement of Small Leather Goods (20 hrs)
• Preparing materials specification sheet
• Preparing Measurement-sheet
Unit-6 6
Assign  Develop flowchart of work in leather goods industry 15

 Preparing materials specification sheet
ment  Preparing Measurement-sheet
 Calculate time for component making
 Develop the checklist of sample QC
Total 45
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type
1 mark.
Fill in the blanks
carrying 1 mark.
1 mark.
Subjective type
2 marks.
Subjective type 9
TOTAL 60
Reference Book:
2. Manual-of-Leather-goods CLRI publication
3. Manual-of-Leather-garments CLRI publication
4. Fashion-Sketchbook-Bina-Abling
5. Essential-Fashion-Illustration-Details, MeiceLafuente
E-Content:
1. Pantone.com
2. www.ggosp.com
Course Outcomes
1. Develop necessary skills to capture the details of a product through analytical and
technical drawing.
2. Synthesize and apply Design skills in product realization ideas and other market related
aspects.
Course Title: Essential management Studies for Course code : LGTPC305

Leather Goods industry
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of mathematics, English and computer application.

Aim : . The knowledge of this subject is required of all diploma holders who wish to choose industry/field
as his/her career. This course is designed to develop understanding of various functions of management, role
workersand engineers and providing knowledge about safety and labor, industrial laws and management in
differentareas.
Course Objective:
1. HRM, Industrial management,
2. An understanding of the primary differences between logistics and supply chain management
3. An understanding of the management components of supply chain management and the tools and
techniques useful in implementing supply chain management
4. An understanding of fundamentals of Lean Management for Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises -
with Practical Examples
Course Content :
 INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCE
o Principles and function of Management-
Contribution of different Management
Unit:1 Writers(Henry Fayol, F.W. Taylor, Max Weber) in
the field of Management Science.
 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOR
o Behavior-Motivation-Motivational Theories-
Morale-Leadership-Communication. 5
Module 1
 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGE MENT
o Human Resource Management-Concept and
Definition-Function-Recruitment-Training,
Performance Appraisal-Industrial Safety.
 MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
o Material Management-Concept and Definition-
Function-Purchase-Store-Inventory Control 10
ABC Analysis-VED Analysis.
 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL
ENGINEERING (Basic Idea), PRINCIPLES OF
Unit: 2 SHOPFLOOR SUPERVISION WITH EMPHASIS
ON 5S, SAFETY AND MOTIVATION.
. Supply chain management
Unit: 3  Introduction,
 The management components of supply
chain management ,
 supply chain processes , Module 2 10
 Electronically linking the supply chain ,
 Supply chain performance measurement,
 Developing and implementing partnerships
in the supply chain,
 Implementing supply chain management ,
 Case Study
Lean Management:
Unit: 4
 Introduction,
 Importance of Lean management,
 Concept of Lean Thinking, Module 3 10
 Identifying waste in the production process,
 Define Value Stream Mapping,
 recognize error proofing,
 describe push and pull systems in lean
manufacturing, Summarize Lean Management
and Lean Inventory Management,
 Define Total Productive Maintenance.
 Describe lean Management with a case study.
 Developing Productive Supplier Relationships in a Competitive
Market [Identification and collection of different shapes and sizes
of fittings from different vendors (online) and make material list in
excel]
Assign  Implement the principle of lean management in our workshop to
ment improve the quality of product. 10
 Demand Planning and Forecasting the price and availability of

material of leather goods.
Total 45
Questions to be
answered
MCQ type questions
15 10 10
carrying 1 mark.
Theoretical
mark.
Short answer type
mark.
10 6 12
carrying 2 marks.
Subjective type 9 3
questions carrying 18
6 marks. (3 each
from each
of 3
modules)
TOTAL 60
References:
1. ―Marketing Management‖ by S.A. Sherlekar. Himalaya Publishing House.
2. ―Marketing Management‖ by Phillip Kotler . Prentice Hall Inc (1996).
3. ―Industrial Engineering and Management‖ by Dr. Ravi Shankar. Galgotia Publications
4. Siems, ―Supply Chain Management: The Science of Better, Faster, Cheaper,‖ Federal Reserve Bank of
Dallas – Southwest Economy, March/April (2005),
5. Lean Management for Beginners: Fundamentals of Lean Management for Small and Medium-Size
Enterprises - With many Practical Examples--- By Maximilian Tündermann
Course Outcomes:
 Focuses on the practical application of marketing techniques and the management of a firm’s
marketing resources and activities.
 The basics of HRM and Industrial management,
 Understand and apply lean management and supply chain management in real field.
Course Title: Creative, Technical Drawing Course code : LGTPC306

& Pattern Making -1
Prerequisite: Basic Knowledge of material , component, machinery.
Aim : The aim of this module is to develop the understanding of flat Pattern making for Basic Leather
Goods;
Course Objective:
To develop the skill of generating flat patterns in context of the 3-d form integral to Design
development of Leather Goods.
Instructions:
1.GroupsizeforComputerLabshouldbeformedinsuchawaythateachstudentofagroupcan use
computer independently to understand the programmingconcept.
Content :
Practical Hrs./Unit
Unit 1 CREATIVE DRAWING OF LEATHER GOODS 20
Generating sketch of different element
Pocket
Handle
Loop
Accessories
Trims
Emboss, Deboss
FLAP
Gussets
Generating Sketch of leather goods
Generating the size and proportion from Sketch
Generating the element from sketches
Generating Range of sketches
Unit 2 Introduction to Pattern Making 50
Understanding of measurements and pattern making of different SLG..
 Card Holder
 Wallet
 Ladies purse
Understanding of measurements and pattern making of different bags

with Run around, T-Gusset, U gusset/Kelly Gusset
 Shopping Bag
 Duffel Bag
 Kelly Bag
 Hand Bag / Bugatti Bag
 Clutches
 Bucket Bag
 Draw String Bag
Assignme 20
nt
Create Mock-ups of each of the product whose patterns have been
generated.
Make a presentation on different types of bags with their step by step

making process (Minimum three different bags.)
Total 90
submission
Viva-voce 20
Total 40
Reference Books:
4. Fashion-Sketchbook-Bina-Abling
5. Essential-Fashion-Illustration-Details, MeiceLafuente
Course Outcomes:
1. Sketch the bag
2. Make range as per style
3. Generate the size and proportion from Sketch
4. Make technical drawing and patterns
5. Develop paper mockup
Course Title: Leather Goods Making Course code : LGTPC307

Workshop-1
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of Sewing machine, material
Aim : This Module aims to provide students the skills, knowledge and attitudes to handle
different materials, tools and its applications in the context of Cutting.
Course Objective:
To develop understanding different cutting materials like paper, vinyl, different types of leather with
different thickness which will enhance the basic understanding and appreciation of manufacturing
process leading to product realization.
To develop understanding different safety measures while using tools
To develop the competency to develop different variations of Bags.
Note: Group size for workshop should be formed in such a way that each student of a group can use sewing
machine independently to complete each operation individually.
Content :
Introduction to various tools for paper cutting.
• Safety measures in Handling Tools and equipment
• Marking
Cutting Exercises (Material Knowledge) 12
• Introduction to Leather cutting

Unit 1 • Difference in their origin, color, thickness & finish
Direction of stretch on synthetic vinyl
• Cutting process for different types of leather
Cutting exercises
• Cutting technique of Vegetable tan (VT),buff/cow leather,

• Cutting technique of sheep /goat leather
• Cutting technique of split leather
Vinyl cutting exercises
Skiving and Folding exercises:
Unit 2 18
Objectives of skiving, different types of skiving, Different parts of
skiving machine and their adjustment,
Different types of skiving practice
Objectives of folding or edge treatment.
Types of Folding used in Footwear upper preparation.

a) Straight edge folding
b) Curve edge folding
(Convex—Concave)
Briefly description of the following hand-tools and their uses in

folding.
Work stone,
folding hammer,
reinforcement tape,
adhesive pot,
sponge,
brush,
brush container,
prick marker
Scissor.
Properties of the following Adhesives and its application techniques
in folding. (Strength, applying techniques, Drying strength)
Rubber base adhesives

Neoprene Adhesives
Techniques and sequences of straight folding….

Marking
Cleaning edge (Optional)
Adhesive applying (Proper quantity)
Drying
Folding in proper way
Techniques and sequences of Curve folding….
Marking
Cleaning edge (Optional)
Cutting or notch making as per curve.
Adhesive applying (Proper quantity)
Drying
Folding in proper way
Knowledge of Skiving, folding defects, and how to overcome it.
Impact of over adhesive in stitching.

Construction of the following leather accessories…
• Cutting patterns
Unit 3 • Surface Development 60
• Stitching and closing
a. Wallet
b. Ladies purse
c. Shopping Bag
d. Duffel Bag
e. Kelly Bag
f. Bugatti Bag
g. Clutch Bag
Total 60

submission
Viva-voce 20
Total 40
Course Outcomes:
1. cut materials vinyl and different types of leather with different thickness
2. develop the competency to develop different variations of Bags.
Reference Books
4. Comprehensive Footwear Technology, S.N. Ganguly
5. INTRODUCTION TO SEWING AND SEWING MACHINES byDeepak Choudhary. , K. Louis, Chandra
Shekhar , Sanjeev Kumar Mishra.
E-Content: ggosp.com
Name of the Course : Diploma in LEATHER GOODS
TECHNOLOGY
Course Title: Essential Compute Application-1 Course code : LGTPC208
Number of Credit : 1.5 Semester : THIRD

Group size for lab should be formed in such a way that each student of a group can use PC independently to
practice the computer application.
Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of drawing and sketching. Students should have basic
knowledge of material.
Aim : This Module aims to provide students the skills, knowledge and attitudes achieve
competency, appreciation and understanding designing software Adobe Photoshop , Illustrator/Corel and
AutoCAD towards making meaningful communication and presentation.
Course Objective:
OBJECTIVE:
1. To develop understanding Photoshop & its tools
2. To Create simple designs using Photoshop
3. To develop understanding Image editing
4. To develop understanding Vector graphics
5. To develop tools towards the graphic design and generate meaningful visual communication.
6. To understand the dynamics of planar and 3-d Geometry with reference to leather goods and
Understand the Various structures and planes used in leather goods
Content :

Basics of Graphics
• Different file formats of saving images- JPG, TIF, PNG, and GIF.
• Difference between raster and vector images
Adobe Photoshop tools

Unit 1 12
• Understanding and working with Layers and the Adjustments
Panel
• Its application in editing raster images.
• Understanding the basics of Masking
• Transforming and maximizing Smart Objects
• Employing Smart Filters to create interesting effects
• Color correction
• Working with text and vector shapes in PSD
• Layout & Composition with text & visuals
• Theme based Compilation & Composition
- Illustration and Rendering Goods (Adobe Illustrator /Corel Draw ) 9

Adobe Illustrator tools
Unit 2 Different Styles of Leather Accessories
• Sketching Bags
• Technical Drawing of Garments and Goods
• Rendering Techniques of different materials like Leather, Fabric
Fur ,Metals, hardware’s
• Rendering Techniques of Different finishes of leather
• CAD rendering and presentation
 Range building
 UI and UX design with the help of Illustrator
Unit 3: Thematic Illustrations 6

Mood based Illustrations
• Creating Story Boards
• Designing Accessories along with thematic fashion figures.
• Creating backdrops and Illustrations using CAD software and
skills
To understand the dynamics of planar and 3-d Geometry with reference
to leather goods
• Understand the Various structures used in leather goods
• Converting sketches in to 3-d models using CAD software (Corel
Unit – 4 Draw) 6
• Conceptualization of forms involved in Leather goods
• Generation of flat patterns using geometrical tools and techniques
 Creating a three-page brochure for a student business/fashion

event.
 Rendering of different materials and backdrop/ presentation.
12
 Develop 5 sheets of illustrations which incorporate Fashion
Assignme figure/ Accessories
nt:  Develop a range
Total 45
submission
Viva-voce 20
Total 40
Course Outcomes:
1. Develop competency of students in Computer Graphics to create their own artworks and patterns.
2. Develop competency of Thematic Illustrations.
REFERENCE MATERIALS
TEXT BOOKS
1. ` Eismann, Katrin, Photoshop Retouching Techniques, Simmon –Steve publisher
2. Adobe Photoshop CS6, Class room in a book, Dorling Kingslay Pub, 2013,
E BOOKS
http://help.adobe.com/archive/en/photoshop/cs6/photoshop_reference.pdf
http://www.mypracticalskills.com/store/photoshop-for-fashion-ebook/
MOOC
https://www.mooc-list.com/course/learn-designing-using-adobe-
Name of the Course: Diploma in Leather Goods Technology
Course Title: COMMUNICATION SKILLS-II Course code: LGTPC309
Number of Credit: 1.5 Semester:THIRD
Duration:15 weeks Maximum Marks:100
Theory: - NIL Continuous Internal Assessment 50 Marks
Tutorial: NIL Attendance 10 Marks
Practical : 3hrs /week
Total Contact Hours:45 Hours End Semester Examination 40 Marks
Pre-Requisite: Basic knowledge on Communication Skills in English

Aim: The aim of this course is to enhance language proficiency by providing adequate exposure to
listening, speaking, reading and writing skills
Course Objective:
1. To improve the communication skills.
2. To enhance the general conversational skills in different context.
3. To train students to use language appropriately for public speaking and interviews.
4. To impart Basic English grammar and essentials of important language skills.
5. To enhance English vocabulary and language proficiency for better
communication. Skills.
Course Content:
Content (Theory) Hrs./Unit
Functional Grammar:
Introduction, Correct usage: Nouns; Correct usage: Pronouns;
Unit:1 Correct usage: Adjectives; Correct usage: Articles; Correct
usage: Adverb; Correct usage: Preposition; Correct usage : 5
Conjunctions; Correct usage: Tenses; Correct usage: Subject-
Verb Agreement.
Vocabulary Building:
Introduction; Synonyms; Antonyms; Homophones; Homonyms;
Unit:2 Words Often Confused; One Word Substitution; Idioms & 6
Phrasal Verbs : Some Commonly Used Idioms, Some Common
Phrasal Verbs; Technical Terms : SomeCommonly Used
Technical Terms; Foreign Expressions.
Listening Skills:
Listening to short and extended dialogues; telephonic
Unit:3 conversations; Listening to prose & poetries; Listening to video 6
clips, documentaries, feature films, presentations and interviews
; Listening for the gist of the text – for identifying a topic’s
general meaning and specific information; Listening for multiple-
choice questions – for positive & negative comments, for
interpretation.
Speaking Skills:
Introducing oneself or expressing personal opinion ; Simple oral
Unit:4 or casual interaction ; Dialogue; Conversation; Participating in 6
group discussions; Role plays and interviews; Addressing a
small group or a large formal gathering; Debates; Describing
an Object, Describing a Process, Describing Situations,
Describing Personalities, Brief Power point presentation.
Reading Skills:
Basic Reading Comprehension and interpretation; Reading
for the gist of a text- for information transfer and
Unit:5 interpretation; Reading for specific information, instructions,
recommendations, functional checklists; Reading 6
comprehension exercises for multiple- choice questions, for
contextual meaning; Reading newspapers, magazine articles of
topical interest and events.
Writing Skills:
Writing emails, messages, memos, notices, agendas, leaflets,
Unit:6 brochures, minutes of a meeting; Writing formal business and 6
official letters inviting, accepting, declining the invitation; Letter
for enquiry, Letter for placing an order, Letter of Complaint;
Requesting permission for industrial visits or implant training;
Letter for applying a job by enclosing CV; Writing technical
reports; Writing short proposals.
ASSIGNME Students participate in Dialogues/Role Plays – Introduce Oneself

NTS:
and Others 10
Students prepare their own resume and report.
Students make presentations on given topics.
Students participate in group discussions.
Students participate in Mock Interviews
TOTAL 45


Practical/Sessional voce 20
Viva-voce 20
Total 40
Course Outcome:
Students will be able to attain :
1. Better understanding of nuances of English language through audio-visual experience and group
activities.
2. Better ability to use functional English.
3. Competency in analytical skills and problem-solving skills
4. Better speaking skills with clarity and confidence which automatically enhances their employability
skills
REFERENCE MATERIALS
Text Book:
1. Effective Technical Communication – M Ashraf Rizvi – McGraw Hill Education ( India) Private Limited
2. English for Effective Communication – Kumar, Sanjay and PushpLata – Oxford University Press
3. A Manual for English Language Communication Skills – D Sudharani – Pearson
4. English Language Laboratories – NiraKonar –PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd
5. Communicative English for Engineers & Professionals – Nitin Bhatnagar – Pearson
E-Book:
1) http://103.5.132.213:8080/jspui/bitstream/123456789/1122/1/Communication%20Skills.pdf
2) https://agrimoon.com/wp-content/uploads/COMMUNICATION-SKILLS.pdf
Name of the Course : Diploma in LEATHER GOODS
TECHNOLOGY
Course Title: Summer Internship-I Course code : SI201
Duration : 15 Weeks Maximum Marks :
Theory : - NIL Continuous Internal Assessment
Tutorial: -NIL
Practical : 1 hr/week
Total Contact Hours: 15 hours End Semester Examination 100
Course Content :
After the Second semester, students are required to be involved in an industrial environment, which
cannot be simulated in the classroom. Therefore, to create competent professionals for the industry,
students need to be familiarized with various materials, processes, products and their applications,
and relevant aspects of quality control.
Hence expose the students to future employers to provide possible opportunities to learn,
understand and sharpen the real-time technical/managerial skills required at the job.
Another aspect of the training is to understand the social, economic, and administrative
considerations that influence the working environment of industrial organizations and understand
the psychology of the workers and their habits, attitudes, and approach to problem-solving.
Reference E-Content: ggosp.com

Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Mechanical Engineering [ME]
Revised 2022
CURRICULUM STRUCTURE FOR PART-II (SEMESTER 3) OF THE
FULL-TIME DIPLOMA COURSES IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

COURSE NAME: FULL TIME DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
BRANCH: MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Total
SL
Category Code No Course Title L Class Full Internal
No Credit ESE Marks
P per marks Marks
week
Mechanical
MEPC201
Program core Engineering 2 - 2 2 100 40 60
1
Drawing
Mechanical
MEPC203
Program core Engineering 3 - 3 3 100 40 60
2
Materials
MEPC205 Strength of
Program core 3 - 3 3 100 40 60
3 Materials
MEPC207 Manufacturing
Program core 3 - 3 3 100 40 60
4 Processes-I
MEPC209 Thermal
5 Program core 3 - 3 3 100 40 60
Engineering -I
Mechanical
MEPC211 Engineering
Program core - 4 4 2 100 60 40
6 Drawing
Practice
MEPC213 Materials
Program core - 2 2 1 100 60 40
7 Testing Lab
Thermal
MEPC215
Program core Engineering -I - 2 2 1 100 60 40
8
Lab
Manufacturing
MEPC217
Program core Processes -I - 4 4 2 100 60 40
9
Practice
SI201
Internship Internship I - - 0 1 100 60 40
10
Total: 14 12 26 21 1000 500 500
FULL MARKS-1000 (Internal Marks-500; ESE Marks-500)
Name of the Course: Diploma in Mechanical Engineering
Code No. : MEPC201 Theory : 100 Marks
Course Title : Mechanical Engineering Drawing Examination Scheme:

Duration : 17 weeks (Total hours per week = 2) (End Semester Examination)
Total lecture class/week: 2 ii) Internal Assessment: 40 Marks
[ Class test : 20 Marks
Credit : 2 Home assignments : 10 Marks
Class attendance : 10 Marks]
1. Course Outcomes: After completion of this course the students will be able to
i) Comprehend the methods of development of lateral surfaces of different truncated and frustum objects, such as
tray, funnel, hopper, bend pipe, transition pieces, etc.
ii) Realise the curves of intersection of commonly used two interpenetrating solids.
iii) Interpret machining symbols and surface texture on production drawings.
iv) Interpret various drawing symbols, codes and conventions as per IS: SP-46.
v) Realise the sectional views of various casting / machining components.
vi) Interpret assembly drawing and detailed drawings of various objects such as machine tool parts, power
transmission elements, bearings, valves etc.
Unit Topics& Sub-topics Teaching

Hours
Unit: 1 1.1 Developments of lateral surfaces of the regular oblique solids for the
Development of following cases:
Surfaces Truncated oblique prism, truncated oblique cylinder, truncated / frustum
oblique pyramid and truncated / frustum oblique cone. 06
1.2 Applications of development of surfaces such as hopper, funnel, tray,

transition piece (square to circular).
Unit: 2 2.1 Curves of intersection of the two interpenetrating regular solids for the
Intersection of following cases:
Surfaces of Two
Interpenetrating Square prism with square prism, Cylinder with cylinder when the axes of them
05
Solids are at 900 and bisecting.
Cylinder with cone when the cone is resting vertically on HP and the axis of
cylinder is parallel to both HP and VP and axes of them are intersecting at 90 0.
Unit: 3 3.1 Conventional representation of the following materials: Cast Iron, Mild
Standard Steel, Aluminium, Brass Bronze, Glass, Concrete, Wood & Rubber.
Convention for 3.2 Conventional long and short break in pipe, rod and shaft.
Engineering
3.3 Conventional representation of common features like slotted head,
Drawing using SP
knurling, serrated shaft, splined shaft, ratchet & pinion, holes on circular pitch,
46 : 2003
internal & external thread, square on shafts, repeated parts.
3.4 Conventional representation of standard parts like gears, springs, ball &
roller bearings. 03
3.5 Counter sunk and counter- bored holes.
3.6 Pipe joints and valves.
3.7 Tapers.
3.8 General welding symbols, sectional representation and symbols used in

engineering practices.
Unit: 4 4.1 Limits, Fits and Tolerances:

Limits,
Tolerances, Fits a) Introduction to ISO system of Tolerance.
and Surface
b) Selection and representation of dimensional tolerance- number and grade
Roughness
method. Definitions concerning tolerance and limit system, Unilateral and
bilateral tolerance, Hole basis and shaft basis system, Clearance fit,
Interference fit, Transition fit, Selection of fit for various engineering
applications.
c) Calculation of limit sizes and identification of types of fit from the given sizes 03
like 50H7/c8, 50H6/k5, 50H7/s6 etc.
4.2Geometrical Tolerances: Types, terminology for deviation, representation of

geometrical tolerance on drawing.
4.3Machining Symbols and Surface Texture:

Indication of machining symbol showing direction of lay, sampling length,
machining allowances, manufacturing methods and roughness grades.
Representation of surface roughness on drawing.
Unit: 5 5.1Isometric views to Orthographic views (front view, top view and side view) of
Sectional Views the following objects:
a) Machine components
b) Castings like hanger and shaft support.
5.2Sectional views of the following casting objects: 03
a) Bearing bracket
b) Shaft bracket
c) Sliding block.
Unit: 6 6.1 Introduction, types of assembly drawing, accepted norms to be observed for
Assembly assembly drawings, sequence for preparing assembly drawing. Bill of material.
Drawings
6.2 Assembly drawing from the following detailed drawings: 04
a) Couplings: Rigid flange coupling & Universal coupling.
b) Knuckle joint.
c)C.I. pulleys: Fast pulley and Stepped cone pulley.
d) Bearing: Plummer block.
e) Screw jack.
f) Bench vice.
g) Square tool post of Lathe machine.
Unit: 7 7.1 Detailing of the following assemblies:

Part Drawings a) Knuckle joint
(assembly to b) Castor wheel
detailing) c) Socket and spigot type cotter joint.
d) Foot step bearing
e) Crane hook
f) Drilling jig 04
g) Tail stock of Lathe machine
h) Non-return valve.
7.2 Construction of tooth profile of a spur gear – (i) by using approximate

construction method, (ii) by using involute method.
Grand Total : 34
3. Suggested Home Assignment/Student Activities :(At least four assignments)

Other than practice work in classroom, students should conduct the following suggested activities in group or
individual, which are suitable for this subject as per instruction of the subject teacher:
(a) Students should maintain a separate A3 size sketch book which will be their part of practice work and has to
submit that sketch book along with drawing sheets in scheduled time. Following additional Home Assignments
are to be attempted on this sketch book (not to scale drawing following first angle method of projection) as
instructed by the subject teacher for the attainment of the COs of MEPC201:
Unit
No.
a. Conventional representation as per IS: SP-46 (1988) of the following:

- Materials: Cast Iron, Mild Steel, Aluminium, Brass Bronze, Glass, Concrete, Wood &
Rubber.
- Conventional long and short break in pipe, rod and shaft.
- Common features like slotted head, knurling, serrated shaft, splined shaft, ratchet&
pinion, holes on circular pitch, internal & external thread, square on shafts, repeated
03 parts. 10
- Standard parts like gears, springs, ball & roller bearings.
- Counter sunk and counter bored holes.
- Pipe joints and valves.
- Tapers.
- General welding symbols, sectional representation and symbols used in
a. Calculation of limit sizes and identification of types of fit from the given sizes like
50H7/c8, 50H6/k5, 50H7/s6 etc.
b. Representation of geometrical tolerance on drawing.

04
c. Machining Symbols and Surface Texture: Indication of machining symbol showing
direction of lay, sampling length, machining allowances, manufacturing methods and
roughness grades. Representation of surface roughness on drawing.
Assembly drawing (including bill of materials and conventional representation of tolerances

and surface finish symbols) of the following detailed drawings of components:
a) Universal coupling,
b) Stepped cone pulley,
c) Plummer block,
05
d) Screw jack,
e) Bench vice,
f) Square tool post of Lathe machine.
Part drawing including conventional representation of tolerances and surface finish symbols
of the following assembly drawing:
a) Castor wheel,
b) Crane hook,
06
c) Foot step bearing,
d) Drilling jig,
e) Tail stock of Lathe machine,
f) Non-return valve,
b) They should prepare paper-models of development of lateral surfaces of objects such as tray, funnel, hopper,
transition piece etc., and paper-models of two interpenetrating solids showing curves of intersection.
c) Only one micro-project is planned to be undertaken by each student assigned to him/her by the subject teacher
at the beginning of the semester. The micro-project could be industry application based, workshop-based or
field-based. It should be individually undertaken to build up the skill and confidence in every student so that
she/he contributes to the projects of the industry. A suggestive list of micro-projects is given here for the
attainment of the COs:
(i) Visit Institute’s workshop (Fitting shop or Machine shop) and prepare assembly drawing and detailed drawings of
lathe tool post / lathe tail-stock / shaper tool head / Drilling machine vice etc (as per availability) using proper
measuring instruments.
ii) Visit nearby sheet metal workshop (if possible) and prepare a report related to type of components, dimensions,
material, field of applications, operations performed etc.
iii) Other than practice work, at least one visit for students to nearby industries/workshops is to be arranged for
understanding various production drawings. Students should collect production drawings (if possible) and try to
interpret the object from the given views in collected drawing.
iv) Any other micro-projects suggested by the subject-teacher on similar field.
4. Suggested scheme for question paper design for conducting internal assessment examination :( Duration 45
minutes)


Total
(Remember) (understand) ( Apply & above)
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20
5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [duration 3 hours]

A1 1&2 05
A2 3&4 04 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 5,6&7 06
Total: 15 10 10
B1 1&2 05
B2 3&4 04 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 5,6&7 06
Total: 15 10 10
C1 1& 2 05
C2 3&4 04 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 5,6&7 06
Total: 15 10 10
D1 1, 2 & 5 04
D2 3&4 03 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 6&7 03
Total: 10 06 12
E: Subjective Type Questions(Carrying 6 marks each)
E1 1, 2 & 5 04
E2 3&4 02 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 6&7 03
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
6. Rubrics for the assessment of student’s activity [20 marks]:
1 Imitation of Solved Drawing,
2. Accomplishing assigned problem,
3. Performing the drawing task masterfully/expertly using drafting

instruments.
4. Performing the task following standards and ethics,
5. Submitting assignment sketch book / micro-project related activity on

time,
Charotar Publishing house

1 Machine Drawing N. D. Bhatt
Pvt. Ltd. Anand, Gujrat,
V. M. Panchal
ISBN: 9789380358635
S. K. Kataria & Sons, New
2 A text book of Machine Drawing P. S. Gill Delhi,
ISBN: 9789350144169
3 A text book of Machine Drawing S. Chand & Company
R. K. Dhawan
New Delhi
K. L. Narayana,
New Age International
4 Production Drawing P. Kannaiah,
Publication, New Delhi,
K. Venkata Reddy
ISBN: 9788122435016
5 Machine Drawing Oxford University Press

Basudev Bhattacharya
ISBN: 0-19-807077-2
Engineering Drawing Practice for Bureau of Indian Standard
6 Schools & Colleges- SP 46 : 1988 Bureau of Indian New Delhi -110002
Standard First Revision July 2003
ISBN: 81-7061-019-2
8. Suggested software / learning website link

i)https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S01/is.sp.46.2003.pdf
Complete the Orthographic views from the following isometric views: Annexure 1
1) Annexure 1:https://drive.google.com/file/d/136tkLk_vxBLGiVF0LvZK631eae3L0wQm/view?usp=sharing
Surface Development: Annexure 2
2) Annexure 2: https://drive.google.com/file/d/1Z6XD90eWApikxQTyRbTi7fEAAY6iOa-E/view?usp=sharing
Isometric view to Orthographic view: Annexure 3
3) Annexure 3: https://drive.google.com/file/d/1FT6wc7wXMNTfN5BjmQHLIHJtd1vRzXLL/view?usp=sharing
Intersection of Solids: Annexure 4
4) Annexure 4: https://drive.google.com/file/d/1zpNoLbQ0e9GD1N_K0PalXeFZLqu5o2dr/view?usp=sharing
Introduction to sectional view (as per SP: 46-1988): Annexure 5
5) Annexure 5: https://drive.google.com/file/d/1T2p-veL2dG_KPhABIrQIhOqdQ2gM-0vX/view?usp=sharing
Assembly Drawing from Detailing: Annexure 6
6) Annexure 6: https://drive.google.com/file/d/1TSS_zyAyywdwhShCd20CmEU13z7y0YvF/view?usp=sharing
Part Drawing from Assembly: Annexure 7
7) Annexure 7: https://drive.google.com/file/d/13oc3fZgklShtSpByIuzRJGhUmZQqTgRg/view?usp=sharing
Code no. : MEPC203 Theory : 100 Marks
Course Title : Mechanical Engineering Materials Examination Scheme :

(i) External Assessment : 60 marks
Duration :17 weeks (total hours per week = 3) (End Semester Examination)
Total lecture class/week : 3 (ii) Internal Assessment: 40 marks
[Class test : 20 marks
Credit : 3 Assignment, viva voce : 10 marks
Class attendance : 10 marks]
1. Course outcomes (COs):

At the end of this course, the student will be able to:
a. Explain about crystal structures.
b. Identify properties of materials.
c. Classify the ferrous metals and describe their properties and applications.
d. Describe the non-ferrous metals, cutting tool materials, and composites along with their properties and
applications.
e. Explain various heat treatment processes & their applications on various engineering components for
improving their mechanical properties.
f. Describe plastic moulding process and its applications.
g. Understand non-destructive testing methods & its applications.
The following topics/subtopics should be taught and assessed in order to develop unit outcomes for achieving the
course outcomes to attain the identified competency.
Unit Topics and Sub-topics Teaching

Hours
Unit-1: 1.1 Introduction, classification of engineering materials.

Basics of 1.2. Crystal structures: Unit cell and space lattice. Crystal system- The seven basic crystal
Engineering systems.
Materials Crystal structure for metallic elements- BCC, FCC and HCP.
Coordination number for simple cubic, BCC and FCC.
Atomic radius- definition, atomic radius for simple cubic, BCC and FCC. 06
Atomic packing factor (APF) for simple cubic, BCC, FCC and HCP. Simple problems on finding
number of atoms and atomic packing factor for a unit cell.
1.3 Mechanical properties of materials - elasticity, plasticity, ductility, malleability,
toughness, hardness, harden ability, brittleness, fatigue, and creep.
1.4. Introduction to corrosion, methods to prevent of corrosion.
Unit-II 2.1. Cooling curve and showing allotropic transformation of iron. Iron- Carbon equilibrium 09
diagram and its explanation. Critical temperatures and its significance. Principal micro
Ferrous constituents of an iron carbon system up to 2.0% C content (austenite, ferrite, cementite,
Metals and pearlite, eutectoid, hypo-eutectoid & hyper –eutectoid steel)
Alloys
2.2 Broad classification of ferrous metals (steel, cast iron, wrought iron) according to
percentage of carbon. Process flow diagram for production of iron and steel.
2.3 Steel: compositions, properties and applications of - i) Plain carbon steel: low
(including dead steel & free cutting steel), medium and high carbon steel; effect of silicon,
sulphur, phosphorus and manganese. ii) Alloy steel: low, medium and high alloy steel,
purpose of alloying, effects of various alloying elements like chromium, nickel, manganese,
tungsten, vanadium, cobalt, and molybdenum. iii) Tool steel: cold work tool steel, hot work
tool steel, high speed steel (HSS) - composition and applications. iv) Stainless steel: types
and applications.vi). Spring steel: composition and applications. vii) Designation of steels
on the basis of chemical composition (IS -7598: 1974).
2.4 Type of Steel used for following: shafts, axles, nuts, bolts, crank shafts, camshafts,
house hold utensils, surgical instrument, anti-friction bearings and gears.
2.5Cast Iron & Wrought Iron: Classification and application of cast iron as white grey,
nodular, and malleable. Wrought iron - composition and its use.
Unit-III: 3.1 Introduction to heat treatment, TTT Diagram for eutectoid steel.
Heat 3.2 Heat Treatment Process: Purpose, process and applications of - Annealing, Normalising,
Treatment Hardening & Tempering. 10
of Steel 3.3 Austempering & Martempering: Purpose, process and application.
3.4 Surface hardening: Purpose, process and application of - case hardening, flame
hardening, and induction hardening.
Unit-IV: 4.1 Properties and application of copper and its alloys such as brass, muntz metal, gun
Non-Ferrous metal and bronze.
Metals and 4.2 Properties and application of aluminium alloys such as Y-alloy, hindalium, and
Alloys duralumin. 05
4.3 Properties and application of nickel alloys such as inconel, monel metal, and nichrome.
4.3 Properties and application of bearing metals such as white metal, babitt metal, and
phosphor bronze.
Unit-V: 5.1 Polymeric materials.
Non- 5.2 Properties and applications of thermoplastics, thermosetting plastics and rubbers.
Metallic and 5.3 Plastic Moulding process: compression moulding, transfer moulding, injection
Advanced moulding, blow moulding, vacuum forming, extrusion, calendaring, rotational moulding.
Materials 5.4 Application of ABS, acrylics, nylons and vinyl, polyesters, epoxies, melamine and
bakelite.
5.5 Application of rubbers: neoprene, butadiene, buna and silicon.
10
5.6 Ceramics - properties and applications of glasses and refractories.
5.7 Composite materials - properties and applications of laminated and fibre reinforced
materials.
5.8 Advanced engineering materials- Properties and applications of Nano materials and
smart materials.
Unit-VI: 7.1 Importance of non-destructive testing, difference between destructive and non-
Non- destructive testing. 05
Destructive 7.2 Non-destructive testing methods – Radiography (X-Ray & Gamma Ray), Ultrasonic crack
Testing detection, Dye penetration test, Magnaflux test – comparison & applications.
Grand Total : 51
3. Suggested Home Assignments/Students’ Activities: (any four)
List of assignments are to be performed by the students in subject of Mechanical Engineering Materials [any two]:
1. Prepare a chart showing the diagrams and detailed calculations of coordination number, atomic radius and
atomic packing factor for BCC, FCC and HCP Crystal Structures for demonstration purpose.
2. Prepare a chart showing the composition and applications of the following materials for demonstration
purpose: a) Babitt Metal, b) Phosphor Bronze, c) Brass, d) Bronze, e) Gun Metal, f) Bell Metal, g) Duralumin,
h) German silver, i) Monel Metal, j) Inconel, k) Nichrome [any five].
3. Prepare a chart showing the Iron-Carbon Equilibrium Diagrams (drawn in proper scale) and explain its
critical temperatures, micro constituencies up to 2% carbon content in tabulated form for demonstration
purpose.
4. Prepare a chart showing the selection of material with their composition and proper justifications for the
following components: a) Shaft and spindle, b) Rail track, c) Wires, d) Boiler plate, e) Connecting rod, f) Die
block, g) Cutting tool, h) Hand chisel i) Hammer, j) Drill bit [any five].
5. Prepare a chart showing the microstructure, composition and properties of the following steels for
demonstration purpose: a) Ferrite, b) Pearlite, c) Cementite, d) Bainite, e) Sorbite, f) Martensite.
6. Prepare a chart showing the process flow diagram with proper explanations for production of steel from
iron ore for demonstration purpose.
7. Prepare a flow chart showing the sequential processes of suggested heat treatment with explanation and
proper justifications for enhancing the performances of the following components: a) Gear used in power
transmission in lathe, b) Anvil of smithy shop, c) Crank shaft used in 4 stroke engines, d) Cast Iron pulley, f)
Rail wheels [any one].
8. Prepare a chart showing sequential process flow diagrams with explanation and specific applications of any
two types of non-destructive testing methods generally being used in Industry for material testing.
9. With suitable diagram explain and specify its applications of the following plastic forming processes: a)
Compression moulding, b) Transfer moulding, c) Injection moulding, d) Blow moulding, e) Vacuum forming,
f) Extrusion [any two].
10. Prepare a chart by organizing the following engineering materials such as Cast iron, Mild steel, Wrought
iron, Copper, Aluminium according to their mechanical properties such as Strength, Malleability, Ductility,
Hardness and Machinability.
4. Suggested scheme for question paper design for conducting internal assessment examination :( Duration: 45
minutes)

Total
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20
5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination [duration 3 hours]

A: Multiple Choice Type Questions(Carrying 1 mark each)
A1 1& 2 05
A2 3&6 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 4&5 05
Total: 15 10 10
B: Fill-in the BlankType Questions(Carrying 1 mark each)
B1 1& 2 05
B2 3&6 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 4&5 05
Total: 15 10 10
C: Short Answer Type Questions(Carrying 1 mark each)
C1 1& 2 05
C2 3&6 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 4&5 05
Total: 15 10 10
D: Subjective Type Questions(Carrying 2 marks each)
D1 1& 2 03
D2 3&6 04 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 4&5 03
Total: 10 06 12
E1 1& 2 03
E2 3&6 03 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 4&5 03
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
4 Viva-voce
A Text Book of Materials Science and

1 O.P.Khanna Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi.
Metallurgy
2 Materials Science for Polytechnic S. K. Kataria & Sons, New Delhi,

R.K.Rajput
ISBN: 9789350144169
3 Engineering Materials B.K.Agrawal McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi.
4 Material Science R.S. Khurmi, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
5 Material Science & Engineering Raghavan PHI
Course Title : Strength of Materials Examination Scheme:

(i) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration : 17 weeks (End Semester Examination)
Total lecture class/week : 3 (ii) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
[Class Test : 20 Marks
Credit : 3
1. Course Outcomes:
a. Demonstrate different types of stress induced on components under the action of different types of loading
condition.
b. Interpret the variation of MOI for different cross-sections of mechanical components.
c. Determine stresses, deformations in the simple load carrying members subjected to an axial, transverse,
radial, twisting or thermal loading,
d. Draw shear force and bending moment diagrams for beams with different support conditions and different
load conditions,
e. Analyze both solid and hollow shaft subjected to torsion,
f. Solve the problems of column for different end conditions using different methods like Euler’s Formula &
Rankine-Gordon formula,
Unit Topics& Sub-topics Teaching

Hours
Unit-01: 1.1 Definition of SOM & concept of rigid body, deformable body & equilibrium of forces.
Simple 1.2 Types of loads (normal and tangential), types of stresses - normal stress (tensile stress and
Stresses compressive stress) & shear stress, strain -concept, types- longitudinal and lateral strain, and
and Strains Poisson’s ratio.
1.3 Hooke’s law, Young’s modulus, longitudinal stress and strain values of uniform and
stepped bar under the influence of normal force; stress and strain values of uniform bar due
to self-weight only.
1.4. Behaviour of ductile and brittle materials subjected to axial tension, stress-strain or load- 12
deformation curve for ductile (MS) and brittle material (CI) - discussion on salient point, limit
of proportionality, yielding, permanent set, yield stress and ultimate stress, factor of safety
(simple problems on normal stresses and longitudinal strain. No discussion on composite
section).
1.5 Direct shear stress (single/double shear) and shear strain, modulus of rigidity, (simple
problems on direct shear in riveted joint, punching press).
1.6 Lateral strain, Poisson’s ratio, volumetric strain, bulk modulus, relation among elastic
constants without deduction.
1.7 Thin cylindrical shell - hoop stress, longitudinal stress and relation between them (simple
problems).
1.8 Temperature stress and strain in case of bodies having uniform cross-section with and
without yielding (simple problems but no discussion on composite section).
Unit-02: 2.1 Definition of area and mass moment of inertia.

Moment of 2.2 Parallel axis theorem, Perpendicular axis theorem, Polar moment inertia, Radius of
Inertia gyration.
2.3 MOI about axes passing through the centroid (for solid having square, rectangular, circular,
semi-circular, triangular sections and for hollow having square, rectangular, circular sections
only) 06
2.4 MOI of angle section, channel section, Tee section, and I-section about centroidal axis and
any other axis parallel to centroidal axis. Polar moment of inertia of circular sections (solid and
hollow).
2.5 Simple problems.
Unit-03: 3.1 Types of beams, types of loads (point load, uniformly distributed load, UVL, VL), and types
Shear Force of supports.
& Bending 3.2 Meaning of SF, BM of beam, and relation between them, sign convention of SF & BM.
Moment of 3.3 Shear force and bending moment diagram (for simply supported beam and cantilever
Beam subjected to point loads/uniformly distributed load/their combination). 08
3.4 Location of point of maximum bending moment for simply supported beam.
3.5 Concept of overhanging beam and point of contra flexure.
3.6. Problems on cantilever and simply supported beam.
Unit-04: 4.1. Theory of pure bending, assumption in theory of bending, flexural formula, neutral axis.
Bending 4.2 Moment of resistance, section modulus and neutral axis. 04
stresses in 4.3 Simple problems on bending stress in beams having rectangular, circular, and I-section
Beams (symmetrical section about both axes).
Unit-05: 5.1 Concepts of deflection, maximum deflection and slope in a beam.
Deflection 5.2 Maximum deflection and slope of simply supported beam subjected to point load at mid
of Beams span and / or uniformly distributed load on entire span (no deduction).
5.3 Maximum deflection and slope of cantilever beam subjected to point load at free end and
03
/ or uniformly distributed load on entire span(no deduction)
5.4 Simple problems on maximum deflection and maximum slope of simply supported beam
and cantilever subjected to above mentioned loading.
Unit-06: 6.1 Introduction, difference between strut and column, types of column.
Columns & 6.2 Concept of slenderness ratio, equivalent length of column for different end conditions.
Struts 6.3 Euler’s formula, assumptions, formula for critical/buckling loads of columns for different 04
end conditions (no deduction), safe load, limitations of Euler’s formula.
6.4 Rankin’s formula, calculation of critical / buckling load.
Unit-07: 7.1 Concept of pure torsion, field of applications (shaft, flange couplings, shear bolts), torsional
Torsion of rigidity, angle of twist, polar modulus, torsional equation for solid and hollow circular shafts,
circular assumptions made for deriving the pure torsion equation.
05
shafts 7.2 Torsional resistance for solid and hollow circular shafts, comparison between them, power
transmitted by shaft.
7.3 Simple problems on pure torsion.
Unit-08 8.1 Function, types, materials used, practical applications.

Springs: 8.2 Coiled spring terminology - spring stiffness, solid length, spring index, and mean radius of
coil.
8.3 Angle of twist in the spring wire, deformation, and energy stored in the closely coiled helical 03
spring subjected to an axial load. [No Derivation; Only Formula use]
8.4 Equivalent stiffness of coiled springs in series & parallel.
8.5 Simple problems on closed-coil helical spring subjected to an axial load.
Grand Total : 51
3. Suggested Home Assignments/Students’ Activities: Students are to solve at least four assignments from the set of
assignment attached in separate sheet (Annexure 1).
4. Suggested scheme for question paper design for conducting internal assessment examination :( Duration: 45
minutes)

Total
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20
5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [Duration 3 hours]

A1 1&3 07
A2 2, 4, 5 & 6 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 7&8 03
Total: 15 10 10
B1 1&3 07
B2 2, 4, 5 & 6 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 7&8 03
Total: 15 10 10
C1 1&3 07
C2 2, 4, 5 & 6 05 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 7&8 03
Total: 15 10 10
D1 1&3 03
D2 2, 4, 5 & 6 05 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 7&8 02
Total: 10 06 12
E1 1&3 03
E2 2, 4, 5 & 6 04 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 7&8 02
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
3 In time submission of the Assignment work / Micro Project Work
4 Viva voce
1 Strength of Materials R.S. Khurmi S.Chand

2 Strength of Materials R. Subramanian Oxford
3 Strength of Materials S.S. Rattan McGraw Hill Education
4 Strength of Materials R.K Rajput S. Chand
5 Strength of Materials S. Ramamurtham Dhanpat Rai Publishing.
(Annexure 1)
Samples of SOM Assignment

(any two from first four and any two from next six)
1. To find the induced stress and its nature, and deformation in each part and the resultant deformation of whole
body. Given – E and cross sectional area of each part.
2. To find the decrease in length of the body made up of different materials A and B, under the action of axial
compressive load. Given EA , EB , cross sectional area of each section, considering the self weight of WA , WB and
axial load P.
3. To justify the joining of stiffener to the C-section as shown below and determine the increase of moment of
resistance of C-section with stiffener in comparison to without stiffener. Given, various dimensions associated
with sketches, bending stress.
OR, To choose the best option from two given alternatives in which two identical plates are welded to the (i)flanges
of symmetrical I-section, and (ii) webof symmetrical I-section as shown. Given, various dimensions associated
with sketches and bending stress.
4. Compare the bending strength of the two beams having different cross section (one is of hollow rectangular cross
section and other is of I-section). I-section is formed by welding of back to back webs of two ‘C’ sections whereas
hollow rectangular section is formed by welding of face to face top & bottom flange of two ‘C’ sections as shown.
OR, Compare the bending strength of three sections of the same cross sectional area and depth if one of them
has a solid rectangular section (50 mm wide and 200 mm deep), the second one is of hollow rectangular section
(external dimensions of 90 mm wide and 200 mm deep with 20 mm wall thickness), and the last one is an I-
section of equal flanges (170 mm wide web and flange thickness equal to 20 mm).
5. To determine the position of two supports of an equally overhanging beam for the least maximum BM,
draw SF and BM diagram of such loaded beam. To find the point of contra flexure, if any.
6. To determine the economical cross-section of a simply supported beam subjected to combined loading from the
given two options - square cross section and circular cross section. Given, allowable bending stress, length of
beam, magnitude of point load and intensity of u.d.l.
7. To draw the elastic curve and determine maximum defection and maximum slope of cantilever and simply
supported beam subjected to combined loading. Given, E, length of beam and moment of inertia of the cross
section of beam.
8. To compare the crippling loads given by the Rankin’s formula and Euler’s formula for a column. Given, cross
section of column and its MOI about centroidal axes (IGX, IGY), allowable crushing stress fC, modulus of elasticity E,
value of α, length and end condition of column.
9. To design the hollow shaft and determine the % saving in material for the replacement a solid shaft by a hollow
shaft of same material. Given, maximum allowable shear stress is same for both the shafts, diameter of solid
shaft, and ratio of the outer and inner diameter of hollow shaft.
10. Mechanical structure of a single purchase crab winch is shown in figure where two solid steel shafts AB & CD of
same material are connected by two gears. Determine the largest torque ‘T’ that can be applied to the end A of
shaft AB and the corresponding angle of twist for each shaft. Given, modulus of rigidity and allowable torsional
shear stress of the shaft material, Lc&Lb, Dc&Db , Rc&Rb.
11. A solid circular shaft is transmitting 100 kW at 180 rpm. The shaft is not to twist more than 1o in a length of 3
meters.The allowable torsional shear stress of the shaft material is 60 N/mm 2. Assume modulus of rigidity of the
shaft material is 80 kN/mm2. Determine the suitable shaft diameter for this purpose.
12. Two close-coiled helical springs wound from same wire having same length but with different core radii and are
placed one into the other between two rigid plates at their two extreme ends. This mechanical structure is being
subjected to compressive load. Determine the maximum shear stress induced in each coil spring. Given, diameter
of wire, compressive load applied between the two rigid plates and core radii of the two springs.
Course Title : Manufacturing Processes-I Examination Scheme:

Duration : 17 weeks(Total class hour/week = 3) (End Semester Examination)
Total lecture class/week : 3 (ii) Internal Assessment:40 Marks
Credit : 3
1. Course Outcomes (COs):

The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with this subject are to be taught and
implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented course outcomes:
a. Understand the fundamental concept of manufacturing and identify different manufacturing processes to
be performed for the given job.
b. Prepare products using different metal forming processes.
c. Plan, estimate and produce jobs by using Lathe.
d. Prepare products using different casting processes.
e. Assess and apply different metal joining processes to produce jobs.
The following topics / subtopics should be taught and assessed in order to develop unit outcomes for achieving the
identified course outcomes.

Hours
Unit: 1 1.1 Concept of Manufacturing Processes and Classification: Metal forming
Fundamentals processes, Metal machining processes, Metal joining processes and Metal
of finishing processes. 02
Manufacturing
Processes
Unit: 2 Forging:
Metal Forming 2.1.1 Concept of Hot Working & Cold Working.
Processes 2.1.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Cold and Hot Working Processes.
2.1.3 Principle of forging processes.
2.1.4 Forging temperature and grain flow in forged parts.
04
2.1.5 Classifications of forging processes.
2.1.6 Types of dies: Open Die, Impression Die (Single Impression and Multi-
impression) and Closed die Forging.
2.1.7 Types of forging presses and hammers.
2.1.8 Forging defects.
Rolling and Extrusion: 05
2.2.1 Basic principles of rolling and extrusion.
2.2.2 Hot and cold rolling.
2.2.3 Types of rolling mills: 2 Hi, 3 Hi & 4 Hi mills.
2.2.4 Rolling defects.
2.2.5 Hot and cold extrusion.
2.2.6 Methods of extrusion: Direct, Indirect, Backward & impact Extrusion,
2.2.7 Advantages, disadvantages & applications of rolling & extrusion.
Press Working: 05
2.3.1 Basic principles of press work on sheet metals.
2.3.2 Different components and their functions of standard die set with a punch.
2.3.3 Types of presses.
2.3.4 Press working operations: Cutting, bending, drawing, punching, banking,
notching, lancing, piercing, coining and embossing.
Unit: 3 Machining: 04
Fundamentals 3.1 Basic concept of machining, cutting speed, feed and depth of cut.
of Machining 3.2 Chip formation mechanism and types of chips.
Processes 3.3 Orthogonal cutting and oblique cutting.
3.4 Desirable properties of cutting tool materials and examples.
3.5 Cutting tool nomenclature & tool signature of single point cutting tool.
3.6 Tool life, factors effecting the tool life and different ways of measuring tool
life.
3.7 Desirable properties, purpose and examples of cutting fluids.
Unit: 4 Lathe: 10
Lathe 4.1 Basic components and their functions of centre Lathe.
4.2 Classification of Lathe.
4.3 Specification of Centre Lathe.
4.4 Comparison among Centre Lathe, Capstan Lathe and Turret Lathe.
4.5 Lathe accessories: Chucks, mandrels, rests, face plates, centres and angle
plates.
4.6 Taper turning on Lathe: Different ways of representing taper on a job,
different methods of taper turning and simple problems on taper turning.
4.7 Thread cutting on Lathe: Procedure, change gears calculation for thread
cutting operation and related simple problems.
4.8 Other Lathe operations: Centering, facing, Turning, parting off, undercutting,
grooving, Knurling, drilling and boring.
4.9 Cutting parameters & machining time calculation.
Unit: 5 Casting: 07
Casting 5.1 Types of patterns, pattern materials, and pattern allowances.
Processes 5.2 Moulding materials, types of moulding sands, properties of sand, moulding
methods, cores and core prints. Elements of gating system. Bench and floor
moulding methods.
5.3 Furnaces, construction and working of cupola furnace and electric arc
furnace.
5.4 Special casting processes: Die casting, centrifugal casting, investment casting
and shell moulding.
5.5 Casting defects and its remedies.
Unit: 6 Welding, Brazing and Soldering: 08

Joining 6.1 Classification of welding.
Processes 6.2 Gas welding (Process, Equipment and Applications).
6.3 Types of gas welding flame.
6.4 Arc Welding (Process, Equipment and Applications).
6.5 TIG and MIG welding (Process, Equipments and Application).
6.6 Submerged arc welding (Process and Application).
6.7 Shielded metal arc welding (Process and Application).
6.8 Thermit welding (Process and Application).
6.9 Resistance welding (Process and Application): Spot welding, Seam welding
and Projection welding.
6.10 Welding defects.
6.11 Brazing and soldering (Process, Fillers and Applications).
Grand Total : 51
3. Suggested Home Assignments/ Student Activities:

Other than classroom and laboratory learning, following are the suggested student related co-curricular activities
which can be undertaken to accelerate the attainment of the various outcomes in the course:
3.1 It may be submission of home assignment (at least three) or submission of report after conducting site visit/
industry visit/ micro-project / market survey / internet search on specific topic, preparation of chart, creation of
innovative model or present seminar on specific topic which is suitable for the given subject as per instruction of
subject teacher as explained in 3.2 and 3.3.
3.2 Students may conduct one of the following activities in group and prepare reports for their (student’s) activity,
also collect / record physical evidences for their (student’s) portfolio which will be useful for their placement
interviews.
a. Visit a / an Industry / Workshop where processes like metal forming (forging / rolling / extrusion / press
work) or machining (Lathe operations) or casting or welding are carried out. Collect information on
types of machines in operation, their specifications; observe various activities performed and
characteristic of output products.
b. Collect information of recent advancement in manufacturing processes like metal forming or machining
or casting (Machines / Tools / Equipment) and also collect their specification, manufacturer’s name &
application in industry.
c. Collect information on present status and recent advancement in welding. Also collect information on
process specific machines, accessories required and their applications in industry.
3.3 Students may undertake one micro projects for their (student’s) activity. The micro-project could be industry
application based, internet-based, workshop-based, laboratory-based, or field-based. The micro-project may
be executed by the individual or by a group of students but the number of students in the group should not
exceed five students. Each student will have to maintain dated work diary consisting of individual contribution
in the project work and give a seminar presentation of it at the time of submission (ie. end of semester). The
total duration of the micro-project should not be less than 16(sixteen) student engagement hours during the
course.
A suggested list of micro-projects is given here. Similar micro-projects could be added by the concerned faculty
member also.
a. Prepare a cast product of different mechanical engineering drawing models with wax material.
b. Prepare various types of welding joints (with metal components) for display and demonstration
purposes.
c. Prepare different types of keys (with metal components) for display and demonstration purpose.
d. Prepare various types of patterns / core / core box etc. with suitable material.
e. Prepare model or suitable chart of the drive mechanism generally being used in Lathe.
f. Prepare working model of direct extrusion process for display and demonstration purposes.
g. Prepare hammer forging working model for display and demonstration purposes.
h. Prepare working model of the taper turning attachment generally being used in Lathe.
4. Suggested Scheme for Question Paper Design for Conducting Internal Assessment:(Duration: 45 Minutes)

Internal Distribution of Theory Marks
Assessment Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Total
(Remember) (Understand) ( Apply & above)
Class Test: 1 4 8 8 20
5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination:(Duration: 3 hours)
A: Multiple Choice Type Questions(Carrying 1 mark each)

A1 1& 2 04
A2 3&4 06 10 10 x 01 = 10
A3 5&6 05
Total: 15 10 10
B: Fill-in the Blank Type Questions(Carrying 1 mark each)
B1 1& 2 04
B2 3&4 06 10 10 x 01 = 10
B3 5&6 05
Total: 15 10 10
C: Short Answer Type Questions(Carrying 1 mark each)
C1 1& 2 04
C2 3&4 06 10 10 x 01 = 10
C3 5&6 05
Total: 15 10 10
D: Subjective Type Questions(Carrying 2 marks each)
D1 1& 2 02
D2 3&4 04 06 06 x 02 = 12
D3 5&6 04
Total: 10 06 12
E1 1& 2 02
E2 3&4 04 03 06 x 03 = 18
E3 5&6 03
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
6. Rubrics for the Assessment of Student’s Activity:

Sl. No. Performance Indicators
1 Originality of completing the Assigned task / micro-project work
3 In time submission of assignment work / micro-project work
4 Viva voce
Sl. Title of Book Author Publication

No.
Elements of workshop S. K. Hajra Chowdhury, Media Promoters and
1
Technology – Volume I & II Bose, Roy Publishers limited, Mumbai,
A Course in Workshop Technology - Dhanpat Rai Publications, New
2 B.S.Raghuwanshi
Volume I & II Delhi,
Kalpakjian & Pearson Education, New
3 Manufacturing Processes
Schemid Delhi
Manufacturing Technology –
4 P. N. Rao Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
Volume I & II
East-West Press Pvt. Ltd. New
5 Manufacturing Science Amitabh Ghosh, Mallik
Delhi.
Materials and Processes in
6 DeGarmo Wiley
Manufacturing
7 Machining & Machine Tool A.B. Chattopadhyay Wiley
8 Welding & Welding Technology Richard L Little Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
Workshop Technology -
9 W.A.J. Chapman Viva Books (p) Ltd.
Volume I , II & III
8. Suggested Learning Websites:

a) ELS web-portal of WBSCTE
b) https://nptel.ac.in
c) https://swayam.gov.in
d) https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.mhrd.ndl
e) https://www.vlab.co.in
Name of the Course : Diploma in Mechanical Engineering
Code no. : MEPC209 Theory : 100 marks
Course Title : Thermal Engineering - I Examination Scheme:

a) External Assessment:60 marks
Duration : 17 weeks(Total hours per week = 3) (End Semester Examination)
Total Theoretical class/week : 3 i) Internal Assessment:40 marks
[Class test: 20 marks
Credit : 3
Quizzes, assignment, viva voce: 10 marks
Class attendance: 10 marks]
Pass Criterion: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (pass marks) in both continuous assessment and end semester
assessment separately.

i. Understand fundamental concepts of thermodynamic systems and different laws of thermodynamic.
ii. Understand various properties of perfect gas.
iii. Apply 1stlaw of thermodynamics on open system and on closed system containing ideal gas executing
thermodynamic processes.
iv. Understand the formation and properties of steam.
v. Solve simple numerical on properties of steam by using steam table / Mollier chart.
vi. Determine dryness fraction of steam
vii. Understand the working of different types of boilers and necessity of boiler mountings & accessories.
9. 2. Theory Components:
The following topics / subtopics should be taught and assessed in order to develop unit outcomes for achieving
the identified course outcomes.

Hours
UNIT 1: 1.1. Basic concept of thermodynamics. 12
Fundamentals 1.2. Thermodynamic System, Boundary, Surrounding. Classification of

and Laws of thermodynamic system: open system, closed system and isolated system.
Thermodyna
mics 1.3. Thermodynamic properties of system (Intrinsic and Extrinsic properties) with
units and its conversion like Pressure (Atmospheric, Gauge Pressure and
Absolute pressure), volume, density and temperature.
1.4. State of a thermodynamic system, change of state, path, thermodynamic process.

1.5. Thermodynamic equilibrium of a system (mechanical, thermal and chemical
equilibrium), thermodynamic cycle.
1.6. Concept of N.T.P.
1.7. Energy-definition and units of transient energy (heat & work) and stored energy
(PE, KE & IE).
1.8. Point function & path function.
1.9. Displacement work & flow work.
1.10 Concept& units of power, enthalpy.
1.11 Concept & units of heat, specific heat, specific heat at constant pressure (C p),
specific heat at constant volume (Cv) and adiabatic index.
1.12 Zeroth law of thermodynamics and concept of temperature.
1.13 First law of thermodynamics: Principle of energy conservation, simple energy

equation for non-flow process, steady flow energy equation and its application
to various thermodynamic system like boiler, nozzle, turbine, compressor &
condenser, Concept of perpetual motion machine of 1st kind, limitations of First
law of thermodynamics.
1.14 Second law of thermodynamics: Kelvin–Plank statement & Clausius statement,

application of 2nd laws to various thermodynamic system like heat engine, heat
pump and refrigerator, thermal efficiency, coefficient of performance, concept
of perpetual motion machine of 2nd kind, concept and units of entropy.
1.15. Simple numerical on 1st law of thermodynamics for steady flow process,
atmospheric pressure, gauge pressure and absolute pressure.
UNIT 2: 2.1. Concept of ideal gas & real gas. 11
Properties of 2.2. Laws of perfect gases such as Charle’s law, Boyle’s law and Avogadro’s
Perfect Gas hypothesis, equation of state (PV = m.R.T), characteristic gas constant and
universal gas constant.
2.3. Relation among two specific heats (Cp& Cv) with characteristic gas constant (R).
2.4. Ideal thermodynamic processes of gas: governing equation of processes like

constant pressure process, constant volume process, constant temperature
process, adiabatic process & polytropic process, representation of all the above
processes on p-V and T-s plane, deduction of work transfer, heat transfer, change
in internal energy, change in enthalpy and change in entropy for each process.
2.5. Simple numerical on above-mentioned perfect gas processes.
UNIT 3: 3.1 Explanation of steam generation process with the help of p-V, T-s & T-h diagrams. 10
Properties of 3.2. Basic terms and properties of steam such as saturation temperature, saturation
Steam pressure, saturated liquid, saturated steam (wet steam, dry saturated steam),
superheated steam, critical point, triple point, dryness fraction, degree of
superheat, degree of undercooling, enthalpy of steam, sensible heat, latent heat
of vaporization, superheat, specific volume, entropy and internal energy of
steam.
3.3. Steam table & its use, enthalpy- entropy (h-s) diagram of steam (Mollier chart)
and its use.
3.4. Vapour processes such as constant pressure processes, constant volume

processes, constant entropy, constant temperature processes& constant
enthalpy process and representation of the processes on p-V, T-s & h-s diagram.
3.5. Determination of dryness fraction of steam using (a) separating calorimeter, (b)
throttling calorimeter, & (c) combined separating & throttling calorimeter.
3.6. Comparison of gas & vapour.
3.7. Simple numerical on steam properties only using steam table and Mollier
diagram.
UNIT 4: 4.1. Definition and classification of boilers. 12
Boilers 4.2. Fire tube & water tube boilers with example, working principle, difference and
(Steam applications.
Generator)
4.3. Construction & working principle of Cochran boiler, Lancashire boiler, Babcock
and Wilcox boiler and La-Mont boiler.
4.4. Definition of boiler mountings and accessories, Functions of boiler mountings and
important accessories.
4.5. Basic concept of stoker fired fluidized bed and pulverized fuel boilers.
4.6. Boiler performance and sources of heat loss.
4.7. Boiler draught, classification and comparison of boiler draught and calculation of
chimney height.
4.8. Necessity of boiler feed water treatment.
4.9. Concept of modern high pressure boiler.
4.10.Simple numerical on boiler performance and chimney heights calculation.
Grand Total : 51
10. 3. Suggested Home Assignments/ Student Activities: (Any four)

1. Show all processes of ideal gas on single P-V plane. Also show the work transfer during various processes of ideal
gas on different p-V plane.
2. Draw P-V, T-S & H-S plane of steam and display saturated liquid line, dry saturated vapour line, wet saturated steam
zone, critical point, triple point, superheated zone& under cooled liquid zone.
3. Draw P-V, T-S & P-T plane of steam and show constant pressure, constant temperature, constant volume & constant
entropy line.
4. Draw Mollier Diagram and show different vapor processes on this diagram.
5. Prepare a chart showing comparative study of different types of Boiler.
6. Prepare a Chart showing Feed Water Treatment Plant.
7. Prepare a chart showing working principle of at least two mountings,
8. Prepare a chart showing working principle of at least two accessories,
9. Prepare a schematic diagram showing mountings and accessories of a modern high boiler.
10. Prepare a chart showing Forced Draught, Induced Draught and Balanced Draught of a boiler plant.
11. Prepare a report on visit to steam power plant / Dairy industry / Sugar factory etc. with specification of boiler and
list of mountings and accessories along with their functions.
11. 4. Suggested Scheme for Question Paper Design for Conducting Internal Assessment:(Duration: 45 Minutes)

Internal Distribution of Theory Marks
12. 5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination:(Duration: 3 hours)

A1 1&2 08
10 10 x 01 = 10
A2 3&4 07
Total: 15 10 10
B1 1&2 07
10 10 x 01 = 10
B2 3&4 08
Total: 15 10 10
C1 1& 2 07
10 10 x 01 = 10
C2 3&4 08
Total: 15 10 10
D1 1, 2 05
06 06 x 02 = 12
D2 3&4 05
Total: 10 06 12
E1 1, 2 04
03 06 x 03 = 18
E2 3&4 05
Total: 09 03 18
Sub-Total [D+E]: 30
13. 6. Rubrics for the Assessment of Student’s Activity:(20 Marks)

1 Originality of completing the Assigned task / micro-project work
3 In time submission of assignment work / micro-project work
4 Viva voce
14. 7. Suggested Learning Resources:

No.
1 A Course in Thermal Engineering. R. S. Khurmi S. Chand & Co.
Engineering Thermodynamics D.S.Kumar S.K. Kataria& Sons

2
(Principles & Practices)
3 A text book of Thermal Engineering. V.M. Domkundwar Dhanpat Rai & Co.
4 A Course in Thermal Engineering. P. L. Ballaney Khanna Publishers

Course Title : Mechanical Engineering Drawing Practice Semester : Third
Category: Programme Core Full Marks: 100
Code no. : MEPC211 Sessional Examination Scheme:
Duration : 17 weeks(4 hours per week) External Assessment

(End Semester Sessional Examination)
Assignment on the day of viva voce : 20

Viva voce (before Board of Examiners) 40 marks
20
:
Internal Assessment
Total Practical class/week : 4 Submission of drawing sheets
40
(in scheduled time)
Class performance & attendance 10 60 marks
Credit: 2 Viva voce (after submission of drawing
10
sheets)
Total marks 100 marks
Pre requisite:
 Knowledge of Mechanical Engineering Drawing [Code No. – MEPC 201]

The practical exposures related with this course are to be taught and implemented, so that the student will be able
to demonstrate the following industry oriented COs.
i) Draw the development of lateral surfaces of different truncated and frustum objects, such as tray, funnel,
hopper, bend pipe, transition pieces, etc.
ii) Draw the curves of intersection of commonly used two interpenetrating solids.
iii) Exercise various drawing symbols, codes and conventions as per IS: SP-46.
iv) Apply machining symbols and surface texture on production drawings.
v) Draw the sectional views of various casting / machining components.
vi) Draw assembly drawing and detailed drawings of various objects such as machine tool parts, machine
components, power transmission elements, bearings, valves etc.
2. Suggested Assignments for Continuous Assessment:

Following assignments are to be attempted on A1 drawing sheets (to scale drawing by using requisite drawing
instruments and following the First angle method of projection) for the attainment of COs of MEPC211:
Approx. Marks
Unit
Sheet No. List of Practical Hours per
No.
required sheet
Sheet No. -1 1a. Develop plain / single curved lateral surfaces of oblique
(containing at least solids like prisms and cylinders.
five problems) 01 08 5
1b. Develop plain / single curved lateral surfaces of oblique
solids like pyramids and cones.
Sheet No. -2
(containing at least 2a. Develop lateral surfaces of compound solids like funnel,
five problems) tray, oil can, hopper, transition piece (square to circular). 01 08 5
Sheet No. -3 3a. Draw curves of intersection of two interpenetrating solids

(containing at least having plane surfaces (vertical square prism with
3 problems) horizontal square prism).
3b. Draw curves of intersection of two interpenetrating solids

having single curved surface (vertical cylinder with 08
02 5
horizontal cylinder).
3c. Draw curves of intersection of two interpenetrating solids

having single curved surface (horizontal cylinder with
vertical cone).
Sheet No. -4 4a. Draw different orthographic views from the given
(containing at least isometric view.
five problems)
4b. Draw sectional front view, top view and side view from the 04 10
given isometric view of machine component, castings etc. 5
(using conventions of sections)
Sheet No. -5 5a. State the procedure for assembly from the given detailed
(containing at least drawing.
three problems) 5b. Draw assembly drawing (sectional front view and side
[Preferably shaft view) from the given detailed drawings of components
Coupling, C.I. including conventional representation of tolerances and 05 12 10
Pulley and Knuckle surface finish symbols.
joint] 5c. Prepare Bill of materials. (See Annexure-5b: sample of
industrial drawing).
Sheet No. -6 6a. Identify various components in the given assembly drawing
(containing at least and the sequence of dismantling it.
three problems)
[Preferably 6b. Describe the procedure for dismantling the given assembly
Knuckle joint, drawing.
06 14 10
Socket & spigot
6c. Draw part drawing (sectional front view and side view)
type cotter joint
from the given assembly drawing.
and construction of
tooth profile of a 6d. Construct the tooth profile of a spur gear from given
Spur Gear] module, pressure angle and number of teeth.
Sub Total: Practical Classes 60 hrs.
Preparation for ESE 08 hrs. 40 marks
Grand total : 68 68 hrs.
3. Rubrics for the internal assessment of drawing sheets [40 marks]:
1 Interpretation of given problems
2 Drawing sheets using proper drafting instruments
3 Performing the task following standards and ethics,
4 Submitting of assigned drawing sheets in time
5 Viva voce
During conducting such practical (laboratory / field based) work, the following social skills / attitudes which are
Affective Domain Outcomes (ADOs) are developed through the experiences:
 Practice good housekeeping.
 Demonstrate working as a leader / team member.
 Care and Maintain drawing instruments in good working condition.
 Follow ethical practice.
Code No. : MEPC 213 Total Marks : 100
Course Title : Materials Testing Lab Examination Scheme:

(i) Internal Assessment:60 marks
Duration : 17 weeks (2 hours per week) [Continuous assessment of class performance and in time
Total practical class /week : 2 submission of assignment : 30 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Credit : 1 Class attendance : 10 marks]
(ii) External Assessment:40 Marks
[Assignment on the day of viva voce : 20 marks
Viva voce (before Board of Examiners) : 20 marks]
Pre requisite:
 Knowledge of Strength of Materials [Code No. – MEPC 205]
 Knowledge of Mechanical Engineering Materials [Code No – MEPC 203]
1. Course Outcomes:
CO1: Use different material testing machines
CO2: Measure values of stress at different loading condition for mild steel specimen subjected to axial tensile load
and plot them on stress-strain / load-deformation diagram.
CO3: Measure the shear stress of given materials by using relevant material testing equipment
CO4: Measure the impact strength of given materials by using relevant material testing equipment
CO5: Measure the hardness of given materials by using relevant material testing equipment
CO6: Measure the torsional shear stress of given materials subjected to torque by using relevant material testing
equipment
CO7: Detect the external surface cracks in the test specimen by using Visual inspection and ring test /Die
penetration test / Magnetic particle test.
2. Suggested Assignments for Continuous Assessment: (Any Five)
Approx.
Teaching Hours
1. Tensile test on mild steel/ aluminum on UTM. 06
2. To determine shear strength of mild steel by Direct Shear Test on UTM. 06

3 To find out the resistance of a standard specimen of common engineering 06
materials against impact load by Izod and Charpy test.
To determine the hardness value of mild steel / aluminum by Brinell Hardness 06
4.
tester.
To determine the hardness value of mild steel / aluminum specimen by 06

5.
Rockwell Hardness tester.
6. Torsion test on mild steel/ Aluminum bar. 06
7. To detect the exterior surface cracks in the specimen using (i) Visual inspection 06
and ring test, (ii) Die penetration test, (iii) Magnetic particle test.
8. Determination of modulus of rigidity, strain energy, shear stress and stiffness by 06
load deflection method ( Closed coil helical spring)
3. Suggested Scheme for Internal Assessment: [Total Marks: 60]
Involvement Total Marks

Continuous assessment of class performance and in time submission of Assignments. 30
Viva Voce on to the Engineering Practice at the end of the semester 20
Class attendance 10
Total Internal Assessment: 60
Pass criterion for Internal Assessment = 24 Marks [Minimum]
4. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [Total Marks: 40]

Assignment on the day of End Semester Exam. 20
Viva Voce on to the Engineering Practice on the day of End Semester Exam. 20
Total ESE Assessment: 40
Pass criterion for ESE Assessment = 16 Marks [Minimum]
1 Awareness about the significance of particular test
2 Understanding working principle of machine / set-up

During conducting such practical (laboratory / field based) work, the following social skills / attitudes which are
 Follow the safety practices.
 Care and Maintain tools and equipment in good working condition.
Follow ethical practice.
Reference Books:
1. Testing of Metallic Materials - A.V.K Surayanarayan- PHI
2. Measurement system (Application and Design) – Ernest O Doebelin.
4. A Text Book strength of Material– R.K. Bansal, Laxmi Publication New Delhi
Course Title : Thermal Engineering-I Lab Examination Scheme:

(ii) Internal Assessment:60 marks
Duration : 17 weeks (2 hours per week) [Continuous assessment of class performance and in time
Total Practical Class /week : 2 submission of assignment :30 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Credit: 1 Class attendance : 10 marks]
[Assignment on the day of viva voce: 20 marks
Viva voce (before Board of Examiners): 20 marks]
Pre requisite:
 Knowledge of Thermal Engineering-I [Code No. – MEPC 209]
1. Course Outcomes (COs)

The experimental works associated with this course will help the students to demonstrate the following industry
oriented Cos.
i. Apply laws of thermodynamics to thermodynamic systems

ii. Use measuring instruments/charts in different thermodynamic processes
iii. Manage the working of steam boilers in different industries.
iv. Manage the operation of boiler mounting and accessories.
v. Use steam calorimeter.
2. Suggested Assignments for Continuous Assessment: (At least Five Practical)
Approx.
Sl.No. List of Practical
Teaching Hours
1. Observation of the working principle of Burden tube pressure gauge 06
Calculation of characteristics gas constant of air using some practical 06

2.
data
Measurement of Dryness Fraction of Steam by Dryness Fraction 06

3
Measuring Instrument.
4. Use of Mollier Chart by plotting different vapour processes on it. 06

5. Study of Cochran Boiler (fire tube boiler) 06
6. Study of Lancashire Boilers (fire tube boiler) 06
7. Study of Babcock and Wilcox Boiler (water tube boiler) 06
8. Study of La-Mont Boiler (water tube boiler) 06
9 Study the boiler mountings and accessories 06
10 Trace the path of flue gas and water steam circuit of boiler 06
3. Suggested Scheme for Internal Assessment:[Total Marks: 60]

Viva Voce on to the Engineering Practice at the end of the semester. 20
Class attendance 10
4. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [Total Marks: 40]

1 Awareness about the significance of particular test
2 Understanding working principle of machine /

experimental set up

During conducting such Practical (laboratory / field based) work, the following social Skills / attitudes which are
 Follow the safety practices,
 Practice good housekeeping,
 Practice energy conservation,
 Demonstrate working as a leader / team member,
 Maintain tools and equipment to keep them in working condition,
 follow ethical practice
Reference Books:
Title of the Book Name of the Author(s) Name of the Publishers
Thermal Power Plant- Pre-Operational Activities Dipak K. Sarkar ELSEVIER
Power Plant Engineering. R.K. Rajput Laksmi Prakashani
Engineering Thermodynamics D.S.Kumar S.K. Kataria & Sons

A text book of Thermal Engineering. R. S. Khurmi S. Chand & Co.
A Course in Thermal Engineering. P. L. Ballaney Khanna Publishers

Code no.: MEPC217 Total Marks:100
Course Title: Manufacturing Processes-I Practice Examination Scheme:
Duration : 17 weeks ( 4 hours per week) (i)Internal Assessment:60 Marks
Total practical class/week: 4 [Continuous assessment of class performance and
Credit: 2 in time submission of Assignments: 30 Marks
Viva Voce:20 Marks
Class Attendance:10 Marks]

[Assignment on the day of viva voce :20 marks
Pre requisite:
1. Knowledge of Manufacturing Process-I[Code No – MEPC 207]

The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with this subject are to be taught and
implemented, so that the student demonstrates the following industry oriented course outcomes:
a) Operate the Lathe and Welding machine
b) Create a component by operating the Lathe/ Welding machine
c) Set the tools, jobs and set different parameter to run a machine for produce a job most effectively and
economically
d) Perform the work-in process inspection using different measuring tools to produce a job
e) Create a component by using Smithy / Forging tools
2. Suggested Assignments/Practical for Continuous Assessment:
Sl. No. List of Practical Unit No.(as Approx.

mentioned in sub Teaching
code:MEPC207) Hours
01* Study of lathe: Identifying its major components: available spindle
speed changing devices, available tool feeding devices, feed reversal
devices, change gears, job holding devices, tool holding devices, types
4 12
of cutting tools used in various lathe operations, setting of job and
cutting tools, operate lathe without removal of chips and observe job-
tool relative movement.
02* Study of different equipment of Electric Arc Welding set-up or gas
welding set-up or electric resistance welding set-up, hand tools used,
safety items used, connection details, types of welding joints (Lap,
6 12
Butt, Tee, Corner and Edge joints etc.), different welding positions
(Horizontal, Vertical and Overhead positions etc.) and practice on edge
preparation, tag welding and stitch welding.
03 Study the geometry of a single point cutting tool and produce an
assignment on tool nomenclature and tool signature of a single point 3 10
cutting tool.
04 Practice on making a job involving Lathe operations like facing, plain
4 10
turning, step turning, grooving, knurling and chamfering.
05 Practice on making a job involving taper turning by swivelling the
4 10
compound rest on Lathe as per given drawing.
06 Practice on making a job involving thread cutting operation on Lathe
4 10
as per given drawing.
07 Practice on making welding joint (lap-joint or butt-joint or tee-joint or
corner-joint) as per given drawing by utilizing available facilities of 6 10
welding shop.
08 Practice on making a solid wooden pattern /split pattern as per given
5 10
drawing.
09 Practice on making a mould by using a solid or split pattern as per given
5 10
drawing.
10 Study of different tools and machines generally used in Smithy or
Forging Shop and practice on different basic smithy or forging
2 10
operations such as Upsetting, Drawing down, Setting down, Necking,
Cutting, Bending, Fullering, Swaging, Punching and Drifting etc.
11 Practice on making a job on utility items like chain links, door rings,
hooks etc. as per given drawing by utilizing smithy or forging shop’s 2 10
facilities.
Note: A suggested list of practical is given in the above table. At least 06 nos. practical need to be performed out of
which the practical marked as [*] are compulsory.

Class attendance 10
Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [Total Marks: 40]


The ‘Process and Product’ related skills associated with each practical work are to be assessed according to a
suggested sample given below:

01 Interpretation of component drawing, setting up of machine, cutting tool and job
02 Preparing slip for requisition of tools, equipment and measuring instruments (with
proper specification) needed for producing the component
03 Operating machine to execute the production process and Inspecting the component
during production process using measuring instruments
04 Submission of job and workshop report in time
05 Viva voce
During conducting such practical (laboratory/field based) work, the following social skills / attitudes which are
 Care and Maintain tools and equipment in good working condition.
 Follow ethical practice.
References:
No.
Elements of workshop S. K. Hajra Chowdhury, Bose, Media Promoters and
1
Technology – Volume I & II Roy Publishers limited, Mumbai,
2 B.S.Raghuwanshi
Manufacturing Technology - Volume I
& II
Delhi.
KALPAKJIAN & Pearson Education, New
SCHMID Delhi
6 DeGarmo Wiley
manufacturing
Volume I , II & III
Suggested Learning Websites:

https://nptel.ac.in
www.basicmechanicalengineering.com/lathe-machine-operations-basic-turning-
www.thelibraryofmanufacturing.com/forming-basics.html
www.themetalcasting.com/casting-process.html
Code no.: SI201 Total Marks:100
Course Title: Internship 1 Examination Scheme:
Duration : (i)Internal Assessment:100 Marks
Total practical class/week: After 2nd Semester Internship Report - 60
Credit: 1 Internship Seminar - 40 marks
Suggested Internship Project Work in 3rd Semester
After the 2nd Semester, for Internship-I, students are required to be involved in Inter/ Intra Institutional
activities viz; Learning at Departmental Lab/ Institutional workshop; Training and simulation program with
different Institutes like Workshop of ITI, Other Polytechnics and other Technical Institutes Institutions; Soft
skill training organized by Training and Placement Cell of the respective institutions; contribution at innovation
/entrepreneurship cell of the institute; participation in workshops/ competitions etc.
After completion of Internship I, the student should prepare a comprehensive report to indicate what he/she
has observed and learnt in the training period. The student may contact Industrial Supervisor / Faculty
Mentor/TPO for assigning topics and problems and should prepare the final report on the assigned topics. The
training report should be signed by the Industrial Supervisor / Internship Faculty Mentor, TPO and HOD.
The Internship report will be evaluated on the basis of following criteria (as applicable):
Sl. No. Criteria for evaluation of Internship Report[60]

1. Originality
2. Adequacy and purposeful write-up
3. Organization, format, drawings, sketches, style, language
4. Practical applications and relationships with basic theory
5. Concepts taught in the course outcome
6. Practical applications, relationships with basic theory and concepts taught in the course.
7. Attendance record, daily diary, quality of the Internship Report
Seminars must be arranged for the students based on his/her training report, before an internal committee
constituted by the concerned department of the institute. The evaluation will be based on the following criteria:
Sl. No. Criteria for evaluation of Internship Seminar [40 marks]

1. Quality of content presented
2. Proper planning for presentation
3. Effectiveness of presentation
4. Depth of knowledge and skills
5. Viva voce
Total Marks: 100
Pass criterion for Internship-I = 40 Marks [Minimum]
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Mechanical Engineering

(Production) [MEP]
Revised 2022
CURRICULAR STRUCTURE FOR PART-II (SEMESTER 3) OF THE
FULL-TIME DIPLOMA COURSES IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING(PRODUCTION)
TOTAL
CLASS PER FULL INTERNAL
SL NO. CATEGORY Code No Course Title L P WEEK CREDIT MARKS MARKS ESE MARK
MECHANICAL
1 Program core MEPC201 ENGINEERING DRAWING 2 0 2 2 100 40 60
MECHANICAL ENGG.
2 Program core MEPC203 MATERIALS 3 0 3 3 100 40 60
3 Program core MEPC205 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS 3 0 3 3 100 40 60
INDUSTRIAL
4 Program core ME(P)PC207 PRODUCTION TECH.-I 3 0 3 3 100 40 60
5 Program core ME(P)PC209 HEAT POWER ENGG.-I 3 0 3 3 100 40 60
6 Program core MEPC211 M.E. DRAWING PRACTICE 0 4 4 2 100 60 40
7 Program core MEPC213 MATERIALS TESTING LAB 0 2 2 1 100 60 40
8 Program core ME(P)PC215 HEAT POWER ENGG. LAB 0 2 2 1 100 60 40
INDUSTRIAL
PRODUCTION TECH.-1
9 Program core ME(P)PC217 LAB 0 4 4 2 100 60 40
SUMMER SUMMER INTERNSHIP

INTRENSHIP- S1201 0 0 0 1 100
AFTER 2ND SEM
1(4WEEKS)
10 AFTER SEM-II 60 40
TOTAL CREDITS AND
MARKS 14 12 26 21 1000
West West Bengal State Council of Technical Education

(A statutory Body under West Bengal Act XXI 1995)
Name of the Course: Diploma in Mechanical Engineering(Production)

Code No. : MEPC201 Theory : 100 Marks
Course Title : Mechanical Engineering Drawing Examination Scheme:
(Same with Mechanical Engg.) i) External Assessment: 60 Marks
Duration : 17 weeks (Total hours per week = 2) (End Semester Examination)
Total lecture class/week: 2 ii) Internal Assessment: 40 Marks
Credit : 2 Home assignments: 10 Marks
1. Course Outcomes: After completion of this course the students will be able to
i) Comprehend the methods of development of lateral surfaces of different truncated and frustum objects, such as tray, funnel,
hopper, bend pipe, transition pieces, etc.
ii) Realise the curves of intersection of commonly used two interpenetrating solids.
iii) Interpret machining symbols and surface texture on production drawings.
iv) Interpret various drawing symbols, codes and conventions as per IS: SP-46.
v) Realise the sectional views of various casting / machining components.
vi) Interpret assembly drawing and detailed drawings of various objects such as machine tool parts, power transmission
elements, bearings, valves etc.
Hours
Unit: 1 1.1 Developments of lateral surfaces of the regular oblique solids for the
Development of following cases:
Surfaces Truncated oblique prism, truncated oblique cylinder, truncated / frustum
06
oblique pyramid and truncated / frustum oblique cone.
1.2 Applications of development of surfaces such as hopper, funnel, tray,
transition piece (square to circular).
Unit: 2 2.1 Curves of intersection of the two interpenetrating regular solids for the
Intersection of following cases:
Surfaces of Two Square prism with square prism, Cylinder with cylinder when the axes of them
Interpenetrating are at 900 and bisecting. 05
Solids Cylinder with cone when the cone is resting vertically on HP and the axis of
cylinder is parallel to both HP and VP and axes of them are intersecting at 90 0.
Unit: 3 3.1 Conventional representation of the following materials: Cast Iron, Mild
Standard Steel, Aluminium, Brass Bronze, Glass, Concrete, Wood & Rubber.
Convention for 3.2 Conventional long and short break in pipe, rod and shaft.
Engineering 3.3 Conventional representation of common features like slotted head,
Drawing using SP knurling, serrated shaft, splined shaft, ratchet & pinion, holes on circular pitch,
46 : 2003 internal & external thread, square on shafts, repeated parts.
3.4 Conventional representation of standard parts like gears, springs, ball &
03
roller bearings.
3.5 Counter sunk and counter- bored holes.
3.6 Pipe joints and valves.
3.7 Tapers.
3.8 General welding symbols, sectional representation and symbols used in
Unit: 4 4.1 Limits, Fits and Tolerances:

Limits, a) Introduction to ISO system of Tolerance.
Tolerances, Fits b) Selection and representation of dimensional tolerance- number and grade
and Surface method. Definitions concerning tolerance and limit system, Unilateral and
Roughness bilateral tolerance, Hole basis and shaft basis system, Clearance fit,
Interference fit, Transition fit, Selection of fit for various engineering
applications.
c) Calculation of limit sizes and identification of types of fit from the given sizes 03
like 50H7/c8, 50H6/k5, 50H7/s6 etc.
4.2 Geometrical Tolerances: Types, terminology for deviation, representation of
geometrical tolerance on drawing.
4.3Machining Symbols and Surface Texture:
Indication of machining symbol showing direction of lay, sampling length,
machining allowances, manufacturing methods and roughness grades.
Representation of surface roughness on drawing.
Unit: 5 5.1Isometric views to Orthographic views (front view, top view and side view) of
Sectional Views the following objects:
a) Machine components
b) Castings like hanger and shaft support.
5.2Sectional views of the following casting objects: 03
a) Bearing bracket
b) Shaft bracket
c) Sliding block.
Unit: 6 6.1 Introduction, types of assembly drawing, accepted norms to be observed for
Assembly assembly drawings, sequence for preparing assembly drawing. Bill of material.
Drawings 6.2 Assembly drawing from the following detailed drawings:
a) Couplings: Rigid flange coupling & Universal coupling.
b) Knuckle joint. 04
c) C.I. pulleys: Fast pulley and Stepped cone pulley.
d) Bearing: Plummer block.
e) Screw jack.
f) Bench vice.
g) Square tool post of Lathe machine.
Unit: 7 7.1 Detailing of the following assemblies:
Part Drawings a) Knuckle joint
(assembly to b) Castor wheel
detailing) c) Socket and spigot type cotter joint.
d) Foot step bearing
e) Crane hook
f) Drilling jig 04
g) Tail stock of Lathe machine
h) Non-return valve.
7.2 Construction of tooth profile of a spur gear – (i) by using approximate

construction method, (ii) by using involute method.
Sub Total : Total Lecture Classes 28 3.

Grand Total : 34
Suggested Home Assignment/Student Activities: (At least four assignments)
Other than practice work in classroom, students should conduct the following suggested activities in group or individual, which
are suitable for this subject as per instruction of the subject teacher:
(a) Students should maintain a separate A3 size sketch book which will be their part of practice work and has to submit that sketch
book along with drawing sheets in scheduled time. Following additional Home Assignments are to be attempted on this sketch
book (not to scale drawing following first angle method of projection) as instructed by the subject teacher for the attainment
of the COs of MEPC201:
Unit
No.
a. Conventional representation as per IS: SP-46 (1988) of the following:
- Materials: Cast Iron, Mild Steel, Aluminium, Brass Bronze, Glass, Concrete, Wood &
Rubber.
- Conventional long and short break in pipe, rod and shaft.
- Common features like slotted head, knurling, serrated shaft, splined shaft, ratchet &
pinion, holes on circular pitch, internal & external thread, square on shafts, repeated
parts.
03
- Standard parts like gears, springs, ball & roller bearings.
- Counter sunk and counter bored holes.
- Pipe joints and valves.
- Tapers.
- General welding symbols, sectional representation and symbols used in
a. Calculation of limit sizes and identification of types of fit from the given sizes like
50H7/c8, 50H6/k5, 50H7/s6 etc.
b. Representation of geometrical tolerance on drawing.
04 10
c. Machining Symbols and Surface Texture: Indication of machining symbol showing
direction of lay, sampling length, machining allowances, manufacturing methods and
roughness grades. Representation of surface roughness on drawing.
Assembly drawing (including bill of materials and conventional representation of tolerances
and surface finish symbols) of the following detailed drawings of components:
a) Universal coupling,
b) Stepped cone pulley,
c) Plummer block,
05
d) Screw jack,
e) Bench vice,
f) Square tool post of Lathe machine.
Part drawing including conventional representation of tolerances and surface finish symbols
of the following assembly drawing:
06 a) Castor wheel,
b) Crane hook,
c) Foot step bearing,
d) Drilling jig,
e) Tail stock of Lathe machine,
f) Non-return valve,
b) They should prepare paper-models of development of lateral surfaces of objects such as tray, funnel, hopper, transition piece
etc., and paper-models of two interpenetrating solids showing curves of intersection.
c) Only one micro-project is planned to be undertaken by each student assigned to him/her by the subject teacher at the
beginning of the semester. The micro-project could be industry application based, workshop-based or field-based. It should be
individually undertaken to build up the skill and confidence in every student so that she/he contributes to the projects of the
industry. A suggestive list of micro-projects is given here for the attainment of the COs:
(i) Visit Institute’s workshop (Fitting shop or Machine shop) and prepare assembly drawing and detailed drawings of lathe tool
post / lathe tail-stock / shaper tool head / Drilling machine vice etc (as per availability) using proper measuring instruments.
ii) Visit nearby sheet metal workshop (if possible) and prepare a report related to type of components, dimensions, material, field
of applications, operations performed etc.
iii) Other than practice work, at least one visit for students to nearby industries/workshops is to be arranged for understanding
various production drawings. Students should collect production drawings (if possible) and try to visualise the object from the
given views in collected drawing.
iv) Any other micro-projects suggested by the subject-teacher on similar field.
4. Suggested scheme for question paper design for conducting internal assessment examination :( Duration: 45 minutes)

Total
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20
5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [duration 3 hours]
Multiple Choice Questions Subjective Questions
Marks
To be To be Total To be Marks per Total
Group Unit per Group Unit To be Set
Set Answered Marks Answered Question Marks
Question
B 1, 2 03 04 (at least
1, 2,
20 x 1 one from 10 x 4 =
A 3, 4, 25 20 1 C 5 02 10
= 20 each 40
6, 7.
D 6,7 03 Group)
Pass criterion for ESE = 24 marks minimum
6. Rubrics for the assessment of student’s activity [20 marks]:
Sl No. Performance Indicators Weightage in %

1 Imitation of Solved Drawing,
Accomplishing given problem,
Performing the drawing task masterfully/expertly using drafting
instrument
Performing the task following standards and ethics,
Submitting assignment sketch book on time,
Submitting micro-project related activity
Total 100
Charotar Publishing house

1 Machine Drawing N. D. Bhatt
Pvt. Ltd. Anand, Gujrat,
V. M. Panchal
ISBN: 9789380358635
S. K. Kataria & Sons, New
2 A text book of Machine Drawing P. S. Gill Delhi,
ISBN: 9789350144169
3 A text book of Machine Drawing S. Chand & Company
R. K. Dhawan
New Delhi
K. L. Narayana,
New Age International
4 Production Drawing P. Kannaiah,
Publication, New Delhi,
K. Venkata Reddy
ISBN: 9788122435016
5 Machine Drawing Oxford University Press

Basudev Bhattacharya
ISBN: 0-19-807077-2
Engineering Drawing Practice for Bureau of Indian Standard
6 Schools & Colleges- SP 46 : 1988 Bureau of Indian New Delhi -110002
Standard First Revision July 2003
ISBN: 81-7061-019-2
8. Suggested software / learning website link

i) https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S01/is.sp.46.2003.pdf


Course Title : Mechanical Engineering Materials Examination Scheme :
(i) External Assessment : 60 marks
(Same with Mechanical Engg.) (End Semester Examination)
Duration :17 weeks (total hours per week = 3) (ii) Internal Assessment : 40 marks
[Class test : 20 marks
Total lecture class/week : 3 Assignment, viva voce : 10 marks
Credit : 3
1 . Course outcomes (COs):

At the end of this course, the student will be able to:
a. Explain about crystal structures.
b. Identify properties of materials.
c. Classify the ferrous metals and describe their properties and applications.
d. Describe the non-ferrous metals, cutting tool materials, and composites along
with their properties and applications.
e. Explain various heat treatment processes & their applications on various engineering components for improving their
mechanical properties.
f. Describe plastic moulding process and its applications.
g. Understand non-destructive testing methods & its applications.
The following topics/subtopics should be taught and assessed in order to develop unit outcomes for achieving the course
outcomes to attain the identified competency.

Hours
Unit-1: 1.1 Introduction, classification of engineering materials.

Basics of 1.2. Crystal structures: Unit cell and space lattice. Crystal system- The seven basic crystal
Engineering systems.
Materials Crystal structure for metallic elements- BCC, FCC and HCP.
Coordination number for simple cubic, BCC and FCC.
Atomic radius- definition, atomic radius for simple cubic, BCC and FCC. 06
Atomic packing factor (APF) for simple cubic, BCC, FCC and HCP.
Simple problems on finding number of atoms and atomic packing factor for a unit cell.
1.3 Mechanical properties of materials - elasticity, plasticity, ductility, malleability,
toughness, hardness, harden ability, brittleness, fatigue, and creep.
1.4. Introduction to corrosion, methods to prevent of corrosion.
Unit-II 2.1. Cooling curve and showing allotropic transformation of iron. Iron- Carbon equilibrium
Ferrous diagram and its explanation. Critical temperatures and its significance. Principal micro
Metals and constituents of an iron carbon system up to 2.0% C content (austenite, ferrite, cementite,
Alloys pearlite, eutectoid, hypo-eutectoid & hyper –eutectoid steel)
2.2 Broad classification of ferrous metals (steel, cast iron, wrought iron) according to
percentage of carbon. Process flow diagram for production of iron and steel.
2.3 Steel: compositions, properties and applications of - i) Plain carbon steel: low
(including dead steel & free cutting steel), medium and high carbon steel; effect of silicon,
sulphur, phosphorus and manganese. ii) Alloy steel: low, medium and high alloy steel, 09
purpose of alloying, effects of various alloying elements like chromium, nickel, manganese,
tungsten, vanadium, cobalt, and molybdenum. iii) Tool steel: cold work tool steel, hot work
tool steel, high speed steel (HSS) - composition and applications. iv) Stainless steel: types
and applications. vi). Spring steel: composition and applications. vii) Designation of steels
on the basis of chemical composition (IS -7598: 1974).
2.4 Type of Steel used for following: shafts, axles, nuts, bolts, crank shafts, camshafts,
house hold utensils, surgical instrument, anti-friction bearings and gears.
2.5 Cast Iron & Wrought Iron: Classification and application of cast iron as white grey,
nodular, and malleable. Wrought iron - composition and its use.
Unit-III: 3.1 Introduction to heat treatment, TTT Diagram for eutectoid steel.
Heat 3.2 Heat Treatment Process: Purpose, process and applications of - Annealing, Normalising,
Treatment of Hardening & Tempering. 10
Steel 3.3 Austempering & Martempering: Purpose, process and application.
3.4 Surface hardening: Purpose, process and application of - case hardening, flame
hardening, and induction hardening.
Unit-IV: 4.1 Properties and application of copper and its alloys such as brass, muntz metal, gun
Non-Ferrous metal and bronze.
Metals and 4.2 Properties and application of aluminium alloys such as Y-alloy, hindalium, and
duralumin. 05
Alloys
4.3 Properties and application of nickel alloys such as inconel, monel metal, and nichrome.
4.3 Properties and application of bearing metals such as white metal, babitt metal, and
phosphor bronze.
Unit-V: 5.1 Polymeric materials.
5.2 Properties and applications of thermoplastics, thermosetting plastics and rubbers.
Non-Metallic 5.3 Plastic Moulding process: compression moulding, transfer moulding, injection 10
and moulding, blow moulding, vacuum forming, extrusion, calendaring, rotational moulding.
Advanced 5.4 Application of ABS, acrylics, nylons and vinyl, polyesters, epoxies, melamine and
Materials bakelite.
5.5 Application of rubbers: neoprene, butadiene, buna and silicon.
5.6 Ceramics - properties and applications of glasses and refractories.
5.7 Composite materials - properties and applications of laminated and fibre reinforced
materials.
5.8 Advanced engineering materials- Properties and applications of Nano materials and
smart materials.
Unit-VI: 7.1 Importance of non-destructive testing, difference between destructive and non-
Non- destructive testing. 05
Destructive 7.2 Non-destructive testing methods – Radiography (X-Ray & Gamma Ray), Ultrasonic crack
Testing detection, Dye penetration test, Magnaflux test – comparison & applications.
Grand Total : 51
3. Suggested Home Assignments/Students’ Activities: (any four)

i) Prepare a chart of composition and application of the following non-ferrous alloys - a) Babitt metal, b) Phosphor Bronze, c)
Brass, d) Bronze, e) Gun metal, f) Bell metal, g) Duralumin, h) Y- alloy, i) German Silver, j) Monel metal, k) Inconel, l) Nichrome.
ii) Select the type of carbon steel and its composition (approx range of carbon %) ad approx Tensile strength for the following
components - a) shaft and spindle, b ) rails, c) wires, d) boiler plate, e) connecting rod, f) die block, g) cutting tool, h) hand
chisel, i) hammer, and j) drill.
ii). Arrange CI, Mild steel, Wrought Iron, Cu, Al according to their tensile strength, ductility, malleability, hardness, toughness and
creep.
iv). Write down the heat treatment process (heating temperature range, quenching procedure, selection of furnace) of any five of
the following components -
a) Gear used in power transmission in lathe, b) HSS cutting tool, c) Crank shaft used in 4- stroke petrol engine, d) Shaft, e) Cast Iron
pulley, f) Tyre of rail-wheel, g) balls of ball bearing.
v) Draw detailed sketch of any two types of heat treatment furnace commonly used in industry.
vi) Prepare a chart showing coloured picture of microstructure of steel (Ferrite, Pearlite, Cementite, Bainite, Sorbite, Martensite),
their BHN, and composition.

Total
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20
5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination [duration 3 hours]
To Marks To Marks
To be Total To be Total
Group Unit be per Group Unit be per
Answered Marks Answered Marks
Set Question Set Question
15 1 02 At least
A 1, 2, A two from
2 02
3 20x 1 = each 8x5=
1 3 02
20 20 group 8 40
4 02
B 10 B (Total 5
4, 5,6 5 01
questions)
6 01

1
2
3
4
5
Total 100
A Text Book of Materials Science and

1 O.P.Khanna Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi.
Metallurgy
2 Materials Science for Polytechnic S. K. Kataria & Sons, New Delhi,

R.K.Rajput
ISBN: 9789350144169
3 Engineering Materials B.K.Agrawal McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi.
4 Material Science R.S. Khurmi, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
5 Material Science & Engineering Raghavan PHI
List of assignments are to be performed by the students in subject of Mechanical Engineering Materials [any two]:
1. Prepare a chart showing the diagrams and detailed calculations of coordination number, atomic radius and atomic
packing factor for BCC, FCC and HCP Crystal Structures for demonstration purpose.
2. Prepare a chart showing the composition and applications of the following materials for demonstration purpose: a)
Babit Metal, b) Phosphor Bronze, c) Brass, d) Bronze, e) Gun Metal, f) Bell Metal, g) Duralumin, h) German silver, i)
Monel Metal, j) Inconel, k) Nichrome [any five].
3. Prepare a chart showing the Iron-Carbon Equilibrium Diagrams (drawn in proper scale) and explain its critical
temperatures, micro constituencies up to 2% carbon content in tabulated form for demonstration purpose.
4. Prepare a chart showing the selection of material with their composition and proper justifications for the following
components: a) Shaft and spindle, b) Rail track, c) Wires, d) Boiler plate, e) Connecting rod, f) Die block, g) Cutting tool,
h) Hand chisel i) Hammer, j) Drill bit [any five].
5. Prepare a chart showing the microstructure, composition and properties of the following steels for demonstration
purpose: a) Ferrite, b) Pearlite, c) Cementite, d) Binite, e) Sorbite, f) Martensite.
6. Prepare a chart showing the process flow diagram with proper explanations for production of steel from iron ore for
demonstration purpose.
7. Prepare a flow chart showing the sequential processes of suggested heat treatment with explanation and proper
justifications for enhancing the performances of the following components: a) Gear used in power transmission in lathe,
b) Anvil of smithy shop, c) Crank shaft used in 4 stroke engines, d) Cast Iron pulley, f) Rail wheels [any one].
8. Prepare a chart showing sequential process flow diagrams with explanation and specific applications of any two types of
non-destructive testing methods generally being used in Industry for material testing.
9. With suitable diagram explain and specify its applications of the following plastic forming processes: a) Compression
moulding, b) Transfer moulding, c) Injection moulding, d) Blow moulding, e) Vacuum forming, f) Extrusion [any two].
10. Prepare a chart by organizing the following engineering materials such as Cast iron, Mild steel, Wrought iron, Copper,
Aluminum according to their mechanical properties such as Strength, Malleability, Ductility, Hardness and Machinability.

Course Title : Strength of Materials Examination Scheme:

(Same with Mechanical Engg.) (End Semester Examination)
Duration : 17 weeks (ii) Internal Assessment: 40 Marks
Total lecture class/week : 3
Credit : 3 Class attendance : 10 Marks]
1. Course Outcomes:
a. Demonstrate different types of stress induced on components under the action of different types of loading condition.
b. Interpret the variation of MOI for different cross-sections of mechanical components.
c. Determine stresses, deformations in the simple load carrying members subjected to an axial, transverse, radial, twisting
or thermal loading,
d. Draw shear force and bending moment diagrams for beams with different support conditions and different load
conditions,
e. Analyze both solid and hollow shaft subjected to torsion,
f. Solve the problems of column for different end conditions using different methods like Euler’s Formula & Rankine-Gordon
formula,

Hours
Unit-01: 1.1 Definition of SOM & concept of rigid body, deformable body & equilibrium of forces.
Simple 1.2 Types of loads (normal and tangential), types of stresses - normal stress (tensile stress and
Stresses compressive stress) & shear stress, strain -concept, types- longitudinal and lateral strain, and
and Strains Poisson’s ratio.
1.3 Hooke’s law, Young’s modulus, longitudinal stress and strain values of uniform and
stepped bar under the influence of normal force; stress and strain values of uniform bar due
to self-weight only. 12
1.4. Behaviour of ductile and brittle materials subjected to axial tension, stress-strain or load-
deformation curve for ductile (MS) and brittle material (CI) - discussion on salient point, limit
of proportionality, yielding, permanent set, yield stress and ultimate stress, factor of safety
(simple problems on normal stresses and longitudinal strain. No discussion on composite
section).
1.5 Direct shear stress (single/double shear) and shear strain, modulus of rigidity, (simple
problems on direct shear in riveted joint, punching press).
1.6 Lateral strain, Poisson’s ratio, volumetric strain, bulk modulus, relation among elastic
constants without deduction.
1.7 Thin cylindrical shell - hoop stress, longitudinal stress and relation between them (simple
problems).
1.8 Temperature stress and strain in case of bodies having uniform cross-section with and
without yielding (simple problems but no discussion on composite section).
Unit-02: 2.1 Definition of area and mass moment of inertia.

Moment of 2.2 Parallel axis theorem, Perpendicular axis theorem, Polar moment inertia, Radius of
Inertia gyration.
2.3 MOI about axes passing through the centroid (for solid having square, rectangular, circular,
semi-circular, triangular sections and for hollow having square, rectangular, circular sections
only) 06
2.4 MOI of angle section, channel section, Tee section, and I-section about centroidal axis and
any other axis parallel to centroidal axis. Polar moment of inertia of circular sections (solid and
hollow).
Unit-03: 3.1 Types of beams, types of loads (point load, uniformly distributed load, UVL, VL), and types
Shear Force of supports.
& Bending 3.2 Meaning of SF, BM of beam, and relation between them, sign convention of SF & BM.
Moment of 3.3 Shear force and bending moment diagram (for simply supported beam and cantilever
Beam subjected to point loads/uniformly distributed load/their combination). 08
3.4 Location of point of maximum bending moment for simply supported beam.
3.5 Concept of overhanging beam and point of contra flexure.
3.6. Problems on cantilever and simply supported beam.
Unit-04: 4.1. Theory of pure bending, assumption in theory of bending, flexural formula, neutral axis.
Bending 4.2 Moment of resistance, section modulus and neutral axis. 04
stresses in 4.3 Simple problems on bending stress in beams having rectangular, circular, and I-section
Beams (symmetrical section about both axes).
Unit-05: 5.1 Concepts of deflection, maximum deflection and slope in a beam.
Deflection 5.2 Maximum deflection and slope of simply supported beam subjected to point load at mid
of Beams span and / or uniformly distributed load on entire span (no deduction).
5.3 Maximum deflection and slope of cantilever beam subjected to point load at free end and
03
/ or uniformly distributed load on entire span(no deduction)
5.4 Simple problems on maximum deflection and maximum slope of simply supported beam
and cantilever subjected to above mentioned loading.
Unit-06: 6.1 Introduction, difference between strut and column, types of column.
Columns & 6.2 Concept of slenderness ratio, equivalent length of column for different end conditions.
Struts 6.3 Euler’s formula, assumptions, formula for critical/buckling loads of columns for different 04
end conditions (no deduction), safe load, limitations of Euler’s formula.
6.4 Rankin’s formula, calculation of critical / buckling load.
Unit-07: 7.1 Concept of pure torsion, field of applications (shaft, flange couplings, shear bolts), torsional
Torsion of rigidity, angle of twist, polar modulus, torsional equation for solid and hollow circular shafts,
circular assumptions made for deriving the pure torsion equation.
05
shafts 7.2 Torsional resistance for solid and hollow circular shafts, comparison between them, power
transmitted by shaft.
7.3 Simple problems on pure torsion.
Unit-08 8.1 Function, types, materials used, practical applications.

Springs: 8.2 Coiled spring terminology - spring stiffness, solid length, spring index, and mean radius of
coil.
8.3 Angle of twist in the spring wire, deformation, and energy stored in the closely coiled helical 03
spring subjected to an axial load. [No Derivation; Only Formula use]
8.4 Equivalent stiffness of coiled springs in series & parallel.
8.5 Simple problems on closed-coil helical spring subjected to an axial load.

Grand Total : 51
3. Suggested Home Assignments/Students’ Activities: Students are to solve 4 assignments from the set of assignment attached in
separate sheet (Annexure 1).

Total
Class Test - 1 4 8 8 20
Class Test - 2 4 8 8 20
5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [Duration 3 hours]
Marks Marks
To be To be Total To be Total
Group Unit per Group Unit To be Set per
Set Answered Marks Answered Marks
Question Question
05 Total 5
A 1, 2,3 15 A 1, 2,3 questions to
(2+1+2)
20 x 1 be answered 5x8=
20 1 08
4, = 20 4, 05 taking at- 40
B
B 5,6, 10 5,6, (1+1+1+1 least 2 from
7,8 7,8 +1) each group

1
2
3
4
5
Total 100
1 Strength of Materials R.S. Khurmi S.Chand

2 Strength of Materials R. Subramanian Oxford
3 Strength of Materials S.S. Rattan McGraw Hill Education
4 Strength of Materials R.K Rajput S. Chand
5 Strength of Materials S. Ramamurtham Dhanpat Rai Publishing.
(Annexure 1)
Samples of SOM Assignment

(any two from first four and any two from next six)
1. To find the induced stress and its nature, and deformation in each part and the resultant deformation of whole
body. Given – E and cross sectional area of each part.
2. To find the decrease in length of the body made up of different materials A and B, under the action of axial
compressive load. Given EA , EB , cross sectional area of each section, considering the self weight of WA , WB and
axial load P.
3. To justify the joining of stiffener to the C-section as shown below and determine the increase of moment of
resistance of C-section with stiffener in comparison to without stiffener. Given, various dimensions associated
with sketches, bending stress.
OR, To choose the best option from two given alternatives in which two identical plates are welded to the (i) flanges
of symmetrical I-section, and (ii) web of symmetrical I-section as shown. Given, various dimensions associated
with sketches and bending stress.
4. Compare the bending strength of the two beams having different cross section (one is of hollow rectangular cross
section and other is of I-section). I-section is formed by welding of back to back webs of two ‘C’ sections whereas
hollow rectangular section is formed by welding of face to face top & bottom flange of two ‘C’ sections as shown.
OR, Compare the bending strength of three sections of the same cross sectional area and depth if one of them
has a solid rectangular section (50 mm wide and 200 mm deep), the second one is of hollow rectangular section
(external dimensions of 90 mm wide and 200 mm deep with 20 mm wall thickness), and the last one is an I-
section of equal flanges (170 mm wide web and flange thickness equal to 20 mm).
5. To determine the position of two supports of an equally overhanging beam for the least maximum BM,
draw SF and BM diagram of such loaded beam. To find the point of contra flexure, if any.
6. To determine the economical cross-section of a simply supported beam subjected to combined loading from the
given two options - square cross section and circular cross section. Given, allowable bending stress, length of
beam, magnitude of point load and intensity of u.d.l.
7. To draw the elastic curve and determine maximum defection and maximum slope of cantilever and simply
supported beam subjected to combined loading. Given, E, length of beam and moment of inertia of the cross
section of beam.
8. To compare the crippling loads given by the Rankin’s formula and Euler’s formula for a column. Given, cross
section of column and its MOI about centroidal axes (I GX, IGY), allowable crushing stress fC, modulus of elasticity E,
value of α, length and end condition of column.
9. To design the hollow shaft and determine the % saving in material for the replacement a solid shaft by a hollow
shaft of same material. Given, maximum allowable shear stress is same for both the shafts, diameter of solid
shaft, and ratio of the outer and inner diameter of hollow shaft.
10. Mechanical structure of a single purchase crab winch is shown in figure where two solid steel shafts AB & CD of
same material are connected by two gears. Determine the largest torque ‘T’ that can be applied to the end A of
shaft AB and the corresponding angle of twist for each shaft. Given, modulus of rigidity and allowable torsional
shear stress of the shaft material, Lc & Lb , Dc & Db , Rc & Rb.
11. A solid circular shaft is transmitting 100 kW at 180 rpm. The shaft is not to twist more than 1o in a length of 3
meters.The allowable torsional shear stress of the shaft material is 60 N/mm2. Assume modulus of rigidity of the
shaft material is 80 kN/mm2. Determine the suitable shaft diameter for this purpose.
12. Two close-coiled helical springs wound from same wire having same length but with different core radii and are
placed one into the other between two rigid plates at their two extreme ends. This mechanical structure is being
subjected to compressive load. Determine the maximum shear stress induced in each coil spring. Given, diameter
of wire, compressive load applied between the two rigid plates and core radii of the two springs.

Name of the Course: Diploma in Mechanical Engineering (Production)
Code no. : ME(P)PC207 Theory : 100 Marks
Course Title : Industrial Production Technology-I Examination Scheme:

Duration : 17 weeks (Total class hour/week = 3) (End Semester Examination)
Total lecture class/week : 3 (ii) Internal Assessment: 40 Marks
Credit : 3

The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with this subject are to be taught and implemented, so that
the student demonstrates the following industry oriented course outcomes:
a. Understand the fundamental concept of manufacturing and identify different manufacturing processes to be performed
for the given job.
b. Prepare products using different metal forming processes.
c. Prepare products using different casting processes.
d. Assess and apply different metal joining processes to produce jobs.
e. Illustrate the concept of powder metallurgy
The following topics / subtopics should be taught and assessed in order to develop unit outcomes for achieving the identified
course outcomes.

Hours
Unit: 1 1.1 Concept of manufacturing
Introduction 1.2 Importance of manufacturing
1.3 Classification-Metal casting process, metal forming processes, metal joining 02
processes, metal machining processes and metal finishing processes.
Unit: 2 2.1 Casting: Definition, Advantages and limitations, processes involved in

Foundry casting
Technology
2.2 Patterns: Definition - types of patterns – solid piece – split piece – match
plate – sweep– skeleton – segmental – pattern materials – pattern allowances.
2.3 Core making: Cores-core print-Gating System-Elements of gating system.
2.4 Moulding: Types of moulding sand – properties of moulding sand moulding

14
tools – types of moulds – Green sand moulding-Pit moulding-Shell moulding –
Machine moulding – Jolting – Squeezing – Sand slinging
2.5 Melting furnaces: Furnaces, construction and working of cupola furnace and
electric arc furnace.
2.6 Special Casting: Shell mould casting – Investment casting – Die casting –
Centrifugal casting – Continuous casting
2.7 Defects in casting: causes and remedies.
Unit: 3 3.1 Arc Welding: Definition – arc welding equipment – electrode types – filler 12
Welding and flux materials – arc welding methods – Metal arc – Metal Inert gas (MIG) –
Technology Tungsten inert gas (TIG) - Submerged arc -Electro slag welding – Resistance
welding – Spot welding – Seam welding – Plasma arc welding – Thermit welding
– Electron beam welding – Laser beam welding – Friction welding– Ultrasonic
welding.
3.2 Gas welding: Oxy-acetylene welding – advantages – limitations – gas
welding equipment –three types of flames – welding techniques.
3.3 Soldering – brazing – difference between soldering and brazing.
3.4 Merits and demerits of welded joints.
3.5 Defects in welding – causes and remedies.
Unit: 4 4.1 Forging: Hot working, cold working – advantages of hot working and cold 8
Forming working – forging operations, smith forging, drop forging, upset forging, press
Technology forging-forgeable materials-forgeability-forging temperature.
4.2 Rolling and Extrusion: Basic principles of rolling and extrusion, Hot and cold
rolling, Types of rolling mills: 2 Hi, 3 Hi & 4 Hi mills, rolling defects, Hot and cold
extrusion, Methods of extrusion: Direct, Indirect, Backward & impact Extrusion,
Advantages, disadvantages & applications of rolling & extrusion.
Unit: 5 5.1 Basic concept of powder metallurgy 4

Powder 5.2 Production of metal powders – atomization, reduction
Metallurgy and electrolytic deposition –blending- compacting – sintering – finishing
operation.
Unit: 6 6.1 Press Working: Types of presses – mechanical and hydraulic presses –
Press & Press press tools and accessories, 5
Working 6.2 Press working operations: Cutting, bending, drawing, punching, banking,
notching, lancing, piercing, coining and embossing.
Grand Total : 51
3. Suggested Home Assignments/ Student Activities:

Other than classroom and laboratory learning, following are the suggested student related co-curricular activities which can be
undertaken to accelerate the attainment of the various outcomes in the course:
a. It may be submission of home assignment (at least three) or submission of report after conducting site visit/ industry visit/
micro-project / market survey / internet search on specific topic, preparation of chart, creation of innovative model or
present seminar on specific topic which is suitable for the given subject as per instruction of subject teacher as explained in
5.2 and 5.3.
b. Students may conduct one of the following activities in group and prepare reports for their (student’s) activity, also collect /
record physical evidences for their (student’s) portfolio which will be useful for their placement interviews.
c. Visit an / a Industry / Workshop where processes like metal forming (forging / rolling / extrusion / press work) or machining
(Lathe operations) or casting or welding are carried out. Collect information on types of machines in operation, their
specifications; observe various activities performed and characteristic of output products.
d. Collect information of recent advancement in manufacturing processes like metal forming or machining or casting (Machines
/ Tools / Equipments) and also collect their specification, manufacturer’s name & application in industry.
e. Collect information on present status and recent advancement in welding. Also collect information on process specific
machines, accessories required and their applications in industry.
f. Students may undertake one micro projects for their (student’s) activity. The micro-project could be industry application
based, internet-based, workshop-based, laboratory-based, or field-based. The micro-project may be executed by the
individual or by a group of students but the number of students in the group should not exceed five students. Each student
will have to maintain dated work diary consisting of individual contribution in the project work and give a seminar
presentation of it at the time of submission (ie. end of semester). The total duration of the micro-project should not be less
than 16(sixteen) student engagement hours during the course.
A suggested list of micro-projects is given here. Similar micro-projects could be added by the concerned faculty member also.
a) Prepare a cast product of different mechanical engineering drawing models with wax material.
b) Prepare various types of welding joints (with metal components) for display and demonstration purposes.
c) Prepare different types of keys (with metal components) for display and demonstration purpose.
d) Prepare various types of patterns / core / core box etc. with suitable material.
e) Prepare model or suitable chart of the drive mechanism generally being used in Lathe.
f) Prepare working model of direct extrusion process for display and demonstration purposes.
g) Prepare hammer forging working model for display and demonstration purposes.
h) Prepare working model of the taper turning attachment generally being used in Lathe.
4. Suggested Scheme for Question Paper Design for Conducting Internal Assessment: (Duration: 45 Minutes)

Internal Distribution of Theory Marks:
5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: (Duration: 3 hours)

Unit To be To be Marks per Total Unit To be To be Marks per Total
Group Group
No. Set Answered Question Marks No. Set Answered Question Marks
Total 5
A 1&2 06 A 1&2 03
questions
are to be
[20 x 1] answered [5 x 8] =
B 3&4 08 20 01 B 3&4 04 08
= 20 taking at- 40
least 1
from each
C 5&6 06 C 5&6 03
group.
Pass Criterion for End Semester Examination = 24 Marks [Minimum]
6. Rubrics for the Assessment of Student’s Activity: (20 Marks)
Sl. No. Performance Indicators Weightage in %

In time submission of home assignment or submission of report after
conducting site visit/ industry visit/ micro-project / market survey / internet
1 40
search on specific topic, preparation of chart, creation of innovative model
etc.
2 Viva voce or present seminar on submitted report.
2a Communication skill 10
60
2b Technical interpretation skill 10
2c Answering / Conclusion with justification 40
Total: 100

No.
Elements of workshop S. K. Hajra Chowdhury, Media Promoters and
1
Technology – Volume I & II Bose, Roy Publishers limited, Mumbai,
2 B.S.Raghuwanshi
Kalpakjian & Pearson Education, New
Schemid Delhi
Manufacturing Technology –
Volume I & II
Delhi.
6 DeGarmo Wiley
Manufacturing
8 Welding & Welding Technology Richard L Little Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
Volume I , II & III
8. Suggested Learning Websites:

a) ELS web-portal of WBSCTE
b) https://nptel.ac.in
c) https://swayam.gov.in
d) https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.mhrd.ndl
e) https://www.vlab.co.in
Name of the Course: Diploma in Mechanical Engineering (Production)

Code no.: ME(P)PC209 Theory: 100 marks
Course Title: Heat Power Engineering - I Examination Scheme:
Duration: 17 weeks (Total hours per week = 3) a) External Assessment: 60 marks
Total Theoretical class/week: 3 i) Internal Assessment: 40 marks
Credit: 3 [Class test: 20 marks
Quizzes, assignment, viva voce: 10 marks
Class attendance: 10 marks]
Pass Criterion: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (pass marks) in both continuous assessment and end semester
assessment separately.

i. Understand fundamental concepts of thermodynamic systems and different laws of thermodynamic.
ii. Understand various properties of perfect gas.
iii. Apply 1st law of thermodynamics on open system and on closed system containing ideal gas executing
thermodynamic processes.
iv. Understand the formation and properties of steam.
v. Solve simple numerical on properties of steam by using steam table / Mollier chart.
vi. Determine dryness fraction of steam
vii. Understand the working of different types of boilers and necessity of boiler mountings & accessories.
1. 2. Theory Components:
The following topics / subtopics should be taught and assessed in order to develop unit outcomes for achieving
the identified course outcomes.

Hour
UNIT 1: 1.1. Basic concept of thermodynamics.
Basics of
thermodyna 1.2. Thermodynamic System, Boundary, Surrounding. Classification of
mics thermodynamic system: open system, closed system and isolated system.
1.3. State of a thermodynamic system, change of state, path, thermodynamic process

and cycle. 3
1.4. Thermodynamic properties of system (Intrinsic and Extrinsic properties)
1.5. Thermodynamic equilibrium of a system (mechanical, thermal and chemical

equilibrium), thermodynamic cycle.
1.6. Zeroth law of thermodynamics and concept of temperature.
UNIT 2: 2.1 Heat and work: Concept of N.T.P, Energy- definition and units of transient
Fundamental energy (heat & work) and stored energy (PE, KE & IE), Point function & path
Laws of function, Displacement work & flow work, P-dv work for different quasi-static
Thermodyna processes, simple numerical. 14
mics 2.2 First law of thermodynamics: Principle of energy conservation, Concept of
perpetual motion machine of 1st kind, enthalpy, specific heat and latent heat,
first law of thermodynamics for different processes, simple energy equation for
non-flow process, steady flow energy equation and its application to various
thermodynamic system like boiler, nozzle, turbine, compressor & condenser,
limitations of First law of thermodynamics, simple numerical.
2.3 Second law of thermodynamics: Cyclic heat engine, Kelvin–Plank statement
& Clausius statement, application of 2nd laws to various thermodynamic system
like heat engine, heat pump and refrigerator, thermal efficiency, coefficient of
performance, concept of perpetual motion machine of 2nd kind, concept and units
of entropy, simple numerical.
UNIT 3: 3.1 Concept of ideal gas & real gas.

Properties of 3.2 Laws of perfect gases such as Charle’s law, Boyle’s law, Gay-Lussac’s law and
Perfect Gas Avogadro’s hypothesis, equation of state (PV = m RT), characteristic gas
constant and universal gas constant.
3.3 Relation among two specific heats (Cp & Cv) with characteristic gas constant (R). 8
3.4 Ideal thermodynamic processes of gas: governing equation of processes like
constant pressure process, constant volume process, constant temperature
process, adiabatic process & polytropic process, representation of all the above
processes on p-V and T-s plane, deduction of work transfer, heat transfer, change
in internal energy, change in enthalpy and change in entropy for each process.
3.5 Simple numerical on above-mentioned perfect gas processes.

UNIT 4: 4.1 Explanation of steam generation process with the help of p-V, T-s diagram.
Properties of
Steam 4.2 Basic terms and properties of steam such as saturation temperature, saturation
pressure, saturated liquid, saturated steam (wet steam, dry saturated steam),
superheated steam, critical point, triple point, dryness fraction, degree of
superheat, degree of undercooling, enthalpy of steam, sensible heat, latent heat
of vaporization, superheat, specific volume, entropy and internal energy of
steam.
12
4.3 The P-v, T-s and h-s diagram for a pure substance.
4.4 Determination of dryness fraction of steam using (a) separating calorimeter, (b)
throttling calorimeter, & (c) combined separating & throttling calorimeter.
4.5 Steam table & its use, enthalpy- entropy (h-s) diagram of steam (Mollier chart)
and its use.
4.6 Vapour processes such as constant pressure processes, constant volume

processes, constant entropy, constant temperature processes & constant enthalpy
process and representation of the processes on p-V, T-s & h-s diagram.
4.7 Comparison of gas & vapour.
4.8 Simple numerical on steam properties only using steam table and Mollier
diagram.
UNIT 5: 5.1 Definition and classification of boilers.
Boilers 5.2 Fire tube & water tube boilers with example, working principle, difference and
(Steam applications.
Generator) 5.3 Construction & working principle of Cochran boiler, Lancashire boiler, Babcock
and Wilcox boiler and La-Mont boiler.
5.4 Definition of boiler mountings and accessories, Functions of boiler mountings 8
and important accessories.
5.5 Basic concept of stoker fired, fluidized bed and pulverized fuel boilers.
5.6 Boiler performance and sources of heat loss.
5.7 Boiler draught, classification and comparison of boiler draught and calculation
of chimney height.
5.8 Necessity of boiler feed water treatment.
5.9 Concept of modern high-pressure boiler.
5.10Simple numerical on boiler performance and chimney heights calculation.
2. 3. Suggested Home Assignments/ Student Activities:

1. Draw P-V, T-S & H-S plane of steam and display saturated liquid line, dry saturated vapour line, wet saturated steam
zone, critical point, triple point, superheated zone& under cooled liquid zone.
2. Draw P-V, T-S, H-S & P-T plane of steam and show constant pressure, constant temperature, constant volume &
constant entropy line.
3. 4. Suggested Scheme for Question Paper Design for Conducting Internal Assessment: (Duration: 45 Minutes)

Internal Distribution of Theory Marks:
4. 5. Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: (Duration: 3 hours)

Group Unit To To be Marks Total Group Unit To be To be Marks
No. be Answered per Marks No. Set Answered per Total
Set Question Questi Marks
on
Total Five
A 1&2 12 A 1&2 05 questions
are to be
[20 x 1] answered [5 x 8]
B 3&4 13 20 01 B 3&4 05 08
= 20 taking at- = 40
least two
from each
group.
Pass Criterion for End Semester Examination = 24 Marks [Minimum]
5. 6. Rubrics for the Assessment of Student’s Activity: (20 Marks)

In time submission of home assignment or submission of report after
conducting site visit/ industry visit/ micro-project / market survey / internet
1 40
search on specific topic, preparation of chart, creation of innovative model
etc.
2 Viva voce or present seminar on submitted report.
2a Communication skill 10
60
2b Technical interpretation skill 10
2c Answering / Conclusion with justification 40
Total: 100
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. 7. Suggested Learning Resources:

No.
1 A Course in Thermal Engineering. V.M. Domkundwar Dhanpat Rai & Co.
Engineering Thermodynamics D.S.Kumar S.K. Kataria& Sons

2
3 A text book of Thermal Engineering. R. S. Khurmi S. Chand & Co.
4 A Course in Thermal Engineering. P. L. Ballaney Khanna Publishers
5 Engineering Thermodynamics P K Nag Tata McGraw Hill

Course Title : Mechanical Engineering Drawing Practice Semester : Third
(Same with Mechanical Engg.)
Category: Programme Core Full Marks: 100
Code no. : MEPC211 Sessional Examination Scheme:
Duration : 17 weeks (4 hours per week) External Assessment

(End Semester Sessional Examination)
Assignment on the day of viva voce : 20

Viva voce (before Board of Examiners) 40 marks
20
:
Internal Assessment
Total Practical class/week : 4 Submission of drawing sheets
40
(in scheduled time)
Class performance & attendance 10 60 marks
Credit: 2 Viva voce (after submission of drawing
10
sheets)
Total marks 100 marks
Pass Criterion: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (pass marks) in both internal assessment and end semester examination
separately.
Pre requisite:
 Knowledge of Mechanical Engineering Drawing [Code No. – MEPC 201]

The practical exposures related with this course are to be taught and implemented, so that the student will be able to
demonstrate the following industry oriented COs.
i) Draw the development of lateral surfaces of different truncated and frustum objects, such as tray, funnel, hopper, bend
pipe, transition pieces, etc.
ii) Draw the curves of intersection of commonly used two interpenetrating solids.
iii) Exercise various drawing symbols, codes and conventions as per IS: SP-46.
iv) Apply machining symbols and surface texture on production drawings.
v) Draw the sectional views of various casting / machining components.
vi) Draw assembly drawing and detailed drawings of various objects such as machine tool parts, machine components, power
transmission elements, bearings, valves etc.
2. Suggested Assignments for Continuous Assessment:

Following assignments are to be attempted on A1 drawing sheets (to scale drawing by using requisite drawing instruments and
following the First angle method of projection) for the attainment of COs of MEPC211:
Approx. Marks
Unit
Sheet No. Practical Outcomes (PrOs) Hours per
No.
required sheet
Sheet No. -1 1a. Develop plain / single curved lateral surfaces of oblique
(containing at least solids like prisms and cylinders. 01 5
five problems) 08
1b. Develop plain / single curved lateral surfaces of oblique
solids like pyramids and cones.
Sheet No. -2
(containing at least 2a. Develop lateral surfaces of compound solids like funnel,
five problems) tray, oil can, hopper, transition piece (square to circular). 01 08 5
Sheet No. -3 3a. Draw curves of intersection of two interpenetrating solids

(containing at least having plane surfaces (vertical square prism with
3 problems) horizontal square prism).
3b. Draw curves of intersection of two interpenetrating solids

having single curved surface (vertical cylinder with 08
02 5
horizontal cylinder).
3c. Draw curves of intersection of two interpenetrating solids

having single curved surface (horizontal cylinder with
vertical cone).
Sheet No. -4 4a. Draw different orthographic views from the given
(containing at least isometric view.
five problems)
4b. Draw sectional front view, top view and side view from the 04 10
5
given isometric view of machine component, castings etc.
(using conventions of sections)
Sheet No. -5 5a. State the procedure for assembly from the given detailed
(containing at least drawing.
three problems) 5b. Draw assembly drawing (sectional front view and side
[Preferably shaft view) from the given detailed drawings of components
Coupling, C.I. including conventional representation of tolerances and 05 12 10
Pulley and Knuckle surface finish symbols.
joint] 5c. Prepare Bill of materials. (See Annexure-5b: sample of
industrial drawing).
Sheet No. -6 6a. Identify various components in the given assembly drawing
(containing at least and the sequence of dismantling it.
three problems) 6b. Describe the procedure for dismantling the given assembly
[Preferably drawing.
Knuckle joint, 6c. Draw part drawing (sectional front view and side view)
06 14 10
Socket & spigot from the given assembly drawing.
type cotter joint 6d. Construct the tooth profile of a spur gear from given
and construction of module, pressure angle and number of teeth.
tooth profile of a
Spur Gear]
Sub Total: Practical Classes 60 hrs. 40 marks
3. Rubrics for the internal assessment of drawing sheets [40 marks]:

1 For interpretation of problems given by subject teacher 20
2 For proper layout of drawing sheets (maintaining correct types of lines 50
and their thickness)
3 For proper dimensioning, symbols of the drawn views 10
4 For neatness & cleanliness of drawing sheets 10
5 For the submission of assigned drawing sheets in time 10
Total 100
Course Title : Materials Testing Lab Examination Scheme:

(Same with Mechanical Engg.) [Continuous assessment of
Duration : 17 weeks (2 hours per week) class performance and in time
submission of assignment : 30 marks
Total practical class /week : 2 Viva voce : 20 marks
Credit : 1 (ii) External Assessment: 40 Marks
Pre requisite:
 Knowledge of Strength of Materials [Code No. – MEPC 205]
 Knowledge of Mechanical Engineering Materials [Code No – MEPC 203]
1. Course Outcomes:
CO1: Handle, maintain and operate different material testing machines.
CO2: Determine the various types of stress and plot the stress-strain diagram for mild steel specimen subjected to axial tensile
load.
CO3: Determine the shear stress of given materials due to direct shear.
CO4: Determine the impact load of given materials.
CO5: Determine the hardness of given materials.
CO6: Determine the torsional shear stress of given materials subjected to torque.
CO7: Identify the external surface cracks in the test specimen by using Visual inspection and ring test, Die penetration test, and
Magnetic particle test.
CO8: Determine the modulus of rigidity, strain energy, shear stress and stiffness of coil spring.
2. Suggested Assignments for Continuous Assessment: (Any Five)
Sl.No. Practical Outcome (PrOs) List of Practical
a) Determine the mechanical properties Tensile test on mild steel/ aluminum on UTM.
(such as yield stress, ultimate stress,
percentage elongation, Young’s modulus) of
1.
common engineering materials.
b) Interpret the failure patterns of common

ductile metals under tensile force.
Determine shear strength of common To determine shear strength of mild steel by
2.
ductile material. Direct Shear Test on UTM.
a) Operate Izod impact testing machine, To find out the resistance of a standard
carry out experiment and take reading specimen of common engineering materials
3 and interpret the result. against impact load by Izod and Charpy test.
b) Determine toughness of common ductile

material.
a) Handle, maintain and demonstrate the To determine the hardness value of mild steel /
sequential operations of the Brinell aluminum by Brinell Hardness tester.
4. Hardness Tester.
b) Determine hardness number of common

engineering materials and validate.
a) Handle, maintain and demonstrate the To determine the hardness value of mild steel /
sequential operations of the Rockwell aluminum by Rockwell Hardness tester.
5. Hardness Tester.
b) Determine hardness number of common

engineering materials and validate.
a) Find out the relation between applied Torsion test on mild steel/ Aluminum bar.
torque and corresponding angle of twist.
b) Understand the relation between torque

6.
and angle of twist.
b) Determine modulus of rigidity of a

standard specimen of common engineering
material and validate.
a) Learn the procedure for identifying the To Detect the exterior surface cracks in the
surface cracks on various engineering specimen using (i) Visual inspection and ring
components depending on scope and test, (ii) Die penetration test, (iii) Magnetic
7. availability. particle test.
b) To distinguish between delicate surface

crack and scratch on various engineering
components.
a) Determine the stiffness of coiled spring. Determination of modulus of rigidity, strain
8. energy, shear stress and stiffness by load
deflection
method ( Closed coil helical spring)

1 Awareness about the significance of particular test 15
2 Understanding working principle of machine 15
3 Preparation of experimental set up 20
4 Setting and operation 20
5 Observations and recording 10
6 Interpretation of result and conclusion 10
7 Answer to sample questions 5
8 Submission of report in time 5
Total 100
Reference Books:
1. Testing of Metallic Materials - A.V.K Surayanarayan- PHI
2. Measurement system (Application and Design) – Ernest O Doebelin.
4. A Text Book strength of Material– R.K. Bansal, Laxmi Publication New Delhi.

Code No. : ME(P)PC 215 Total Marks : 100
Course Title : Heat Power Engg lab Examination Scheme:

(ii) Internal Assessment: 60 marks
Duration : 17 weeks (2 hours per week) [Continuous assessment of
Total Practical Class /week : 2 class performance and in time
submission of assignment : 30 marks
Credit: 1 Viva voce : 20 marks

Pre requisite :
 Knowledge of Heat Power Engineering-I [Code No. – ME(P)PC 209]
1. Course Outcomes (COs)

The experimental works associated with this course will help the students to demonstrate the following industry oriented COs
related with the above mentioned competency.
i. Get practical concepts about equipment and machineries used in thermal engineering industry.
ii. Get practical knowledge about the process of steam formation and different properties of it.
iii. Gain practical concept about different types of fire tube and water tube boilers used in industries.
iv. Get practical concepts regarding different types of boiler mounting and accessories.
v. Get basic practical idea about a thermal power plant.
2. Suggested Assignments for Continuous Assessment: (At least Five Practical)
Sl. No. Practical Outcome (PrOs) List of Practical
Can know the working principal of Bourden Observation of the working principle of Bourden tube
1. tube pressure gauge which are used in pressure gauge
different industries including thermal
power plant.
Can get practical knowledge about the Study and measurement of calorific value of solid fuel
2. measurement of calorific value of a solid using Bomb Calorimeter.
fuel.
Get practical concept about the process of Measurement of Dryness Fraction of Steam by Dryness
3 steam formation and different properties of Fraction Measuring Instrument.
it
Get the idea about the variation of enthalpy Use of Mollier Chart by plotting different vapour
4. and entropy for different vapour processes. processes on it.
Get clear concept about the construction of Study of Cochran Boiler (fire tube boiler)
5. Cochran Boiler and flow process of flue gas
and water during working condition of the
boiler.
Get knowledge about the construction of Study of Lancashire Boilers (fire tube boiler)
6. Lancashire Boiler and flow process of flue
gas and water during working condition of
the boiler.
Get clear concept about the construction of Study of Babcock and Wilcox Boiler (water tube boiler)
7. Babcock and Wilcox Boiler and flow process
of flue gas and water during working
condition of the boiler.
Get knowledge about the construction of La- Study of La-Mont Boiler (water tube boiler)
8. Mont Boiler and flow process of flue gas and
water during working condition of the
boiler.
Can know the actual construction and Study the boiler mountings and accessories
9 working principal of different boiler
mounting and accessories.
10 Get overall knowledge about the layout of a Study of schematic layout of Steam Power Plant
power plant.
3.Rubrics for internal assessment of Heat Power Engg Lab (30 marks)

1 Awareness about the significance of particular test 15
2 Understanding working principle of machine 15
3 Preparation of experimental set up 20
4 Setting and operation 20
5 Observations and recording 10
6 Interpretation of result and conclusion 10
7 Answer to sample questions 5
8 Submission of report in time 5
Total 100
Reference Books:
Title of the Book Name of the Author(s) Name of the Publishers

Thermal Power Plant- Pre-Operational Activities Dipak K. Sarkar ELSEVIER
Power Plant Engineering. R.K. Rajput Laksmi Prakashani
Engineering Thermodynamics D.S.Kumar S.K. Kataria & Sons
A text book of Thermal Engineering. R. S. Khurmi S. Chand & Co.
A Course in Thermal Engineering. P. L. Ballaney Khanna Publishers


Code no.: ME(P)PC217 Total Marks: 100
Course Title: Industrial Production Technology-I Lab Examination Scheme:
Duration : 17 weeks ( 4 hours per week) (i) Internal Assessment: 60 Marks
Total practical class/week: 4 [Continuous assessment of
Credit: 2 class performance and
in time submission of
Assignments : 30 Marks
Viva Voce : 20 Marks
Class Attendance: 10 Marks]

[Assignment on the day of viva voce :20 marks
Pre requisite:
1. Knowledge of -I [Code No – ME(P)PC 207]

The theory, practical experiences and relevant soft skills associated with this subject are to be taught and implemented, so that
the student demonstrates the following industry oriented course outcomes associated with the above mentioned competency:
 Understand the fundamental concept of manufacturing and identify different manufacturing processes to be performed
for the given job.
 Prepare products using different metal forming processes.
 Prepare products using different casting processes.
 Assess and apply different metal joining processes to produce jobs.
 Knowledge of different parts of Press working machines and produce jobs involving different press working operations.
2. Practical Outcomes (PrOs):

The practical experiences associated with this subject are to be taught and implemented, so that the student demonstrates the
following industry oriented course outcomes associated with the above mentioned competency:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Identify basic manufacturing processes.
2. Understand the various methods of Smithy and forging.
3. Understand the various methods of casting.
4. Identify joining methods for fabrication.
5. Identify different Press machines.
Motor Skills:
1. Use smithy/forging equipment.
2. Use moulding machines.
3. Use different casting machines.
4. Use welding machines and equipment.
5. Operate different Press Machines
6. Knowledge of different Press working operations.
3. Suggested Assignments/Practical for Continuous Assessment:
The practical’s in this section are PrOs (i.e. subcomponents of COs) to be developed, implemented and assessed for the students
towards attainment of the competency.
Sl. No. Practical Outcomes (PrOs) Unit No. Hours

(Minm.)
01 Practice on making a solid wooden pattern as per given drawing. 2 04
02 Practice on making a mould by using a solid or split pattern as per given
2 04
drawing.
03 Study of different casting processes- die casting, centrifugal casting. 2 04
04 Study of different melting furnaces with special reference to Cupola. 2 02
05* Study of different equipment of Electric Arc Welding set-up or gas welding set-
up or electric resistance welding set-up, hand tools used, safety items used,
connection details, types of welding joints (Lap, Butt, Tee, Corner and Edge
3 04*
joints etc.), different welding positions (Horizontal, Vertical and Overhead
positions etc.) and practice on edge preparation, tag welding and stitch
welding.
06* Practice on making welding joint (lap joint or butt joint or tee joint or corner
3 04
joint) as per given drawing by utilizing available facilities of welding shop.
07 Practice on making a job on utility items like chain links, door rings, hooks etc.
3 04
as per given drawing by utilizing smithy or forging shop’s facilities.
08* Study of different tools and machines generally used in Smithy or Forging Shop
and practice on different basic Smithy or Forging operations such as Upsetting,
3 04
Drawing down, Setting down, Necking, Cutting, Bending, Fullering, Swaging,
Punching and Drifting etc.
09 Study of manufacturing components using Powder metallurgy techniques. 5 04
10 Study of different Press working machines 6 04
11* Practice on different Press working operations- Blanking, Punching etc. 6 04*
Note:
 A suggested list of PrOs is given in the above table. More such PrOs can be added to attain the COs and competency. A
judicial mix of minimum 06 or more practicals need to be performed out of which the practical marked as ‘*’ are
compulsory, so that the student reaches the desired level as generally required by the industry.

The ‘Process and Product’ related skills associated with each PrO are to be assessed according to a suggested sample given below:

01 Preparation of job drawing, selection of material, tool and estimation of 20
cutting parameters.
02 Set up of machine, tool and job. 15
03 Actual machine operation. 20
04 Inspection of job using measuring instruments. 15
05 Answer to questions on operations. 10
06 Submission of job and workshop report in time. 10
07 Safety precautions and good housekeeping 10
Total: 100
The above PrOs also compromise of the following social Skills / attitudes which are Affective Domain Outcomes (ADOs) that are
best developed through the laboratory / field based experiences:
 Maintain tools and equipments in good working condition.
 Handle the machine and tools with care.

Class attendance.(Minimum 60% attendance is required for eligibility in Semester Exam) 10
Suggested Scheme for End Semester Examination: [Total Marks: 40]

References:
No.
Elements of workshop S. K. Hajra Chowdhury, Bose, Media Promoters and
1
Technology – Volume I & II Roy Publishers limited, Mumbai,
2 B.S.Raghuwanshi
Manufacturing Technology - Volume I
& II
Delhi.
KALPAKJIAN & Pearson Education, New
SCHMID Delhi
6 DeGarmo Wiley
manufacturing
Volume I , II & III
Suggested Learning Websites:

https://nptel.ac.in
www.basicmechanicalengineering.com/lathe-machine-operations-basic-turning-
www.thelibraryofmanufacturing.com/forming-basics.html
www.themetalcasting.com/casting-process.html

Category: Summer Internship-I (4 weeks) after 2nd
Semester Semester: Third
(Same with Mechanical Engg.)
Code no.: SI201 Total Marks: 100
Course Title: Summer Internship after 2nd Semester Examination Scheme:
nd
Duration : 4 weeks ( After 2 semester) Internal Assessment: 60 Marks
Total lecture/practical class/week: 0 [Continuous assessment of
Credit: 1 performance on internship and
in time submission of
Report : 30 Marks
Viva Voce : 30 Marks]
External Assessment: 40 Marks

Pre requisite :
1. Knowledge of Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics, Engineering Mechanics and Computer Applications.
Suggested Internship Project Work in 3rd Semester on Chemistry

Project 1:
 Title - Qualitative detection of Arsenic in water.
 Objective – To detect the Arsenic from contaminated water.
 Related Theory - Arsenic in arsenite ( 𝑨𝒔𝑶−𝟑

𝟑 ) form is detected by adding zinc (Zn) granules and diluted acid ( H2SO4 / HCl) to
the contaminated water.
 Reagents Required – Zinc granules, Diluted H2SO4 / HCl acid.
 Apparatus Required – Conical or normal flask, Adaptor, Dropping funnel, HgCl 2 soaked paper.
 Procedure – The contaminated water is taken is taken into a conical or normal flask and few pieces of zinc granules are added
with it. Then a mouth adaptor is set at the top of the flask. To the top of the mouth adaptor, a dropping funnel is attached
through which diluted acid is added to the water contaminated by arsenic. Finally, HgCl2 soaked paper is introduced to the side
tube of adapter as shown in the experimental set-up.
Now, chemical reaction is started due to addition of diluted acid and hydrogen gas is produced.
This hydrogen gas converts arsenite (presents in contaminated water) to gaseous arsine (AsH3).
During escaping through side tube of adapter, gaseous arsine (AsH3) comes in contact with the HgCl2 soaked paper and
changes colour to yellow, then to brown or black in course of time. Thus qualitative detection of arsenic in water is
confirmed.
Gutzeit’s test
 Experimental Set-up
Project 2:
 Title - Determination of flash point, fire point of lubricants and its importance
 Objective – To determine the Flash point and Fire point of a specified lubricant.
 Related Theory –The flammability of lubricants is indicated by this experiment. The greater the flammability lower will be the
flash point.
 Apparatus and consumables required -

a) A Pensky-Martens flash point apparatus.
b) Thermometer of suitable range.
c) Test samples e.g., Castrol active 4T 20w-40 Flash point (ASTM D93) 2030C
Introduction: Lubricants are used in machineries of different sectors in order to reduce wear & tear, loss of energy in the form of
local heating, maintenance cost, sometime as a coolant and sealant. To select the proper lubricant for an operation we have to
measure the various parameters of the lubricant. One of the important parameter of liquid & semi-solid lubricant is flash point
and fire point.
What is flash point and fire point?
Flash point is the minimum temperature at which the liquid lubricant must be heated before its vapor state, when mixed with air
will ignite momentarily if a tiny flame is brought in close proximity to it. Whereas Fire point is the temperature at which the vapor
lubricant continues to burn for at least for 5 sec. under certain specified condition.
It is to be remembered that the flash point is not to be confused with the auto ignition temperature (AIT), which is the temperature
at which the oil vapors will ignite spontaneously without an ignition source.
 Procedure –
These are determined either by closed cup Pensky Martens apparatus (ASTM D 93) or Open cup Cleveland apparatus (ASTM D 92).
The open cup flash point (temperature) value is usually a few degrees greater than the closed cup flash point. The former method
gives more accurate result.
The experimental procedure for determination of flash & fire point by Penskey Martens apparatus involves the following steps:
1. At first, the oil cup is to be filled with the lubricating oil which is to be tested upto the mark.
2. Then top cover is to be fixed. The top cover itself comprises of the stirring device, the thermometer and the flame
exposure device.
3. Now, the test flame is to be lighted and adjusted to about 4 mm in diameter.
4. Then the apparatus is to be heated by Bunsen burner slowly at the rate of 5o to 6oC per minute while the stirrer is to be
rotated approximately 60 rpm.
5. At every 1oC rise in temperature, the test flame is introduced for about 2 seconds into the oil vapor. This is done by
operating the shutter. By rotating the knob, the test flame is lowered and the shutter opens. The moment knob is
released, the test flame springs back to its original position and the shutter is closed.
6. The flash point is to be noted when the test flame causes a flash in the interior of the cup. Same steps are to be repeated
for three times to have a constant value or mean value.
7. Further, the test oil is to be heated at the rate of 10C rises in temperature per minute and continued by applying the test
flame as stated in point 5.
8. The temperature at which the vapor of the lubricant would give a clear and distinct blue flash sustained for at least five
seconds is to be recorded as the fire point of the lubricant.
 Experimental Set-up
Observations:
Flash point of lubricant
Sl. No. Flash Point (0C) Mean value of Flash Point
Fire point of lubricant
Sl. No. Fire point (0C) Mean value of Fire Point

1
3
Importance of flash point & fire point:
It gives the idea about the maximum temperature below which the lubricant can be applied without fire hazards.
 It is used as the means of identification of specific lubricant.
 It gives the idea for safe transportation and storing of the lubricants.
 For detection of contamination in the lubricating oil.
……………………………………………………………………………………………
Suggested Internship Project Work in 3rd Semester on Engineering Mechanics
Title of the Project:

Determination of maximum efficiency and maximum mechanical advantage graphically of a given simple lifting
machine.
Prerequisite:
1. Type and specification of simple lifting machine will be known to the students so that they can identify or calculate
the velocity ratio of the machine.
2. Law of the same lifting machine has to be provided to the students by the concern guiding teacher.
Objective:
1. To determine the maximum efficiency and maximum velocity ratio of the given simple lifting machine graphically.
2. Comparison of the values of maximum efficiency and maximum velocity ratio as obtained in graphical method with
the values of the same as obtained by analytical calculations.
Theory:
Theory of such project work should contain the following explanations:
1. Introduction.
2. Explanation of simple lifting machine.
3. Explanation of mechanical advantage of simple lifting machine and its significance.
4. Explanation of velocity ratio of simple lifting machine and its significance.
5. Explanation of efficiency of simple lifting machine and its significance.
6. Derivation of interrelation among efficiency, mechanical advantage and velocity ratio of simple lifting machine.
7. Explanation of law of simple lifting machine.
8. Derivation of maximum efficiency and maximum mechanical advantage from law of simple lifting machine.
Procedure:
1. Calculate or identify the velocity ratio of the given simple lifting machine.
2. Calculate maximum efficiency and maximum mechanical advantage of the given simple lifting machine analytically.
3. Prepare a wide set of values of effort applied and corresponding load lifted from given law of simple lifting machine
and tabulate them in a suitable table.
4. Calculate efficiency and mechanical advantage for each set of effort applied and load lifted and tabulate them in the
above mentioned table.
5. Plot the curve of efficiency verses load lifted in a suitable graph paper and identify the maximum efficiency from the
plotted curve.
6. Plot the curve of mechanical advantage verses load lifted in a suitable graph paper and identify the maximum
mechanical advantage from the plotted curve.
7. Compare the values of maximum efficiency and maximum mechanical advantage as obtained graphically with the
values of the same obtained analytically.
Calculation:
1. Calculate the velocity ratio of the given simple lifting machine.
2. Calculate maximum efficiency and maximum mechanical advantage of the given simple lifting machine analytically.
3. Assume effort applied and calculate corresponding load lifted by using given law of simple lifting machine.
4. Calculate mechanical advantage and efficiency for each set of effort applied and load lifted values.
Suggested Table:
Sl. Effort Load Lifted Velocity Mechanical Efficiency

No. Applied Ratio Advantage
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Graph Plotting:
Result:
Parameters of Simple Lifting Machine Graphically Obtained Analytically Obtained

Maximum Mechanical Advantage
Maximum Efficiency
Conclusion:
Concluding statement with justification.
============
West Bengal State Council of Technical, Vocational Education and
Skill Development
Technical Education Division

[Diploma in Engineering & Technology]
Syllabus
of
Diploma in
Medical Laboratory Technology
[MLT]
Revised
2022
West Bengal State Council of Technical, Vocational Education and Skill Development
Syllabus of Human Anatomy & Physiology
Course Introduction:
Program: Medical Laboratory Technology Semester: 3rd

Course Title: Human Anatomy & Physiology Course Code: MLTPC301
Course Category: Theory; Program Core Full Marks & Duration: 100 ; 15 + 2 Weeks
Credit: 3 Contact Hr./Week L-3: T-0 : P-0
Course Objective:
Sr. No Course Objective

1 To provide overview of the human body structure and basic knowledge of functions of the different
organs & system in the human body.
2 The content of the subject provides the basic knowledge of different physiological parameters.
3 To apply the knowledge of human Anatomy & Physiology in medical laboratory technology and as
well as biomedical engineering field.
Course Content:
Unit Topic Hrs.

1 An Overview of Anatomy & Physiology: Topics of Anatomy – introduction to Regional, 3
Systemic, Surface and Microscopic anatomy. Levels of Structural Organization; Anatomical
Position, Anatomical Planes & sections, Anatomical Terms - Directional terms, Regional terms;
Body cavities & Membranes; Abdominopelvic regions and quadrants; Other body cavities.
Topics of Physiology, Survival Needs -Nutrients, oxygen, water, normal body temperature,
Homeostasis, Introduction to organ & System.
2 Cells and Tissues: Cell, structure and function of cells, types of cell, cell shape, organelles & 4
Functions; Structure of Cell membrane; Tissues - Types, Structure, Function , Distribution;
3 Bones and Human Skeleton: Bone -Classification of Bones; Function of bones, Bone 7
Structure - Gross anatomy (bone marking and structure) and Microscopic anatomy - Compact
bone, spongy bone; Chemical composition of Bone; Fracture, Repairing of bone;
Human Skeleton - Axial and Appendicular skeleton; Skull; Vertebral Column; Thorax,
Pectoral Girdle and Upper limb; Pelvic Girdle and lower limb;
Joints: joints; Classification of Joints; Fibrous joints, Cartilaginous joints and Synovial Joints
with example
4 Muscles and Nervous System: Muscle tissue; function of muscle; classification with example, 6
Gross anatomy of Skeletal muscle; Microscopic anatomy of muscle; Physiology of muscle -
Generation of Action potential,
Overview of Nervous system; Organization of the Nervous system - CNS, PNS; Neurons -
Structure, Classification, Function; Regions and organization of Brain, Gross anatomy and
protection of Spinal Cord; Cranial nerves; ANS anatomy; Neurophysiology, Resting Membrane
potential, Action potential, Nerve impulse Transmission,
5 Respiratory System: Overview of respiratory system, Lungs, Mechanism of Breathing, 4
external & internal respiration, Lung Compliance, Respiratory Volumes, Respiratory capacities,
Composition of Alveolar gas, Transport of Respiratory gases by blood, Respiration Rate
Syllabus of Diploma in Medical Laboratory Technology, 3rd Semester @ 2021 Page 1 of 20

6 Digestive System: Overview of digestive system; Structure and functions of different parts and 4
accessory organs of digestive system, Process of digestion, absorption and metabolism
7 Cardiovascular System and Lymphatic System: Overview of cardiovascular system, 4
Structure of heart, Electrophysiology of heart, overview of Composition & function of blood,
Overview of blood circulation - Systemic & pulmonary; Systemic blood pressure, HR, Cardiac
output. Structure and functions of lymph system.
8 Excretory system: Process of excretion, Overview of Urinary system, Kidney, Nephron , 3
Mechanism of Urine formation, Diuretic, Renal Clearance, Urinary Bladder
9 Endocrine System: Overview of Endocrine system, Hormones, Major Endocrine Organs- 3

Overview of Pituitary Gland, Thyroid gland, Parathyroid glands, Adrenal glands, Pancreas-
Glucagon, insulin, Gonads, Thymus; Other hormones.
10 Reproductive System: Structure and function of different parts of reproductive system of male 3
and female. Menstruation, ovulation, reproduction, menopause.
11 Sense Organs: Taste and Smell, The Eye and Vision – Structure of Eyeball, internal chambers 4
and fluids, Overview of physiology of vision, Retina, Photoreception, light and Dark
adaptation, Ear- Overview of structure of ear & Physiology of hearing,
Total Teaching Hrs. : (3 hrs. x 15 Weeks) 45
Assessment : (3hrs. x 2 Weeks) 06
Total: (3hrs. x 17 Weeks) 51
Course Outcomes (Cos):
COs Students would be able to

CO1 State the anatomical terminology
CO2 Demonstrate the human skeleton system, bones and joints.
CO3 Explain the different systems with organs and their functions
CO4 Identify the different sense organs and their physiology.
End Semester Exam:
End Semester Exam Scheme (Weightage 60 %, FM – 60):

Sr Question Type Group Unit No of question No of question to Allotted Total Time
No No to be Set be Answered Marks Marks
1 Objective Type: - All 35 30 1 x 30 30
MCQ/ Fill-in-the
blanks
2 Short Answer Type: - All 8 5 2x5 10
3 Subjective Type: A 1,2,3 3 Any Four taking at 5x4 20
B 4,5,6,7 3 least One from
C 8, 9, 3 each group
10,11
Total: 60 Hrs.

Reference Book:
Sr No Book Author Publisher

1 Human Anatomy & Physiology Elaine N Marieb Pearson
2 Anatomy & Physiology Rose & Willson
3 Human Anatomy A.K. Dutta
4 Anatomy A.Sahanuiza
5 Human Physiology C.C. Chatterjee Medical Allied Agency
6 Medical Physiology Guyton & Hall Elsevier
7 Medical Physiology Berman & Mahapatra C.B. International
--------------x-----------
Syllabus of Human Anatomy & Physiology Lab.

Course Title: Human Anatomy & Physiology Lab. Course Code: MLTPC301P
Course Category: Sessional; Program Core Full Marks & Duration: 100 ; 15 + 2 Weeks
Credit: 1 Contact Hr./Week L-0: T-0: P-2
Course Objective:

1 To determination of anatomical position & plane, anatomical terminology
2 To identify the Human Skeleton, bones & joints
3 To draw different systemic anatomy and identification of different organs with sketch.
Course Details:
Expt. No Experiment Hrs.

1 Determination of Anatomical Position & Plane, Anatomical terms,
2 Determination of body cavities & Abdominopelvic regions & quadrants
3 Identification of Human Skeleton
4 Identification of bones of human skull
5 Identification of bones of human vertebral column and thorax
6 Identification of bones of human pectoral girdle & upper limbs, pelvic girdle & lower
limbs
7 Identification of different types of joints
8 Identification of different muscles
9 Identification of different parts of the circulatory system
10 Identification of different parts of the respiratory system
11 Identification of different parts of the digestive system
12 Identification of different parts of endocrine and reproductive system

13 Identification of different parts of excretory system

14 Identification of different parts of nervous system
15 Identification of different parts of sensory organs

CO1 Demonstrate the anatomical position, plane and terms
CO2 Identify the human skeleton, bones, joints
CO3 Draw the different systems and organs with their functions.
-------------- x -----------
Syllabus of Hematology & Body Fluids

Course Title: Hematology & Body Fluids Course Code: MLTPC302
Course Objective:

1 To study the blood composition & function and other body fluids.
2 To study the different hematological tests for diagnosis.
3 To study the pathological tests of urine, CSF & semen for diagnosis.
4 To apply the knowledge of hematology in biomedical Instrumentation
Course Details:
Unit Topic Hrs.

1 Blood & its collection: Introduction to hematology & other body fluids. Blood definition, 5
Composition & function of blood, Blood Plasma, Source and function of Plasma proteins,
formed elements, Collection of blood, Anticoagulants – EDTA, Tri-sodium citrate, Oxalates,
Sodium fluoride, Heparin (Uses and disadvantages)
2 Erythrocytes: Erythrocytes- Structural characteristic, Hemoglobin- structure and function, 5
Function of Erythrocytes, Production of Erythrocytes, Fate and Destruction of Erythrocytes,
Erythrocyte disorders- Anemia, Low hemoglobin, Abnormal hemoglobin, Thalassemias,

sickle-cell anemia; Counting Chamber, Total count of RBC, Estimation of Hb, ESR, PCV,
MCV,MCH, MCHC, Color Index,
3 Leucocytes And Platelets: Leucocytes- Types and their structural characteristic, production 7
of WBC, Function of WBC, DC, Total count of WBC, Leukocytosis; Platelet –
Characteristic, Function of Platelet, Production of Platelet, Coagulation Steps, Coagulation
factors, Total count of platelet, BT, CT, P time,
4 Blood Group & Blood Banking: Function of blood bank, Blood collection & Storage for 4
Blood banking, Tests: Blood grouping, Rh factor, cross matching & other test, Blood
Transfusion, Blood components and anti-coagulants (CPDA, CPD etc.)
5 CSF: Transudate & Exudate, Source of CSF, Composition of CSF, Indication for collection of 3
CSF, Meningitis, Collection of CSF, Physical, Microscopical and Chemical examinations
6 Urine: Collection and Preservation of Urine, Physical, Chemical and Microscopical 3
examination.
7 Semen Analysis: Collection of Semen, Physical & Chemical examination- Volume, 3
Viscosity, Relation; Microscopical Examination-Sperm Morphology, Sperm count,
Motility
Total Teaching Hrs. : ( 2 hrs. x 15 Weeks) 30
Assessment : ( 2 hrs. x 2 Weeks) 04
Total: ( 2 hrs. x 17 Weeks) 34

CO1 State the composition, function and collection of blood.
CO2 Explain the different types of blood cells and their structure and clinical significance.
CO3 Demonstrate the different tests for diagnosis.
CO4 Explain the CSF, Urine and semen analysis.
End Semester Exam:

MCQ/ Fill-in-the
blanks
3 Subjective Type: A 1,2,3 4 Any Four taking at 5x4 20
B 4, 5 2 least One from
C 6, 7 3 each group
Total: 60 Hrs.

Reference Book:

1 Medical Laboratory Technology Rambik Sood
2 Medical Laboratory Technology V. H. Talib C.B.S
Medical Laboratory Technology Kanai Lal Mukherjee Churchill Living Stone
3 Practical Pathology P. Chakraborty & New Central Book
Gargi Chakraborty
4 Human Anatomy & Physiology Elaine N Marieb Pearson
5 Medical Physiology Berman & Mahapatra C.B. International
--------------x-----------
Syllabus of Hematology & Body Fluids Lab.

Course Title: Hematology & Body Fluids Lab. Course Code: MLTPC302P
Credit: 1 Contact Hr./Week P-2
Course Objective:

1 To handle the instrument use in hematology laboratory.
2 To perform routine blood test and interpret the result
3 To perform the CSF, Urine and semen analysis for diagnosis.
Course Details:
Expt. No Experiment/ Job Hrs.

1 Introduction to Hematology Laboratory & Instruments
2 Collection of blood and separation of serum & plasma
2 Estimation of Hemoglobin
3 Estimation of ESR
4 Estimation of Total Count of RBC
5 Estimation of PCV, MCV, MCH, MCHC, Color index
6 Estimation of Total Count of WBC
7 Differential Count of WBC
8 Estimation of Total Count of Platelet
9 Determination of blood group(ABO) & Rh factor
10 Determination of BT,CT
11 Determination of PT

12 Collection of Urine & Routine Examination

13 Collection of semen & analysis (Physical,Chemical & Microscopical Examination)
14 Demonstration of collection of CSF.
15 CSF Analysis
Course Outcomes (COs):

CO1 Identify the instrument use in hematology laboratory.
CO2 Estimate the different clinical parameter of blood (hematological tests) with interpretation
CO3 Demonstrate collection of CSF and its examination
CO4 Analyze urine, semen for clinical diagnosis.
-------- x ------
Syllabus of Bio-Medical Instrumentation-I

Course Title: Bio-Medical Instrumentation-I Course Code: MLTPC303
Course Objective:

1 To provide the basic knowledge of instrumentation system and introduction to biomedical
instrumentation.
2 To develop the fundamental concept of bio-medical instrumentation.
3 To be familiar with the bio-potential & different electrodes for bio-medical application.
4 To know the working principle of transducers & sensors and their applications.
5 To apply the knowledge of transducer, sensors and bio-sensor in biomedical instrumentation.
Course Content:
Unit Topic Hrs.

1 Fundamental of Medical Instrumentation: Fundamental of Instrumentation, Different types 07
of Medical instrument, General Block diagram of Biomedical Instrumentation system -
Measurand, Transducer/Sensor, Signal conditioner, Display system, Alarm , data storage, data

Transmission, Performance requirements of Medical Instrumentation System,

2 Bio-electric Potential and Bio-electrodes: Bio-potential- Resting membrane potential, Action 12
potential, Sources of Bio-signals, Electrode - Function of Electrodes, Electrode Metals, General
Classification of bio-electrodes, Surface electrode, Needle electrodes, Microelectrodes and their
uses, Electrode-Tissue Interface, Metal-Electrolyte & Electrolyte- tissue interface, Polarization,
Skin Contact Impedance, Introduction to different Bio-signals,
3 Bio-Transducer: Transducer - Classification of Transducers, Bio-transducer, Factors for Bio- 20
transducer, Overview of Transducer Characteristics: Static Characteristics- Accuracy,
Precision, Resolution, Sensitivity, Drift, Linearity, Threshold, Hysteresis, Span, Dynamic
Characteristic - Zero-order system, First-order-system, Displacement, Position and Motion
Transducer : Working & uses of Potentiometric, Variable Capacitive, variable Inductive
transducer, LVDT; Pressure Transducer: LVDT pressure Transducer, Strain Gauge; Transducer
for body temperature: Thermocouple, Electrical resistance Thermometer, Thermistors, P-N
junction, Chemical thermometry; Photoelectric Transducers: Photovoltaic Cell, Photo emissive
cells, Piezoelectric transducer,
4 Sensor: Optical fiber sensor: structure & Working principle of optical fiber, Types of Optical 06
fiber Sensors - Photometric sensors, Physical sensor, chemical Sensors; Biosensors:
introduction, Dissolved O2 Sensor and their application, Glucose Sensor, pH Sensor,
COs At end of the course, students would be able to

CO1 Explain the different types of medical instruments, basic block-diagram of the bio-medical
instrumentation system and its functional components.
CO2 Demonstrate the bio-potential and electrodes used in medical instruments.
CO3 Explain working principle, construction of different transducers & sensor and their application in
medical instrumentation.
CO4 State the application of optical fiber sensor and bio-sensor in medical field.
End Semester Exam:

MCQ/ Fill-in-the
blanks
3 Subjective Type: A 1 3 Any Four taking at 5x4 20
B 2 3 least One from
C 3, 4 3 each group
Total: 60 Hrs.

Reference Book:

1 Hand book of Biomedical Instrumentation R. S. Khandpur Tata Mc
2 Biomedical Instrumentation & Measurements Cromwell Pearson
3 Principle of Medical Electronic & Biomedical C Raja Rao & S K Guha
Instrumentation
4 Electrical & Electronics Measurement & A K Sawhney Dhanpat Rai
Instrumentation
5 Electronics Instrumentation H S Kalsi Tata Mc
6 Medical Instrument J. G. Webster
--------------x-----------
Syllabus of Bio-Medical Instrumentation-I Lab.

Course Title: Bio-Medical Instrumentation-I Lab. Course Code: MLTPC303
Course Objective:

1 To be familiar with different types of electrodes used in bio-medical instrument & their application.
2 To study and verify the working principle of transducers & sensors.
Course Content:

1 Study of ECG electrodes & their application.
2 Study of EEG electrodes & their application
3 Study of EMG electrodes & their application.
4 Verify the working of potentiometric transducer & its application.
5 Verify the working of capacitive transducer & their application
6 Verify the working of LVDT & its application
7 Verify the working of strain gauge & its application
8 Verify the working of temperature sensor: Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD)/
Thermistor & its application.
9 Verify the working of temperature sensor: Semiconductor based IC & its application.
10 Verify the working of piezo-electric transducer & its application
11 Verify the working of optical fiber & its application
12 Verify the working of O2 Sensor & its application
13 Measurement of pH using pH Sensor.

14 Measurement of blood glucose using glucose sensor.


CO1 Identify the different types of electrodes used in bio-medical instrument.
CO2 Demonstrate the working and construction of different types of transducers & sensors
used in medical instruments.
CO3 Measure physical & chemical parameter.
CO4 Apply the transducer & sensor for designing a medical instrumentation.
-------- x ------
Syllabus of Analog Electronics

Course Title: Analog Electronics Course Code: MLTPC304
Course Objective:

1 To acquire the basic knowledge of transistor biasing & stabilization
2 To know the different application of BJT
3 To be familiar with OPAMP, 555 timer IC and their applications
4 To be familiar with voltage regulator and power supply
Course Content:
Unit Topic Hrs.

1 Transistor Biasing & Amplifier Circuits: Biasing, need for bias stabilization, Selection of 8
operating point, Biasing methods (emitter to base bias, fixed bias, collector to base bias, self-
bias), dc load line. Stability & bias compensation: only concepts Thermal run away & its
prevention, heat sinks. Multistage amplifiers- cascading of amplifiers (RC coupled CE
configuration only), their gain, frequency response, input & output impedance, gain-bandwidth
characteristics, distortion in amplifier: basic concepts & no deduction.
Power amplifier: Class A, B, AB & C operation (only basic concepts, & graph). Tuned
Amplifier

2 Feedback network & Oscillators: Feedback principle- positive & negative feedback concepts, 5
amplifier without & with feedback, effect of negative feedback in amplifier gain, noise,
distortion, input & output resistance. Oscillator: Classification of oscillators, principle of
oscillation, damped & un-damped oscillation, use of positive feedback, Barkhausen criterion
for oscillation. Different oscillator circuits: L-C tuned collector oscillator, R-C phase shift
oscillator, Wien bridge oscillator, Hartley oscillator: only ckt. & relevant equations
3 Differential amplifier: Basic principle, common mode rejection ratio in differential 3
amplifier, operation with differential input, operation with common mode signal, single ended
& double ended differential amplifier. Constant current replacement for emitter resistance, dc
level shifter, complementary output stage.
4 Operational amplifier circuit: Op-amp configurations (building blocks), op-amp parameters, 8
characteristics of an ideal op-amp. Application of op-amp as – inverting amplifier, non-
inverting amplifier, adder, subtractor, differentiator, integrator, unity gain buffer, comparator,
sample & hold circuit, Logarithmic Amplifier, Schmitt trigger, instrumentation amplifier, IC
741 / OP 07 pin diagram.
Active Filters: High pass, Low pass , Band pass & Band reject filters- only circuit description
& operation (no deduction)
5 Timer Circuits : Principle of operation of electronic timer - Functional description of internal 2
blocks of timer IC555 - Use of 555 timers in nonstable and astable mode - Principle of
operation of digital timer
6 Voltage Regulator & Power Supply: Transistorised Voltage Regulator – Function of bleeder 4
resistor-Series and shunt regulator using transistor-OP-Amp Regulator-IC Voltage Regulators
Three terminal IC voltage Regulator- Concept of switch mode power supply- Block schematic
description of uninterrupted power supply.


CO1 Discuss the basic knowledge on various applications of BJT
CO2 Concept on the construction of linear ICs like Op-Amp and IC 555 timer
CO3 Design various real time circuits with analog devices
CO4 Explain the working principle of different electronic instruments
End Semester Exam:

MCQ/ Fill-in-the
blanks


3 Subjective Type: A 1,2, 3 Any Four taking at 5x4 20
B 3,4 3 least One from
C 5,6 3 each group
Total: 60 Hrs.
Reference Book:

1 Electronic Principles Malvino Tata McGraw-Hill
2 Electronic Devices and Circuits Boylestad & Nashalsky Prentice
Hall of India
3 Electronic Devices and Circuits S. Salivanan Tata McGraw-Hill
4 Electronic Devices and Circuits J.B. Gupta S.K. Kataria & Sons
5 Electronic Devices and Circuits Millman & Halkias Tata McGraw-Hill
6 Electronic Fundamentals and Applications Chattopadhyay & Rakhshit New Age International
-------------- x -----------
Syllabus of Analog Electronics Lab.

Course Title: Analog Electronics Lab. Course Code: MLTPC304P
Course Objective:

1 To be familiar with the Transistor biasing and Amplifier
2 To acquire the basic knowledge of Oscillator
3 To be familiar with the OPAMP, 555 IC and their Application
Course Details:
Course Content of Biomedical Instrumentation-I Lab

1 Study of input & output characteristics of BJT
2 Study of different biasing methods and draw the dc load line, determine the Q point
3 Study of frequency response of R-C coupled amplifier
4 Study of Wien bridge oscillator and R-C phase shift oscillator
5 Use of op-amp as – Non-inverting amplifier, Inverting amplifier, Buffer, Adder,
Differentiator, Integrator
6 Study of Triangular wave generator using Op-Amp

7 Study of Schmitt Trigger Circuit using Op-Amp

8 Study of active filters:- a) High pass b) Low pass c) Band pass d) Band reject
9 Study of Instrumentation amplifier using Op-Amp
10 Study the characteristics of IC555 timer connected as: (a) astable multi-vibrator; (b)
mono-stable multivibrator
11 Study of IC operated voltage regulator

CO1 Study of various characteristics and parameters of BJT, Op-amp, IC555 timer
CO2 Construct various type of amplifiers and oscillators using BJT
CO3 Construct various application based circuits using Op-amp and IC555 timer
CO4 Construct IC operated voltage regulator
----------- x -------
Syllabus of Electrical & Electronics Measurement

Course Title: Electrical & Electronics Measurement Course Code: MLTPC305
Course Objective:

1 To develop the fundamental concept of measurement
To apply the basic circuit theorem to find the current, voltage in a circuit.
2 To understand the characteristics, construction and working principles of different measuring
instruments
3 To use relevant measuring instrument in different electrical/electronic applications.
Course Content:
Unit Topic Details Hrs.

1 Measurement Fundamentals: Basic measurement system-components. Concept of 4
Instruments. Static and dynamic characteristics of Instruments. Role of Units in measurements
and different types of units – Definition of Errors and type of errors – Definition of Primary

and Secondary Standards – Concept of Calibration.

2 Basic Circuit Theorem: Kirchhoff’s Law (KCL, KVL), Thevenin’s, Norton’s, Super position 3
theorem and problems.
3 Permanent Magnet Moving Coil Meter: Theory of operation, working principle and 2
construction of PMMC. Measurement of voltage, current and resistance. Loading effect,
extension of range.
4 Measurement of Voltage, Current, Energy & Power: Principle of rectifier type instrument – 2
Advantages and limitations. Thermocouple type instruments. Construction and working
principle of electrodynamics wattmeter
5 Electronic Voltmeter & Multi Meter: Advantages of electronic voltmeter over ordinary 2
voltmeter. Different types of Digital Multi Meter: Integration and successive approximation
type.
6 Impedance Bridge & Q-Meter: DC Wheatstone Bridge and its application – AC bridge- 4
balance –Detection and source of excitation – Maxwell’s induction bridge – Hay’s bridge –
DeSauty bridge-Anderson bridge– Wien Bridge. Basic principle of Q-Meter and its working
circuit. Basic principle and operation of RLC meter
7 Cathode Ray Oscilloscope: Block diagram of CRO, constructional features of CRT and 3
principle of operation. Block schematic description of digital storage oscilloscope.
Measurement of amplitude, frequency, time period by CRO
8 Time & Frequency Measurement: Block schematic description of digital frequency counter. 3
Measurement of frequency by heterodyne method. Measurement of frequency and time period.
9 Signal Generator: Block schematic descriptions, specifications and uses of: Audio & Radio 2
Frequency Signal Generator – Function Generator
10 RF Power Measurement: Bolometer – Method of power measurement – Balance Bridge 2
Bolometer
11 Distortion & Wave Analysis: Basic working principle of Heterodyne Wave Analyzer, 3
Harmonic Distortion Analyzer.
Cos At end of the course, students would be able to

CO1 Explain the components, characteristics and working of a basic measurement system and measuring
Instruments
CO2 Demonstrate the use of different types of measuring instruments for measuring voltage, current,
power, time, frequency, Frequency Spectrum, Distortion & Wave Analysis
CO3 Sate uses of different types of electrical instruments for measuring various ranges of electrical
parameters.
CO4 Analyze the wave.

End Semester Exam:

MCQ/ Fill-in-the
blanks
3 Subjective Type: A 1,2,3,4, 3 Any Four taking 5x4 20
B 5,6,7,8 3 at least One from
C 9,10,11 3 each group
Total: 60 Hrs.
Reference Book:

1 Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements H.S. Kalsi Mc Graw Hill
2 A Course In Electrical And Electronic A.K. Sawhney Dhanpat Rai & Co
Measurements And Instrumentation
3 Modern Electronics Instrumentation & Helfrick & Cooper PHI
Measurement technique
4 Electrical and Electronic Measurement and R.K. Rajput S.Chand and Co.
Instrumentation
5 Electrical & Electronic Measurement Umesh Singha Satya Pracashan
&Instrumentation
6 Electrical Technology B. L. Theresa
--------------x-----------
Syllabus of Electrical & Electronics Measurement Lab.

Course Title: Electrical & Electronics Measurement Course Code: MLTPC305P
Lab.
Course Objective:

1 Measure basic electrical parameters using measuring instruments
2 Identify analog and digital measuring instruments
3 Use relevant measuring instrument in different electrical/electronic applications

Course Content:

1 Measurement of resistance, capacitance using multimeter.
2 Basic Measurement of Voltage & current in the circuit using Multimeter
3 Verification of KCL & KVL
4 Verification of Thevenin’s theorem.
5 Verification of Norton’s theorem.
6 Measurement of frequency by CRO
7 Measurement of time interval of a Waveform and phase shift between waveforms by CRO
8 Study of DC Voltmeter
9 Study of CRT
10 Measurement of unknown inductance by Hay’s Bridge
11 Measurement of unknown inductance by Anderson Bridge
12 Measurement of unknown capacitance by De Sauty bridge
13 Measurement of unknown frequency by Wein Bridge

CO1 Identify the different measuring instruments and their use.
CO2 Measure the voltage, current, resistance, capacitance etc using multimeter/ measuring instruments
CO3 Apply different bridge circuit to measure unknown capacitance, inductance etc.
CO4 Analyze unknown frequency, amplitude and waveform phase shift by CRO/DSO
--------- x ----------
Syllabus of Programming in C

Course Title: Electrical & Electronics Measurement Course Code: MLTPC306

Course Objective:

1 To impart adequate knowledge on the need of programming languages and problem solving
techniques
2 To provide exposure to problem-solving through C programming.
3 To apply the Programming knowledge in project work.
Course Details:
Unit Topic Hrs.

1 Introduction to Computer Programming: Concept of programming, Overview of different 2
programming languages, Concept of Algorithm and flow chart, Language Translators,
compiler,
2 Fundamental of C Language: Back ground of C, Steps of C Program Execution, Process of 3
compiling and running a C program, Compiling and Linking, Basic structure of C program,
Character set, Keywords, Identifier, Constant, Header file, Library functions,
3 Data types & Variable: Data types and their size, Variable, Declaration of variable, 3
Operators, Expression, Operator precedence and associatively, Type Conversion
4 Input/output Functions and statements: scanf(), printf(), Formatted i/o function, Escape 3
Sequences, Assignment statement, Writing user-friendly program, Character Input/output
functions - getchar(), putchar(), getch(), putch(), getche(), gets(), puts(),clrscr(),
5 Control Statements: Decision making and branching : if, if-else, Nested if-else statements 3
with example, goto and break statement, Switch-case statements with example, Loop control
structure: Loop control statements, for Loop,Nested for along with Examples, while loop, do-
while Loop with Example, Comparison of Loop control structures,
6 Array and String: Array, one-dimensional and their declaration, initialization and access 5
values, two- dimensional array their declaration, initialization and access values, Programs
using array. String: String, String manipulation functions - strlen(), strcpy(), strcat(), strcmp(),
Reading/writing strings,
7 Pointer: Concept of pointer, pointer declaration and initialization, accessing variables through 3
pointer, pointer and array.
8 User-defined Function: Concept of User-defined function, Parameter passing techniques; 3
Calling function , Called function, Recursive function, Scope and lifetime of variables in
functions, difference between user-defined and library function, Function call: call by value
and call by
reference
9 Structure and Union: Concept of structure, structure members, structure variable, 3
Declaration and Initialization of structure, Union, Declaration and initialization of union,
difference between structure & union,
10 Overview of File handling: Concept of file handling in C, Different types of files, command 2
line arguments, file handling functions,
Assessment : (2 hrs. x 2 Weeks) 04
Total: (2 hrs. x 17 Weeks) 34

COs At end of the course, students would be able to

CO1 Identify basic elements of C programming structures like data types, expressions, control
statements, various simple functions and in view of using them in problem solving.
CO2 Apply various operations on derived data types like arrays and strings in problem solving.
CO3 Design and Implement of modular Programming and memory management using pointers.
CO4 Implement user defined data structures used in specific applications.
End Semester Exam:

MCQ/ Fill-in-the
blanks
3 Subjective Type: A 1,2,3,4 3 Any Four taking 5x4 20
B 5,6,7 3 at least One from
C 8,9,10 3 each group
Total: 60 Hrs.
Reference Book:

1 Programming with C T Joyprovoon Vikash Publishing house
2 Programming in ANCI Balaguruswami Tata Mc
3 Let us C Y. Kanetkar
4 Programming with c Byron Gottfried
--------------x-----------
Syllabus of Programming in C Lab.

Course Title: Programming C & C++ Lab. Course Code: MLTPC306P

Course Objective:

1 To develop the computer programming concept and fundamental of C language
2 To write programs in C to solve the problems.
3 To apply the knowledge of C programming in project work.
Course Content:

1 To execute a sample C program to study the basic structure of C program.
2 To write program using Arithmetic, Relational, Logical and Assignment operators
3 To write program to implement increment & decrement operators and to find the greatest
between two numbers using conditional operator.
4 To evaluate an expression to study operator precedence and associativity and to write a
program using casting a value.
5 To use formatted scanf ( ) and printf( ) functions for different types of data.
6 To find the roots of a quadratic equation. Find the greatest of three numbers using IF –
ELSE and IF -ELSE IF statements.
7 Write a program and run using for loop.
8 Write a program and run using while loop.
9 Write a program and run using do-while loop.
10 Write a program and run using single dimensional array.
11 Write a program and run using multi-dimensional array.
12 Write a program and run using Structure and Union
13 Write a program and run using pointer
14 Write a program and run using user-defined function.
15 Write a program and run using user-defined function, call-by value and Call by reference
16 Write a program and run to open, create, edit, close the file

CO1 Execute a sample C program.
CO2 Execute a C program to solve a problem
CO3 Implement Programs with function, pointers and arrays, perform pointer arithmetic, and use the
pre-processor
CO4 Design programs that perform operations using derived data types
--------------x-----------

Note: Internship
I: Internship may be duration of 2- 4 weeks at Hospital/Diagnostic Centre/Industry.
1) 60% (Internal) will be assessed by the Institute, based on Internship Report, Assignment and Viva-Voce.
2) 40% marks (External), will be assessed during internship by the concern authority of the Institute/ hospital/ Industry etc.
where students will go for their Internship based on performance, attendance, report etc.
Evaluation Scheme of Theory Courses:
Examination Scheme
Course Internal Assessment (40 Marks) External Assessment (60 Marks) Full Marks
Mid Sem.Test Quiz / Assignment Attendance End Semester Exam (Council)
Theory 20 10 10 60 100
Pass Marks: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (pass marks) in both Internal assessment
and External separately.
Evaluation Scheme of Sessional Courses:
Examination Scheme
Continuous Internal Assessment (60 Marks) External Assessment (40 Marks)
Course Perfor Assignment (30) Assignment Viva-Voce
mance Assign Viva- Lab Attendance (On day of External (Before Board of
(20) ment Voce report (10) sessional) Examiners with Lab
Report)
Sessional 20 10 10 10 10 20 20
Pass Criterion: Students have to obtain at least 40% marks (pass marks) in both continuous assessment
and end semester Assessment separately.
Note: Course Outcomes may be fixed as per subject teacher of the Institute.

Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Metallurgical Engineering

[MET]
Revised 2022
PROPOSED DRAFT SYLLABUS
DIPLOMA IN METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING
2020 – 21
Semester - III
Sl. Hours per Total

No Category of Course Code No. Course Title week contact
Credits Marks
hrs /
L T P week
1. Program core course MTPC201 Physical Metallurgy – I 2 1 0 3 3 100
Fuels , Furnaces &
2. Program core course MTPC203 2 1 0 3 3 100
Refractories
3. Program core course MTPC205 Metallurgical 1 1 0 2 2 100
Thermodynamics
4. Program core course MTPC207 Extractive Metallurgy 1 1 0 2 2 100

Fundamentals of 1 1 0 2 2 100
5. Program core course MTPC209
Mechanical Engineering
6. Program core course MTPC211 Physical Metallurgy - I 0 0 4 4 2 100
Lab
Fundamentals of
7. Program core course MTPC213 Mechanical 0 0 2 2 1 100
Engineering Lab
8. Program core course MTPC215 Extractive Metallurgy Lab 0 0 2 2 1 100
Computer Aided Drafting
9. Program core course MTPC217 Lab 0 0 2 2 1 100
Summer Internship-I
10. (4 weeks) after II nd. SI201 2 200
Sem )
Total 7 5 10 22 19 1100
COURSE TITLE : PHYSICAL METALLURGY – I
Course Code MTPC201
Course Title PHYSICAL METALLURGY – I
Number of Credits 3
Course offered in
Part - II , 3rd. Semester
Course Category PC
Hours / Week 3 ( Lecture – 2 : Tutorial : 1 ) ; Total 15 weeks / Sem
Full Marks 100
Objective type questions carrying 1

1 Mid Semester Tests 10x2=20 mark for 20 questions(Qs) out of 25 1x20=20
( Two best out of Qs throughout the syllabus
three)
Question carrying 2 marks for 5 Qs out

2 Quizzes, viva-voce, 10 2x5=10
of 8 Qs ( at least 1Q from each unit)
Assignments
Qs carrying 6 marks for 5 Qs

3 Class Attendance 10 (Subjective type) out of 8 Qs 6x5=30
( at least 1Q from each unit)
Total 40 60
Course Objectives :
Students will have knowledge , skill and attitude on following topic in higher order learning as per
Blooms Taxonomy .
1.Introduction about the subject metallurgy

2.Define properties of metals;
3.Crystal structure of metals;
4.Phase diagram, Iron Carbon equilibrium diagram.
5. Metallurgical microscope
6. Pyrometry.
Course Outcomes (COs) :
Subject : Physical Metallurgy – I
Course Statement
C201.1 Interpret basic concepts and terminologies of physical metallurgy.
Recognize the type of metallic bonds that directly contribute to the tensile strength and
C201.2
hardness of metals.
C201.3 Differentiate between metals that attribute their physical properties to their crystal structure
Summarize the phases present in a microstructure of iron-carbon alloy based on chemical
C201.4 parameters .
Apply principles of optics to view microstructure and scientifically justify use of etchants to
C201.5
make microstructure visible under microscope .
C201.6 Understand the importance of various pyrometer and used in metallurgical industries.
UNIT WISE DIVISION OF THE SYLLABUS
UNIT TOPIC CONTACT PERIODS

1 INTRODUCTION 2
PROPERTIES OF METALLIC MATERIALS 3
2
3 CRYSTAL STRUCTURE OF METALS 10
4 IRON CARBON DIAGRAM & ITS DESCRIPTION 10
5 MICROSCROPY & METALLOGRAPHY 10
6 PYROMETRY 10
Total = 45
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Engineering Physical Metallurgy --- Y. Lakhtin .

2. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy --- S.H.Avner .
3. Physical Metallurgy for Engineers --- Clark & Varney .
4. Principles of Metallographic Laboratory Practice . --- G.L.Khel .
1.0 INTRODUCTION 2
1.1 Outline of metallurgy, its importance, past history, present scenario and future.
1.2 Description about course contents, books, future studies, metallurgy as carrier.
2.0 Properties of Metallic Materials 3

2.1 Metallic bonding in metals; typical tensile & hardness properties of important metals.
2.2 Common ferrous materials – cast irons; plain carbon and alloy steels – brief description.
2.3 Common non-ferrous metals and alloys.
3.0 CRYSTAL STRUCTURE OF METALS 10

3.1 Crystal structure of metals, miller indices, atomic arrangement, lattice parameter, packing factor,
co-ordination number.
3.2 Allotropy & Anisotropy.
3.3 Diagram of different crystal structures of metals.
4.0 IRON CARBON DIAGRAM & ITS DESCRIPTION 10
4.1 Idea of equilibrium, phase, components, degrees of freedom.
4.2 Phase rule, mono-variant, di-variant, non-variant system.
4.3 Description of Iron Carbon diagram, eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic reaction.
4.4 Calculation of different phases, lever rule.
4.5 Brief idea about microstructure.
5.0 MICROSCOPY & METALLOGRAPHY 10

5.1 Metallurgical Microscope.
5.2 Magnification & Resolving power.
5.3 Numerical Aperture.
5.4 Dark field, Bright field illumination.
5.5 Depth of focus.
5.6 Polishing techniques – manual & electro polishing.
5.7 Abrasive powders.
5.8 Etching.
5.9 Mounting.
6.0 PYROMETRY 10
6.1 Definition.
6.2 Different types, uses.
6.3 Thermoelectric Pyrometers.
6.4 Calibration of thermocouples.
6.5 Cold Junction correction .
6.6 Basic theory of optical, radiation & resistance pyrometers.
----------------XX-------------------
COURSE TITLE : FUEL , FURNACE & REFRACTORIES
Course Code MTPC203
Course Title Fuel Furnace & Refractories
Number of Credits 3
Course offered in
Part - II, 3rd. Semester
Course Category PC
Hours / Week 3 ( Lecture – 2 : Tutorial - 1 ) ; Total 15 weeks / Sem
Full Marks 100

Mid Semester Tests
1 10x2=20 mark for 20 questions(Qs) out of 25 1x20=20
(Two best out of three)
Qs throughout the syllabus
Quizzes, viva-voce, Question carrying 2 marks for 5 Qs out

2 10 2x5=10
Assignments of 8 Qs ( at least 1Q from each unit)

3 Class Attendance 10 (Subjective type) out of 8 Qs ( at least 6x5=30
1Q from each unit)
Total 40 60
Course Objectives :
Students will have knowledge, skill and attitude on following topic in higher order learning as per
Blooms Taxonomy.
1. Understand the classification, properties, applications of solid fuels;

2. Understand the classification, properties, applications of liquid fuels;
3. Understand the classification, properties, applications of gaseous fuels;
4. Know about different furnaces, processes & applications;
5. Know & explain about utility, application & properties of different refractory.
Subject: Fuel Furnace & Refractories
Course Statement
Understand the importance of various fuels, refractories and furnaces used in metallurgical
C203.1
industries.
C203.2 Explain features, classification, production and application of metallurgical fuels.
Explain features, classification, working principles and application of various metallurgical
C203.3
furnaces.
Evaluate various refractories, its properties, composition and application in metallurgical
C203.4
industries.
C203.5 Analyze & solve numerical problems related to coal constituents and furnace efficiency.

1 INTRODUCTION 2
2 SOLID FUELS 10
3 LIQUID FUELS 8
4 GASEOUS FUELS 6
5 FURNACES 9
6 REFRACTORY 10
Total = 45
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Refractories – Manufacture, Properties and Applications -- A. Rashid Chesti
2. Fuels & Furnaces - Brame& King
3. Fuels , Furnaces & Refractories -- R.B.Gupta
1.0 INTRODUCTION 02
1.1 Importance of fuel, furnace & refractory in metallurgy.
2.0 SOLID FUELS 10

2.1 Important solid fuels for metallurgical industry.
2.2 Classification of coal, its constituents and special characteristics of metallurgical coal.
2.3 Properties of coal and its testing procedure
2.4 Coke making method, coke oven, coke properties & testing, coke by-products.
2.5 Numerical problem based on proximate analysis, ultimate analysis & calorific value of coal
3.0 LIQUID FUELS 08

3.1 Important liquid fuels for metallurgical industry.
3.2 Requisite characteristics of liquid fuels.
3.3 Application of liquid fuel in metallurgical industries.
4.0 GASEOUS FUELS 06

4.1 Important gaseous fuels for metallurgical industry, classification, characteristics and application
4.2 Producer gas and water gas, its composition, properties, production techniques & uses.
4.3 Blast furnace gas, coke oven gas, mixed gas, its composition, properties, production techniques &
uses.
4.4 LD gas, Coal gas, coal gasification
5.0 FURNACES 09
5.1 Classification, characteristics, and application of various furnaces.
5.2 Working principle of Fuel fired furnace, Resistance furnace metallurgical, Induction furnace & Arc
furnace.
5.3 Energy losses in Furnace and its prevention. Energy conservation measure in Furnaces.
5.4 Numerical problem based on Furnace efficiency (direct method)
6.0 REFRACTORY 10
6.1 Introduction to refractory.
6.2 Classification and composition of metallurgical refractory.
6.3 Properties of refractory and its testing procedure.
6.4 Refractory manufacturing technique.
6.5 Application of various refractory in metallurgical furnaces.
---------------x------------
COURSE TITLE : METALLURGICAL THERMODYNAMICS
Course Code MTPC205

Course Title METALLURGICAL THERMODYNAMICS
Number of Credits 2
Course offered in
Course Category PC
Hours / Week 2 ( Lecture – 1 : Tutorial : 1 ) ; Total 15 weeks / Sem ; Total Class = 30
Full Marks 100

Mid Semester Tests Objective type questions carrying 1
1 ( Two best out of 10x2=20 mark for 20 questions(Qs) out of 25 1x20=20
three) Qs throughout the syllabus
2 10 2x5=10
3 Class Attendance* 10 (Subjective type) out of 8 Qs 6x5=30
Total 40 60
Course Objectives:
Blooms Taxonomy.
1. Introduction about the basic principle of thermo-dynamics.

2. Application of basic thermo-dynamics in metallurgy.
3. Importance of thermo-dynamics in metallurgy.
4. Simple mathematical problems on thermo-dynamics related with metallurgy.
Course Outcomes (COs)
Course Statement
C205.1 Analyze basic concept & terminologies of Thermodynamics and its application in Metallurgy.
C205.2 Analyze First Law of Thermodynamics and its importance in connection with metallurgy.
Analyze concept of Enthalpy and its importance in connection with metallurgy & solve
C205.3
associated numerical problems.
Analyze Second Law of Thermodynamics & Entropy and its importance in connection with
C205.4
metallurgy & solve associated numerical problems.
Analyze Third Law of Thermodynamics & Free Energy and its importance in connection with
C205.5
metallurgy & solve associated numerical problems.
Analyze concept of Fugacity, Activity & Equlibrium Constant and its importance in connection
C205.6
with metallurgy & solve associated numerical problems.
C205.7 Analyze Ellingham Diagram & solve associated numerical problems.

1 INTRODUCTION 5
2 Energy & First law of thermodynamics 3
3 Concept of Enthalpy 3
4 Entropy & Second law of thermodynamics 6
5 Free Energy & Third law of thermodynamics 4
6 Fugacity, Activity & Equilibrium Constant 3
7 Ellingham Diagram 6
Total = 30
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1) Text book of Materials and Metallurgical Thermodynamics, A. Ghosh, PHI.

2) Physical Chemistry of Metals, L. S. Darken and R. W. Gurry, CBS.
3) Metallurgical Thermodynamics Kinetics and Numericals, Dr. S.K.Dutta and Prof. A.B.Lele.
4) Problems in Metallurgical Thermodynamics and Kinetics, G.S UPADHAYA and R. K. DUBE
1.0 Introduction . 5
1.1 Definition of thermodynamics, Applications of thermodynamics in metallurgy, usefulness,

limitations, meaning of metallurgical thermodynamics.
1.2 Laws of thermodynamics – 1st. law, 2nd. Law, 3rd. law, Zeroth Law.
1.3 Basic terms used in thermodynamics - System & surrounding , Concept of system ( isolated ,
closed , open) , Homogeneous and heterogeneous systems, State of system , Equation of state ,
properties of a system ( extensive , intensive ) .
1.4 Reversible & Irreversible Changes, Equilibrium, Types of Equilibrium, meaning of thermodynamic
equilibrium.
1.5 Isothermal & Adiabatic changes with Mathematical Deductions.
2.0 Energy & First law of Thermodynamics. 3

2.1 Definition of Energy, different form of energy, Internal energy.
2.2 State Function & Path Function with example.
2.3 Mathematical deduction & statement of First law of thermodynamics, its significance, and
Measurement of Internal energy change.
2.4 Heat capacity, Differential statement of Heat capacity at constant volume and pressure (Cp & Cv),
Relation between Cp and Cv, Importance of Cp & Cv.
3.0 Concept of Enthalpy . 3

3.1 Enthalpy, 1st. law in terms of Enthalpy, Enthalpy change at constant pressure, Enthalpy change
with temperature, Enthalpy change due to chemical reaction.
3.2 Definition: Heat of reaction, Heat of formation, Heat of combustion, latent heat, Heat of Solution,
Heat of Neutralization.
3.3 Exothermic & Endothermic Chemical Reaction and its relation with Enthalpy Change.
3.4 Laws of Thermo chemistry: Hess’s Law & Lavoisier & Laplace Law
3.5 Simple numerical problems on enthalpy change, heat of reaction, heat of formation.
4.0 Entropy & Second law of Thermodynamics. 6

4.1 Definition & Physical Concept of Entropy, Statement of Second law of thermodynamics in terms of
Entropy, Entropy change for a reversible and irreversible process.
4.2 Combined statements of 1st and 2nd laws .
4.3 Conditions for Equilibrium & Spontaneity in terms of Change in Entropy, Enthalpy & Internal
Energy.
4.4 Entropy change with Temperature at Constant Volume and at Constant Pressure, Maxwell Relation.
4.5 Simple numerical problems.
5.0 Free Energy & Third law of Thermodynamics. 4
5.1 Free Energy: Definition & Criteria of Equilibrium & Reaction Feasibility.
5.2 Helmholtz Free Energy & work Function, Gibbs Free Energy & Potential Function.
5.3 Conditions for Equilibrium & Spontaneity in terms of Change in Helmholtz Free & Gibbs Free
Energy.
5.4 Equation of Free Energy as a Function of Enthalpy & Entropy change, Concept of transition
temperature , Mathematical Deduction of Gibbs-Helmholtz equation.
5.5 Statement of third law of thermodynamics.
5.6 Simple numerical problems on calculation of change in Free Energy, Feasibility of a reaction.
6.0 Fugacity, Activity & Equilibrium Constant. 3

6.1 Concept of fugacity & its mathematical deduction from Gibbs Free Energy, Activity & its relation
with Fugacity, Concept of Activity Coefficient, Ideal & Non Ideal solution.
6.2 Definition of Standard state, Equilibrium Constant & its Mathematical Derivation, Le chatelier
Principle of Chemical Equilibrium and its significance in occurrences of Chemical reaction.
6.3 Simple numerical problems on calculation of Equilibrium Constant, Feasibility of a Chemical
Reaction.
7.0 Ellingham Diagram. 6

7.1 Basics of Ellingham Diagram, Important Features, Characteristics of different curves and its
explanations.
7.2 Usefulness & Limitations of Ellingham Diagram
7.3 Simple numerical problems on Ellingham Diagram.
--------XX-----
COURSE TITLE : EXTRACTIVE METALLUURGY
Course Code MTPC207

Course Title Extractive Metallurgy
Number of Credits 2
Course offered in
Course Category PC
Full Marks 100

Mid Semester Tests( Two
best out of three)
2 10 2x5=10
Total 40 60
Course Objectives :
Blooms Taxonomy .
1. Introduction about the subject Extractive Metallurgy

2. Define unit process, unit operation of metal extraction;
3. Differentiate between Calcinations, Roasting and Smelting;
4. Different Agglomeration technique and their mechanism
5. Different Leaching process
6. Electrolysis technique
Course Outcomes ( Cos ) :
Subject : Extractive Metallurgy
Statement
Course
Analyze basic concept & terminologies of Unit Process,Unit Operation and its application in
C207.1
Metallurgy .
Analyze Pyrometallurgical Process like Calcination, Roasting, and Smelting and its importance in
C207.2
connection with metallurgy.
C207.3 Analyze Hydrometallurgical Process like Leaching and its importance in connection with metallurgy.
Analyze Electrometallurgical Process like Electrolysis and its importance in connection with
C207.4
metallurgy.
C207.5 Analyze Charging burden quality and charge calculation & solve associated numerical problems.

1 INTRODUCTION 02
2 PYROMETALLURGICAL PROCESS 08
3 HYDROMETALLURGICAL PROCESS 06
4 ELECTROMETALLURGICAL PROCESS 06
5 EXTRACTION OF SOME COMMON METALS 08
Total = 30
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Principles of Extractive Metallurgy --- Terkel Rosenqvist .

2. Principles of Extractive Metallurgy --- H .S.Ray & A.Ghosh
3. Extractive Metallurgy --- J.D.Gilchrist
4. Non-ferrous production Metallurgy. --- G.L.Bray
5. Physical Chemistry of Metals----- L.S.Darken & R.W.Gurry
6. Extraction of Nonferrous Metals-----H.S.RAY & R.SRIDHAR & K.P.ABRAHAM
DETAILS COURSE CONTENT
Contact periods
1.0 Introduction 02
1.1 Scope of the subject, basic concept
1.2 Unit process. unit operation of metal extraction.
1.3 Mineral dressing operations
2.0 Pyrometallurgical Process 08

2.1 Basic concept
2.2 General description of Ellinghum diagram for oxide and sulphides
2.3 Calcination
2.4 Roasting
2.5 Agglomeration and their mechanism.
2.6 Smelting and Refining of Ores.
3.0 Hydrometallurgical Process 06

3.1 Basic idea
3.2 Principle of leaching
3.3 Different leaching process
3.4 Principles of purification of pregnant solution
3.5 Recovery of metals from leached solution
4.0 Electrometallurgical process 06

4.1 Basic principles and arrangements
4.2. Electrolysis in aqueous solution
4.3 Difference between electrowinning and electro refining
4.4 Electrolysis of fused salt
5.0 Extraction of some common metals 08

5.1 A brief account of raw material processing, smelting, refining of Aluminium
5.2 A brief account of raw material processing, smelting, refining of Copper
5.3 A brief account of raw material processing, smelting, refining of Zinc &Lead
5.4 A brief account of raw material processing, smelting, refining of Tin
5.5 A brief account of raw material processing, smelting, refining of Titanium
5.6 A brief account of raw material processing, smelting, refining of Magnesium
5.7 A brief account of raw material processing, smelting, refining of Silver and gold
5.8 A brief account of raw material processing, smelting, refining of Nickel
5.9 Secondary metal extraction from waste and slag.
=============XX================
COURSE TITLE : FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Code MTPC209

Course Title Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering
Number of Credits 2
Course offered in
Course Category PC
Full Marks 100

Mid Semester Tests( Two
best out of three)
2 10 2x5=10
Total 40 60
Course Objectives :
Blooms Taxonomy.
1. Describe the importance of the subject Mechanical Engineering in operation along with necessary
maintenance of mechanical machines & equipment used in metallurgical industries.
2. Define properties of steam; solve the problems of dry, wet and superheated steam.
3. Define the different terminology used in connection with fluid mechanics, State & explain
Bernoulli’s theorem and its application.
4. Define the flow of fluid and discharge through notches, Solve simple numerical problems on
discharge.
Subject : Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering
Course Statement
Describe working principle of different mechanical transmission system components used in different
C209.1
equipment and machineries used in metallurgical industries.
Solve numerical problems of dry, wet and superheated steam with the help of gained knowledge on
C209.2
properties of stream.
5. Describe different terminology used in connection with fluid mechanics along with the Bernoulli’s
C209.3
theorem and its application.
6. Solve simple numerical problems on discharge with the help of knowledge acquired on the flow of
C209.4
fluid through notches and discharge through them.
C209.5 Demonstrate the operation of different pumps used for supply of fluid.

1 MECHANICAL POWER TRANSMISSION 08
2 BOILER 07
3 FLUID – MECHANICS 15
Total = 30
1.0 MECHANICAL POWER TRANSMISSION 8
1.1 Types of pulleys , types of gear – spur , helical , bevel gears .

1.2 Joint – couplings – universal joint , types of bearings – applications , chain drive – types of
application.
2.0 BOILER 7
2.1 Functions of boilers and their classification, brief description and working principles only of the
following boilers – Babcock Wilcox & Fluidized Bed Combustion Boiler .
2.2 Locations & functions only of the following boiler mountings and accessories – water level
indicator, fusible plug, pessure gauge , stop valve, safety valve, economiser, superheater, air
preheater and feed pump.
3.0 FLUID – MECHANICS 15
3.1 Properties of fluid, types of flow – laminar & turbulent flow , pressure of fluid, pressure head of
liquid, absolute & vacuum pressure gauge, equation of continuity of flow, Bernoulli’ s theorem
(proof not required), venturimeter – Simple numerical problems.
3.2 Introduction with sketch & working principle of fluid power control . Different types of pumps – gear
, spiral vane & piston pump .
3.3 Flow of liquid through notches – definition of notch, types of notch, types of notch types of notch -
rectangular notch, triangular notch. Formula of discharge through notches (proof not required).
Simple numerical problems on discharge.
-------------XX----------
COURSE TITLE : PHYSICAL METALLURGY – I LAB
Course Code MTPC211
Course Title PHYSICAL METALLURGY – I LAB
Number of Credits 2
Course offered in
Course Category PC
Hours / Week 4 ( Practical – 4 ) ; Total 15 weeks / Sem
Full Marks 100
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Sl No Type Marks Type Marks
Continuous Internal
External Assessment of 50 marks shall
Assessment is to be
be held at the end of the Third Semester
carried out by the
teachers throughout on the entire syllabus.
the Third Semester.
1. 40 Distribution of marks for External 40
Distribution of marks for Assessment :
Internal Assessment :
Performance of Job – 20, On spot job – 10
Notebook – 20. Viva - voce – 30
2. Class Attendance 20
Total 60 40
3.
Course Objectives :
Blooms Taxonomy .
1. Crystal structure of metals;

2. Metallurgical Microscope
3. Metallurgical specimen preparation and microstructure .
Subject : Physical Metallurgy – I Lab
Course Statement
Demonstrate the drawing and model of BCC , FCC and HCP crystal structure of metals and
C211.1
analyze the concept.
C211.2 Demonstrate about functions and operations of metallurgical microscope .
C211.3 Develop the knowledge and skill of metallurgical specimen preparation for metallography.
Identify , draw and analyse the microstructure of plain carbon steel at room temperature .
C211.4
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Principles of Metallographic Laboratory Practice . --- G.L.Khel .

PRACTICAL : LIST LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS :
SL. NAME OF EXPERIMENT CONTACT PERIODS

NO.
1.0 CRYSTAL STRUCTURE OF METALS 10
1.1 Drawing of BCC , FCC , HCP crystal structure .
1.2 Model Making of BCC , FCC , HCP crystal structure .
2.0 Study of Metallurgical Microscope , its

10
accessories & operations .
2.1 Identification of different parts of Metallurgical microscope.
Sketch of Metallurgical microscope & labelling of its different
2.2
parts.
2.3 Handling & focusing of metallurgical microscope.
2.4 Photographic attachment & Software operations . . .
3.0 Specimen Mounting , Polishing & Etching . 20
3.1 Specimen Mounting Technic , Hot & Cold Mounting .
3.2 Practicing of belt grinding , paper polishing & final cloth

polisihing .
3.3 Etching technique & practice.
4.0 Metallurgical microstructure of plain carbon steel . 20
Specimen preparation , observation and drawing of metallurgical

4.1
microstructure of hypo-eutectoid steel , eutectoid steel and hyper
– eutectoid steel . .
Total = 60
-----------------xx----------------
COURSE TITLE : FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LAB
Course Code MTPC213
Course Title FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LAB
Number of Credits 2
Course offered in
Course Category PC
Full Marks 100
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Continuous Internal
Assessment is to be
carried out by the
the Third Semester.
Total 60 40
Course Objectives :
Blooms Taxonomy .
1. Cochran and Babcock & Wilcox boilers.

2. Two-Stroke & Four-Stroke Diesel & Petrol Engines.
3. Pelton Wheel Turbine, Francis Turbine and Kaplan Turbine.
4. Bernoulli’s theorem .
Subject : FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LAB
Course Statement
Demonstrate about functions and operations of Cochran and Babcock & Wilcox boilers.
C213.1
Demonstrate about functions and operations of Two-Stroke & Four-Stroke Diesel & Petrol
C213.2
Engines.
Demonstrate about functions and operations of Pelton Wheel Turbine, Francis Turbine and
C213.3
Kaplan Turbine.
Demonstrate about verifications of Bernoulli’s theorem .
C213.4
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Steam and Gas Turbine – R. Yadav

2. Internal combustion engines by E.F.Obert.
3. Gas turbine Theory by Cohen Roger.
PRACTICAL : LIST OF LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS :
SL. NAME OF EXPERIMENT CONTACT

NO. PERIODS
1 To study the Cochran and Babcock & Wilcox boilers. 5

To study the working and function of mountings and accessories
5
2 in boilers.
To study Two-Stroke & Four-Stroke Diesel Engines. 5

3
To Study Two-Stroke & Four-Stroke Petrol Engines.
4 5
To study the constructional features and working of Pelton
5 Wheel Turbine, Francis Turbine and Kaplan Turbine. 5
Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem . 5

6
Total = 30
-----------------xx----------------
COURSE TITLE : EXTRACTIVE METALLURGY LAB
Course Code MTPC215
Course Title EXTRACTIVE METALLURGY LAB
Number of Credits 2
Course offered in
Course Category PC
Full Marks 100
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Continuous Internal
Assessment is to be
carried out by the be held at the end of the Third Semester
the Third Semester.
Total 60 40
Course Objectives :
Blooms Taxonomy .
1. Mineral resource in India .

2. Ellingham Diagram .
3. Ball Mill & Jaw Crusher .
4. Extraction process of ferrous & non – ferrous metals .
5. Hydro-metallurgy and Electro-metallurgy process .
Subject : EXTRACTIVE METALLURGY LAB
Course Statement
Demonstrate about Mineral resource in India .
C215.1
C215.2 Demonstrate about Ellingham Diagram , its utility and importance .

Demonstrate about functions and utility of Ball Mill & Jaw Crusher .
C215.3
Demonstrate about the flow diagram of Hydro-metallurgy and Electro-metallurgy route of
C215.4 extraction process .
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Steam and Gas Turbine – R. Yadav

2. Internal combustion engines by E.F.Obert.
3. Gas turbine Theory by Cohen Roger.
PRACTICAL : LIST OF LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS :

NO. PERIODS
1 To draw flow chart of mineral resource in India . 2

To draw the Ellingham Diagram . 4
2
4
3 To draw and practice on Ball Mill Crusher
To draw and practice on Jaw Crusher 4

4
To draw different non - ferrous smelting furnaces . 4
5
To draw flow charts on extraction of ferrous & non-ferrous metals. 4
6
To draw flow charts on hydro-metallurgy process . 4
7
To draw flow charts on electro-metallurgy process . 4
8
Total = 30
-------------xx-----------
COURSE TITLE : COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING LAB
Course Code MTPC217
Course Title COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING LAB
Number of Credits 2
Course offered in
Course Category PC
Full Marks 100
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Continuous Internal
Assessment is to be
carried out by the
the Third Semester.
Total 60 40
Course Objectives :
Blooms Taxonomy .
1. To solve two dimensional design & drafting problems by AutoCAD .
2. Being able to use AutoCAD commands to make a drawing, create text, dimension a drawing, hatch
patterns and make & insert symbols & blocks.
3. They will also be able to plot drawings.
Subject : COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING LAB
Course Statement
Demonstrate about AutoCAD screen components , Drawing lines , Co-ordinate systems ,
C217.1 Direct distance method , Quitting AutoCAD.
Demonstrate about Opening an existing file, Object selection methods, Crossing Selection, All,
Fence, Last, Previous, Add, Remove – Erasing objects: OOPS command, UNDO / REDO
C217.2
commands, ZOOM command, PAN command, Panning in real time, Object snap, running
object snap mode ,Drawing circles .
Demonstrate about different command system .
C217.3
Demonstrate about DRAWING AIDS
C217.4
Demonstrate about CREATING TEXT & BASIC DIMENSIONING
C217.5
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. AutoCAD 14 For Windows – Bible (with Applications) / Sham Tickoo / Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd.
2. Advanced AutoCAD / Robert M. Thomas / Sybex BPD .
3. AutoCAD Part – 1 & 2: Banglay Prokashito Tutorial / CD Media / Sonolite, 55, Elliot Road, Kolkata – 16
PRACTICAL : LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS :

NO. PERIODS
1.0 GETTING STARTED – I . 3

Starting AutoCAD – AutoCAD screen components – Starting a drawing: Open drawings,
1.1 Create drawings (Start from scratch, Use a template & Use a wizard) – Invoking
commands in AutoCAD .
Drawing lines in AutoCAD – Co-ordinate systems: Absolute co-ordinate system,
1.2
Relative co-ordinate system – Direct distance method – Saving a drawing: Save &
Save As – Closing a drawing – Quitting AutoCAD.
2.0 GETTING STARTED – II 2

Opening an existing file – Concept of Object – Object selection methods : Pick by box,
2.1 Window selection, Crossing Selection, All, Fence, Last, Previous, Add, Remove – Erasing
objects: OOPS command, UNDO / REDO commands – ZOOM command – PAN
command, Panning in real time – Setting units – Object snap, running object snap mode –
Drawing circles .
3.0 DRAW COMMANDS 5

ARC command – RECTANG command – ELLIPSE command, elliptical arc – POLYGON
3.1 command (regular polygon) – PLINE command – DONUT command – POINT command –
Construction Line: XLINE command, RAY command , MULTILINE command .
4.0 EDITING COMMANDS 5

MOVE command – COPY command – OFFSET command – ROTATE command –
4.1 SCALE command – STRETCH command – LENGTHEN command –TRIM command –
EXTEND command – BREAK command – CHAMFER command – FILLET command –
ARRAY command – MIRROR command –MEASURE command – DIVIDE command –
EXPLODE command – MATCHPROP command – Editing with grips: PEDIT .
5.0 DRAWING AIDS 5

Layers – Layer Properties Manager dialog box – Object Properties: Object property
5.1 toolbar, Properties Window – LTSCALE Factor – Auto Tracking – REDRAW command,
REGEN command .
6.0 CREATING TEXT . 5
6.1
Creating single line text – Drawing special characters – Creating multiline text –
Editing text – Text style .
7.0 BASIC DIMENSIONING . 5

Fundamental dimensioning terms: Dimension lines, dimension text, arrowheads, extension
7.1 lines, leaders, centre marks and centre lines, alternate units – Associative dimensions –
Dimensioning methods – Drawing leader.
Total = 30
-------xx------
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Mine Surveying [MIS]
Revised 2022
Draft Syllabus for Semester -3 (Part-II) Mine Surveying Dept.
Theoretical Courses
Course-1
Semester 3
Cousre Code MSPC201
Course Title Elements of Surveying
No of Credits 2 ( L:2 , P:0, T:0)
Pre requisites NIL
Course Category PC
Course objectives:
Objectives of this course are :
* To impart knowledge of surveying, its objectives and principles.
* To know about classification of surveying.
*To give basic ideas about instruments and methods of surveying.
* To know about plan, map, section, R.F and
scale.
* To give knowledge about types of measuring
scales, construction and design of plain scale
and diagonal scale, vernier scales.
* To know about types of errors encountered in survey work.
Course
Content: Unit 1: Introduction to Surveying
Definition of Surveying and its
description, objectives of
Surveying
Basic Principles of Surveying -
Working from whole to the
part and working from part to
the whole
Primary divisions of Surveying:
Plane Survey and Geodetic
Survey
Classification of Surveying:
Based on Instruments,
methods, purpose, and place
Instruments used in
Unit 2: Surveying
Name and brief description: Dial, Prismatic compass,
Theodolite, Level, EDM, Total Station, etc.
Unit 3: Basic methods used in surveying
Basic definitions; Horizontal
line, Plumb line, Level line,
Meridian, Latitude, Longitude,
Great Circle, Spherical triangle
etc.
Basic idea of Triangulation, Traversing, and Trilateration
Units of measurement and their conversions
Unit 4: Plans, Maps, Sections and Scales

Definitions : Plan , Map, section, Scale, RF
Comparison between Plan and Map
Types of Measuring Scales: Plane Scale, Diagonal Scale,
Comparitive Sacle, Vernier Scale
Construction of Plane Scale and Diagonal Scale
Different types of Vernier Scales and Least count of normal
Vernier and Retrogate Vernier
Numerical Problems:
Unit 5: Errors and precision:
Accuracy , Precision ,
Sources of errors
Types of errors
Degree of accuracy
Order of accuracy
Errors due to shrinkage of Plans or map
Errors due to wrong measuring scales
Additional numerical problems on errors.
Course learning outcomes:
After completion of this course, students will be able to

* explain surveying, its objectives and principles.
* classify surveys according to various parameters.
* explain the types and construction of measuring scales.
* Identify the different survey instruments and methods.
* list the types of errors encountered in survey work.
* Solve numerical problems on scales and errors.
List of Text/ Reference Books:
Title of the Name of Authors Name of the Publisher

Book
Surveying(Vol-I) S.Duggal Tata McGraw Hill
Surveying & N. Basak Tata McGraw Hill
Levelling
Surveying & T.P Kanetkar Pune Vidyarthi Griha

Levelling(Vol-I) Prakashan
Surveying(Vol-I) Dr. K.R. Arora Standard Book House
Surveying(Vol-I) Dr. B.C. Punamia Laxmi Publication
Fundamental of R. Subramanian Oxford University Press

Surveying and
Levelling
Plane Surveying Alak De S. Chand &Company
Course-2
Semester 3
Course Code MSPC203
Course Title Chain Surveying
Pre requisites Knowledge of basic mathematics including trigonometry and Physics

Course
Category PC
Course objectives:
Objectives of this course are to:

* know about different types of linear measuring techniques.
* know about principle, purposes and important terms of chain survey.
* know about instruments and accessories used in chain survey.
* impart knowledge about steps and procedures of chain surveying
* give knowledge about different types of errors and corrections in measurement.
* know about obstacles in chaining.
Course
Content: Unit 1: Introduction
Brief idea about linear measurement and types of linear
measurement methods.
Principle, objectives and suitable conditions for chain
surveying
Basic definitions: Survey station, survey line, check line, tie
line ,base line, subsidiary station. Offsets, well conditioned
triangle etc.
Unit 2: Instruments and accessories for chain surveying
Measuring chains: Constructional details, Types,

Folding and unfolding of chain, Testing and
adjustment of a chain
Measuring tapes: Constructional details and Types.
Accessories: Arrow, Plumb bob, Peg, Ranging rod,

Offset rod etc.
Purpose and brief description of instruments such as

Clinometer, Cross staff and its type, Optical square.
Prism square and line ranger.
Unit 3: Steps in chain surveying

Reconnaissance
Marking survey stations
Ranging of survey line: purpose, types of ranging
Taking measurement and offsets along a chain line,

Different types of offset, Errors in offsetting and
numerical problems
Recording measurement in field book, Types of Field book.
Plotting of chain survey data.
Procedure of measurement on flat or levelled ground.
Methods of measurement on sloping and undulated ground:
a. Stepping method
b. By mesuring slope distance and gradient or elevation between
two stations
c. By providing for hypotenusal allowance.
Cross staff survey
Numerical problems
Unit 4: Errors in linear measurement by chain or tape:
Random/Accidental errors and Errors due to mistakes.
Corrections to length/distance measured with a tape:
a. Correction for incorrect length
b. Correction for incorrect alignment
c. Correction for slope
d. Correction for temperature
e. Correction for pull
f. Correction for sag
Numerical problems on corrections
Unit 5: Obstacles in chaining

Chaining possible but no intervisibility.
Chaining not possible but stations intervisible.
Both Chaining and intervisibility are not possible.
Numerical problems on obstacles in chaining.
After completion of this course, students will be able to:

* explain chain surveying, its principle and objectives.
* identify salient points and lines of the survey framework.
* list and use different instruments and accessories in connection with the measurement.
* do ranging and chaining of lines under different conditions.
* identify different errors during measurement and be able to make necessary corrections.
* solve various field problems in connection with linear measurement.

Book
Surveying(Vol- S.Duggal Tata McGraw Hill
I)
Levelling
Surveying & T.P Kanetkar Pune Vidyarthi Griha Prakashan

Levelling(Vol-
I)
Surveying(Vol- Dr. K.R. Arora Standard Book House

I)
Surveying(Vol- Dr. B.C. Punamia Laxmi Publication

I)
Fundamental R. Subramanian Oxford University Press
of Surveying
and Levelling
Plane Alak De S. Chand &Company

Surveying
Course - 3
Semester 3
Course Code MSPC205
Course Title Traverse Surveying
Pre requisites Knowledge of basic mathematics including trigonometry

Course
Category PC
Course objectives
Objectives of this course are to

* impart theoretical knowledge about different types of traverses and their respective field of use
* impart knowledge about reference lines(meridian) , declination and bearings of survey lines
* make the students able to calculate bearings of any survey line of a traverse and included angles from given
data
* facilitate the students to identify different parts of a vernier theodolite and their functions
* make them able to know the steps about how horizontal and vertical angles are taken with a theodolite
* generate the idea of partial and total coordinates and their uses
*understand the need of adjustment of theodolite traverse and the rules related thereto
Course
Content: Unit 1: Introduction
Concept of traverse:
Closed travese- geometrically and mathematically

closed traverse
geometrically open but mathematically closed
traverse
open traverse
Linked Traverse
clockwise and anticlockwise traverse,
necessity of conducting traverse survey
Concept of meridian- True,Magnetic,Artificial,

Assumed
Concept of bearing-True bearing,magnetic bearing;
magnetic declination; changes in magnetic

declination-secular,diurnal, irregular
local attraction;
isogonic and agonic lines;Isoclinic and Aclinic lines
Quadrantal and Whole circle bearing; conversion of

Q.B to WCB and vice versa
Fore bearing and Back bearing
Unit 2: Traversing with dial/compass
Loose needle method of dial traversing
Fast needle method of dial traversing(included angle)
Errors in dial traversing- causes, precautions and

adjustment of dial traverse by bowditch
rule(Graphically)
Numericals on dial surveying
Numerical problems on magnetic declination
Finding out of bearings of sides of a traverse from

given bearing of one side and included angles
calculation of included angles from given bearings

Numericals on Local attraction
Unit 3: Theodolite
Description of theodolite, function of its different

parts, different terms when manipulating a transit
theodolite
Relations between fundamental lines(Axes) of a

vernier theodolite
Measurement of horizontal angles by repetition and

reiteration method
Measurement of vertical angles
Prolonging a survey line and finding out intermediate

points between two survey stations
Microptic Theodolite:Introduction, least cout,

accuracy and its use
Unit 4: Traversing with Theodolite
Travesing with theodolite by bearing and included
angles
Calculation of partial and total coordinates from

length and bearing of a theodolite traverse
Traverse computation and error adjustment by (a)

Bowditch rule and (b) transit rule © Equal Shift
method
Numericals on Theodolite Traversing
Numericals on length and bearing from coordinates;
calculation of area of closed traverse by DMD method

* explain different types of traverses and Meridians
* solve numerical problems on dial traversing
* mention different parts and their functions of a vernier theodolite
* describe steps to read verniers to find out horizontal, vertical angles and traversing with vernier theodolite
* Calculate partial and Total corrdinates of theodolite traverse and Area by DMD method
*Solve numerical problems related to theodolite traversing
Levelling(Vol-
I)
I)

I)

of Surveying
and Levelling

Surveying
Course- 4
Semester 3
Cousre Code MSPC207
Course Title Elements of Mining
Pre requisites NIL
Course
Category PC
Course objectives

* impart knowledge about mining and its different features.
* impart knowledge about purposes and types of boring/drilling in mining fields, different types of drill bits
* know about classification of mines and mining methods.
* know about different means of access to mineral deposits.
* get knowledge of explosives,its types and uses, accessories.
Course
Content: Unit 1: Description of mining and bore holes drilling:
Definitions: mine, mining
operations,mineral,ore,rock,seam,vein/lode etc.
Purposes of mining
Brief idea of different mining operations
Purposes of drilling
Different methods of drilling:
(a) Percussive drilling and its sub-types
(b) Rotary drilling and its sub-types
Types of drill bits
Borehole deviation
Unit 2: Classification of mines and opening of mineral deposits

Classification of mines
Difference between open cast and underground mines
Opening of mineral deposits for opencast mines:Trench, Box cut
etc.
Opening of mineral deposits for underground

mines:incline or surface drifts,pit or shaft, adit,cross-
cut, cross measure drift etc.
Shaft vs incline
Unit 3: Mining methods:

Classification of mining methods
(a) Opencast coal mining method: brief description of

the methods and its advantages and disadvantages
Important terms used in opencast mining: Bench,

Bench slope angle, highwall, Bench toe, Berm,
Haulage road, stripping ratio, overburden ratio, ,
types of stripping ratio.
(b) Underground coal mining methods:Brief

description of Bord and pillar method, its advantages
and disadvantages
Important terms used in bord and pillar method:
Pillar, Gallery, Heading, stook, Development,
Depillaring, Stowing , Caving etc.
longwall method and their advantages and

disadvantages, Longwall advancing and longwall
retreating methods.
c) Underground metalliferous mining methods: Brief

description of different raising methods,
working principles of overhand stoping, underhand

stoping, breast stoping,
brief description of Shrinkage stoping method, Cut

and fill method, Sublevel caving method , Room and
pillar method.
Unit 4: Explosives and Accessories for blasting

Definition and properties of explosives
Types of explosives:definition and properties of low

and high explosives
Some important high explosives:
(a) Ammonium nitrate fuel oil explosive
(b) Slurry explosives
©Emulsion explosives
(d) Permitted explosives
Accessories: Brief description of detonators and their

types, safety fuse, detonating fuse,Nonel, Raydet.

* explain mining, its purposes and differrent features.
* identify different methods of drilling and types of drill bits.
* classify mining methods.
* explain different metrhods of coal mining and metalliferous mining.
* identify different types of explosives and their use.
Name of Title of the Book Name of the Publisher

Authors
D.J Deshmukh Elements of Vidyasewa Prakashan, Nagpur

Mining(Vol-I)
R.D. Singh Principles & Practices New Age International

of Modern Coal
Mining
Robert Peele Mining Engineering Wlley Eastern Pvt. Ltd.
Hand Bool
D.J Deshmukh Elements of Vidyasewa Prakashan, Nagpur

Mining(Vol-II)
Course - 5
Semester 3
Cousre Code MSPC209
Course Title Area and Volume Calculation
Pre requisites Knowledge of basic mathematics

Course
Category PC
Course objectives
* get knowledge about how to calculate area of a figure from a plan by different methods.
* know the working principle and use of a planimeter.
* know how to compute area of different types of cross-sections.
* know about computation of volume of the earthwork from the cross-sections using Trapezoidal and
Prismoidal formula.
* know how to calculate capacitiy of reservoir and borrow pit.
* know how to solve numerical problems of area and volume using different methods.
Course
Content: Unit 1: Computation of Area
Areas of regular geometrical figures: Triangle, Square,

Rectangle, Trapezium, Rhombus, Circle, segment of a
circle etc.
Measuring units of area
Classification of area measuring problems
Unit 2: Measurement of Area from the plotted plan or map
Calculation of area by dividing the entire area into

small geometrical figures such as triangles, squares,
rectangles etc.
Area of a tract between survey line and an irregular

boundary by : Mid-ordinate rule,Average ordinate
method, Trapezoidal rule, Simpson's Rule
Numerical Problems
Calculation of area of the plan by planimeter: Theory

of planimeter, derivation of formula for different
conditions, Zero circle
Numerical problems on planimeter
Unit 3: Measurement of area from field book records

Computation of area from chain survey data
Computation of area from coordinates
Computation of area by meridian distance method
Unit 4: Computation of Volume

Formulae for volumes of regular solids: Prism, pyramid,
wedge,cone etc.
Computation of volume from cross-sections,:different types
of cross-sections, derivation of formulae for area of single
level and two level sections
Volume calculation from single level and two level sections
by trapezoidal and prismoidal formula
Prismoidal correction for single and two level sections

Numerical problems
Computatuion of volume from spot levels: derivation of
formula and numerical problems
Computation of volume of reservoir from contour plan

* calculate area between survey lines and irregular boundary using different methods.
* explain the theory and use of Planimeter.
* calculate the area of tract of land from field book records using different methods.
* compute the area of different types of cross-sections and volume of earthwork from cross-sections.
* calculate capacity of reservoir and borrow pit.

Book
I)
Levelling

Levelling(Vol-
I)

I)
Surveying(Vol- Dr. B.C. Punamia

I)

of Surveying
and Levelling
Surveying
Course-6
Semester 3
Course Code MSPC211
Course Title Levelling and Contouring
Pre requisites Elementary Mathematics, Engineering Drawing and Physics

Course
Category PC
Course objectives

*To impart introductory knowledge about different basic terminologies
*To impart knowledge of different leveling instruments and its accessories
*To impart ideas about different methods of leveling and profile making
*To impart concept of contouring
Course
Content: Unit 1: Levelling terminologies
Concept of levelling, uses of levelling, Definition of

important terms used in levelling.
Datum elevation, vertical angle, mean sea level and

bench mark.
Levelling Instruments- Different types- parts and

function of dumpy level, and automatic level.
Levelling staff- Self-reading staff and target staff,

relative merits of self-reading and target staves.
Sensitivity of spirit level- methods of determining

sensitivity. Parallel plate micrometer.
Unit 2: Tests and Types of levelling
Tests and adjustments of dumpy level & tilting level.
Methods of levelling- Spirit levelling

Special methods of spirit levelling- Details of
differential levelling, profile levelling, cross-sectioning
& reciprocal levelling and Precise levelling.
Unit 3: Booking and Numerical on Levelling
Methods of booking, calculation of reduced levels &

plotting of level sections
Recording and plotting of longitudinal section of an

alignment.
Levelling problems like taking level of an overhead point
Levelling in an inclined plane on surface and underground
Sources of errors in levelling, precautions.

Numericals
Unit 4: Contouring
Basic concept, contour interval.
Characteristics of contour.
Methods of locating contours.
Interpolation & extrapolation of contour.

Contour gradient.
Use of contour maps.
Locating the proposed route for a road on a contour
map.
Establishing grade contours, stratum contour,
isopachytes.

*Describe different terminologies
*Explain different leveling instruments and its accessories
*Describe different methods of leveling , make profile
*Plot contour plan

Book
I & II)
Levelling
Levelling(Vol-I
& II)

I & II)
I & II)
Surveying
Practical Courses
Course-1
Semester 3
Cousre Code MSPC213
Course Title Chain Surveying Lab
No of Credits 1.5 ( L:0 , P:3, T:0)
Pre requisites Nil

Course
Category PC
Course objectives

* know the constructional details and the uses of chain, tape and accessories used in chain survey.
* learn about locating survey stations and ranging a chain line.
* learn about measuring distance between two stations and taking offsets in different conditions.
* learn about reciprocal ranging.
* know about computation of area of a piece of land using cross staff survey.
* learn about procedure of chain survey on a small ground for locating its boundary,
* know about how to do chain survey when obastacles in chaining occur.
Study and sketch of measuring chain and tape, Ranging rod, Arrow, Plumb bob etc.
Locating survey stations and ranging a survey line.
Measure distance between two intervisible stations and take offsets using chain, tape and ranging rods.
Undertake reciprocal ranging and measure distance between two stations which are not intervisible.
Do chain survey on a piece of land for locating boundary.
Determine area of a field using cross staff survey.
Determine area of a piece of land bounded by a chain line and irregular boundary.
Compute distance between two stations when vision is free but chaining is obstructed.

* explain constructional details and uses of chain, tape, ranging rod, arrows, plumb bob etc.
* To do ranging and taking offsets between two survey stations.
* perform reciprocal ranging when two survey stations are not intervisible.
* compute area of any piece of land using cross staff survey.
* make chain survey on a small ground for locating its boundary.
* do chain survey when obastacles in chaining occur.

Book
Levelling(Vol-
I)

I)
I)
of Surveying
and Levelling
Surveying
Course-2
Semester 3
Course Code MSPC215
Course Title Traverse Survey Lab
Pre requisites Nil

Course
Category PC
Course objectives

* Handle Miners' Dial
* work using Prismatic Compass
* Form Open traverse with the help of Miners' Dial and Prismatic compass separately
* read magnetic bearings of survey lines with the help of Miners' Dial and Prismatic Compass
* Conduct a closed traverse with the help of Miners' Dial
* Handle Vernier theodolite
* Read vernier readings of a theodolite
* measure horizontal and vertical angles
* lead a survey team to conduct a theodolite traverse survey
* Compute coordinates from given/measured angles and bearings along with corresponding length of a
traverse
* Adjust the closing error of a geometrically closed traverse using rules generally used in surveying
* Prepare plan from the measured and adjusted data of a theodolite traverse
* Operate Microptic theodolite
* Make traverse survey using microptic theodolite
* Sketch and label different parts of a miners' dial

* Sketch and label different parts of prismatic compass
*Measurment of bearings of survey lines and their plottings
* Sketch and label different parts of vernier theodolite
*Measurement of horizontal angles by repetition method and its plotting
*Protector plotting of Theodolite traverse
*Coordinate plotting of theodolite traverse

* identify different parts of prismatic compasss and Miner's Dial and explain the function of them
* Conduct compass survey and Theodolite survey individually with assistants
* plot traverse survey using protector
* Plot travese survey by coordinate plotting method

Authors
I)
Surveying(Vol- Dr. B.C. Punamia Laxmi publication
I)
of Surveying
and Levelling
Surveying
Course -3
Semester 3
Cousre Code MSPC217
Course Title AutoCad Lab
Pre requisites Basic knowledge of mathematics and Engineering Drawing& Computer basics
Course
Category PC
Course objectives

* impart introductory knowledge of drawing by computer
* impart concept of different computer drawing components (drawing menu)
* impart basic ideas about using different menu to draw an object
* impart concept of making multiple copies of the object
List of experiments of Auto Cad Lab
Sl. No. Experiment using the commands

GETTING STARTED –I
Starting AutoCAD – AutoCAD screen components – Starting a drawing: Open drawings, Create
1 drawings (Start from scratch, Use a template & Use a wizard) – Invoking commands in AutoCAD
–Drawing lines in AutoCAD – Co-ordinate systems: Absolute co-ordinate system, Relative co-
ordinate system – Direct distance method – Saving a drawing: Save & Save As – Closing a
drawing – Quitting AutoCAD
2
GETTING STARTED – II
Opening an existing file – Concept of Object – Object selection methods: Pick by box, Window
selection, Crossing Selection, All, Fence, Last, Previous, Add, Remove – Erasing objects: OOPS
3
command, UNDO / REDO commands – ZOOM command – PAN command, Panning in real time
– Setting units – Object snap, running object snap mode – Drawing circles
DRAW COMMANDS
4 ARC command – RECTANG command – ELLIPSE command, elliptical arc –

POLYGON command (regular polygon) – PLINE command – DONUT command –
POINT command – Construction Line: XLINE command, RAY command – MULTILINE
command
EDITING
COMMANDS
5 MOVE command – COPY command – OFFSET command – ROTATE command – SCALE command
– STRETCH command – LENGTHEN command –TRIM command – EXTEND command – BREAK
command – CHAMFER command – FILLET command – ARRAY command – MIRROR command –
MEASURE command – DIVIDE command – EXPLODE command – MATCHPROP command –
Editing with grips: PEDIT
DRAWING AIDS
6 MOVE command – COPY command – OFFSET command – ROTATE command – SCALE command
– STRETCH command – LENGTHEN command –TRIM command – EXTEND command – BREAK
command – CHAMFER command – FILLET command – ARRAY command – MIRROR command –
MEASURE command – DIVIDE command – EXPLODE command – MATCHPROP command –
Editing with grips: PEDIT
CREATING TEXT
7 Creating single line text – Drawing special characters – Creating multiline text – Editing
text – Text style
BASIC
DIMENSIONING
8 Fundamental dimensioning terms: Dimension lines, dimension text, arrowheads, extension

lines, leaders, centre marks and centrelines, alternate units – Associative dimensions –
Dimensioning methods – Drawing leader
INQUIRY COMMANDS
9 AREA – DIST – ID –
LIST – DBLIST –
STATUS –
DWGPROPS
EDITING
DIMENSIONS
10 Editing dimensions by stretching – Editing dimensions by trimming & extending – Editing

dimensions: DIMEDIT command – Editing dimension text: DIMTEDIT command – Updating
dimensions – Editing dimensions using the properties window – Creating and restoring
Dimension styles: DIMSTYLE
HATCHING
11 BHATCH, HATCH commands – Boundary Hatch Options: Quick tab, Advance tab – Hatching
around Text, Traces, Attributes, Shapes and Solids – Editing Hatch Boundary – BOUNDARY
command
BLOCKS
The concept of Blocks – Converting objects into a Block: BLOCK, _BLOCK commands – Nesting
of Blocks – Inserting Blocks: INSERT, MINSERT commands – Creating drawing files: WBLOCK
command – Defining Block Attributes – Inserting Blocks with Attributes – Editing Attributes
12 PLOTTING
DRAWINGS IN
AUTOCAD
PLOT command – Plot Configuration – Pen Assignments – Paper Size & Orientation Area – Plot
Rotation & Origin – Plotting Area – Scale
13
PRACTICE WITH
COMPLETE
DRAWING
Each student is required to prepare a set of orthographic projections of a building. The drawing
of the building will be supplied by the teacher-in-charge.

understand introductory knowledge of drawing by computer

explain concept of different computer drawing components (drawing menu)
handle basic menu about drawing an object
Draw multiple copies of an object
Draw section of a ground
Cut and fill vol calculation

Authors
Vishal Sharma AUTOCAD Dhanpat Rai Publishing company (P) Ltd
D M Kulkarni, Engineering Graphics PHI Learning

A P Rastogi, A with AutoCAD
K Sarkar
Dinesh AutoCAD 2010 Laxmi Publication

Maidasani
Sub 4: lab
Semester 3
Cousre Code MSPC219
Course Title Levelling and Contouring Lab
Pre requisites Knowledge of Geometry and Optics

Course
Category PC
Course objectives
* Handle Dumpuy Level and Auto level
* Make Temporary adjustment of Dumpy level and Auto level
*Make Permanent adjustment of Dumpy level and Auto Level
*Take reading with Dumpy leveland Auto Level
* Calculate least count of Staff
*Calculate RL from staffreading
*Make Plotting of Profile of a ground section
*Make Plotting of contour by grid method
*Calculate contour interval
* Design of a canal by cut and fill calculation

Diagram of Dumpy level with showing all its components
Diagram of Auto Level with showing its components
Diagram of Staff
Profile drawing of a ground section
Preparation of Contour plan of a given site
Cut and fill volume calculation of a canal design in a given site
Shifting of BM from a known station to the working site

* Identify different parts of Dumpy level and Auto Level and explain the function of them
* Conduct levelling survey individually with assistants
*Handle vernier Dumpy level and Auto level independently
* Plot Profile of a ground section survey
* Plot Contour lines in a site by grid method

Book
I & II)
Levelling

Levelling(Vol-I
& II)
I & II)
Surveying(Vol- Dr. B.C. Punamia
I & II)
Surveying
END
CURRICULUM OF 3ᴿᴰ SEMESTER
FOR
DIPLOMA IN MINING ENGINEERING
(EFFECTIVE FROM SESSIONS 2020-21)
WEST BENGAL STATE COUNCIL OF TECHNICAL & VOCATIONAL

EDUCATION AND SKILL DEVELOPMENT
Karigari Bhavan, 4th Floor, Plot No. B/7, Action Area-III, Newtown, Rajarhat, Kolkata–700 160
Curriculum for Diploma in Mining Engineering
SEMESTER III
Sl. Category Code Course Title Hours per week Total Credi Marks
No No. contact ts
hrs/
L T P
week
1. Program core MINPC Introduction to Mining 3 0 0 3 3 100

course 301 Technology
2. Program core MINPC Underground Mine 2 0 0 2 2 100

course 302 Environment
3. Program core MINPC 2 0 0 2 2 100

course 303 Drilling & Blasting
4. Program core MINPC Underground Coal 2 0 0 2 2 100

course 304 Mining

course 305 Surface Mining

course 306 Mining Geology
7. Program core MINPC Underground Mine 0 0 2 2 1 100

course 311 Environment Lab.
8. Program core MINPC Drilling & Blasting 0 0 2 2 1 100

course 312 Lab.
9 Program core MINPC 0 0 2 2 1 100

course 313 Mining Operations Lab.

course 314 Mining Geology Lab.
11. Internship-I after MINSI 0 0 0 0 1 100

Semester II 341
TOTAL 22 19 1100
L- LECTURE, T- TUTORIAL, P- PRACTICAL/ LAB

Course Code : MINPC 301
Course Title : Introduction to Mining Technology
Number of Credits : 3 (L : 3, T : 0, P : 0)
Prerequisites : Basic knowledge in Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry &

Engineering Graphics
TOPIC WISE DISTRIBUTION OF THE COURSE:
UNIT TOPIC LECTURE TUTORIAL

PERIODS PERIODS
I Introductory concepts 9 0
II Indian Mining & Mineral industries 6 0
III Mode of entry to Coal/ Mineral deposit 3 0
IV Exploratory Drilling 9 0
V Shaft Sinking 12 0
VI Coal as a Fuel 6 0
Course Objectives:

● To have an introductory idea about occurrence of coal & minerals and their mining.
● To have an introductory idea about the Indian Mining Industry.
● To understand the different modes of entry to Coal/ Mineral deposits.
● To know about pre-mining exploratory operations.
● To know the development of a new mine.
● To know Coal as a fuel.
Course Content:
Unit- I Introductory concepts
● Basic concepts- Rock, Mineral, Mineral deposit, Mine, Coal seam etc.
● Origin & formation of Coal
● Brief idea about the different processes of formation & mode of occurrence of mineral deposits.
● Petrology-Classification rocks- Igneous, Sedimentary & Metamorphic; Different forms & structures
of igneous rocks- Dyke, Sill, Laccolith, Phacolith, Batholith,Pillow Structure; Different forms &
structures of sedimentary rocks- bedding, cross-bedding, graded bedding, ripple marks, mud
cracks; Metamorphism
● Structural geology-
○ Primary structure- Utility of studying primary structures as above.
○ Secondary structure- definitions of dip, strike, fold, fault, joint & unconformity; Types of
Fold & Fault; Criteria for their recognition
Unit- II Indian Mining & Mineral industries
● Indian Mining & Mineral industries- Introduction; Classification of mineral materials

● Indian occurrences of coal
● Indian occurrences & ore minerals of the following mineral deposits; Iron, Manganese, Gold,
Copper, Aluminium, Chromium, Lead-Zinc, Petroleum & Natural Gas
Unit- III Mode of entry to Coal/ Mineral deposit
● Haul roads & Steps- Basic concepts

● Incline & Adit- Applicability, Size & Shape, Site selection
● Shaft- Applicability, Size, Shape & Number
● Shaft vs Incline; Relevant Regulations, i.e. Regulation 71- 75 of CMR 2017
● Other modes of entry- Basic concept only
Unit- IV Exploratory Drilling
● Prospecting- Definition, different methods in brief only.

● Boreholes- Uses, Classification of boring/ drilling
● Percussive methods- by rigid rods, Power drilling, Rope drilling, Boring tools used
● Rotary drilling- Various methods of operation, Different types of bits, Diamond drilling
● Feed mechanism- Screw feed & Hydraulic feed
● Exploration & Drilling - Basic idea of Exploration & Prospecting; Exploratory agencies in India
● Core recovery- Single tube, Double tube & Triple tube core barrel- Description & Operation;
Wireline core barrel
● Troubles during boring operation- Caving of borehole, Loss of water, Deviation of borehole, Cutter
bit or rod damage/ disengagement, breakage & loss of diamond- causes & remedies; Borehole
survey & findings; Fishing tools
Unit- V Shaft Sinking
● Types of shafts- Vertical & Inclined shafts; Site selection for a shaft, Shaft Pillar, Rules for size of
a Shaft Pillar
● Conventional method of shaft sinking- Drilling, Blasting, Mucking & Hoisting; Surface plant &
equipment
● Wall support & shaft lining- Temporary & Permanent
● Auxiliary operations- dewatering, ventilation, lighting, shaft centering etc.
● Shaft sinking through difficult strata- Caisson method, Cementation method, Freezing process-
Description & Operation etc.
● Deepening of existing shaft; Widening of shaft; Upward drivage of shaft
● Mechanised shaft sinking- Vertical Shaft sinking machine, Shaft Boring system- Merits &
Demerits, Description & Operation
Unit- VI Coal as a Fuel
● Different types of fuel; Coal as a fuel

● Ranks of coal; Grades of coal; Banded constituent of coal; Commercial grades of coal
● Proximate & Ultimate analysis of coal
● Calorific value & its determination
● Carbonisation of coal- Low & High temperature carbonisation
● Coking coal and its properties like Caking index, Shatter index, Micum index etc.; Consumption of
coking coal in India; Different types of coke
● Coke oven gas, Producer gas, Water gas etc.
● Consumptions of coal in different industries
1. Elements of Mining Technology, Vol 1, D.J. Deshmukh, Denet Publications, Nagpur

2. Introduction to Mining, G.K.Pradhan, Mintech Publications, Bhubaneswar
3. Principle & Practices of Coal Mining, R.D. Singh
4. Hartman, H. L., Introduction to Mining Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1999.
Course outcomes:
After completing this course, student will be able to:

● Explain the fundamental geological aspects of coal and mineral deposits.
● Describe the mining industry as a whole, particularly the Indian Mining sector.
● Describe the modes of access to a deposit.
● Design the exploratory drilling techniques.
● Explain the process of shaft sinking.
● State the various properties of coal as a fuel.
**************

Course Title : Underground Mine Environment

PERIODS PERIODS
I Atmospheric Air and Mine Air 6 0
II Damp 2 0
III Firedamp 6 0
IV Detection of Mine Gases 6 0
V Heat and Humidity 6 0
VI Mine Dust 4 0
Course Objectives:
The followings are the objective of this course -
● To be aware about different mine gases and dangers associated with these gases above the
permissible limit.
● To learn about different compositions of gases which are potentially dangerous.
● To learn about inflammable gas in mine and preventive measures to be taken.
● To perform different tests to detect different mine gases.
● To identify the causes of heat and humidity addition in the mine atmosphere and to perform
different tests to measure the same.
● To know about the hazard associated with respirable mine dust and control measures of the
same.
Course Content:
UNIT-I Atmospheric Air and Mine Air
● Composition of atmospheric air and mine air

● Mine gases and their properties, sources, physiological effects, permissible concentration/ limit in
percentage and PPM (Parts Per Million).
● Standards of ventilation in mine.
UNIT-II Damp
● Blackdamp – Calculation of percentage of blackdamp from an analysis of a sample of mine air.

● Firedamp – Composition and threat
● Whitedamp, Composition and threat
● Stink Damp - Composition and threat
● Afterdamp - Composition and threat
UNIT -III Firedamp
● Emission of firedamp in U/G working- Factors, Gradual Exudation, Outburst - Prediction of

outburst, Prevention of outburst, Gas Blowers - Dealing with Gas Blowers.
● Calculation of methane emission per tonne of coal mined.
● Statutory precautions against inflammable gas (under CMR-2017- Regulation: 166)
● Gassy seam of the First, Second and Third degree
● Streaming and layering of methane
● Methane Drainage
UNIT- IV Detection of Mine Gases
● Flame Safety Lamp- Working principle, Description of various parts of FSL, Gas testing by FSL,
Accumulation test & Percentage test, Precautions during gas testing, Limitations of FSL.
● Methanometer – working principle, detection procedure
● Carbon monoxide detector- detection procedure
● Brief idea on Multi Gas Detector
UNIT- V Heat and Humidity
● Source of heat in mines, Geothermal gradient

● Dry bulb temperature, Wet bulb temperature, Humidity, Relative humidity, Measurement of
Relative humidity - Hygrometer, Whirling Hygrometer.
● Kata Thermometer - Instrument description, working principle, Determination of cooling power
using kata thermometer
● Effect of heat and humidity on human body
● Control measures against Heat and Humidity in underground mines.
UNIT- VI Mine Dust
● Airborne respirable dust- Sources and Control measures, Physiological effects

● Permissible limit of airborne respirable dust as per statute.
● Airborne respirable dust survey with personal dust sampler.
1. D.J. Deshmukh: Elements of Mining Technology Vol. 2

2. G. B. Misra: Mine Environment and Ventilation, OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
3. C.M.R. 2017 & DGMS Circulars
4. S.P. Banerjee : Mine Ventilation
Course Outcomes:
After completion of this course, students will be able to-
● Take precautions against different asphyxiating, toxic and noxious gases in mines.
● Deal with potentially dangerous damps.
● Take necessary precautions against accumulation of inflammable gas in underground mines.
● Execute the detection of different mine gases and measure the concentration of the same.
● Keep the mine working environment free from high heat and humidity.
● Apply his acquired knowledge to maintain the airborne respirable dust below the permissible limit
in the working environment.
**************

Course Title : Drilling & Blasting

PERIODS PERIODS
I Production Drilling in Mines 6 0
II Explosives 6 0
III Blasting Practices in U/G Mines 8 0
IV Drilling Practices in O/C Mines 4 0
V Blasting Practices in O/C Mines 6 0
Course Objectives:
● To understand operational aspects of different types of drilling machines.

● To have an idea about explosives & accessories used in U/G & O/C mines
● To know about different kinds of explosives used in mines.
● To learn blasting practices in underground mines.
● To learn drilling practices in opencast mines.
● To learn blasting practices in opencast mines.
Course Content:
Unit- I Production Drilling in Mines
● Production drill machines- factors of selection, different types including pneumatic drilling-
operational aspects
● Types of flushing fluid and circulation of flushing fluid- Direct circulation & Reverse circulation
● Different drilling patterns used in UG mines
● Drill bits- different types; their field of applications
● Different types of drill rods & their applications
● Pollution control measures in drilling.- basic concepts only
Unit- II Explosives
● Definition of explosives, Constituents of explosives, Properties of explosives, Classification of

explosives (Low & High explosives, Permitted & Non-permitted explosives) and their examples &
uses
● Detonators & Accessories- Construction of a detonator; Different types of detonators; Advantages
and Disadvantages of delay detonators; Relays, Safety Fuses, Detonating Fuses (Cord);
Explosive Booster
● Exploders-Different types, construction and safety feature of exploders
● Explosives used in opencast mines including ANFO, HANFO, Slurry Explosives (SMS & PMS),
LOX, Emulsion Explosives Including SME
Unit- III Blasting Practices in U/G Mines
● Shot firing tools, preparation of charge & procedure of firing shots- direct and indirect initiation,
simultaneous and delay firing
● Calculation of explosive quantity, powder factor, detonator factor etc.
● Solid blasting- Advantage and disadvantage, precautions and restrictions, patterns of shot holes
● Transportation & storage of explosive, Handling of explosives
● Magazine- Types, Layout, Construction & Safety features
● Common causes of accidents from explosives; Misfired shots, Dealing with misfires; Blown
through & blown out shots and associated dangers, Remedial measures required.
Unit- IV Drilling Practices in O/C Mines
● Vertical holes, Inclined holes, Advantages & disadvantages of Inclined holes, Subgrade Drilling,
Stiffness ratio
● Different drilling patterns used in O/C mines
● Blast Design Parameters- Bench height, Blast hole diameter, Burden, Spacing, Hole depth,
Subgrade, Stemming, Hole Inclination, Blast Size (Length & Width).
Unit- V Blasting Practices in O/C Mines
● Blasting accessories, charging of blast holes, Procedure of blasting, Danger Zone, Blasting
shelter
● Deck Charging, Muffle Blasting, Single row & multi row blasting using relays, Blasting with
non-electric detonator (NONEL) and shock tube-based system; Blasting with electronic
detonators (brief idea only).
● Controlled blasting techniques; Precautions necessary for blasting in hot holes; Safety measures
during the approach and progress of an electric storm; Sleeping Holes.
● Secondary Blasting-Pop Shooting, Plaster shooting- procedures, advantages and disadvantages;
Cast Blasting- elementary idea only.

2. Explosive and Blasting Practices in Mines, Samir Kumar Das, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad
4. C.M.R. 2017
5. Surface Blast Design. Konya K. J. and Walter E. J. Prentice Hall. 303 p.
6. Fundamentals of Drilling Engineering. Societyof Petroleum Engineers. Mitchell R. F. and Miska S.
7. Pradhan G. K. and Sandhu M. S.2002. Blasting Safety Manual. IME Publications,
Course outcomes:
● Select and know the use of a drill machine for given conditions.
● Select suitable drill patterns for various rock conditions.
● Use different types of explosives in mines.
● Perform blasting operations in U/G mines.
● Explain drilling operations in O/C mines.
● Perform blasting operations in O/C mines.
**************

Course Title : Underground Coal Mining

PERIODS PERIODS
I Selection of methods of working 4 0
II Bord and Pillar Mining- Development 8 0
III Bord and Pillar Mining- Depillaring 4 0
IV Longwall Mining 8 0
V Stowing 6 0
Course Objectives:
● To know the factors for different methods of working of a coal mine.

● To learn the development and depillaring operations of Bord and Pillar working.
● To learn the development and extraction processes associated with Longwall working.
● To know the operations of various machineries used in an underground coal mine.
● To understand the stowing operation in mining.
Course Content:
Unit- I Selection of methods of working
● Factors influencing the selection of mining methods- Physical, Technical & Economical
● Classification of coal mining methods in India.
Unit- II Bord and Pillar Mining- Development
● Suitability or Unsuitability of Bord and Pillar method

● Idea of Galleries and Pillars; Basic terminologies associated with Bord and Pillar method of
working
● Development by Cross cut
● Classification of Bord and Pillar- Schematic layouts, advantages & disadvantages of different
methods giving special emphasis on Panel system of working
● Main elements of Bord and Pillar – size of pillars, size of panels, size of coal barriers,
requirements in Panel
● Working principles of Development in Bord and Pillar method of working, Activities associated
with solid blasting- basic idea only, calculation of percentage of extraction
● Machineries associated in Bord and Pillar working – Drill, SDL, LHD, Haulage, Conveyor –
operational aspects only
● Simple layout of Development in Bord and Pillar
Unit- III Bord and Pillar Mining- Depillaring
● Depillaring – Factors influencing depillaring, Preparatory arrangements

● Manners of pillar extraction- Slicing method & Stook method, Line of extraction – different types
with pros and cons, Types of pillar extraction in a panel, Different challenges in depillaring and
precautions to be taken
● Simple layouts of Depillaring methods in Bord and Pillar
Unit- III Longwall Mining
● Application of Longwall Mining; Longwall Mining vs Bord & Pillar Mining- Advantages &
Disadvantages
● Length and Direction of a Longwall Face- factors to be considered
● Terminologies associated with a longwall panel; Different types of longwall working- Advancing &
Retreating; Cyclic & Non- cyclic- advantages and disadvantages; Comparison between
Advancing & Retreating Methods
● Development of longwall panel- use of Roadheader in development, preparatory arrangements
for a longwall face
● Longwall layouts - basic idea only
● Different machineries like Power Support, AFC, Shearer, Plow, Stage Loader- operational
aspects only
● Challenges associated with longwall workings.
Unit- IV Stowing
● Conditions at which Stowing is practised; Advantages of stowing

● Different types of stowing- Hand packing, Hydraulic Stowing, Pneumatic & Mechanical Stowing
● Procedures with equipments for different types of stowing; Troubles during stowing operations
● Layouts of Bord & Pillar Depillaring with stowing and Longwall Retreating with stowing

2. Das, S. K., Modern Coal Mining Technology, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad, 1992
3. Singh, R. D., Principles & Practices of Modern Coal Mining, New Age International, New Delhi,
1997
4. Singh, T. N., Underground winning of Coal, Oxford and IBH, New Delhi, 1992
5. Statham, I. C. F., Coal Mining Practice, Caxton eastern agencies, Calcutta, Reprint, 1964
Course outcomes:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
● Select the proper method of working in given conditions.

● Design a Bord and Pillar development district.
● Design a Bord and Pillar depillaring district.
● Design a simple layout of a coal mine.
● Design layout of a mine having a Longwall method of working.
● Explain operational aspects of various machineries deployed in underground coal mines.
● Describe different stowing techniques.
**************
Course Title : Surface Mining

Prerequisites : Basic knowledge in Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry and

PERIODS PERIODS
I Introduction to Surface Mining 6 0
II Opening of a mine 9 0
III Classification of Surface Mines ( basic 3 0

concept only)
IV Different machineries used in Opencast Mines 15 0
V Opencast layout 6 0
VI Haul Road and Spoil Bank 3 0
VII Land Reclamation 3 0
Course Objectives:
● To get introduced to the subject with Pros and Cons and to become familiar with different terms.
● To understand the procedure of mine opening.
● To become familiar with classification of Surface mines.
● To know about different machineries required for different mining activities.
● To understand the layout of surface mines.
● To know about the basic construction and safety arrangements of haul road and stability of spoil
banks.
● To understand the concept of land reclamation.
UNIT- I Introduction of Surface mining

● Definition of Surface mining, Applicability
● Advantages and disadvantages
● Concept of bench , bench height , bench width, Bench slope angle, Average slope , ultimate pit
slope.
● Coal : OB thickness ratio , stripping ratio, break-even stripping ratio, Factors controlling
break-even stripping ratio and its improvement.
UNIT-II Opening of a mine
● Site preparation, Box cut , Location of Box cut
● Factors affecting height & width of bench, Bench height and width in Manual and mechanized
opencast working.
● Bench Slope : Slope stability- basic concept on structural Geological Information,
Geomechanical Information , Ground Water / Geohydrography , Dynamic loading.
UNIT- III Classification of Surface Mines ( basic concept only):
● Continuous mining, Semicontinuous mining, Discontinuous or cyclic mining
UNIT- IV Different machineries used in Opencast Mines
● Single bucket excavators:
○ Shovel – Description, Field of application, Principles of operation. Bucket fill factor, cycle
time, angle of swing factor.
■ Bucket capacity calculation with the following data – cycle time, density of
material ( in tonne per cubic meter) , bucket fill factor and output target ( of the
machine) in tonne / hour.
○ Dragline - Description, Principles of operation and cycle of operation.
● Multi-bucket excavator:
○ Bucket wheel excavator - Description, Field of application, Principles of operation.
● Surface miner - Applicability and Limitations, Principles of operation
● Dumpers: Description, Operation and safety features
● Dozers: Description, Operations and field application
● Auxiliary equipments: Different auxiliary equipments used in opencast mines with operations;
● Different combinations of earth moving machineries.
UNIT- V Opencast layouts
● Layout with Shovel-Dumper combination
● Spiral layout
UNIT- VI Haul Road and Spoil Bank
● Construction, Safety arrangements and Advantages of good haul road;
● Spoil bank – Stability and Safety measures .
UNIT- VII Land Reclamation
● Objectives
● Methods
1. Surface Mining Technology – S.K.Das

2. Surface Mining – G.B.Misra
3. Elements of mining technology (Vol-I ) - D.J.Deshmukh
4. Principles and Practices of Modern Coal Mining – R.D.Singh
5. C.M.R. 2017
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, students will be able to:
● Understand as to where such Surface mining operation to be conducted and use different terms
related to this operation.
● Carry out different mining operations in sequential manner.
● Classify Surface Mining Practice.
● Take the decision to deploy different HEMMs in different mining operations.
● Layout opencast mine under different mining conditions.
● Construct good haul roads and take preventive safety measures in spoil banks.
● Carry out Land reclamation procedure during and after mining operation.
**************
Course Title : Mining Geology
Prerequisites : Basic knowledge in Physics, Chemistry & Engineering

Graphics

PERIODS PERIODS
I Basic Geology 4 0
II Mineralogy 6 0
III Stratigraphy 10 0
IV Economic Geology 6 0
V Geological Mapping 4 0
Course Objectives:
● To have an introductory idea about the science of the Earth.

● To know about different minerals and their crystal systems.
● To have an idea of Stratigraphy.
● To study historical geology of different important regions in India.
● To learn about different coalfields and mineral deposits in India.
● To have an introductory concept about Geological Mapping.
Course Content:
Unit- I Basic Geology
● Study of Geology- Its importance and interest

● Brief idea about origin, age & interior of the Earth
● Branches of Geology- their brief description
● Physical Geology –Name of different natural agencies working on the surface of the Earth.
Definition of Weathering, Erosion, Mantle and Denudation
Unit- II Mineralogy
● Mineralogy- Definition of Crystal & Mineral, Ore Minerals & Rock forming Minerals
● Study of Crystals- Crystal, Crystalline & Amorphous substances, Different kinds of symmetry,
Different Crystal systems
● Physical properties of minerals
Unit- III Stratigraphy
● Brief idea about Stratigraphy; Principles of stratigraphy and Correlation, Stratigraphic units;
Geological divisions of India, Physiographic divisions of India- brief description;
● Geological time scale –including Indian system
● Precambrian Study- brief idea; Generalised classification & correlation of Archean and Lower
Proterozoic formation of India;
● Study in brief Precambrian Stratigraphy of the following regions of Indian sub-continent;
○ Karnataka
○ Rajasthan
○ Singhbhum
● Stratigraphy of the Gondwana system in brief- Gondwana Climate and Sedimentation,
Classification; Lower Gondwana coal fields- brief description of different formations
Unit- IV Economic Geology
● Definition of Ores, Ore minerals, Gangue minerals, Tenor, Grade, Metallogenic epoch,
Metallogenic province.
● Brief geological idea about the following mineral deposits in India:
○ Singhbhum Copper & Iron ore deposit
○ Manganese deposit of Madhya Pradesh
○ Gold deposit of Karnataka.
● Coal; Difference between Lower-Gondwana and Tertiary Coals
● Brief geological idea about the-
○ Jharia Coalfield
○ Raniganj Coalfield.
Unit- V Geological Mapping
● Definition- Contour map and Geological map. Recognition of the following structures: Horizontal,
Inclined and Vertical beds, Folds, Faults, Unconformities, Dykes, Silts on geological maps.
● Description of a Geological Map
1. Mukherjee, P. K., A TextBook of Geology, The World Press Pvt. Ltd., 9th Edition, 1982
3. Singh, P., Geology for Engineers, IBH Publications, N. Delhi. 1991.
4. Holemess, A., Principles of Physical Geology, Thomas Nelson and Sons, USA, 1964.
5. Ford, W. E., Dana‟s Textbook of Mineralogy (4th edition), Wiley Eastern Ltd., N. Delhi, 1989.
6. Winter, J. D., An Introduction to Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology, Prentice Hall, N. Delhi,
2001.
7. Billings, M. P., Structural Geology, Prentice Hall Ino., N. Jersey, USA, 1972.
8. Krishnan, M. S., Geology of India and Burma, 3rd Edition, IBH Publishers, N. Delhi, 1984.
9. Blyth, F. G. H. and de Freitas, M. H., Geology for Engineers, 7th edition, Elsevier Publications,
2006.
10. Bell, F. G., Engineering Geology, Elsevier Publications, 2007.
Course outcomes:
● State the scope and applications of Geology.

● Explain about the minerals and their crystal systems.
● Explain the historical geology of the Earth and Geological Time Scale.
● State geological and physiographic divisions of India.
● Apply geological knowledge to correlate different coalfields and mineral deposits in India.
● Interpret Geological Maps.
**************
Course Title : Underground Mine Environment Lab.

Graphics
Course Objectives:
Following are the objectives of the course-
● To learn about different types of flame safety lamps (FSL) and different parts of a FSL.
● To learn about the use of FSL for accumulation test and percentage test of inflammable gas in
mine air.
● To know the use of Methanometer and CO-detector.
● To determine the environmental condition with Kata thermometer, Hygrometer and Whirling
hygrometer.
List of practicals to be performed:
Sl. No Name of the practicals to be performed
1 Study of different types of flame safety lamps and their different parts
2 Use of FSL for accumulation test and percentage test of inflammable gas
3 Disassembling and assembling of Flame Safety Lamp
4 Study of Methanometer
5 Study of CO-detector
6 Determination of cooling power of atmospheric air using Kata Thermometer
7 Measurement of relative humidity using Fixed Hygrometer and Whirling Hygrometer
1. Deshmukh D.J. (2007): Elements of Mining Technology Vol. 2. (9th Edition). Denett & Company,
Nagpur.
2. G. B. Misra : Mine Environment and Ventilation , OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
3. Kaku L. C (2021): A study of Mine Management Legislation & General Safety, Lovely Prakashan,
Dhanbad
4. McPherson M J (1993): Subsurface Ventilation Engineering (web edition). Downloadable from
http://www.mvsengineering.com
5. McPherson M J (2009): Subsurface Ventilation and Environmental engineering (2nd edition).
Chapman and Hall,
6. Ramlu M A (2007): Mine Disasters and Mine Rescue. (2nd Edition). Universities Press,
Hyderabad.
7. Sengupta D.K (2020): Gas Testing Reference Book, Gita Book Store, Chanda
Course outcomes:
After completing this course, students will able to:

● Identify different types of FSL and its different parts with disassembling and assembling.
● Demonstrate the procedure of accumulation test and percentage test of inflammable gas in air
using FSL.
● Use a Methanometer and CO-detector to detect Firedamp and Carbon Monoxide respectively.
● Determine Cooling power and relative humidity of air.
**************
Course Title : Drilling & Blasting Lab.

Graphics
Course Objectives:
Following are the objective of this course:
● To know different types of drill bits & drill rods used in mines.
● To learn different shot hole patterns in coal and rock headings.
● To have an idea about explosives & accessories used in U/G & O/C mines
● To learn blasting patterns in underground mines.
● To learn drilling & blasting patterns in opencast mines.
1 Study & sketch of different types of drill bits.
2 Study & sketch of different types of drill rods.
3 Study & sketch of different shot hole patterns used in coal & rock heading.
4 Study & sketch of circuit testers.
5 Study & sketch of exploders.
6 Study & sketch of stemming rod, scraper cum break detector, blasting cable, crimper
7 Study & sketch of blasting pattern in shaft sinking
8 Study & sketch of single row blasting pattern
9 Study & sketch of multi row blasting pattern
10 Study of blast design parameters of the opencast bench.

2. Explosive and Blasting practices in mines, Samir Kumar Das, Lovely Prakashan, Dhanbad
4. Surface Blast Design. Konya K. J. and Walter E. J. Prentice Hall. 303 p.
5. Fundamentals of Drilling Engineering. Society of Petroleum Engineers. Mitchell R. F. and Miska
S.
6. Pradhan G. K. and Sandhu M. S.2002. Blasting Safety Manual. IME Publications
Course outcomes:
● Select and know the use of different drill bits and drill rods for given conditions.
● Select suitable drill patterns for various rock conditions.
● Use different types of explosives in mines.
● Perform blasting operations in U/G mines.
● Perform blasting operations O/C mines.
**************

Course Title : Mining Operations Lab
Prerequisites : Basic knowledge of different methods of mining operations,
Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics & Engineering Graphics
Course Objectives:
● Learn Working & Layout of Bord and Pillar MIning method.

● Learn Working & Layout of Longwall MIning method.
● Learn different layouts of stowing operations.
● Understand the opening of a Surface Mine.
● Idea about different widely used layouts of Surface Mining operations.
● Learn different tunneling methods.

1. Study and Sketch of Bord & Pillar development workings.
2. Study and Sketch of Bord & Pillar depillaring with caving.
3 Study and Sketch of Mechanized Advancing Long-wall workings.
4. Study and Sketch of Mechanized Retreating Long-wall workings.
5. Study and Sketch of Bord & Pillar Depillaring with Stowing
6. Study and Sketch of Longwall Retreating with Stowing
7. Study and Sketch of Box cut (External and Internal).
8. Study of Opencast layout with Shovel-Dumper combination.
9. Study and Sketch of Dragline Operation.

2. Introduction to Mining, G.K.Pradhan, Mintech Publications, Bhubaneswar
Course outcomes:

● Design layout of Development of Bord and Pillar methods of working.
● Design layout and explain the Depillaring of Bord and Pillar method of working.
● Design layout of Advancing and Retreating Longwall methods of working.
● Explain stowing techniques for different Methods of Working.
● Explain the opening of a Surface Mine by Box cut.
● Explain the different tunneling methods.
**************
Course Title : Mining Geology Lab.

Graphics
Course Objectives:

● To identify different rocks by naked or by use of minor aids.
● To identify different minerals by naked eye.
● To know how to interpret geological maps.
1. Petrology
a. Identification and description of igneous rocks – plutonic, hypabyssal and volcanic type of
rocks
b. Sedimentary rocks – rudites, arenites, carbonates and argillites
c. metamorphic rocks – gneiss, marble, slate, schist, quartzite.
2. Mineralogy
a. Identification of physical properties of quartz and feldspar varieties, hypersthene

hornblends, augite, mica, asbestos, barite, calcite, fluorite, tourmaline, beryl.
b. Study of Moh’s scale of hardness.
3. Study of Geological Maps
a. Topo sheets- basic concept only

b. Study of different codes, colours and symbols generally shown in the geological maps-
rocks and geological structures like folds, faults, unconformity, igneous intrusions etc.
c. Interpretation of contour maps.
d. Description of a simple type of geological map.
e. To draw a section from a simple geological map having simple structures as above.
1. A textbook of Geology by P. K. Mukherjee

4. Singh, P., Geology for Engineers, IBH Publications, N. Delhi. 1991.
5. Holemess, A., Principles of Physical Geology, Thomas Nelson and Sons, USA, 1964.
6. Ford, W. E., Dana‟s Textbook of Mineralogy (4th edition), Wiley Eastern Ltd., N. Delhi, 1989.
7. Winter, J. D., An Introduction to Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology, Prentice Hall, N. Delhi,
2001.
8. Krishnan, M. S., Geology of India and Burma, 3rd Edition, IBH Publishers, N. Delhi, 1984.
9. Blyth, F. G. H. and de Freitas, M. H., Geology for Engineers, 7th edition, Elsevier Publications,
2006.
10. Bell, F. G., Engineering Geology, Elsevier Publications, 2007.
Course outcomes:

● Identify different rocks that are found in the mining areas.
● Identify different minerals by their physical properties.
● Interpret a Geological map.
**************
Course Code : MINSI 341
Course Title : Internship- I

Graphics
Course Category : SI
Procedures to be observed:
Students are required to be involved in Inter/ Intra Institutional activities viz., Training and Simulation
program with different Institutes like Workshop of ITI, Other Polytechnics or other Technical Institutions;
Soft Skill Training organized by Training & Placement Cell of the Institution; Contribution at Innovation/
Entrepreneurship Cell of the Institute; Participation in workshops/ competitions etc.; Learning at
Departmental Lab./ Institutional Workshop or Vocational Training in the concerned Industry.
After completion of the Internship, the students should-

● Prepare a comprehensive report to indicate what he/ she has observed and learnt during the
training period.
● The students may contact Industrial Supervisor/ Manager/ Internship Faculty Mentor/ TPO for
assigning topics & problems and should prepare the final report on the assigned topics.
● The training report should be signed by the Industrial Supervisor/ Manager/ Internship Faculty
Mentor/ TPO and HOD.
● Present the final report on the assigned topics in a seminar, before an internal committee
constituted by the department.
Normally this Internship/ Training will be undertaken immediately after completion of the second semester
(during the summer vacation ).
**************
DEPARTMENT: MODERN OFFICE PRACTICE & MANAGEMENT
SYLLABUS: 3RD SEMESTER

CURRICULAR STRUCTURE FOR PART–II (2nd YEAR) OF THE
FULL-TIME DIPLOMA COURSE IN MODERN OFFICE PRACTICE & MANAGEMENT
MODERN OFFICE PRACTICE & MANAGEMENT : Semester III
Sl Category of Contact
Course Title L T P Credit Marks
No. Courses Hours
1 Management Secretarial Practice 2 0 0 2 2 100
2 Management Business Statistics -II 3 0 0 3 3 100
3 Management Conversational English -II 2 0 0 2 2 100
4 Humanities & Advanced Accountancy 3 0 0 3 3 100

Social Science
5 Humanities & Principles of Auditing 2 0 0 2 2 100
Social Science
6 Management Secretarial Practice Lab 0 0 2 2 1 100
7 Engg Science Data Analysis Lab-I 0 0 2 2 1 100
8 Humanities & Conversational English Lab 0 0 2 2 1 100
Social Science
9 Engg. Science Financial Accounting Lab - I 0 0 3 3 1.5 100
10 Engg Science C Programming 0 0 3 3 1.5 100
11 Engg Science Multimedia Lab-I 0 0 2 2 1 100
12 Management Industry Visit & Seminar-I 0 0 0 0 1 100
Total Credits and Marks 20 1200
Name of the Subject : SECRETARIAL PRACTICE
Course Code: Semester: Third

Duration:: Seventeen weeks Marks: 100
Teaching Scheme: Examination Scheme:
Theory: 2 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.:20 Marks
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Quizzes, viva voce, assignment: 10 Marks
Practical: Nil hrs./week Attendance & Teacher’s Assessment : 10 Marks
Credit: 2 End Semester Exam.:60 Marks
Objective:
Sl. No. The Students will be able to:
1. Know about the appointment, duties and responsibilities of secretary.
2. Know about the appointment , duties and powers and responsibilities of the Director
3. Draft notice , agenda, record minutes and get acquainted with the meaning of Proxy, Quorum, Voting
4. Know about the different types of company meeting
These objectives will help in enriching the required knowledge and skill essential for secretarial practice in an organisation.
Outcome:
CO1.It will help in enhancing planning and organizing ability, improve oral and written communication skills, take initiative,
ensure confidentiality, observe ethical behavior, be accurate and give attention to details
CO2. This will help the students to understand that Directors duties are designed to promote good governance and ensure that
the acts are in the interests of the company, including putting company’s interest ahead of their own
CO3. This will give a detailed picture of how a Secretary handles a Company Board Meeting and what are the various
aspects/documentation he has to comply with before and after the meeting.
CO4. This will give an idea of the various types of meetings which are held and what are the important aspects, duties,
responsibilities, objectives and time frame attached with each type of meeting. All these are included in the duties of the
secretary
CO5. This will give an idea about various types of shares, issuance of share certificates and share warrants.
CO6. It will help student to understand about notice, agenda, minutes and resolutions.
Detail Course Content
Unit:1 1.1Meaning and importance Periods: 6
Secretary 1.2 Types of secretaries and their functions
1.3 Company secretary : appointment , rights , duties,
powers and liabilities
1.4 Role of a secretary In Company formation
Unit:2 2.1 Appointments Periods: 4
Directors 2.2 Duties
2.3 Powers
Unit : 3 3.1 Types of Meetings Periods: 6
Company Meetings 3,2 Secretarial work regarding constituent of a meeting
3.2 Preparation of Notice & Agenda
3.3 Quorum, Voting, Proxy, Poll
Unit : 4 4.1 Definition Of Share Periods: 6
Share Capital 4.2 Kinds Of Shares
4.3 Stock
4.4 Difference between share & stock
Unit : 5 5.1 Definition of Share Certificate Periods: 6
Share Certificate & Share Warrants 5.2 Contents of Share Certificate
5.3 Secretarial procedure regarding issue of share certificates
5.4 Definition of share warrants
5.5 Secretarial procedure for the issue of share warrants
5.6 Distinction between Share Certificate & Share Warrants
Unit : 6 6.1 Types of Resolutions Periods: 6
Resolutions
6,2 Recording of Minutes
Contact Periods : 30 Internal Assessment : 4 Total Periods : 34
Reference Books: 1.Secretarial Practice – A.K. Bagrial – Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd
2. Secretarial Practice - M C Kucchal – S Chand Publishing
Name of the Subject : BUSINESS STATISTICS – II
Duration:: Seventeen weeks Marks:100
Theory: 3hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.:20 Marks
Tutorial: Nil hr./week Attendance & Teacher’s Assessment: 10+10 Marks
Practical: Nil hrs./week End Semester Exam.:60 Marks
Credit:3
Objectives: The student will be able to:
1. Understand basic concepts on, linear correlation, linear regressions, time-series analysis, and index numbers.
2. Summarize and analyses statistical data to solve practical business-related problems.
3. Interpret the relevance of statistical findings for business problem solving and decision making.
Outcome:
1. Organize raw data and classify data
2. Handle two numerical variables
3. Represent data diagrammatically

4. Understand the applicability of correlation and regression coefficients

Group - A
Unit:1 1.1 Introduction — Utility — Correlation & Causation Periods
Correlation 1.2 Types of correlation: Positive & Negative — Simple, Partial & :10
Multiple — Linear & Non Linear
1.3 Methods of studying correlation: Scatter diagram, Graphic
Method — Karl Pearson’s correlation & Probable error
1.4 Coefficient of Determination: Properties of Correlation
Coefficient – Rank Correlation
Unit:2 2.1 Introduction — Uses of Regression Analysis — Difference Periods

Regression Analysis between Correlation & Regression Analysis — Regression Lines :10
2.2 Regression Equations of Y on X and X on Y — Deviation taken
from Arithmetic Means of X & Y — Deviation taken from Assumed
Mean — Graphing Regression Lines
Group - B
Unit : 3 3.1 Introduction — Selection of Base Periods
Index Number 3.2 Chain Base Method and Laspeyre’s Method — Quantity :10
(Volume)
3.3 Index Number — Cost of Living Index
Unit : 4 4.1 Introduction — Components of Time Series — Some Periods
Time Series Analysis adjustments of Time Series Data :10
4.2 Measurement of Trend: Freehand Method, Semi Average
Method — Method of Least Square
Unit : 5 5.1 Introduction — Role of Forecasting in Business — Steps in Periods

Business Forecasting Forecasting :5
5.2 Methods of Forecasting
Reference Books :
1. Fundamentals of Statistics by S. C. Gupta, Himalaya Publishing House
2. Statistical Methods Vol. I & II by N.G. Das
3. Statistical Methods by Dr. S. P. Gupta, Sultan Chand and Sons Publishers

Name of the Subject : CONVERSATIONAL ENGLISH II
Theory: 2 hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.:20 Marks
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Quizzes, viva voce, assignment: 10 Marks
Practical: Nil hrs./week Attendance & Teacher’s Assessment : 10 Marks
Credit: 2 End Semester Exam.:60 Marks
Objective:
1. Understand the importance of note making and briefly identify the information of spoken or written text.
2. Extract the important points from a written text and convert them to summary.
3. Develop the ability to express precisely.
4. Acquire the art of conversation for successful communication in running offices and business.
5. Develop amiable and pleasing personality through manners etiquette dress etc
6. Choose proper dress for the right occasion.
These objectives will help in enriching the required knowledge and skill essential for professional career,
Outcome:
CO1. The students will be able to make proper notes
CO2. This will help the students to summarize from a written text correctly
CO3. Correct and accurate expression will be demonstrated by the students
CO4. Students can communicate precisely for smooth running of the organisation
CO5. Proper grooming leading to acceptable decorum will be maintained by the students
CO6. Students will be able to present themselves in the appropriate attire as per the need of the occasion
Group - A
Unit:1 1.1 Importance of note making Periods:10
1.2 Interpreting and using abbreviations
Study Skill
symbols headings , numberings etc
1.3 Transforming maps , charts graphs and tables
and written descriptions
1.4 Extracting important points from a written text
and converting them into a summary
1.5 Different ways of note making
Unit:2 2.1 Meaning of oral communication Periods:8
Principles of Oral Spoken Conversation 2.1Turn Taking
2.2 Variety of Speeches
2.3 Key principles of spoken conversation
2.4 Difference between spoken language and
written language
2.5 Giving instructions and receiving
instructions- Making request
2.6 Use of jargon and slang
Unit : 3 3.1 Meaning & concept Periods:6
3.2 3Ps of Public Speaking
Public Speaking
3.3 Audio-visual aid
3.4 Useful strategies for public speaking
Group - B
Unit : 4 4.1 How to develop pleasing personality to present Periods:5
Manner , Etiquettes & Dress Make-up before public speaking
4.2The social etiquette of meetings
4.3 Language function for meetings
4.4 Language for participating in a meeting
4.5 Choosing the chairperson and appointing
the secretary
4.6 The roles and responsibilities of the
different participants
Unit : 5 5.1 Introduction Periods:5
Oral Presentation 5.2 Presentation skills-planning, preparing,
practicing presentation
5.3 Attention Gaining Devices
5.4 Barriers to effective presentation
Note1: Teacher’s assessment will be based on performance on given

assignments & quizzes.
Note2: Assignments may be given on all the topics covered on the syllabus.
Reference Books: 1.Communication Skills for Professionals and Students’-

Dr Amitabh Dwibedi – Notion Press Media Pvt Ltd
2. A Manual for English Language Communication Skills

D .Sudha Rani - PEARSON.
3. Teaching and Learning English -

M L Tickoo – Orient Blackswan Private Limited
Name of the Subject : ADVANCED ACCOUNTANCY
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Attendance & Teacher’s Assessment: 10 + 10 Marks
Credit:3
Objective:
To enable the students to acquire knowledge in Advanced Accounting.
Objectives: Students will be able to
1. Understand basic concepts of Bad debts and Depreciations.
2. Apply the knowledge of negotiable Instruments
3. Learn Consignment & Joint Venture
4. Learn Partnership Accounts
5. Learn Company Accounts
6. Learn TDS & GST
Course Outcomes:
The students are likely to acquire the following skills at the end of the course:
CO1. Concept of Bad debts & Depreciation
CO2. Application of Negotiable Instruments
CO3. Preparation of Consignment 7 Joint Venture Accounts
CO4. Preparation of Partnership deed, Calculation of profits & partners accounts
CO5. Preparation of Company Accounts.
CO6. Application of TDS & GST
Unit:1 1.1 Provision for bad & doubtful debts and reserve for discount on Periods:6
debtors and creditors (only journal and ledger)
BAD DEBT & DEPRECIATION 1.2 Depreciation: Definition and objects of providing depreciation
1.3 Methods: Accounting treatment of depreciation under straight
line and diminishing methods
Unit:2 2.1 Negotiable instruments: Definition- different types Periods:8

2.2 Recording of transactions regarding bills of exchange-
NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS collection and dishonor of bills- renewal of bills
Unit : 3 3.1 Meaning & nature of consignment and difference between Periods:8
ACCOUNTING FOR CONSIGNMENT & consignment & sale
JOINT VENTURE 3.2 Preparation of relevant accounts
3.3 Meaning of joint venture- distinction between joint venture,
partnership and consignment
3.4 Preparation of relevant accounts
Unit : 4 4.1 Definition Periods:8

4.2 Simple problems on admission and retirement of partners.
PARTNERSHIP
Unit : 5 5.1 Nature of company accounts Periods:8

COMPANY ACCOUNTS 5.2 Accounting for share capital- issue of shares: at par, at
premium or at discount- over subscription & under subscription
calls in arrear and in advance
5.3 Forfeiture of share- advance- non-payment of calls-Re-issue of
forfeited shares- accounting treatments
5.4 Issue of debenture – debenture interest: at par, at a discount or
at a premium – concept of periodical payment
Unit : 6 6.1 What is TDS? Periods:7
TDS & GST 6.2 What is GST? Types of GST.
6.3 Purpose of Introduction of TDS on GST.
6.4 Who is required to deduct TDS on GST.
Contact periods- 45 Internal assessment -6 Total-51
Reference Book:
1. Practice in Accountancy by Basu&Das ,Rabindra Library
2. IntroductiontoAccountancy by S.N. Maheshwari, Pioneer Book House
3. Hisab Shastra by Dey&Dutt, ChayaPrakashani
4. FinancialAccountancy−1 ,AmitavaBasu , TeedeePublisher
5. GST TDS & TCS by Mohd. Salim ,Frah Saeed / Taxman
Name of the Subject : PRINCIPLES OF AUDITING
Course Code: Semester: third

Tutorial: 1hr./week Attendance & Teacher’s Assessment: 10+10 Marks
Credit:3
Course Objective:
1. To help the students gain knowledge about the concept and significance of Auditing in any organization.
2. To enable them to know about the various types of Audit and the concept of internal check and internal control
in an organizational structure.
3. To provide them idea about Vouching, Verification of Assets and Liabilities and Valuation.
4. To make them understand the provisions of the Companies Act regarding qualifications, appointment, rights
and duties of Auditors of a Company form of business.
5. To help the students to acquire knowledge about the various statutory reports needed to be submitted by the
Auditor of a joint stock company.
Course Outcomes:
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1..Define audit and state the objectives and advantages of audit
CO2. State the types of audit and explain their significance.
CO3. Acquire the knowledge about starting an audit
CO4. Explain the meaning and importance of internal check & internal control and acquire knowledge about internal
audit system.
CO5. Acquire knowledge about vouching system and verification of assets and liabilities.
CO6. State the qualification, duties, responsibilities, power and liability of auditors.
Unit:1 1.1 Definition of Audit Periods: 4
INTRODUCTION
1.2 Objectives of Audit
1.3 Advantages of Audit
Unit:2 2.1 Continuous Audit—Final Audit --- Interim Audit – Periods: 6

TYPES OF AUDIT and COMMENCEMENT Cost Audit --- Management Audit --- Performance
OF NEW AUDIT Audit— Internal Audit ---- Statutory Audit and Non
Statutory Audit
2.2 Audit working papers-- Audit Note Book
Unit : 3 3.1. Meaning and importance of IINTERNAL CHECK Periods: 7

INTERNAL CHECK AND INTERNAL 3.2 Meaning and importance of INTERNAL CONTROL
CONTROLVOUCHING 3.3 Difference between internal check and internal
audit
3.4 Internal check as regards to cash book, sales,
purchase and paymentof wages
Unit : 4 4.1 Test Checking --- Routine Checking Periods: 6

VOUCHING 4.2 Vouching
4.3 Vouching of cash transactions and credit transactions
Unit : 5 5.1concept of Verification Periods:4

VERIFICATION OF ASSETS 5.2Auditor’s duty regarding Verification of Assets
Unit : 6 6.1 Valuation ofAssets Periods:

VALUATION OF ASSETS AND 6.2 Difference between verification and valuation 4
LIABILITIES
Unit : 7 Periods:
COMPANY AUDITOR 7.1 Qualification and disqualifications of Company 8
Auditor
7.2 Appointment , Removal , Re-appointment and
remuneration of Company Auditor
7.3 Rights, Duties & Liabilities of Company Auditor
Unit: 8 8.1 Auditor’s report Periods:
AUDITOR’S REPORT 8.2 Importance of Auditor’s Report 5
8.3 Different types of Audit Report
Unit: 9 9.1 Meaning of Auditor’s Certificate Periods:

Auditor’s Certificate 4
BOOKS
1. AUDITING – Dr T.R.SHARMA
2. FUNDAMENTALS OF AUDITING-S.K.BASU
3. AUDITING PRINCIPLES AND TECHNIQUES
Name of the Subject : Secretarial Practice Lab
Theory: Nil hrs./week Assignments- 20 marks
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Class performance – 10 marks
Practical: -2hrs./week Attendence* – 10 marks
Viva Voce – 20 marks
Credit: 1 End Semester – 40 marks
Objectives:

1 Express themselves effectively
2 Will convey their ideas clearly
3 Will participate in meetings
These objectives will help in enriching the required knowledge and skill essential for office presentations.
Outcome :
CO1 – This will help the students in applying effective secretarial skills in official presentations
CO2 – Students will able to draft notices of various company meetings.
CO3 – Students will able to draft agenda of various company meetings
CO4 - Students will able to draft minutes of various company meetings
CO5 - Students will able to draft memorandum of association of different company meetings
CO6- Students will able to participate in various company meetings

Unit : 1 Drafting of Notices of various company meetings Periods:6
Unit : 2 Drafting of Agenda of various company meetings Periods:8
Unit : 3 Drafting of Minutes of various company meetings Periods:8
Unit: 4 Drafting of memorandum of association of different companies Periods:12
Contact period : 30 Internal Assessment : 4 Total period : 34

Name of the Subject : Data Analysis Lab - I
Practical: 2hrs./week Attendance* – 10 marks
Credit:1 End Semester – 40 marks
Objectives:
1 Organize raw data and classify data
2 Handle two numerical variables
3 Represent data diagrammatically
4 Understand the applicability of correlation and regression coefficients.
Outcome :
CO1 – Students will understand the importance of data analysis and its application.
CO2 – Students will apply effective knowledge to prepare data presentations.
CO3 – Students will analyse practical data and find various statistical measures and their applications.
CO4 – Students will apply the knowledge of Central Tendency.
CO5 – Students will apply the knowledge of dispersion
CO6 - Students will apply the knowledge of Forecasting.
All the topics of the following units are to be practiced using MS Excel Software. No theoretical questions are
to be set in this paper.
Unit : 1 1.1 Defining and classifying variables Periods: 5
Defining and collecting data 1.2 Collecting data
1.3 Sampling methods
1.4 Data preparation and survey errors
Unit : 2 2.1 Organizing categorical data Periods: 5

Organising data 2.2 Organizing numerical data
2.3 Representing data diagrammatically
2.4 Handling two numerical variables
Unit : 3 3.1 Central tendency Periods: 10

Descriptive statistics 3.2 Measuring dispersion
Unit: 4 4.1 Least squares method Periods: 10

Simple linear correlation and 4.2 Interpolation vs. extrapolation
regression methods
4.3 Measures of different types of correlation
4.4 Rank correlation
Contact period :30 Internal Assessment : 4 Total period : 34
Reference Books:
1. Fundamentals of Statistics. /S. C Gupta. /Himalaya Publishing House.
2. Statistical Methods./ Dr. S. P. Gupta./S. Chand & Sons.
3. Statistical Methods. N.G. Das Vol. I &II

Name of the Subject : Conversational English Lab II
Practical: 2hrs./week Attendence* – 10 marks
Objectives:

1 Express themselves fluently
2 Will convey their ideas clearly
3 Will participate in discussions
Outcome :
CO1 – This will help the students in applying effective communication skills in official presentations
CO2 – Students will be participating in extempore
CO3 – Students will be participating in debate
CO4 - Students will be participating in group discussions
CO5 – Students will be participating in mock meetings
CO6 – Students will show appropriate non verbal skills while participating in all the official participations

Unit : 1 EXTEMPORE Periods:8
Unit : 2 DEBATE Periods:10
Unit : 3 GROUP DISCUSSION Periods:10
Unit: 4 MOCK MEETING Periods:6
Contact period :30 Internal Assessment : 4 Total period : 34
Ref. Books:
1. Readymade speeches and debates for all occasions by Madan Sood/Paperback
2. Group discussion on current topics by Major (retd.) P.N. Joshi/ Upkar’s

Name of the Subject : Financial Accounting Lab-1
Course Code: Semester: 3rd

Practical: 3 hrs./week Attendence* – 10 marks
Credit:1.5 End Semester – 40 marks
Objective:
Sl. No.
The Students will be able to:
1. To record the various transactions that may occur in a business organization
2. To prepare and maintain various stock reports as well as other reports presenting the state of affairs of the
organization.
These objectives will help in enriching the required knowledge and skill essential for career building,
Course Outcome:
CO1 – This will help the students in becoming conversant with the various computerized accounting matters
CO2 – Students will be competent in recording vouchers in Tally and computing and presenting the various
reports like Profit and Loss A/c, Balance Sheet, Inventory reports and such other reports as may be necessary
to present the State of Affairs of the Organization.
Detail Course
Content
Unit:1 Periods:3
Introduction to
Accounting System Basics of Accounting, Types of Accounts, Golden Rules of
Accounting, Double Entry System of Accounting.
Unit:2 Getting functional with Tally ERP9 Periods:9

Creation of Company in Tally
Fundamentals of Setting up Accounting Group Heads
Accounting Software Creation of Ledgers
Unit : 3 Voucher entries Periods:12

Accounting
vouchers Purchase and sales vouchers
Receipt and payment vouchers
Contra and journal vouchers
Billwise details
Cost categories and cost centres

Unit: 4 Stock Group and Categories/ Unit of Measure Period: 12
Inventory
Godown/ Locations, Stock Items and Stock Journal Voucher
Inventory Vouchers
Invoicing
Contact Periods : 36 Assignment & Internal Assessment : 9 Pds Total Periods : 45.
Books:
1. Basic Accounting (English, Paperback) by Rajni Sofat
2. Learn Tally.ERP 9 in 30 days (A handbook to teach you everything about Tally.ERP 9) Textbook Binding – 1 January 2014 by
Soumya Ranjan Behera Author
3. Learn Tally Prime With GST Book by Gaurav Agrawal Paperback – 1 January 2021 by Gaurav Agrawal
Name of the Subject : C Programming
Teaching Scheme:
Practical: 3 hrs./week
Credit : 1.5
Objective: The course is designed to provide basic knowledge of C language. After successful completion of
the course the students will able to understand problem solving technique and logic by using different control
statement in C Programming Language.
Course Outcome: Students will be able to develop logics which will help them to create programs,
applications in C. Also by learning the basic programming constructs they can easily switch over to any other
language in future.
Unit/Chapter Details Contents Duration
Unit-1: Algorithm Definition, Characteristics, Examples 2hrs.
Unit-2: Flow Chart Definition, Meaning of the Symbol, Example. 2hrs.
Unit-3: Getting What is C, Historical Development of C and Where C stands? C Character 4hrs.
Started with C and Set, Constant, Variable, Data Types and Keywords. C Instruction-Type
Its Data types Declaration, C Operator and Hierarchy of Operation, Control Instruction.
Unit-4: The Decision What is Decision? IF Statement- Multiple Statements within IF. IF-ELSE 8hrs.
Control Structure Statements, Nested IF-ELSE, Different form of IF. Use of Logical
Operator, The Conditional Operator.
Unit-5: Loop Control What is Loops, WHILE loop its Tips and Traps. FOR loop, Nesting of 8hrs.
Structure Loops, Odd Loop, Break Statement, DO-WHILE Loop.
Unit-6: Case Control What is Case Control, Decisions Using SWITCH its Tips and Traps, 3hrs.
Structure GOTO Statement.
Unit-7: Function What is a Function, Why use Function, Passing Value between Functions, 7hrs.
Scope Rule of Function, Function Declaration, Call by value.
Unit-8: Array What is an Array, Characteristic of an Array, Array declaration, 7hrs.
Initialization, Boundary Checking, Passing Array elements to a Function.
Unit-9: String What are Strings, String Representation in C, Standard Library String 4hrs.
Function.
Total Practical: 45 Internal Assessment : 6 Total Periods: 51
Reference Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Yashavant Kanetkar Let Us C 3rd BPB Publications
Herbert Schildt C Complete Reference 4th McGraw-Hill
Byron Gottfried Programming with C 3rd McGraw-Hill
Brian W. Kernighan / The C Programming Language 2nd Pearson Paperback

Dennis Ritchie
Name of the Subject : MULTIMEDIA LAB-I

Duration: 17 weeks Marks:100
Teaching Scheme:
Practical: 2 hrs./week
Credit : 1
Objectives: Students will be able to
1. Know basic theory about multimedia and its applications
2. Know the basic applications of Adobe Photoshop and its Uses
3. Know the basic applications of Adobe Flash and its Uses
Course Outcome: After successful completion of the course the students will able to
1. Work in the creative world of Photoshop
2. Word in the creative world of animation
3. Gain the basic knowledge to work in the field of media and entertainment industry
Unit/Chapter Details Contains Duration
Unit-1: Introduction Common terminologies, Definition and use of multimedia, Interactive 4hrs.
and non-interactive multimedia, Graphics and computer graphics,
graphics data, Different types of file formats.
Unit-2: Adobe Photoshop Introduction of Photoshop, interface and toolbox, palettes, file 16hrs.
handling and file format, color modes and manipulating canvas size
and image size, basics of layers, working with single layer and
multiple layers, transforming objects on layers action, working with
actions.
Making selection with different selection tools, painting and drawing
with available tools, creating text, manipulating focus and adjusting
tone, making image with drop shadows, creating background images,
seams, create texture, special effects like masking, gradient, creating
buttons and bullets, working with different types of filter, lighting
effects.
Unit-3: Adobe Flash Flash editor, creating simple graphics, modifying simple graphics, 10hrs.
complex graphics on single layer/multiple layers, reusing graphics
objects, frame by frame animation, animation with motion tweening,
animation with shape tweening, interactivity with simple frame
actions, interactivity with objects, adding sound to your movies,
delivering movies to your audience.
Total Practical: 30 Internal Assessment : 4 Total Periods: 34
Reference Books:
Name of Authors Title of the Book Edition Name of the Publisher
Lisa DaNae Dayley and Brad Adobe Photoshop CS5 Wiley India Pvt. Ltd
Dayley Bible
Todd Perkins Adobe Flash Professional Wiley India Pvt. Ltd

CS5 Bible
Name of the Subject : Industry Visit
Theory: Nil hrs./week Project- 20 marks
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Seminar – 10 marks
Practical: Nil/week Attendance* – 10 marks
Objectives:
Sl. No. The Students will :

1 Get an opportunity to visit Industry
2 Collect data and classify data
3 Represent data diagrammatically
4 Learn to conduct Seminar write Project Report
Outcome :
CO1 – Students will get industry exposure.
CO2 – Students will be acquainted with professional communication .
CO3 – Students will learn to work in a team.
CO4 – Students will collect data, analyse & interpret the same .
CO5 – Students will learn to prepare a Project Report.
CO6 - Students will conduct Seminar and present their project/s.

Industry Visit is conceived as a group work through which the spirit of team building is
expected to be developed. Students will visit the Industry and will carry out their Project Works
in groups under the supervision of a lecturer of their core discipline.
Project report will be prepared on any topic covering the area of management of the visited
industry. E.g.
1. Office Filling System
2. Record Management system
3. Office Communication system
4. Recruitment system
5. Quality management system
6. Grievance redressal process
7.Performance appraisal system
8. Employee Welfare services
9. Social security and safety measures
10. Any other relevant topic may be chosen
EXAMINATIONSCHEME FOR THEORY

PAPERS
Internal Examination: Marks–20 Marks on Attendance: 10
Final Examination: Marks–60 Teacher’s Assessment: 10
Mid Semester Tests( Objective type questions carrying

1 Two best out of 10x2=20 1 mark for 20 questions(Qs) out of 1x20=20
three) 25 Qs throughout the syllabus
Quizzes, viva-voce, Question carrying 2 marks for 5

2 Assignments 10 Qs out of 8 Qs ( at least 1Q from 2x5=10
each unit)
Class Attendance* Qs carrying 6 marks for 5 Qs

3 10 (Subjective type) out of 8 Qs ( at 6x5=30
least 1Q from each unit)
Total 40 60
Examination Scheme For Sessional Papers.
Assignments Assignments on the day of 20

1 20 exam(by External Evaluator)
2 Class performance 10 Lab record etc. (by External Evaluator) 10
3 Attendance* 10 Viva-voce (by External Evaluator) 10
Viva-voce 20
Total 60 40
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Multi Media Technology [MT]
Revised 2022
Name of the course: Image & Graphics I

Duration: 17 weeks (out of 17 weeks, 2 weeks Maximum Marks: 100
are to be allotted for class tests)
Theory: 3 hrs./ week Class Test (Two class tests will be conducted) :
20 marks
Tutorial: NIL Quizzes/ Assignments/ Student Activity: 10
marks
Practical: NIL Class Attendance: 10 marks
Credit: 3 End semester examination: 60 marks
Aim:
Focussing on the basic concept on image and graphics, their types, understanding their features
in context of multimedia. Covering text and image compression, file formats, application of
image and graphics in multimedia communication.
Course Outcome:
Understand the basics of Image and Graphics.
Classify different types of graphics ,differentiate between them.
Explain Colour theory in context of Graphics.
Explain the role of graphics in different field of Multimedia.
Pre-Requisite -
Basic concept of graphics.
Knowledge of Different types of graphics and file formats.
Content Details Hours/Unit Marks

Unit 1 Introduction to Image & Graphics
 Image and Graphics in context of Multimedia 10
8
 Different types of images – Photography , Painting and
Computer generated images
 Understanding types of Graphics
 2D & 3D Graphics
Unit 2 Text and Image Compression
 Introduction 10 10
 Compression Principles
 Text Compression ( Basic Idea )
 Image Compression ( Basic Idea)
 Source Encoders & Destination Decoders
 Lossless & Lossy Compressions
 Entropy Encoding
 Source Encoding
 Graphics Interchange Format
 Digitized Documents
Unit 3 Aspects of Image & Graphics
 Method of Storing and Reproducing Images 6 10
 Resolution of Images
 Pixel Ratio, Pixel Depth, Aspect ratio
 Multimedia Information Representation
Unit 4 Colour Theory
 Colour
7 10
 Dynamic range of colour
 Basics of Colour Theory
 Colour Characteristics- Hue , Saturation , Brightness
 Colour Palette and Colour Look Up Table (LUT)
Unit 5 Image File Formats
 Concept of File format and 6 10
 Different type of File formats and their uses
 Bitmap File formats
 Vector File formats- Metafiles WMF , CGM, PICT
 Graphics Image File Format
 Common Image File Format
 Comparative features of Jpg,/png/svg
Unit 6 Image & Graphics for Multimedia Communication

 Graphics & Image for Information Representation 10
8
 Graphics & Image for Interpersonal Communication
 Graphics & Image for Interactive Application
 Graphics & Image for Entertainment Applications
References:
1.Introduction to Multimedia & Its Applications , V K Jain
2. Computer Graphics And Multimedia, Kusum Lata and Rishabh Anand
3.Principles of Multimedia, Ranjan Parekh
4.Fundamentals of Computer Graphics, Steve Marschner and Peter Shirley.
Name of the course: Cel And 2D Animation I
Duration: 17 weeks (out of 17 weeks, 2 Maximum Marks: 100

weeks are to be allotted for class tests)
Theory: 3 hrs./ week Class Test (Two class tests will be conducted) : 20
marks
Tutorial: NIL Quizzes/ Assignments/ Student Activity: 10 marks
Practical: NIL Class Attendance: 10 marks
Aim:
Understanding 2D animation phenomenon, origin of animation, its history and evolution of
animation techniques. Comprehension of the newer animation techniques and principles of modern
software based animation. Implementation of theoretical expertise to show excellence in this field
creating multimedia production using 2D animation.
Course Outcome:
Define animation and its different types.
Describe the process of traditional cel animation
Explain the application and benefits of animation
Understand different animation techniques
Pre-Requisite :
Basic knowledge of computer graphics.
Primary Idea of sketching & drawing.

Unit 1 Introduction to Animation
● Definition of Animation 8 10
● Understanding types of Animation
● Application of Animation in Multimedia
● Benefits of Animation
Unit 2 History Of Animation
● History of animation- from where it all began 8 8

● Early animation devices
● Golden Era of animation
● Contribution of ” Ram Mohan” in Indian Animation
Unit 3 Animation Types & Principles
● Types of Animation (technically & methodically)

● Principles of Animation
● Timing, Spacing and Easing, Squash and Stretch,
Straight Ahead and Pose-to-pose, Arcs, Anticipation, 10 15
Overlapping Action and Follow Through, Secondary
Action, Exaggeration, Appeal, Solid Drawing and
Staging
● Layers, Timeline, Symbols
● Real time and Non-real time animation
● 2D Graphics, 3D Graphics
● Stop motion animation, classical animation
Unit 4 Cel Animation
● Concept and creation process of traditional Cel Animation 10

● Key frames-tweens or in between frames 6
● Exposure sheet
● Storyboarding in Animation
Unit 5 2D Computerized Animation
● 2 Dimensional Animation 8 10
● Concept of 2D computerized animation
● Stop motion animation
● Clay animation
● Cutout animation
Unit 6 Animation in Film
● Introduction to classical animation films 5 7

● Introduction to anime and manga- Japanese animation
techniques
References:
1. Multimedia And Animation By V.K. Jain

2. An animator’s survival kit By Richard Williams
3. The Illusion of Life by Frank Thomas and Ollie Johnston
4. How to Animate By Chris Derochie
Name of the course: Web Design (HTML, CSS and Java Script)

20 marks
Tutorial: NIL Quizzes/ Assignments/ Student Activity:
10marks
Practical: NIL Class Attendance: 10marks
Credit: 3 End semester examination: 60marks
Aim:
Imparting the knowledge of web design basics, principles and workflow of it. Competence building
of the students to create webpages by using HTML ,CSS and Java script .
Course Outcome:
Explain the Basic Principle of Web page Design
Describe the components of Webpages.
Understand the basics and elements of HTML.
Describe the process of creating Webpages using Java Script & CSS.
Pre-Requisite :
Basic idea of Websites .
Basic knowledge of Photoshop.
Content Hours/Unit Marks

Details
Unit 1 Basics in Web Design
 Brief History of Internet 10
 World Wide Web
6
 Web Standards
 Audience requirement.
 Basic principles involved in developing a web site
 Planning process
 Five Golden rules of web designing
 Designing navigation bar
 Page design and Home Page Layout.
Unit 2 Web Design Principles

 Basic principles involved in developing a web site 6 10
 Planning process
 Five Golden rules of web designing
 Designing navigation bar
 Page design
 Home Page Layout
 Design Concept.
Unit 3 Basic in HTML

 Introduction to HTML 10
 HTML Editors
 Basic structure of an HTML document 8
 Creating an HTML document
 HTML Elements, Attributes, Headings
 HTML Paragraphs, Styles, Text Formatting
 Line Breaks
 HTML Tags.
Unit 4 Elements of HTML
 HTML Images, Image Maps, Background Images, Favicon 10

8
 Working with Lists, Tables and Frames
 Working with Hyperlinks, Iframes & Multimedia
 Working with Forms and controls.
 HTML Graphics (Canvas & SVG)
 HTML Media (Video, Audio & YouTube)
Unit 5 Basic in Cascading Stylesheets

 Concept of CSS 7 10
 Creating Style Sheet
 CSS Properties
 CSS Styling (Background, Text Format, Controlling
Fonts)
 Working with block elements and objects
 Working with Lists and Tables
 CSS Id and Class
 Box Model (Introduction, Border properties, Padding
 Properties, Margin properties)
 CSS Advanced (Grouping, Dimension, Display,
 Positioning, Floating, Align, Pseudo class, Navigation
Bar,
 Image Sprites, Attribute sector)
 CSS Color
 Creating page Layout and Site Designs.
Unit 6 Java Script Basics, Jump Starting Java Script , Writing Basics
 The Evolution of Scripting Languages, JavaScript -
Definition,
 Programming for Non-Programmers?
 Comparison between Java,
 JavaScript & VB Script
 Introduction to Objects, Methods, and Events, Events 10
10
and
Program Flow, Jumping Right in, Running Scripts.
 Enhancing HTML Documents with JavaScript, The

Quintessential
 Building Blocks, Script Mechanics
 Changing Pages Based on Time and Date, Displaying the

Quote of the Day, Using Arrays, Changing the
Background Color
 Using the Image and Area Objects
 JS Scope, JS JSON
JS Debugging
References:
1.Web Designing and Development Training Guide

Prof. satish jain, Ambrish k. Rai, M. Geetha
2. Web Design With HTML & CSS: HTML & CSS Complete Beginner's Guide
By Prem Kumar
3. Beginning CSS: Cascading Style Sheets for Web Design
By Ian Pouncey, Richard York
4. Mastering Html, CSS & Javascript Web Publishing By
Laura Lemay , Rafe Colburn, Jennifer Kyrnin
Name of the course: Digital Photography

20 marks
Tutorial : Nil Quizzes/ Assignments/ Student Activity:
10 marks
Practical : Nil Class Attendance: 10 marks
Aim:
Understanding the concept of digital image formation technology, basics of photography, history
of evolution image sensors, photographic camera. Making knowledge of students on technology
of digital camera, basic lighting techniques for digital photography and post production
technology.
Course Outcome:
Describe Digital Image formation Technology.
Explain Basics of Photography.
Explain Basic Light Technique.
Describe Post Production Technology of Photography.
Pre-Requisite -
Basic Concept of visual art.
Basic knowledge of Image and graphics.
Content Details Hours/Unit Marks

Unit 1 Digital Image Formation Technology
 Image capture in celluloid and in digital image censors & 10
10
 The term “Digital”
 Celluloid image formations (35mm , 16mm & other large
formats).
 Digital image processing concept
 Photo Electric Sensor ( CCD & CMOS)
 Basic Circuit Diagram of CCD & CMOS
 Storage medias & different formats.
Unit 2 Basics of Photography
 Brief History of Photography 6 10
 Basic Concept of Camera Optics
 Different uses of Photography in modern age
Such as Photojournalism, AD Photography, Product
Photography, Fashion Photography , Scientific
Photography, Wildlife Photography.
Unit 3 Evolution of Digital Camera
 History of image formations since cave paintings to today’s 10
mobile selfie photography.
 Different kinds digital cameras and different kinds of image 5
censors and different digital lab systems.
Unit 4 Technology of Digital Camera
 Introduction of Digital Camera 10

8
 Working Technology of Digital Camera
 Section Diagram of Digital Camera
 Mirror less shutter systems and its pros & cons.
 Different types of photographic lenses small formats & large
formats lenses.
Unit 5 Basic Light Technique

 Basics of artificial lightings. 8 10
 Different types of light colour temperature from day types
to night light types.
 Different types of lighting grips and their usages.
 Light Filters & Camera Lens Filters
 Lighting of Model Photography
 Lighting of Product Photography
 Photometry Equation
 Exposure calculation of Outdoor Photography
( according to Brightness of Sunlight)
 Exposure calculation of Artificial Light Condition.
Unit 6 Post Production Technology

 Usages of different professional softwares according to your 10
8
own budget and systems.
 Introduction of Photo Editing Software
 Simulation with Different Digital Design
a. Model Photography
b. Product Photography
c. Lighting Effect
d. Digital Art & Text Design
e. Preparing the Base - Quick clean up,
f. Black and White Conversion
g. Basic contrast adjustments with the "S" shaped Curve,
Adjusting light on model's face
h. Enhancing the eyes
i. Changing the canvas size to square
j. Introducing color hint to the image
k. Final touches and sharpening
References:
1 .The Essential Lighting Manual for Digital and Film Photography by Chris Weston.
2.The Digital Photography Book , Kelby Scott
3.The Fundamentals of Digital Photography ,Tim Daly
4.Digital Photography manual by Philip Andrews from kindle edition.
Name of the Course: Image & Graphics- I Laboratory

Duration: Duration: 17 weeks(out of 17 weeks, Maximum Marks: 100
2 weeks are to be allotted for class tests)
Theory & Tutorial : Nil Internal Assessment: End Semester
60 marks Assessment:40 marks
Practical: 3hrs/week Continuous Evaluation : Viva Voce: 20 marks
50 marks
Credit: 1.5 Class Attendance: 10 Assignment on the day
marks of Viva Voce and
Practical Report
Submission: 20 marks
Aim:
Making the students proficient to create graphical layout design for print media, digital media and
also making DTP products like poster, flyer, banner, brochure etc. by using most popular and
effective tools like Photoshop, Illustrator and InDesign.
Course Outcome:
Create Layer Mask to make design.
Apply brushes, strokes and styles to create design.
Edit images , portraits by Retouching .
Create DTP products by applying softwares.
Pre-Requisite -
Knowledge of Basic Tools in Photoshop and Illustrator .
Knowledge of Basic Tools in CorelDraw.
Course Contents
Unit 1 Photoshop Layer Mask
 Introduction to Layer Masks
 Process to Create a Layer Masks
 Show or Hide Parts of an Image Using Layer Masks
 Assignment - Putting a Face in a Soccer Ball Using Layer Masks
Unit 2 Photoshop Layer Style & Blending Modes
 Add a Line (Stroke) Around Layers
 Adding Glow to Layers
 Adding Bevel and Emboss to Layers
 Blend Mode and Uses of it.
 Removal of Black or White Background with Blend Modes
 Create a Spotlight Effect with Blend Modes
 Assignment - Turning Coffee Cup into an Ocean with Blend Modes
Unit 3 Portrait Photo Corrections & Retouching
 Introduction to Photo Corrections
 Checking for Dust, Specks, Scratches
 Brightening and Adjusting Levels
 Adjusting Curves to Improve Lighting
 Fixing White Balance
 Sharpening Portrait Photos
 Lens Distortion Corrections
 Cropping and Levelling
 Portrait Photo Corrections
Unit 4 Working with Brushes in Illustrator
 Calligraphic Brush
 Scatter Brush
 Make a Noise Brush
 Art Brush
 Pattern Brush
 Image Brush
 Adding Grain to Art Works with Noise Brush
Unit 5 Transform, Distort & Blend in Illustrator
 Making of a 3d Ribbon
 Converting lots of lines that blend together
 3D Gradient lettering blends
 Puppet Warp Tool
Unit 6 Long Documents creation in InDesign & Digital World
 Automatically Placing Lots of Text onto Multiple Pages
 Making of a Cross Reference
 Process to Create an Index
 Add Document Name Automatically to The Page in InDesign Using Text
Variables
 Use of Adobe In Design Book Feature
 Overview of Making designs come to life
 Digital PDFs
 Animated publications
 Video and sound
 Interactive design
 Animated Infographics (With Illustrator)
 Publish online
Name of the Course: Cel and 2D Animation I Laboratory

Duration: 17 weeks(out of 17 weeks, 2 Maximum Marks: 100
Theory & Tutorial : Nil Internal End Semester
Assessment: 60 Assessment: 40 marks
marks
Practical: 3 hrs./ week Continuous Viva Voce: 20 marks
Evaluation:
50 marks
Credit: 1.5 Class Attendance: Assignment on the day
10 marks of Viva Voce and
Practical Report
Aim:
Providing skills to the students to draw character and background situation for 2D animation.
Designing of animation of illustrations with the help of 2D animation software. Hands on
application of the techniques for creating traditional cel animation, stop motion animation,
frame by frame animation, timeline animation, character animation and application of
animation principles through 2D animation software.
Course Outcome:
1 Draw Background Design for 2D Animation.
2 Create cel animation & frame by frame Animation.
3 Create animation using Symbols.
4 Create Stop Motion Animation.
Pre-Requisite -
1 Understanding basic geometric shapes
2 Understanding Graphic software like Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop

and CorelDraw
Unit Course Contents
Unit 1 Introduction to Animation Drawing
● Drawings with the help of basic shapes
● Animal study, Human anatomy
● Shading techniques, Live model study
● Observation Techniques
● Procedure- How to approach
● Importance of Guideline- Line of action, Overcome the fear, Drawing for
animation
Unit 2 Introduction on how to make drawings for animation

● Shapes and forms
● About 2d and 3d drawings
● Caricaturing – fundamentals, Exaggeration, Attitude, Silhouettes,
● Boundary- breaking exercises and warm ups, gesture drawing, Line drawing
and quick sketches
● Drawing from observation, memory and imagination.
Unit 3 Drawing for Animation

● Exercises and warm ups on pegging sheet
● Quick Studies from real life, Sequential movement drawing,
caricaturing the Action.
● Thumbnails, Drama and psychological effect
● Motion Studies, Drawing for motion
Unit 4 Introduction to 2D Animation Software

● Introduction to Adobe Animate
● Workspace overview,
● Customize the workshop
● Uses of Stage and Tools panel
● Uses of Timeline and Flash panels
● Property inspector, Library panel, Tools, Menu &Properties
● Use of Library
● Concept of groups & symbols
● Movie Explorer, History panel, Colour panel. About Flash files, Create or
open a document and set its properties, View a document when multiple
documents are open,
● Working with Project
● Importing artwork into Flash, Adding media to the Library, Work with
libraries & its items, Working with timeline, Working with scenes, Find and
replace command.
● About vector and bitmap graphics and Flash drawing mode,
● About overlapping shapes using Flash drawing and painting tools
● Draw with different tools and Reshaping lines and shape outlines
● Snapping (object snapping, pixel snapping, snap alignment)
Working with colour, strokes and fills.
Unit 5 Principles of Animation And Storyboarding
● Bouncing ball, pendulum and other animations using principles of
animation
● Storyboard concepts & using camera angles in flash, character model sheet
Unit 6 Introduction to 2D and stop motion Animation
 Setting up the Head for Animation, setting up the Body for Animation,
Animating the Character
 Fly Cycle, Walk Cycle of Two legged
 Capturing objects with camera and making stop motion animation with
that
 Creating objects with clay dough, capturing and making stop motion
animation with that
Name of the Course: Web Design (HTML, CSS and Java -
script) Laboratory
Duration: 17 weeks(out of 17 weeks, 2 weeks Maximum Marks: 100
Theory & Tutorial: Nil Internal End Semester
Assessment: Assessment:40 marks
60 marks
Practical: 3hrs./ week Continuous Viva Voce: 20 marks
Evaluation:
50 marks
Credit: 1.5 Class Attendance: Assignment on the day of
10 marks Viva Voce and Practical
Report Submission:
20 marks
Aim:
Comprehension of the students on the technicalities of webpage design applying HTML tags ,CSS
and Java script as scripting language.
Course Outcome:
Design Web pages .
Identify different components of Webpages.
Design Webpages using HTML Tag & Cascading Style Sheet.
Create Webpages using Java script
Pre-Requisite :
Basic knowledge in HTML tags & skill of creating web pages are desirable.
Knowledge of basic Computer hardware & software are also necessary.
Course Contents
Unit 1 Basic in HTML & Elements of HTML
 The <!DOCTYPE> Declaration
 Write Simple HTML, Save the HTML Page, View the HTML Page in Your Browser
 HTML Elements & Nested HTML Elements
 HTML Attributes, src Attribute, width and height Attributes
 HTML Headings, Paragraphs, Horizontal Rules, Line Breaks
 HTML Text Formatting, Formatting Elements, Quotation and Citation Elements
Unit 2 Elements & Media

 HTML Images, Image Maps, Background Images, <picture> Element
 Working with Lists, Tables and Frames
 Working with Hyperlinks, Iframes & Multimedia
 Working with Forms and controls.
 HTML Graphics (Canvas & SVG)
HTML Media (Video, Audio & YouTube)
 Creating page design through table, frame etc.
Unit 3 Basic in Cascading Stylesheets

 CSS Syntax
 CSS Colour, Background Colour, Text Colour, Border Colour
 CSS Margins & Padding
 CSS Height and Width, CSS Box Model
 Properties for formatting text, Font Selection
 CSS Links, List, Table, Display
 CSS Position, Z-index, overflow, float
 CSS Layout - display: inline-block.
Unit 4 Advanced in Cascading Stylesheets
 CSS Navigation Bar

 CSS Dropdowns
 CSS Image Gallery
 CSS Forms
 Automatic Numbering with Counters
 CSS Website Layout
Unit 5 Java Script Basics

 Using Document.write(),window.alert(),console.log()
 JavaScript Statements, JavaScript Syntax
 JavaScript Variables, Operators
 JavaScript Data Types, Functions
 Real Life Objects, Properties, and Methods
 HTML Events, Strings, String Methods and Properties
 JavaScript Search Methods
 JavaScript Numbers & Number Methods,
 JavaScript Arrays & Array Methods,
 JavaScript Date Objects & Date Formats
 JavaScript Get Date Methods & Set Date Methods
Unit 6 Jump Starting Java Script , Writing Basics
 JavaScript Scope
 JavaScript Classes
 JavaScript JSON, Debugging
Name of the Course: Digital Photography Laboratory

Duration: Duration: Duration: 17 weeks(out of Maximum Marks: 100
17 weeks, 2 weeks are to be allotted for class
tests)
Theory & Tutorial: Nil Internal Assessment: End Semester
60 marks Assessment: 40 marks
Practical: 3 hrs./ week Continuous Evaluation: Viva Voce: 20 marks
50 marks
Credit: 1.5 Class Attendance: 10 Assignment on the day
marks of Viva Voce and
Practical Report
Aim:
Giving the students hands on skills on basic photography, application of digital image formation
techniques, designing different photography jobs and streams. Skilling the students with digital
photographic tools, equipment and use of modern softwares. Hands on training on post
production software technologies. Skilling on photographic restoration and professional
commercial photography.
Course Outcome:
Shoot different types of Photograph .
Design own Blog.
Shoot for a Multimedia Production.
Apply special effects to the photographs using softwares .
Pre-Requisite -
Keen interest in day to day nature and passion for graphics.
Primary knowledge of visual art form.
Course Contents
Unit 1 Basics of Photography
 Image formation in Celluloid film (35mm , 16mm, and other large formats).
 Basics of Digital Image formations .
 Exposure triangle and photographic lenses.
 Exposure triangle & usages of lenses
 Different focal lengths & different angles
Unit 2 Digital Image Formation Technology
 Basic Lighting fundamentals & use of available lightings.
 Basic lighting measures through light meters & use of extreme latitude of
Digital image sensors.
 Over exposure & under exposure handling in 35mm film negatives &
different image sensors of DSLR Cameras..
.
Unit 3 Different Photography jobs & streams
 Model Photography
 Product Photography.
 News reportage
 Industrial photography
 Blog photography
 Stage photography
 Mobile photography
 Cine still photography
 Travel photography
Unit 4 Jobs & Equipment (Professionals & Amateur)
 Available light photography in different kinds of DSLR Cameras and mobile
cameras.
 Some professional & semi professional softwares for restorations and colour
corrections and conversions.
Unit 5 Post Production Softwares & Technologies
 Uses of softwares and handling of photographic rucksacks for business
initiatives.
 Handling of huge workloads with own camera and lens kits and with own
post work systems.
 installation small photographic studio and post production set UPS
 Visit with industry professionals and visit at different photography studios

Unit 6 Photographic restorations & Industry
 Work of photographic restorations and colour corrections software usages.
 Usages of large format film cameras and full frame digital still cameras and
different capture formats or medium.
 Visit of a professional digital photographic lab
 Budgeting of proper bridal photography , event photography , industrial

photography and portfolio photography shoot at city or city outskirts……
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Packaging Technology [PT]
Revised 2022
Proposed Syllabus for 3rd Semester - Diploma in Packaging Technology
Semester-III
Sl. Category of Code Course Tile Credit Marks Total Contact

No. Course No. Hours/week
L T P
1. Program Introduction to 3 100 3 0 0
Core Course Packaging
Technology
2. Program Cellulose and 3 100 3 0 0
Core Course Fiberboard
Technology
3. Program Principles of 4 100 3 1 0
Core Course Thermodynamics
& Heat Transfer
4. Program Metal Packaging 3 100 3 0 0
Core Course
5. Program Glass Packaging 3 100 3 0 0
Core Course
6. Program Packaging 1 100 0 0 2
Core Course Technology Lab
7. Program Paper and 1 100 0 0 2
Core Course Corrugated
Technology Lab
8. Program Thermodynamics & 1 100 0 0 2
Core Course Heat Transfer Lab
9. Internship-I Should be 1 100 0 0 2
(4 weeks) undertaken in an
after the end industry/ Govt. or
of second Pvt. Certified
semester agencies which are
(Semester-II) in social sector/
Govt. Skill
Centers/Institutes/
Schemes
Total 20 900 15 1 8
Total Contact
Hours/week=24
Name of the course::Introduction to Packaging Technology
Course Code: PT/INTPT/S3 Semester:3rd
Duration:17 Weeks Minimum Marks: 100
Theory: 3 hrs./week Internal Examination: 20
Tutorial: Nil Assignment & Activity: 10
Attendance:10
End semester exam: 60
Credit: 3
Objective: On completion of the course , students will be able to
1.understand the basic concepts of packaging, its characteristics.
2 . learn different packaging materials.
3. understand the basic concepts of packaging evaluation, ecological aspects.
Contents:
Group-A Hr./unit Marks
Unit-1 Historical background, fundamental principle of packaging,
Introduction definition of packaging as integral process in product and 05 10
marketing. Function of package. Different package
components
Unit 2 Packaging ---- A total concept, Definition of packaging,
functions (3P), Advantages, Dis-advantages, Packaging 05 10
criteria, the concept of packaging, historical development,
Role of packaging technologists.
Unit-3 2.1 Primary Packaging Material (Plastic, Glass, Metal),
Classification of Secondary Packaging Material (Paper and Board), Tertiary
packaging Packaging Material.
materials. Different Packaging Materials used in Food, Pharmacy and
other industries. 08 20
2.2 Introduction to Food & Pharmaceutical Packaging.
Major Food products & their packaging materials (Fresh
foods, Dairy products, Fish, Meat, sea food & Drinks)
2.3 Wood:
Properties of wood as Packaging Material, forms of wood,
decay and preservation of woods.
Group-B
Unit-4 Physical characteristics of the product – Physical state,
weight, symmetry, fragility, rigidity, surface finish.
Physico-chemical characteristics – susceptibility to water, 07 20
water vapour, gases, odour, heat, light.
Cost and cost effectiveness and disposability. Basic
consideration for protection of packaged items.
Group-C
Unit-5 Introduction to packaging laws, The existing laws -----a
Packaging laws survey, the gap in legislation, packaging legislation in 05 10
prospects.
Unit-6 Types of hazards, loading & unloading hazards, causes of
Types of mechanical damage – impact, vibration, crushing, shock
hazards fragility, measurement of fragility, climatic hazards, 05 10
temperature. Humidity, micro-biological changes.
Group-D
Unit-7 Flexible packaging, retail packaging, aseptic & vacuum
Types of packaging, blister & skin packaging, wrapping. 05 10
packaging.
Unit-8 Introduction, sociological trends that impact packaging,
Future trends economic trends, cost factor & cost reduction in packaging. 05 10
& possibilities.
Total 45 100
(Lecture +
Tutorial)
Internal assessment examination and preparation for semester examination 2 weeks
(6 Lecture
hour)
Total 51
Lecture
hour (17
weeks)
Text and Reference Books:

S.N. Name of the Author Title of the Book Name of the Publishers
1. S. Natarajan Fundamental of Packaging PHI Learning Private Limited.
M. Govindarajan Technology
B. Kumar
2. Hand book of Packaging Engineers India Research Institute
Technology
3. U.K.Jain Pharmaceutical Packaging Pharma Med Press
Technology
4. Packaging of food products Indian Institute of Packaging
Name of the course : Cellulose and Fiberboard Technology
Course code: Semester: 3rd
Duration: 17 Weeks Maximum Marks: 100
Theory: 3 hrs/week Internal Examination:20
Tutorial : Nil Assignment &Activity : 10
Attendance:10
End semester exam : 60
Credit: 3
Objective: On completion of this course, students will be able to
1. Understand properties, manufacturing technology, application and limitation of Cellulose
Materials.
2. Learn the properties, applications and testing of paper and different board materials.
3. Know also the trends in use of those materials and forecast for future.
Contents:
Group – A
Hrs/unit Marks
Unit – 1 1.1 Introduction, Properties of cellulose materials, 5 15
Cellulose & application, cellulose derivatives.
Cellophane 1.2 Cellophane – Properties, manufacturing
process, application.
Unit – 2 2.1 Paper – Definition, Pulping, Methods of 10 20
Paper and production,
Paper board 2.2 Specialty papers for packaging, Multi wall
paper sack, Treated Paper, Advantages &
Limitation of paper based package materials.
2.3 Mineral coating of paper.
2.4 Paper Board – Definition, classification,
manufacture of paper board, Testing.
2.5 Properties of paper and paper board.
Group – B
Unit – 3 3.1 Introduction, Components of corrugated 10 20
Corrugated board- Liner, Flute (Function).
Board & Solid 3.2 Types of corrugated Boxes, Box Construction,
Fiber board Edge crush test, coating, closing and sealing.
Application.
3.3 Solid fiber board boxes – definition,
manufacturing process, combination board,
Hessian laminated board, application.
Unit – 4 Introduction, Properties, Different types of Folding 5 15

Folding Cartons Carton design. Application.
Group – C
Unit – 5 Introduction, manufacturing process, Types of 5 10
Composite container, Application, Quality grade, Advantage
container and limitation.
Unit – 6 6.1 Introduction, Classification, Properties 10 20
Wood 6.2 defects in wood, Nailed wooden box
6.3 Seasoning – Methods for seasoning packing
case timbers (natural, kiln)
6.4 Crates – Introduction, Classification of crates,
sill and skid base creates.
Total 45( Lecturer 100
+ Tutorial)
Internal assessment Examination and preparation for semester 2 weeks

examination (6 Lecture
hour)
Total 51 Lecture
hour(17
Weeks)
S.N Name of the Author Title of the Book Name of the Publishers
1. S. Natarajan Fundamental of PHI Learning Private
M. Govindarajan Packaging Technology Limited.
B.Kumar
2. Hand book of Packaging Engineers India Research
Technology Institute
3. U.K Jain Pharmaceutical Pharma Med Press

D.C Goupale Packaging Technology
S.Nayak
4. Packaging of food Indian Institute of
products Packaging
Name of the course : Metal Packaging
Theory: 3 hrs/week Internal Examination:20
Tutorial : Nil Assignment &Activity :10
Attendance:10
Credit: 3
Objective: On completion of this course, the student will be able to
1.Know the types of packages made of metals and their properties
2.Understand the various types of packages forms
3.Perform tests on properties of matals for packaging
Contents:
Group -A
Hrs./unit Marks
Unit – 1 Historical Background ,Different Types of metal 5 15
Introduction packaging, packaging material, coating, Metal and
alloys used in packaging. Advantages and Limitations
of metal packaging.
Unit – 2 2.1 Aluminium Foil – Definition, Manufacturing 10 20

Aluminium Foil Process.
and Collapsible 2.2 Properties and Applications in Packaging.
Metal Tube 2.3 Aluminium foil -Laminates, Coating, New
applications.
2.4 Collapsible Metal Tube – Material, Manufacture,
Application, Advantages and Disadvantages. Quality
control measures.
2.5 Laminated Tube – Introduction, manufacturing
process, Filing and Sealing.
Group -B
Unit – 3 4.1 Definition, Components of aerosol, Types of 5 15
Aerosol container.
Package 4.2 Working Principle (Diagram & Description)
4.3 Aerosol Cans, Aerosol valve, Dip Tube, Product
filling,
4.4 Propellant, Alternative Propellants
4.5 Advantages, Disadvantages, Application, Market in
India. Developments.
Unit – 4 4.1 Classification & Methods of Manufacture :- 10 20
Cans Two piece can (DRD &DWI) , Three piece Can
Coating, Double seaming, Advantages, Disadvantages,
Application.
4.2 Internal Food Can Lacquers – properties, common
methods, applications.
Group -C
Unit – 5 Definition, Function, Types of closure. 5 10
Seal and RSPP closure, Screw closure, Crown cap, Pilferproof
Closure caps.
Unit – 6 5.1 Tinplate, Tin-free steel (TFS), Black Plate - 10 20

Package Forms properties, Applications.
5.2 Drum -Classification of Drum, Manufacturing
Process, Closure,Recent Developments in Drums.
Total 45(Lecturer 100

+Tutorial)
examination (6 Lecture
hour)
Total 51 Lecture
hour (17
Weeks)
1. S. Natarajan Fundamental of PHI Learning Private
M. Govindarajan Packaging Technology Limited.
B.Kumar
3. U.K Jain Pharmaceutical Packaging Pharma Med Press

D.C Goupale Technology
S.Nayak
4 Joseph F. Harlon Hand Book of Package CRC Press

Robert J. Kelsey Engineering
Hallie E. Forcinio
Name of the course : Principles of Thermodynamics & Heat Transfer
Course code: PT/THM & HT/S3 Semester: 3rd
Theory: 3hrs/week Internal Examination:20
Tutorial: 1hrs/week Assignment & Activity:10
Credit: 4 Attendance: 10
End Semester exam : 60
Objective: On completion of the course, the students will be able to

1. understand the physical significance of Thermodynamics laws .
2. learn the Thermodynamic properties of gas and steam.
3. apply principles of Thermodynamics in packaging process.
Contents:
Hrs./unit Marks
Unit – 1 1.1 Definitions of Thermodynamics & Heat Engine.
Fundamentals 1.2 Units- Fundamentals , Derived & System of units
& Laws of 1.3 Thermal Equilibrium -Thermodynamics System-
Thermodyna- Classification of Thermodynamics System-
mics Thermodynamic Equilibrium
1.4 Properties of System - Intensive & Extensive
properties.
1.5 Temperature, Pressure, Absolute Pressure, Gauge
Pressure & Atmospheric Pressure , NTP, STP– Simple
problem to explain the concept.
1.6 Fundamentals measurements like Molecular weight,
Atomic weight, Density, Specific Gravity, Specific 25 35
Volume, Mole, Mole Fraction, Mass Fraction, Volume
Fraction - Simple problem to explain the concept.
1.7 Energy –Stored & Transit – unit of energy.
1.8 Heat, Work & Power and their units.
1.9 Thermodynamics process : Flow Process & Non Flow
Process , Steady and Unsteady Flow, Uniform and
Non Uniform Flow
1.10 Definitions of Internal Energy & Enthalpy
1.11 Zeroth, First & Second law of Thermodynamic –
Simple problems on conversion of heat into work and
vice versa.
1.12 Limitation of first law.
1.13 Entropy – Relation Between heat and Entropy,
Importance of Entropy-Unit of Entropy
1.14 Application of Thermodynamic principles in
packaging.
Unit – 2 2.1 Brief Explanation of perfect gas laws- Boyle’s Law,
Properties of Charles’ Law.
Gases: 2.2 Characteristic Equation of Gas – Characteristic &
Universal gas constant – units. Simple Problem. 14 27
2.3 Cp & Cv , Ratio of Cp & Cv, Relation between Cp, Cv &
R.
2.4 Types of Thermodynamic Processes—Reversible,
Irreversible, Isochoric, Isobaric, Isothermal, Isentropic &
Polytropic. Equation representing the processes.
Unit – 3 3.1 Formation of steam,
Steam 3.2 Important terms of steam : Wet Steam, Dry
Saturated Steam, Superheated steam , Dryness fraction
, Sensible heat of water , Latent heat of vaporization,
Enthalpy or total heat of steam, Specific volume of 8 15
steam,
3.3 Steam tables and their uses.
3.4 Advantages of superheating the steam
3.5 Enthalpy-Entropy Diagram (Mollier Chart)—its use
3.6 Measurement of Dryness Fraction of Steam –
i)Throttling Calorimeter ii) Combined separating &
throttling calorimeter.
Unit – 4 4.1 Basic concept on Condenser, Boiler & Turbine
Basic Concept 4.2 Advantages & disadvantages of installing a 5 8
on Condenser in a Steam Power Plant
Condenser, (no problems)
Boiler &
Turbine
Unit – 5 5.1 Methods of Heat Transfer
Heat Transfer 5.2 Conduction:-Fourier’s law of heat conduction ,
Thermal Conductivity. Heat transfer through
homogeneous wall, composite wall & through hollow
cylinder. (Simple problem)
5.3 Convection: - Explanation of convective heat 8 15
transfer, Principle of heat exchanger. (No deduction )
5.4 Radiation: - Explanation, Definition of Absorptivity,
Reflectivity & Transmissivity, Classification of solids on
the basis of their radiation process (Black body, White
body, Transparent body, Opaque Body)
5.5 Stefan-Boltzmann law – Statement & explanation of
terms with unit. (No problem)
Total 60 (Lecturer 100
+Tutorial)
examination (8 Lecture )
Total 68 Lecture
(17 Weeks)
Text & Reference Books:
1. R.S Khurmi Thermal Engineering S Chand & Co.
2. A.R.Basu Thermal Engineering DhanpathRai
3. A.S.Sarao Thermal Engineering
4. P.L.Balani Thermal Engineering Khanna Publishers
Name of the course : Glass Packaging
Course code: PT/GP/S3 Semester: 3rd
Theory: 3hrs/week Internal Examination:20
Tutorial: Nil Assignment & Activity:10
Attendance:10
Credit: 3
Objective: upon completion of this course students will be able
1.To understand glass packaging method in brief
2. To understand Various properties of glass container and their usability
3.To understand the manufacturing process of glass , different defects noticed in glass containers and
their sealing and capping mechanism
Contents:
Hrs./unit Marks
Unit – 1 Characteristics of glass, Properties of glass (Physical, 12 20
Introduction Chemical), Colouring agent, Merits & Demerits,
Type of glass for packaging & their properties – chemical
inertness, clarity, rigidity, resistance to internal pressure,
heat resistance
Unit – 2 Manufacturing Process of Glass containers like glass 6 20

Manufacturing bottles and Jars, Blow & blow process, Press & Blow
Process process, Inspection and Surface treatments
Unit – 3 Type, Properties, Design, Quality standards, Defects & 15 20
Glass Packaging risks, Different types of closures, Labeling, Coating &
Forms decorating.
Unit – 4 Definition, types and properties of glass used to contain 6 20
Ampoules & parenteral drug, Manufacturing process of Ampoules and
Vials Vials.
Unit – 5 Testing of Glass Container, Physical testing, Chemical 6 20
Testing methods of testing
methods
Total 45(Lecturer 100

+Tutorial)
Internal assessment Examination and preparation for semester examination 2 weeks
(6 Lecture
hour)
Total 51 Lecture
hour (17
Weeks)
1. S. Natarajan Fundamental of Packaging PHI Learning Private Limited.
M. Govindarajan Technology
B.Kumar
3. U.K Jain Pharmaceutical Packaging Pharma Med Press

D.C Goupale Technology
S.Nayak
4 Joseph F. Harlon Hand Book of Package CRC Press
Robert J. Kelsey Engineering
Hallie E. Forcinio
Name of the course : Packaging Technology Lab
Practical: 2hrs/week 1. Internal Assessment- 60
[Continuous Evaluation : 50
Class Attendance : 10]
2.End Semester Assessment- 40
[Assignment on the day of Viva -Voce and
practical report submission:20
Viva -Voce : 20]
Credit: 1
Objective:
On satisfactory completion of the course, the student should be in a position to develop the
skills corresponding to the knowledge acquired in the theoretical subject.
Suggested List of Laboratory Assignments :

1 To study the extent of damage of packaged items in vibration.
2 To study the extent of damage of packaged items from different drop height by drop
tester.
3 To study the extent of damage of packaged item under impact in inclined impact tester.
4 To study the corrosion of metal plate in salt spray corrosion tester.
5 To Study stack load test
6 To study the compression test for transport package.
7 To study Rain test
List of equipment’s / apparatus for laboratory experiments :

1 Vibration Tester
2 Drop Tester
3 Inclined Impact Tester
4 Salt spray corrosion tester.
5 stack load tester
6 Box compression Test
7 Rain tester
Note:
Name of the course : Paper and Corrugated Technology Lab
Practical: 2hrs/week 1. Internal Assessment- 60
[Continuous Evaluation : 50
Class Attendance : 10]
2.End Semester Assessment- 40
[Assignment on the dayof Viva -Voce and
practical report submission:20
Viva -Voce : 20]
Credit: 1
Objective:
skills corresponding to the knowledge acquired in the theoretical subject Cellulose & Fibre
Board Technology.
Suggested List of Laboratory Assignments :

1 Study of different types of templates used in packaging lab
2 To measure thickness of paper samples
3 To study grammage cutter
4 To measure puncture resistance of paper
5 To measure brusting strength of paper
6 To measure COBB value of paper
7 To measure folding endurance of paper
8 Ring Crush test /Edge Crush test of corrugated board
9 Opacity and Brightness test of paper
10 Stiffness Test of paper/ paper board

1 Templates
2 Thickness gauge
3 Grammage Cutter
4 Puncture resistance tester
5 Brusting strength tester
6 Cobb tester
7 Folding Endurance Tester
8 Ring Crush Tester/ Edge Crush tester
9 Opacity and Brightness tester
10 Taber Stiffness tester
Note:
Name of the course : THERMODYNAMIES & HEAT TRANSFER LAB
Course code: PT/L THM & HT/S3 Semester: 3rd
Practical: 2hrs/week 1.Internal Assessment--60
[Continuous Evaluation: 50
Credit-1 Class Attendance : 10]
2.End Semester Assessment—40
[Assignment on the day of viva-voce and
practical report submission: 20
Viva-Voce:20]
Objective:
skills corresponding to the knowledge acquired in the theoretical subject.
Suggested List of Laboratory Assignment:

1 Determination of thermal conductivity of solids.
2 Determination of Dryness Fraction of steam by separating & throttling calorimeter
3 Study of Condenser.
4. Study of Heat exchanger.
5. Study of Fire tube boiler & Water tube boiler

1 Apparatus for measuring thermal conductivity of solid
2 Apparatus for measuring dryness fraction
3 Apparatus for condenser
4. Shell and tube Heat Exchanger
5 Apparatus for Model of Cochran boiler
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Photography [PHO]
Revised 2022
Syllabus for Diploma in Photography( 3rd Semester)
Principles of Photography (TH)
Name of the Course : Diploma in Photography
Name of the Subject: Principles of Photography
Course Code : Semester: Third
Teaching Scheme : Examination Scheme :
Theory : 3 contact hours/week. Internal Examination : 30 Marks
Tutorial : 1 contact hour/week Class Test : 20 Marks
Practical: Nil Teacher's Assessment: 10 Marks
Credit :3 End Semester Examination : 70Marks
Aim:
1. To develop knowledge of Principles of Photography based on Physics & Chemistry.
2. To make students acquainted with all the important principles of photography for the
purpose of scientific application.
Objectives - The student will be able to understand
1. The properties and behaviour of light, concept of image formation, guiding laws and
conditions for the construction of different photographic images.
2 Basics of optics and the concept of camera lens,qualities and drawbacks and their use
& remedy.
3. The process of preparing silver based B/W photographic negative and positive films.
4. Concept of exposure, sensitometry, densitometry, Characteristic curve, Rule of Thumb.
5. Mechanism of image formation on silver based photographic emulsion.
6. Theory of B/W development and fixing.
7. Utility of intensification and photographic reduction.
Pre-Requisite -
1. Elementary knowledge of optics, inorganic and organic chemistry (taught in first and
second semester).
CONTACT PERIODS: 60(15 WEEKS), INTERNAL ASSESSMENT: 2 WEEKS,

TOTAL PERIODS: 60
Content (Name of Topic) Periods

Group - A
Module 1 1.0 Basic Properties of Light
1.1 Spectrum
1.2 Propagation, Absorption, reflection, refraction, dispersion
1.3 Image formation
3L+1T
1.4 Guiding laws
1.5 Construction of photographic image
1.6 Image size
Module 2 2.0 Camera Lens
2.1 Variety of Camera Lens, Focal Length, Focal Point, Focal
Plane 3L+1T
2.2 APERTURE: Effective & Relative – F/No – T/No
2.3 Hyper Focal Distance
2.4 Circle of Confusion
2.5 Angle of View
Module 3 3.0 Qualities & Drawbacks of Lens
3.1 Resolving & Covering Power
3.2 Depth of Focus
3.3 DEPTH OF FIELD: Factors influencing Depth of Field,
3L+1T
Calculation of Depth of Field
3.4 DRAW BACKS OF LENS: Lens Aberration
3.5 Lens Flare
Group - B
Module 4 4.0 Exposure
4.1 Exposure, It’s definition, Law of Reciprocity
4.2 Exposure Variables, Rule of Thumb for manual exposure
measurement. 3L+1T
4.3 Basic Sensitometry, Characteristics Curve
4.4 Densitometry& Densitometer.
Module 5 5.0 Principles of Colour Photography
5.1 Colour, its definition, How we see colour
5.2 Colour Synthesis : Additive& Subtractive, Basic Principles
of colour photography
5.2 Fundamental properties of colour:Hue, Saturation, 3L+1T
Brightness
5.3 Colour Gamut
5.4 Colour Modes & Models
Group - C
Module 6 6.0 Celluloid film base
6.1 Constituents of celluloid film base
6.2 Characteristics of celluloid film base
6.3 Software for scanning negatives and software updates
6L+2T
Module 7 7.0 After treatment of Negative
7.1 Photographic Reducers – subtractive, proportional and
super-proportional. 3L+1T
7.2 Intensification- chemical, optical, physical
7.3 Chemical intensification with mercury and chromium
Module 8 8.0 Chemical Reversal
8.1 Steps for chemical reversal
8.2 Dichromate reversing bath 3L+1T
8.3 Permanganate reversing bath
Group - D
Module 11 11.0 Colour Negative Film
11.1 Cross section of negative film
11.2 Steps for film processing- (ECN@2 chemistry)
11.3 Constituents of development bath, bleach bath, fixing bath
and bleach-fix bath.
11.4 Uses of the constituents of development bath, bleach bath, 6L+2T
fixing bath and bleach-fix bath.
11.5 Chemical reactions that take place in development, bleach,
fixing and bleach-fix baths.
11.6 Importance of pH and temperature control
Total 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Internal Examination : Marks - 30 Marks on Class Test : 20

End Semester Examination : Marks - 70 Teacher's Assessment : 10
Group Module Objective Questions Total Marks
To be Set To be Answered Marks per
Question
A 1,2,3 4
B 4,5 4
C 6,7,8 4 Any Twenty 1 20×1=20
D 9,10 4
E 11,12,13 4
Group Module Subjective Questions Total Marks
Question
A 1,2,3 2
B 4,5 2 Any Five taking at least
5 5 ×10 =50
C 6,7,8 2 One from each Group
D 9.10 2
E 11,12,13 2
Note 1: Teacher's assessment will be based on performance on given assignments & quizzes.
Note 2: Assignments may be given on all the topics covered on the syllabus.
Text Books
Name of Authors Title of the Book Publisher
Mitchell Ilford Manual of Photography Focal Press
Jacobson Manual of Photography Focal Press
Cox Manual of Photography
Lockett Camera Lenses
Reference Books
Dr. Tulika Das Chemistry of Photography Barnana Prakashani
Stroebel Basic Photographic Materials and Processes
James Fundamentals of Photographic Theory
Boucher Fundamentals of Photography
Glafkede Photographic Chemistry
Ray Applied Photographic Optics
L I G T H I N G T E C H N I Q U E S (TH)
Name of the Course : PHOTOGRAPHY

Name of the Subject: L I G T H I N G T E C H N I Q U E S
Theory:2 contact Hour/week. Internal Examination : 15 Marks
Tutorial : 1contact Hour/week Class Test : 10 Marks
Practical : Nil Teacher's Assessment: 05 Marks
Credit : 2 End Semester Examination : 35 Marks
Aim:
1. To develop the knowledge & skill of Lighting Techniques in Photography.
2. Students will understand the knowhow of the lighting techniques for both still & Motion
Picture Photography and can function either as an entrepreneur or can take up jobs in the
Photography and film industry.
Objectives - The student will be able to
1. Develop the knowledge and skill in principles of light and its function.
2. Understand the natural and artificial sources of light and their application in photography.
3. Understand the concept of various types of light controls used in photography.
4. Understand the construction and use of electronic flash light in photography;
5. Understand the concept of lighting on portrait, group, child etc. in still photography.
6. Understand the concept of lighting for article and copy photography.
Pre-Requisite -
1. Basic knowledge of illumination should be known
2. Knowledge of the use of different types of light is also necessary.
Contents: Total Periods: 45(15Weeks) +06(2Weeks) =51(17Weeks)

Group - A
1.0 LIGHTING OF STILL PHOTOGRAPHY
1.1 Contrast
Module 1 6
1.2 Sensitivity
1.3 Colour Temperature.
2.0 Natural Sources of Light
2.1 Day light (Direct & Diffused sources of light)
Module 2 6
2.2 Uses
2.3 Results.
3.0 Artificial Sources of Light
3.1 THERMAL RADIATOR TYPE: Tungsten Lamp - Tungsten
Halogen Lamp - Projection Lamp - their constituents,
Module 3 Specifications and types of fitting used. 6
3.2 ELECTRIC DISCHARGE TYPE: Vapour Discharge Lamp - Arc
Lamp – Electronic Flash - their constituents, specifications
and types of fitting used.
Group - B
Module 4 4.0. Types of lighting for photography (Available and
artificial)
4.1 Hard Light, Soft Light, Diffused Lighting – their
specification and uses. 6
4.2 Light contrast, Silhouette& semi-Silhouette, High Key,
Low Key-their uses.
4.3 Contour, Profile Lighting & Rim Lighting- their
specification and uses.
Module 5 5.0 Light Controls
5.1 Qualitative, quantitative and directional aspects of: Barn- 6
Door, Snoot, Dimmer, Filter, Diffuser, Reflector, Cutter,
Spot.
Module 6 6.0 TYPES OF FLASH:
6.1 Studio flash, Battery Operated, Portable,
6.2 Ring Flash, Stroboscopic, Multiple, 6
6.3 Slave Unit, Sensor. Use of each type.
GROUP-C
Module 7 7.0 Situation Lighting
7.1 Lighting for portrait, Group & Child Photography. 9
7.2 Lighting for Article Photography.
7.3 Lighting for Copy Photography.
Total 45
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Internal Examination : Marks– 15Marks on Attendance:05,

End Semester Examination : Marks – 35 Teacher's Assessment :10
To be Set To be Marks per
Answered Question
A 1,2&3 5
B 4,5&6 5
Any TEN 1 10×1=10
C 7 5

Answered Question
A 1,2&3 3 Any Five
B 4,5&6 3 TakingAt Least
5 5 ×5 =25
C 7 3 One from Each
Group
Name of Authors Title of the Book Publisher
Ray Applied Photographic Optics
Fitt&Thoruley Lighting Technology: a guide for the
entertainment industry
Hunter &Fuofua Light: Science & Magic- an introduction to
photographic lighting
Nurnberg Lighting for photography
INDOOR & OUTDOOR STILLP H O T O G R A P H Y– I (TH)

Name of the Subject: INDOOR&OUTDOORSTI LLPHOTOGRAPHY–I

Theory:3 contact Hour/week. Internal Examination : 20 Marks
Tutorial : 1 contact Hour/week Class Attendance : 5 Marks
Practical : Workshop Teacher's Assessment: 05 Marks
Credit : 3 End Semester Examination : 70 Marks
Aim:
1. The student should know the techniques of handling the different types of cameras and films for
common and special shooting situations.
2. The students should also be equipped with the ability to choose the particular equipment
for a particular work from the wide available varieties.
1. Understand the concept of selection of cameras and films on the basis of different purposes.
2. Understand the different types of camera lenses according to different purposes.
3. Understand and usages about camera stand / tripod on the basis of application;
4. Understand the concept of selection of composition and angle of view on the basis of distance,
size & movements.
5. Understand the concept of different types of common shooting techniques.
Pre-Requisite -
1. Basic knowledge in Shooting Technique.
2. Basic artistic and aesthetic sense.

GROUP-A
Module 1 1.0 SELECTION OF CAMERA (On the basis of)
1.1 Size.
1.2 Type. 3
1.3 Range.
Module 2 2.0 SELECTION OF FILM (On the basis of)
2.1 Size.
2.2 Type.
2.3 Film Speed. 3
2.4 Film Specification.
Module3 3.0 CAMERA LENSES (Brief description, construction,
Advantages & Disadvantages, available model)
3.1 Perspective.
3.2 Zoom, Macro, Fish Eye ,Tele- Converter, 6
3.3 Lens Coating, Lens Mounting.
GROUP-B
Module 4 4.0 SELECTION OF TRIPOD/CAMERA STAND (Specification, uses)

4.1 Light/heavy duty.
4.2 Rigid/Collapsible type. 6
4.3 Fixed/Tilt type.
Module 5 5.0 SELECTION OF OBJECTS
5.1 Composition.
5.2 Angle of view. 12
5.3 Distance, Size, Movement.
5.4 Guide Number (Definition and uses)
Module 6 6.0 COMMON SHOOTING TECHNIQUES
6.1 Pass port & portrait Photography.
15
6.2 Advertising Photography.
6.3 Model Photography.
Total 45
EXAMINATION SCHEME
Internal Examination : Marks - 20 Marks on Attendance : 05

Group Module Objective Questions Total

Marks
To be Set To be Answered Marks
per
Question
A 1,2,3,4 12
B 5 8
Any Twenty 1 20×1=20
C 6 5
Group Module Subjective Questions Total

To be Set To be Answered Marks Marks
per
Question
A 1,2,3,4 4 Any Five
B 5 2 TakingAt Least One 10 5 ×10 =50
C 6 2 from Each Group
Text Books
Name of Authors Title of the Book
M. Langford Advance Photography
Blaker Applied depth of field
H. Angel Landscape photography
W. White Photo macrography: an introduction
Langford Visual aids and photography in education
Spencer’s Colour photography in practice
Arnold Applied photography
Focal Encyclopaedia of photography
Jacobson Manual of photography
Cox Manual of photography
Mitchell Ilford Manual of Photography
Boucher Fundamentals of photography
DIGITAL (STILL ) PHOTOGRAPHY (TH)

Name of the Subject: Digital Still Photography

Theory: 3 contact Periods/week. Internal Examination : 20 Marks
Tutorial : 1 contact Period/week Class Attendance : 5 Marks
Practical : Workshop End Semester Examination : 70 Marks
Credit : 3 Teacher's Assessment: 5 Marks
Aim:
1. The student should know the darkroom work schedule involves a series of processes, most of
which are chemical in nature.
2. The students should also be equipped with the ability to choose the different chemicals
and papers for different purpose.
1. understand the concept of B&W film developing, developer contents, different type of
developers, special type of developers, fixing, washing, drying of negatives, reversal processing;
2. understand the concept and technique of B&W printing, using various equipme, papers
and technique of processing and finishing of prints
3. Understand the concept of darkroom technique.
Pre-Requisite -
1. Basic knowledge of aesthetic sense.
2. Should be able to work in darkroom.
Group – A
Module 1
DIFFERENT NEGATIVE SCANNERS (35 MM,SUPER 35 MM& IMAX)
15
Group - B
Module2 2.1 GLOSIGNS AND VINYL PRINTING (POSTERS OR VIRAL MEDIUM)
2.2 TONING, COLORING, RETOUCHING 15

2.3 INCORPORATION OF TEXTS AND GRAPHIC ELEMENTS
Group – C
Module 3 3.1 CREATIVE INPUTS USING DIFFERENT PHOTO EDIT

SOFTWARES
15
Group – D
Module 4 USES OF DIFFERENT KINDS OF RAW FILES AND
COMPRESSED FILES IN PROFESSIONAL FIELDS
15
Total 60
EXAMINATION SCHEME


Answered Question
A 1 8
B 2 8 Any Twenty 1 20×1=20
C 3 5
D 4 4
Answered Question
A 1 3 Any Five
B 2 3 TakingAt Least
10 5 ×10 =50
C 3 2 One from Each
D 4 2 Group
Text Books
Name of Authors Title of the Book
M. Langford Advance Photography

Blaker Applied depth of field
H. Angel Landscape photography
W. White Photo macrography: an introduction
Langford Visual aids and photography in education
Spencer’s Colour photography in practice
Arnold Applied photography
Focal Encyclopaedia of photography
Jacobson Manual of photography
Cox Manual of photography
Mitchell Illford Manual of Photography
Boucher Fundamentals of photography
PHOTOGRAPHY DESIGN (TH)
Name of the Course: Diploma in Photography

Theory: 3 hrs/week Internal Examination: 20
Tutorial: Nil Assignment & Attendance: 10
Practical: 4 hrs/week End Semester Exam:70
Credit: 3
Aim:
In day-to-day work as photographers, majority of the students will not normally be directly involved with
photographic design. It is important that they should have an awareness of the place that their work occupied
within the areas of visual communication and that they have a sound understanding of the steps leading to
the commissioning of the photographic services, the reasons behind and the brief to which they are required
to work. The present course will not only provide an opportunity to develop the logic of the design processes
but also will serve as a vehicle for proper utilization of design in the proper understanding of the present
discipline.
Objective: The students will be able to understand the
(i) basic elements & principles of visual design, visualization and layout procedure;
(ii) concept of graphic design;
(iii) concept of both static and dynamic composition;
(iv) concept of colour and emotional appeal of colour;
(v) concept of art and aesthetics in photography;
(vi) designing aspects of digital photography including the concepts of colour in digital platform, colour
separation through scanner and graphic requirements for digital slides;
(vii) different stages of preparation of advertising materials;
(viii) function and working of advertising agency.
Pre-Requisite: Elementary knowledge of Basic Photography

Contents:
Group-A Hrs/unit Marks
Unit 1 ELEMENTS OF VISUAL DESIGN
Elements & Principle of Design – Characteristics of Effective 05 10
Design – Visualisation – Method of Visualisation – Different
forms of Visual Art – Layout procedure.
Unit 2 GRAPHIC DESIGN 05 05
Meaning, definitions and use of common terms in visual

communication: Form – Line – Tone – Shape – Pattern – 10 15
Unit 3 Colour.
Principles or Laws of Design - Unity, Variety, Balance, Emphasis,
Harmony, Scale, Proportion, Rhythm.
Group- Composition
B 05 05
Unit 4 Meaning, definitions and use of: Composition (static & dynamic) –
Harmony – Balance (symmetrical & asymmetrical) – Unity – Rhythm
– Perspective.
Colour
10 10
Meaning, definitions and use of: Primary Colour – Secondary
Unit 5
Colour – Tertiary Colour – Intermediate Colour – Analogous
Colour – Complementary Colour, split - complimentary colours-
Selection of colour in terms of prints production. Difference between
light colour & pigmentary colour. Emotional appeal of colour.
ART & AESTHETICS 05 10
Unit 6 Aim, objective and role of art and aesthetics in Photography.
Purpose and advantages of layout - Materials, equipment and

techniques used in the preparation of layout, Artwork and simple
dummy preparation - How to train our mind to visualize - Role of
photography and printing in visual communication
Group
C
DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY 05 05
Unit 7 Design aspects of digital photography - Principles of digital
colour representation - Principles of colour separation through
scanner - An outline of graphic requirements for digital slides.
Typography 01 05
Unit 8 Type & typography in design. Concept of type family.
PREPARATION OF ADVERTISING MATERIALS

Concept of the major stages in the preparation of advertising 02 05
Unit 9 materials – brief analysis.
Outline the structure of a typical advertising agency and the
functions of its staff.
48 70
Name of Author Title of the Book Name of the

Publisher
1. S K Luthra Applied Art Handbook
2. Vincent Steer Printing Design & Layout
3. E D Lopatecki Advertising Layout & Typography
4. Martin Solomon The Art of Typography
5. J Nath
5. RichardM Schlemmer Advertising Art & Production
Handbook of Advertising Art

Production
CONTACT PERIODS: 48 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT: 06 TOTAL PERIODS: 54
Examination Scheme:
a) Internal Examination Marks: 20

b) End Semester Examination Marks: 70
c) Attendance + Assessment + Interaction : 10
Full Marks: 100
End Semester Examination Marks: 70
Group Unit Objective Marks/Qs Total

Marks
To be set To be answered
A 1, 2 &3 12 Any 20 Qs 01 20
B 4, 5 &6 06 -
C 7, 8 & 9 07 -
Group Unit Subjective Marks/Qs Total

Marks
A 1, 2 & 3 04 Any five Qs 10 05x 10
Taking atleast =50
One from each
Group
B 4,5 & 6 03 - - -
C 7, 8 & 9 03 - - -
Note 1: Teachers’ Assessment will be based on performance on given assignments.

Note 2: Assignments may be given on all the topics covered in the syllabus.
P R O F E S S I O N A L P R A C T I C E -I (S T I L L P H O T O G R A P H Y)

Name of the Subject: Professional Practice I (Still Photography)
Theory: Nil contact Hour/week. Internal Examination : Nil
Tutorial : Nil contact Hour/week Class Attendance : Nil
Practical: Project work 3 contact Hour/Week End Semester Examination : 50 Marks
Credit : 2 Teacher's Assessment: Nil
Aim:
1. The students of photography need some platform to express their creative ideas both in
commercial as well as in cultural fields. This course will help the students to plan some creative
exhibit as well as give them some opportunity to apply their technical knowledge gained through
all the theoretical and practical subjects on ‘Still Photography’.
2. The students should also be able to understand the concept of actual shooting and
completing the assignment in order to deliver his product to the target viewer in the form
of a Portfolio or an Album.
1. Understand the preparation of planning a job.
2. Understand the concept of handling the different equipment individually.
3. Understand the concept of time management for a particular job.
4. Understand the concept of Budget for a particular job.
Pre-Requisite -
1. Basic idea about Photographic field.
2. Basic smartness and ability to do the job individually.

Group – A PROJECT WORK ON ANY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING ASPECTS OF PHOTOGRAPHY:
(a) Documentation;
(b) Illustration;
(c) Message;
(d) Story Board;
(e) Essay;
(f) Artistic Expression
Group –B WHAT A STUDENT WILL HAVE TO PERFORM FOR THE PROJECT:

(i) A Portfolio of 15 photographs (size-7inchx9inch) on the selected
aspect as given above;
(ii) technical details and explanation in support of the topic of the
project undertaken;
(iii) submission of negatives, suitable captions and any other
relevant information along with the above; and,
(iv) Submission of the project report.
Total 45
EXAMINATION SCHEME

Final Examination : Marks - 70 Teacher's Assessment : 05

Answered Question
A 1,2 6
B 3,4 4
C 5,6 8
D 7,8 7
Answered Question
A 1,2 2 Any Five
B 3,4 2 TakingAt Least
10 5 ×10 =50
C 5,6 2 One from Each
D 7,8 2 Group

Name of the Subject: Sessional course for indoor and outdoor still photography Lab Part-I& II
Course Code : Semester: Third & fourth

Theory: Nil contact Hour/week. Internal Examination : Nil
Tutorial : Nil contact Hour/week Class Attendance : Nil
Practical : 4 Hour/Week End Semester Examination : 100
Credit : 3 Teacher's Assessment: Nil
Aim:
1. A student might have good theoretical knowledge in photography but without practice it will be
useless, so that it is very important. The content of the present course has been so designed that
the students get adequate opportunity to handle different types of cameras & accessories and also
they will have the scope to practice in taking some commonly used indoor & outdoor shorts.
2. A careful execution of the practical work proposed in this paper would help the students
in developing their skill adequately
1. Concept of using and utilizing the different types of lights;
2. Practice of different types of outdoor shooting conditions in B&W and colour.
3. Practice of different types of indoor shooting conditions in B&W and colour;
Pre-Requisite -
1. Basic theoretical knowledge in Photography.
2. Knowledge of basic camera hardware & software is also necessary.
Part - I
(a) To undertake demonstration of the uses of different types of light 12
(natural & artificial).
(b) To practice taking OUTDOOR photographs in B&W in the following
conditions: 15
Landscapes – Street / Building – Sculpture – Insect / Animal
movement – Industrial plant (outside view) – Human figure
(close up / long shot / model photography) etc.
(c) To practice taking INDOOR photographs in B&W in different

environments such as Copying, Passport, Portrait etc. 18
Total 45
Part – II
a) To undertake demonstration of the uses of different types of light 12
(natural & artificial light).
b) To practice taking OUTDOOR photographs in COLOUR in the
following conditions: 15
Landscapes – Street / Building – Sculpture – Insect / Animal
movement – Industrial plant (outside view) – Human figure
(close up / long shot / model photography) etc.
c) To practice taking INDOOR photographs in COLOUR in different
environments such as Slide copying, Passport, Portrait, Strobe
light photography, photography on transparency.
18
Total 45
EXAMINATION SCHEME


Question
A 1,2 6
B 3,4 4
C 5,6 8
D 7,8 7
Question
A 1,2 2
Any Five
10 5 ×10 =50
Group
D 7,8 2
D IGITAL LAB TECHNIQUES F O R S T I L L P H O T O G R A P H Y

Name of the Subject: Darkroom Technique Lab for Still Photography

Theory: Nil contact hours/week. Internal Examination : 20 Marks
Tutorial : Nil contact hour/week Class Attendance : 5 Marks
Practical : 4 Periods/Week End Semester Examination : 100 Marks
Credit : 3 Teacher's Assessment: 5 Marks
Aim:
1. Quality of photographs depends mostly on the quality of darkroom work. The contents of the
course have been so designed that the students may get enough opportunity to practice the
common darkroom processes.
2. The diploma holders in this discipline are expected to have professional skill in the
techniques.
1. Understand the role of different chemicals and their uses.
2. Understand the functions of different darkroom equipment by hands on experiences.
Pre-Requisite -
1. Basic theoretical knowledge about the different chemical reactions.

Part - I
(a) Preparation of color schemes
(b) Preparations of art works and selection of art materials manually

and digitally
(c) Publicity of visual design
(d) Digital cover design (scanning, editing & retouching)
(e) Contrasts and colours

Total 45
EXAMINATION SCHEME


Answered Question
A 1,2 6
B 3,4 4
C 5,6 8
D 7,8 7
Answered Question
A 1,2 2 Any Five
10 5 ×10 =50
D 7,8 2 Group
Photo Design Lab
Name of the Course: Diploma in Photography
Duration: : Seventeen weeks/Semester Maximum Marks: 100

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme: Continuous Evaluation
Theory: Nil hrs./week Mid Semester Exam.: Nil
Tutorial: Nil hrs./week Attendance & Teacher’s Assessment : 50 Marks
Practical: 4 hrs./week End Semester Exam:50Marks
Credit: 3
Aim: To impart practical knowledge in Work Shop/Lab related with course of study.
Objective: Student will able to
Sl.
No.
1. Know basic design for photography
2. Read and interpret Production Workflow.

3. Identify, select, & use of various tools, equipment & software.
4. Operate, control different machines & equipment.
5. Inspect the job for specified dimensions.
6. Produce jobs as per specified dimensions.
7. Adopt safety practices (tools, jobs & personal) while working on various machines.
8. Acquaint with the chronological operational processes involving in the jobs.
9. Care & maintenance of the tools & machines.
Pre-Requisite:
Sl.
No.
1. Elementary knowledge of Photographic Processes & Printing
2. Color Technology
Contents: CONTINUOUS INTERNAL ASSESSMENT OF 50 MARKS IS TO BE CARRIED OUT BY THE TEACHERS Hrs./Uni Marks
THROUGHOUT THE SEMESTER WHERE MARKS ALLOTTED FOR ASSESSMENT OF SESSIONAL WORK UNDERTAKEN IN t 15
3RD SEMESTER IS 25. DISTRIBUTION OF MARKS IN 3RD SEMESTER: PERFORMANCE OF JOB– 10; LABORATORY 08/Unit 15
NOTEBOOK – 10, ATTENDANCE – 05. 10
EXTERNAL ASSESSMENT (END SEMESTER EXAM) OF 50 MARKS SHALL BE HELD AT THE END OF THE FOURTH
1 20
SEMESTER ON THE ENTIRE SYLLABI. ONE JOB PER STUDENT FROM ANY ONE OF THE JOBS DONE IS TO BE PERFORMED. 08/Unit 20
JOB IS TO BE SET BY LOTTERY SYSTEM. 2 20
DISTRIBUTION OF MARKS: ON SPOT JOB – 20; VIVA-VOCE – 30 09/Unit
Unit: 1,2,3,4,5, & 6 3
TOTAL PERIODS: 64 (16 Weeks) + 4 (1 Week) = 68 (17 Weeks) 12/Unit
Practical Class – 64 hrs/16 weeks & Evaluation 4 hrs/1 week 4
12/Unit
5
15/Unit
6
64 Hrs 100
Photo Design Lab

Unit:
1. Handling of brush mixing of pigments and application of pigment & brush.
2. Practicing freehand lettering scripts of various styles – Proportionate reduction &

enlargements.
3. Preparation of colour scheme.
4. Preparation of artwork digitally and selection of art materials related with
photography.
5. Preparation of visual design on particular advertising media, publicity using digital
platform.
6. Preparation of digital cover design: Scanning – Editing – Retouching –
Incorporation of text & graphic elements.
Development
Syllabus
of
Diploma in Printing Technology [DP]
Revised 2022
Name of the course: Paper & Ink Technology
 

Duration: 17 weeks (out of 17 weeks, 2 Maximum Marks: 100
Theory: 3 hrs./ week Class Test (Two class tests will be
conducted) : 20
Tutorial: NIL Quizzes/ Assignments/ Student Activity: 10
Practical: NIL Class Attendance: 10
Credit: 3 End semester examination: 60
Aim:
The most important of all consumables are paper and ink. Paper is the medium which is used
for a majority of printing processes, while ink is the colorant that provides meaning and color
to the printed surface. In the print production environment, these two materials are a source
of various problems. Understanding the fundamentals of paper and ink helps the aspiring
printing technologist to identify problems and obtain the solution for the same. Paper and Ink
are instrumental in determining the quality of the final printed product is driven. Hence,
selecting the appropriate paper & ink for printing based on identification of needs for the
specific print job is another important aspect that will be dealt in this course.
Course Outcome:
1 Determine the most suitable paper or board for a given print job based on the end use
and application
2 Apply specific protocol for paper or board or ink testing based on international or
national standard while performing test on these materials
3 Evaluate problems arising out of paper/board or ink during print production
4 Apply strategies to mitigate problems arising out of paper/board or ink during print
production
Pre-Requisites: Basic Printing
Course Contents:
UNIT CONTENT DETAILS HOURS/UNIT MARKS

Unit 1 Raw materials for paper and board making 10 15
Structure of cellulose, hemicellulose, lignin
De-barking process
Pulping techniques, mechanical, thermo-
mechanical, chemical
Bleaching, stock preparation, beating, refining,
Sizing, deying
Additives for pulping
Paper making machine: Head box, inlets,
Forming section, Press and dryer section, Wire
and Felt
Page 1 of 19
Surface treatment: External sizing, Coating,
Calendering, Finishing, Coating materials for
paper and board
De-inking techniques and environmental
impact
Unit 2 Properties of paper and board 12 15

Requirements of paper and board for various
printing processes
Standards in Paper and board testing
Equipment for paper testing
Structural properties of paper - Grain, Two-
sidedness, Smoothness, Dimensional stability
Paper grain direction and its importance in
printing, folding and binding
Physical properties of paper and board- Basis
weight, Paper caliper, Water, absorbency, Ink
receptivity, Surface smoothness, pH
Strength properties of paper and board-
Surface strength, Tensile strength, Bursting
strength
Optical properties of paper and board - Color,
Brightness, Whiteness, Opacity, Gloss,
Metamerism
Resistance properties of paper and board –
Pick resistance, Tear resistance, Compression
testing, Folding endurance, Resistance to
water, acid and alkali
Barrier properties of paper and board- Moisture
content, porosity, hygroexpansivity, water
vapour permeance, grease permeance
Problems in print production arising out of
paper and board
Strategies to mitigate the problems
Unit 3 Printing ink and its raw materials 10 15

Classification of printing ink based on
application and rheology
Raw materials of printing inks – pigments and
dyestuffs, oils, solvents, resins, plasticisers,
driers, waxes, surfactants, antioxidants and
other additives
Ink drying mechanisms
Formulation of inks for different applications
Characteristics of sheetfed and webfed offset
inks, gravure inks, flexo inks, screen inks
Inks for specific end-use application - paper,
plastics, packaging, tin printing and metal
decorating inks
Page 2 of 19
Inks for Non-Impact Printing Technologies-
electrophotography, inkjet, xerography, thermal
Speciality inks: Water based inks, Radiation
curable inks-IR, UV & EB–Raw materials,
equipment used for drying, Security inks–
Thermochromic and Photochromic
Speciality coatings: Coating types - Oil based,
water based, UV and EB coatings and nano
emulsions, Roller coatings
and Hybrid coatings - constituents, properties.
Resin manufacturing process
Ink manufacturing process
Equipment for ink manufacturing
Unit 4 Properties of ink and coating 13 15

Standards in ink and coating testing
Rheological behaviour of inks-plastic,
pseudoplastic, dilatant
and thixotropic substances, visco-elastic fluids
and viscoelasticity of printing
inks, flow of non-newtonian inks
Equipment for ink testing
Rheometric analysis of inks and coatings
Testing for ink rheology: Viscosity, tack, flow
Visual properties: Colour, gloss, optical
density, lightfastness
Printability testers for ink
Length, Fineness of grind, rub resistance, scuff
resistance, block test, COF test, adhesion test
Chemical analysis of resin and varnish: acid
value, iodine value, saponifcation value,
hydroxyl value
Problems in print production arising out of ink
and coating
Strategies to mitigate the problems
Standards and statutory obligations related to
safety related to ink/coating use
Environmental impact and concerns
References:
1. R.H. Leach, Printing Ink Manual, Kluwer Academic Publishers
2. P. Kipphan Handbook of Print Media Springer, 2002
3. GATF Staff Solving Offset Ink Problems GATF, 1998
4. N.R.Elred & T. Scarlet What the Printer should know about Ink GATF, 1995
5. Handbook of Paper and Board, Herbert Holik, Wiley‐VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA
Page 3 of 19
Name of the course: Graphic Reproduction
 

Duration: 17 weeks (out of 17 weeks, Maximum Marks: 100
2 weeks are to be allotted for class
tests)
conducted) : 20
10
Aim:
In order to fully understand the print production workflow, students should have concepts on
analog prepress techniques. Although most workflow today in the industry is digitized, yet it is
paramount that analog prepress be known to the students. The fact that most of the processes
in digital workflow has their basis in analog technology, like color separation, halftone screens,
masking, etc is a primary reason for this. One advantage of analog processes of graphic
reproduction is that, while learning students would require to do the necessary work manually
and not through software. This adds another advantage in learning this course, as they would
have developed some hands-on skill. Once these analog processes are known, then
understanding their digital counterpart will become much easier.
Course Outcome:
1 Determine the film transparency, halftone screen characteristics for making a
halftone transparency from a continuous tone original
2 Determine process camera settings and parameters for a given reproduction job
3 Determine the illuminant, materials and the methodology required for color
reproduction using analog method
4 Apply process control measures in prepress for color separation and correction
5 Analyze the densitometric data obtained from a film or substrate for correct
reproduction using densitometer
Course Contents:
Unit 1 Light Sensitive Emulsions and Film processing 8 10
Study of silver based photographic emulsions
Studies of non-silver based emulsion viz., Diazo,
Polymer
Film speed & sensitivity
Study of development, stop bath, fixation,
chemicals and their functions.
Study of manual and automatic film processing
techniques
Page 4 of 19
Study of Reproduction, Intensification & Chemical
Reversal Process.
Study of basic densitometry, characteristic curve,
gamma, & Densitometer.
Unit 2 Halftones 12 15
Types of original
Introduction and necessity of screen in
reproduction processes
Basic terminology: Contrast, Basic Density Range
Different type of halftone screens viz., Glass ruled
and vignette contact screen, screens for special
effects
Study of halftone screen theories
Halftone artefacts and their mathematical basis
Halftone negatives & Positives
Special techniques in halftone
Unit 3 Process Camera 8 10
Basic Terminology: v-ratio, Depth of field, COC,
Aperture, Hyper focal distance
Principles of reproduction camera
Overview of reproduction cameras
Layout of a darkroom
Camera operations
Image Reversal, Image Resizing, Lateral Reversal,
Lateral Correction
Contact Printer
Enlarger
Camera Exposure Systems
Calculation of screen distance: Visual and
Numerical methods
Unit 4 Light and Color 5 10
Nature of light, Electromagnetic spectrum,
illumination & types of illuminants
Ideal illuminant for reproduction work
Study of different colour synthesis viz., Additive
synthesis, Subtractive synthesis
Unit 5 Color Reproduction: Separation and correction 12 15
Basic principles of colour separation, filters & filter
factors, its absorption & transmission qualities
The black printer
Color Correction using Photographic masking
Calculation of % masking, Hue error, grayness
Additivity and Proportionality failure
Color Tone Reproduction
Gray Balance
Page 5 of 19
Color Separation techniques
Evaluation of quality of color separation
Black generation: UCR, GCR, UCA
Manual correction through dye retouching, staging
& dot etching
References:
1. Basics of Reprography / Tyrell, GATF.
2. Advance in Colour Reproduction, GATF.
3. Graphic Reproduction Photography / J W Burden.
Page 6 of 19
Name of the course: Relief & Recess Printing

tests)
conducted) : 20
10
Aim:
The aim of incorporating this particular course is to acquaint the students with the various
processes of Relief and Recess technique in the field of Print Production and Package
Printing. This course will enable our students to make judgement about the aspect of Relief
and recess printing, particularly the selection of a particular process to choose for a specific
print production.
Course Outcomes:
1. Classify between different types of relief and recess printing processes

2. Compare the advantages and disadvantages of relief and recess printing
processes
3. Identify the components of machines used in relief and recess printing
methods
4. Analyze a given print sample to identify the print process
5. Troubleshoot print problems in relief and recess print processes
Prerequisite: Basic engineering for Printing , Material Sciences for Printing
Course Content:

UNIT 1 Letterpress Printing: 8 10
 Basic Principles
 Process Applications
 Tools and Equipment required for
the process
 Operational features (Platen,
Flatbed, Rotary)
 Comparison of various types of
flatbed letterpress machines
 Construction of various types of
Letterpress Machines and their drive
systems (Feeder to Delivery unit)
 Make ready operations
 In-direct Relief process (Letterset)
and its applications
Page 7 of 19
UNIT 2 Flexography Printing: 12 15
 Variety of substrates & inks
 Pretreatment of substrate
 Various types of flexographic
machines and their structure
 Infeed section: Splicer unit, Web
path, Web tension control
 Printing unit (with or without doctor
blade)
 Construction of anilox roller, Anilox
Moire
 Compensator
 Drying unit
 Deliver section (Roll to roll)
 Web-viewer
 Post print Editing & slitting
 Potential for Further development
UNIT 3 Gravure Printing: 12 15
 Variety of substrates & inks
 Pretreatment of substrate
 Construction of a printing unit
 Infeed section: Splicer unit, Web
path, Web tension control
 Doctor blade: Types, construction,
angle
 Cell structure of Image cylinder
 Cylinder construction
 Offset Gravure
 Electrostatic Assisted Printing
 Compensator
 Drying unit
 Deliver section (Roll to roll)
 Web-viewer
 Post print Editing & slitting
 Potential for Further development
UNIT 4 Intaglio Printing: 3 5
 Difference between Gravure &
Intaglio in spite of the same basic
principle
 Application area
 Methods of wiping out of
superfluous ink
UNIT 5 Print Recognitions: 3 5
 Visual characteristics of a printed
sample
 Print recognition pattern of Letter
press process
 Print recognition pattern of
Flexography process
Page 8 of 19
 Print recognition pattern of Gravure
& Intaglio process
 Comparisons between flexography
and gravure
 Comparisons between Sheetfed &
Web fed machines
UNIT 6 Troubleshooting: 7 10
 Common problems and remedies in
Relief process
 Common problems and remedies in
Recess process
References:
1. FLEXOGRAPHY : Principles & Practices – Published by the Flexographic
Technical Association, Inc.
2. Flexography Primer – J. Page Crouch (GATF)
3. Flexographic Image Reproduction Specifications and Tolerances - FTA
4. Hand Book of Print media – Helmut Kipphan, Springer
5. Gravure: Process and Technology – Published by the Gravure Association
of America
6. Gravure Primer – Cheryl L. Kasunich (GATF)
7. Letterpress Printing: A Manual for Modern Fine Press Printers - Paul
Maravelas
8. Post Digital Letterpress Printing - Pedro Amado, Ana Catarina Silva, Vítor
Quelhas
Page 9 of 19
Name of the course: Electronic Composing
 

tests)
conducted) : 20
10
Aim:
As most print workflows are digitized today, hence composition, design and layout of all print
jos are done through software. This is the first step in creating any digital file meant for printing.
Aspiring printing technologist should know the usage of tools in such software systems and
utilize those to create digital content as per requirement. This course provides them with the
said knowledge and skill to help them create such content.
Course Outcome:
1 Select the most suitable font and typeface for a given composition
2 Identify different tools used for electronic composing software
3 Select appropriate tools to compose a digital page
4 Use page layout software to create a digital page for magazine, newspaper, book
Plan the entire workflow related to composition and digitization of manauscript (if
5 any) for a print job
Course Contents:

Unit 1 Functions of the composition department 8 10
Factors to be considered before composing
Typography
Font
Fundamental terminologies in typography
Typographical measurements
Size of type
Page width and depth
How to select typefaces for text composing
Style of the house
Page 10 of 19
Handling of Manuscript
Unit 2 Introduction to Desk top Publishing system 12 15

Components of a Desk top Publishing
system – Computers, Monitors, Mouse, and
Laser Printers
Application-Style, justification, Left
Alignment, Right Alignment, Centre setting,
Tabs, Pagination, Graphics rendering etc
Word Processing software
Page Layout software
Unit 3 Essential know-how for page make up 12 15

Page composition: Editing and correction
Fonts – How Computers handle Fonts,
Bitmapped & Outlined Fonts & its
management
Different parts of a book
OCR
Page Description Languages
Unit 4 Digital proofing methods 5 10

Inkjet proofing
Electrophotographic proofing
Thermal proofing
Progression of work in digital typesetting 8 10

Unit 5 method
Workflow
Planning for production
References:
1. Adobe Systems Inc, PostScript Language Program Design, Addison-Wesley

2. Barnett, Michael P., Computer Typesetting: Experiments and Prospects, MIT
Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
3. Bate, J. St. J. & Wilson-Davies K., Desktop Publishing, BSP Professional
Books
4. Edward Berg, N., The New Era of Electronic composition, GATF
5. Holmes, Alan, Electronic Composition, Emblem Books Ltd.
6. Sharma, M.C., Desktop Publishing on PC, BPB Publications, New Delhi.
7. Wilson-Davies, K. & Bate J.St.J. & Card M., Desktop Publishing, Publisher's
Guide Series, Blue Print, London.
Page 11 of 19
Name of the course: Paper & Ink Technology Laboratory
 

Duration: 17 weeks (out of 17 weeks, 2 Total Marks: 100
Theory & Tutorial: NIL Internal End Semester
Assessment: Assessment: 40
60
Assignment on
Continuous the day of Viva-
Practical: 3 hrs./week Evaluation: 50 voce & Practical
report
submission: 20
Credit: 1.5 Class Viva voce: 20
Attendance: 10
Aim:
Quality in print can be assured to a great extent with the accurate choice and analysis of
consumables like paper and ink. A print technologist should be able to analyze the properties
of the paper and ink to determine the suitability of such materials for specific print process.
Further, it is pertinent for the students to detect quality related problems relating to paper and
ink during print production and conduct RCA to find solution to those problems.
Course Outcome:
1 Determine the physical and optical properties of paper and board through testing
2 Determine the physical and optical properties of ink through testing
3 Determine the quality requirements for paper/board and ink for a given print job
4 Determine the causes for print failure owing to paper/board and ink
Prepare SOPs for safe handling of inks in print production in accordance to safety
5 and health regulatory compliances
Pre-Requisites: Material Science for Printing
Course Contents:
UNIT CONTENT DETAILS

Unit 1 Determination of grammage, paper caliper and density of paper
Determination of bursting strength of paper and paperboard
Determination of grain direction of paper
Determination of pH of paper
Determination of optical properties of paper: Color, Brightness, Whiteness, Opacity,
Gloss
Determination of water absorbancy of paper and board
Determination of folding endurance of paper and board
Page 12 of 19
Root Cause Analysis of print failure due to substrate problems
Unit 2 Determination of viscosity of paste and liquid ink

Determination of tack of paste ink
Determination of flow of paste ink
Determination of pick resistance of ink
Determination of scuff resistance of ink
Determination of rub resistance of ink
Determination of optical density & colorimetric value of ink on paper printed using
printability tester
Determination of transparency of ink
Determination of resistance of ink to various agents
Determination of pigment dispersion of ink
Root Cause Analysis of print failure due to ink problems
Safety issues pertaining to ink handling in industry
Study of MSDS of printing inks
Page 13 of 19
Name of the course: Graphic Reproduction Laboratory
 

60
Assignment on
report
submission: 20
Attendance: 10
Aim:
In order to prepare a halftone reproduction from a continuous tone original, the student must
be able to identify various operational parameters for a process camera and operate the same.
This course provides an in-depth knowledge and skill to the students using which they will be
able to reproduce halftone negatives and positives and perform necessary corrections and
impose them further to prepare a film that will then be used for plate or cylinder making.
Course Outcome:
1. Identify parts of a horizontal process repro camera
2. Operate a process repro camera to produce a halftone reproduction
3. Prepare a halftone negative and positive from a continuous tone
original
4. Retouch halftone negatives and positives for a given print job and
application
5. Prepare imposition scheme for a given print job and print technology
Course Contents:
Unit 1 Acquainting with working of different process camera & accessories.
Halftone Negative making with different screens and Positive making after
necessary corrections.
Combination line and halftone negative making.
Line-tone combined positive making by double printing method in the contact printer.
Unit 2 Understanding the basics of colour separation negative making

Fundamentals of process for preparing screened positives from colour separation
negative.
Page 14 of 19
Tone reproduction, contact photography and use of contact screen.
Introduction to flatbed scanner, image setter and auto film processor.
Unit: 3 Retouching of Halftone negative and positive.

Chart making and analysis of colour of the colour copy.
Manual colour correction methodology
Staging of monochrome half-tone negatives/positives.
Unit: 4 Dot etching of the black and white positives.

Basics of tone correction on half tone colour positives.
Demonstration of Black &White/Colour planning and Imposition.
Scanning & Colour correction
Page 15 of 19
Name of the course: Relief & Recess Printing Workshop
 

60
Assignment on
report
submission: 20
Attendance: 10
Aim:
To impart practical knowledge in Work Shop/Laboratory related with course of
study.
Course Outcome:
1. Interpret the Print Production Workflow.
2. Select of various tools for a specific job preparation.
3. Produce jobs as per specified dimensions with various relief & recess
processes.
4. Adopt safety practices (tools, jobs & personal) while working on various
machines.
Course Contents:
1. Shop talk & Familiarisation with various machines - Letterpress,
Flexography, Gravure. Identify, select, & use of various tools related with this
workshop.
2. Making charts and layouts of the machine department
3. Working on Automatic stop cylinder machine.

i.familiarisation with different units – setting of feeders
ii.setting of inking system with control measure
iii.examining, setting and changing of rollers
iv.ink flow adjustment
v.fixing the under lay Practice on Letterpress sheet fed machines
4. Air Compressor and accessories
5. Working on Single Colour Flexography Machine –

i.Placing the web on feeding section
ii.setting the web path
Page 16 of 19
iii.setting the inking system
iv.mounting the stereo on cylinder
v.Make ready
vi.operating the machine to print single colour job on various substrates.
6. Working on single colour Gravure Machine –

i.Placing the web on feeding section
ii.setting the web path
iii.setting the inking system
iv.setting the gravure cylinder
v.Make ready
vi.operating the machine to print single colour job on various substrates
7. Talk on Electrostatic Assist Printing
8. Safety Practices on the workshop – Do’s and Don’ts
Page 17 of 19
Name of the course: Electronic Composing Laboratory
 

60
Assignment on
report
submission: 20
Attendance: 10
Aim:
This course provides skill to the students to use various electronic composing software, using
which they will be able to input, edit and prepare a digital page layout for image carrier
production in the print workflow. This course will familiarize the students with various software
needed for electronic composing, its interface, various tools, etc, which will be needed for a
page layout and editing purpose.
Course Outcome:
1. Identify the tools in work interface for electronic composing software
2. Prepare a digital page layout for a given print job
3. Edit the content and layout of a digital document using composing software tools as per
print requirement
4. Manipulate fonts within a digital document for a given print job
5. Write simple Adobe PostScript programs for generating PDF pages with text, graphics and
images
Pre-Requisites: Introduction to IT systems, Basic Printing
Course Contents:

Unit 1 Basics of electronic composing environment
Software used for electronic composing
Acquaintance with different application software – CorelDRAW / Adobe
Photoshop/Adobe Illustrator/Adobe InDesign
Unit 2 Anatomy of fonts
Page 18 of 19
Classification of fonts
Generating digital type faces, font manipulation
Unit 3 Solid text/composition paragraph

Setting up a new page with orientation options (tall/wide)
Change of font, point size, style, double sided/facing pages
Tab setting, pagination, column setting
Acquiring image from other files photo CD/scanner — Printing
Changing the width of characters
Changing the tracking characters – Tab setting – Apply styles
Selecting paragraphs to format – Proving a background for reverse
Sending an object to the back – Bringing an object to the front
Bullets and numbering – Drop caps and other utilities – Running header and footer
Printing a publication – Print to copies / collate / reverse / proof / all (pages) / ranges /
Both / even / odd / size / orientation / tile / manual / auto / scale / reduce to fit.
Unit 4 Scientific and multilingual word processing.

Page composition utilities: macros, search and replace routines etc.
Text file format and file exchange.
Unit 5 Familiarizing with page description languages

Study of Adobe PostScript
Writing programs for creating objects, text, images, etc in PostScript and interpret
them to create PDF documents
Page 19 of 19
PROPOSED
3RD
SEMESTER
CURRICULAR
STRUCTURE AND
SYLLABI OF
FULL-TIME DIPLOMA
COURSE IN SURVEY
ENGINEERING
CURRICULAR STRUCTURE OF DIPLOMA INSURVEY ENGINEERING
WEST BENGALSTATE COUNCIL OFTECHNICAL&VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND SKILL DEVELOPMENT

BRANCH:SURVEY SEMESTER:THIRD
EXAMINATION SCHEME
SLNO CODE COURSE TITLE CREDIT CLASS/WK
INTERNAL
ESE PIA PEA TOTAL
L T P INT AS/QZ ATD
1 SEPC201 Surveying -I 3 3 - - 10 10 60 - - 100

20
2 SEPC203 Surveying -II 3 3 - - 20 10 10 60 - - 100

3 SEPC205 Building Construction Practices 2 2 - - 20 10 10 60 - - 100
4 SEPC207 Cadastral Survey and Land Laws 2 2 - - 20 10 10 60 - - 100
5 SEPC209 Mechanics of Material 2 2 - - 20 10 10 60 - - 100
6 SEPC211 Concrete Technology 3 3 - - 20 10 10 60 - - 100
7 SEPC213 Field Survey Practices -I 3 - - 6 - - - - 60 40 100
8 SI201 Internship-I 1 - - - - - - - 100 - 100
TOTAL 19 15 - 6 - - - - - - 800
STUDENT CONTACT HOURS PER WEEK:21 Hrs.Theories and Practical Period of 60 Minutes each.
L – Lecture,T–Tutorial,P –Practical,INT- Internal Assessment,AS/QZ– Assignment /Quiz,ATD- Attendance ,ESE – End Semester Exam, PIA-
Practical Internal Assessment, PEA-Practical External Assessment.
Name of the Course: Diploma in Survey Engineering
Course Title: Surveying-I Coursecode:SEPC201
Number of Credit:3 Semester: THIRD

Duration:15weeks MaximumMarks:100
Theory:-3hrs/week Continuous Internal Assessment 20Marks
Tutorial:-NIL Attendance 10 Marks
Practical: NIL Assignment/Presentation/Quiz 10 Marks
Total Contact Hours: 45Hours End Semester Examination 60Marks
Pre-Requisite: Students should have the knowledge of drawing and sketching.

Aim: Developing the survey skill required for survey engineering
Course Objective:
1 To understand types of surveying works required.
2To know the types of method and equipment to be used for different surveys.
3To know the use and operational details of various surveying equipment.
Course Content:
Content(Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Definition and object of surveying.
1.2 Principle of Surveying.
Unit:1 1.3 Classification of surveying. 2 5
1.4 Difference between Plane and Geodetic Surveying.
2.0 Chain Surveying

2.1 INSTRUMENTS USED IN CHAIN SURVEY: Metric Chain,
Tapes, Arrow, Ranging rod, Line ranger, Offset rod, Open
cross staff, Optical square.
2.2 Chain survey Station, Base line, Check line, Tie line,
Offset, Tie station.
2.3 Ranging: Direct and Indirect Ranging.
Unit:2 5 10
2.4 Methods of Chaining, obstacles in chaining.
2.5 ERRORS IN LENGTH: Instrumental error, personal error,
error due to natural cause, random error.
2.6 Principles of triangulation.
2.7 Types of offsets: Perpendicular and Oblique.
2.8 Conventional Signs, Recording of measurements in a field
book.
3.0 COMPASSSURVEYING
3.1Bearing, designation of bearing, converting whole circle
Unit:3 bearing to quadrant bearing& vice-versa. 10 15
3.2 Meridians, classification of bearing.
3.3 Azimuth, reduce bearing.
3.4 Fore bearing, back bearing.
3.5 Computation of internal angles from bearing & vice-versa.
3.6Magnetic declination, variation of declination, isogonic
lines, agonic lines.
3.7 Computationofanglesfrombearingsandbearingfromanglesa
ndrelatedproblems.
3.8 Local attraction, detection and elimination of local
attraction.
3.9 Prismatic Compass, surveyor’s compass.
3.10 Difference between prismatic compass and
surveyor’s compass
3.11 Traversing by compass, closed traverse, open traverse.
3.12 Numerical problems
4.0 PLANETABLE SURVEYING

4.1 Plane Table, its parts & accessories.
4.2 Setting up & orienting the table by back sighting & by
magnetic needle.
4.3 Various methods of plane table survey by: —
4.3.1 Radiation method,
4.3.2 Intersection method or triangulation method,
Unit:4
4.3.3 Traversing method, 8 10
4.3.4 Resection method,
4.4 Three point problems & their solution by tracing paper
method.
4.5 Advantages & disadvantages of plane table and sources
of errors in plane tabling.
4.6 Problems on above topics
5.0 LEVELLING
5.1 Concept of levelling, uses of levelling, Definition of
important terms used in levelling.
5.2 Datum elevation, vertical angle, mean sea level and
benchmark.
5.3 Levelling Instruments-Different types-parts and function of
dumpy level, tilting level and automatic level.
5.4 Levelling staff.
5.5 Sensitivity of spirit level-methods of determining sensitivity
5.6 Tests and adjustments of dumpy level
Unit:5 12 10
5.7 Details of differential levelling, profile levelling, cross-
sectioning & reciprocal levelling.
5.8 Methods of booking, calculation of reduced levels &
plotting of level sections
5.9 Recording and plotting of longitudinal section of an
alignment.
5.10 Sources of errors in levelling, precautions.
5.11 Numerical Problems
6.0 TACHEOMETRY
6.1 Introduction.
6.2 Advantage of Tachometric Survey.
6.3 Tachometer.
6.4 Basic systems of Tachometric Measurements.
6.5 Principle of Stadia Method.
Unit:6 6.6 Determination of Tachometric Constants. 8 10
6.7 External Focusing Telescopes with an Analytic Lens.
6.8 Internal Focusing Telescope.
6.9 DISTANCE AND ELEVATION FORMULA: Line of sight
horizontal — Line of sight inclined.
6.10 Use of Tachometry.
6.11 Sources of error, accuracy of measurement.
6.12 Numerical Problems
Total 45 60
Text Books:-
Sl. No. Titles of the Book Name of Authors Name of the Publisher
1 Surveying and Levelling N Nbasak Tata Mc Graw-Hill
2 Surveying and Levelling T.P.Kanetkar&S.V. PUNE VIDHYARTHI
(Part I) Kulkarni GRIHA Prakashan
3 Surveying and Levelling Dr.B.C.Punmiya Laxmi Publication
(Vol.I&II)
4 Textbookof Surveying S.K.Husain,M.S.Nagaraj S. Chand and company
5 SurveyingandLevelling S. K.Duggal TATAMCGRAW-HILL
6 PlaneSurveying Dr.A.M.Chandra NEWAGEINTERNATION
AL
7 Surveying( Vol.I) Dr.K.R.Arora STANDARD
BOOKHOUSE
8 Fundamentals ofSurveying S.K.Roy PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
Reference books:-Nil
Suggested List of Laboratory Experiments:-Nil
Suggested List of Assignments/Tutorial:- Nil
1. Select the type of survey required for given situation.
2. Compute area of open field using chain, tape and cross staff.
3. Conduct traversing in the field using chain , compass and Plane Table.
4. Use levelling instruments to determine reduced level for preparation of contour maps
5. Find distances and elevations using Tachometer
Course Title: SURVEYING-II Coursecode:SEPC203

Tutorial:-NIL Attendance 10Marks
Pre-Requisite: Students should have the knowledge of drawing and sketching.

Aim: Developing the survey skill required for survey engineering
Course Objective:
1. To understand types of surveying works required.
2. To know the types of method and equipment to be used for different surveys.
3. To know the use and operational details of various surveying equipment.
Course Content:
1.0 THEODOLITE SURVEY

1.1 Classification of Theodolite, description of Theodolite,
function of its different parts.
1.2 Temporary adjustments of the Theodolite.
1.3 Measurement of Horizontal Angles: Repetition method
&, Reiteration method
1.4 Measurement of vertical angles.
1.5 Calculation of bearings from angles.
1.6 Layout a horizontal angle.
1.7 Traversing with the Theodolite by bearing and included
angles.
1.8 Traverse connection with G.T.S. and open traverse.
Conversion of spherical to rectangular coordinates
and vice-versa.
Unit:1 1.9 Checks in closed traverse and open traverse. 15 15
1.10 Relation between precision of angle and linear
measurement.
1.11 Sources of error in Theodolite work.
1.12 Traverse computation
1.13 ADJUSTMENTOFCLOSEDTRAVERSE:
1.13.1 Distribution of angular errors;
1.13.2 Balancing the traverse by Bowditch’s Rule and
transit rule.
1.14 Computation of area of a closed traverse.
1.15 Computation of length and bearing from co-
ordinates.
1.16 Missing data problems
2.0 COMPUTATIONOFAREA&VOLUME
2.1 COMPUTATION OF AREA: General methods of
determining areas computed by sub-division into
triangles, area from: Off-set to base line – Off-sets at
regular intervals – Off-sets at irregularintervals—
Unit:2 Areabyplanimeter—
Areacomputedbymapmeasurement.
2.2 COMPUTATION OF VOLUME: Measurement from
cross-sections —Prismoidal formula — Trapezoidal 5 10
formula — Volume from spot levels— Volume from
contour plans.
3.0 CONTOURING
3.1 Basic concept, contour interval.
3.2 Characteristics of contour.
3.3 Methods of locating contours.
Unit:3 3.4 Interpolation & extrapolation of contour.
3.5 Contour gradient.
10 15
3.6 Use of contour maps.
3.7 Locating the proposed route for a road on a contour
map.
3.8 Establishing grade contours, stratum contour
4.0 CURVE
4.1 Definition of curve.
4.2 Classification of curve.
4.3 Elements of curve.
4.4 Degree of curve.
4.5 Relation between radian and degree.
4.6 Methods of curve ranging:-
4.6.1 Location of tangent points.
4.6.2 Setting out of curve by chain or tape.
4.6.3 Setting out of curve by ordinates or
offsets from long chord.
4.6.4 Setting out of curve by offsets from
tangent.
4.6.5 Setting out of curve by offsets from
chords produced.
4.6.6 Setting out of curve by deflection
angles(Rankine’smethod).
4.6.7 Setting out of curve by two theodolites
method.
Unit-4 4.7 Method of calculation when curve start and end
with sub chords.
4.8 Difficulties in ranging simple curve:-
4.8.1 When the complete curves cannot be 15 20
set from starting points.
4.8.2 When an obstacle intervenes.
4.8.3 When the point of intersection of
tangents is inaccessible.
4.8.4 When the first or second tangent point
is inaccessible.
4.8.5 When both tangent points are
inaccessible.
4.9 Elements of compound curve.
4.10 Problems on simple curve.
4.11Transitioncurve: - (i)Definition of transition
curve,(ii)Superelevation,(iii) Characteristic of
transition curves.
4.12 Elements of Cubic parabola.
4.13 Vertical curves
4.14Characteristicofverticalcurve.
4.15 Length of vertical curve.
4.16 Problem on vertical curve.
Total 45 60
Text Books:-
1 Surveying and Levelling N. N. Basak Tata Mc Graw-Hill
2 Surveying and Levelling T.P.Kanetkar & S. V. Kulkarni PUNE VIDHYARTHI
(Part I) GRIHA Prakashan
3 Surveying and Levelling Dr.B.C.Punmiya Laxmi Publication
(Vol.I &II)
4 Text book of Surveying S.K.Husain, M.S.Nagaraj S.Chand and company
5 Surveying and Levelling S. K.Duggal TATAMCGRAW-HILL
6 Plane Surveying Dr.A.M.Chandra NEWAGEINTERNATION
AL
7 Surveying( Vol.I) Dr.K.R.Arora STANDARD
BOOKHOUSE
8 Fundamentals of Surveying S.K.Roy PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.
2. Prepare plans using Theodolite surveys.
3. Prepare of contour maps.
4. Use digital planimeter to calculate the areas.
Course Title: Building Construction Coursecode:SEPC205

Practices
Tutorial:-NIL Attendance 10Marks
Pre-Requisite:
1. Student should know the basic properties of material being used in the construction of the
building.
2. Studentshouldbeabletothinkovertheconstructionproblemsandtheirremedies.
Aim: Developing the conceptual knowledge in building material, construction, problems and its
remedies.
Course Objective:
1. Identify various components of buildings and their functions.
2. Check line, level and plumb of various construction activities.
3. Identify&suggestrectificationthevariousdefectsincivilengineeringworks.
Course Content:
Content(Theor Hrs./Uni Marks
y) t
1.0
STONES
Unit:1 1.1 Formation of rock, Igneous, Sedimentary,
Metamorphic.
1.2 Classification of stones, different varieties of
stones available from different rocks.
1.3 Qualities of good building stone, Different
varieties of stones use and places where
available.
BRICK
1.4 Definition
1.5 Classification and size
1.6 Traditional and Modular, I.S. characteristics of 15 30
1st/2nd/3rdclassbricks
1.7 Use in different purpose.
LIME
1.8 Classification of lime, manufacturing of lime,
burning, air slaking, storage.
1.9 Characteristics of good lime.
CEMENT
1.10 Type of cement–Portland cement, Rapid
hardening cement & Slag cement.
TIMBER
1.11 Definition, characteristics of good timber.
1.12 Seasoning, artificial and natural seasoning.
1.13 Use for different purposes.
METALS
1.14 Ferrous and non – ferrous metals, principal,
iron ores in India, Places where available and
percentage of iron content in t.
1.15 Manufacture of pig iron by blast furnace.
1.16 Cast iron, wrought iron and steel, its properties
and uses in engineering works.
2.0
MORTAR
2.1 General principles and precaution in brick
masonry work–mortar used.
Unit:2
CONCRETE
2.2 Definition
2.3 Types & properties
2.4 Use
2.5 Preparation of concrete
2.6 Reinforced cement concrete-function
CONCEPTOFSOIL&FOUNDATION
2.7 Concept of soil, Definition of soil,
Classification of soil as per BIS classification
only,
2.8 Concept of foundation, object of foundation,
bearing capacity of soil, Determination of
width and depth of foundation.
2.9 Different types of foundation used at specific
locations (no detail of construction).
15 30
BRICKMASONRY
2.10 Definition
2.11 Bonding
2.12 Function
2.13 Types(only two types)
2.14 Odd and even layer
2.15 Planof1-brick&½brickthickinEnglishbond.
WALLFINISH
2.16 Plastering–types and function
2.17 Whitewashing– function and methods
2.18 Colour washing–function, types and methods
PAINTS
2.19 Paints, object of painting, ingredients of paints.
2.20 Characteristics of good paints
PLASTERING,POINTING&JOINING
2.21 Object of plastering, composition and
application.
2.22 Different types of pointing and joining.
DAMPPROOFCOURSE
2.23 Causes of dampness, its harmful effect.
2.24 Methods of damp proofing.
FLOORING
2.25 Definition, choice of floor construction.
2.26 Construction details of different flooring.
ROOF
2.27 Definition, choice of roof construction.
2.28 Construction details of different flat roofs
DOORS&WINDOWSSHUTTERS
2.29 Different types of door &window shutters,
2.30 Its construction details.
LINTEL&ARCHES
2.31 Lintels–advantages, classification of lintels.
2.32 Arches– object of providing it, parts of an arch,
classification of arches (no details of construction).
Total 30 60
Text Books:-
1 Building materials S. K. Duggal New Age International
2 Building Construction Dr.B.C.Punmiya Laxmi Publication
3 Building Construction Sushil Kumar Standard Publication
4 Construction Materials D.N.Ghose TATAMCGRAW-HILL
1. Identify components of building structures.
2. Propose suitable type of foundation for building structures.
3. Select suitable type of masonry for building structures.
4. Propose relevant means of communications for different types of buildings.
5 . Select relevant material for finishing works
Name of the Course : Diploma in SURVEY ENGINEERING
Course Title: Cadastral Survey and Land Coursecode:SEPC207

Laws
Pre-Requisite: Basic knowledge of Surveying.

Aim: To study, understand and apply the basic concepts of detailed map preparation and Land
related rules and regulations.
Course Objective:
1. Understand the detailed concept of Cadastral Survey
2. Understand detailed procedure of map preparation in field
3. Understand the concept of present Land Laws.
4. Understand the application of Land laws in the surveying field.
Course Content:
1.0 CADASTRAL SURVEYING :
1.1 Definition & Purpose of Cadastral Survey,
1.2 Unit of Cadastral Survey,
1.3 Use of Cadastral Survey Instruments: Plane
Table, Optical Square, Sight vane, Offset Scale
(Gunia), Diagonal Scale, Acre Comb & Compass,
Testing of these instruments. Underlying
Principles of Optical Squares, Acre-Comb, etc.
1.4 Orientation of Plane Table
1.5 Different methods of finding missing Traverse
Station. Polygon closing by finding Traverse Station,
1.6 Principle of distribution of errors
1.7 Arrangement of Quadrilaterals
1.8 Sikmi Lines, Selection of Sikmi Lines, Limit of
Unit:1 Offsets. 17 30
1.9 Plotting of fields, Plotting of village
1.10 Definition: Chanda, Goda, Dhai, Katan, Standard Line,
Thoka Line, Tri-junction Pillar, Alamat and Scale and
their classification,
1.11 Detailed Survey, Booking of Field Notes, Survey-in-
Situ,
1.12 Error-in-chaining,
1.13 Procedure of horizontal chaining and its application,
1.14 Obstruction of chaining (a) Chaining Free, Vision
obstruction, (b) chaining obstructed, but vision free, (c)
Chaining and vision both obstructed,
1.15 Procedure of Chain Triangulation and Prolongation,
1.16 Inspection of cadastral survey – Running of Partal
Line,
1.17 Boundary comparison, Plot Numbering, Bata and
Chhut Plot Numbers,
1.18 Inking of Map,
1.19 Area extraction with the help of Acre- Comb,
comparison of different Scales, conversion of area,
1.20 Khanapuri – Map Correction,
1.21 Bujharat - Map Correction,
1.22 Attestation - Map Correction,
1.23 Post Draft publication – Map Correction
1.24 Post Final publication – Map Correction,
1.25 Maintenance of Cadastral Survey Maps and other
records,
1.26 Definition of R.O.R., Parcha, Khatian, Share in Land,
J.L.Number, C.S. Map, R.S. map, L.R. map.
2.0 LAND LAWS:

2.1 Bengal Tenancy Act, 1886 :
Unit: 2 2.1.1 Sec – 3, Definition – Estate, Holding, Agricultural year,
Tenure and village,
2.2 West Bengal Land Reforms Act, 1955 :

2.2.1 Sec-2 (Definition) – Land, Personal Cultivation, Raiyat,
Bargadar, Encumbrance, Homestead,
2.2.2 Sec-4 – Salient Provisions.
2.2.3 Sec-14K(c) Family.
2.2.4 Sec-14K (f) Standard Hectare.
2.2.5 Sec-14M (1 &, 2)-Ceiling Area.
2.2.6 Sec-14(M) (5)-Ceiling for Trust and Endowment.
2.2.7 Sec-14P-Salient Provisions.
2.2.8 Sec-14Q (2) – Ceiling for Orchard.
2.2.9 Sec-14Q (3) – Ceiling for Charitable and Religious
Institutions.
2.2.10 Sec-14U – Restriction on transfer of land by a
raiyat.
2.2.11 Sec-14Y -Limitation on farther acquisition of land.
2.2.12 Sec-15A (i) Bargadar right heritable.
2.2.13 Sec-16 & 16(A) -Share of produce payable by
Bargadar.
2.2.14 Sec-17 -Termination of Cultivation by Bargadar. 13 30
2.2.15 Sec- 19B- Restoration of Land to Bargadar –
Salient Provisions.
2.2.16 Sec-22, Sec-23 & Sec-24 – Provisions as to
Revenue.
2.2.17 Sec-50- Maintenance of R-O-R.
2.2.18 Sec-51- Revision & Preparation of R-O-R.
2.3 West Bengal Estate Acquisition Act, 1953 :

2.3.1 A General Discussion on the Purpose of the Act.
2.3.2 Sec-2 (Definitions)- Agricultural Year,
Agriculture Land, Charitable Purpose, Date of
Vesting, Homestead, Incumbrance,
Intermediary, Religious Purpose, Rent.
2.3.3 Sec- 4, Sec- 5, Sec-5(A), Sec-6(1) (a) to (e) &
6(3)- Salient Provisions
2.4 The Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in

Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act,
2013 :
2.4.1 Objectives and important features of the new act. (Sec-1,
Sec- 11 to Sec- 38, Sec- 81).
2.5 The National Highways Act, 1956 :

2.5.1 Objectives and important features of the act.
2.6 Bengal Survey Act, 1875:
2.6.1 Section – 2, 5, 6, 3, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11.
2.7 The Transfer Of Property Act, 1882 &, The Indian

Easements Act, 1882:
2.7.1 LEASE, LICENSE OF LAND
Definition of Lease, licence, agreement, premium, rent, price.
Long term lease, Short term lease. Terms of agreement.
Easement.
Total 30 60
Text Books:-
Sl. No. Titles of the Book Name of Name of the
Authors Publisher
1 Surveying and Levelling N. N. Basak Tata McGraw-Hill
Publisher
2 Cadastral Survey A.C. Dutta
3 A Simple Guide to Land Survey — Rules, Arjun Kanungo Eastern Law House
Methods & Application publication
4 West Bengal Land & Land Reforms T N Shukla Kamal Law House
Manual
5 Land Laws S.S. Pal Moon Law agency
6 Jami Jarip Paddhati Subir Kumar Pal Kamal Law House
7 Jami Jarip Subir Kumar Pal Kamal Law House
8 Technical Rules and Instruction from Director of Land Records and Survey WB
9 West Bengal Gram Panchayat Administrative Rules , Department of Panchayats and
Rural Development , Govt. of West Bengal
1. Understand the basic concept and application of Cadastral Survey.
2. Understand the preparation of a Cadastral Survey Map.
3. Understand the importance and application of Land Laws in Surveying.
4. Know various important clauses of different law related to various field activities of Surveying.
Name of the Course : Diploma in SURVEY ENGINEERING
Course Title: Mechanics of Materials Coursecode:SEPC209

Pre-Requisite: Student should be perfect in basic concepts of engineering mechanics and

mathematical analysis.
Aim: To study, understand and apply the basic concepts of mechanics of structural elements.
Course Objective:
1. Calculate bending and shear stresses in the simple beam element.
2. Analyse the truss by using different methods.
3. Draw Shear force and bending moment diagrams.
4. Calculate axial load capacity of axial loaded column using different approaches.
5. Analyse the Elastic constants in uniaxial, biaxial and Tri axial stress condition.
Course Content:
Elastic Constants & Principal Stresses
Volumetric strain due to uni-axial force and change in
volume, Biaxial and tri-axial stresses and volumetric strain
& change in volume, Definition of bulk modulus, volumetric
strain, Relation between modulus of elasticity, modulus of
Unit:1 rigidity and bulk modulus, Definition of principal planes & 5 10
principal stresses, Principal planes & stress due to bi-axial
stress system & due to state of simple shear, (Analytical
method and by Mohr’s circle diagram) [simple numerical
problem]
Shear Force And Bending Moment

Shear force and bending moment diagrams for simply
Unit:2 supported beams, overhanging beams and cantilever 7 15
subjected to couples and uniformly varying load point of
contra flexure (simple numerical problem)
Unit:3 Stresses In Beams
Concept of pure bending, theory of simple bending,
assumptions in theory of bending, neutral axis, neutral
plane bending stresses and their nature, bending stress
distribution diagram, moment of resistance. Application of
8 15
theory of bending to symmetrical and unsymmetrical
sections. (rectangular, circular, T-section and I-
section)[simple numerical problems]
Shear stresses in beams
Shear stress equation(no deduction), meaning of terms in
equation, shear stress distribution for rectangular, hollow
rectangular, circular and hollow circular sections, T-section
and I-section[Stresses In Beams]
Relation between max. Shear stress and average shear
stress. [simple numerical problems],Introduction to concept
of torsion, its formula (no deduction)and signification of
notation used, some practical application [simple numerical
problems]
Analysis of Trusses
Definition frames, classification of frames, perfect,
imperfect, redundant and deficient frame, relation between
members and joints, assumption in analysis. Method of
joint, method of section and graphical method to find nature
of forces
Unit:4 6 12
Beams with one or both end fixed
Concept of fixity, effect of fixity, advantages and
disadvantages of fixed beam. 8.2 Principle of superposition
and its application in finding fixed end moments for beam
subjected to UDL over entire span, point load and moment
at any point, drawing SF and BM diagram
Columns
Unit: 5 Application of Rankin’s and Euler theory, designing solid 4 8
circular or hollow circular sections
Total 30 60
Text Books:-
1 Strength of Materials Ramamrutham Dhanpat Rai Publication
2 Elements of Strength of Timoshenko and Young East-west press
Materials
3 Strength of Materials S. S. Rattan McGraw Hill Education
4 Strength of Materials M. Chakraborty Katson Publication

5 A text book of Strength of R. S. Khurmi and N. Khurmi S.Chand
Materials
6 A text book of Strength of R. K. Rajput S. Chand Publishing
Materials
7 Strength of Materials S. S. Bhavikatti Vikash publishing house
8 Analysis of Structures- Vol- I Vazirani & Ratwani Khanna Publishers
Course outcomes:
1. Articulate practical applications of moment of inertia of symmetrical and unsymmetrical structural
sections.
2. Analyse structural behavior of materials under various loading conditions.
3. Interpret shear force and bending moment diagrams for various types of beams and loading conditions.
4. Determine the bending and shear stresses in beams under different loading conditions.
5. Analyse the column for various loading and end conditions.
Name of the Course : Diploma in Survey Engineering
Course Title: Concrete Technology Course code : SEPC211

Theory : - 3 hrs./week Continuous Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Pre-Requisite: Student should take survey of different types of materials used in building
construction.
Aim: Study of cement and concrete.
Course Objective :
1. Determine the properties of concrete ingredients i.e. cement, sand, coarse aggregate
by conducting different tests.
2. Use different types of cement as per their properties for different fields applications.
4. Supervise various concreting operations.
5. Carry out field and laboratory tests on concrete in plastic and hardened stage.
6. Use different types of admixtures to improve the properties of concrete for different field
applications.
7. Describe different types of concrete.
8. Infer the test results as per relevant I.S. Provisions.
Course Content :
Content (Theory) Hrs./Unit Marks
Cement:
1.1 Chemical composition, hydration of cement,
heat of hydration, cement compounds.
Unit:1 3 5
Types, Properties and Testing of cement:
2.1 Physical properties, specifications as per

relevant IS codes & field application of the following
types of cement:
(i) Ordinary Portland cement (OPC), (ii) Rapid
Hardening Portland cement(RHPC), (iii) Low Heat
Cement, (iv) Portland Pozzolana Cement(PPC), (v)
Blast furnace slag cement, (vi) Sulphate resisting
cement, (vii) White cement, (viii) Quick setting
Unit: 2 Cement, (ix) Hydrophobic Cement
7 10
2.2 Testing of cement: (i) Fineness test(ii) Standard
Consistency test (iii)Setting Time test(initial & final
setting times) (iv) Compressive Strength test (v)
Soundness test.
Different grades of OPC 33, 43 , 53 & their
specifications of physical properties as per relevant
I. S. codes. Adulteration of cement (field test),
storing of cement at site, effect of storage of cement
on properties of cement / concrete.
2.3 Field testing of cement
Properties of Aggregates and Testing:
3.1 Properties of fine aggregates:
Classification, Concept of size, shape, surface
texture, strength, specific gravity, bulk density ,
water absorption, surface moisture, soundness,
bulking impurities, alkali-aggregate reaction, source.
3.2 Determination of fineness modulus & grading
zone of sand by sieve analysis, determination of silt
content in sand & their specification as per IS 383.
3.3 Bulking of sand, phenomenon of bulking
3.4 Properties of coarse aggregates :
Classification, Concept of size, shape, surface
Unit: 3 7 10
texture, water absorption, soundness, specific
gravity &
bulk density
3.5 Determination of fineness modulus of coarse
aggregate by sieve analysis, grading of Coarse
Aggregates and its effect on concrete mix
proportion.
3.6 Determination of crushing value, impact value &
abrasion value of coarse aggregate, flakiness index
& elongation index of coarse aggregate and their
specification.
Water, Admixtures and Construction Chemicals
4.1 Qualities of water and its use
Unit: 4 3 5
4.2 General, Types of admixtures and its effect on
properties of concrete.
Properties of Concrete:
5.1 Introduction to concrete: Definition of concrete,
necessity of supervision for concreting operation,
different grades of concrete (ordinary concrete,
standard concrete & high strength concrete,
minimum grade of concrete for different exposure
conditions, minimum
grade of concrete for R.C.C., water retaining
structure & in sea water construction, durability of
concrete.
5.2 Water cement ratio
Definition of w/c ratio, Duff Abraham w/c law,
significance of w/c ratio
5.3 Properties of fresh concrete
Unit:5 9 10
Definition of workability, factors affecting workability
of concrete. Determination of workability of concrete
by slump cone test, compaction factor test, vee bee
consistometer & flow table tests. Range values of
workability requirement for different types of
concrete works, cohesiveness, segregation,
harshness, bleeding.
5.4 Properties of hardened concrete
Definition of compressive strength, durability,
impermeability, elastic properties of concrete,
modulus
of elasticity of concrete. Creep, factors affecting
creep, shrinkage, factors affecting shrinkage.
Quality Control of Concrete and Concrete Mix

Design:
Unit:6 6.1 Selection of ingredients of concrete.. 10 10
Different types of vibrators - needle vibrator, surface
vibrator, table vibrator, principle & application of
each type of vibrator.
6.2 Transportation, placing, compaction & finishing
of concrete:
Modes of transportation of concrete , precautions to
be taken during transportation and placing of
concrete in formwork compaction of concrete,
methods of compaction, care to be taken during
compaction, purpose of finishing, types of finishing
& methods of application ( surface treatment,
expose aggregate finish, applied finish, coloured
finish), requirement of good finish.
6.3 Curing of concrete:
Definition of curing, necessity of curing, different
methods of curing and their application (spraying
water, membrane curing, steam curing, curing by
infra-red radiations, curing by wet gunny bags,
ponding methods).
6.4Testing of concrete
Significance of testing, determination of
compressive strength of concrete cubes at different
ages,
interpretation & co-relation of test results
6.5 Non- destructive testing of concrete
Importance of NDT, methods of NDT - rebound
hammer test & ultrasonic pulse velocity test.
6.6 Waterproofing of concrete & joints in concrete
construction:
Importance & need of waterproofing, methods of
waterproofing & materials used for waterproofing,
types of joints, joining old & new concrete, methods
of joining, materials used for filling joints.
6.7 Repair materials and rehabilitation of concrete
structures.
6.8 Definition, Objectives of mix design, list of
different methods of mix design, procedure of mix
design as per IS 10262.
Concreting under special circumstances

7.1 Extreme weather concreting
Effect of cold weather on concrete, effect of hot
Unit:7 weather on concrete, precautions to be taken while 3 5
concreting in hot & cold weather condition.
7.2 Under water concreting
Properties of Special Concrete:

Properties, Advantages & Limitations of the
following types of Special concrete:-
i) Ready mix Concrete
Unit:8 ii) Steel-fibre reinforced Concrete 3 5
iii) Prestressed Concrete
iv) Precast Concrete
vi) Light –weight concrete.
Total 45 60
Text Books:-
1 Concrete Technology M S Shetty S Chand Publication
2 Concrete Technology M.L Gambhir Tata Mc Graw-Hill
Publisher
Suggested List of Laboratory Experiments: -Nil
Suggested List of Assignments/Tutorial: - Nil
1. Use different types of cement and aggregates in concrete
2. Prepare concrete of desired compressive strength.
3. Prepare concrete of required specification.
4. Maintain quality of concrete under different conditions.
5. Apply relevant admixtures for concreting.
Name of the Course :Diploma in Survey Engineering
Course Title: Field Survey Practice-I Course code: SEPC213

Number of Credit: 3 Semester: THIRD
Theory:-NIL Continuous Internal Assessment 60Marks
Tutorial:-NIL
Practical:6hrs/week
Total Contact Hours:90Hours End Semester Examination 40Marks
Pre-Requisite:
Perfection in drawing and sketching. Students should have basic knowledge of Surveying.
Aim: Developing the survey skill required for the areas related to Survey Field
Course Objective:
1. Identify and use different survey instruments.
2. Record and observe necessary observation with the survey instruments.
3. Compute necessary survey data from field observation for preparation of drawing etc.
4. Prepare report including drawing using survey data collected in the field.
Instructions:
1. Group size for survey practical work should be formed in such a way that each student from
a group can handle instruments independently to understand the functions of different
components of the instrument.
2. Drawing and plotting should be considered as part of practical work.
3. Term work shall consist of record of all practical and projects in field book and drawing of
Project work on full/half imperial size drawing sheets.
Content:
Sl. No. Assignments/Practical
1. CHAIN SURVEY
1.1 Unfolding and folding the chain
1.2 DirectRanging:RangingbyEye–RangingbyLineRanger–
ChainingonLevelGround
1.3 Indirect Ranging: Chaining on Sloping Ground
1.4 Laying of angle withchainandtape:30°,60°, 45°&90°
1.5 Obstacle in Chaining:
Unit: 1 (a) Chaining free but Vision obstructed
(b)Chaining obstructed but vision free
(c) Chaining and vision both obstructed
1.6 Cross Staff Survey
1.7 Surveying an area with Chain and Tape: Reconnaissance the area of survey
Preparation of Key Plan and Reference Sketch – Selection of Base Line,
Station
Points and Marking of Stations – Booking Field Notes – Plotting of Field Data
with conventional signs
2. COMPASS SURVEY
2.1 Traversing an area with prismatic compass (Clockwise and Anticlockwise
Unit: 2 Traverse).
2.2 Traversing in presence of local attraction.
2.3 Surveying an area with prismatic compass, noting the field book, calculate the
correct bearings, plotting the traverse by bearing and distance. Graphical
adjustment of closing error of the traverse.
3. PLANE TABLESURVEY
3.1 Setting up and Orientation of planetable with Trough Compass and Back Ray
Method
3.2 Plane Tabling by Radiation Method
3.3 Plane Tabling by Intersection Method
Unit: 3 3.4 Plane Tabling by Traversing Method
3.5 Plane Tabling by Resection Method
3.6 Fixing inaccessible objects in a planetable survey
3.7 Finding a missing traverse station with planetable and sight vane
3.8 Surveying a small area by planetable and determination of area by graphical
method
4. LEVELLING
4.1 Temporary Adjustment of Levels.
4.2 B.M. connection from G.T.S. B.M. or local B.M.
Unit: 4 4.3 Fly levelling, Check levelling and Profile Levelling with Auto Level and Dumpy
Level and Recording of level book.
4.4 Profile levelling, recording & plotting of longitudinal section in suitable scales
from level book data.
5. CADASTRAL SURVEY
Unit: 5 5.1 Preparation and Reading of a Cadastral Survey Map following the procedure
of Cadastral Survey (to be prepared only for learning purpose).
Course outcomes:
2. Compute area of open field using chain, tape and cross staff.
3. Conduct traversing in the field using chain and compass.
4. Use levelling instruments to determine reduced level to prepare contour maps.
Name of the Course :Diploma in Survey Engineering
Course Title: Internship-I Course code: SI201

Number of Credit: 1 Semester: THIRD
Theory:-NIL Continuous Internal Assessment 100
Tutorial:-NIL
Practical:
Total Contact Hours: End Semester Examination NIL
Pre-Requisite:
Students should have a good communication skill and a clear idea on his subject.
Aim: Developing the technical and professional skill required for industrial needs.
Course Objective:
1. Manifest the potentiality of good communication and professional skill.
2. Relate and understand the connection between academic and industrial working field.
3. Understand the latest research and development in today’s industrial world.
4. Develop the power to represent own observation through arrangement of report &,
seminar using the data collected and recorded from the training.
Instructions:
1. Students are required to be involved in, Inter/ Intra Institutional activities viz. Training and
simulation program with different institutes like Workshop of ITI, other polytechnics and
other Technical Institutions.
2. Students are required to be involved in, Soft skill training organized by Training and
Placement Cell of the respective institutions.
3. Students are required to be involved in, Contribution at innovation/ entrepreneurship cell of
the institute.
4. Students are required to be involved in, Participation in workshops/ competitions etc.
5. Students are required to be involved in, Learning at Departmental Lab/ Institutional
workshop.
Content:
Sl. No. Assignments/Practical

After completion of each internship, the student should prepare a comprehensive
report to indicate what he/ she has observed and learnt in the training period. The
student may contact Industrial Supervisor/ Faculty Mentor/ TPO for assigning
Unit: 1 topics and problems and should prepare the final report on the assigned topics.
The training report should be signed by the Industrial Supervisor/ Internship
Faculty Mentor, TPO and HOD.
After completion of each internship, the student should prepare for seminars based
on his/ her training report which is to be represented before an internal committee
Unit: 2
constituted by the concerned department of the institute.
Course outcomes:
1. Develop good communication and professional skill.
2. Understand the practical use of theoretical knowledge in industrial fields.
3. Learn how to cope with the demands in modern industry.
4. Learn how to record, take notes and represent own observations before others to understand them.

Syllabus - 3rd Semester - 31-01-2022

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Syllabus - 3rd Semester - 31-01-2022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

West Bengal State Council of Technical &

Vocational Education and Skill

Diploma in Agricultural Engineering [AGR]

Part-II (3rd Semester)

Examination Pattern Full Marks for

Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: BASIC SOIL SCIENCE

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

SL. NO. TOPIC Contact Maximum

Content: Theory (Basic Soil Science) 3 hrs/wk

Sl NO Name of Book Writer’s Name Publisher’s Name

Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: SURVEYING AND LEVELLING

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

SL. NO. TOPIC Contact Maximum

Content: Theory (Surveying And Levelling) 3 hrs/wk

Sl NO Name of Book Writer’s Name Publisher’s Name

2 Surveying Vol.I B.C.Punmia Laxmi Publications, Delhi-6

3 A text book of surveying and R.agor; Khanna Khanna Publishers, Delhi-6

3 PRINCIPLES OF PROCESS ENGINEERING

Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: PRINCIPLES OF PROCESS ENGINEERING

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

SL. NO. TOPIC Contact Maximum

Content: Theory (Principles Of Process Engineering) 3 hrs/wk

Sl NO Name of Book Writer’s Name Publisher’s Name

3 Fundamentals of Food Romeo T. Toledo ----

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

SL. NO. TOPIC Contact Maximum

Content: Theory (Thermodynamics & Heat Transfer Process) 3 hrs/wk

Importance of conversion of heat energy into mechanical energy and electrical

Definition and understanding of terms: Energy, work, power, law of

Name of Book Writer’s Name Publisher’s Name

2 A text book of Engineering R. S. Khurmi S. Chand & Co. Ltd

Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

SL. NO. TOPIC Contact Maximum

Content: Theory (Environmental Engineering) 3 hrs/wk

Sl NO Name of Book Writer’s Name Publisher’s Name

2 Environment and Human L.N. Verma Himangshu publication

Name of course: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering Subject: HYDRAULICS

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

SL. NO. TOPIC Contact Maximum

Content: Theory (Environmental Engineering) 3 hrs/wk

6 Hydraulics Dr.P.N.Modi &S.M.Seth

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

Content: Practical (Basic Soil Science Lab.) 3 hrs/wk

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

Content: Practical (Surveying & Levelling Lab.) 3 hrs/wk

Content: Practical (Agricultural Process Engineering Lab.) 3 hrs/wk

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme

Content: Practical (Practical Of Horticultural Crops Lab.) 3 hrs/wk

1. Identification of seeds and plants of fruits, vegetables, flowers and spices.

SECOND YEAR CURRICULUM STRUCTURE

West Bengal State Council of Technical &Vocational Education and Skill

Curriculum for full time Diploma in Architecture

(With effect from 2022)

Second Year Curriculum Structure (3rd Semester Architecture,(w.e.f.2020)WBSCT&VE and SD

A. For Theory Courses:

Second Year Curriculum Structure (3rd Semester Architecture,(w.e.f.2022)WBSCT&VE and SD

Internal assessment End Semester Exam

(b) For Sessional Courses:-

Marks Distribution: Full Marks =100

Internal assessment End Semester Exam

Allotment of attendance marks as follow:

Class Attendance (in %) Marks to be awarded for class attendance